International Codes V8i PDF

STAAD.
Pro
V8i (SELECTseries 5)
International Design Codes Manual

Last Updated: Tuesday, February 04, 2014
Copyright Information
Trademark Notice
Bentley, the "B" Bentley logo, STAAD.Pro are registered or nonregistered trademarks of Bentley
Sytems, Incorporated or Bentley Software, Inc. All other marks are the property of their respective
owners.
Copyright Notice
© 2014, Bentley Systems, Incorporated. All Rights Reserved.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may only be used pursuant to applicable
software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Bentley Systems,
Incorporated and/or third parties which is protected by copyright and trade secret law and may
not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization.
Acknowledgments
Windows, Vista, SQL Server, MSDE, .NET, DirectX are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Acrobat logo are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.
Restricted Rights Legends

If this software is acquired for or on behalf of the United States of America, its agencies and/or
instrumentalities ("U.S. Government"), it is provided with restricted rights. This software and
accompanying documentation are "commercial computer software" and "commercial computer
software documentation," respectively, pursuant to 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 227.7202, and "restricted
computer software" pursuant to 48 C.F.R. 52.227-19(a), as applicable. Use, modification,
reproduction, release, performance, display or disclosure of this software and accompanying
documentation by the U.S. Government are subject to restrictions as set forth in this Agreement
and pursuant to 48 C.F.R. 12.212, 52.227-19, 227.7202, and 1852.227-86, as applicable.
Contractor/Manufacturer is Bentley Systems, Incorporated, 685 Stockton Drive, Exton, PA 19341-
0678.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the Copyright Laws of the United States and International
treaties.
End User License Agreements

To view the End User License Agreement for this product, review: eula_en.pdf.
International Design Codes Manual — i

Table of Contents
About STAAD.Pro 2
About the STAAD.Pro Documentation 3
Getting Started and Tutorials 3
Examples Manual 3
Graphical Environment 3
Technical Reference Manual 3
International Design Codes 3
Batch Design versus Design Modes 5

Batch Design 5
Design Modes 5
1 Australian Codes 7
1A. Australian Codes - Concrete Design per AS 3600 - 2001 9
1A.1 Section Types for Concrete Design 9
1A.2 Member Dimensions 9
1A.3 Design Parameters 9
1A.4 Slenderness Effects and Analysis Consideration 12
1A.5 Beam Design 13
1A.6 Column Design 14
1A.7 Slab or Wall Design 14
1B. Australian Codes - Steel Design per AS 4100 - 1998 17
1B.1 General 17
1B.2 Analysis Methodology 19
1B.3 Member Property Specifications 20
1B.4 Built-in Steel Section Library 20
1B.5 Section Classification 23
1B.6 Material Properties 24
1B.7 Member Resistances 24
1B.8 Design Parameters 27
International Design Codes Manual — iii

1B.9 Code Checking 34
1B.10 Member Selection 35
1B.11 Tabulated Results of Steel Design 36
1B.12 Physical Member Design 36
2 British Codes 45
2A. British Codes - Concrete Design per BS8110 47
2A.2 Slenderness Effects and Analysis Considerations 50
2A.4 Beam Design 50
2A.6 Slab Design 53
2A.7 Shear Wall Design 54
2B. British Codes - Steel Design per BS5950:2000 63
2B.1 General 63
2B.4 Built-In Steel Section Library 64
2B.5 Member Capacities 67
2B.7 Design Operations 81
2B.11 Plate Girders 84
2B.12 Composite Sections 85
2B.13 Design of Tapered Beams 85
2C. British Codes - Design per BS5400 89
2C.1 General Comments 89
2C.2 Shape Limitations 89
iv — STAAD.Pro
2C.3 Section Class 89
2C.4 Moment Capacity 89
2C.5 Shear Capacity 90
2C.6 Design Parameters 90
2C.7 Composite Sections 92
2D. British Codes - Design per BS8007 93
2D.1 Design Process 93
2D.2 Design Parameters 94
2D.3 Structural Model 95
2D.4 Wood & Armer Moments 95
2E. British Codes - Design per British Cold Formed Steel Code 97
2E.1 Cross-Sectional Properties 97
2E.2 Design Procedure 97
2E.3 Design Equations 98
2E.4 Design Parameters 102
2E.5 Verification Problem 107
3 Canadian Codes 113

3A. Canadian Codes - Concrete Design per CSA Standard A23.3-94 115
3A.5 Beam Design 118
3A.7 Slab/Wall Design 120
3B. Canadian Codes - Steel Design per CSA Standard CAN/CSA-S16-01 121
3B.1 General Comments 121
International Design Codes Manual — v

3B.11 Verification Problems 138
3C. Canadian Codes - Design Per Canadian Cold Formed Steel Code S136-94 155
3C.1 Cross-Sectional Properties 155
3C.2 Design Procedure 155
3D. Canadian Codes - Wood Design Per CSA Standard CAN/CSA-086-01 163
3D.1 General Comments 163
3D.2 Analysis Methodology 163
3D.3 Member Property Specifications 163
3D.4 Built-in Timber Section Library 164
3D.5 Member Resistance 165
3D.7 Code Checking 170
3D.8 Member Selection 171
3D.9 Tabulated Results of Timber Design 171
3D.10 Verification Problems 172
3D. Canadian Codes - Steel Design per CSA Standard CAN/CSA-S16-09 179
3D.12 Analysis Methodology 180
3D.13 Member Property Specifications 180
3D.14 Built-in Steel Section Library 180
3D.15 Section Classification 181
3D.16 Member Resistances 181
vi — STAAD.Pro
4 Cypriot Codes 195
4A. Cypriot Codes - Concrete Design in Cyprus 197
5 Danish Codes 203

5A. Danish Codes - Steel Design per DS412 205
6 Dutch Codes 209

6A. Dutch Codes - Steel Design per NEN 6770 211
7 European Codes 215

7A. European Codes - Concrete Design Per Eurocode EC2 217
7A.1 Design Operations 217
7A.2 Eurocode 2 (EC2) 217
7A.3 National Application Documents 217
7A.4 Material Properties and Load Factors 218
7A.5 Columns 218
7A.6 Beams 218
7A.7 Slabs 219
7B. European Codes - Steel Design to Eurocode 3 [DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992] 223
7B.1 General Description 223
7B.3 Material Properties and Load Factors 225
7B.5 Member Design 225
7C. European Codes - Steel Design to Eurocode 3 [EN 1993-1-1:2005] 239
International Design Codes Manual — vii

7C.1 General Description 239
7C.2 Analysis Methodology 241
7C.3 Material Properties and Load Factors 241
7C.4 Section Classification 241
7C.5 Member Design 242
7C.7 Code Checking 278
7C.8 Member Selection 279
7C.9 Tabulated Results of Steel Design 279
7D. European Codes - National Annexes to Eurocode 3 [EN 1993-1-1:2005] 283
7D.1 General Format 283
7D.2 Specifying the design engine to use a national annex 284
7D.1 Dutch National Annex to EC3 286
7D.1 Norwegian National Annex to EC3 298
7D.1 UK National Annex to EC3 299
7D.2 French National Annex to EC3 309
7D.3 Finnish National Annex to EC3 317
7D.4 Polish National Annex to EC3 323
7D.5 Singaporean National Annex to EC3 331
7D.6 Belgian National Annex to EC3 339
7D.7 Malaysian National Annex to EC3 346
7D.8 German National Annex to EC3 353
7D.9 Swedish National Annex to EC3 358
7E. Timber Design Per EC 5: Part 1-1 363
7E.1 General Comments 363
7E.2 Analysis Methodology 365
7E.4 Verification Problems 373
8 Finnish Codes 381

8A. Finnish Codes - Concrete Design per B4 383
viii — STAAD.Pro
8A. Finnish Codes - Steel Design per B7 387
9 French Codes 391

9A. French Codes - Concrete Design per B.A.E.L 393
9B. French Codes - Steel Design per the French Code 399
9B.2 Basis of Methodology 399
9B.4 Combined Axial Force and Bending 400
9B.6 Code Checking and Member Selection 402
9B.8 Built-in French Steel Section Library 404
10 German Codes 409

10A. German Codes - Concrete Design Per DIN 1045 411
10A.6 Slab Design 413
10B. German Codes - Steel Design Per the DIN Code 417
International Design Codes Manual — ix

10B.1 General 417
10B.2 AnalysisMethodology 417
10B.4 Built-in German Steel Section Library 418
10B.6 Combined Loading 421
11 Indian Codes 427

11A. Indian Codes - Concrete Design per IS 456 429
11A.7 Bar Combination 439
11A.8 Wall Design in accordance with IS 456-2000 440
11B. Indian Codes - Concrete Design per IS 13920 449
11B.1 Design Operations 449
11B.2 Section Types for Concrete Design 449
11B.4 Beam Design 459
11B.5 Column Design 462
11B.6 Bar Combination 463
11B.7 Verification Example 464
11C. Indian Codes - Steel Design per IS 800 - 1984 469
11C.1 Design Operations 469
11C.2 General Comments 469
x — STAAD.Pro
11C.3 Allowable Stresses 470
11C.5 Stability Requirements 476
11C.6 Truss Members 476
11C.7 Deflection Check 476
11C.10 Member Selection By Optimization 477
11C.11 Tabulated Results of Steel Design 477
11C.12 Indian Steel Table 479
11C.13 Column With Lacings And Battens 483
11D. Indian Codes - Steel Design per IS 802 487
11D.2 Allowable Stresses 487
11D.3 Stability Requirements 488
11D.4 Minimum Thickness Requirement 490
11D.5 Code Checking 490
11D.6 Member Selection 491
11D.7 Member Selection by Optimization 491
11D.8 Tabulated Results of Steel Design 491
11D.10 Calculation of Net Section Factor 495
11D.11 Example Problem No. 28 496
11E. Indian Codes - Design per Indian Cold Formed Steel Code 501
11E.1 Cross-Sectional Properties 501
11E.2 Design Procedure 501
11E.3 Code Checking and Member Selection 503
11F. Indian Codes - Steel Design per IS 800 - 2007 509
11F.1 General Comments 509
International Design Codes Manual — xi

11F.2 Design Process 509
11F.3 Member Property Specification 519
11F.4 Design Parameters 520
11F.5 Code Checking and Member Selection 523
11F.6 Verification Example 524
12 Japanese Codes 533

12A. Japanese Codes - Concrete Design Per 1991 AIJ 535
12B. Japanese Codes - Steel Design Per 2005 AIJ 543
12B.1 General 543
12B.4 Von Mises Stresses Check 551
12C. Japanese Codes - Steel Design Per 2002 AIJ 557
12C.1 General 557
12C.2 Analysis Methodology 557
12C.3 Member Property Specifications 557
12C.4 Built-in Japanese Steel Section Library 558
12C.5 Member Capacities 562
12C.6 Combined Loading 567
xii — STAAD.Pro
12C.10 Von Mises Stresses Check 572
13 Mexican Codes 575

13A. Mexican Codes - Concrete Design Per MEX NTC 1987 577
13A.7 Column Interaction 585
13A.8 Column Design Output 586
13A.9 Slab Design 587
13B. Mexican Codes - Steel Design Per NTC 1987 589
13B.1 General 589
13B.2 Limit States Design Fundamentals 589
13B.3 Member End Forces and Moments 590
13B.5 Member in Axial Tension 590
13B.6 Axial Compression 591
13B.7 Flexural Design Strength 591
13B.8 Design for Shear 592
13B.9 Combined Compression Axial Force and Bending 592
13B.10 Combined Tension Axial Force and Bending 593
14 Norwegian Codes 599

14A. Norwegian Codes - Steel Design per NS 3472 / NPD 601
14A.1 - General Notes 601
14A.2 - Basis for Code Checking 602
International Design Codes Manual — xiii

14A.4 Stability Check According to NS 3472 609
14A.5 - Stability Check According to NPD 617
14A.6 Yield Check 620
14A.7 Tubular Joint Check, NPD 3.5 636
14A.8 - Tabulated Results 640
14B. Norwegian Codes - Steel Design per NORSOK N-004 655
Norwegian Codes - Steel Design per NORSOK N-004 666
14B.5 Tubular Joint Checking 670
14B.6 Tubular Joint Resistance 672
14B.7 External Geometry File 674
14B.8 Tabulated Results 674
14C. Norwegian Codes - Concrete Design per NS 3473 677
15 Russian Codes 681

15A. Russian Codes - Concrete Design Per SNiP 2.03.01-84* 683
15A.1 General 683
15A.2 Design Parameters and Input Data 684
15A.3 Beams 698
15A.4 Columns 703
15A.5 Two DimensionalElement (slabs, walls, shells) 706
15B. Russian Codes - Steel Design Per SNiP 2.23-81* (Edition 1999) 709
15B.1 General 709
15B.2 Built-in Russian Steel Section Library 709
xiv — STAAD.Pro
15B.5 Member Selection and Code Check 720
16 Singaporian Codes 725

16A. Singaporean Codes - Concrete Design per CP65 727
17 South African Codes 733

17A. South African Codes - Concrete Design per SABS-0100-1 735
17B. South African Codes - Steel Design Per SAB Standard SAB0162-1:1993 741
17B.1 General 741
17B.12 Verification Problem No. 2 754
17B.13 Verification Problem No. 3 756
18 Spanish Codes 759

18A. Spanish Codes - Steel Design per NBE-MV103-1972 761
18A. Spanish Codes - Concrete Design per EHE 763
19 Swedish Codes 767
International Design Codes Manual — xv

19A. Swedish Codes - Steel Design per BSK 99 769
19B. Swedish Codes - Concrete Design per BBK 94 771
20 American Aluminum Code 777

20A.1 Member Properties 777
20A.2 Double channel front-to-front 778
20A.3 Design Procedure 778
20A.5 Code Checking 786
20A.6 Member Selection 786
21 American Transmission Tower Code 787

21A. American Transmission Tower Code - Steel Design per ASCE 10-97 789
21A.1 General Comments 789
21A.2 Allowable Stresses per ASCE 10-97 789
21A.3 Critical Conditions used as criteria to determine Pass/Fail status 790
21A.5 Code Checking and Member Selection 794
21B. American Transmission Tower Code - Steel Design per ASCE Manuals and
Reports 795
21B.2 Allowable Stresses per ASCE (Pub. 52) 795
22 Steel Design per American Petroleum Institute Code 801

22A.2 Allowables per API Code 802
22A.4 Code Checking 809
22A.5 Member Selection 810
xvi — STAAD.Pro
22A.6 Chord Selection and Qf Parameter 810
22A.7 Tabulated Results of Steel Design 811
22A.8 Joint Design 813
23 ANSI/AISC N690 Design Codes 817

23A. ANSI/AISC N690-1994 Code 819
23A.1 General Comments 819
23A.3 Examples 826
23B. ANSI/AISC N690-1984 Code 835
23B.2 Design Process 835
23B.3 Member Property Specification 839
23B.6 Examples 842
24 American Society of Mechanical Engineers – Nuclear Facility (ASME

NF) Codes 851
24A. ASME NF 3000 - 1974 & 1977 Codes 853
24A.1 Design Process 853
24A.2 Member Property Specification 857
24A.4 Code Checking and Member Selection 861
24A.5 Example 861
24B. ASME NF 3000 - 1989 Code 863
24B.1 Design Process 863
24B.2 Member Property Specification 867
24B.5 Example 871
24C. ASME NF 3000 - 1998 Code 873
International Design Codes Manual — xvii

24C.1 Design Process 873
24C.2 Member Property Specification 877
24C.4 Code Checking and Member Selection 882
24C.5 Example 882
24D. ASME NF 3000 - 2001 & 2004 Codes 885
24D.1 Design Process 885
24D.2 Member Property Specification 889
24D.4 Code Checking and Member Selection 893
24D.5 Example of 2004 Code 893
24E.1 Service Levels 897
24E.2 Stress Level Factors 897
Technical Support 899
xviii — STAAD.Pro
This documentation has been prepared to provide information pertaining to the various
international codes supported by STAAD. These codes are provided as additional codes by Bentley
Sytems, Incorporated. In other words, they do not come with the standard license package. Hence,
information on only some of the codes presented in this document may be actually pertinent to
the license package available to you.
This document is to be used in conjunction with the STAAD Technical Reference Manual and the
STAAD Application Examples Manual. Effort has been made to provide some basic information
about the analysis considerations and the logic used in the design approach. A brief outline of the
factors affecting the design along with references to the corresponding clauses in the codes is also
provided. Examples are provided at the appropriate places to facilitate ease of understanding of the
usage of the commands and design parameters. You are urged to refer to the Examples Manual for
solved problems that use the commands and features of STAAD. Since the STAAD output contains
references to the clauses in the code that govern the design, we recommend that you consult the
documentation of the code of that country for additional details on the design criteria.
International Design Codes Manual — 1

About STAAD.Pro
STAAD.Pro is a general purpose structural analysis and design program with applications primarily
in the building industry - commercial buildings, bridges and highway structures, industrial
structures, chemical plant structures, dams, retaining walls, turbine foundations, culverts and other
embedded structures, etc. The program hence consists of the following facilities to enable this task.
1. Graphical model generation utilities as well as text editor based commands for creating the
mathematical model. Beam and column members are represented using lines. Walls, slabs
and panel type entities are represented using triangular and quadrilateral finite elements.
Solid blocks are represented using brick elements. These utilities allow the user to create the
geometry, assign properties, orient cross sections as desired, assign materials like steel,
concrete, timber, aluminum, specify supports, apply loads explicitly as well as have the
program generate loads, design parameters etc.
2. Analysis engines for performing linear elastic and pdelta analysis, finite element analysis,
frequency extraction, and dynamic response (spectrum, time history, steady state, etc.).
3. Design engines for code checking and optimization of steel, aluminum and timber
members. Reinforcement calculations for concrete beams, columns, slabs and shear walls.
Design of shear and moment connections for steel members.
4. Result viewing, result verification and report generation tools for examining displacement
diagrams, bending moment and shear force diagrams, beam, plate and solid stress contours,
etc.
5. Peripheral tools for activities like import and export of data from and to other widely
accepted formats, links with other popular softwares for niche areas like reinforced and
prestressed concrete slab design, footing design, steel connection design, etc.
6. A library of exposed functions called OpenSTAAD which allows users to access STAAD.Pro’s
internal functions and routines as well as its graphical commands to tap into STAAD’s
database and link input and output data to third-party software written using languages like
C, C++, VB, VBA, FORTRAN, Java, Delphi, etc. Thus, OpenSTAAD allows users to link in-
house or third-party applications with STAAD.Pro.

About the STAAD.Pro
Documentation
The documentation for STAAD.Pro consists of a set of manuals as described below. These manuals
are normally provided only in the electronic format.
All the manuals can be accessed from the Help facilities of STAAD.Pro. If you want to obtain a
printed copy of the books, visit the docs.bentley.com site to check availability and order. Bentley
also supplies the manuals in the PDF format at no cost for those who want to print them on their
own. See the back cover of this book for addresses and phone numbers.
Getting Started and Tutorials

This manual contains information on the contents of the STAAD.Pro package, computer system
requirements, installation process, copy protection issues and a description on how to run the
programs in the package. Tutorials that provide detailed and step-by-step explanation on using the
programs are also provided.
Examples Manual
This book offers examples of various problems that can be solved using the STAAD engine. The
examples represent various structural analyses and design problems commonly encountered by
structural engineers.
Graphical Environment
This document contains a detailed description of the Graphical User Interface (GUI) of STAAD.Pro.
The topics covered include model generation, structural analysis and design, result verification, and
report generation.
Technical Reference Manual

This manual deals with the theory behind the engineering calculations made by the STAAD
engine. It also includes an explanation of the commands available in the STAAD command file.
International Design Codes

This document contains information on the concrete, steel, aluminum, and timber design codes
that are supported in the batch design routines. Note that most steel and concrete batch design
routines for the US design codes can be found in the Technical Reference Manual. Details of the

About the STAAD.Pro Documentation
steel design codes supported in the post processing Steel Design Mode can be found in the User
Interface manual. Details of the beam, column and slab concrete design codes supported in the
Concrete Design Mode can be found in the RC Designer manual.
The documentation for the STAAD.Pro Extension component(s) is available separately.
4 — STAAD.ProV8i (SELECTseries 5)
Batch Design versus Design Modes
STAAD.Pro has two means by which structural members can be designed.
Batch Design
Using this method, code checks and/or member selection is performed directly by the analysis and
design engine when an analysis is performed.
The contents of this manual, along with those in the Technical Reference manual, are all used for
batch design.
Design Modes
Code checks and member selection is performed in a post-processing module for either Steel
Design or Concrete Design. These modes are available in the Graphical User Interface.
Refer to the Steel Design mode and Concrete Design mode help sections for additional
information.
Table 14.1-Available steel design codes
in the Steel Design mode
Country/Region Code
Egypt 205 2001
Europe EC3 DD
Great Britain BS5950 2000
India IS 800
United States AISC ASD
Note: Design per the Chinese steel code GB50017-2003 must be performed per the localized
STAAD SSDD interface. Please download and install this application from Bentley SELECT.
Table 14.2-Available design codes in the

Concrete Design codes
Country/
Code
Region
Australia AS 3600
China GB50010

Batch Design versus Design Modes
Country/
Code
Region
Egypt ECCS 203
Eurocode 2 - 1991
Europe
Eurocode 2 - 2004
France BAEL
Germany DIN 1045-1
Great Britain BS 8110
India IS456
Japan AIJ
Norway NS3473
Russia SP52-101-03
Singapore CP65
Spain EHE
Turkey TS 500
ACI 318-99
United States ACI 318-05 / 318M-
05
1
Australian Codes

1 Australian Codes
1A.1 Section Types for Concrete Design
1A. Australian Codes - Concrete Design per AS 3600 - 2001

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the Australian code AS 3600-2001
Australian Standard-Concrete Structures.
Design of members per AS 3600 - 2001 requires the STAAD CAN/AUS/SA Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.

The following types of cross sections for concrete members can be designed.
l For Beams: Prismatic (Rectangular & Square)

l For Columns: Prismatic (Rectangular, Square, and Circular)
1A.2 Member Dimensions

Concrete members which will be designed by the program must have certain section properties
input under the MEMBER PROPERTY command. The following example shows the required input:
UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 250.
11 13 PR YD 350.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450 mm depth and 250mm width) and
the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be circular
with 350 mm diameter. It is absolutely imperative that the user not provide the cross section area
(AX) as an input.
1A.3 Design Parameters

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform the design. Default
parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional
design requirements. These values may be changed to suit the particular design being performed.
Table 1A.1 of this manual contains a complete list of the available parameters and their default
values. It is necessary to declare length and force units as Millimeter and Newton before performing
the concrete design.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number until it is specified
again. This is the way STAAD works for all codes.

Table 1A.1-Australian Concrete Design per AS 3600 Parameters

Parameter Name Default Value Description
CODE - Must be specified as

AUSTRALIAN to invokes design
per AS 3600 - 2001.
Design Code to follow.
See section 5.52.2 of the

Technical Reference Manual.
CLB 40 mm Clear cover for outermost

bottom reinforcement.
CLS 40 mm Clear cover for outermost side

reinforcement.
CLT 40 mm Clear cover for outermost top

reinforcement.
DEPTH YD Total depth to be used for

design. This value defaults to
YD as provided under MEMBER
PROPERTIES.
EFACE 0 Distance from end node of

beam to face of support used
for shear design; used for shear
and torsion calculations.
FC 30 N/mm 2 Compressive strength of

concrete.
FYMAIN 400 N/mm 2 Yield Stress for main

reinforcing steel. Applicable
values per Table 6.2.1 of AS
3600-2001:
250
400
450
500
FYSEC 400 N/mm 2 Yield Stress for secondary

reinforcing steel. Applicable
values per Table 6.2.1 of AS
3600-2001:
250
400
450
500
MAXMAIN 12 mm Maximum main reinforcement

bar size.
MINMAIN 12 mm Minimum main reinforcement

bar size.
MINSEC 12 mm Minimum secondary

reinforcement bar size.
MMAG 1 Factor by which column

design moments are
magnified.
RATIO 4.0 Maximum percentage of

longitudinal reinforcement in
columns.
NSECTION 12 Number of equally spaced

sections for design.
SFACE 0 Distance from start node of

beam to face of support used
for shear design; used for shear
and torsion calculations.

1A.4 Slenderness Effects and Analysis Consideration
TRACK 0.0 For beam design:
0.0 = output consists of

reinforcement details at the
member start, middle, and
end
1.0 = critical moments are
printed in addition to
TRACK 0.0 output
2.0 = required steel for
intermediate sections
defined by NSECTION are
printedin addition to
TRACK 0.0 output
For column design:
0.0 = reinforcement details

are printed
WIDTH ZD Width to be used for design.

This value defaults to ZD as
provided under MEMBER
PROPERTIES.

Slenderness effects are extremely important in designing compression members. There are two
options by which the slenderness effect can be accommodated. One option is to perform an exact
analysis which will take into account the influence of axial loads and variable moment of inertia on
member stiffness and fixed end moments, the effect of deflections on moment and forces and the
effect of the duration of loads. Another option is to approximately magnify design moments.
STAAD has been written to allow the use of the first option. To perform this type of analysis, use
the command PDELTA ANALYSIS instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS. The PDELTA ANALYSIS will
accommodate the requirements of the second- order analysis described by AS 3600, except for the
effects of the duration of the loads. It is felt that this effect may be safely ignored because experts
believe that the effects of the duration of loads are negligible in a normal structural configuration.
Although ignoring load duration effects is somewhat of an approximation, it must be realized that
the evaluation of slenderness effects is also by an approximate method. In this method, additional
moments are calculated based on empirical formula and assumptions on sidesway.
Considering all of the above information, a P-Delta analysis—as performed by STAAD—may be

used for the design of concrete members. However the user must note that to take advantage of
this analysis, all the combinations of loading must be provided as primary load cases and not as
load combinations. This is due to the fact that load combinations are just algebraic combinations
1A.5 Beam Design
of forces and moments, whereas a primary load case is revised during the P-delta analysis based on
the deflections. Also, note that the proper factored loads (like 1.5 for dead load etc.) should be
provided by the user. STAAD does not factor the loads automatically.
1A.5 Beam Design

Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. For all these forces, all active beam loadings are
prescanned to identify the critical load cases at different sections of the beams. The total number of
sections considered is 13 (e.g., 0., .1, .2, .25, .3, .4, .5, .6, .7, .75, .8, .9, and 1). All of these sections are
scanned to determine the design force envelopes.
1A.5.1 Design for Flexure

Maximum sagging (creating tensile stress at the bottom face of the beam) and hogging (creating
tensile stress at the top face) moments are calculated for all active load cases at each of the above
mentioned sections. Each of these sections is designed to resist both of these critical sagging and
hogging moments. Currently, design of singly reinforced sections only is permitted. If the section
dimensions are inadequate as a singly reinforced section, such a message will be permitted in the
output. Flexural design of beams is performed in two passes. In the first pass, effective depths of the
sections are determined with the assumption of single layer of assumed reinforcement and
reinforcement requirements are calculated. After the preliminary design, reinforcing bars are chosen
from the internal database in single or multiple layers. The entire flexure design is performed again
in a second pass taking into account the changed effective depths of sections calculated on the
basis of reinforcement provided after the preliminary design. Final provisions of flexural
reinforcements are made then. Efforts have been made to meet the guideline for the curtailment of
reinforcements as per AS 3600. Although exact curtailment lengths are not mentioned explicitly in
the design output (finally which will be more or less guided by the detailer taking into account of
other practical consideration), user has the choice of printing reinforcements provided by STAAD at
13 equally spaced sections from which the final detailed drawing can be prepared.
1A.5.2 Design for Shear

Shear reinforcement is calculated to resist both shear forces and torsional moments. Shear design is
performed at 13 equally spaced sections (0. to 1.) for the maximum shear forces amongst the active
load cases and the associated torsional moments. Shear capacity calculation at different sections
without the shear reinforcement is based on the actual tensile reinforcement provided by STAAD.
Two-legged stirrups are provided to take care of the balance shear forces acting on these sections.
Example of Input Data for Beam Design:

UNIT NEWTON MMS
START CONCRETE DESIGN
CODE AUSTRALIAN
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FYSEC 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
CLEAR 25 MEM 2 TO 6

1A.6 Column Design
MAXMAIN 40 MEMB 2 TO 6
TRACK 1.0 MEMB 2 TO 9
DESIGN BEAM 2 TO 9
END CONCRETE DESIGN
1A.6 Column Design

Columns are designed for axial forces and biaxial moments at the ends. All active load cases are
tested to calculate reinforcement. The loading which yields maximum reinforcement is called the
critical load. Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular sections. By default, square
and rectangular columns are designed with reinforcement distributed on each side equally. That
means the total number of bars will always be a multiple of four (4). This may cause slightly
conservative results in some cases. All major criteria for selecting longitudinal and transverse
reinforcement as stipulated by AS 3600 have been taken care of in the column design of STAAD.
Example of Input Data for Column Design:

UNIT NEWTON MMS
CODE AUSTRALIAN
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
CLEAR 25 MEMB 2 TO 6
DESIGN COLUMN 2 TO 6
END CONCRETE DESIGN
1A.7 Slab or Wall Design

To design a slab or wall, it must be modeled using finite elements. The command specifications are
in accordance with Chapter 2 and Chapter 6 of the specification.
Elements are designed for the moments Mx and My. These moments are obtained from the
element force output (see Section 3.8 of the Technical Reference Manual). The reinforcement
required to resist Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the reinforcement
required to resist My moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement. The parameters FYMAIN, FC,
MAXMAIN, MINMAIN, and CLEAR listed in Table 1A.1 are relevant to slab design. Other parameters
mentioned in Table 1A.1 are not applicable to slab design.
1A.7 Slab or Wall Design
Figure 1A.1 - Element moments: Longitudinal (L) and Transverse (T)
Example of Input Data for Slab/Wall Design

UNIT NEWTON MMS
CODE AUSTRALIAN
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 25 ALL
CLEAR 40 ALL
DESIGN ELEMENT 15 TO 20
END CONCRETE DESIGN

1B.1 General
1B. Australian Codes - Steel Design per AS 4100 - 1998

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Australian code AS 4100-1998
Standards Australia - Steel Structural Design.
Design of members per AS 3600 - 1998 requires the STAAD CAN/AUS/SA Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.
1B.1 General
The design philosophy embodied in this specification is based on the concept of limit state design.
Structures are designed and proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at which they
would become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit-state are recognized -
ultimate and serviceability. The primary considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength
and stability, while that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load and resistance factors are
used so that a uniform reliability is achieved for all steel structures under various loading
conditions and at the same time the chances of limits being surpassed are acceptably remote.
In the STAAD implementation, members are proportioned to resist the design loads without
exceeding the limit states of strength, stability, and serviceability. Accordingly, the most economic
section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria as augmented by the designer in
specification of allowable member depths, desired section type, or other such parameters. The code
checking portion of the program checks whether code requirements for each selected section are
met and identifies the governing criteria.
The following sections describe the salient features of the STAAD implementation of AS 4100. A
detailed description of the design process along with its underlying concepts and assumptions is
available in the specification document.
1B.1.1 Strength Limit States

Strength design capacities (φRu) are calculated and compared to user-defined design action effects
(S*), so as to ensure that S* ≤ φRu in accordance with AS 4100 3.4. Details for design capacity
calculations are outlined in the sections that follow.
1B.1.2 Deflection Limit States

STAAD.Pro’s AS 4100 implementation does not generally check deflections. It is left to the user to
check that both local member and frame deflections are within acceptable limits.
Note: Local member deflections parallel to the local member y-axis can be checked against a user-
defined maximum “span / deflection” ratio. This can be performed using the DFF, DJ1, and DJ2
design parameters, however this is only available for MEMBER Design. Details are provided in the
sections that follow.

1B.1 General
1B.1.3 Eccentric Beam Reactions

STAAD.Pro does not automatically account for minimum eccentricity distances for beam reactions
being transferred to columns as per AS 4100 4.3.4. However member offsets can be used to model
these eccentricities.
Refer to Section 5.25 of the Technical Reference manual for further information on the Member
Offset feature.
1B.1.4 Limit States Not Considered

The following limit states are not directly considered in STAAD.Pro’s implementation of AS 4100.
Table 1B.1-Limit States Not Considered
in STAAD.Pro AS 4100 Design
Limit State Code
Reference
Stability AS 4100 3.3
Serviceability AS 4100 3.5
Brittle Fracture AS 4100 3.7
Fire AS 4100 3.9
Other Design AS 4100 3.11

Requirements
1B.1.5 Connection Design

STAAD.Pro and Bentley’s RAM Connection program currently do not support design of
connections in accordance with AS 4100. In some cases connection design may govern the size of
members. Such considerations are not considered in STAAD.Pro’s AS 4100 and should be checked
by separately.
1B.1.6 Bolts and Welds

Bolt holes and welds are not generally considered in STAAD.Pro’s AS 4100 member design.
Note: NSC and NSF design parameters are used to manually specify a reduction in net section
area for compression or tension capacity calculations. These can be used to account for bolt hole
area reductions. Further details are provided in the sections that follow.
1B.2 Analysis Methodology

Either the elastic or dynamic analysis methods may be used to obtain the forces and moments for
design as per AS 4100 section 4.4. Analysis is done for the specified primary and repeat loading
conditions. Therefore, it is your responsibility to enter all necessary loads and load combination
factors for design in accordance with the AS/NZS 1170 Series or other relevant design codes. You are
allowed complete flexibility in providing loading specifications and using appropriate load factors
to create necessary loading situations. Depending upon the analysis requirements, regular stiffness
analysis or P-Delta analysis may be specified. Dynamic analysis may also be performed and the
results combined with static analysis results.
Note: Plastic analysis and design in accordance with AS 4100 section 4.5 is not implemented in
STAAD.Pro.
1B.2.1 Elastic Analysis

Two types of elastic analysis can be performed using STAAD.Pro in accordance with AS 4100:
i. First Order Linear, Elastic Analysis - used to perform a regular elastic stiffness analysis as per
AS 4100 4.4.2.1. Refer to Section 5.37.1 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional
details on this feature.
ii. Second Order PDelta Linear, Elastic Analysis - Depending on the type of structure, a PDelta
analysis may be required in order to capture second-order effects as per AS 4100 4.4.1.2.
Second-order effects can be captured in STAAD.Pro by performing a PDelta second-order
elastic analysis as per AS 4100 Appendix E. Refer to Section 5.37.2 of the Technical Reference
Manual for additional details on this feature.
Note: Moment amplification as per AS 4100 clause 4.4.2 is not considered.
Tip: In order to correctly capture second-order effects for combination load cases using a
PDelta Analysis, the Repeat Load feature must be used. Second-order effects will not be
correctly evaluated if the Load Combination feature is used. Load Combinations are
combinations of results where Repeat Loads instruct the program to perform the analysis
on the combined load actions. Refer to Section 5.32.11 of the Technical Reference Manual
for additional details on using Repeat Loads.
1B.2.2 Dynamic Analysis

Dynamic analysis may also be performed and the results combined with static analysis results. Refer
Section 5.32.10 of the Technical Reference Manual for further information on Dynamic Loading and
Analysis features.

1B.3 Member Property Specifications

For specification of member properties, either the steel section library available in STAAD or the
User Table facility may be used. The next section describes the syntax of commands used to assign
properties from the built-in steel table. For more information on these facilities, refer to Section 1.7
the STAAD Technical Reference Manual.
1B.4 Built-in Steel Section Library

The following information is provided for use when the built-in steel tables are to be referenced for
member property specification. These properties are stored in a database file. If called for, the
properties are also used for member design. Since the shear areas are built into these tables, shear
deformation is always considered during the analysis of these members. An example of the member
property specification in an input file is provided at the end of this section.
A complete listing of the sections available in the built-in steel section library may be obtained by
using the tools of the graphical user interface.
Refer to Section 1.7.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional information.
Table 1B.2-Available Australian Sections for STAAD.Pro AS 4100 Design
General Profile Type Australian Sections Description
I-SECTION WB, WC Welded beams and columns
UB, UC Universal beams and columns
T-SECTION BT, CT Tees cut from universal beams and columns
CHANNEL PFC Parallel flange channels
ANGLE EA, UA Equal and unequal angles
TUBE SHS, RHS Square and rectangular hollow sections
PIPE CHS Circular hollow sections
Note: STAAD.Pro will not design the following section types to AS 4100: Double Profiles (D),
Composite Sections (C), Top Cover Plates (TC), Bottom Cover Plates (BC), and Top & Bottom
Cover Plates (TB), Double Channels (D, BA, & FR) and Double Angles (LD & SD). Refer to Section
Profile Tables in the Graphical Environment for these options.
Tip: When adding and assigning sections using the built-in steel section library through the
Graphical Environment, STAAD.Pro’s default tables are American. To change the default tables to
Australian, select File > Configuration from the STAAD.Pro Start page (no input file open). Set
the Default Profile Table to Australian on the Configure Program dialog Section Profile Table.
Following are the descriptions of different types of sections.
1B.4.1 UB Shapes
These shapes are designated in the following way.
20 TO 30 TA ST UB150X14.0
36 TO 46 TA ST UB180X16.1
1B.4.2 UC Shapes
The designation for the UC shapes is similar to that for the UB shapes.
25 TO 35 TA ST UC100X14.8
23 56 TA ST UC310X96.8
1B.4.3 Welded Beams

Welded Beams are designated in the following way.
25 TO 35 TA ST WB700X115
23 56 TA ST WB1200X455
1B.4.4 Welded Columns

Welded Columns are designated in the following way.
25 TO 35 TA ST WC400X114
23 56 TA ST WC400X303
1B.4.5 Parallel Flange Channels

Shown below is the syntax for assigning names of channel sections.
1 TO 5 TA ST PFC75
6 TO 10 TA ST PFC380
1B.4.6 Double Channels

Back-to-back double channels, with or without a spacing between them, are available. The letter D
in front of the section name will specify a double channel.
11 TA D PFC230
17 TA D C230X75X25 SP 0.5
In the above set of commands, member 11 is a back-to-back double channel PFC230 with no spacing
in between. Member 17 is a double channel PFC300 with a spacing of 0.5 length units between the
channels.

1B.4.7 Angles
Two types of specification may be used to describe an angle. The standard angle section is specified
as follows:
16 20 TA ST A30X30X6
The above section signifies an angle with legs of length 30 mm and a leg thickness of 6 mm. This
specification may be used when the local Z axis corresponds to the z-z axis specified in Chapter 2. If
the local Y axis corresponds to the z-z axis, type specification "RA" (reverse angle) may be used.
17 21 TA RA A150X150X16
Note: Single angles must be specified with an “RA” (Single Angle w/Reverse Y-Z Axis) in order to
be designed to AS 4100. This is to ensure that the major and minor principal axes align with the
local member z and y axes respectively, similar to other section profiles.
1B.4.8 Double Angles

Short leg back-to-back or long leg back-to-back double angles can be specified by means of input of
the words SD or LD, respectively, in front of the angle size. In case of an equal angle, either SD or
LD will serve the purpose.
33 35 TA SD A65X50X5 SP 0.6
37 39 TA LD A75X50X6
43 TO 47 TA LD A100X75X10 SP 0.75
1B.4.9 Tubes (Rectangular or Square Hollow Sections)

Tubes can be assigned in 2 ways. In the first method, the designation for the tube is as shown
below. This method is meant for tubes whose property name is available in the steel table. In these
examples, members 1 to 5 consist of a 2X2X0.5 inch size tube section, and members 6 to 10 consist of
10X5X0.1875 inch size tube section. The name is obtained as 10 times the depth, 10 times the width,
and 16 times the thickness.
1 TO 5 TA ST TUB20202.5
6 TO 10 TA ST TUB100503.0
In the second method, tubes are specified by their dimensions. For example,
6 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5
is a tube that has a height of 8 length units, width of 6 length units, and a wall thickness of 0.5
length units. Only code checking, no member selection, will be performed for TUBE sections
specified in this latter manner.
1B.4.10 Pipes (Circular Hollow Sections)

Pipes can be assigned in 2 ways. In the first method, the designation for the pipe is as shown below.
This method is meant for pipes whose property name is available in the steel table.
1 TO 5 TA ST PIP180X5
1B.5 Section Classification
6 TO 10 TA ST PIP273X6.5
In the second method, pipe sections may be provided by specifying the word PIPE followed by the
outside and inside diameters of the section. For example,
1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0 ID 20.0
specifies a pipe with outside diameter of 25 length units and inside diameter of 20 length units.
Only code checking, no member selection, will be performed on pipes specified in this latter
manner.
1B.4.11 Sample File Containing Australian Shapes

STAAD SPACE
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORD
1 0 0 0 11 100 0 0
MEMB INCI
1 1 2 10
UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTIES AUSTRALIAN
* UB SHAPES
1 TA ST UB200X25.4
* UC SHAPES
2 TA ST UC250X89.5
* CHANNELS
3 TA ST PFC125
* DOUBLE CHANNELS
4 TA D PFC200
* ANGLES
5 TA ST A30X30X6
* REVERSE ANGLES
6 TA RA A150X150X16
* DOUBLE ANGLES - SHORT LEGS BACK TO BACK
7 TA SD A65X50X5 SP 0.6
* DOUBLE ANGLES - LONG LEGS BACK TO BACK
8 TA LD A100X75X10 SP 0.75
* TUBES (RECTANGULAR OR SQUARE HOLLOW SECTIONS)
* PIPES (CIRCULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS)
10 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0 ID 20.0
PRINT MEMB PROP
FINISH

The AS 4100 specification allows inelastic deformation of section elements. Thus, local buckling
becomes an important criterion. Steel sections are classified as compact, noncompact, or slender;
depending upon their local buckling characteristics. This classification is a function of the
geometric properties of the section. The design procedures are different depending on the section
class. STAAD determines the section classification for the standard shapes and user specified shapes.
Design is performed for all three categories of section described above.

1B.6 Material Properties
1B.6 Material Properties

For specification of material properties, the user can use either:
a. built-in material constants

b. user-defined materials
Refer Section 5.26.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for further information on the Built-in
Material Constants feature.
Refer Section 2.26.1 of the Technical Reference Manual for further information on the Define
Material feature.
1B.6.1 Young’s Modulus of Elasticity (E)

STAAD.Pro’s default steel material’s E value is 205,000 MPa. However AS 4100 section 1.4 states that
the modulus of elasticity should be taken as 200,000 MPa. There are a number of options to change
this value:
l change the steel material through the input file or GUI for each file created
l define a new steel material for each file created
l change the default STAAD.Pro metric E value in the file C:/Windows/StaadPro20070.ini,

going to the “[Material-Metric]” section, and changing E1=205.0e6 to E1=200.0e6. Restart
STAAD.Pro for this to take effect.
Caution: Virtualization features of Windows Vista and Windows 7 may require additional
files to be modified. Contact Bentley Technical Support for assistance.
1B.7 Member Resistances

The member resistance is calculated in STAAD according to the procedures outlined in AS 4100.
Calculated design capacities are compared to corresponding axial, bending moment, and shear
forces determined from the STAAD.Pro analysis. These are used to report the fail or pass status for
the members designed.
Two types of design checks are typically performed per AS 4100:
l Nominal section checks

l Nominal member checks
The nominal section capacity refers to the capacity of a cross-section to resists applied loads, and
accounts for cross-section yielding and local buckling effects. The nominal member capacity on the
other hand refers to the capacity of a member to resist applied loads, and includes checks for global
member buckling effects including Euler buckling, lateral-torsional buckling, etc.
1B.7.1 Axial Tension

The criteria governing the capacity of tension members are based on two limit states per AS 4100
Section 7. The limit state of yielding of the gross section is intended to prevent excessive elongation
of the member.
The second limit state involves fracture at the section with the minimum effective net area φNt
section axial tension capacities are calculated (Cl.7.2). Through the use of the NSF parameter (see
Table 1B.1), you may specify the net section area. STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a
member based on these two limit states per Cl.7.1 and Cl.7.2 respectively of AS 4100. Eccentric end
connections can be taken into account using the KT correction factor, perCl.7.3. The f yield stress is
y
based on the minimum plate yield stress. Parameters FYLD, FU, and NSF are applicable for these
calculations.
1B.7.2 Axial Compression

The compressive strength of members is based on limit states per AS 4100 Section 6. It is taken as
the lesser of nominal section capacity and nominal member capacity. Nominal section capacity,
φNs, is a function of form factor (Cl.6.2.2), net area of the cross section, and yield stress of the
material. Through the use of the NSC parameter (see Table 1B.1), you may specify the net section
area. Note that this parameter is different from that corresponding to tension. The program
automatically calculates the form factor. The k form factors are calculated based on effective plate
f
widths per Cl.6.2.4, and the f yield stress is based on the minimum plate yield stress.
y
Nominal member capacity, φNc, is a function of nominal section capacity and member slenderness
reduction factor (Cl.6.3.3). This value is calculated about both principal x and y axes. Here, you are
required to supply the value of αb (Cl.6.3.3) through the ALB parameter (see Table 1B.1). The
effective length for the calculation of compressive strength may be provided through the use of the
parameters KY, KZ, LY, and LZ (see Table 1B.1).
1B.7.3 Bending
Bending capacities are calculated to AS 4100 Section 5. The allowable bending moment of members
is determined as the lesser of nominal section capacity and nominal member capacity (ref. Cl.5.1).
The nominal section moment capacity, φM , is calculated about both principal x and y axes and is
s
the capacity to resist cross-section yielding or local buckling and is expressed as the product of the
yield stress of the material and the effective section modulus (ref. Cl.5.2). The effective section
modulus is a function of section type (i.e., compact, noncompact, or slender) and minimum plate
yield stress f . The nominal member capacity depends on overall flexural-torsional buckling of the
y
member (ref.Cl.5.3).
Note: For sections where the web and flange yield stresses (f and f respectively) are
y,web y.flange
different, the lower of the two yield stresses is applied to both the web and flange to determine
the slenderness of these elements.

Member moment capacity, φMb , is calculated about the principal x axis only (ref. Cl.5.6). Critical
flange effective cross-section restraints and corresponding design segment and sub-segments are
used as the basis for calculating capacities.
1B.7.4 Interaction of Axial Force and Bending

Combined section bending and shear capacities are calculated using the shear and bending
interaction method as per Cl.5.12.3.
Note: This check is only carried out where φVv section web shear capacities are calculated. Refer
Table 1B.6-1 for details.
The member strength for sections subjected to axial compression and uniaxial or biaxial bending is
obtained through the use of interaction equations. Here, the adequacy of a member is also
examined against both section (ref. Cl.8.3.4) and member capacity (ref.Cl.8.4.5). These account for
both in-plane and out-of-plane failures. If the summation of the left hand side of the equations,
addressed by the above clauses, exceeds 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO
parameter (see Table 1B.1), the member is considered to have FAILed under the loading condition.
1B.7.5 Shear
Section web shear capacity, φVv , is calculated per Cl.5.11, including both shear yield and shear
buckling capacities. Once the capacity is obtained, the ratio of the shear force acting on the cross
section to the shear capacity of the section is calculated. If any of the ratios (for both local Y & Z-
axes) exceed 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 1B.1), the
section is considered to have failed under shear.
Table 1B.6-1 below highlights which shear capacities are calculated for different profile types.
Table 1B.3-Section Type Shear Checks
General Profile Type Australian Shear Checks
Section
I-SECTION WB, WC, Calculated for web only

UB, UC
(i.e., parallel to minor
principal y-axis)
T-SECTION BT, CT
CHANNEL PFC
ANGLE EA, UA No checks performed
TUBE SHS, RHS Calculated parallel to both x & y

principal axes
PIPE CHS Per AS 4100 5.11.4
1B.8 Design Parameters
Note: Only unstiffened web capacities are calculated. Stiffened webs are not considered. Bearing
capacities are not considered.
1B.7.6 Torsion
STAAD.Pro does not design sections or members for torsion for AS 4100.

The design parameters outlined in Table 1B.1 are used to control the design procedure. These
parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer to the program and thus allow the
engineer to control the design process to suit an application's specific needs. The design scope
indicates whether design parameters are applicable for MEMBER Design, PMEMBER Design, or both.
The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for
conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements, some or all of these
parameter values may be changed to exactly model the physical structure.
Table 1B.4-Australian Steel Design Parameters

Parameter Default Value Design Description
Name Scope
CODE - Must be specified as

AUSTRALIAN to invoke
design per AS 4100 - 1998.

Technical Reference
Manual.
ALB Member section constant

2.0
(refer cl. 6.3.3)
If ALB is 2.0, it is
automatically calculated
based on TABLE 6.3.3(1),
6.3.3(2); otherwise the
input value is used.


Name Scope
ALM 0.0 Moment modification

factor (refer cl. 5.6.1.1)
If ALM is 0.0, it is
automatically calculated
based cl.5.6.1.1; otherwise
the input value is used.
BEAM 0.0 0.0 = design only for

end moments and those
at locations specified by
SECTION command.
1.0 = Perform design for

moments at twelfth
points along the beam.
DFF None (Mandatory for Analytical “Deflection Length”/

deflection check) members Maximum Allowable
only local deflection.
DJ1 Start Joint of member Joint No. denoting start

point for calculation of
“deflection length”
DJ2 End Joint of member Joint No. denoting end

point for calculation of
DMAX 45.0 [in.] Maximum allowable

depth (Applicable for
member selection)
DMIN 0.0 [in.] Minimum required

member selection)
FU 500.0 [MPa] Ultimate strength of

steel.
FYLD 250.0 [MPa] Yield strength of steel.

Name Scope
IST 1 Steel type - 1 - SR, 2 -

HR, 3 - CF, 4 - LW, 5 -
HW
Note: See p.47 of AS

4100-1998.
KT 1.0 Correction factor for

distribution of forces
(refer cl. 7.2)
KY 1.0 K value for general

column flexural buckling
about the local Y-axis.
Used to calculate
slenderness ratio.
KZ 1.0 K value for general

about the local Z-axis.
Used to calculate
slenderness ratio.
LHT 0 Physical Load height position as

members described in Table 5.6.3
only (2) of AS 4100:1998
0 = at Shear
center
1 = At top
flange
LY Member Length Length for general

about the local Y-axis.
Used to calculate
slenderness ratio.
LZ Member Length Length for general

about the local Z-axis.
Used to calculate
slenderness ratio.


Name Scope
MAIN 0.0 A value of either 0.0 or

1.0 suppresses the
slenderness ratio check.
checks are not explicitly
required per AS 4100.
Any value greater than 1.0

is used as the limit for
slenderness in
compression.
NSC 1.0 Net section factor for

compression members =
An / Ag
(refer cl. 6.2.1)
NSF 1.0 Net section factor for

tension members.
PBRACE None Physical Refer to section 1B.11 for

members details on the PBRACE
only parameter.
PHI 0.9 Capacity reduction factor
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of

actual load effect to the
design strength.
SGR 0 Steel Grade. Refer to Note

a below.
0.0 = normal grade

1.0 = high strength
grade steel
SKL 1.0 A load height factor

given in Table 5.6.3(2)
SKR 1.0 A lateral rotation

restraint factor given in
Table 5.6.3(3)
SKT 1.0 A twist restraint factor

given in Table 5.6.3(1)

Name Scope
TRACK 0.0 Output detail
0.0 = report only

minimum design
results
1.0 = report design
strengths in addition
to TRACK 0.0 output
2.0 = provide full
details of design
UNB Member Length Unsupported length in

bending compression of
the bottom flange for
calculating moment
resistance.
UNT Member Length Unsupported length in

bending compression of
the top flange for
calculating moment
resistance.
1B.8.1 Notes
a. DFF, DJ1, and DJ2 – Deflection calculations
Compute Delta = SQRT((DX2 - DX1)2 + (DY2 - DY1)2 + (DZ2 - DZ1)2)
Compute Length = distance between DJ1 & DJ2 or, between start node and end node, as the
case may be.
Note: Deflection calculations are not applicable to PMEMBERs.
a. A straight line joining DJ1 and DJ2 is used as the reference line from which local
deflections are measured.
For example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been modeled using four
joints and three members. The “Deflection Length” for all three members will be
equal to the total length of the beam in this case. The parameters DJ1 and DJ2 should
be used to model this situation. Thus, for all three members here, DJ1 should be 1
and DJ2 should be 4.

D = Maximum local deflection for members 1, 2, and 3.

PARAMETERS
DFF 300. ALL
DJ1 1 ALL
DJ2 4 ALL
b. If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member length
and local deflections will be measured from original member line.
c. It is important to note that unless a DFF value is specified, STAAD will not perform a
deflection check. This is in accordance with the fact that there is no default value for
DFF.
b. LHT Parameter
If the shear force is constant within the segment, longitudinal position of the load is
assumed to be at the segment end.
If there is any variation of the shear force and the load is acting downward determined from
shear force variation and load height parameter indicates the load is acting on top flange
(flange at the positive local y axis) and restraints at the end of the segment is not FU (FRU)
or PU (PRU) Kl is assumed to be 1.4.
If there is any variation of the shear force and the load is acting upward determined from
shear force variation and load height parameter indicates the load is acting on top flange
(flange at the positive local y axis) and restraints at the end of the segment is not FU (FRU)
or PU (PRU) Kl is assumed to be 1.0 as the load acting at the top flange is contributing to
stabilize against local torsional buckling.
c. SGR Parameter
AS 4100 defines the values of steel grades that are used as either normal steel or high grade
steel. The following table explains the material values used when either option is specified
for a particular shape:
Table 1B.5-Steel Grades used for the SGR Parameter
Section Type SGR Value Steel
Grade
Used
WB, WC, Tee section cut from WB and WC 0 (Normal) 300

WB, WC, Tee section cut from WB and WC
1 (High) 400
Section Type SGR Value Steel

Grade
Used
UB, UC, Tee section cut from UB and UC, 0 (Normal) 300
EA, UA and all UPT sections UB, UC, Tee
section cut from UB and UC, EA, UA and 1 (High) 350
all UPT sections
Pipe, Tube, CHS, RHS, SHS Pipe, Tube, 0 (Normal) 250

CHS, RHS, SHS
1 (High) 350
Note: If a value for the FYLD parameter has been specified, then that value will be used.
Otherwise, the SGR value will be used to determine the yeild strength and tensile strength
values for the steel. based on maximum thickness of the individual elements of the
section. Only for shear capacity calculation web thickness is used. Similarly, Tensile
Strength is determined either from FU parameter or from SGR parameter.
Caution: A check is introduced to see if yield stress is more than 450 MPa or not. If it is, a
warning is issued and the yield stress is set to 450 MPa.
The following example uses the Member design facility in STAAD.Pro. However, it is strongly
recommended to use the Physical member design capabilities for AS 4100:
PARAMETER 1
CODE AUSTRALIAN
ALB 0.0 MEMBER ALL
ALM 1.13 MEMBER ALL
BEAM 1.0 MEMBER ALL
DFF 250.0 MEMBER ALL
DMAX 0.4 MEMBER ALL
DMIN 0.25 MEMBER ALL
FU 400.0 MEMBER ALL
FYLD 310.0 MEMBER ALL
IST 2.0 MEMBER ALL
KT 0.85 MEMBER ALL
KX 0.75 MEMBER ALL
KY 1.0 MEMBER ALL
LX 4.5 MEMBER ALL
LY 6.0 MEMBER ALL
MAIN 1.0 MEMBER ALL
NSC 0.9 MEMBER ALL
NSF 1.0 MEMBER ALL
PHI 0.9 MEMBER ALL
RATIO 0.9 MEMBER ALL
SGR 1.0 MEMBER ALL
SKT 1.0 MEMBER ALL
SKL 1.0 MEMBER ALL
SKR 1.0 MEMBER ALL
TRACK 2.0 MEMBER ALL
UNB 3.4 MEMBER ALL
UNT 6.8 MEMBER ALL
CHECK CODE MEMBER ALL

1B.9 Code Checking
1B.9 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to evaluate whether the provided section properties of the
members are adequate for the specified loads as per AS 4100 requirements.
Tip: The member selection facility can be used to instruct the program to select a different
section if the specified section is found to be inadequate.
Code checking for an analytical member is done using forces and moments at every twelfth point
along the beam. The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition,
the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance from the start joint) and magnitudes
of the governing forces and moments are also printed. The extent of detail of the output can be
controlled by using the TRACK parameter.
Refer to Section 2.5 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Code Checking.
Refer to Section 5.48.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of the Code
Checking command.
Note: Code checking cannot be performed on composite and prismatic sections.
Example of commands for code checking:

UNIT NEWTON METER
PARAMETER
CODE AUSTRALIAN
FYLD 330E6 MEMB 3 4
NSF 0.85 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
CHECK CODE MEMB 3 4
1B.9.1 Physical Members

For physical members (PMEMBERs), code checks are performed at section stations positioned at 1/12th
points along each analytical member included in the PMEMBER. It is up to you to determine if these
locations cover critical sections for design, and adjust as necessary. The number of stations for
PMEMBER Design cannot be altered, however the analytical members can be split so that in effect
more stations are checked for a PMEMBER.
For each section station along a PMEMBER, section capacity checks are carried for design actions at
that station location. Member capacity checks are also carried out for each station. For these the
program searches each side of the station to find adjacent effective restraints and design forces and
moments. This allows the program to determine the segment / sub-segment that the section
station resides in, and then proceeds to calculate the member capacities. Enough section stations
should be included to capture all segments / sub-segments for checking.
Note: When checking combined actions for the section capacities, the design actions at the
section station are used. However when checking combined actions for the member capacities,
1B.10 Member Selection
the maximum forces from anywhere along the segment / sub-segment being considered are used.
This is as stipulated in AS 4100 8.2.
The output reports whether the member has PASSed or FAILed the design checks, as well as the
critical condition, critical load case, magnitudes of design actions for the most critical cross-section
location (distance from the start joint), and complete calculations for design. The TRACK design
parameter can be used to control the level of detail provided in the output. Color-coded results can
also be viewed in the GUI’s Post Processing Beam | Unity Check page.
In some cases some of the output will report “N/A” values. This occurs where a calculation does not
apply to a member. For example if a member never goes into tension then no values can be reported
in the tension capacity output sections.
Note: As per AS 4100 1.4, the TRACK 2.0 detailed level of output for PMEMBER Design uses x and
y subscripts to refer to major and minor principal axes respectively. These differ to STAAD.Pro
local member axes, where z and y refer to major and minor principal axes.

This process incrementally checks increasing section profile sizes until a size is found that is AS
4100 compliant, or the largest section has been checked. Only section profiles of the same type as
modeled are incrementally checked, with the increasing sizes based on a least weight per unit
length criteria.
For example, a member specified initially as a channel will have a channel selected for it. Selection
of members whose properties are originally provided from a user table will be limited to sections in
the user table.
Refer to Section 2.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for general information on Member
Selection. Refer to Section 5.48.3 of the Technical Reference Manual for details the specification of
the Member Selection command.
The design calculations for Member Selection are the same as for Code Checking.
Tip: A Fixed Group command is also available, and can be used to force all members within a
user-defined group to take the same section size based on the most critical governing design
criteria for all members within that group. This is particularly useful when you want to use the
Member Selection feature, but want a group of elements to have the same size. Refer to Section
5.49 of the Technical Reference Manual for information on using this feature.
Note: Member Selection will change member sizes, and hence will change the structure’s stiffness
matrix. In order to correctly account for this, a subsequent analysis and Code Check should be
performed to ensure that the final structure is acceptable. This may need to be carried out over
several iterations.
Note: Composite and prismatic sections cannot be selected.

1B.11 Tabulated Results of Steel Design
Example of commands for member selection:

UNIT NEWTON METER
PARAMETER
FYLD 330E6 MEMB 3 4
NSF 0.85 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
SELECT MEMB 3 4

Results of code checking and member selection are presented in a tabular format. The term
CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the AS 4100 specification which governs the design.
1B.12 Physical Member Design

There are two methods available in STAAD.Pro for checking members against the requirements of
AS 4100:
a. Analytical member method

b. Physical member method
Herein these are referred to as MEMBER Design and PMEMBER Design respectively.
Note: This feature requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 2) build 2007.07 or higher.
Traditionally STAAD.Pro performed code checks based on single analytical members (i.e., single
members between two nodes). This implementation remains in place as shown in the example in
Section 1B.8. Physical Member (PMEMBER) Design on the other hand allows you to group single or
multiple analytical members into a single physical design member for the purposes of design to AS
4100.
PMEMBER Design also has additional features, including:
l automated steel grades based on section type;

l automated tensile stress (f ) and yield stress (f ) values based on plate thicknesses;
u y
l automated segment / sub-segment design;
l improved detailed design calculation output; and
Thus, it is strongly recommended that PMEMBER Design be used, even for the design of single
analytical members.
1B.12.1 Modeling with Physical Members

Physical Members may be grouped by either of the following methods:
l STAAD.Pro Editor - Directly specify physical members in the input file. Refer to Section
5.16.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional information.
l Graphical Environment - Using the tools in the Steel Design toolbar, members can be
manually or automatically formed. Refer to Section 1.4 of the Graphical Environment manual
for additional information.
Note: When creating PMEMBERs for AS 4100, this must be performed in STAAD.Pro’s Modeling
mode. Do not use the Steel Design mode.
1B.12.2 Segment and Sub-Segment Layout

For calculation of member bending capacities about the principal x-axis, the PMEMBER Design uses
the concept of segment / sub-segment design. By default PMEMBERs are automatically broken up
into design segments and sub-segments based on calculated effective restraints. User-defined
restraints assigned using the PBRACE design parameter are checked to see if they are effective (i.e.,
if they are placed on the critical flange as per AS 4100 5.5). Restraints not applied to the critical
flange are ineffective and hence are completely ignored.
Refer to Section 1B.7 for further information on how user-defined restraints are applied using the
PBRACE design parameter, including available restraint types, and restraint layout rules.
Note: Segment and sub-segment layouts for PMEMBERs may change for different load cases
considered for design. Some restraints may be effective for one particular load case as they are
found to apply to the critical flange, however for another load case may be found not to act on
the critical flange, and found to be ineffective. In other words the critical flange can change for
each load case considered.
Typically the critical flange will be the compression flange, except for segments with a “U” restraint
at one end, in which case it will be the tension flange (as is the case for a cantilever).
The PMEMBER Design uses the following routine to determine effective cross-section restraints for
each load case considered:
i. first all user-defined restraints are checked to see if they are applied to the compression
flange, with those that aren’t ignored;
ii. next a check is made to see if a “U” type restraint is found at either end of the PMEMBER. If
this is the case then any adjacent “L” restraints up to the next “F”, “FR”, “P” or “PR” restraint
are also ignored, regardless of whether they are placed on the critical or non-critical flange.
Refer AS 4100 5.4.2.4.
The compression flange in step 1 of the routine above is calculated based on the bending moments
at the locations of the restraints being considered. If the bending moment is zero at the same
location as a restraint then the following method is used to determine which flange is critical at
the zero moment location:
a. If the zero moment is at the end of the PMEMBER, then the compression flange is based on
the bending moment at a small increment from then end;

b. If the zero moment is along the PMEMBER and is a peak value, then the compression flange
is based on the bending moment at a small increment from that location;
c. If neither 1 or 2 above is valid, then the stiffer of the restraints at that location is taken. The
stiffness of different restraint types from the most stiff to least stiff are taken as outlined in
Table 1B.9-3.
Table 1B.6-Assumed Order of Restraint
Stiffness for Zero Moment Critical
Flange
Stiffness Restraint Type
Most Stiff FR
↓ F
↓ PR
↓ P
↓ L
↓ U
Least Stiff None
Once the effective restraints have been determined, the PMEMBER is divided into segments
bounded by “F”, “P”, “FR”, “PR” or “U” effective restraints. These segments are then further divided
into sub-segments by effective “L” restraints.
Note: Sub-segment lengths are not automatically checked to determine if they provide full lateral
restraint as per AS 4100 5.3.2.4.
For design of cantilevers, the free tip should have user-defined “U” restraints applied to both top
and bottom flanges.
Note: If the effective restraints for any load case consist of “U” or “L” restraints only, an error will
be reported.
1B.12.3 Physical Member Restraints Specification

The PBRACE parameter is used to specify the restraint condition along the top and bottom flange of
a PMEMBER.
General Format
PBRACE { TOP | BOTTOM } f1 r1 f2 r2 … f52 r52 (PMEMB pmember-list)
Where:
f is a fraction of the PMEMBER length where restraint condition is being specified.

n
This value is any ratio between 0.0 and 1.0.
r is one of the possible restraint condition as in the following:

n
Table 1B.7-Physical Member Restraint Types
Designation, Restraint Description
r Type
1
F Fully
restrained
P Partially
restrained
L Laterally Cannot be specified at the ends of

restrained design members.
U Unrestrained Can only be applied at the ends of

design members, and must be
applied to both flanges to be
effective.
Caution: Both top and bottom

flanges can not be unrestrained
at the same location (as this is
unstable).
FR Fully and
rotationally
restrained
PR Partially and
rotationally
restrained
C Continuously The flange is assumed to be

restrained continuously supported at that
flange up to next restraint
location. For continuously
supported flange unbraced length
is assumed to be zero.
Example
PBRACE TOP 0.85 FR 0.33 PR 0.33 PR 0.25 F 0.75 L 0.5 PR 1.0 U 0.0 U
PBRACE BOTTOM 0.75 L 0.0 U 0.25 P 0.5 L -
1.0 U PMEMB 3 7

Description
Refer to AS 4100 Section 5.5 for a full definition of the critical flange. Typically this will be the
compression flange, except for segments with U restraint at one end, then it will be the tension
flange (as is the case for cantilever portion at the end).
l when gravity loads are dominant (i.e., negative local y-axis direction), the critical flange of a
segment shall be the top flange (i.e., tension).
l when upward wind loads are dominant (i.e., positive local y-axis direction), the critical
flange shall be the bottom flange (i.e., tension).
Design physical members are divided into segments by “F”, “P”, “FR”, “PR” or “U” effective section
restraints. Segments are further broken down into sub-segments by “L” restraints, but only if the
“L” restraints are deemed to be “effective”. “L” restraints are only considered to be effective when
positioned on the “critical” flange between “F”, “P”, “FR” or “FP” restraints. If an “L” restraint is
positioned on the non-critical flange it shall be completely ignored. Further, if an “L” restraint is
positioned between a “U” and an “F”, “P”, “FR” or “PR” restraint, it shall be ignored (regardless of
whether it is on the critical or non-critical flange).
Design members must have either a F, P, FR, PR, or U restraint specified at both ends, for both
flanges.
l If UNL is not specified, segment length is used as UNL and used as L in effective length
calculation as per 5.6.3.
l If ALM i.e., α_m is not provided, automatic calculation of ALM is done based on moments
within the segment.
l If SKR i.e., Kr is not provided, it is automatically calculated based on table 5.6.3(3)
considering restraint conditions are the end of the segment. If FR or PR is found at only one
of the end, Kr is assumed to be 0.85; if FR or PR is found at both the ends, 0.70 is used as Kr.
l If SKT i.e., Kt is not provided, it is automatically calculated based on Table 5.6.3(1)
considering end restraints of the segment and section geometric information and segment
length.
l If SKL i.e., Kl is not provided, it is automatically calculated based on Table 5.6.3(2)
considering end restraints of the segment, Load Height Position parameter, LHT and shear
force variation within the segment.
Notes
a. If PMEMBER list is not provided, all the PMEMBERS are restrained by same configuration.
b. It is not necessary to provide the restraint locations in sequence as the program sorts them
automatically.
c. Unless specified, PMEMBER ends are assumed to be Fully Restrained (F).
d. While designing any section of the member, effective restraints are searched on each side of
the section along the critical flange.
e. The types of restraints applied to the top and bottom flanges at each location determines the
effective section restraints. These are outlined in the table below:
Table 1B.8-Restraint Meanings in Critical and Noncritical Flanges
Case Flange Restraint on Restraint on Effective
a Critical a Non-Critical Section
Flange Flange Restraint
I U U U
II 1 L Nothing L
2 Nothing L None
III 1 P or F Nothing or U F
2 Nothing or U P or F P
IV 1 PR or FR Nothing or U FR
2 Nothing or U PR or FR PR
V 1 L, P or F L, P, F, FR or F
PR
2 FR or PR L, P, F, FR or FR
PR
Note: The critical flange can change for each load case considered.
1B.12.4 Automated PMEMBER Design Calculations

The AS 4100 PMEMBER Design automates many design calculations, including those required for
segment / sub-segment design.
Table 1B.9-Automated PMEMBER AS 4100 Design Parameters and Calculations
Automated Design PMEMBER Comments
Calculations Design
Parameter
α compression member ALB

b
section constant per AS
4100 6.3.3.

Automated Design PMEMBER Comments

Calculations Design
Parameter
α moment ALM Calculated based on moments

m
modification factor per distribution for individual
AS 4100 5.6.1.1. segments and sub-segments.
f tensile strength per AS FU Based on nominal steel grade

u
4100 2.1.2. specified using SGR design
parameter and section type.
f yield stress per AS 4100 FYLD Based on nominal steel grade

y
2.1.1. specified using SGR design
parameter and section type.
residual stress category IST Based on section type.

for AS 4100 Table 5.2 and
AS 4100 Table 6.2.4.
correction factor for KT Based on section type and eccentric

distribution of forces in a end connection specified using EEC
tension member per AS design parameter.
4100 7.3.
Load height position for LHT LHT is used for automating

automated calculation of calculation of kl load height factors
the kl load height factor for segments and sub-segments, per
per AS 4100 Table 5.6.3(2). AS 4100 Table 5.6.3(2).
See "Load Height Position" on page

43 for details.
Segment and sub- PBRACE Refer to the Segment and Sub-

segment layout. Segment Layout section above for
details.
Nominal steel grade. SGR Based on section types.
k twist restraint factor as SKT Based on effective end restraints for

t
per AS 4100 Table 5.6.3(1). each segment / sub-segment.
k load height factor as SKL Based on effective end restraints for

l
per AS 4100 Table 5.6.3(2). each segment / sub-segment, and
LHT design parameter (refer above).
k lateral rotation SKR Based on effective end restraints for

r
restraint factor as per AS each segment / sub-segment. This
4100 Table 5.6.3(3). is where the distinction between
“F” and “FR”, as well as “P” and
“PR” is used.
1B.12.5 Load Height Position

When LHT is set to 1.0 to specify a top flange load height position, STAAD.Pro takes the top to be
the positive local y-axis of the member.
Note: This may not literally be the top flange for say a column or beam with a beta angle. The
local member axes can be viewed in the GUI by selecting “Beam Orientation” in the Diagrams
Labels dialog (or Ctrl+O keyboard shortcut).
To automate kl using AS 4100 Table 5.6.3(2), the longitudinal position of the load also needs to be
considered, i.e., as either “within segment” or “at segment end”.
To determine which of these applies, the shear forces at the ends of each design segment / sub-
segment is considered. If the shear force is found to have the same direction and magnitude at
both ends, it is assumed that loads act at the segment end.
If on the other hand the shear force at each end is found to have different directions or
magnitudes, loads are assumed to act within the segment.
Note: The above method includes an allowance for the self-weight of the member to be
considered, as the self-weight always acts through the shear center.
The net sum of the end shears is also used to determine if the load is acting in the positive or
negative local member y-axis direction. If LHT is set to 1.0 for top flange loading, the net sum is
used to determine whether the top flange loading is acting to stabilise or destabilise the member
for lateral torsional buckling. Negative local y-axis net loads act to destabilise the segments / sub-
segments, whereas positive local y-axis net loads act to stabilise segments / sub-segments.
1B.12.6 Example
PARAMETER 1
CODE AUSTRALIAN
DMAX 0.4 PMEMBER ALL
DMIN 0.25 PMEMBER ALL
KX 0.75 PMEMBER ALL
KY 1.0 PMEMBER ALL
LX 4.5 PMEMBER ALL
LY 6.0 PMEMBER ALL
LHT 0.0 PMEMBER ALL
NSC 0.9 PMEMBER ALL
NSF 1.0 PMEMBER ALL
PBRACE BOTTOM 0.0 F 1.0 F PMEMBER ALL
PBRACE TOP 0.0 P 0.5 L 1.0 P PMEMBER ALL
SGR 0.0 PMEMBER ALL
TRACK 2.0 PMEMBER ALL
CHECK CODE PMEMBER ALL

2
British Codes

2 British Codes
2A. British Codes - Concrete Design per BS8110

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the British code BS8110-1:1997
Structural use of concrete - Part 1: Code of practice for design and construction. Given the width
and depth (or diameter for circular columns) of a section, the program will calculate the required
reinforcement to resist the forces and moments.
Design of members per BS8110-1:1997 requires the STAAD British Std Design Codes SELECT Code
Pack.
Note: It is strongly recommended that you perform new concrete design using the RC Designer
Module. The following is provided to allow old STAAD files to be run.

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform and control the design
to BS8110. These parameters not only act as a method to input required data for code calculations
but give the Engineer control over the actual design process. Default values of commonly used
parameters for conventional design practice have been chosen as the basis. Table 2A.1 contains a
complete list of available parameters with their default values.
Table 2A.1-British Concrete Design BS 8110 Parameters

Parameter Default Description
Name Value
CODE - Must be specified as BRITISH to invoke design per

BS8110.
Design Code to follow. See section 5.52.2 of the

BRACE 0.0 0.0 = Column braced in both directions.
1.0 = Column unbraced about local Z direction

only
2.0 = Column unbraced about local Y direction

only
3.0 = Column unbraced in both Y and Z

directions


Name Value
CLEAR 20 mm Clearance of reinforcement measured from

concrete surface to closest bar perimeter, in
current units.
DEPTH YD Depth of concrete member, in current units. This

value default is as provided as YD in MEMBER
PROPERTIES.
EFACE 0.0 Face of support location at end of beam, in

current units.
Note: Both SFACE & EFACE must be positive

numbers.
ELY 1.0 Member length factor about local Y direction for

column design.
ELZ 1.0 Member length factor about local Z direction for

column design.
FC 30 N/mm 2 Concrete Yield Stress / cube strength, in current

units
FYMAIN 460 N/mm 2 Yield Stress for main reinforcement, in current

units (For slabs, it is for reinforcement in both
directions)
FYSEC 460 N/mm 2 Yield Stress for secondary reinforcement a, in

current units. Applicable to shear bars in beams
MAX 50mm Maximum required reinforcement bar size

MAIN Acceptable bars are per MINMAIN above.
MINMAIN 8mm Minimum main reinforcement bar size Acceptable

bar sizes: 6 8 10 12 16 20 25 32 40 50
MINSEC 8mm Minimum secondary bar size a. Applicable to

shear reinforcement in beams
MMAG 1.0 Factor by which column design moments are

magnified

Name Value
NSE 10 Number of equally-spaced sections to be

CTION considered in finding critical moment for beam
design. The upper limit is 20.
SERV 0.0 Serviceability checks:
0.0 = No serviceability check

performed.
1.0 = Perform serviceability check

for beams as if they were
continuous.

for beams as if they were simply
supported.

for beams as if they were cantilever
beams.
SFACE 0.0 Face of support location at start of beam, in

current units. (Only applicable for shear - use
MEMBER OFFSET for bending )
SRA 0.0 0.0 = Orthogonal reinforcement layout without

considering torsional moment Mxy -slabs only
-500 = Orthogonal reinforcement layout with Mxy

used to calculate Wood & Armer moments for
design.
A = skew angle considered in Wood & Armer

equations where A is the angle in degrees.
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Critical Moment will not be printed with

beam design report. Column design gives no
detailed results.
1.0 = For beam gives min/max steel % and

spacing. For columns gives a detailed table of
output with additional moments calculated.
2.0 = Output of TRACK 1.0

List of design sag/hog moments and
corresponding required steel area at each section
of member

2A.2 Slenderness Effects and Analysis Considerations

Name Value
WIDTH ZD Width of concrete member, in current units. This

value default is as provided as ZD in MEMBER
PROPERTIES.

STAAD provides the user with two methods of accounting for the slenderness effects in the analysis
and design of concrete members. The first method is equivalent to the procedure presented in
BS8110 Part 1 1985 Section 3.8.2.2 In this section, the code recognizes that additional moments
induced by deflection are present and states that these 'secondary' moments are accounted for by
the design formula in Section 3.8.3. This is the method used in the design for concrete in STAAD.
Alternatively STAAD houses a PDELTA ANALYSIS facility, which allows the effects of these second
order moments to be considered in the analysis rather than the design. In a PDELTA analysis, after
solving the joint displacements of the structure, the additional moments induced in the structure
are calculated. These can be compared to those calculated using the formulation of BS8110.

Concrete members that are to be designed by STAAD must have certain section properties input
under the MEMBER PROPERTIES command. The following example demonstrates the required
input:
UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTIES
*RECTANGULAR COLUMN 300mm WIDE X 450mm DEEP
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 300.
*CIRCULAR COLUMN 300mm diameter
11 13 PR YD 300.
* T-SECTION - FLANGE 1000.X 200.(YD-YB)
* - STEM 250(THICK) X 350.(DEEP)
14 PRISM YD 550. ZD 1000. YB 350. ZB 250.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450mm depth x 300mm width) and
with 300mm diameter. Note that area (AX) is not provided for these members. If shear area areas (
AY & AZ ) are to be considered in analysis, the user may provide them along with YD and ZD. Also
note that if moments of inertias are not provided, the program will calculate them from YD and
ZD. Finally a T section can be considered by using the third definition above.
2A.4 Beam Design

Beam design includes both flexure and shear. For both types of beam action, all active beam
loadings are scanned to create moment and shear envelopes and locate the critical sections. The
total number of sections considered is ten, unless that number is redefined with the NSECTION
2A.4 Beam Design
parameter. From the critical moment values, the required positive and negative bar pattern is
developed with cut-off lengths calculated to include required development length.
Shear design as per BS8110 clause 3.4.5 has been followed and the procedure includes critical shear
values plus torsional moments. From these values, stirrup sizes are calculated with proper spacing.
The program will scan from each end of the member and provide a total of two shear regions at
each, depending on the change of shear distribution along the beam. If torsion is present, the
program will also consider the provisions of BS8110 - Part 2 -section 2.4. A table of shear and/or
combined torsion is then provided with critical shear.
Stirrups not bent up bars are assumed in the design. The example output below shows a sample
output of an actual reinforcement pattern developed by STAAD. The following annotations apply:
LEVEL
Serial number of the bar center which may contain one or more bar groups.
HEIGHT
Height of bar level from the soffit of the beam in relation to its local y axis.
BAR INFO
Reinforcement bar information specifying number of bars and their size.
FROM
Distance from the start of the beam to the start of the reinforcing bar.
TO
Distance from the start of the beam to the end of the reinforcing bar.
ANCHOR
States whether anchorage, either a hook or
(STA,END)
continuation, is needed at start (STA) or at the end (END).
The following is an example TRACK 2.0 beam design output:

====================================================================
B E A M N O. 13 D E S I G N R E S U L T S - FLEXURE
LEN - 1500. mm FY - 460. FC - 30. SIZE - 300. X 300. mm
LEVEL HEIGHT BAR INFO FROM TO ANCHOR
mm mm mm STA END
-------------------------------------------------------------------
1 29. 4- 8 MM 467. 1500. NO YES
2 264. 4- 8 MM 0. 1158. YES NO
REQUIRED REINF. STEEL SUMMARY :
-------------------------------
SECTION REINF STEEL(+VE/-VE) MOMENTS(+VE/-VE) LOAD(+VE/-VE)
( MM ) (SQ. MM ) (KN-METER)
0. 0.0/ 184.4 0.00/ 19.71 0/ 3
125. 0.0/ 157.2 0.00/ 16.80 0/ 3
250. 0.0/ 129.9 0.00/ 13.89 0/ 3
375. 0.0/ 117.0 0.00/ 10.98 0/ 3
500. 0.0/ 117.0 0.00/ 8.07 0/ 3
625. 0.0/ 117.0 0.00/ 5.16 0/ 3
750. 0.0/ 117.0 0.00/ 2.25 0/ 3
875. 117.0/ 0.0 2.15/ 0.00 1/ 0

2A.5 Column Design
1000. 117.0/ 0.0 5.25/ 0.00 1/ 0

1125. 117.0/ 0.0 8.36/ 0.00 1/ 0
1250. 117.0/ 0.0 11.46/ 0.00 1/ 0
1375. 136.3/ 0.0 14.57/ 0.00 1/ 0
1500. 165.3/ 0.0 17.67/ 0.00 1/ 0
B E A M N O. 13 D E S I G N R E S U L T S - SHEAR
PROVIDE SHEAR LINKS AS FOLLOWS
|----------------------------------------------------------------|
| FROM - TO | MAX. SHEAR | LOAD | LINKS | NO. | SPACING C/C |
|----------------|------------|------|-------|-----|-------------|
| END 1 749 mm | 24.8 kN | 1 | 8 mm | 5 | 187 mm |
| 749 END 2 | 24.8 kN | 1 | 8 mm | 5 | 187 mm |
|----------------------------------------------------------------|
___ 7J____________________ 1500.X 300.X 300_____________________ 8J____
| |
||========================================================= |
| 4No8 H 264. 0.TO 1158 | | | |
| 5*8 c/c187 | | | 5*8 c/c187 |
| 4No8 H |29. 467.TO 1500 | |
| ====================================================||
| |
|___________________________________________________________________________|
_______________ _______________ _______________ _______________
| | | | | | | |
| oooo | | oooo | | oooo | | |
| 4T8 | | 4T8 | | 4T8 | | |
| | | | | | | |
| | | 4T8 | | 4T8 | | 4T8 |
| | | oooo | | oooo | | oooo |
| | | | | | | |
|_______________| |_______________| |_______________| |_______________|
2A.5 Column Design

Columns are designed for axial force and biaxial bending at the ends. All active loadings are tested
to calculate reinforcement. The loading which produces maximum reinforcement is called the
critical load and is displayed. The requirements of BS8110 Part 1 - section 3.8 are followed, with the
user having control on the effective length in each direction by using the ELZ and ELY parameters
as described in Table 2A.1. Bracing conditions are controlled by using the BRACE parameter. The
program will then decide whether or not the column is short or slender and whether it requires
additional moment calculations. For biaxial bending, the recommendations of 3.8.4.5 of the code
are considered.
Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular sections. For rectangular and square
sections, the reinforcement is always assumed to be arranged symmetrically. This causes slightly
conservative results in certain cases. Below is a typical column design results.
Using parameter TRACK 1.0, the detailed output below is obtained. TRACK 0.0 would merely give
the bar configuration, required steel area and percentage, column size and critical load case.
====================================================================
C O L U M N N O. 1 D E S I G N R E S U L T S
FY - 460. FC -30. N/MM2 SQRE SIZE - 300. X 300. MM,
AREA OF STEEL REQUIRED = 940. SQ. MM.
BAR CONFIGURATION REINF PCT. LOAD LOCATION
----------------------------------------------------
12 10 MM 1.047 1 EACH END
(PROVIDE EQUAL NUMBER OF BARS AT EACH FACE)
----------------------------------------------------
|BRACED /SLENDER in z E.L.z= 4500 mm (3.8.1.3 & 5)|
2A.6 Slab Design
|BRACED /SLENDER in y E.L.y= 4500 mm (3.8.1.3 & 5)|

|END MOMS. MZ1= -12 MZ2= -24 MY1= -15 MY2= -31|
|SLENDERNESS MOMTS. KNM: MOMZ= 2 MOMY= 2 |
|DESIGN LOADS KN METER: MOM.= 55 AXIAL LOAD= 74|
|DESIGNED CAP. KN METER: MOM.= 55 AXIAL CAP.= 74|
----------------------------------------------------
2A.6 Slab Design

Slabs are designed to BS8110 specifications. To design a slab, it must first be modeled using finite
elements. The command specifications are in accordance with Section 5.52 of the Technical
Reference Manual.
A typical example of element design output is shown in below. The reinforcement required to resist
the Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the reinforcement required to resist
the My moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement ( Fig. 4.1 ). The following parameters are
those applicable to slab design:
FYMAIN
Yield stress for all reinforcing steel
FC
Concrete grade
CLEAR
Distance from the outer surface to the edge of the bar. This is considered the same on
both surfaces.
SRA
Parameter which denotes the angle of the required transverse reinforcement relative to
the longitudinal reinforcement for the calculation of Wood & Armer design moments.
Other parameters, as shown in Table 2A.1 are not applicable.
2A.6.1 Wood & Armer Equations

Reference: Armer, G.S.T., discussion on Wood, R.H., "The Reinforcement of Slabs in Accordance
with Pre-Determined Field of Moments," Concrete, Vol. 2, No. 2, (1968): 69-76.
If the default value of zero is used for the parameter SRA, the design will be based on the Mx and
My moments which are the direct results of STAAD analysis. The SRA parameter (Set
Reinforcement Angle) can be manipulated to introduce Wood & Armer moments into the design
replacing the pure Mx, My moments. These new design moments allow the Mxy moment to be
considered when designing the section. Orthogonal or skew reinforcement may be considered. SRA
set to -500 will assume an orthogonal layout. If however a skew is to be considered, an angle is
given in degrees measured anticlockwise (positive) from the element local x-axis to the
reinforcement bar. The resulting Mx* and My* moments are calculated and shown in the design
format.

2A.7 Shear Wall Design
The design of the slab considers a fixed bar size of 16 mm in both directions with the longitudinal
bar being the layer closest to the slab exterior face. Typical output is as follows:
ELEMENT DESIGN SUMMARY-BASED ON 16mm BARS
-----------------------------------------
MINIMUM AREAS ARE ACTUAL CODE MIN % REQUIREMENTS.
PRACTICAL LAYOUTS ARE AS FOLLOWS:
FY=460, 6No.16mm BARS AT 150mm C/C = 1206mm2/metre
FY=250, 4No.16mm BARS AT 250mm C/C = 804mm2/metre
ELEMENT LONG. REINF MOM-X /LOAD TRANS. REINF MOM-Y /LOAD
(mm2/m) (kN-m/m) (mm2/m) (kN-m/m)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
| WOOD & ARMER RESOLVED MOMENTS FOR ELEMENT: 47 UNITS: METRE kN |
| LOAD MX MY MXY MX* MY*/Ma* ANGLE |
| 1 -10.441 -13.347 1.270 0.000 0.000 0.000 TOP |
| 1 -10.441 -13.347 1.270 -11.710 -14.617 0.000 BOTT |
| 3 -9.541 -11.995 0.986 0.000 0.000 0.000 TOP |
| 3 -9.541 -11.995 0.986 -10.527 -12.981 0.000 BOTT |
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
47 TOP : 195. 0.00 / 0 195. 0.00 / 0
BOTT: 229. -11.71 / 1 329. -14.62 / 1

Design of shear walls in accordance with BS 8110 has been added to the features of the program.
The program implements the provisions of BS 8110 for the design of shear walls. It performs in-
plane shear, compression, as well as in-plane and out-of-plane bending design of reinforcing. The
shear wall is modeled by a single or a combination of Surface elements. The use of the Surface
element enables the designer to treat the entire wall as one entity. It greatly simplifies the
modeling of the wall and adds clarity to the analysis and design output. The results are presented
in the context of the entire wall rather than individual finite elements thereby allowing users to
quickly locate required information.
The program reports shear wall design results for each load case/combination for user specified
number of sections given by SURFACE DIVISION (default value is 10) command. The shear wall is
designed at these horizontal sections. The output includes the required horizontal and vertical
distributed reinforcing, the concentrated (in-plane bending) reinforcing and the link required due
to out-of-plane shear.
2A.7.1 Design Parameters

START SHEARWALL DESIGN
CODE BRITISH
shearwall-parameters
DESIGN SHEARWALL LIST shearwall-list
END
The next table explains parameters used in the shear wall design command block above.
Table 2A.2-Shear Wall Design Parameters

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
460
FYMAIN Yield strength of steel, in current units.
Mpa
Compressive strength of concrete, in current

FC 30 Mpa
units.
Minimum size of horizontal reinforcing bars

(range 6 mm – 36 mm). If input is 6 (integer
HMIN 6
number) the program will assume 6 mm
diameter bar.
Maximum size of horizontal reinforcing bars

(range 6 mm – 36 mm). If input is 6 (integer
HMAX 36
number) the program will assume 6 mm
diameter bar.
Minimum size of vertical reinforcing bars (range

VMIN 6 6mm – 36mm). If input is 6 (integer number)
the program will assume 6 mm diameter bar.
Maximum size of vertical reinforcing bars (range

VMAX 36 6mm – 36mm). If input is 6 (integer number)
the program will assume 6 mm diameter bar.
Minimum size of vertical reinforcing bars located

in edge zones (range 6mm – 36mm). If input is 6
EMIN 6
(integer number) the program will assume 6 mm
diameter bar.
Maximum size of vertical reinforcing bars located

in edge zones (range 6mm – 36mm). If input is 6
EMAX 36
(integer number) the program will assume 6 mm
diameter bar.
Minimum size of links (range 6mm – 16mm). If

LMIN 6 input is 6 (integer number) the program will
assume 6 mm diameter bar.
Maximum size of links (range 6mm – 16mm). If

LMAX 16 input is 6 (integer number) the program will

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
CLEAR 25 mm Clear concrete cover, in current units.
Reinforcement placement mode:

TWOLAYERED 0 0. single layer, each direction
1. two layers, each direction
KSLENDER 1.5 Slenderness factor for finding effective height.
1. Command SET DIVISION 12 indicates that the surface boundary node-to-node segments
will be subdivided into 12 fragments prior to finite element mesh generation.
2. Four surfaces are defined by the SURFACE INCIDENCES command.
3. The SUPPORTS command includes the new support generation routine. For instance, the
line 2 TO 5GEN PIN assigns pinned supports to all nodes between nodes 2 and 5. As the
node-to-node distances were previously subdivided by the SET DIVISION 12 command,
there will be an additional 11 nodes between nodes 2 and 5. As a result, all 13 nodes will be
assigned pinned supports. Please note that the additional 11 nodes are not individually
accessible to the user. They are created by the program to enable the finite element mesh
generation and to allow application of boundary constraints.
4. Surface thickness and material constants are specified by the SURFACE PROPERTY and
SURFACE CONSTANTS, respectively.
5. The shear wall design commands are listed between lines START SHEARWALL DES and
END. The CODE command selects the design code that will be the basis for the design. For
British code the parameter is BRITISH. The DESIGN SHEARWALL LIST command is
followed by a list of previously defined Surface elements intended as shear walls and/or shear
wall components.
2A.7.2 Technical Overview

The program implements provisions of section 3.9 of BS 8110:Part 1:1997 and relevant provisions as
referenced therein, for all active load cases. The wall is designed as unbraced reinforced wall. The
following steps are performed for each of the horizontal sections of the wall set using the SURFACE
DIVISION command (see Description above).
Checking of slenderness limit
The slenderness checking is done for out-of-plane direction. For out-of-plane direction, the wall is
assumed to be simply supported. Hence, the provisions of clause 3.9.3.2.2 and 3.9.4.2 are applicable.
The default effective height is 1.5 times the clear height. User can change the effective height. The
limit for slenderness is as per table 3.23 for unbraced wall, which is taken as 30.
Design for in-plane bending (denoted by Mz in the shear wall force output)
Walls are assumed to be cantilever beams fixed at their base and carrying loads to the foundation.
Extreme compression fibre to centroid of tension (concentrated) reinforcement distance, d, is taken

as 0.8 horizontal length of the wall. Flexural design of the wall is carried out in accordance with
the provisions of clause no. 3.4.4. The flexural (concentrated vertical ) reinforcing is located at both
ends (edges) of the length of the wall. The edge reinforcement is assumed to be distributed over a
length of 0.2 times horizontal length on each side. This length is inclusive of the thickness of the
wall. Minimum reinforcements are according to table 3.25.
Design for in-plane shear (denoted by Fxy in the shear wall force output)
Limit on the nominal shear strength, v is calculated as per clause no. 3.4.5.2.
Nominal shear strength of concrete is computed as per table 3.8.
The design shear stress is computed as per clause no. 3.4.5.12 taking into consideration the effect of
axial load. The area of reinforcement is calculated and checked against the minimum area as per
clause no. 3.12.7.4.
Design for compression and out-of-plane vertical bending
This is denoted by Fy and My respectively in the shear wall force output.
The wall panel is designed as simply supported (at top and bottom), axially loaded with out-of-
plane uniform lateral load, with maximum moments and deflections occurring at mid-height.
Design is done as per clause no. 3.8.4 for axially loaded column with uni-axial bending. The
minimum reinforcement percentage is as per table 3.25. The maximum reinforcement percentage of
vertical reinforcement is as per clause no. 3.12.6.3. Links if necessary are calculated as per the
provisions of clause 3.12.7.5.
Design for out-of-plane shear (denoted by Qy in the shear wall force output)
The out-of-plane shear arises from out-of-plane loading. The design shear stress is calculated as per
3.4.5.2 and shear strength of concrete section is calculated as per table 3.8 considering vertical
reinforcement as tension reinforcement.
Shear reinforcements in the form of links are computed as per table 3.7 and the provisions of clause
3.12.7.5.

Design for out-of-plane horizontal bending (denoted by Mx in the shear wall

force output)
The horizontal reinforcement already calculated from in-plane shear is checked against the whole
section subjected to out-of-plane bending and axial load. The axial load in this case is the in-plane
shear. The section is again designed as axially loaded column under uni-axial bending as per the
provisions of clause 3.8.4. Extra reinforcement in the form of horizontal bars, if necessary, is
reported.
2A.7.3 Example
The following example starts from the definition of shear wall and ends at the shear wall design.
⋮
SET DIVISION 12
SURFACE INCIDENCES
2 5 37 34 SUR 1
19 16 65 68 SUR 2
11 15 186 165 SUR 3
10 6 138 159 SUR 4
⋮
SURFACE PROPERTY
1 TO 4 THI 18
SUPPORTS
1 7 14 20 PINNED
2 to 5 gen pin
6 to 10 gen pin
11 to 15 gen pin
19 to 16 gen pin
⋮
SURFACE CONSTANTS
E 3150
POISSON 0.17
DENSITY 8.68e-005
ALPHA 5.5e-006
⋮
START SHEARWALL DES
CODE BRITISH
UNIT NEW MMS
FC 25
FYMAIN 460
TWO 1
VMIN 12
HMIN 12
EMIN 12
DESIGN SHEA LIST 1 TO 4
END
2A.7.4 Shear Wall Design With Opening

The Surface element has been enhanced to allow design of shear walls with rectangular openings.
The automatic meshing algorithm has been improved to allow variable divisions along wall and
opening(s) edges. Design and output are available for user selected locations.
Shear walls modeled in STAAD.Pro may include an unlimited number of openings. Due to the
presence of openings, the wall may comprise up with different wall panels.
Shear wall set-up
Definition of a shear wall starts with a specification of the surface element perimeter nodes,
meshing divisions along node-to-node segments, opening(s) corner coordinates, and meshing
divisions of four edges of the opening(s).
SURFACE INCIDENCE n1, ..., ni SURFACE s DIVISION sd1, ..., sdj -
RECOPENING x1 y1 z1 x2 y2 z2 x3 y3 z3 x4 y4 z4 DIVISION od1, ..., odk
Where:
n1, ..., ni - node numbers on the perimeter of the shear wall,
s - surface ordinal number,
sd1, ..., sdj - number of divisions for each of the node-to-node distance on the
surface perimeter,
x1 y1 z1 (...) - coordinates of the corners of the opening,
od1, ..., odk - divisions along edges of the opening.
Note: If the sd1, ..., sdj or the od1, ..., odk list does not include all node-to-node
segments, or if any of the numbers listed equals zero, then the corresponding
division number is set to the default value (=10, or as previously input by the SET
DIVISION command).
Default locations for stress/force output, design, and design output are set as follows:
SURFACE DIVISION X xd
SURFACE DIVISION Y yd
Where:
xd - number of divisions along X axis,
yd - number of divisions along Y axis.
Note: xd and yd represent default numbers of divisions for each edge of the surface where output
is requested. The output is provided for sections located between division segments. For example,
if the number of divisions = 2, then the output will be produced for only one section (at the
center of the edge).

Stress/force output printing
Values of internal forces may be printed out for any user-defined section of the wall. The general
format of the command is as follows:
PRINT SURFACE FORCE (ALONG ξ) (AT a) (BETWEEN d1, d2) LIST s1, ...,si
Where:
ξ - local axis of the surface element (X or Y),
a - distance along the ξ axis from start of the member to the full cross-
section of the wall,
d1, d2 - coordinates in the direction orthogonal to ξ, delineating a fragment of the

full cross-section for which the output is desired.**
s1, ...,si - list of surfaces for output generation
** The range currently is taken in terms of local axis. If the local axis is directed away from the
surface, the negative range is to be entered.
Note: If command ALONG is omitted, direction Y (default) is assumed. If command AT is

omitted, output is provided for all sections along the specified (or default) edge. Number of
sections will be determined from the SURFACE DIVISION X or SURFACE DIVISION Y input
values. If the BETWEEN command is omitted, the output is generated based on full cross-section
width.
Definition of wall panels
Input syntax for panel definition is as follows:
START PANEL DEFINITION
SURFACE i PANEL j ptype x1 y1 z1 x2 y2 z2 x3 y3 z3 x4 y4 z4
ENDPANEL DEFINITION
where:
i - ordinal surface number,
j - ordinal panel number,
ptype - WALL
x1 y1 z1 (...) - coordinates of the corners of the panel
Note: Design of COLUMN and BEAM panels is currently not available.
Shear wall design
The program implements different provisions of design of walls as per code BS 8110. General syntax
of the design command is as follows:
(...)
DESIGN SHEARWALL (AT c) LIST s
TRACK tr
ENDSHEARWALL DESIGN
Parameter TRACK specifies how detailed the design output should be:
0 - indicates a basic set of results data (default),
1 - full design output will be generated.
If the command AT is omitted, the design proceeds for all cross sections of the wall or panels, as
applicable, defined by the SURFACE DIVISION X or SURFACE DIVISION Y input values.
a. No panel definition.
Design is performed for the specified horizontal full cross-section, located at a distance c
from the origin of the local coordinates system. If opening is found then reinforcement is
provided along sides of openings. The area of horizontal and vertical bars provided along
edges of openings is equal to that of the respective interrupted bars.
b. Panels have been defined.
Design is performed for all panels, for the cross-section located at a distance c from the start
of the panel.

2B.1 General
2B. British Codes - Steel Design per BS5950:2000

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the British code BS 5950-1:2000
Structural use of steelwork in building - Part 1: Code of practice for design - Rolled and welded
sections, Incorporating Corrigendum No. 1.
Design of members per BS 5950-1:2000 requires the STAAD British Std Design Codes SELECT Code
Pack.
2B.1 General
The design philosophy embodied in BS5950:2000 is built around the concept of limit state design,
used today in most modern steel design codes. Structures are designed and proportioned taking
into consideration the limit states at which they become unfit for their intended use. Two major
categories of limit state are recognized - serviceability and ultimate. The primary considerations in
ultimate limit state design are strength and stability while that in serviceability limit state is
deflection. Appropriate safety factors are used so that the chances of limits being surpassed are
acceptably remote.
In the STAAD implementation of BS5950:2000, members are proportioned to resist the design loads
without exceeding the limit states of strength and stability. Accordingly, the most economic
section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria. This procedure is controlled by the
designer in specification of allowable member depths, desired section type or other such
parameters. The code checking portion of the program checks that code requirements for each
selected section are met and identifies the governing criteria.
The complete B.S.C. steel tables for both hot rolled and hollow sections are built into the program
for use in specifying member properties as well as for the actual design process. See section 2B.4 for
information regarding the referencing of these sections. In addition to universal beams, columns,
joists, piles, channels, tees, composite sections, beams with cover plates, pipes, tubes, and angles,
there is a provision for user provided tables.
STAAD.Pro 2006 and later have the additional option to design tapered I shaped (wide flange)
beams according to Annex G of BS5950. See Section 2B.13 for a complete description.
Single Angle Sections
Angle sections are un-symmetrical and when using BS 5950:2000 table 25 you must consider four
axes: two principal, u-u and v-v and two geometric, a-a and b-b. The effective length for the v-v
axis, Lvv, is taken as the LVV parameter or LY · KY, if not specified. The a-a and b-b axes are
determined by which leg of the angle is fixed by the connection and should be specified using the
LEG parameter, see section 5B.6 for more information on the LEG parameter. The effective length
in the a-a axis is taken as LY · KY and the effective length in the b-b axis as LZ · KZ.
The following diagram shows the axes for angles which have been defined with either an ST or RA
specification and is connected by its longer leg (i.e., a-a axis is parallel to the longer leg).

Figure 2B.1 - Axis orientation for single angles
ST angle and USER

RA angle
table angles

Elastic analysis method is used to obtain the forces and moments for design. Analysis is done for
the primary and combination loading conditions provided by the user. The user is allowed
complete flexibility in providing loading specifications and using appropriate load factors to create
necessary loading situations. Depending upon the analysis requirements, regular stiffness analysis or
P-Delta analysis may be specified. Dynamic analysis may also be performed and the results
combined with static analysis results.

For specification of member properties, the steel section library available in STAAD may be used.
The next section describes the syntax of commands used to assign properties from the built-in steel
table. Member properties may also be specified using the User Table facility. Any user-defined
section may be specified, except for GENERAL or PRISMATIC sections. For more information on these
facilities, refer to Section 1.7 the STAAD Technical Reference Manual.
2B.4 Built-In Steel Section Library

deformation is always considered during the analysis of these members.
Almost all BSI steel sections are available for input. A complete listing of the sections available in
the built-in steel section library may be obtained by using the tools of the graphical user interface.
Following are the descriptions of different types of sections available:
2B.4.1 Universal Beams, Columns, and Piles

All rolled universal beams, columns and pile sections are available. The following examples
illustrate the designation scheme.
20 TO 30 TA ST UB305X165X54
33 36 TA ST UC356X406X287
100 102 106 TA ST UP305X305X186
2B.4.2 Rolled Steel Joists

Joist sections may be specified as they are listed in BSI-80 with the weight omitted. In those cases
where two joists have the same specifications but different weights, the lighter section should be
specified with an "A" at the end.
10 TO 20 TA ST JO152X127
1 2 TA ST JO127X114A
2B.4.3 Channels
All rolled steel channel sections from the BSI table have been incorporated in STAAD. The
designation is similar to that of the joists. The same designation scheme as in BSI tables may be
used with the weight omitted.
10 TO 15 TA ST CH305X102
55 57 59 61 TA ST CH178X76

Back-to-back double channels, with or without spacing between them, are available. The letter "D"
in front of the section name will specify a double channel (e.g., D CH102X51, D CH203X89, etc.)
51 52 53 TA D CH152X89
70 TO 80 TA D CH305X102 SP 5.
(specifies a double channel with a spacing of 5 length units)
Note: Face-to-face double channels can not be used in a CHECK CODE command.
2B.4.5 Tee Sections

Tee sections are not input by their actual designations, but instead by referring to the universal
beam shapes from which they are cut. For example,

54 55 56 TA T UB254X102X22
(tee cut from UB254X102X22)
2B.4.6 Angles
All equal and unequal angles are available for analysis. Two types of specifications may be used to
describe an angle section, either a standard, ST specification or reversed angle, RA specification.
Note, however, that only angles specified with an RA specification can be designed.
The standard angle section is specified as follows:

15 20 25 TA ST UA200X150X18
This specification may be used when the local STAAD z-axis corresponds to the V-V axis specified
in the steel tables. If the local STAAD y-axis corresponds to the V-V axis in the tables, type
specification "RA" (reverse angle) may be used.
35 TO 45 TA RA UA200X150X18

Short leg back-to-back or long leg back-to-back double angles can be specified by inputting the
word SD or LD, respectively, in front of the angle size. In case of an equal angle, either LD or SD
will serve the purpose. For example,
14 TO 20 TA LD UA200X200X16 SP 1.5
23 27 TA SD UA80X60X6
"SP" denotes spacing between the individual angle sections.
Note: If the section is defined from a Double Angle User Table, then the section properties must
be defined with an 11th value which defines the radius of gyration about an individual sections’
principal v-v axis (See Technical Reference Manual, 5.19 User Steel Table Specification)

To designate circular hollow sections from BSI tables, use PIP followed by the numerical value of
diameter and thickness of the section in mm omitting the decimal section of the value provided
for diameter. The following example will illustrate the designation.
10 15 TA ST PIP213.2
(specifies a 21.3 mm dia. pipe with 3.2 mm wall thickness)
Circular hollow sections may also be provided by specifying the outside and inside diameters of the
section. For example,
(specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 and inside dia. of 20 in current length units)
Only code checking and no member selection will be performed if this type of specification is used.
2B.5 Member Capacities
2B.4.9 Rectangular or Square Hollow Sections (Tubes)

Designation of tubes from the BSI steel table is illustrated below:
Figure 2B.2 - BSI tube nomenclature
Example:
15 TO 25 TA ST TUB160808.0
Tubes, like pipes, can also be input by their dimensions (Height, Width and Thickness) and not by
any table designations.
(a tube that has a height of 8, a width of 6, and a wall thickness of 0.5 length units)
Note: Only code checking and no member selection is performed for TUBE sections specified this
way.

The basic measure of capacity of a beam is taken as the plastic moment of the section. This is a
significant departure from the standard practice followed in BS449, in which the limiting
condition was attainment of yield stress at the extreme fibres of a given section. With the
introduction of the plastic moment as the basic measure of capacity, careful consideration must be
given to the influence of local buckling on moment capacity. To assist this, sections are classified as
either Class 1, plastic, Class 2, compact, Class 3, semi-compact or Class 4, slender, which governs the
decision whether to use the plastic or the elastic moment capacity. The section classification is a
function of the geometric properties of the section. STAAD is capable of determining the section
classification for both hot rolled and built up sections. In addition, for slender sections, BS5950
recommends the use of a 'stress reduction factor' to reduce the design strength. This factor is again
a function of the geometry of the section and is automatically determined by STAAD for use in the
design process.
2B.5.1 Axial Tension

In members with axial tension, the tensile load must not exceed the tension capacity of the
member. The tension capacity of the member is calculated on the basis of the effective area as
outlined in Section 4.6 of the code. STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a given member per

this procedure, based on a user supplied net section factor (NSF-a default value of 1.0 is present but
may be altered by changing the input value - see Table 2B.1), proceeding with member selection or
code check accordingly. BS5950 does not have any slenderness limitations for tension members.
2B.5.2 Compression
Compression members must be designed so that the compression resistance of the member is
greater than the axial compressive load. Compression resistance is determined according to the
compressive strength, which is a function of the slenderness of the gross section, the appropriate
design strength and the relevant strut characteristics. Strut characteristics take into account the
considerable influence residual rolling and welding stresses have on column behavior. Based on
data collected from extensive research, it has been determined that sections such as tubes with low
residual stresses and Universal Beams and Columns are of intermediate performance. It has been
found that I-shaped sections are less sensitive to imperfections when constrained to fail about an
axis parallel to the flanges. These research observations are incorporated in BS5950 through the use
of four strut curves together with a selection of tables to indicate which curve to use for a
particular case. Compression strength for a particular section is calculated in STAAD according to
the procedure outlined in Annex C of BS5950 where compression strength is seen to be a function
of the appropriate Robertson constant ( representing Strut Curve) corresponding Perry factor,
limiting slenderness of the member and appropriate design strength.
A departure from BS5950:1990, generally compression members are no longer required to be

checked for slenderness limitations, however, this option can be included by specifying a MAIN
parameter. Note, a slenderness limit of 50 is still applied on double angles checked as battened
struts as per clause 4.7.9.
2B.5.3 Axially Loaded Members With Moments

In the case of axially loaded members with moments, the moment capacity of the member must be
calculated about both principal axes and all axial forces must be taken into account. If the section is
plastic or compact, plastic moment capacities will constitute the basic moment capacities subject to
an elastic limitation. The purpose of this elastic limitation is to prevent plasticity at working load.
For semi-compact or slender sections, the elastic moment is used. For plastic or compact sections
with high shear loads, the plastic modulus has to be reduced to accommodate the shear loads. The
STAAD implementation of BS5950 incorporates the procedure outlined in section 4.2.5 and 4.2.6 to
calculate the appropriate moment capacities of the section.
For members with axial tension and moment, the interaction formula as outlined in section 4.8.2 is
applied based on effective tension capacity.
For members with axial compression and moment, two principal interaction formulae must be
satisfied – Cross Section Capacity check (4.8.3.2) and the Member Buckling Resistance check (4.8.3.3
). Three types of approach for the member buckling resistance check have been outlined in
BS5950:2000 - the simplified approach (4.8.3.3.1), the more exact approach (4.8.3.3.2) and Annex I1
for stocky members. As noted in the code, in cases where neither the major axis nor the minor axis
moment approaches zero, the more exact approach may be more conservative than the simplified
approach. It has been found, however, that this is not always the case and STAAD therefore
performs both checks, comparing the results in order that the more appropriate criteria can be
used.
Additionally the equivalent moment factors, m m and m , can be specified by the user or
x y yx
calculated by the program.
Members subject to biaxial moments in the absence of both tensile and compressive axial forces are
checked using the appropriate method described above with all axial forces set to zero. STAAD also
carries out cross checks for compression only, which for compact/plastic sections may be more
critical. If this is the case, COMPRESSION will be the critical condition reported despite the
presence of moments.
2B.5.4 Shear
A member subjected to shear is considered adequate if the shear capacity of the section is greater
than the shear load on the member. Shear capacity is calculated in STAAD using the procedure
outlined in section 4.2.3, also 4.4.5 and Annex H3 if appropriate, considering the appropriate shear
area for the section specified.
2B.5.5 Lateral Torsional Buckling

Since plastic moment capacity is the basic moment capacity used in BS5950, members are likely to
experience relatively large deflections. This effect, coupled with lateral torsional buckling, may
result in severe serviceability limit state. Hence, lateral torsional buckling must be considered
carefully.
The procedure to check for lateral torsional buckling as outlined in section 4.3 has been
incorporated in the STAAD implementation of BS5950. According to this procedure, for a member
subjected to moments about the major axis, the 'equivalent uniform moment' on the section must
be less than the lateral torsional buckling resistance moment. For calculation of the buckling
resistance moment, the procedure outlined in Annex B.2 has been implemented for all sections
with the exception of angles. In Annex B.2., the resistance moment is given as a function of the
elastic critical moment, Perry coefficient, and limiting equivalent slenderness, which are calculated
within the program; and the equivalent moment factor, m , which is determined as a function of
LT
the loading configuration and the nature of the load (stabilizing, destabilizing, etc).
2B.5.6 RHS Sections - Additional Provisions

Rectangular Hollow sections are treated in accordance with S.C.I. recommendations in cases when
the plastic axis is in the flange. In such cases, the following expressions are used to calculate the
reduced plastic moduli:
For n ≥ 2t(D-2t)/A
A
2
  2D (B − t ) 
S rx = 1 − n  + n − 1
4(B − t )  A
  
For n ≥ 2t(B-2t)/A

A
2
  2B (D − t ) 
S ry = 1 − n  + n − 1
4(D − t )  A
  

Available design parameters to be used in conjunction with BS5950 are listed in table 2B.1 along
with their default values.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number till it is specified
Table 2B.1-British Steel Design BS5950:2000 Parameters

Parameter
Default Value Description
Name
Must be specified as BS5950

CODE -
See section 5.48.1 of the Technical
Reference Manual.
Distance between the reference axis and

AD Depth at end/2
the axis of restraint. See G.2.3
Beam divisions
0. Design only for end moments or

those locations specified by the
SECTION command.
1. Calculate forces and moments at
12th points along the member.
Establish the location where Mz
is the maximum. Use the forces
and moments at that location.
BEAM 3.0
Clause checks at one location.
2. Same as BEAM = 1.0 but
additional checks are carried out
for each end.
3. Calculate moments at 12th points
along the member. Clause
checks at each location
including the ends of the
member.
Parameter
Name
Deflection check method. See Note 1

below.
0. Deflection check based on the

principle that maximum
deflection occurs within the
CAN 0
span between DJ1 and DJ2.
1. Deflection check based on the
deflection is of the cantilever
type (see note below)
Specifies the method used to calculate

Mb.
1. Value of Mb from Clause 4.3.6 is

CB 1
used (default).
2. Value of Mbs from Clause 4.7.7 is
used.
None "Deflection Length" / Maxm. allowable

(Mandatory for local deflection
DFF
deflection check,
TRACK 4.0) See Note 1d below.
Joint No. denoting starting point for

Start Joint calculation of "Deflection Length."
DJ1
of member
See Note 1 below.
Joint No. denoting end point for

End Joint of calculation of "Deflection Length."
DJ2
member
See Note 1 below.
DMAX * 100.0cm Maximum allowable depth
DMIN * 0.0 cm Minimum allowable depth
Clauses 4.8.3.3.1 and 4.8.3.3.2
0.0 = Fail ratio uses MIN

of 4.8.3.3.1, 4.8.3.3.2. and
ESTIFF 0.0 Annex I1 checks.
1.0 = Fail ratio uses MAX

of 4.8.3.3.1, 4.8.3.3.2. and
Annex I1 checks.

Parameter
Name
K factor value in local y - axis. Usually,

KY 1.0
this is the minor axis.
K factor value in local z - axis. Usually,

KZ 1.0
this is the major axis.
Valid range from 0 – 7 and 10. The

values correspond to table 25 of BS5950
LEG 0.0
for fastener conditions. See note 2
below.
Maximum of Lyy
and Lzz Used in conjunction with LEG for Lvv

LVV * (Lyy is a term as per BS5950 table 25 for double
angles. See note 6 below.
used
by BS5950)
Length in local y - axis (current units)

LY * Member Length to calculate (KY)(LY)/Ryy slenderness
ratio.
Length in local z - axis (current units)

LZ * Member Length to calculate (KZ)(LZ)/Rzz slenderness
ratio.
Equivalent moment factor for lateral

MLT 1.0 torsional buckling as defined in clause
4.8.3.3.4
Equivalent moment factor for major

MX 1.0 axis flexural buckling as defined in
clause 4.8.3.3.4
Equivalent moment factor for minor

MY 1.0 axis flexural buckling as defined in
clause 4.8.3.3.4
Equivalent moment factor for minor

MYX 1.0 axis lateral flexural buckling as defined
in clause 4.8.3.3.4
NSF 1.0 Net section factor for tension members.
Parameter
Name
Transverse stiffener spacing (‘a’ in

Annex H1)
PNL * 0.0 0.0 = Infinity
Any other value used in the

calculations.
Set according to
PY * Design strength of steel
steel grade (SGR)
Slenderness limit for members with

compression forces, effective length/
radius of gyration, for a given axis:
0.0 = Slenderness not

performed.
MAIN 0.0
1.0 = Main structural
member (180)
2.0 = Secondary member.

(250)
3.0 = Bracing etc (350)
Permissible ratio of the actual

RATIO 1.0
capacities.
Controls the sections to try during a

SELECT process.
0.0 = Try every section of

the same type as original
1.0 = Try only those

SAME** 0.0 sections with a similar
name as original, e.g., if
the original is an HEA
100, then only HEA
sections will be selected,
even if there are HEM’s in
the same table.

Parameter
Name
Identify Section type for section

classification
0.0 = Rolled Section

SBLT 0.0
1.0 = Built up Section
2.0 = Cold formed

section
Specifies a load case number to provide

SWAY none the sway loading forces in clause
4.8.3.3.4 (See additional notes)
Steel Grade per BS4360
0.0 = Grade S 275
1.0 = Grade S 355

SGR 0.0
2.0 = Grade S 460
3.0 = As per GB 1591 – 16

Mn
LImit of moment capacity in Cl 4.2.5.1:
TB 0.0 0 = Mc limit 1.5pyZ
1= Mc limit 1.2 pyZ
Output details
0.0 = Suppress all

member capacity info.
1.0 = Print all member

capacities.
TRACK 0.0
2.0 = Print detailed
design sheet.
4.0 = Deflection Check

(separate check to main
select / check code)
Factor applied to unsupported length

UNF 1.0 for Lateral Torsional Buckling effective
length per section 4.3.6.7 of BS5950.
Parameter
Name
Unsupported Length for calculating

UNL * Member Length Lateral Torsional Buckling resistance
moment section 4.3.6.7 of BS5950.
Weld Type, see AISC steel design
1.0 = Closed sections.

Welding on one side only
1.0 closed (except for webs of wide
WELD
2.0 open flange and tee sections)
2.0 = Open sections.

Welding on both sides
(except pipes and tubes)
* current units must be considered.
**For angles, if the original section is an equal angle, then the selected section will be an equal
angle and vice versa for unequal angles.
Note: There was an NT parameter in STAAD.Pro 2005 build 1003 which is now automatically
calculated during the design as it is load case dependant.
2B.6.1 Notes
1. CAN, DJ1, and DJ2 – Deflection
a. When performing the deflection check, you can choose between two methods. The
first method, defined by a value 0 for the CAN parameter, is based on the local
displacement. Local displacement is described in Section 5.44 of the Technical
Reference Manual.
If the CAN parameter is set to 1, the check will be based on cantilever style deflection.
Let (DX1, DY1, DZ1) represent the nodal displacements (in global axes) at the node
defined by DJ1 (or in the absence of DJ1, the start node of the member). Similarly,
(DX2, DY2, DZ2) represent the deflection values at DJ2 or the end node of the
member.
Compute Length = distance between DJ1 & DJ2 or, between start node and end node,
as the case may be.
Then, if CAN is specified a value 1, dff = L/Delta
Ratio due to deflection = DFF/dff

b. If CAN = 0, deflection length is defined as the length that is used for calculation of
local deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the
“Deflection Length” will be equal to the length of the member. However, in some
situations, the “Deflection Length” may be different. A straight line joining DJ1 and
DJ2 is used as the reference line from which local deflections are measured.

PARAMETERS
DFF 300. ALL
DJ1 1 ALL
DJ2 4 ALL
c. If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member length
d. It is important to note that unless a DFF value is specified, STAAD will not perform a
DFF.
e. The above parameters may be used in conjunction with other available parameters for
steel design.
2. LEG – follows the requirements of BS5950 table 28. This table concerns the fastener restraint
conditions for angles, double angles, tee sections and channels for slenderness. The following
values are available:
Table 2B.2- LEG Parameter values
Bold LEG
Clause Leg
Configuration Parameter
short leg 1.0

(a) - 2 bolts
4.7.10.2 long leg 3.0
Single Angle short leg 0.0

(b) - 1 bolts
long leg 2.0
Bold LEG
Clause Leg
short leg 3.0

(a) - 2 bolts
long leg 7.0
short leg 2.0

(b) - 1 bolts
4.7.10.3 Double long leg 6.0
Angles long leg 1.0
(c) - 2 bolts
short leg 5.0
long leg 0.0

(d) - 1 bolts
short leg 4.0
(a) - 2 or more rows of bolts 1.0

4.7.10.4 Channels
(b) - 1 row of bolts 0.0
(a) - 2 or more rows of bolts 1.0

4.7.10.5 Tee Sections
The slenderness of single and double angle, channel and tee sections are specified in BS 5950
table 25 depending on the connection provided at the end of the member. To define the
appropriate connection, a LEG parameter should be assigned to the member.
The following list indicates the value of the LEG parameter required to match the BS5950
connection definition:
Clause 4.7.10.2 Single Angle:

a. 2 Bolts: Short leg = 1.0, Long Leg = 3.0
b. 1 Bolt: Short Leg = 0.0, Long Leg = 2.0
For single angles, the slenderness is calculated for the geometric axes, a-a and b-b as well as
the weak v-v axis. The effective lengths of the geometric axes are defined as:
La = KY * KY
Lb = KZ * LZ
The slenderness calculated for the v-v axis is then used to calculate the compression strength
p for the weaker principal axis (z-z for ST angles or y-y for RA specified angles). The
c
maximum slenderness of the a-a and b-b axes is used to calculate the compression strength
p for the stronger principal axis.
c

Alternatively for single angles where the connection is not known or Table 25 is not
appropriate, by setting the LEG parameter to 10, slenderness is calculated for the two
principal axes y-y and z-z only. The LVV parameter is not used.
For double angles, the LVV parameter is available to comply with note 5 in table 25. In
addition, if using double angles from user tables, (Technical Reference Manual section 5.19)
an eleventh value, r , should be supplied at the end of the ten existing values corresponding
vv
to the radius of gyration of the single angle making up the pair.
3. PY – Steel Design Strength
The design parameter PY should only be used when a uniform design strength for an entire
structure or a portion thereof is required. Otherwise the value of PY will be set according to
the stipulations of BS5950 table 9 in which the design strength is seen as a function of cross
sectional thickness for a particular steel grade (SGR parameter) and particular element
considered. Generally speaking this option is not required and the program should be
allowed to ascertain the appropriate value.
4. UNL, LY, and LZ – Relevant Effective Length
The values supplied for UNL, LY and LZ should be real numbers greater than zero in current
units of length. They are supplied along with or instead of UNF, KY and KZ (which are
factors, not lengths) to define lateral torsional buckling and compression effective lengths
respectively. Please note that both UNL or UNF and LY or KY values are required even
though they are often the same values. The former relates to compression flange restraint for
lateral torsional buckling while the latter is the unrestrained buckling length for
compression checks.
5. TRACK – Control of Output Formats
When the TRACK parameter is set to 0.0, 1.0, or 2.0, member capacities will be printed in
design related output (code check or member selection) in kilonewtons per square meter.
TRACK 4.0 causes the design to carry out a deflection check, usually with a different load
list to the main code check. The members that are to be checked must have the parameters
DFF, DJ1, and DJ2 set.
6. MX, MY, MYX, and MLT – Equivalent Moment Factors
The values for the equivalent moment factors can either be specified directly by the user as a
positive value between 0.4 and 1.0 for MX, MY and MYX and 0.44 and 1.0 for MLT.
The program can be used to calculate the values for the equivalent moment factors by
defining the design member with a GROUP command (see the Technical Reference Manual
section 5.16 Listing of Members/Elements/Joints by Specification of GROUPS). The nodes
along the beam can then be defined as the location of restraint points with J settings.
Additionally for the MLT parameter, the joint can be defined as having the upper flange
restrained (positive local Y) with the a U setting or the lower flange restrained (negative
local Y) with a L setting.
For example, consider a series of 5 beam elements as a single continuous member as shown
below:
To enable the steel design, the beam needs to be defined as a group, called MainBeam:
START GROUP DEFINITION
MEMBER
_MainBeam 11 2 38 12 3
END GROUP DEFINITION
Note: This can be done in the User Interface by selecting Tools > Create New Group….
Therefore, this 5 beam member has 6 joints such that:
Joint 1 = Node 3
Joint 2 = Node 1
Joint 3 = Node 33
Joint 4 = Node 14
Joint 5 = Node 7
Joint 6 = Node 2
a. Consider MX, MY and MYX
Say that this member has been restrained in its’ major axis (local Y) only at the ends.
In the minor axis (local Z) it has been restrained at the ends and also at node number

33 (joint 3). For local flexural buckling, it has only been restrained at its ends.
Hence:
For the major axis, local Y axis:
MX _MainBeam J1 J6
For the minor axis, local Z axis:
MY _ MainBeam J1 J3 J6
For the lateral flexural buckling, local X axis:
MYX _ MainBeam J1 J6
b. Consider MLT
Say that this member has been restrained at its’ ends against lateral torsional buckling and
the top flange has been restrained at node number 33 (joint 3) and only the lower flange at
node number 7, (joint 5). Hence:
MLT _MainBeam J1 T3 L5 J6
To split the beam into two buckling lengths for L at joint 14:
y
MY _groupname J1 J4 J6
7. SWAY – Sway Loadcase
This parameter is used to specify a load case that is to be treated as a sway load case in the
context of clause 4.8.3.3.4. This load case would be set up to represent the k M
amp s
mentioned in this clause and the steel design module would add the forces from this load
case to the forces of the other load case it is designed for.
Note that the load case specified with this parameter will not be designed as a separate load
case. The following is the correct syntax for the parameter:
Parameter Default Value Description

Name
SWAY (load case ALL

number)
MEMBER (member list)
_(group name)
Example
SWAY 5 MEM 1 to 10
SWAY 6 _MainBeams
2B.7 Design Operations

STAAD contains a broad set of facilities for the design of structural members as individual
components of an analyzed structure. The member design facilities provide the user with the ability
to carry out a number of different design operations. These facilities may be used selectively in
accordance with the requirements of the design problem.
The operations to perform a design are:
l Specify the load cases to be considered in the design; the default is all load cases.
l Specify design parameter values, if different from the default values.
l Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection along with the list of
members.
These operations may be repeated by the user any number of times depending upon the design
requirements.
2B.8 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to ascertain whether the provided section properties of the
members are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per BS5950. Code checking is done using the
forces and moments at specific sections of the members. If no sections are specified, the program
uses the start and end forces for code checking.
When code checking is selected, the program calculates and prints whether the members have
passed or failed the checks; the critical condition of BS5950 code (like any of the BS5950
specifications for compression, tension, shear, etc.); the value of the ratio of the critical condition
(overstressed for value more than 1.0 or any other specified RATIO value); the governing load case,
and the location (distance from the start of the member of forces in the member where the critical
condition occurs).
Code checking can be done with any type of steel section listed in Section 2B.4 or any of the user
defined sections as described in Section 1.7.3 of the Technical Reference Manual, except profiles
defined in GENERAL and ISECTION tables.
Note: PRISMATIC sections are also not acceptable steel sections for design per BS5950 in
STAAD.Pro.
Checking command.

STAAD is capable of performing design operations on specified members. Once an analysis has been
performed, the program can select the most economical section, i.e., the lightest section, which

fulfills the code requirements for the specified member. The section selected will be of the same
type section as originally designated for the member being designed. Member selection can also be
constrained by the parameters DMAX and DMIN, which limits the maximum and minimum depth
of the members.
Member selection can be performed with all the types of steel sections with the same limitations as
defined in section 2B.8 Code Checking.
Selection of members, whose properties are originally input from a user created table, will be
limited to sections in the user table.
Member selection cannot be performed on members whose section properties are input as prismatic
or as above limitations for code checking.

For code checking or member selection, the program produces the results in a tabulated fashion.
The items in the output table are explained as follows:
MEMBER
refers to the member number for which the design is performed.
TABLE
refers to steel section name, which has been checked against the steel code or has been
selected.
RESULTS
prints whether the member has PASSED or FAILED. If the RESULT is FAIL, there will be
an asterisk (*) mark on front of the member.
CRITICAL COND
refers to the section of the BS5950 code which governs the design.
RATIO
prints the ratio of the actual stresses to allowable stresses for the critical condition.
Normally a value of 1.0 or less will mean the member has passed.
LOADING
provides the load case number, which governed the design
FX, MY, and MZ

provide the axial force, moment in local Y-axis and the moment in local z-axis
respectively. Although STAAD does consider all the member forces and moments (except
torsion) to perform design, only FX, MY and MZ are printed since they are the ones
which are of interest, in most cases.
LOCATION
specifies the actual distance from the start of the member to the section where design
forces govern.
TRACK
If the parameter TRACK is set to 1.0, the program will block out part of the table and will
print the allowable bending capacities in compression (MCY & MCZ) and reduced
moment capacities (MRY & MRZ), allowable axial capacity in compression (PC) and
tension (PT) and shear capacity (PV). TRACK 2.0 will produce the design results as
shown in section 2B.9.
An example of each TRACK setting follows:
2B.10.1 Example output for TRACK 0.0

MEMBER TABLE RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST UC305X305X118 PASS BS-4.3.6 0.769 3
179.66 C 0.00 334.46 0.00

FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST UC305X305X118 PASS BS-4.3.6 0.769 3
179.66 C 0.00 334.46 0.00
|---------------------------------------------------------------------|
| CALCULATED CAPACITIES FOR MEMB 1 UNIT - kN,m SECTION CLASS 1 |
|MCZ= 519.4 MCY= 234.3 PC= 2455.9 PT= 0.0 MB= 435.0 PV= 600.1|
| BUCKLING CO-EFFICIENTS mLT = 1.00, mx = 1.00, my = 1.00, myx = 1.00 |
| PZ= 3975.00 FX/PZ = 0.05 MRZ= 516.9 MRY= 234.3 |
|---------------------------------------------------------------------|

FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST UC305X305X118 PASS BS-4.3.6 0.769 3
179.66 C 0.00 334.46 0.00
=======================================================================
MATERIAL DATA
Grade of steel = S 275
Modulus of elasticity = 210 kN/mm2
Design Strength (py) = 265 N/mm2
SECTION PROPERTIES (units - cm)

2B.11 Plate Girders
Member Length = 600.00

Gross Area = 150.00 Net Area = 127.50 Eff. Area = 150.00
z-z axis y-y axis
Moment of inertia : 27700.004 9060.001
Plastic modulus : 1960.000 895.000
Elastic modulus : 1761.526 589.460
Effective modulus : 1960.000 895.000
Shear Area : 103.471 37.740
DESIGN DATA (units - kN,m) BS5950-1/2000
Section Class : PLASTIC
Squash Load : 3975.00
Axial force/Squash load : 0.045
z-z axis y-y axis
Compression Capacity : 3551.7 2455.9
Moment Capacity : 519.4 234.3
Reduced Moment Capacity : 516.9 234.3
Shear Capacity : 1645.2 600.1
BUCKLING CALCULATIONS (units - kN,m)
(axis nomenclature as per design code)
x-x axis y-y axis
Slenderness : 44.153 77.203
Radius of gyration (cm) : 13.589 7.772
Effective Length : 6.000 6.000
LTB Moment Capacity (kNm) and LTB Length (m): 435.00, 6.000
LTB Coefficients & Associated Moments (kNm):
mLT = 1.00 : mx = 1.00 : my = 1.00 : myx = 1.00
Mlt = 334.46 : Mx = 334.46 : My = 0.00 : My = 0.00
CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (units- kN,m):
CLAUSE RATIO LOAD FX VY VZ MZ MY
BS-4.2.3-(Y) 0.143 3 - 85.6 - - -
BS-4.3.6 0.769 3 - 85.6 - 334.5 -
BS-4.7 (C) 0.098 1 239.7 - - - -
BS-4.8.3.2 0.647 3 179.7 85.6 0.0 334.5 0.0
BS-4.8.3.3.1 0.842 3 179.7 - - 334.5 0.0
BS-4.8.3.3.2 0.842 3 179.7 - - 334.5 0.0
ANNEX I.1 0.714 3 179.7 - - 334.5 0.0
Torsion and deflections have not been considered in the design.
2B.11 Plate Girders

Sections will be considered for the Plate Girder checks (BS 5950 Section 4.4) if d/t > 70 ε for ‘rolled
sections’ or d/t >62 ε for ‘welded sections’. The parameter SBLT should be used to identify sections
as rolled or welded; see the parameter list for more information.
If the plate girder has intermediate stiffeners, the spacing is set with the PNL parameter. These are
then used to check against the code clauses ‘4.4.3.2 - Minimum web thickness for serviceability’
and ‘4.4.3.3 - Minimum web thickness to avoid compression flange buckling’. The following
printout is then included if a TRACK 2.0 output is selected:
Shear Buckling check is required: Vb = 1070 kN : qw = 118 N/mm2
d = 900 mm : t = 10 mm : a = 200 mm : pyf = 275 N/mm2
BS-4.4.3.2 status = PASS : BS-4.4.3.3 status = PASS
The section is then checked for shear buckling resistance using clause ‘4.4.5.2 - Simplified method’
and the result is included in the ratio checks.
2B.12 Composite Sections
2B.12 Composite Sections

Sections that have been defined as acting compositely with a concrete flange either from a standard
database section using the CM option, or from a modified user WIDE FLANGE database with the
additional composite parameters, cannot be designed with BS5950:2000.
2B.13 Design of Tapered Beams

Sections will be checked as tapered members provided that are defined either as a Tapered I section
or from a USER table.
Example using a Tapered I section:

UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 TO 5 TAPERED 100 2.5 75 25 4 25 4
Example using a USER table:

START USER TABLE
TABLE 1
UNIT CM
ISECTION
1000mm_TAPER
100 2.5 75 25 4 25 4 0 0 0
750mm_TAPER
75 2.5 50 25 4 25 4 0 0 0
END
You must specify the effective length of unrestrained compression flange using the parameter UNL.
The program compares the resistance of members with the applied load effects, in accordance with
BS 5950-1:2000. Code checking is carried out for locations specified by the user via the SECTION
command or the BEAM parameter. The results are presented in a form of a PASS/FAIL identifier and
a RATIO of load effect to resistance for each member checked. The user may choose the degree of
detail in the output data by setting the TRACK parameter.
The beam is designed as other wide flange beams apart from the Lateral Torsional Buckling check
which is replaced by the Annex G.2.2. check.
2B.13.1 Design Equations

A beam defined with tapered properties as defined above will be checked as a regular wide flange
(e.g., UB or UC), except that the following is used in place of clause 4.3.6, the lateral torsional
buckling check.
2B.13.2 Check Moment for Taper Members as per clause G.2.2

The following criterion is checked at each defined check position in the length of the member
defined by the BEAM parameter.
Mxi ≤ Mbi (1 - Fc/Pc)

Where:
F is the longitudinal compression at the check location;

c
M is the buckling resistance moment M from 4.3.6 for an equivalent slenderness
bi b
λ , see G.2.4.2, based on the appropriate modulus S, S , Z or Z of the cross-section
TB eff eff
at the point i considered;
M is the moment about the major axis acting at the point i considered;
xi
P is the compression resistance from 4.7.4 for a slenderness λ . , see G.2.3, based on
c TC y
the properties of the minimum depth of cross-section within the segment length L
2B.13.3 G.2.3 Slenderness lTC

λTC = yλ
Where:
0.5
 1 + (2a / h s )
2

y= 2 2
 1 + (2a / h s ) + 0.05( λ / x ) 
λ = Ly /ry
Where:
a is the distance between the reference axis and the axis of restraint,
h is the distance between the shear centers of the flanges;

s
L is the length of the segment;
y
r is the radius of gyration for buckling about the minor axis;
y
x is the torsional index
2B.13.4 G.2.4.2 Equivalent slenderness ITB for tapered members

λTB = cntνtλ
Where, for a two-flange haunch:

0.5
 4a / h s 
vt =  2 2
 1 + (2a / h s ) + 0.05(λ / x ) 
Where:
C is the taper factor, see G.2.5;
2B.13.5 G.2.5 Taper factor

For an I-section with D ≥ 1.2B and x ≥ 20, the taper factor, c, is as follows:
2/ 3
c = 1+
3
x− 9 ( D m ax
D m in )
−1
Where:
D is the maximum depth of cross-section within the length Ly, see Figure G.3;
max
D is the minimum depth of cross-section within the length Ly, see Figure G.3;
min
x is the torsional index of the minimum depth cross-section, see 4.3.6.8
Otherwise, c is taken as 1.0 (unity).

2C.1 General Comments
2C. British Codes - Design per BS5400

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the British code BS 5400:Part 3:1982 Steel,
concrete and composite bridges Part 3. Code of practice for design of steel bridges and Amd No.
4051 and Amd No. 6488.
Design of members per BS 5400:Part 3:1982 requires the STAAD British Specialized Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack. It does not come as standard with British versions.

The British Standard, BS5400 adopts the limit state design philosophy and is applicable to steel,
concrete, and composite construction. The code is in ten parts covering various aspects of bridge
design. The implementation of part 3, Code of practice for design of steel bridges, in STAAD is
restricted in its scope to simply supported spans. It is assumed that the depth remains constant and
both construction and composite stages of steel I-Sections can be checked. The following sections
describe in more detail features of the design process currently available in STAAD.
2C.2 Shape Limitations

The capacity of sections could be limited by local buckling if the ratio of flange outstand to
thickness is large. In order to prevent this, the code sets limits to the ratio as per clause 9.3.2. In the
event of exceeding these limits, the design process will terminate with reference to the clause.
2C.3 Section Class

Sections are further defined as compact or noncompact. In the case of compact sections, the full
plastic moment capacity can be attained. In the case of noncompact sections, local buckling of
elements may occur prior to reaching the full moment capacity and for this reason the extreme
fibre stresses are limited to first yield. In STAAD, section types are determined as per clause 9.3.7
and the checks that follow will relate to the type of section considered.
2C.4 Moment Capacity

Lateral torsional buckling may occur if a member has unrestrained elements in compression. The
code deals with this effect by limiting the compressive stress to a value depending on the
slenderness parameter which is a modified form of the ratio Le/Ry. Le is the effective length
governed by the provision of lateral restraints satisfying the requirements of clause 9.12.1. Once the
allowable compressive stress is determined then the moment capacity appropriate to the section
type can be calculated. STAAD takes the effective length as that provided by the user, defaulting to
the length of the member during construction stage and as zero, assuming full restraint
throughout, for the composite stage. The program then proceeds to calculate the allowable
compressive stress based on appendix G7 from which the moment capacity is then determined.

2C.5 Shear Capacity
2C.5 Shear Capacity

The shear capacity, as outlined in clause is a function of the limiting shear strength, l, which is
dependant on the slenderness ratio. STAAD follows the iterative procedure of appendix G8 to
determine the limiting shear strength of the web panel. The shear capacity is then calculated based
on the formula given under clause 9.9.2.2.
2C.6 Design Parameters

Available design parameters to be used in conjunction with BS5400 are listed in table 2C.1.
Depending on the value assigned to the WET parameter, you can determine the stage under
consideration. For a composite design check, taking into consideration the construction stage, two
separate analyses are required. In the first, member properties are non-composite and the WET
parameter is set to 1.0 . In the second, member properties should be changed to composite and the
WET parameter set to 2.0. Member properties for composite or non-composite sections should be
specified from user provided tables (refer to section 5.19 of the manual for specification of user
tables). Rolled sections, composite or non-composite, come under WIDE FLANGE section-type and
built-up sections under ISECTION. When specifying composite properties the first parameter is
assigned a negative value and four additional parameters provided giving details of the concrete
section. See user table examples provided.
Table 2C.1-BS5400 Design Parameters

Name Value
ESTIFF 0 Specify the criteria used for the design of compression

members with moments.
0. Member passes if either Cl. 4.8.3.3.1 or Cl.

4.8.3.3.2 check.
1. Member passes if both Cl. 4.8.3.3.1 and Cl.
4.8.3.3.2 check.
KY 1.0 K value for bending about Y-axis. Usually this is

minor axis.
KZ 1.0 K value for bending about Z-axis. Usually this is

major axis.
LY Member Length to calculate slenderness ratio for bending

Length about Y-axis, in current units of length.
LZ Member Length to calculate slenderness ratio for bending

Length about Z-axis, in current units of length.

Name Value
MAIN 1.0 Grade of concrete:
1. 30 N/mm2
2. 40 N/mm2
3. 50 N/mm2
PY * Yield stress of steel.
Set according to Design Strength of steel SGR
RATIO 1 Permissible ratio of actual to allowable stresses.
SBLT 0.0 Steel
0.0 = Rolled Section
1.0 = Built up Section
SGR 0.0 Steel Grade per BS4360
0. Grade 43
1. Grade 50
2. Grade 55
TRACK 1.0 Used to control the level of detail in the output
0. Suppress all member capacities

1. Print all member capacities
UNL Member Unsupported length for calculating allowable

Length compressive bending stress, in current units of
length.
WET 0.0 Used to specify the stage of construction.
0. Wet stage with no data saved for composite

stage
1. Wet stage with data saved for composite stage
2. Composite and wet stage combined
3. Composite stage only

2C.7 Composite Sections
2C.7 Composite Sections

The definition of composite sections has been provided for in the standard sections definition (refer
to Section 5.20.1 of the Technical Reference Manual for details). This is purely for analysis and for
obtaining the right section properties. It uses the American requirement of 18 times depth (CT) as
the effective depth. For more control with British sections two new options are available in user
provided tables.
2C.7.1 Wide Flange Composite

Using the standard definition of I sections in WIDE FLANGE, 4 additional values can now be
provided. The first is the width of concrete to the left of center of the steel web (b1). The second is
the concrete width to the right (b2). The third is the concrete depth (d1) to be considered. The last
is the modular ratio. The above values are accepted in the program by adding a '-' at the first
position on the first line of data. The program now awaits four extra values on line 2 as described
above. If (-) is provided on the second line the program requires another 2 breadths + 1 thickness
for the bottom plate.
2C.7.2 I Section
The same is true for ISECTION definition in user table.
2C.7.3 Example
UNIT CM
WIDE FLANGE
C45752
-66.5 44.98 .76 15.24 1.09 21345 645 21.3 34.185 33.223
150 150 30 10
ISECTION
PG9144
-92.05 2.15 92.05 42.05 3.66 42.05 3.66 197.9 153.9 1730
40 40 12 1
The larger British sections have been coded as USER TABLES under wide flange and are
available on request to any existing user. Please note however that composite design is not
available in this portion of STAAD.
2D.1 Design Process
2D. British Codes - Design per BS8007

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the British code BS8007:1987 Design
of concrete structures for retaining aqueous liquids. It is recommended that the design of the
structure is carried out according to BS8110, unless modified by the recommendations given in
BS8007.
Design of members per BS8007:1987 requires the STAAD British Specialized Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack. It does not come as standard with British versions.
The information in this section is to be used in conjunction with the BS8110. See "British Codes -
Concrete Design per BS8110" on page 47
2D.1 Design Process

The design process is carried out in three stages.
1. Ultimate Limit States
The program is structured so that ultimate design is first carried out in accordance with
recommendations given in BS8110. All active design load cases are considered in turn and a
tabulated output is printed showing possible reinforcement arrangements. 12, 16, and 20 mm
bars are considered with possible spacings from 100,125,150,175, and 200 mm. Within these
spacings, the layout providing the closest area of steel is printed under each bar size.
Longitudinal and transverse moments together with critical load cases for both hogging and
sagging moments are also printed. Minimum reinforcement is in any case checked and
provided in each direction. Wood & Armer moments may also be included in the design.
2. Serviceability Limit States
In the second stage, flexural crack widths under serviceability load cases are calculated. The
first and every other occurring design load case is considered as a serviceability load case and
crack widths are calculated based on bar sizes and spacings proposed at the ultimate limit
state check.
Crack widths due to longitudinal and transverse moments are calculated directly under
bars, midway between and at corners. A tabulated output indicating critical serviceability
load cases and moments for top and bottom of the slab is then produced.
3. Thermal crack widths
Finally thermal, crack width calculations are carried out. Through available parameters, the user is
able to provide information on the type of slab, temperature range and crack width limits.
Surface zone depths are determined based on the type of slab and critical areas of reinforcements
are calculated and printed in a tabulated form.
Four bar sizes are considered and for each, max crack spacing, Smax and crack widths are calculated
for the critical reinforcements and printed under each bar size.
Maximum bar spacing to limit crack widths to the user's limit is also printed under each bar size.

2D.2 Design Parameters

to BS8007.
These parameters not only act as a method to input required data for code calculations but give the
Engineer control over the actual design process. Default values of commonly used values for
conventional design practice have been chosen as the basis. Table 2D.1 contains a complete list of
available parameters with their default values.
Table 2D.1-BS8007 Design Parameters

Name Value
FC 30 Concrete grade, in current units of length and force.

N/mm 2
CLEAR 20 mm Distance from the outer surface to the edge of the bar,
in current units of length. This is considered the
same on both surfaces.
SRA 0.0 Orthogonal reinforcement layout without considering

torsional moment Mxy - slabs on -500.
orthogonal reinforcement layout with Mxy used to
calculate Wood & Armer moments for design.
A* Skew angle considered in Wood & Armer

equations. A* is any angle in degrees.
SCON 1 Parameter which indicates the type of slab ee. ground

or suspended as defined in BS8007
1 = Suspended Slab
2 = Ground Slab
TEMP 30°C Temperature range to be considered in thermal crack

width calculations
CRACK * 0.2 mm Limiting thermal crack width, in current units of

length.
* Provided in current unit systems
2D.3 Structural Model
2D.3 Structural Model

Structural slabs that are to be designed to BS8007 must be modeled using finite elements. Refer to
Section 1.6 of the Technical Reference Manual for information on the sign convention used in the
program for defining elements
It is recommended to connect elements in such a way that the positive local z axis points outwards
away, from the center of the container. In this manner the "Top" of elements will consistently fall
on the outer surface and internal pressure loads will act in the positive direction of the local z axis.
An example of a rectangular tank is provided to demonstrate the above procedure.
Element properties are based on the thickness given under ELEMENT PROPERTIES command. The
following example demonstrates the required input for a 300 mm slab modeled with ten elements.
UNIT MM
ELEMENT PROPERTIES
1 TO 10 THI 300.0
2D.4 Wood & Armer Moments

This is controlled by the SRA parameter. If the default value of zero is used, the design will be based
on the Mx and My moments which are the direct results of STAAD analysis. The SRA parameter
(Set Reinforcement Angle) can be manipulated to introduce Wood & Armer moments into the
design replacing the pure Mx, My moments. These new design moments allow the Mxy moment to
be considered when designing the section. Orthogonal or skew reinforcement may be considered.
SRA set to -500 will assume an orthogonal layout. If however a skew is to be considered, an angle is
given in degrees, measured between the local element x axis anti-clockwise (positive). The resulting
Mx* and My* moments are calculated and shown in the design format.

2E.1 Cross-Sectional Properties
2E. British Codes - Design per British Cold Formed Steel

Code
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the British code BS 5950-5:1998
Structural use of steelwork in building - Part 5: Code of practice for design of cold formed thin
gauge sections . The program allows design of single (non-composite) members in tension,
compression, bending, shear, as well as their combinations. Cold work of forming strengthening
effects have been included as an option.
Design of members per BS 5950-1:2000 requires the STAAD British Std Design Codes SELECT Code
Pack.

The user specifies the geometry of the cross-section by selecting one of the section shape
designations from the Gross Section Property Tables published in the “The Steel Construction
Institute”, (Design of Structures using Cold Formed Steel Sections).
The Tables are currently available for the following shapes:
l Channel with Lips
l Channel without Lips
l Z with Lips
l Pipe
l Tube
Shape assignment may be done using the General | Property page of the graphical user interface
(GUI) or by specifying the section designation symbol in the input file.
The properties listed in the tables are gross section properties. STAAD.Pro uses unreduced section
properties in the structure analysis stage. Both unreduced and effective section properties are used
in the design stage, as applicable.
2E.2 Design Procedure

The following two design modes are available:
2E.2.1 Code Checking

BS 5950-5:1998. Code checking is carried out for locations specified by the user via the SECTION
command or the BEAM parameter. The results are presented in a form of a PASS/FAIL identifier

2E.3 Design Equations
and a RATIO of load effect to resistance for each member checked. The user may choose the degree
of detail in the output data by setting the TRACK parameter.
Checking command.
2E.2.2 Member Selection

The user may request that the program search the cold formed steel shapes database (BS standard
sections) for alternative members that pass the code check and meet the least weight criterion. In
addition, a minimum and/or maximum acceptable depth of the member may be specified. The
program will then evaluate all database sections of the type initially specified (i.e., channel, angle,
etc.) and, if a suitable replacement is found, presents design results for that section. If no section
satisfying the depth restrictions or lighter than the initial one can be found, the program leaves the
member unchanged, regardless of whether it passes the code check or not.
The program calculates effective section properties in accordance with Section 4 of the subject code.
Cross-sectional properties and overall slenderness of members are checked for compliance with:
l Clause 6.2.2, Maximum Effective Slenderness Ratio for members in Compression
l Clause 4.2, Maximum Flat Width Ratios for Elements in Compression
2E.3.1 Tensile Strength

The allowable tensile strength, as calculated in STAAD as per BS5950-5, section 7 is described
below.
The tensile strength, P of the member should be determined from clause 7.2.1
t
Pt = Aepy
Where:
A is the net area An determined in accordance with cl.3.5.4

e
p is the design strength
y
2E.3.2 Combined bending and tension

As per clause 7.3 of BS 5950-5:1998 members subjected to both axial tension and bending should be
proportioned such that the following relationships are satisfied at the ultimate limit state
Ft/Pt + Mz/Mcz + My /Mcy ≤ 1
Mz/Mcz ≤ 1
and
My /Mcy ≤ 1
Where
F is the applies tensile strength

t
P is the tensile capacity determined in accordance with clause 7.2.1 of the subject code
t
M ,M ,M ,M are as defined in clause 6.4.2 of the subject code
z y cz cy
2E.3.3 Compressive Strength

The allowable Compressive strength, as calculated in STAAD as per BS5950-5, section 6 is described
below
For sections symmetrical about both principal axes or closed cross-sections which are not subjected
to torsional flexural buckling, the buckling resistance under axial load, Pc, may be obtained from
the following equation as per clause 6.2.3 of the subject code
PEPcs
Pc =
2
ϕ+ ϕ − PEPcs
For Sections symmetrical about a single axis and which are not subject to torsional flexural
buckling, the buckling resistance under axial load, Pc, may be obtained from the following
equation as per clause 6.2.4 of the subject code
M c Pc
P ′c =
(M c + Pce s )
Where the meanings of the symbols used are indicated in the subject clauses.
2E.3.4 Torsional flexural buckling

Design of the members which have at least one axis of symmetry, and which are subject to torsional
flexural buckling should be done according to the stipulations of the clause 6.3.2 using factored
slenderness ratio αLE/r in place of actual slenderness ratio while reading Table 10 for the value of
Compressive strength(p ).
c
Where:

α = (PE/PTF) when PE > PTF
α = 1, otherwise
Where the meanings of the symbols used are indicated in the subject clause.
2E.3.5 Combined bending and compression

Members subjected to both axial compression and bending should be checked for local capacity and
overall buckling
Local capacity check as per clause 6.4.2 of the subject code
Fc/Pcs + Mz/Mcz + My /Mcy ≤ 1
2E.3.6 Overall buckling check as per clause 6.4.3 of the subject code
For Beams not subjected to lateral buckling, the following relationship should be satisfied
Fc Mz My
+ + ≤1
 F 
Pc
(
C bxM cz 1 −
Fc
P Ez ) C byM cy 1 − c 
 P Ey 
For Beams subjected to lateral buckling, the following relationship should be satisfied
Fc Mz My
+ + ≤1
Pc Mb  F 
C byM cy 1 − c 
P
 Ey 
F is the applied axial load

c
P is the short strut capacity as per clause 6.2.3
cs
M is the applied bending moment about z axis
z
M is the applied bending moment about y axis
y
M is the moment capacity in bending about the local Z axis in the absence of F and
cz c
M , as per clause 5.2.2 and 5.6
y
M is the moment capacity in bending about the local Y axis, in the absence of F and
cy c
M ,as per clause 5.2.2 and 5.6
z
M- is the lateral buckling resistance moment as per clause 5.6.2
b
P is the flexural buckling load in compression for bending about the local Z axis
Ez
P is the flexural buckling load in compression for bending about the local Y axis
Ey
C ,C are taken as unity unless their values are specified by the user
bz by
M , M , and M are calculated from clause numbers 5.2.2 and 5.6 in the manner described herein
cz cy b
below.

2E.3.7 Calculation of moment capacities

For restrained beams, the applied moment based on factored loads should not be greater then the
bending moment resistance of the section, M
c
Mcz = Szz x po
Mcy = Syy x po
 D Ys 
po = 1.13 − 0.0019 w p y
 t 280 
Where
M is the Moment resistance of the section in z axis

cz
M is the Moment resistance of the section in z axis
cz
p is the limiting stress for bending elements under stress gradient and should not
o
greater then design strength p
y
For unrestrained beams the applied moment based on factored loads should not be greater than
the smaller of the bending moment resistance of the section , M , and the buckling resistance
c
moment of the beam, M
b
Then buckling resistance moment, M may be calculated as follows
b,
ME M y
Mb = ≤ Mc
2
ϕB + ϕ B − ME M y
φB = [My + (1 + η)ME]/2
M is the yield moment of the section , product of design strength p and elastic
Y y
modules of the gross section with respect to the compression flange Zc
M is the elastic lateral buckling resistance as per clause 5.6.2.2

E
η is the Perry coefficient
Please refer clause numbers 5.2.2 and 5.6 of the subject code for a detailed discussion regarding the
parameters used in the abovementioned equations.
2E.3.8 Shear Strength

The maximum shear stress should not be greater then 0.7 × p as per clause 5.4.2
y
The average shear stress should not exceed the lesser of the shear yield strength, p or the shear
v
buckling strength, q as stipulated in clause 5.4.3 of the subject code.
cr
The parameters are calculated as follows :
pv = 0.6·py

2E.4 Design Parameters
qcr = (1000·t/D)2 N/mm2
Pv = A·min(pv , qcr)
Where:
P is the shear capacity in N/mm 2

v
p is the design strength in N/mm 2
y
t is the web thickness in mm
D is the web depth in mm
2E.3.9 Combined bending and Shear

For beam webs subjected to both bending and shear stresses the member should be designed to
satisfy the following relationship as per the stipulations of clause 5.5.2 of the subject code
(Fv /Pv )2 + (M/Mc)2 ≤ 1
Where:
F is the shear force

v
M is the bending moment acting at the same section as F
v
M is the moment capacity determined in accordance with 5.2.2
c

The design parameters outlined in Table 2E.1 are used to control the design procedure. These
engineer to control the design process to suit an application's specific needs.
Table 2E.1-British Cold Formed Steel Design Parameters

CODE BS5950 COLD Design Code to follow.


BEAM 1.0 When this parameter is set to

1.0 (default), the adequacy of
the member is determined by
checking a total of 13 equally
spaced locations along the
length of the member. If the
BEAM value is 0.0, the 13
location check is not
conducted, and instead,
checking is done only at the
locations specified by the
SECTION command (See
STAAD manual for details. For
TRUSS members only start and
end locations are designed.
CMZ 1.0 Coefficient of equivalent

uniform bending C . See
b
BS:5950-5:1998,5.6. Used for
Combined axial load and
bending design.
CMY 1.0 Coefficient of equivalent

uniform bending C . See
b
BS:5950-5:1998,5.6. Used for
Combined axial load and
bending design.
CWY 1.0 Specifies whether the cold

work of forming strengthening
effect should be included in
resistance computation. See
BS:5950-5:1998,3.4
0 – effect should
not be included
1 – effect should
be included

FLX 1 Specifies whether torsional-

flexural buckling restraint is
provided or is not necessary for
the member. See BS:5950-
5:1998, 5.6
Values:
0 – Section
subject to
torsional flexural
buckling
1 – Section not
subject to
torsional flexural
buckling
FU 430 MPa Ultimate tensile strength of

steel in current units.
FYLD 250 MPa Yield strength of steel in

current units.
KX 1.0 Effective length factor for

torsional buckling. It is a
fraction and is unit-less. Values
can range from 0.01 (for a
column completely prevented
from buckling) to any user
specified large value. It is used
to compute the KL/R ratio for
twisting for determining the
capacity in axial compression.
KY 1.0 Effective length factor for

overall buckling about the local
Y-axis. It is a fraction and is
unit-less. Values can range
from 0.01 (for a column
completely prevented from
buckling) to any user specified
large value. It is used to
compute the KL/R ratio for
determining the capacity in
axial compression.

KZ 1.0 Effective length factor for

overall buckling in the local Z-
axis. It is a fraction and is unit-
less. Values can range from 0.01
(for a member completely
prevented from buckling) to
any user specified large value. It
is used to compute the KL/R
ratio for determining the
LX Member length Unbraced length for twisting.

It is input in the current units
of length. Values can range
from 0.01 (for a member
completely prevented from
torsional buckling) to any user
specified large value. It is used
to compute the KL/R ratio for
twisting for determining the
LY Member length Effective length for overall

buckling in the local Y-axis. It
is input in the current units of
length. Values can range from
0.01 (for a member completely
LZ Member length Effective length for overall

buckling in the local Z-axis. It
length. Values can range from
0.01 (for a member completely

MAIN 0 Specify the design for

slenderness against the
maximum slenderness as per
Clause 6.2.2:
0 – Do not check
slenderness ratio
1 – Check
members
resisting normal
loads (180)
2 - Check
members
resisting self-
weight and wind
loads (250)
3 - Check
members
resisting reversal
of stress (350)
NSF 1.0 Net section factor for tension

members
DMAX 2540.0 Maximum allowable depth. It

cm.
length.
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of actual to

allowable stresses

2E.5 Verification Problem
TRACK 0 This parameter is used to

control the level of detail in
which the design output is
reported in the output file. The
allowable values are:
0 - Prints only
the member
number, section
name, ratio, and
PASS/FAIL status.
1 - Prints the
design summary
in addition to
that printed by
TRACK 1
2 - Prints
member and
material
properties in
addition to that
printed by
TRACK 2.

Shown below is a verification example for reference purposes.
In this problem, we have assigned Channel sections with lips to different members. Member
numbers 28 to 31 have been assigned section 230CLHS66X16,member numbers 3 TO 6 and 15 TO 19
have been assigned the section 230CLMIL70X30 and member numbers 1, 2, 7 TO 14 have been
assigned the section 170CLHS56X18. These members have been designed as per BS 5950 Part 5.
Other sections have been assigned from the AISI shapes database (American cold-formed steel)
and designed in accordance with that code.
2E.5.1 Solution
A. Bending Check
As per Clause 5.2.2.2 of BS 5950 –Part 5 the limiting compressive
stress, p , for stiffened webs is given by the minimum of

o

 D Ys 
po = 1.13 − 0.0019 w p y
 t 280 
p0 = Py, where Py = Min ( FYLD, 0.84·FU) = 361.2 N/mm2
So that
p0 = [1.13 - 0.0019·(170/1.8)·(279.212/280)1/2 ]·361.2 = 332.727 N/mm2
The limiting compressive moments in local Y and Z axes will be given by
Mcz = Szz·po = 27,632.4(332.727) = 9.19(10)6 N·mm
Mcy = Syy ·po = 27,632.4(5,427.50) = 3.46(10)6 N·mm
Maximum bending moment about local Z = 2159 N·m at node 7
Maximum bending moment about local Y = 19.755 N·m at node 7
Bending Ratio Z = 2.15 X106 / 9.19 X106 = 0.235
Bending Ratio Y = 19755.3 / 3.46 X106 = 0.0057
Biaxial Bending ratio = 0.235 + 0.0057 = 0.2407
Buckling resistance moment M

b
As per section 5.6.2, the buckling resistance moment
ME M y
Mb = ≤ Mc
2
ϕB + ϕ B − ME M y
Where:
The Yield moment of section is given by
MY = Szz · po = 9.19(10)6 N·mm
The elastic buckling resistance moment as per clause 5.6.2.2 is calculated to be
ME = 4.649(10)6 N·mm
And
φB = [My + (1 + η)ME]/2
So that
φB = [9.19(10)6 + (1 + 0.0)4.649(10)6 ]/2 = 2.325(10)10
Which yields
6 6
4.649(10) ⋅ 9.19(10)
Mb = = 9.98(10)6N ⋅ mm
2
10
2.325(10) + 2.325(10) 10 6 6
− 4.649(10) ⋅ 9.19(10)
 
B. Compression Check

The Axial force induced in member# 1 is 3,436.75 N
The elastic flexural buckling load P = 1.185(10)6 N

E
The short strut capacity (Pcs ) is given by
Aeff·py = 457.698(344) = 157,448 N
Perry Coefficient (η) = 0.02074
φ = [Pcs + (1 + η)PE]/2 = 683,512.45 N
Buckling resistance
PEPcs
Pc = = 153, 782N
2
ϕ+ ϕ − PEPcs
For Channel section (being singly symmetric), Buckling Resistance as per clause 6.2.4 is
M c Pc
P ′c =
(M c + Pce s )
Where:
The limiting compressive moment, M , in the relevant direction is equal to 9.19(10)6

c
N·mm,as calculated above
And the distance, e , of the geometric neutral axis of the gross cross section and that of the
s
effective cross section is equal to 38.24 m
So that,
6
9.19(10) ⋅ 153, 782
P ′c = = 93, 788.7N
9.19(10)6 + 153, 782 38.24 
 ( )
Compression ratio = 3,436.75/93,788.7 = 0.0366
C. Axial Compression and Bending

Fc Mz My
+ + ≤1
Pc Mb  F 
C byM cy 1 − c 
 P Ey 
3,436.75/93,788.7 + 2.15(10)6/(9.98(10)6 ) + 19,755.3/[1.0 * 3.46(10)6(1 - 3,436.75/1.185(10)6 )] =

0.2578
Local capacity check as per clause 6.4.2

My 6
Fc Mz 3, 436.75 2.15(10) 19, 755.3
+ + = + 6
+ = 0.2647
Pcs M cz M cy 457.698(379.212) 9.19(10) 1.81(10)6
Overall buckling check per 6.4.3

Fc Mz My
+ + ≤1
 F 
Pc
(
C bxM cz 1 −
Fc
P Ez ) C byM cy 1 − c 
 P Ey 
= 0.2773
D. Shear Check as per clause 5.4.2 and 5.4.3
pv = 0.6·py = 0.6(379.212) = 227.52 N/mm2
qcr = (1000·t/D)2 = (1000·1.8/170)2 = 112.11 N/mm2
Pv = A·min(pv , qcr)
Shear resistance Y = 33,579.4 N
Shear resistance Z = 21,148.6 N
Shear Ratio Y = 5,627.72/33,579.4 = 0.1675
Shear Ratio Z = 5,627.72/21,148.6 = 0.0031
E. Shear Check with Bending as per clause 5.5.2
Shear with bending on Z
(Fv /Pv )2 + (Mz/Mcz)2 = (5,627.72/33,579.4)2 + [2.15·106 /(9.19·106 )]2 = 0.08327
Shear with bending on Y
(Fv /Pv )2 + (My /Mcy )2 = (67.114/21,148.6)2 + [19,755.3/(3.46·106 )]2 = 0.000043
2E.5.2 Comparison
Table 2E.2-Comparison for verification problem
Hand
Criteria STAAD.Pro Result Difference
Calculation
Axial compression ratio 0.037 0.0366 none
Axial compression and

bending interaction ratio 0.278 0.2773 none
(overall buckling)
Bending Z ratio 0.236 0.235 none
Bending Y ratio 0.006 0.0057 none
Biaxial bending ratio 0.2407 0.241 none
Shear Z ratio 0.168 0.1675 none
Shear Y ratio 0.003 0.0031 none

Hand
Criteria STAAD.Pro Result Difference
Calculation
Bending Z and Shear Y

0.084 0.08327 none
interaction ratio
Bending Y and Shear Z

0.000 0.000043 none
interaction ratio
2E.5.3 Input File

STAAD SPACE
SET ECHO OFF
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT FEET KIP
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 5 0; 2 0 5 10; 3 10 5 0; 4 10 5 10; 5 5 5 0; 6 5 5 10; 7 0 5 2; 8 0 5 4;
9 0 5 6; 10 0 5 8; 11 10 5 2; 12 10 5 4; 13 10 5 6; 14 10 5 8; 15 5 5 2;
16 5 5 4; 17 5 5 6; 18 5 5 8; 19 10 0 0; 20 10 0 10; 21 0 0 10; 22 0 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 7; 2 3 11; 3 1 5; 4 2 6; 5 5 3; 6 6 4; 7 7 8; 8 8 9; 9 9 10; 10 10 2;
11 11 12; 12 12 13; 13 13 14; 14 14 4; 15 5 15; 16 15 16; 17 16 17; 18 17 18;
19 18 6; 20 7 15; 21 15 11; 22 8 16; 23 16 12; 24 9 17; 25 17 13; 26 10 18;
27 18 14; 28 1 22; 29 2 21; 30 3 19; 31 4 20; 32 1 21; 33 21 4; 34 4 19;
35 19 1; 36 2 20; 37 20 3; 38 3 22; 39 22 2;
MEMBER PROPERTY COLDFORMED AMERICAN
32 TO 39 TABLE ST 3LU3X060
20 TO 27 TABLE ST 3HU3X075
MEMBER PROPERTY COLDFORMED BRITISH
28 TO 31 TABLE ST 230CLHS66X16
3 TO 6 15 TO 19 TABLE ST 230CLMIL70X30
1 2 7 TO 14 TABLE ST 170CLHS56X18
UNIT MMS
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES LIST 32 20 28 3 1
SUPPORTS
19 TO 22 PINNED
UNIT FEET
DEFINE MATERIAL START
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 4.176e+006
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 0.489024
ALPHA 6.5e-006
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
CONSTANTS
BETA 90 MEMB 20 TO 27
MATERIAL STEEL MEMB 1 TO 39
MEMBER TENSION
32 TO 39
UNIT FEET KIP
LOAD 1 VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL
MEMBER LOAD
3 TO 6 20 TO 27 UNI GY -0.3 0 5
JOINT LOAD
1 2 FX 0.6
2 4 FZ -0.6
PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT STATICS CHECK
UNIT KGS CM
PRINT JOINT DISP LIST 1 4 16
PRINT SUPPORT REACTIONS

PRINT MEMBER FORCES LIST 3 24 28

UNIT KIP INCH
PARAMETER 1
CODE AISI
FYLD 55 ALL
CWY 1 ALL
BEAM 1 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE MEMB 20 21
PARAMETER 2
CODE BS5950 COLD
TRACK 2 MEMB 1 TO 19 28 TO 31
CHECK CODE MEMB 1 2
FINISH
2E.5.4 Output
The excerpts from the design output for member number 1 are as follows:
STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (BS5950-5-v1.1)
***********************
UNITS : MM, KN, KNM, MPA
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| MEMBER# 1 SECTION: 170CLHS56X18 LEN: 609.60 LOCATION: 609.60 |
| STATUS: PASS RATIO = 0.278 GOV.MODE: 6.4-Bend + Compress GOV.LOAD: 1 |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
MATERIAL DATA:
Yield strength of steel : 379.21 N/mm2
Ultimate tensile strength : 430.00 N/mm2
SECTION PROPERTIES:(units - cm)
Section Name : 170CLHS56X18
Member Length : 60.96
Gross Area(Ag) : 5.45 Net Area (Ae): 4.58
z-z axis y-y axis
Moment of inertia (I) : 237.27 21.93
Moment of inertia (Ie) : 235.46 19.42
Elastic modulus (Zet) : 27.85 5.20
Elastic modulus (Zec) : 27.55 10.42
DESIGN DATA:
z-z axis y-y axis
Compression Capacity (Pc) : 93.70
Moment Capacity (Mc) : 9.17 3.47
Shear Capacity (Pv) : 21.00 33.50
LTB Capacity (Mb) : 9.17
EACH CLAUSE CHECK UNDER CRITICAL LOAD :
CLAUSE COMBINATION RATIO
BS-6.3 Compression ratio - Axial 0.037
BS-6.4 Bend-Compression ratio 0.278
BS-5.1 Bending Ratio - Z 0.236
BS-5.1 Bending Ratio - Y 0.006
BS-5.1 Biaxial Bending Ratio 0.241
BS-5.4 Shear Ratio - Z 0.168
BS-5.4 Shear Ratio - Y 0.003
BS-5.5.2 Bending -Z & Shear - Y Ratio 0.084
BS-5.5.2 Bending -Y & Shear - Z Ratio 0.000

3
Canadian Codes

3 Canadian Codes

3A. Canadian Codes - Concrete Design per CSA Standard

A23.3-94
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the Candadian code CSA A23.3 1994
Design of Concrete Structures. Given the width and depth (or diameter for circular columns) of a
section, the program will calculate the required reinforcement to resist the forces and moments.
Design of members per CSA A23.3 1994 requires the STAAD CAN/AUS/SA Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.

l For Beams - Prismatic (Rectangular, Square & Tee)

l For Columns - Prismatic (Rectangular, Square and Circular)
l For Slabs - 4-noded Plate Elements

input:
UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTIES
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 300.
11 14 PR YD 300.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450mm depth and 300mm width) and
with a 300mm diameter

STAAD provides the user with two methods of accounting for the slenderness effect in the analysis
and design of concrete members. The first method is equivalent to the procedure presented in CSA
STANDARD A23.3-94 Clause 10.13. STAAD accounts for the secondary moments, due to axial loads
and deflections, when the PDELTA ANALYSIS command is used. After solving for the joint
displacements of the structure, the program calculates the additional moments induced in the
structure due to the P-Delta effect. Therefore, by performing a P-Delta analysis, member forces are
calculated which will require no user modification before beginning member design. Refer to
Section 5.37.2 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional details on this analysis facility.

The second method by which STAAD allows the user to account for the slenderness effect is
through user supplied moment magnification factors (see the parameter MMAG in Table 3A.1). Here
the user approximates the additional moment by supplying a factor by which moments will be
multiplied before beginning member design. This second procedure allows slenderness to be
considered in accordance with Clause 10.14 of the code.
Note: STAAD does not factor loads automatically for concrete design. All the proper factored
loads must be provided by the user before the ANALYSIS specification.
While performing a P-Delta analysis, all load cases must be defined as primary load cases. If the
effects of separate load cases are to be combined, it should be done either by using the REPEAT
LOAD command or by specifying the load information of these individual loading cases under one
single load case. Usage of the LOAD COMBINATION command will yield incorrect results for P-Delta
Analysis in STAAD.Pro.

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform design per CSA
STANDARD A23.3-94. These parameters not only act as a method to input required data for code
calculations but give the engineer control over the actual design process. Default values, which are
commonly used numbers in conventional design practice, have been used for simplicity. Table 3A.1
contains a list of available parameters and their default values. It is necessary to declare length and
force units as Millimeter and Newton before performing the concrete design.
Table 3A.1-Canadian Concrete Design CSA-A23.3-94 Parameters

Name Value
CLB 40mm Clear cover to reinforcing bar at bottom of cross

section.
CLS 40mm Clear cover to reinforcing bar along the side of

the cross section.
CLT 40mm Clear cover to reinforcing bar at top of cross

section.
DEPTH YD Depth of the concrete member. This value

defaults to YD as provided under MEMBER
PROPERTIES.


Name Value
EFACE 0.0 Face of Distance of face of support from end node of

Support beam. Used for shear and torsion calculation.

numbers.
FC 30 N/mm 2 Specified compressive strength of concrete.
FYMAIN 400N/mm 2 Yield Stress for main reinforcing steel.
FYSEC 400 N/mm 2 Yield Stress for secondary reinforcing steel.
MAXMAIN Number 55 Maximum main reinforcement bar size.

bar
MINMAIN Number 10 Minimum main reinforcement bar size

bar
MINSEC Number 10 Minimum secondary (stirrup) reinforcement bar

bar size.
MMAG 1.0 A factor by which the column design moments

will be magnified.

CTION considered in finding critical moments for beam
design.
REINF 0.0 Tied Column. A value of 1.0 will mean spiral.
SFACE 0.0 Distance of face of support from start node of

beam. Used for shear and torsion calculation.

numbers.
TRACK 0.0 0. Critical Moment will not be printed out

with beam design report.
1. Moments will be printed.
WIDTH ZD Width of the concrete member. This value

defaults to ZD as provided under MEMBER
PROPERTIES.

3A.5 Beam Design
3A.5 Beam Design

scanned to create moment and shear envelopes, and locate critical sections. The total number of
sections considered is thirteen (start, end, and 11 intermediate), unless that number is redefined
with the NSECTION parameter.

Design for flexure is performed per the rules of Chapter 10 of CSA Standard A23.3-94. Maximum
sagging (creating tensile stress at the bottom face of the beam) and hogging (creating tensile stress
at the top face) moments are calculated for all active load cases at each of the thirteen sections.
Each of these sections are designed to resist the critical sagging and hogging moments. Currently,
design of singly reinforced sections only is permitted. If the section dimensions are inadequate as a
singly reinforced section, such a message will be printed in the output. Flexural design of beams is
performed in two passes. In the first pass, effective depths of the sections are determined with the
assumption of single layer of assumed reinforcement and reinforcement requirements are
calculated. After the preliminary design, reinforcing bars are chosen from the internal database in
single or multiple layers. The entire flexure design is performed again in a second pass taking into
account the changed effective depths of sections calculated on the basis of reinforcement provided
after the preliminary design. Final provision of flexural reinforcements are made then. Efforts have
been made to meet the guideline for the curtailment of reinforcements as per CSA Standard A23.3-
94. Although exact curtailment lengths are not mentioned explicitly in the design output (which
finally will be more or less guided by the detailer taking into account other practical
considerations), the user has the choice of printing reinforcements provided by STAAD at 13 equally
spaced sections from which the final detailed drawing can be prepared.
The following annotations apply to the output for Beam Design.
LEVEL
Serial number of bar level which may contain one or more bar group.
HEIGHT
Height of bar level from the bottom of beam.
BAR INFOrmation
Reinforcement bar information specifying number of bars and size.
FROM
Distance from the start of the beam to the start of the rebar.
TO
Distance from the start of the beam to the end of the rebar.

3A.6 Column Design
ANCHOR
(STA,END)
States whether anchorage, either a hook or continuation, is needed at start (STA) or at
the end (END) of the bar.
3A.5.2 Design for Shear and Torsion

Design for shear and torsion is performed per the rules of Chapter 11 of CSA Standard A23.3-94.
Shear reinforcement is calculated to resist both shear forces and torsional moments. Shear design is
performed at the start and end sections. The location along the member span for design is chosen
as the effective depth + SFACE at the start, and effective depth + EFACE at the end. The load case
which gives rise to the highest stirrup area for shear & torsion is chosen as the critical one. The
calculations are performed assuming 2-legged stirrups will be provided. The additional longitudinal
steel area required for torsion is reported.
The stirrups are assumed to be U-shaped for beams with no torsion, and closed hoops for beams
subjected to torsion.
3A.5.3 Example of Input

Example of Input Data for Beam Design
UNIT NEWTON MMS
CODE CANADA
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FYSEC 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
DESIGN BEAM 2 TO 9
END CONCRETE DESIGN
3A.6 Column Design

Column design is performed per the rules of Chapters 7 & 8 of the CSA Standard A23.3-94.
Columns are designed for axial force and biaxial moments at the ends. All active loadings are tested
critical load. Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular sections. For rectangular
and square sections, the reinforcement is always assumed to be equally distributed on each side.
That means the total number of bars will always be a multiple of four (4). This may cause slightly
conservative results in some cases.
Example of Input Data for Column Design

UNIT NEWTON MMS

3A.7 Slab/Wall Design
CODE CANADIAN
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
END CONCRETE DESIGN

To design a slab or wall, it must be modeled using finite elements. The commands for specifying
elements are in accordance with the relevant sections of the Technical Reference Manual.
Elements are designed for the moments Mx and My using the same principles as those for beams in
flexure. The width of the beam is assumed to be unity for this purpose. These moments are
obtained from the element force output (see Section 3.8 of the Technical Reference Manual). The
reinforcement required to resist Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the
reinforcement required to resist My moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement. The effective
depth is calculated assuming #10 bars are provided. The parameters FYMAIN, FC, CLT, and CLB listed
in Table 3A.1 are relevant to slab design. Other parameters mentioned in Table 3A.1 are not
applicable to slab design. The output consists only of area of steel required. Actual bar arrangement
is not calculated because an element most likely represents just a fraction of the total slab area.
Example of Input Data for Slab/Wall Design

UNIT NEWTON MMS
CODE CANADA
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
CLB 40 ALL
END CONCRETE DESIGN

3B.1 General Comments
3B. Canadian Codes - Steel Design per CSA Standard

CAN/CSA-S16-01
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Canadian code CAN/CSA-S16-01
Limit States Design of Steel Structures.
Design of members per CAN/CSA-S16-01 requires the STAAD CAN/AUS/SA Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.

The design of structural steel members in accordance with the specification CAN/CSA S16-01 Limit
States Design of Steel Structures is can be used in STAAD.Pro. This code supercedes the previous
edition of the code CAN/CSA – S16.1-94.
would become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit-states are recognized -
conditions and at the same time the probability of limits being surpassed is acceptably low.
In the STAAD.Pro implementation, members are proportioned to resist the design loads without
exceeding the limit states of strength, stability and serviceability. Accordingly, the most economic
The following sections describe the salient features of the STAAD.Pro implementation of
CAN/CSA-S16-01. A detailed description of the design process along with its underlying concepts
and assumptions is available in the specification document.

The elastic analysis method is used to obtain the forces and moments for design. Analysis is done
for the specified primary and combination loading condition. You are allowed complete flexibility
in providing loading specifications and using appropriate load factors to create necessary loading
situations. Depending upon the analysis requirements, regular stiffness analysis or P-Delta analysis
may be specified. Dynamic analysis may also be performed and the results combined with static
analysis results.


For specification of member properties, the steel section library available in STAAD.Pro may be
used. The next section describes the syntax of commands used to assign properties from the built-
in steel table. Member properties may also be specified using the User Table facility. For more
information on these facilities, refer to the STAAD.Pro Technical Reference Manual.

Almost all Canadian steel sections are available for input. A complete listing of the sections
available in the built-in steel section library may be obtained by using the tools of the graphical
user interface.
Following is the description of the different types of sections available:
3B.4.1 Welded Wide Flanges (WW shapes)

Welded wide flange shapes listed in the CSA steel tables can be designated using the same scheme
used by CSA. The following example illustrates the specification of welded wide flange shapes.
100 TO 150 TA ST WW400X444
34 35 TA ST WW900X347
3B.4.2 Wide Flanges (W shapes)

Designation of wide flanges in STAAD is the same as that in CSA tables. For example,
10 TO 75 95 TO 105 TA ST W460X106
100 TO 200 TA ST W610X101
3B.4.3 S, M, HP shapes
In addition to welded wide flanges and regular wide flanges, other I shaped sections like S, M and
HP shapes are also available. The designation scheme is identical to that listed in the CSA tables.
While specifying the sections, it should be remembered that the portion after the decimal point
should be omitted. Thus, M310X17.6 should be specified as M310X17 and S180X22.8 should be
specified as S180X22. Examples illustrating specifications of these shapes are provided below.
10 TO 20 BY 2 TA ST S510X98
45 TO 55 TA ST M150X6
88 90 96 TA ST HP310X79

3B.4.4 Channel Sections (C & MC shapes)

C and MC shapes are designated as shown in the following example. As in S, M and HP sections,
the portion after the decimal point must be omitted in section designations. Thus, MC250X42.4
should be designated as MC250X42.
55 TO 90 TA ST C250X30
30 TO 45 TA ST MC200X33

Back-to-back double channels, with or without spacing between them, are specified by preceding
the section designation by the letter D. For example, a back-to-back double channel section
C200X28 without any spacing in between should be specified as:
100 TO 120 TA D C200X28
If a spacing of 2.5 length units is used, the specification should be as follows:

100 TO 120 TA D C200X28 SP 2.5
Note that the specification SP after the section designation is used for providing the spacing. The
spacing should always be provided in the current length unit.
3B.4.6 Angles
To specify angles, the angle name is preceded by the letter L. Thus, a 200X200 angle with a 25mm
thickness is designated as L200X200X25. The following examples illustrate angle specifications.
75 TO 95 TA ST L100X100X8
33 34 35 TA ST L200X100X20
Note that the above specification is for “standard” angles. In this specification, the local z-axis (see
Fig. 2.6 in the Technical Reference Manual) corresponds to the Y’-Y’ axis shown in the CSA table.
Another common practice of specifying angles assumes the local y-axis to correspond to the Y’-Y’
axis. To specify angles in accordance with this convention, the reverse angle designation facility has
been provided. A reverse angle may be specified by substituting the word ST with the word RA.
Refer to the following example for details.
10 TO 15 TA RA L55X35X4
The local axis systems for STANDARD and REVERSE angles is shown in Fig. 2.6 of the STAAD
Technical Reference manual.

To specify double angles, the specification ST should be substituted with LD (for long leg back-to-
back) or SD (short leg back-to-back). For equal angles, either SD or LD will serve the purpose.
Spacing between angles may be provided by using the word SP followed by the value of spacing (in
current length unit) after section designation.
25 35 45 TA LD L150X100X16

80 TO 90 TA SD L125X75X6 SP 2.5
The second example above describes a double angle section consisting of 125X75X6 angles with a
spacing of 2.5 length units.
3B.4.8 Tees
Tee sections obtained by cutting W sections may be specified by using the T specification instead of
ST before the name of the W shape. For example:
100 TO 120 TA T W200X42
will describe a T section cut from a W200X42 section.
3B.4.9 Rectangular Hollow Sections

These sections may be specified in two possible ways. Those sections listed in the CSA tables may be
specified as follows.
55 TO 75 TA ST TUB80X60X4
In addition, any tube section may be specified by using the DT(for depth), WT(for width), and TH
(for thickness) specifications.
For example:
100 TO 200 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 TH 0.5
will describe a tube with a depth of 8 in., width of 6 in. and a wall thickness of 0.5 inches. Note
that the values of depth, width and thickness must be provided in current length unit.
3B.4.10 Circular Hollow Sections

Sections listed in the CSA tables may be provided as follows:
15 TO 25 TA ST PIP33X2.5

In addition to sections listed in the CSA tables, circular hollow sections may be specified by using
the OD (outside diameter) and ID (inside diameter) specifications. For example:
will describe a pipe with an outside diameter of 10 length units and inside diameter of 9.0 length
units. Note that the values of outside and inside diameters must be provided in terms of current
length unit.
Sample input file to demonstrate usage of Canadian shapes

STAAD SPACE
UNIT METER KNS
JOINT COORD
1 0 0 0 17 160 0 0
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2 16
UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTIES CANADIAN
* W SHAPES
1 TA ST W250X18
* WW SHAPES
2 TA ST WW700X185
* S SHAPES
3 TA ST S200X27
* M SHAPES
4 TA ST M130X28
* HP SHAPES
5 TA ST HP310X132
* MC CHANNELS
6 TA ST MC150X17
* C CHANNELS
7 TA ST C180X18
* DOUBLE CHANNELS
8 TA D C250X37 SP 1.0
* ANGLES
9 TA ST L55X35X5
* REVERSE ANGLES
10 TA RA L90X75X5
* DOUBLE ANGLES, LONG LEG BACK TO BACK
11 TA LD L100X90X6 SP 2.0
* DOUBLE ANGLES, SHORT LEG BACK TO BACK
12 TA SD L125X75X6 SP 2.5
* TUBES
13 TA ST TUB120807
* TUBES
* PIPES
15 TA ST PIP273X6.3
* PIPES

PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES

FINISH

The CSA specification allows inelastic deformation of section elements. Thus, local buckling
becomes an important criterion. Steel sections are classified as plastic (Class 1), compact (Class 2),
noncompact (Class 3), or slender element (Class 4) sections depending upon their local buckling
characteristics (See Clause 11.2 and Table 1 of CAN/CSA-S16-01). This classification is a function of
the geometric properties of the section. The design procedures are different depending on the
section class. STAAD.Pro determines the section classification for the standard shapes and user
specified shapes.
Note: The design of Class 4 sections requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 2) build 2007.07 or
higher. Otherwise, design is performed for sections that fall into the category of Class 1,2 or 3
sections only.

The member resistances are calculated in STAAD.Pro according to the procedures outlined in
section 13 of the specification. These depend on several factors such as members unsupported
lengths, cross-sectional properties, slenderness factors, unsupported width to thickness ratios and so
on. Note that the program automatically takes into consideration appropriate resistance factors to
calculate member resistances. Explained here is the procedure adopted in STAAD.Pro for
calculating the member resistances.
Note: The design of Class 4 sections requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 2) build 2007.07 or
higher.
3B.6.1 Nomenclature
A = Area.
A = Effective area.
e
A = Area of flange.
f
A = Area of web.
w
b = Effective Flange width.
e
C = Compressive force in a member or component under factored load.
f
C = Factored compressive resistance.
r
C = Warping torsional constant.
w
C = Axial compressive load at yield stress.
y
D = Outside diameter of pipe section.

E = Elastic modulus of steel.
F = Elastic critical buckling stress.

e
F = Yield strength.
y
F = Effective yield stress of section in compression to account for elastic local buckling.
ye
h = Clear depth of web.
K = Effective length factor.
L = Length or span of member.
M = Bending moment in a member or component under factored load.

f
M = Factored moment resistance of a member.
r
M = Yield moment resistance.
y
S = Elastic section modulus.
S = Effective section modulus.

e
W = Web thickness.
λ = Non-dimensional slenderness parameter in column formula.
λ = Effective non-dimensional slenderness parameter in column formula considering effective

ye
yield stress.
ϕ = Resistance factor
3B.6.2 Members Subject to Axial Forces
Axial Tension
The criteria governing the capacity of tension members is based on two limit states. The limit state
of yielding in the gross section is intended to prevent excessive elongation of the member. The
second limit state involves fracture at the section with the minimum effective net area. The net
section area may be specified by the user through the use of the parameter NSF (see Table 3B.1).
STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a member based on these two limits states per Cl.13.2 of
CAN/CSA-S16-01. Parameters FYLD, FU, and NSF are applicable for these calculations.
Axial Compression
The compressive resistance of columns is determined based on Clause 13.3 of the code. The
equations presented in this section of the code assume that the compressive resistance is a function
of the compressive strength of the gross section (Gross section Area times the Yield Strength) as
well as the slenderness factor (KL/r ratios). The effective length for the calculation of compression

resistance may be provided through the use of the parameters KT, KY, KZ, LT, LY, and LZ (see Table
3B.1). Some of the aspects of the axial compression capacity calculations are :
1. For frame members not subjected to any bending, and for truss members, the axial
compression capacity in general column flexural buckling is calculated from Cl.13.3.1 using
the slenderness ratios for the local Y-Y and Z-Z axis. The parameters KY, LY, KZ and LZ are
applicable for this.
2. For single angles, which are frame members not subjected to any bending or truss members,
the axial compression capacity in general column flexural buckling and local buckling of
thin legs is calculated using the rules of the AISC - LRFD code, 2nd ed., 1994. The reason for
this is that the Canadian code doesn’t provide any clear guidelines for calculating this value.
The parameters KY, LY, KZ, and LZ are applicable for this.
3. The axial compression capacity is also calculated by taking flexural-torsional buckling into
account. The rules of Appendix D, page 1-109 of CAN/CSA-S16-01are used for this purpose.
Parameters KT and LT may be used to provide the effective length factor and effective length
value for flexural-torsional buckling. Flexural-torsional buckling capacity is computed for
single channels, single angles, Tees and Double angles.
4. The variable “n” in Cl.13.3.1 is assumed as 2.24 for WWF shapes and 1.34 for all other shapes.
5. While computing the general column flexural buckling capacity of sections with axial
compression + bending, the special provisions of 13.8.1(a), 13.8.1(b) and 13.8.1(c) are applied.
For example, Lambda = 0 for 13.8.1(a), K=1 for 13.8.1(b), etc.)
For Class 4 members subjected to axial compression, factored compressive resistance should be
determined by either of the following equations.
a. Cr= ϕAe Fy (1+λ2n )-1⁄n
Where:
n = 1.34
λ = √(Fy /Fe )
Fe=(π2 E)/(KL/r)2
Ae is calculated using reduced element widths meeting the maximum width to thickness
ratio specified in Table 1.
Effective width required for the calculation of effective area Ae, for different section shapes
are as follows.
l For flanges of I-section, T-section and channel section and legs of angle section
be= 200t/√(Fy )
l For stem of T-section
be= 340t/√(Fy )
l For flanges of HSS rectangular or Tube sections

be= 670t/√((Fy )
l For circular HSS or Pipe section
D= 23000t/(Fy
b. Cr= ϕAFye (1+λye2n )-1⁄n
Where:
n = 1.34
λye = √(Fye/F_e )
Fe=(π2 E)/(KL/r)2
With an effective yield stress, F , determined from the maximum width (or diameter)-to-
ye
thickness ratio meeting the limit specified in Table 1.
Following are the expressions for effective yield stress for different shaped section.
l For I-section, T-section, channel section and angle section
Fye= 40000/(b/t)2
l For rectangular HSS section
Fye= 448900/(b/t)2
l For circular HSS section
Fye= 23000/(D/t)
3B.6.3 Members Subject to Bending

The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange for the purpose of computing the
factored moment resistance is specified in STAAD with the help of the parameter UNL. If UNL is
less than one tenth the member length (member length is the distance between the joints of the
member), the member is treated as being continuously laterally supported. In this case, the
moment resistance is computed from Clause 13.5 of the code. If UNL is greater than or equal to one
tenth the member length, its value is used as the laterally unsupported length. The equations of
Clause 13.6 of the code are used to arrive at the moment of resistance of laterally unsupported
members. Some of the aspects of the bending capacity calculations are :
1. The weak axis bending capacity of all sections except single angles is calculated as
For Class 1 & 2 sections, φ·Py · Fy
For Class 3 sections, φ · Sy · Fy
where
φ = Resistance factor = 0.9
P = Plastic section modulus about the local Y axis

y

S = Elastic section modulus about the local Y axis

y
F = Yield stress of steel
y
2. For single angles, the bending capacities are calculated for the principal axes. The
specifications of Section 5, page 6-283 of AISC-LRFD 1994, 2nd ed., are used for this purpose
because the Canadian code doesn’t provide any clear guidelines for calculating this value.
3. For calculating the bending capacity about the Z-Z axis of singly symmetric shapes such as
Tees and Double angles, CAN/CSA-S16-01 stipulates in Clause 13.6(d), page 1-31, that a
rational method, such as that given in SSRC’s Guide to Stability Design Criteria of Metal
Structures, be used. Instead, STAAD uses the rules of Section 2c, page 6-55 of AISC-LRFD
1994, 2nd ed.
Laterally Supported Class 4 members subjected to bending
i. When both the web and compressive flange exceed the limits for Class 3 sections, the
member should be considered as failed and an error message will be thrown.
ii. When flanges meet the requirements of Class 3 but web exceeds the limits for Class 3,
resisting moment shall be determined by the following equation.
 A h 1, 900 
M ′ r = M r 1 − 0.0005 w  − 
 Af w
 Mf / ϕs

Where Mr = factored moment resistance as determined by Clause 13.5 or 13.6 but not to
exceed ϕMy = factored moment resistance for Class 3 sections = ϕMy
If axial compressive force is present in addition to the moment, modified moment resistance
should be as follows.
 A h 1 − 0.65Cf / (ϕC y ) 
M ′ r = M r 1 − 0.0005 w  − 1, 900 

Af w

 
Mf / ϕs

Cy = A · Fy
S = Elastic section modulus of steel section.
iii. For sections whose webs meet the requirements of Class 3 and whose flanges exceed the
limit of Class 3, the moment resistance shall be calculated as
Mr = ϕ · Se · Fy
Where:
S = effective section modulus determined using effective flange width.

e
l For Rectangular HSS section, effective flange width
be= 670 · t/√(Fy )

l For I-section, T-section, Channel section, effective flange width and for Angle section,
effective length width
be= 200 · t/√(Fy )
But shall not exceed 60 · t
Laterally Unsupported Class 4 members subjected to bending
As per clause 13.6(b) the moment resistance for class-4 section shall be calculated as follows
i. When Mu > 0.67My
 0.28M y 
M r = 1.15ϕM y1 − 
 Mu 
M should not exceed ϕSeFy

r
ii. When Mu ≤ 0.67My
Mr=ϕMu
Where, as per clause 13.6(a),
Mu =(ω2 π)/L √(EIy GJ + (πE/L)2 Iy Cw )
For unbraced length subjected to end moments-
ω2 =1.75 + 1.05k + 0.3k2 ≤ 2.5
When bending moment at any point within the unbraced length is larger than the larger end
moment or when there is no effective lateral support for the compression flange at one of the ends
of unsupported length-
ω2 = 1.0
k = Ratio of the smaller factored moment to the larger moment at opposite ends of the unbraced
length, positive for double curvature and negative for single curvature.
Se = effective section modulus determined using effective flange width.
l For Rectangular HSS section, effective flange width
be= 670t/√(Fy )
l For I-section, T-section, Channel section, effective flange width and for Angle section,
effective length width
be= 200t/√(Fy )
But shall not exceed 60t.
This clause is applicable only for I shaped and Channel shaped section as there is no guide line in
the code for other sections.

3B.6.4 Members Subject to Combined Forces
Axial compression and bending
obtained through the use of interaction equations. In these equations, the additional bending
caused by the action of the axial load is accounted for by using amplification factors. Clause 13.8 of
the code provides the equations for this purpose. If the summation of the left hand side of these
equations exceed 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (See "Design
Parameters" on page 132), the member is considered to have failed under the loading condition.
Axial tension and bending
Members subjected to axial tension and bending are also designed using interaction equations.
Clause 13.9 of the code is used to perform these checks. The actual RATIO is determined as the value
of the left hand side of the critical equation.
3B.6.5 Shear
The shear resistance of the cross section is determined using the equations of Clause 13.4 of the
code. Once this is obtained, the ratio of the shear force acting on the cross section to the shear
resistance of the section is calculated. If any of the ratios (for both local Y & Z axes) exceed 1.0 or
the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 3B.1), the section is considered
to have failed under shear. The code also requires that the slenderness ratio of the web be within a
certain limit (See Cl.13.4.1.3, page 1-29 of CAN/CSA-S16-01). Checks for safety in shear are performed
only if this value is within the allowable limit. Users may by-pass this limitation by specifying a
value of 2.0 for the MAIN parameter.

The design parameters outlined in Table 3B.1 may be used to control the design procedure. These

Table 3B.1-Canadian Steel Design CSA-S16-01 Parameters

CODE

end moments and
those at locations
specified by
SECTION command.
1.0 = Perform design

for moments at
twelfth points along
the beam.
CB 1.0 Greater than 0.0 and

less than 2.5 : Value
of Omega_2 (Cl.13.6)
to be used for
calculation.
Equal to 0.0 :
Calculate Omega_2
CMY 1.0 1.0 = Do not

calculate Omega-1 for
local Y axis.
2.0 = Calculate
Omega-1 for local Y
axis.
Used in Cl.13.8.4 of
code
CMZ 1.0 1.0 = Do not

calculate Omega-1 for
local Z axis.
2.0 = Calculate
Omega-1 for local Z
axis.
Used in Cl.13.8.4 of
code
DFF None(Mandatory for “Deflection

deflection check) Length”/Maxm.
Allowable local
deflection.

DJ1 Start Joint of member Joint No. denoting

start point for
calculation of
DJ2 End Joint of member Joint No. denoting

end point for
calculation of
DMAX 45.0 in. Maximum allowable

member selection)
DMIN 0.0 in. Minimum required

member selection)
FYLD 300.0 MPa Yield strength of

steel.
FU 345.0 MPa Ultimate strength of

steel.
KT 1.0 K value for flexural

torsional buckling.

column flexural
buckling about the
local Y-axis. Used to
calculate slenderness
ratio.

column flexural
buckling about the
local Z-axis. Used to
ratio.
LT Member Length Length for flexural

torsional buckling.


column flexural
buckling about the
ratio.

column flexural
buckling about the
ratio.
MAIN 0.0 0.0 = Check

slenderness ratio
against the limits.
1.0= Suppress the

slenderness ratio
check.
2.0 = Check
slenderness ratio only
for column buckling,
not for web (See
Section 3B.6, Shear)

tension members.

actual load effect to
the design strength.
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Report only

minimum design
results.
1.0 = Report design

strengths also.
2.0 = Provide full

details of design.

3B.8 Code Checking
UNB Member Length Unsupported length

in bending
compression of the
bottom flange for
calculating moment
resistance.
UNT Member Length Unsupported length

in bending
compression of the
top flange for
calculating moment
resistance.
3B.8 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to check whether the provided section properties of the members
are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per the CAN/CSA-S16-01 requirements.
Code checking is done using forces and moments at specified sections of the members. If the
BEAM parameter for a member is set to 1, moments are calculated at every twelfth point along the
beam. When no sections are specified and the BEAM parameter is set to zero (default), design will
be based on member start and end forces only. The code checking output labels the members as
PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance from
the start joint) and magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also printed. The extent
of detail of the output can be controlled by using the TRACK parameter.
Example of commands for CODE CHECKING:

UNIT NEWTON METER
PARAMETER
CODE CANADIAN
FYLD 330E6 MEMB 3 4
NSF 0.85 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
UNL 15 MEMB 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
CHECK CODE MEMB 3 4

The member selection process basically involves determination of the least weight member that
PASSes the code checking procedure based on the forces and moments of the most recent analysis.
The section selected will be of the same type as that specified initially. For example, a member
specified initially as a channel will have a channel selected for it. Selection of members whose

properties are originally provided from a user table will be limited to sections in the user table.
Member selection cannot be performed on TUBES, PIPES or members listed as PRISMATIC.
Example of commands for MEMBER SELECTION:

UNIT NEWTON METER
PARAMETER
FYLD 330E6 MEMB 3 4
NSF 0.85 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
UNL 15 MEMB 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
SELECT MEMB 3 4

CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the CAN/CSA-S16-01 specification which governed the
design.
If the TRACK parameter is set to 1.0, factored member resistances will be printed. Following is a
description of some of the items printed.
CR
Factored compressive resistance
TR
Factored tensile resistance
VR
Factored shear resistance
MRZ
Factored moment resistance (about z-axis)
MRY
Factored moment resistance (about y-axis)
Further details can be obtained by setting TRACK to 2.0.
CR1
CAPACITY (C ) PER 13.8.2(a)
r
CR2
CAPACITY (C ) PER 13.8.2(b)
r
CRZ
SEE 13.8.2(b) for uniaxial bending (called C in that Clause)
RX

3B.11 Verification Problems
CTORFLX
Capacity in accordance with 13.8.2(c)

In the next few pages are included several verification examples for reference purposes. Since the
S16-01 code is similar in many respects to the previous edition of the code (CAN/CSA S16.1-94), the
solved examples of the 1994 edition of the CISC Handbook have been used as reference material for
these examples.
3B.11.1 Verification Problem No. 1

Steel beam with uniform load, wide flange section. Static analysis, 3D beam element.
This example is included in the installation of STAAD.Pro as …/SProV8i/STAAD/Examp/Can/can_

ver_prob1.std
Reference
CAN/CSA-S16.1-94, National Standard of Canada, Limit States Design of Steel Structures. The
Canadian Standards Association, 1994 with CISC (Canadian Institute of Steel Construction)
handbook. CISC Example 1 page 5-91.
Problem
Find the interaction ratio, beam resistance and beam deflection.
Given
E = 200000 MPa (STEEL)
F = 300 Mpa CSA G40.21-M

y
Simply supported beam has a 8.0 m span; Ky is 1.0, Kz 1.0, unsupported length 1.0 m
Allowable Live Load deflection, L/300 = 8000/300 = 27 mm
Factored Uniform Load IS 7 kN/m DEAD, 15 kN/m LIVE.
Steel section is W410X54

Comparison
Table 3B.2-CAN/CSA-S16 Verification Problem 1 comparison

Critera Reference STAAD.Pro Difference
Interaction Ratio 0.88 0.883 none
Beam Resistance 284 283.20 none

(kN·m)
Beam Deflection 21 20.81 none

(mm)
STAAD Output
****************************************************
* *
* STAAD.Pro *
* Version Bld *
* Proprietary Program of *
* Research Engineers, Intl. *
* Date= *
* Time= *
* *
* USER ID: *
****************************************************
1. STAAD SPACE VERIFICATION CISC 1994 HANDBOOK EXAMPLE PAGE 5-91
3. * CISC EXAMPLE 1 PAGE 5-91, LIMIT STATES DESIGN, CSA-S16.1-94
4. * SIMPLY SUPPORTED BEAM WITH UNIFORM LOAD
5. * LIVE LOAD DEFLECTION OF L/300
7. UNIT MMS KN
8. JOINT COORDINATES
9. 1 0 0 0; 2 8000 0 0
10. MEMBER INCIDENCES
11. 1 1 2
13. MEMBER PROPERTY CANADIAN
14. 1 TABLE ST W410X54
16. CONSTANTS
17. E STEEL ALL
18. POISSON 0.3 ALL
20. SUPPORTS
21. 1 PINNED
22. 2 FIXED BUT MY MZ
24. UNIT METER KN
25. LOAD 1 DEAD
26. MEMBER LOAD
27. 1 UNI GY -7
29. LOAD 2 LIVE
30. MEMBER LOAD
31. 1 UNI GY -15
33. LOAD COMB 3 1.25DL + 1.5 LL
34. 1 1.25 2 1.5
36. PERFORM ANALYSIS
P R O B L E M S T A T I S T I C S
-----------------------------------
NUMBER OF JOINTS/MEMBER+ELEMENTS/SUPPORTS = 2/ 1/ 2
ORIGINAL/FINAL BAND-WIDTH= 1/ 1/ 5 DOF
TOTAL PRIMARY LOAD CASES = 2, TOTAL DEGREES OF FREEDOM = 5

SIZE OF STIFFNESS MATRIX = 1 DOUBLE KILO-WORDS

REQRD/AVAIL. DISK SPACE = 12.0/ 19641.6 MB
37. LOAD LIST 2
38. PRINT SECTION DISPLACEMENTS
MEMBER SECTION DISPLACEMENTS
----------------------------
UNIT =INCHES FOR FPS AND CM FOR METRICS/SI SYSTEM
MEMB LOAD GLOBAL X,Y,Z DISPL FROM START TO END JOINTS AT 1/12TH PTS
1 2 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.5471 0.0000
0.0000 -1.0528 0.0000 0.0000 -1.4824 0.0000
0.0000 -1.8086 0.0000 0.0000 -2.0120 0.0000
0.0000 -2.0812 0.0000 0.0000 -2.0120 0.0000
0.0000 -1.8086 0.0000 0.0000 -1.4824 0.0000
0.0000 -1.0528 0.0000 0.0000 -0.5471 0.0000
0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
MAX LOCAL DISP = 2.08115 AT 400.00 LOAD 2 L/DISP= 384
************ END OF SECT DISPL RESULTS ***********
40. LOAD LIST 3
41. PARAMETER
42. CODE CANADIAN
43. TRACK 2 ALL
44. UNL 1 ALL
45. FYLD 300000 ALL
46. BEAM 1 ALL
47. CHECK CODE ALL
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (CAN/CSA-S16-01)
******************************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KNS MET (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST W410X54 (CANADIAN SECTIONS)
PASS CSA-13.8.2+ 0.883 3
0.00 C 0.00 -250.00 4.00
MEMBER PROPERTIES (UNIT = CM)
-----------------------------
CROSS SECTION AREA = 6.84E+01 MEMBER LENGTH = 8.00E+02
IZ = 1.86E+04 SZ = 9.26E+02 PZ = 1.05E+03
IY = 1.02E+03 SY = 1.15E+02 PY = 1.77E+02
MATERIAL PROPERTIES (UNIT = MPA)
--------------------------------
FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0
SECTION CAPACITIES (UNIT - KN,M)
---------------------------------
CR1 = 1.846E+03 CR2 = 2.732E+02
CRZ = 1.570E+03 CTORFLX = 2.732E+02
TENSILE CAPACITY = 1.805E+03 COMPRESSIVE CAPACITY = 2.732E+02
FACTORED MOMENT RESISTANCE : MRY = 4.778E+01 MRZ = 2.832E+02
FACTORED SHEAR RESISTANCE : VRY = 5.379E+02 VRZ = 4.604E+02
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION
--------------------------
NET SECTION FACTOR FOR TENSION = 1.000
KL/RY = 207.170 KL/RZ = 48.447 ALLOWABLE KL/R = 300.000
UNSUPPORTED LENGTH OF THE COMPRESSION FLANGE (M) = 1.000
OMEGA-1 (Y-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-1 (Z-AXIS) = 1.00 OMEGA-2 = 1.00
SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = 0.000E+00 Z AXIS = 0.000E+00
SLENDERNESS RATIO OF WEB (H/W) = 5.08E+01
48. STEEL TAKE OFF ALL
STEEL TAKE-OFF
--------------
PROFILE LENGTH(METE) WEIGHT(KN )
In Steel Takeoff the density of steel is assumed for members with no density.
ST W410X54 8.00 4.203
PRISMATIC STEEL 0.00 0.000
----------------
TOTAL = 4.203

************ END OF DATA FROM INTERNAL STORAGE ************

49. FINISH

Steel beam/column, wide flange section. Static Analysis, 3D beam element.

ver_prob2.std
Reference
handbook. CISC Handbook Example, Page 4_106.
Problem
Find the interaction ratio, beam and column resistance.
Given
E = 200000 MPa (STEEL).
F = 300 MPa CSA G40.21-M

y
Simply supported beam/column has a 3.7 m span, Ky is 1.0, Kz 1.0
factored axial load is 2000 kN and end moments of
200 kN*m and 300 kN*m
Steel section is W310X129
Comparison
Table 3B.3-CAN/CSA-S16 Verification Problem2 comparison

Critera Reference STAAD.Pro Difference
Interaction Ratio 0.96 0.98 2%
Beam Resistance 583 584 none

(kN·m)
Column 3,800 3,820 none

Resistance (kN)

STAAD Output
****************************************************
* *
* STAAD.Pro *
* Version Bld *
* Date= *
* Time= *
* *
* USER ID: *
****************************************************
2. *
3. * COMPRESSION + MAJOR AXIS BENDING
4. *
5. UNIT METER KN
7. 1 0 0 0; 2 0 3.7 0
8. *
10. 1 1 2
11. *
13. 1 TABLE ST W310X129
14. *
15. CONSTANTS
16. E STEEL ALL
17. POISSON STEEL ALL
18. *
19. SUPPORTS
20. 1 FIXED BUT MX MZ
21. 2 FIXED BUT FY MY MZ
22. *
23. LOAD 1 FACTORED LOAD
24. JOINT LOAD
25. 2 FY -2000
26. 2 MZ 200
27. 1 MZ 300
28. *
29. PDELTA 3 ANALYSIS
-----------------------------------
++ Adjusting Displacements 8:54:35
31. PRINT MEMBER FORCES
MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE
-----------------
ALL UNITS ARE -- KN METE
MEMBER LOAD JT AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z TORSION MOM-Y MOM-Z
1 1 1 2000.00 135.14 0.00 0.00 0.00 300.00
2 -2000.00 -135.14 0.00 0.00 0.00 200.00
************** END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT **************
33. PARAMETER
34. CODE CANADIAN
35. TRACK 2 ALL

36. FYLD 300000 ALL

37. LY 3.7 ALL
38. LZ 3.7 ALL
39. CHECK CODE ALL
******************************************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST W310X129 (CANADIAN SECTIONS)
PASS CSA-13.8.2C 0.980 1
2000.00 C 0.00 300.00 0.00
-----------------------------
IZ = 3.08E+04 SZ = 1.94E+03 PZ = 2.16E+03
IY = 1.00E+04 SY = 6.51E+02 PY = 9.90E+02
--------------------------------
FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0
---------------------------------
CR1 = 4.459E+03 CR2 = 3.820E+03
CRZ = 4.296E+03 CTORFLX = 3.820E+03
--------------------------
40. STEEL MEMBER TAKE OFF ALL
STEEL TAKE-OFF
--------------
ST W310X129 3.70 4.694
----------------
TOTAL = 4.694
MEMBER PROFILE LENGTH WEIGHT
(METE) (KN )
1 ST W310X129 3.70 4.694
42. FINISH

Steel beam/column, wide flange section. Static Analysis, 3D beam element.

ver_prob3.std

Reference
handbook. CISC Handbook Example, Page 4-108.
Problem
Find the interaction ratio, beam and column resistance.
Given
E = 200000 MPa (STEEL).
F = 300 MPa CSA G40.21-M

y
Simply supported beam/column has a 3.7 m span, Ky is 1.0, Kz 1.0, Lu = 3.7 m
factored axial load is 2000 kN and end moments of
200 kN*m and 300 kN*m in the strong axis and 100 kN*m at each end in the weak axis.
Steel section is W310X143.
Comparison
Table 3B.4-CAN/CSA-S16 Verification Problem 3

comparison
Criteria Reference STAAD.Pro Difference
Interaction Ratio 0.998 1.00 none
Beam Resistance, 300 299 none

Weak axis
(kN·m)
Beam Resistance, 630 650 3.2%

Strong axis
(kN·m)
Column 4,200 4,222 none

Resistance (kN)
STAAD Output
****************************************************
* *
* STAAD.Pro *

* Version Bld *
* Date= *
* Time= *
* *
* USER ID: *
****************************************************
2. *
3. * ( COMPRESSION + BIAXIAL BENDING )
4. *
5. UNIT METER KN
7. 1 0 0 0; 2 0 3.7 0
8. *
10. 1 1 2
11. *
13. 1 TABLE ST W310X143
14. *
15. CONSTANTS
16. E STEEL ALL
17. POISSON STEEL ALL
18. *
19. SUPPORTS
20. 1 FIXED BUT MX MZ
21. 2 FIXED BUT FY MX MY MZ
22. *
23. LOAD 1 FACTORED LOAD
24. JOINT LOAD
25. 2 FY -2000
26. 2 MZ 200
27. 2 MX 100
28. 1 MZ 300
29. 1 MX 100
30. *
-----------------------------------
33. PARAMETER
34. CODE CANADIAN
35. CMY 2 ALL
36. CMZ 2 ALL
37. CB 1 ALL
38. TRACK 2 ALL
39. FYLD 300000 ALL
40. CHECK CODE ALL
******************************************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
* 1 ST W310X143 (CANADIAN SECTIONS)
FAIL CSA-13.8.2A 1.000 1
2000.00 C -100.00 300.00 0.00
-----------------------------

IZ = 3.47E+04 SZ = 2.15E+03 PZ = 2.41E+03

IY = 1.12E+04 SY = 7.28E+02 PY = 1.11E+03
--------------------------------
FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0
---------------------------------
CR1 = 4.912E+03 CR2 = 4.222E+03
CRZ = 4.737E+03 CTORFLX = 4.222E+03
--------------------------
41. STEEL MEMBER TAKE OFF ALL
STEEL TAKE-OFF
--------------
ST W310X143 3.70 5.171
----------------
TOTAL = 5.171
MEMBER PROFILE LENGTH WEIGHT
(METE) (KN )
1 ST W310X143 3.70 5.171
42. FINISH

A slender, cantilever beam subjected to a uniform load. Static analysis, 3D beam element.
Reference
CISC Example 1, page 5-91, Limit State Design, CSA-S16.1-94
Problem
A cantilever beam of length 4 meter is subjected to uniformly distributed load of 3 KN/Meter in

both major and minor axis. Axial compression of 8 KN is also applied to the member. User defined
steel section Sect_Class-4 from is assigned to the member.
Given
Design forces
8.0 KN (Compression)

6.0 KNm (Bending-Y)
6.0 KNm (Bending-Z)
6.0 KN (Shear-Y)
6.0 KN (Shear-Z)
Section Properties(Sect_Class-4):
Area = 2766 mm 2
Depth of section, D = 150 mm
Thickness of web Tw = 7 mm
Width of flange Bf = 150 mm
Thickness of flange Tf = 6 mm
Moment of inertia about Z axis, Iz = 1086.96X104 mm 4
Moment of inertia about Y axis, Iy = 337.894X104 mm 4
Moment of inertia about X axis, Ix = 3.7378X104 mm 4
Warping constant, Cw = 1.752X1010 mm 6
Member Length L = 2 m, Unbraced length = 100mm.
Material
FYLD = 300 MPa
E = 2.05E+05 MPa
G = E/2.6 MPa
Solution
Slenderness Ratio
Effective Length factor along Local Y-Axis = KY = 1
Effective Length factor along Local Z-Axis = KZ = 1
Slenderness ratio about Z axis, L/Rz = 31.9
Slenderness ratio about Y axis, L/Ry = 57.22
Maximum Slenderness Ratio, L/Rmax = 57.22
Section Classification
Bf/Tf = 150*0.5/6 = 12.5 > 200/sqrt(Fy) = 11.54

Flange is Class 4.
d/Tw = (150-2.0*6)/7 = 19.714
(1100/sqrt(Fy))*(1-0.39*Cf/ϕ*Cy)=(1100/sqrt(300))*(1-0.39*8000/(0.9*2766*300)) = 63.24
Web is Class 1.
Overall section is Class 4 section.
Check against axial compression (Clause 13.3.3)
Effective width, Beff = 200*Tf/sqrt(300) = 69.24
Effective area, Aeff = 69.24*6*4+(150-2*6)*7 = 2627.76 mm 4.
Effective yield stress, FYLDeff =40000/( 0.5*Bf/Tf)4 =256 MPa.
As per Clause 13.3.3(a),
Elastic critical buckling, Fe = π 4*E/ L_Rmax4 = 617.956 MPa.
Non-dimensional slenderness ratio, λ = sqrt(FYLD/Fe) =0.697
Axial compressive resistance, Cr = ϕ*Aeff*FYLD*(1+0.697^(2*1.34))^(-1/1.34) = 557886.104 N.
As per Clause 13.3.3(b),
Elastic critical buckling, Fe = π 4*E/ L_Rmax4 = 617.956 MPa.
Effective non-dimensional slenderness ratio, λeff = sqrt(FYLDeff/Fe) = 0.644
Axial compressive resistance, Cr = ϕ*Area*FYLDeff*(1+0.644^(2*1.34))^(-1/1.34) = 521726.94 N.
Axial compressive resistance Min(557886.104, 521726.94) = 521726.94 N.
Check against bending (Clause 13.5(c))
As the web of the section meets the requirement of Class 3 and flange exceeds Class 3 limit, flexural
resistance should be calculated as per clause 13.5(c).iii.
Effective moment of inertia about Z axis,
Izeff =2*(2*69.24*63)/12 + 2*(2*69.24*6)*(150-6)*(150-6)/4 + (7*(150-2*6)3)/12

=10152591.12 mm 4.
Effective section modulus about Z axis,
Szeff = 10152591.12*2/150 = 135367.88 mm 3.
Effective moment of inertia about Y axis,
Iyeff =(2*6*(2*69.24)3)/12 +(0.5*(150-6)*73)/12 =2657648.856 mm 4.
Effective section modulus about Y axis,

Syeff = 2657648.856/69.24 = 38383.144 mm 3.
Major axis bending resistance if member is laterally supported,
Mrz1 = ϕ*Szeff*FYLD= 0.9*135367.88*300 =36549327.6 N-mm.
Minor axis bending resistance,
Mry = ϕ*Syeff*FYLD = 0.9*38383.144*300 = 10363448.88 N-mm.
If the member is laterally unsupported major axis bending resistance is determined by clause 13.6
(b).
As the value of one of the end moments is 0.0, ω2 = 1.75.
Where, as per clause 13.6(a),
Mu = (1.75*3.14/2000)*sqrt(205000*337.894X104*78846.154*3.7378X104 +
(3.14*205000/2000)4*337.894X104*1.752X10^10) =2.48X108
My = Sz*FYLD = (1086.96X104X2/150) *300 =43478400.
Since Mu > 0.65My,
Moment of resistance Mrz2 = 1.15*0.9*43478400*(1-0.28*43478400/2.48X108) =42791153.71 N-mm =

42.79 KN-m.
Mrz2 should not be more than Mrz1. Since, Mrz2 > Mrz1 in this example, Mrz2 = Mrz1.
Mrz2 = 36549327.6 N-mm = 36.549 KN-m
Comparison
Table 3B.5-CAN/CSA-S16 Verification Problem 4 comparison

Criteria Hand STAAD.Pro Result Comments
Calculation
Axial 521.73 KN 5.219X102 KN none

compressive
resistance
Major axis 36.549 KN- 36.57 KN-m none

bending m
resistance
Minor axis 10.363 KN- 10.38 KN-m none

bending m
resistance
STAAD Output
****************************************************

* *
* STAAD.Pro V8i SELECTseries2 *
* Version 20.07.07.XX *
* Bentley Systems, Inc. *
* Date= AUG 17, 2010 *
* Time= 17: 6:23 *
* *
* USER ID: Bentley *
****************************************************

INPUT FILE: s-16-01 verification example.STD
2. START JOB INFORMATION
3. ENGINEER DATE 16-FEB-10
4. END JOB INFORMATION
5. * CISC EXAMPLE 1 PAGE 5-91, LIMIT STATES DESIGN, CSA-S16.1-94
6. * SIMPLY SUPPORTED BEAM WITH UNIFORM LOAD
7. * LIVE LOAD DEFLECTION OF L/300
8. UNIT MMS KN
10. 1 0 0 0; 2 2000 0 0
12. 1 1 2
13. START USER TABLE
14. TABLE 1
15. UNIT METER KN
16. WIDE FLANGE
17. SECT_CLASS-4
18. 0.002766 0.15 0.007 0.15 0.006 1.08696E-005 3.37894E-006 3.7378E-008 -
19. 0.00105 0.0018
20. END
21. UNIT METER KN
22. DEFINE MATERIAL START
23. ISOTROPIC MATERIAL1
24. E 2.05E+008
25. POISSON 0.3
26. ISOTROPIC STEEL
27. E 2.05E+008
28. POISSON 0.3
29. DENSITY 76.8195
30. ALPHA 1.2E-005
31. DAMP 0.03
32. END DEFINE MATERIAL
33. MEMBER PROPERTY
34. 1 UPTABLE 1 SECT_CLASS-4
35. UNIT MMS KN
36. CONSTANTS
37. MATERIAL STEEL ALL
38. SUPPORTS
39. 1 FIXED
40. UNIT METER KN
41. LOAD 1 LC1
42. MEMBER LOAD
43. 1 UNI GY -3
44. 1 UNI GZ -3
45. JOINT LOAD
46. 2 FX -8
-----------------------------------

SOLVER USED IS THE IN-CORE ADVANCED SOLVER
48. LOAD LIST 1

49. PRINT MEMBER FORCES LIST 1
VERIFICATION CISC 1994 HANDBOOK EXAMPLE PAGE 5-91 -- PAGE NO. 3
MEMBER END FORCES STRUCTURE TYPE = SPACE

-----------------
ALL UNITS ARE -- KN METE (LOCAL )
MEMBER LOAD JT AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z TORSION MOM-Y MOM-Z
1 1 1 8.00 6.00 6.00 0.00 -6.00 6.00

2 -8.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
************** END OF LATEST ANALYSIS RESULT **************
50. PARAMETER 1
51. CODE CANADIAN
52. CB 0 ALL
53. TRACK 2 ALL
54. FYLD 300000 ALL
55. CHECK CODE ALL
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - (CAN/CSA-S16-01 ) V2.0

********************************************

FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST SECT_CLASS-4 (UPT)
PASS CSA-13.8.3B 0.760 1
8.00 C -6.00 6.00 0.00

-----------------------------

IZ = 1.09E+03 SZ = 1.45E+02 PZ = 1.63E+02
IY = 3.38E+02 SY = 4.51E+01 PY = 6.92E+01
IX = 3.74E+00 CW = 1.75E+04
EFFECTIVE MEMBER PROPERTIES FOR CLASS-4 SECTION(UNIT = CM)

----------------------------------------------------------
EFFECTIVE CROSS SECTION AREA = 2.63E+01

EFFECTIVE IZ = 1.02E+03 EFFECTIVE SZ = 1.35E+02
EFFECTIVE IY = 2.66E+02 EFFECTIVE SY = 3.85E+01
EFFECTIVE YILED STRESS = 256.0 MPA

COMPRESSIVE CAPACITIES FOR CLASS 4 SECTION(UNIT = MPA)

------------------------------------------------------
BASED ON EFFECTIVE AREA

CR1 = 7.098E+02 CR2 = 5.582E+02 CRZ = 6.705E+02
CTORFLX = 5.582E+02
BASED ON EFFECTIVE YIELD STRENGTH

CR1 = 6.373E+02 CR2 = 5.219E+02 CRZ = 6.084E+02
CTORFLX = 5.219E+02

--------------------------------
FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0 E = 2.05E+05 G = 7.88E+04

---------------------------------
CR1 = 6.373E+02 CR2 = 5.219E+02 SECTION CLASS 4

CRZ = 6.084E+02 CTORFLX = 5.219E+02
MU = 2.486E+02
--------------------------

56. FINISH
*********** END OF THE STAAD.Pro RUN ***********
**** DATE= AUG 17,2010 TIME= 17: 6:28 ****
************************************************************
* For questions on STAAD.Pro, please contact *
* Bentley Systems Offices at the following locations *
* *
* Telephone Web / Email *
* *
* USA: +1 (714)974-2500 *
* UK +44(1454)207-000 *
* SINGAPORE +65 6225-6158 *
* EUROPE +31 23 5560560 *
* INDIA +91(033)4006-2021 *
* JAPAN +81(03)5952-6500 http://www.ctc-g.co.jp *
* CHINA +86 10 5929 7000 *
* THAILAND +66(0)2645-1018/19 partha.p@reisoftwareth.com *
* *
* Worldwide http://selectservices.bentley.com/en-US/ *
* *

************************************************************

3C.1 Cross-Sectional Properties
3C. Canadian Codes - Design Per Canadian Cold Formed

Steel Code S136-94
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Canadian code S136-94 Specification
for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members, including revisions dated May, 1995. The
program allows design of single (non-composite) members in tension, compression, bending, shear,
as well as their combinations. For laterally supported members in bending, the Initiation of
Yielding method has been used. Cold work of forming strengthening effects have been included as
an option.
Design of members per S136-94 requires the STAAD CAN/AUS/SA Design Codes SELECT Code
Pack.
3C.1 Cross-Sectional Properties

designations from the Gross Section Property Tables published in the "Cold-Formed Steel Design
Manual", AISI, 1996 Edition.
l Channel with Lips
l Angle with Lips
l Angle without Lips
l Z with Lips
l Z without Lips
l Hat
Shape selection may be done using the member property pages of the graphical user interface (GUI)
or by specifying the section designation symbol in the input file.
3C.2 Design Procedure


3C.2 Design Procedure
3C.2.1 Code Checking

CSA 136. Code checking is carried out for locations specified via the SECTION command or the
BEAM parameter. The results are presented in a form of a PASS/FAIL identifier and a RATIO of
load effect to resistance for each member checked. You may choose the degree of detail in the
output data by setting the TRACK parameter.
Checking command.
3C.2.2 Member Selection

You may request that the program search the cold formed steel shapes database (AISI standard
etc.) and, if a suitable replacement is found, present design results for that section. If no section
3C.2.3 Code Sections Implemented

The program calculates effective section properties in accordance with Clauses 5.6.2.1 through 3 and
5.6.2.6 through 8. Cross-sectional properties and overall slenderness of members are checked for
compliance with
l Clause 5.3, Maximum Effective Slenderness Ratio for members in Compression
l Clause 5.4, Maximum Flat Width Ratios for Elements in Compression
l Clause 5.5, Maximum Section Depths.
The program will check member strength in accordance with Clause 6 of the Standard as follows:
l Resistance factors listed in Clauses 6.2 (a), (b), and (e) are used, as applicable.
l Members in tension - Resistance is calculated in accordance with Clauses 6.3.1 and 6.3.2.
l Members in bending and shear
Resistance calculations are based on Clauses:

l 6.4.1 General,
l 6.4.2 and 6.4.2.1 Laterally Supported Members, compressive limit stress based on Initiation of
Yielding,
l 6.4.3 Laterally Unsupported Members,
l 6.4.4 Channels and Z-Shaped Members with Unstiffened Flanges - additional limitations,
l 6.4.5 Shear in Webs,
l 6.4.6 Combined Bending and Shear in Webs.
l Members in compression

o 6.6.1.1, 6.6.1.2 (a) and (d), and 6.6.1.3 General,
o 6.6.2 Sections Not Subject to Torsional-Flexural Buckling,
o 6.6.3 Singly Symmetric Sections,
o 6.6.4 Point-Symmetric Sections,
o 6.6.5 Cylindrical Tubular Sections.
l Members in compression and bending
Resistance calculations are based on Clause 6.7.1, Singly and Doubly Symmetric Sections.
Input for the coefficients of uniform bending must be provided.

The following table contains the input parameters for specifying values of design variables and
selection of design options.
Table 3C.1-Canadian Cold Formed Steel Design Parameters

Name
CODE - Must be specified S136.

Reference Manual.


Name
BEAM 1.0 When this parameter is set to 1.0 (default),

the adequacy of the member is determined
by checking a total of 13 equally spaced
locations along the length of the member.
If the BEAM value is 0.0, the 13 location
check is not conducted, and instead,
checking is done only at the locations
specified by the SECTION command (See
STAAD manual for details). If neither the
BEAM parameter nor any SECTION
command is specified, STAAD will
terminate the run and ask the user to
provide one of those 2 commands. This
rule is not enforced for TRUSS members.
CMZ 1.0 Coefficient of equivalent uniform bending

Ω . See CSA 136, 6.7.2. Used for Combined
z
axial load and bending design. Values
range from 0.4 to 1.0.
CMY 0.0 Coefficient of equivalent uniform bending

Ω . See CSA 136, 6.7.2. Used for Combined
y
CWY 0 Specifies whether the cold work of forming

strengthening effect should be included in
resistance computation. See CSA 136, 5.2.
0. effect should not be included

1. effect should be included
DMAX 1000.0 Maximum depth permissible for the

section during member selection. This
value must be provided in the current
units.
DMIN 0.0 Minimum depth required for the section

during member selection. This value must
be provided in the current units.


Name
FLX 1 Specifies whether torsional-flexural

buckling restraint is provided or is not
necessary for the member. See CSA 136,
6.6.2
0. Section subject to torsional flexural

buckling and restraint not provided
1. restraint provided or unnecessary
FU 450 MPa Ultimate tensile strength of steel in

current units.
FYLD 350 MPa Yield strength of steel in current units.
KT 1.0 Effective length factor for torsional

buckling. It is a fraction and is unit-less.
Values can range from 0.01 (for a column
completely prevented from torsional
buckling) to any user specified large value.
It is used to compute the KL/R ratio for
twisting for determining the capacity in
axial compression.
KY 1.0 Effective length factor for overall column

buckling about the local Y-axis. It is a
fraction and is unit-less. Values can range
from 0.01 (for a column completely
prevented from buckling) to any user
specified large value. It is used to compute
the KL/R ratio for determining the
KZ 1.0 Effective length factor for overall column

buckling in the local Z-axis. It is a fraction
and is unit-less. Values can range from 0.01
(for a column completely prevented from
determining the capacity in axial
compression.


Name
LT Member Unbraced length for twisting. It is input in

length the current units of length. Values can
range from 0.01 (for a column completely
prevented from torsional buckling) to any
user specified large value. It is used to
compute the KL/R ratio for twisting for
compression.
LY Member Effective length for overall column

length buckling in the local Y-axis. It is input in
the current units of length. Values can
LZ Member Effective length for overall column

length buckling in the local Z-axis. It is input in
NSF 1.0 Net section factor for tension members,

See CSA 136, 6.3.1.
STIFF Member Spacing in the longitudinal direction of

length shear stiffeners for stiffened flat webs. It is
input in the current units of length. See
section CSA 136, 6.4.5


Name
TRACK 0 This parameter is used to control the level

of detail in which the design output is
reported in the output file. The allowable
values are:
0. Prints only the member number,

section name, ratio, and PASS/FAIL
status.
1. Prints the design summary in
addition to that printed by TRACK
1
2. Prints member and material
properties in addition to that
printed by TRACK 2.
TSA 1 Specifies whether bearing and

intermediate transverse stiffeners satisfy
the requirements of CSA 136, 6.5. If true,
the program uses the more liberal set of
interaction equations in 6.4.6.
0. stiffeners do not comply with 6.5

1. stiffeners comply with 6.5

3D.1 General Comments
3D. Canadian Codes - Wood Design Per CSA Standard

CAN/CSA-086-01
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing timber design based on the Canadian code CSA 086-01 Wood
Design Standard.
Design of members per CSA 086-01 requires the STAAD CAN/AUS/SA Design Codes SELECT Code
Pack.

The design philosophy of this specification is based on the concept of limit state design. Structures
are designed and proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at which they would
become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit-state are recognized - ultimate
and serviceability. The primary considerations in ultimate limit state design are strength and
stability, while that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load and resistance factors are used so
that a uniform reliability is achieved for the entire structure under various loading conditions and
at the same time the chances of limits being surpassed are acceptably remote.
In the STAAD implementation, the code checking portion of the program checks whether code
requirements for each selected section are met and identifies the governing criteria.
The following sections describe the salient features of the STAAD implementation of CSA086-01. A
3D.2 Analysis Methodology

Analysis is done for the primary and combination loading conditions provided by the user. The
user is allowed complete flexibility in providing loading specifications and using appropriate load
factors to create necessary loading situations.
3D.3 Member Property Specifications

A timber section library consisting of Sawn and Glulam timber is available for member property
specification.
For specification of member properties, for Sawn timber the timber section library available in
STAAD may be used. The next section describes the syntax of commands used to assign properties
from the built-in timber table.
For Glulam timber, member properties can be specified using the YD (depth) and ZD (width)
specifications and selecting Combination and Species specifications from the built-in table. The
assignment is done with the help of the PRISMATIC option (Refer to Section 5.20 of the Technical
Reference Manual)

3D.4 Built-in Timber Section Library
3D.4 Built-in Timber Section Library

The following information is provided for use when the built-in timber tables are to be referenced
for member property specification. These properties are stored in a database file. If called for, the
properties are also used for member design.
Following are the description of the different types of species combination available:
3D.4.1 Douglas Fir-Larch

The following example illustrates the specification of Douglas Fir-Larch species combination.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST DFL_SelStr_2X2_BM
3D.4.2 Hem-Fir
Designation of Hem-Fir species combination in STAAD is as follows.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST Hem-Fir_SelStr_2X10_BM
3D.4.3 Northern Species

Designation of Northern species combination in STAAD is as follows.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST Northern_SelStr_3X12_BM
3D.4.4 Spruce-Pine-Fir
Designation of Spruce-Pine-Fir species combination in STAAD is as follows.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST SPF_SelStr_3X8_BM
3D.4.5 Glu Laminated timber

Designation of Glu-lam timber in STAAD involves defining the material, specifying the dimensions,
and associating the material with the member through the CONSTANTS command.
UNIT CM KN
ISOTROPIC GLT_D.Fir-L-24f-EX
E 51611.7
POISSON 0.15

3D.5 Member Resistance
DENSITY 2.5e-005
ALPHA 1.2e-011
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY TIMBER CANADIAN
1 PRIS YD 12 ZD 6
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL GLT_D.Fir-L-24f-EX MEMB 1
3D.4.6 Example
Sample input file to demonstrate usage of Canadian timber
STAAD PLANE EXAMPLE FOR DIMENSIONAL LUMBER
UNIT FEET POUND
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 6 0 0; 3 12 0 0; 4 18 0 0;
5 24 0 0; 6 6 3 0; 7 12 6 0; 8 18 3 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2; 2 2 3; 3 3 4; 4 4 5; 5 1 6; 6 6 7; 7 7 8; 8 8 5;
9 2 6; 10 3 7; 11 4 8; 12 6 3; 13 3 8;
UNIT FEET POUND
ISOTROPIC SPF_SelStr_4X10_BM
E 1224
POISSON 0.15
DENSITY 25
ALPHA 5.5e-006
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY tim can
1 TO 4 9 TO 11 TABLE ST SPF_SelStr_4X10_BM
5 TO 8 12 13 TABLE ST SPF_SelStr_4X10_BM
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL SPF_SelStr_4X10_BM memb 1 TO 4 9 TO 11
MATERIAL SPF_SelStr_4X10_BM memb 5 TO 8 12 13
FINISH

The member resistances are calculated in STAAD according to the procedures outlined in section 5
(for sawn lumber) and 6 (for Glulam) of CSA086-01.
These depend on several adjustment factors as follows:
KD
Load duration factor (Clause 4.3.2.2-CSA086-01, Table 4.3.2.2)

KH
System factor (Clause 5.4.4 and 6.4.3 and Table 5.4.4 -CSA086-01)
K_T
Treatment factor (Clause 5.4.3 and 6.4.4 -CSA086-01)
KSB
Service condition factor applicable to Bending at extreme fibre (Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2 -
CSA086-01)
KSV
Service condition factor applicable to longitudinal shear (Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2 CSA086-01)
KSC
Service condition factor applicable to Compression parallel to the grain (Table 5.4.2 and
6.4.2 CSA086-01)
K_SCP
Service condition factor applicable to Compression perpendicular to the grain (Table 5.4.2
and 6.4.2 CSA086-01)
KSE
Service condition factor applicable to modulus of elasticity (Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2
CSA086-01)
KST
Service condition factor applicable to tension parallel to the grain (Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2
CSA086-01)
KZB
Size factor applicable to bending (Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5 -CSA086-01)
KZV
size factor applicable to shear(Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5 -CSA086-01)
KZT
size factor applicable to tension parallel to grain (Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5 -CSA086-01)
KZCP
size factor applicable to compression perpendicular to grain (Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5 -
CSA086-01)
K_ZC
size factor applicable to compression parallel to grain (Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5 -
CSA086-01)
CHIX
Curvature factor (Clause 6.5.6.5.2-CSA086-01)

CV
shear load coefficient (Table 6.5.7.4A- CSA086-01)
KN
Notch factor(Clause 5.5.5.4-CSA086-01)
All of these factors must be specified as input according to the classification of timber and stress
grade.
Explained here is the procedure adopted in STAAD for calculating the member resistances.
3D.5.1 Axial Tension

i. For Sawn timber
The criterion governing the capacity of tension members is based on one limit state. The
limit state involves fracture at the section with the minimum effective net area. The net
section area may be specified by the user through the use of the parameter NSF (see Table
3B.1). STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a member based on this limit state per Clause
5.5.9 of CSA086-01.
ii. For Glulam timber
The design of glulam tension members differs from sawn timber since CSA 086-01 assigns
different specified strength for gross and net section. The specified strength at net section is
slightly higher than the strength of the gross section. Therefore, Glulam tension members
are designed based on two limit states. The first one is the limit state of yielding in the gross
section. The second limit state involves fracture at the section with the minimum effective
net area. The net-section area may be specified by the user through the use of the parameter
NSF (see Table 3B.1). STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a member based on these two
limits states per Clause.6.5.11 of CSA086-01.
3D.5.2 Axial Compression

The compressive resistance of columns is determined based on Clause.5.5.6 and Clause.6.5.8.4 of
CSA086-01. The equations presented in this section of the code assume that the compressive
resistance is a function of the compressive strength of the gross section (Gross section Area times
the Yield Strength) as well as the slenderness factor (Kc). The effective length for the calculation of
compression resistance may be provided through the use of the parameters KX, KY, KZ, LX, LY and
LZ (see Table 3B.1).
3D.5.3 Bending
The bending resistance of Sawn members are determined based on Clause 5.5.4 of CSA086-01 and
for glulam members are determined based on Clause 6.5.6.5 of CSA086-01. The allowable stress in
bending is multiplied by Lateral stability factor, KL to take in account whether lateral support is
provided at points of bearing to prevent lateral displacement and rotation

3D.5.4 Axial compression and bending

The member strength for sections subjected to axial compression and uni-axial or biaxial bending is
obtained through the use of interaction equations. Clause 5.5.10 and 6.5.12 of the code provides the
equations for this purpose. If the summation of the left hand side of these equations exceeds 1.0 or
the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 3B.1), the member is considered
to have FAILed under the loading condition.
3D.5.5 Axial tension and bending

The member strength for sections subjected to axial tension and uniaxial or biaxial bending is
obtained through the use of interaction equations. Clause 5.5.10 and 6.5.12 of the code provides the
equations for this purpose. If the summation of the left hand side of these equations exceeds 1.0 or
the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 3B.1), the member is considered
to have FAILed under the loading condition.
3D.5.6 Shear
The shear resistance of the cross section is determined using the equations of Clause 5.5.5 and
6.5.7.2 of the code. Once this is obtained, the ratio of the shear force acting on the cross section to
the shear resistance of the section is calculated. If any of the ratios (for both local Y & Z axes)
exceed 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 3B.1), the section
is considered to have failed under shear.

The design parameters outlined in Table below may be used to control the design procedure. These
parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer to the program and thus allows the
Table 3D.1-Canadian Timber Design Parameters

Name
CODE - Must be specified as TIMBER CANADIAN.
Design Code to follow. See section 5.51.1 of

the Technical Reference Manual.


Name
CHIX 1.0 Curvature Factor for Compression [Clause

6.5.6.5.2]
CV 1.0 Shear Load Coefficient [Table 6.5.7.4A]
KD 1.0 Load Duration Factor [Clause.4.3.2, Table

4.3.2]
KH 1.0 System Factor [Clause 5.4.4/6.4.3, Table

5.4.4]
KN 1.0 Notch Factor [Clause 5.4.7.2.2]
KSB 1.0 Service Condition Factor for Bending at

Extreme Fibre
Applicable for bending at extreme fibre

[Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2]
KSC 1.0 Service Condition Factor for Compression,
Applicable for compression parallel to grain

[Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2]
KSE 1.0 Service Condition Factor for Modulus of

Elasticity,
Applicable for modulus of elasticity [Table

5.4.2 and 6.4.2]
KST 1.0 Service Condition Factor for Tension,
Applicable for tension parallel to grain

[Table 5.4.2 and 6.4.2]
KSV 1.0 Service Condition Factor for Shear,
Applicable for longitudinal shear [Table

5.4.2 and 6.4.2]
KX 1.0 K value for flexural torsional buckling
KY 1.0 K value in local Y-axis, usually minor axis
KZ 1.0 K value in local Z-axis, usually major axis
KZB 1.0 Size Factor for Bending,
Applicable for bending [Clause.5.4.5 and

Table 5.4.5]

3D.7 Code Checking

Name
KZCP 1.0 Size Factor for Compression,
Applicable for compression perpendicular

to grain [Clause .5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5]
KZT 1.0 Size Factor for Tension,
Applicable for tension parallel to grain
[Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5]
KZV 1.0 Size Factor for Shear [Clause 5.4.5 and

Table 5.4.5]
K_SCP 1.0 Service Condition Factor for Compression,
Applicable for compression perpendicular

to grain [Clause 5.4.2 and Table 6.4.2]
K_T 1.0 Treatment Factor [Clause 5.4.3/6.4.4]
K_ZC 1.0 Size Factor for Compression,
Applicable for compression parallel to grain

[Clause 5.4.5 and Table 5.4.5]
LX Member Length for flexural torsional buckling

length
LY Member Length in local Y axis for slenderness value

length KL/r
LZ Member Length in local Z axis for slenderness value

length KL/r
NSF 1.0 Net section factor for tension members
RATIO 1.0 Permissible Ratio of Actual to Allowable

Value
3D.7 Code Checking

are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per the CSA086-01 requirements.
Code checking is done using forces and moments at specified sections of the members. The code
checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition,
governing load case, location (distance from the start joint) and magnitudes of the governing
forces and moments are also printed.

3D.8 Member Selection
Checking command.
PARAMETER
CODE TIMBER CAN
KD 0.99 ALL
KH 0.99 ALL
K_T 0.99 ALL
KSB 0.99 ALL
KSV 0.99 ALL
KSC 0.99 ALL
KSE 0.99 ALL
KST 0.99 ALL
KZB 0.99 ALL
KZV 0.99 ALL
KZT 0.99 ALL
KZCP 0.99 ALL
K_ZC 0.99 ALL
CV 0.99 ALL
KN 0.99 ALL
K_SCP 0.99 ALL
CHIX 0.99 ALL
RATIO 0.99 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH

Member selection based CSA086-2001 is not available.
3D.9 Tabulated Results of Timber Design

CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the CSA086-01 specification, which governed the design.
Pu
Actual Load in Compression
Tu
Actual Load in Tension
Muy
Ultimate moment in y direction
Muz
Ultimate moment in z direction
V
Ultimate shear force

3D.10 Verification Problems
SLENDERNESS_Y
Actual Slenderness ratio in y direction
SLENDERNESS_Z
Actual Slenderness ratio in z direction
PY
Factored Compressive capacity in y direction
PZ
Factored Compressive capacity in z direction
T
Factored tensile capacity
MY
Factored moment of resistance in y direction
MZ
Factored moment of resistance in z direction
V
Factored shear resistance
SLENDERNESS
Allowable slenderness ratio

These verification examples are included for reference purposes.
3D.10.1 Verification Problem No. 1

Determine the Canadian Glulam section column in axial compression, with design per Canadian
wood design code (CSA:086-01). Column is effectively pinned at both ends and braced at mid-
height in all direction.
This example is included in the installation of STAAD.Pro as

…/SProV8i/STAAD/Examp/Can/canada_glulamcolumn.std
Reference
Example 4, page 116, Canadian Wood Design Manual, 2001

Given
Length = 9000 mm
Comparison
Table 3D.2-CAN/CSA-086-01 Verification Problem 1

Design Strength 295 293.793 none

(kN)
Output for Member Design

STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (S086)
***********************
ALL UNITS ARE - KN METE (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 175.00X228.00 CANADIAN GLULAM GRADE:GLT_SPRUCE-PINE-12C-E
PASS CL.5.5.10/6.5 0.728 1
214.00 C 0.00 0.00 0.0000
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| LEZ = 4500.000 LEY = 4500.000 LUZ = 9000.000 LUY = 9000.000mm |
| |
| KD = 1.000 KH = 1.000 KT = 1.000 KSB = 1.000 KSV = 1.000 |
| KSC = 1.000 K_SCP = 1.000 KSE = 1.000 KST = 1.000 KZB = 1.000 |
| KZV = 1.000 KZT = 1.000 KZCP = 1.000 K_ZC = 1.000 CHIX = 1.000 |
| CV = 1.000 KN = 1.000 |
| |
| ACTUAL LOADS : (KN-m) |
| Pu = 214.000 |
| Tu = 0.000 |
| Muy = 0.000 |
| Muz = 0.000 |
| V = 0.000 |
| SLENDERNESS_Y = 19.737 |
| SLENDERNESS_Z = 25.714 |
| ALLOWABLE CAPACITIES OF THE SECTION: (KN-m) |
| PY = 413.943 |
| PZ = 293.793 |
| T = 0.000 |
| MY = 0.000 |
| MZ = 0.000 |
| V = 0.000 |
| SLENDERNESS = 50.000 |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
3D.10.2 Verification Problem: 2

Determine the bending capacity of a Canadian Glulam section single span floor beam, with design
per Canadian wood design code (CSA:086-01). The compression edge assumed fully supported.


…/SProV8i/STAAD/Examp/Can/canada_glulambeam.std
Reference
Given
Length = 7,500 mm, Beam Spacing = 5,000 mm, Standard load condition, Dry service condition,
Untreated
Comparison


in Bending
(kN·m)

in Shear (kN)

***********************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 130.00X646.00 CANADIAN GLULAM GRADE:GLT_D.FIR-L-20F-E
FAIL CL.5.5.5/6.5. 1.008 1
0.00 T 0.00 0.00 0.0000
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| LEZ = 7500.000 LEY = 7500.000 LUZ = 7500.000 LUY = 7500.000mm |
| |
| KD = 1.000 KH = 1.000 KT = 1.000 KSB = 1.000 KSV = 1.000 |
| CV = 1.000 KN = 1.000 |
| |
| Pu = 0.000 |
| Tu = 0.000 |
| Muy = 0.000 |
| Muz = 0.000 |
| V = 101.625 |

| PY = 0.000 |
| PZ = 0.000 |
| T = 0.000 |
| MY = 41.923 |
| MZ = 208.323 |
| V = 100.776 |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|

Determine the capacity of a Canadian Glulam section in axial tension, with design per the
Canadian wood design code (CSA:086-01).

…/SProV8i/STAAD/Examp/Can/canada_glulamtension.std
Reference
Given
Dry service condition, Untreated
Comparison


in Tension (kN)

***********************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 80.00X266.00 CANADIAN GLULAM GRADE:GLT_SPRUCE-PINE-14T-E
PASS CL.5.5.10/6.5 0.974 1
250.00 T 0.00 0.00 0.0000
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| LEZ = 4500.000 LEY = 4500.000 LUZ = 9000.000 LUY = 9000.000mm |
| |
| KD = 1.000 KH = 1.000 KT = 1.000 KSB = 1.000 KSV = 1.000 |
| CV = 1.000 KN = 1.000 |
| |


| Pu = 0.000 |
| Tu = -250.000 |
| Muy = 0.000 |
| Muz = 0.000 |
| V = 0.000 |
| PY = 0.000 |
| PZ = 0.000 |
| T = 256.636 |
| MY = 0.000 |
| MZ = 0.000 |
| V = 0.000 |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|

Determine the Canadian Sawn section column in axial compression, with design per the Canadian
wood design code (CSA:086-01). Column is effectively pinned at both ends.

…/SProV8i/STAAD/Examp/Can/canada_sawn_lumber_column.std
Reference
Given
Unbraced Length = 5,000 mm
Comparison


(kN)

***********************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST DFL_NO2_8X8_POST
PASS CL.5.5.10/6.5.12 0.882 1
114.00 C 0.00 0.00 0.0000
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| LEZ = 5000.000 LEY = 5000.000 LUZ = 5000.000 LUY = 5000.000mm |

| |
| KD = 1.000 KH = 1.000 KT = 1.000 KSB = 1.000 KSV = 1.000 |
| CV = 1.000 KN = 1.000 |
| |
| Pu = 114.000 |
| Tu = 0.000 |
| Muy = 0.000 |
| Muz = 0.000 |
| V = 0.000 |
| PY = 129.223 |
| PZ = 129.223 |
| T = 0.000 |
| MY = 0.000 |
| MZ = 0.000 |
| V = 0.000 |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|

Determine the bending capacity of a Canadian sawn section single span floor beam, with design per
the Canadian wood design code (CSA:086-01).

…/SProV8i/STAAD/Examp/Can/canada_sawn_lumber_beam1.std
Reference
Given
Length =6000mm, Beam Spacing = 3000mm, Standard load condition, Dry service condition,
Untreated
Comparison

Design Strength 79.8 79.732 none

in Bending
(kN·m)
Design Strength 46.1 46.170 none

in Shear (kN)


***********************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST DFL_NO1_10X16_BM
FAIL CL.5.5.5/6.5.6 1.066 1
0.00 T 0.00 49.20 0.0000
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| LEZ = 3000.000 LEY = 3000.000 LUZ = 3000.000 LUY = 3000.000mm |
| |
| KD = 1.000 KH = 1.000 KT = 1.000 KSB = 1.000 KSV = 1.000 |
| CV = 1.000 KN = 1.000 |
| |
| Pu = 0.000 |
| Tu = 0.000 |
| Muy = 0.000 |
| Muz = 49.200 |
| V = 49.200 |
| PY = 0.000 |
| PZ = 0.000 |
| T = 0.000 |
| MY = 79.800 |
| MZ = 79.732 |
| V = 46.170 |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|

Determine the capacity of a Canadian Sawn section in axial tension, with design per the Canadian
wood design code (CSA:086-01).

…/SProV8i/STAAD/Examp/Can/canada_sawn_lumber_tension.std
Reference
Given
Dry service condition, Untreated

Comparison


in Tension (kN)

***********************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST DFL_NO1_6X8_BM
PASS CL.5.5.10/6.5.12 0.781 1
144.00 T 0.00 0.00 0.0000
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| LEZ = 5000.000 LEY = 5000.000 LUZ = 5000.000 LUY = 5000.000mm |
| |
| KD = 1.000 KH = 1.100 KT = 1.000 KSB = 1.000 KSV = 1.000 |
| CV = 1.000 KN = 1.000 |
| |
| Pu = 0.000 |
| Tu = -144.000 |
| Muy = 0.000 |
| Muz = 0.000 |
| V = 0.000 |
| PY = 0.000 |
| PZ = 0.000 |
| T = 184.338 |
| MY = 0.000 |
| MZ = 0.000 |
| V = 0.000 |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
3D. Canadian Codes - Steel Design per CSA Standard

CAN/CSA-S16-09
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Canadian code CAN/CSA-S16-09
Limit States Design of Steel Structures.
Design of members per CAN/CSA-S16-09 requires the STAAD CAN/AUS/SA Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.


The design of structural steel members in accordance with the specification CAN/CSA S16-09 Limit
States Design of Steel Structures is can be used in STAAD.Pro This code supercedes the previous
edition of the code CAN/CSA – S16-01.
would become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit-states are recognized -
conditions and at the same time the probability of limits being surpassed is acceptably low.
In the STAAD.Pro implementation, members are proportioned to resist the design loads without
The following sections describe the salient features of the STAAD.Pro implementation of
CAN/CSA-S16-09. A detailed description of the design process along with its underlying concepts
and assumptions is available in the specification document.
3D.12 Analysis Methodology

The elastic analysis method is used to obtain the forces and moments for design. Analysis is done
for the specified primary and combination loading condition. You are allowed complete flexibility
in providing loading specifications and using appropriate load factors to create necessary loading
situations. Depending upon the analysis requirements, regular stiffness analysis or P-Delta analysis
may be specified. Dynamic analysis may also be performed and the results combined with static
analysis results.
3D.13 Member Property Specifications

For specification of member properties, the steel section library available in STAAD.Pro may be
used. The next section describes the syntax of commands used to assign properties from the built-
in steel table. Member properties may also be specified using the User Table facility. For more
information on these facilities, refer to the STAAD.Pro Technical Reference Manual.
3D.14 Built-in Steel Section Library


3D.15 Section Classification
Almost all Canadian steel sections are available for input. A complete listing of the sections
available in the built-in steel section library may be obtained by using the tools of the graphical
user interface.
3D.15 Section Classification

Steel sections are classified as plastic (Class 1), compact (Class 2), noncompact (Class 3), or slender
element (Class 4) sections depending upon their local buckling characteristics (See Clause 11 and
Table 1 of CAN/CSA-S16-09). The design procedures are different depending on the section class.
STAAD.Pro determines the section classification for the standard shapes and user specified shapes.
3D.16 Member Resistances

The member resistances are calculated in STAAD.Pro according to the procedures outlined in
section 13 of the specification. These depend on several factors such as members unsupported
lengths, cross-sectional properties, slenderness factors, unsupported width to thickness ratios and so
on. Note that the program automatically takes into consideration appropriate resistance factors to
calculate member resistances. Explained here is the procedure adopted in STAAD.Pro for
calculating the member resistances.
ϕ = 0.9 and ϕu = 0.75
3D.16.1 Members Subject to Axial Forces
Axial Tension
The criteria governing the capacity of tension members are based on two limit states: resistance due
to yielding and resistance due to rupture. The resistance due to rupture depends on effective net
section area. You may specify the net section area through the NSF design parameter. STAAD.Pro
calculates the tension capacity of a member based on these two limits states per Cl.13.2 of
CAN/CSA-S16-09. Design parameters FYLD, FU, and NSF (See "Design Parameters" on page 189) are
applicable for these calculations
i. Yielding, per Cl. 13.2(a)

Tr = ϕA g Fy
ii. Rupture, per Cl. 13.2 (b)

Tr = ϕu A ne Fu

Axial Compression
resistance may be provided through the use of the parameters KT, KY, KZ, LT, LY, and LZ (See
"Design Parameters" on page 189). Some of the aspects of the axial compression capacity calculations
are :
I. For doubly symmetric sections meeting the requirement of Table 1, resistance is:
Resistance due to Major axis buckling per Cl. 13.3.1.
Resistance due to Minor axis buckling per Cl. 13.3.1

−1 / n
(
Cr = ϕAFy 1 − λ2n )
where
n = 1.34
λ = Fy / Fe
π 2E
Fe =
kL 2
( )
r
II. For any other section not covered under Cl. 13.3.1, the factored compressive resistance, Cr, is
computed using the expression given in Cl. 13.3.1 with a value of n = 1.34 and the value of Fe
taken as follows:
i. For doubly symmetric sections and axisymmetric sections, the least of Fex , Fey , and
Fez.
ii. For singly symmetric sections with the Y axis taken as the axis of symmetry, the lesser
of Fex and Feyz
where
Fey + Fez  4FeyFezΩ 

Feyz = 1 − 1 − 
2Ω  (Fey + Fez)
2

 
π 2E
Fex = 2
( )
k xL x
rx

π 2E
Fey = 2
 kyLy 
 ry 
 
 π 2EC w  1
Fez =  2
+ GJ  2
 (K zL z)  Ar 0
x0 ,y0 = shear center
r 02 = x02 + y02 + rx2 + ry2
 x 2+ y 2 
Ω = 1− 0 2 0 
 r0 
iii. For asymmetric sections the smallest root of:
x0 2 y0 2
( ) − F (F − F )( )
(Fe − Fex )(Fe − Fey )(Fe − Fez ) − F e2(Fe − Fey )
r0
2
e e ex r0
=0
III. For Class 4 member subjected to axial compression, the factored compressive resistance is:
−1 / n
(
Cr = ϕA e Fy 1 − λ2n )
Ae is calculated using reduced element widths meeting the maximum width to thickness
ratio specified in Table 1.
Effective width required for the calculation of effective area Ae, for different section shapes
are as follows.
l For flanges of I-section, T-section and channel section and legs of angle section
b e = 200t / Fy
l For stem of T-section
b e = 340t / Fy
l For flanges of HSS rectangular or Tube sections
b e = 670t / Fy
l For circular HSS or Pipe section
D= 23,000t/(Fy
3D.16.2 Members Subject to Bending

factored moment resistance is specified in STAAD.Pro through the UNT and UNB parameters (See
"Design Parameters" on page 189). The LAT parameter is required to specif if the member is laterally
supported against lateral torsional buckling.

I. The factored moment resistance, Mr, developed by a member subjected to uniaxial bending
moments about a principal axis where effectively continuous lateral support is provided to
the compression flange or where the member has no tendency to buckle laterally, is
calculated as:
i. For Class 1 and Class 2 sections (Cl. 13.5(a) ):
Mr = ϕ·Z· Fy = ϕ·Mp
ii. For Class 3 sections (Cl. 13.5(b) ):
Mr = ϕ·S· Fy = ϕ·My
iii. For Class 4 sections (Cl. 13.5(c) ):
Mr = ϕ·Se· Fy
where
Se = the effective section modulus determined using an effective flange

670t / Fy
width,be , of for flanges along two edges parallel to the direction of
200t / Fy
stress and an effective flange width,be of for flanges supported along
one edge parallel to the direction of stress. For flange supported along one
edge, beIe/t shall not exceed 60.
II. For laterally unsupported members, flexural resistance is calculated as follows:
i. For doubly symmetric Class 1 and Class 2 sections (Cl 13.6(a) ):
 ϕM u when M u ≤ 0.67M p

Mr =   0.28M p 
1.15ϕM p1 − M u  ≤ ϕM p when M u > 0.67M p
  
where
ω 2π πE 2
Mu =
L
EI yGJ + ( )IC
L y
ω 2 = 1.75 + 1.05κ + 0.3κ 2 ≤ 2.5
κ = ratio of smaller factored moment to the larger factored moment at

opposite ends of the unbraced length (positive for double curvature and
negative for single curvature).
ii. For doubly symmetric Class 3 and Class 4 sections –except closed square and circular
sections– and for channels:
 ϕM u when M u ≤ 0.67M y

Mr =   0.28M y 
1.15ϕM y1 − M u  ≤ ϕM p when M u > 0.67M y
  

but not greater than ϕMy for Class 3 sections and the value specified in Cl.13.5(c)(iii)
for Class 4 sections.
iii. For singly symmetric (monosymmetric) Class 1, Class 2, or Class 3 sections and T-
shape sections, lateral torsional buckling strength shall be checked separately for each
flange under compression under factored loads at any point along its unbraced
length:
l when Mu > Myr:
   L − L u 
M r = ϕM p − M p − M yr   ≤ ϕM p
   L yr − L u 
where
Myr = 0.7Sx Fy , with Sx taken as the smaller of the two potential

values
Lyr = length L obtained by setting Mu = Myr

490rt
L u = 1.1rt E / Fy =
Fy
bc
rt =
(
12 1 +
h cw
3b ct c )
hc = depth of the web in compression
bc
= width of the compression flange
tc = thickness of the compression flange
l when M ≤ Myr:
M r = ϕM u
where
Mu = the critical elastic moment of the unbraced section =

ω 3π 2EI y   2 C 
β + β 2 + 4 GJL + 
2
 x x  2 I y  
2L
  π EI y  
βx = asymmetry parameter for singly symmetric beam =

 2I yc   I y 2
0.9(d − t ) − 11 −   
 Iy   I x  
  
Iyc = moment of inertia of the compression flange about the y-

axis
Iyt = moment of inertia of the tension flange about the y-axis

when singly symmetric beams are in single curavture,
ω3 = ω2 for beams with two flanges, = 1.0 for T-sections
in all other cases,
ω3 = ω2 [0.5 + 2(Iyc/Iy)2 ] f, but ≤ 2.0 for T-Sections
3D.16.3 Members Subject to Combined Forces

For each of the following interaction equations, the value of the RATIO parameter is used in lieu of
1.0 when it is specified (See "Design Parameters" on page 189).
Axial compression and bending
The member strength and stability for sections subjected to axial compression and uniaxial or
biaxial bending is obtained through the use of interaction equations. In these equations, the
additional bending caused by the action of the axial load is accounted for by using amplification
factors (Cl. 13.8).
I. For Class 1 and Class 2 sections of I-shaped members (Cl. 13.8.2):

Cf 0.85U 1xM fx βU 1yM fy
+ + ≤ 1.0
Cr M rx M ry
where
Cf, Mf = the maximum load effects, including stability, as specified in Cl. 8.4.
β = 0.6 + 0.4λy ≤ 0.85
The capacity of the member is investigated for the following:
a. Cross sectional strength with β = 0.6, where

i. Cr as specified in Cl. 13.3 with λ = 0
ii. Mr as specified in Cl. 13.5
iii. U1x and U1y as specified in Cl. 13.8.4 but not less than 1.0
b. Overall member strength, where

i. Cr as specified in Cl. 13.3 with K = 1, except for uniaxial bending, in which case
Cr is based on the axis of bending
ii. Mr as specified in Cl. 13.5
iii. U1x and U1y are taken as 1.0 for members in an unbraced frame, and as
specified in Cl. 13.8.4 for members in a braced frame
c. Lateral torsional buckling strength, when applicable, where

i. Cr as specified in Cl. 13.3

ii. Mrx as specified in Cl. 13.6
iii. Mry as specified in Cl. 13.5
iv. U1x and U1y are taken as 1.0 for members in an unbraced frame, and as
specified in Cl. 13.8.4 for members in a braced frame (where U1x is not less
than 1.0)
II. For all other cases (Cl13.8.3):

Cf U 1xM fx U 1yM fy
+ + ≤ 1.0
Cr M rx M ry
The capacity of the member is investigated for the following per Cl.13.8.2:
a. Cross sectional strength
b. Overall member strength
c. Lateral torsional buckling strength,
Axial tension and bending
Members subjected to axial tension and bending must satisfy the following equation (Cl. 13.9.1):
Tf Mf
+ ≤ 1.0
Tr Mr
where
Mr = the moment resistance as specified in Cl. 13.5.
Additionally, the following equations must be satisfied for laterally unsupported members (Cl.
13.9.2):
Mf T fZ
− ≤ 1.0
Mr M rA for Class 1 and Class 2 sections
Mf T fS
− ≤ 1.0
Mr M rA for Class 3 and Class 4 sections
where
Mr = the moment resistance as specified in Cl. 13.6.
Biaxial Bending
For bending about both axis, the following equation must be satisfied (Cl. 13.8):
M fx M fy
+ ≤ 1.0
M rx M ry

Shear and Bending
To resist the combined effects of shear and bending, all of the following equations must be satisfied
(Cl. 14.6):
Mf Vf
0.727 + 0.455 ≤ 1.0
Mr Vr
Mf
≤ 1.0
Mr
Vf
≤ 1.0
Vr
where
Mr = the value determined in accordance with Cl. 13.5 of Cl 13.6 as applicable
Vr = the value determined in accordance with Cl. 13.4
3D.16.4 Shear
Factored shear resistance, Vr, developed by the web of flexural member is calculated as:
Vr = ϕA wFs
where
Aw = shear area
Fs is evaluated as:
I. For unstiffened webs (Cl. 13.4.1.1.(a) ):

h 1, 014
≤
w Fy
i. when , Fs = 0.66Fy
1, 014 h 1, 435 670 F y
< ≤ Fs =
Fy w Fy (h / w )
ii. when ,
h 1, 436 961, 200
> Fs =
w Fy (h / w) 2
iii. when ,
II. For stiffened webs (i.e., when the STIFF parameter is specified) (Cl. 13.4.1.1(b) ):
h kv
≤ 439
w Fy
i. when , Fs = 0.66Fy
kv h kv
439 < ≤ 502
Fy w Fy
ii. when , Fs = Fcri
iii. when

kv h kv
502 < ≤ 621
Fy w Fy
, Fs = Fcri + ka(0.50Fy - 0.866Fcri)
kv h
621 <
Fy w
iv. when , Fs = Fcre + ka(0.50Fy - 0.866Fcre)
where
kv = shear buckling coefficient:

5.34
kv = 4+
i. when a/h < 1, (a / h ) 2
4
k v = 5.34 +
ii. when a/h ≥ 1, (a / h ) 2
a/h = stiffener aspect ration (i.e., ratio of the distance between

stiffeners to web depth)
F yk v
Fcri = 290
(h / w )
1
2
1 + (a / h )
ka = aspect coefficient =
180, 000k v
Fcre =
(h / w) 2
For tubular members, the shear resistance, Vr, is calculated as:
Vr = 0.66ϕ(A e / 2)Fy
where
Ae = the cross-sectional area of the tubular member

The design parameters outlined in Table 3E.1 may be used to control the design procedure. These

Table 3D.8-Canadian Steel Design CSA-S16-01 Parameters

CODE S16-09

end moments and
those at locations
specified by
SECTION command.
1.0 = Perform design

for moments at
twelfth points along
the beam.
CPSACING 0.0 Spacing between

connectors of built-
up members required
for slenderness ratio
calculation per Cl.
19.1.4.
DFF None(Mandatory for “Deflection

deflection check) Length”/Maxm.
Allowable local
deflection.
DJ1 Start Joint of member Joint No. denoting

start point for
calculation of
DJ2 End Joint of member Joint No. denoting

end point for
calculation of
DMAX 45.0 in. Maximum allowable

member selection)
DMIN 0.0 in. Minimum required

member selection)

FLX 0 Parameter for

specifying the
flexural-torsional
restraint condition.
0 = Flexural-torsional
restraint is not
provided
1= Flexural-torsional
restraint is provided
along the length.
FYLD 300.0 MPa Yield strength of

steel.
FU 345.0 MPa Ultimate strength of

steel.
KT 1.0 K value for flexural

torsional buckling.

column flexural
buckling about the
ratio.

column flexural
buckling about the
ratio.
LAT 0 0 = Beam is laterally

unsupported.
1 = Beam is laterally
supported.
LT Member Length Length for flexural

torsional buckling.


column flexural
buckling about the
ratio.

column flexural
buckling about the
ratio.
MAIN 200 Allowable slenderness

limit for compression
members.

tension members.

actual load effect to
the design strength.
SNUG 1 type of connection

for the built-up
members (Refer to Cl.
19.1.4):
0 = Welded or
pretensioned bolts.
1 = Bolted snug-tight.
STIFF Member length of depth of Spacing of traverse

beam, whichever is lesser. stiffeners.
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Report only

minimum design
results.
1.0 = Report design

strengths also.
2.0 = Provide full

details of design.

UNB Member Length Unsupported length

in bending
compression of the
bottom flange for
calculating moment
resistance.
UNT Member Length Unsupported length

in bending
compression of the
top flange for
calculating moment
resistance.

4
Cypriot Codes

4 Cypriot Codes

4A. Cypriot Codes - Concrete Design in Cyprus
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the Cyrpiot code Seismic code for
reinforced concrete structures in Cyprus.
Design of members per this code requires the STAAD Eurozone Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.


to the concrete code of Cyprus. These parameters not only act as a method to input required data
for code calculations but give the Engineer control over the actual design process. Default values of
commonly used parameters for conventional design practice have been chosen as the basis. Table
4A.1 contains a complete list of available parameters with their default values.
Table 4B.1-Cypriot Concrete Design Parameters

Name Value
CODE - Must be specified as CYPRUS.

BRACE 0.0 Bracing parameter for column design:
0. Column braced in both directions

1. Column braced in only the local Y
direction.
2. Column braced in only the local Z
direction.
3. Column unbraced in either direction.

current units.

PROPERTIES.

current units.

numbers.

column design.


Name Value

column design.
FC 4.0 ksi Concrete Yield Stress / cube strength, in current

units
FYMAIN 60 ksi Yield Stress for main reinforcement, in current

directions)
FYSEC 60 ksi Yield Stress for secondary reinforcement a, in

current units. Applicable to shear bars in beams.
MAX 50 mm Maximum required reinforcement bar size

MINMAIN 8 mm Minimum main reinforcement bar size Acceptable

bar sizes: 6 8 10 12 16 20 25 32 40 50
MINSEC 8 mm Minimum secondary bar size a. Applicable to


magnified

0. No serviceability check performed.

1. Perform serviceability check for beams as if
they were continuous.
they were simply supported.
they were cantilever beams.



Name Value
SRA 0.0 Skew angle considered in Wood & Armer

Two special values are also considered:
0.0 = Orthogonal reinforcement

layout without considering
torsional moment Mxy -slabs only
-500 = Orthogonal reinforcement

layout with Mxy used to calculate
Wood & Armer moments for
design.
TRACK 0.0 Controls level of detail in output:
0. Critical Moment will not be printed with

beam design report. Column design gives
no detailed results.
1. For beam gives min/max steel % and
spacing. For columns gives a detailed table
of output with additional moments
calculated.
2. Beam design only. Details of reinforcement
at sections defined by the NSECTION
parameter.

PROPERTIES.

5
Danish Codes

5 Danish Codes

5A. Danish Codes - Steel Design per DS412
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Danish code DS412 1998 Code of
Practice for the structural use of steel.
Design of members per DS412 1998 requires the STAAD N. Eurozone Design Codes SELECT Code
Pack.


The design parameters outlined in Table 5A.1 may be used to control the design procedure. These
parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer to the program and thus allow you to
control the design process to suit an application's specific needs.
Table 5B.1-Danish Steel Design DS412 Parameters

Name Value
CODE - Must be specified as DS412
See section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual.
BEAM 1.0 1.0 = Calculate von Mises at twelfth points along the

beam.
BY 1.0 Buckling length coefficient, Beta, about the local Y

axis.
BZ 1.0 Buckling length coefficient, Beta, about the local Z

axis.
CB 1.0 Lateral buckling coefficient. Used to calculate the

ideal buckling moment.
CMY 1.0 Water depth, in meters, for hydrostatic pressure

calculation for pipe members.
CMZ 0.21 AlphaT in connection with lateral buckling.
CY Buckling curve coefficient, Alpha, about local Y-axis.
CZ Buckling curve coefficient, Alpha, about local Z-axis.
DMAX 1,000 Maximum allowable depth (Applicable for member

mm selection)
DMIN 0.0 mm Minimum required depth (Applicable for member

selection)


Name Value
FYLD 235 Yield strength of steel.

N/mm 2
MF 1.15 Ratio of material factor to resistance factor.
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of actual load effect to the design

strength.
SSY Equivalent moment factor, BetaM, for local Y-axis.

Valid values between 0 and 2.5.
SSZ Equivalent moment factor, BetaM, for local Z-axis.

Valid values between 0 and 2.5.
TRACK 0.0 Used to specify a level of detail in output:
0. Report only minimum design results.

1. Report design strengths also.
2. Provide full details of design.
UNL Member Unsupported length in bending compression of the

Length bottom flange for calculating moment resistance.

6
Dutch Codes

6 Dutch Codes

6A. Dutch Codes - Steel Design per NEN 6770

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Dutch code NEN 6770 TGB 1990 -
Steel structures - Basic requirements and basic rules for calculation of predominantly staticaly
loaded structures .
Design of members per NEN 6770 requires the STAAD N. Eurozone Design Codes SELECT Code
Pack.

Available design parameters to be used in conjunction with NEN 6770 are listed in table 6A.1 along
with their default values.
Note: Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number till it is specified
Table 6A.1-Dutch Steel Design NEN 6770 Parameters

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
Must be specified as DUTCH

CODE -
See section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference
Manual.
Used to specify the number of sections to be

check along the length of the beam:
0. Check sections with end forces only.

1. Check at location of maximum Mz along
BEAM 3.0 beam.
2. Check sections with end forces and forces
at location of BEAM = 1.0 check.
3. Check at every 1/13th point of the beam and
report the maximum.

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
Loading type per Tables F.1.1 and F.1.2
1. Pin ended member with uniform loading

2. Fix ended member with uniform loading
3. Pin ended member with central point load.
CMM 1.0
4. Fix ended member with central point load.
5. Pin ended member with point loads at
third points.
6. Pin ended member with varying end
moments.
Used to describe the end restraints:
1.0 = No fixity
CMN 1.0
0.7 = One end fixed, the other free.
0.5 = Both ends fixed.
None
(Mandatory "Deflection Length" / Maximum allowable local
for deflection
DFF
deflection
check, See Note 1d in Section 2B.6.
TRACK 4.0)
Start Joint Joint No. denoting starting point for calculation

DJ1
of member of "Deflection Length" . See Note 1 below.
End Joint Joint No. denoting end point for calculation of

DJ2
of member "Deflection Length". See Note 1 below.
DMAX 10,000 cm Maximum allowable depth
DMIN 0.0 cm Minimum allowable depth
K factor value in local y - axis. Usually, this is the

KY 1.0
minor axis.
K factor value in local z - axis. Usually, this is the

KZ 1.0
major axis.
Member Length in local y - axis (current units) to calculate

LY
Length (KY)(LY)/Ryy slenderness ratio.
Member Length in local z - axis (current units) to calculate

LZ
Length (KZ)(LZ)/Rzz slenderness ratio.

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
Set
according
PY Design strength of steel
to steel
grade (SGR)
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of the actual capacities.
Controls the sections to try during a SELECT

process.
0. Try every section of the same type as

original
SAME 0.0
1. Try only those sections with a similar name
as original (e.g., if the original is an HEA
100, then only HEA sections will be
selected, even if there are HEM’s in the
same table).
Identify Section type for section classification

SBLT 0.0 0. Rolled Section
1. Built up Section
Steel Grade
0. Grade Fe 360
SGR 0.0
1. Grade Fe 430
2. Grade Fe 510
Used to control the level output detail:
0. Output summary of results.

1. Output summary of results with member
TRACK 0.0 capacities.
2. Output detailed results.
3. Deflection Check (separate check to main
select / check code)
Member Unrestrained member length in lateral torsional

UNL
Length buckling checks.

7
European Codes

7 European Codes

7A.1 Design Operations
7A. European Codes - Concrete Design Per Eurocode EC2

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the European code EC2 ENV 1992-1-
1:1991 E Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures - Part 1-1: General rules and rules for buildings.
Design of members per EC2 ENV 1992-1-1:1991 E requires the STAAD Eurozone Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.

The main steps in performing a design operation are:
1. Selecting the applicable load cases to be considered in the design process.
2. Providing appropriate parameter values if different from the default values.
3. Perform the design for the member as appropriate.
These operations can be repeated by the user any number of times depending on the design
requirements. The parameters referred to above provide the user with the ability to allocate specific
design properties to individual members considered in the design operation.
7A.2 Eurocode 2 (EC2)

Eurocode 2, Design of concrete structures, Part 1, General rules and rules for buildings, provides
design rules applicable to plain, reinforced or prestressed concrete used in buildings and civil
engineering works. It is based on the limit state philosophy common to modern standards.
The objective of this method of design is to ensure that possibility of failure is reduced to a
negligible level. This is achieved through application of factors to both the applied loads and the
material properties. The code also provides guidelines on the global method of analysis to be used
for calculating internal member forces and moments. STAAD provides a number of methods for
analysis, allowing Geometric Nonlinearity as well as P-Delta effects to be considered.
7A.3 National Application Documents

Various authorities of the CEN member countries have prepared National Application Documents
to be used with EC2. These documents provide alternative factors for loads and may also provide
supplements to the rules in EC2.
The current version of EC2 implemented in STAAD adheres to the factors and rules provided in
EC2 and has not been modified by any National Application Documents.

7A.4 Material Properties and Load Factors
7A.4 Material Properties and Load Factors

Design resistances are obtained by dividing the characteristic yield strengths, as given in table 2.3 of
EC2, by the material partial safety factors γc for concrete and γs for reinforcements. The magnitude
in STAAD is 1.5 for concrete and 1.15 for reinforcements.
Material coefficients in STAAD take the following default values unless replaced by numerical
values provided in the input file.
Modulus of Elasticity, E = 21.71 KN/mm 2
Shear Modulus, G = E / 2 (1 + v)
Poisson's Ratio, v = 0.25
Unit weight, ρ = 23.56 KN/m 3
The magnitude of design loads is dependent on γF, the partial safety factor for the action under
consideration. In STAAD the user is allowed total control in providing applicable values for the
factors and their use in various load combinations.
7A.5 Columns
Columns are designed for axial compressive loads and possible moments at the ends of the
member. If a particular load case causes tension in the column being designed that load case is
ignored, the design proceeds with a warning message given to that affect.
All active load cases will be considered in the design and reinforcements are assumed
symmetrically arranged in the cross section.
The maximum reinforcement calculated after all design load cases have been considered is then
reported as the critical required area of reinforcement.
Slender columns are also covered in the design process, the program will make due allowance for
the additional moment that has to be considered in the design.
Note: Sway type structures are not directly covered in the current implementation of EC2. This
effect, however, can be accounted for by the P-DELTA analysis option.
7A.6 Beams
Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. For all these actions active load cases are scanned
to create appropriate envelopes for the design process. Maximum torsional moment is also
identified and incorporated in the design.

7A.7 Slabs
7A.6.1 Design for flexure

Reinforcement for both positive and negative moments is calculated on the basis of the section
properties provided by the user. If the required reinforcement exceeds the maximum allowable then
the section size is inadequate and a massage to that effect is given in the output. Parabolic-
rectangular stress distribution for the concrete section is adopted and as moment redistribution is
not available in STAAD analysis, the limit for N.A to depth ratio is set according to clause 2.5.3.4.2
(5) of the code.
If required, compression reinforcement will be provided in order to satisfy the above limits. It is
important to know that beams are designed for the flexural moment MZ only. The moment MY is
not considered in the design at all.

Shear reinforcement design is based on the standard method mentioned in clause 4.3.2.4.3 where it
is assumed the notional strut inclination is constant. Depending on the shear distribution within
the member it may be possible that nominal shear reinforcement will be sufficient to cater for the
design shear forces. If this is not the case an attempt is made to identify regions where nominal
reinforcement is insufficient and appropriate reinforcement is then calculated to cover the excess
design shear force.
The maximum shear force that can be carried without crushing the concrete is also checked and if
exceeded, a message to revise the section size is given in the output file.
7A.6.3 Design for Torsion

Torsional moments arising as a result of equilibrium requirements need to be designed for at the
ultimate limit state. Reinforcement for torsional moments consists of stirrups combined with
longitudinal bars. The combined magnitude of shear stress arising from shear forces and torsional
moments are checked in order to establish whether the section size is adequate. If section size is
inadequate a massage is given in the output file, otherwise, full design is carried out and both shear
links and longitudinal bars required are calculated and, where necessary, links are combined with
the shear force links and printed in a tabulated manner in the output file.
7A.7 Slabs
Slabs can only be designed for if finite elements are used to represent them in the model of the
structure. In the main the design follows the same procedure as for flexure except that shear forces
are assumed to be resisted without the provision of shear reinforcements. In cases where this may
not be the case users must ensure that necessary checks are carried out. The output for the slab
design refers to longitudinal reinforcements, which coincides with the local x direction of the
element, and, transverse reinforcement, which coincides with the local y direction of the element.
Also, reference is made to 'TOP' and BOTT' reinforcement which relates to the element's 'TOP' and
'BOTTOM' as determined from the connectivity of the element. This may not coincide with the

slab's actual top and bottom and, if desired, you must ensure this through the numbering scheme
of the elements. The design of the slab considers a fixed bar size of 16mm in both directions with
the longitudinal bar being the layer closest to the slab exterior faces. Refer to Figure 1.21 in Section
1.61. of the Technical Reference Manual for additional information.

Design parameters communicate specific design decisions to the program. They are set to default
values to begin with and may be altered to suite the particular structure. Depending on the model
being designed, the user may have to change some or all of the parameter default values. Some
parameters are unit dependent and when altered, the new setting must be compatible with the
active "unit" specification. Table 8A.1 lists all the relevant EC2 parameters together with description
and default values.
Table 7A.1-Concrete Design EC2 Parameters

Name
BRACE 0.0 0.0 = Column braced in both

directions.
1.0 = Column unbraced about local Z

direction only
2.0 = Column unbraced about local Y

direction only
3.0 = Column unbraced in both Y and

Z directions
CLEAR * 20mm Clearance of reinforcement measured

from concrete surface to closest bar
perimeter.
DEPTH *YD Depth of concrete member. This value

default is as provided as YD in
MEMBER PROPERTIES.
EFACE *0.0 Face of support location at end of beam.
Note: Both SFACE & EFACE must be

positive numbers.
ELY 1.0 Member length factor about local Y

direction for column design.


Name
ELZ 1.0 Member length factor about local Z

FC * 30N/mm 2 Concrete Yield Stress / cube strength
FYMAIN *460 N/mm 2 Yield Stress for main reinforcement

(For slabs, it is for reinforcement in
both directions)
FYSEC *460N/mm 2 Yield Stress for secondary

reinforcement. Applicable to shear bars
in beams
MINMAIN 8mm Minimum main reinforcement bar size

Acceptable bar sizes: 6 8 10 12 16 20 25 32
40 50
MINSEC 8mm Minimum secondary bar size a.

Applicable to shear reinforcement in
beams
MAXMAIN 50mm Maximum required reinforcement bar

size Acceptable bars are per MINMAIN
above.
MMAG 1.0 Factor by which column design

moments are magnified
NSECTION 10 Number of equally-spaced sections to be

considered in finding critical moment
for beam design. The upper limit is 20.
SERV 0.0 0.0 = No serviceability check

performed.
1.0 = Perform serviceability check for

beams as if they were continuous.

beams as if they were simply supported.

beams as if they were cantilever beams.
SFACE *0.0 Face of support location at start of

beam. (Only applicable for shear - use


Name
SRA 0.0 0.0 = Orthogonal reinforcement

layout without considering torsional
moment Mxy -slabs only

Wood & Armer moments for design.
A = Skew angle considered in

Wood & Armer equations where A is
the angle in degrees.
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Critical Moment will not be

printed with beam design report.
Column design gives no detailed
results.
1.0 = For beam gives min/max steel %

and spacing. For columns gives a
detailed table of output with additional
moments calculated.
2.0 = Output of TRACK 1.0

List of design sag/hog moments and
corresponding required steel area at
each section of member
WIDTH *ZD Width of concrete member. This value

default is as provided as ZD in
MEMBER PROPERTIES.
* Provided in current unit system

7B.1 General Description
7B. European Codes - Steel Design to Eurocode 3 [DD ENV

1993-1-1:1992]
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the European code EC3 DD ENV 1993-1-
1:1992 Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures Part 1.1 General rules and rules for buildings.
Design of members per EC3 DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 requires the STAAD Euro Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.
Note: The DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code has now been officially superseded by EN 1993-1-1:2005.
Hence releases of STAAD.Pro subsequent to version SS3 (20.07.08.xx) will not support this design
code. The SS3 build will perform member design to this code for legacy files but has this code
removed from the design codes list in the GUI. Users are advised to use the EN 1993-1-1:2005
version for Eurocode 3 design.
Tip: Design per EC3 DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 is also available in the Steel Design mode in the
Graphical User Interface.
7B.1 General Description


2. Providing appropriate ‘Parameter’ values if different from the default values.
3. Specify whether to perform code-checking and/or member selection.
requirements. The ‘Parameters’ referred to above provide the user with the ability to allocate
specific design properties to individual members or member groups considered in the design
operation.
7B.1.1 Eurocode 3 DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 (EC3 DD)

The DD ENV version of Eurocode 3, Design of steel structures, Part 1.1 General rules and rules for
buildings (EC3 DD) provides design rules applicable to structural steel used in buildings and civil
engineering works. It is based on the ultimate limit states philosophy that is common to modern
standards. The objective of this method of design is to ensure that possibility of failure is reduced
to a negligible level. This is achieved through application of safety factors to both the applied loads
and the material properties.
The code also provides guidelines on the global methods of analysis to be used for calculating
internal member forces and moments. STAAD uses the elastic method of analysis which may be
used in all cases. Also there are three types of framing referred to in EC3. These are “Simple”,
“Continuous”, and “Semi-continuous” which reflect the ability of the joints to developing moments

under a specific loading condition. In STAAD only “Simple” and “Continuous” joint types can be
assumed when carrying out global analysis.
7B.1.2 National Application Documents

Various authorities of the CEN member countries have prepared National Application Documents
to be used with EC3. These documents provide alternative factors for loads and may also provide
The current version of EC3 DD implemented in STAAD adheres to the factors and rules provided
in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 and has not been modified by any National Application Document.
Note: National Annex documents are available for EC3 BS EN 1993-1-1:2005. See "European Codes
- Steel Design to Eurocode 3 [EN 1993-1-1:2005]" on page 239
7B.1.3 Axes convention in STAAD and EC3

By default, STAAD defines the major axis of the cross-section as Z-Z and the minor axis as Y-Y. A
special case where Z-Z is the minor axis and Y-Y is the major axis is available if the SET Z UP
command is used and is discussed in Section 5.5 of the Technical Reference Manual. The
longitudinal axis of the member is defined as X and joins the start joint of the member to the end
with the same positive direction.
EC3, however, defines the principal cross-section axes in reverse to that of STAAD, but the
longitudinal axis is defined in the same way. Both of these axes definitions follow the orthogonal
right hand rule. See figure below.
Bear this difference in mind when examining the code-check output from STAAD.
Figure 7B.1 - Axis convention in STAAD and EC3

necessary loading situations.

7B.3 Material Properties and Load Factors
7B.3 Material Properties and Load Factors

The characteristic yield strength of steel used in EC3 DD design is based on table 3.1 of the code.
Design resistances are obtained by dividing the characteristic yield strength by the material partial
safety factor Γm. The magnitude of Γm in STAAD is 1.1 which is applicable to all section types. A
separate safety factor parameter named GB1 is used to check the resistance of a member to buckling
and also has a default value of 1.1.
Material coefficients for steel in STAAD take the following default values unless replaced by user’s
numerical values provided in the input file.
Modulus of Elasticity, E = 205000 N/mm2
Shear Modulus, G = E/2(1+ ν)
Poisson’s Ratio, ν = 0.3
Unit weight, Γ = 76.8 KN/m3
The magnitude of design loads is dependent on Γ , the partial safety factor for the action under
f
consideration. In STAAD the user is allowed total control in providing applicable values for the
factors and their use in various load combinations.

The occurrence of local buckling of the compression elements of a cross-section prevents the
development of full section capacity. It is therefore imperative to establish this possibility prior to
determining the section capacities. Cross sections are classified in accordance with their
geometrical properties and the stress pattern on the compression elements. For each load case
considered in the design process, STAAD determines the section class and calculates the capacities
accordingly.
The EC3 DD design module in STAAD can design members with all section profiles that are of
Class 1 2 or 3 as defined in section 5.3.2 of the code. However, the design of members that have a
‘Class 4’ section profile are limited to WIDE FLANGE, TEE, SINGLE CHANNEL, SINGLE ANGLE,
and RECTANGULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS. Also built-up user sections that are class 4 sections are
not dealt with in the current version of EC3 design in STAAD.Pro.
Laced and battened members are not considered in the current version of EC3 DD design module
in STAAD.Pro.
7B.5 Member Design
7B.5.1 Design of Beams as per DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992

EC3 DD design in STAAD.Pro considers members that are primarily in bending and/or shear as
beams and performs cross section and member capacity checks in accordance with the code. The

7B.5 Member Design
main requirement for a beam is to have sufficient cross-section resistance to the applied bending
moment and shear force. The possibility of lateral-torsional buckling is also taken into
consideration when the full length of the member has not been laterally restrained.
The bending capacity is primarily a function of the section type and the material yield strength and
is determined according to Cl. 5.4.5 of the code. The shear capacity and the corresponding shear
checks are done as per section 5.4.6 of the code.
There are four classes of cross-sections defined in EC3. Class 1 and 2 sections can both attain full
capacity with the exception that the class 2 sections cannot sustain sufficient rotation required for
plastic analysis of the model. Hence the full plastic section modulus is used in the design
calculations. Class 3 sections, due to local buckling, cannot develop plastic moment capacity and
the yield stress is limited to the extreme compression fibre of the section. The elastic section
modulus is used to determine the moment capacity for class 3 sections. Class 4 sections do suffer
from local buckling and explicit allowance must be made for the reduction in section properties
before the moment capacity can be determined. Further, because of interaction between shear force
and bending moment, the moment resistance of the cross-section may be reduced. This, however,
does not occur unless the value of applied shear forces exceeds 50% of the plastic shear capacity of
the section. In such cases the web is assumed to resist the applied shear force as well as
contributing towards the moment resistance of the cross-section.
As mentioned in the previous section, the design of class 4 sections is limited to WIDE FLANGE,
TEE, SINGLE CHANNEL, SINGLE ANGLE, and RECTANGULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS. The
effective section properties are worked out as described in Cl. 5.3.5 of the code.
Beams are also checked for lateral-torsional buckling according to section 5.5.2 of the code. The
buckling capacity is dependent on the section type as well as the unrestrained length, restraint
conditions and type of applied loading. The lateral torsional buckling checks involves the
calculation of the ‘Elastic critical moment’, Mcr, which is calculated in STAAD as per the method
given in Annex F of the code.
In the presence of a shear force, beams are also checked for shear as per section 5.4.6 of the code. In
cases where the members are subject to combined bending and shear, the combined bending and
shear checks are done in STAAD as per clause 5.4.7 of the code.
7B.5.2 Design of Axially Loaded Members

The design of members subject to tension loads alone are performed as per Cl 5.4.3 of the code. The
tension capacity is calculated based on yield strength, material factor Γm and cross-sectional area of
the member with possible reduction due to bolt holes. When bolt holes need to be considered in
the capacity calculations the value used for Γm is 1.2 and the yield strength is replaced with the
ultimate tensile strength of the material. The tension capacity is then taken as the smaller of the
full section capacity and the reduced section capacity as stated above.
The design of members subject to axial compression loads alone are performed as per Cl 5.4.4 of the
code. For members with class 1 2 or 3 section profiles, the full section area is considered in
calculating the section capacity. However in case of class 4 sections, the ‘effective cross-section’ is
considered to calculate the compressive strength. Also any additional moments induced in the
section due to the shift of the centroidal axis of the effective section will also be taken into account

7B.5 Member Design
as per clause 5.4.8.3 of the code. The effective section properties for class 4 sections will be worked
out as given in Cl.5.3.5 of the code.
In addition to the cross section checks, buckling resistance will also be checked for such members.
This is often the critical case as the buckling strength of the member is influenced by a number of
factors including the section type and the unbraced length of the member. The buckling capacity is
calculated as per Cl. 5.5 of the code.
DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 does not specifically deal with single angle, double angles, double channels or
Tee sections and does give a method to work out the slenderness of such members. In these cases,
the EC3 DD design module of STAAD.Pro uses the methods specified in BS 5950-1:2000 to calculate
the slenderness of these members. Cl. 4.7.10 and table 25 of BS 5950-1:2000 are used in the current
version of the EC3 DD design module
Figure 7B.2 - Axis orientation for single angles
ST angle and USER

RA angle
table angles

7B.5.3 Design of members with combined axial load and bending

The bending resistance of members could be reduced by the presence of a co-existent axial load.
This is then checked against the lateral-torsional buckling resistance of the section. The EC3 DD
design module in STAAD takes such a scenario into account and performs the necessary checks as
per Cl. 5.4.8 of the code. Class 1 and class 2 sections are checked as per cl. 5.4.8.1 and Class 3 and
Class 4 sections are checked as per clauses 5.4.8.2 and 5.4.8.3 respectively. The effective section
properties for class 4 sections are worked out as given in Cl. 5.3.5 of the code.
Generally, EC3 requires checking cross-section resistance for local capacity and also checking the
overall buckling capacity of the member. In the case of members subject to axial tension and
bending, there is provision to take the stabilizing effect of the tension load into consideration. This
is achieved by modifying the extreme compression fibre stress and calculating an effective applied
moment for the section. The checks are done as per Cl. 5.5.3 of the code. In case of a combined axial
compressive load and bending moment, the member will be checked as per the rules in section
5.5.4 of the code.
The presence of large shear force can also reduce the bending resistance of the section under
consideration. If the shear load is large enough to cause a reduction in bending resistance, then the
reduction due to shear has to be taken into account before calculating the effect of the axial load
on the bending resistance of the section. If the member is subject to a combined shear, axial load
and bending moment then the section capacity checks will be done as per Cl. 5.4.9 of the code.
As stated in the previous section, DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 does not specifically deal with single angle,
double angles, double channels or Tee sections and does give a method to work out the slenderness
of such members. In these cases, the EC3 DD design module of STAAD.Pro uses the methods
specified in BS 5950-1:2000 to calculate the slenderness of these members. Cl. 4.7.10 of BS 5950-
1:2000 is used in the current version of the EC3 DD design module. Please refer to the note in
section 5B.5.2 for St and RA angle specifications.
Please note that laced or battened compression members are not dealt within the current version of
EC3 DD design module in STAAD.Pro.

values to begin with and may be altered to suite the particular structure.
Depending on the model being designed, the user may have to change some or all of the parameter
default values. Some parameters are unit dependent and when altered, the new setting must be
compatible with the active “unit” specification.
The following table lists all the relevant EC3 parameters together with description and default
values.

Table 7B.1-Steel Design Parameters EC3 DD

Name
CODE Undefined You must specify EC3 or EUROPE.

Reference Manual.
BEAM 3 Parameter to control the number of

sections to checked along the length of
a beam:
0. Check sections with end forces

only
1. Check at location of maximum

Mz along beam

and forces at location of
BEAM 1.0 check.
3. Check at every 1/13th point along

the beam and report the
maximum
Refer to Note 2 below.
CAN 0 Member will be considered as a

cantilever type member for deflection
checks.
0 indicates that member will not be

treated as a cantilever member
1 indicates that the member will be

treated as a cantilever member
CMM 1.0 Indicates type of loading on member.

Valid values range from 1 to 6.
Refer to Table 7B.3 for more

information on its use.


Name
CMN 1.0 Indicates the level of End-Restraint.
1.0 = No fixity
0.5 = Full fixity
0.7 = One end free and

other end fixed
DMAX 100.0 cm Maximum allowable depth for the

member.
DMIN 0 Minimum required depth for the

member.
DFF None (Mandatory Deflection limit

for deflection
check)
DJ1 Start Joint of Joint No. denoting starting point for

member calculation of "Deflection Length".
DJ2 End Joint of Joint No. denoting end point for

FU Ultimate tensile strength of steel
GB1 1.1 Partial safety factor used in buckling

checks for compression members
GM0 1.1 Corresponds to the Γ factor in DD

m0
ENV 1993-1-1:1992

m1
ENV 1993-1-1:1992

m2
ENV 1993-1-1:1992
KY 1.0 K factor in local y axis.
KZ 1.0 K factor in local z axis.


Name
LEG 0.0 Connection type
Refer to Note 1 below.
LVV Maximum of Lyy Buckling length for angle about its

and Lzz (Lyy is a principle axis
term used by
BS5950)
LY Member Length Compression length in local y axis,

Slenderness ratio = (KY)*(LY)/(Ryy)
LZ Member Length Compression length in local z axis,

Slenderness ratio = (KZ)*(LZ)/(Rzz)
PLG 0 (Polish NA only) Perform additional

checks per Cl. 6.3.3
0. Ignore additional PN EN checks
1. Include additional PN EN checks
See "Clause 6.3.3(5) – Interaction factors

kyy, kyz, kzy, and kzz" on page 329
PY Yield Strength The yield strength default value is set

based on the default value of the "SGR"
parameter.
NSF 1.0 Net tension factor for tension capacity

calculation.
RATIO 1 Permissible ratio of loading to capacity.
SBLT 0.0 Indicates if the section is rolled or

built-up.
0.0 = Rolled
1.0 = Built-up


Name
SGR 0.0 Steel grade as per table 3.1 in EC3.
0.0 = Fe 360
1.0 = Fe 430
2.0 = Fe 510
TRACK 0 Controls the level of detail of output.
0 = minimum
1 = intermediate
2 = maximum
4 = perform a deflection
check
See note 3 below.
UNF 1.0 Unsupported buckling length as a factor

of the beam length
UNL Member Length Unrestraint length of member used in

calculating the lateral-torsional
resistance moment of the member.
ZIV 0.8 Specifies a reduction factor for vectoral

effects to be used in axial tension checks
[Cl 5.5.3(2)]
7B.6.1 Notes
1. LEG – (Ref: Table 25 BS5950)
The slenderness of single and double angle, channel and tee sections are specified in BS 5950
table 25 depending on the connection provided at the end of the member (Refer to section
5B.5(A).2). To define the appropriate connection, a LEG parameter should be assigned to the
member.
The following table indicates the value of the LEG parameter required to match the BS5950
connection definition:

Table 7B.2-LEG Parameter values

Clause Bold Leg LEG
4.7.10.2 (a) - 2 bolts short 1.0

leg
Single Angle
long 3.0
leg
(b) - 1 bolts short 0.0

leg
long 2.0
leg
4.7.10.3 (a) - 2 bolts short 3.0

Double leg
Angles
long 7.0
leg
(b) - 1 bolts short 2.0

leg
long 6.0
leg
(c) - 2 bolts long 1.0

leg
short 5.0
leg
(d) - 1 bolts long 0.0

leg
short 4.0
leg
4.7.10.4 (a) - 2 or more rows of 1.0

Channels bolts
4.7.10.5 Tee (a) - 2 or more rows of 1.0

Sections bolts

For single angles, the slenderness is calculated for the geometric axes, a-a and b-b as well as
the weak v-v axis. The effective lengths of the geometric axes are defined as:
La = KY * KY
Lb = KZ * LZ
The slenderness calculated for the v-v axis is then used to calculate the compression strength
pc for the weaker principal axis (z-z for ST angles or y-y for RA specified angles). The
maximum slenderness of the a-a and b-b axes is used to calculate the compression strength
pc for the stronger principal axis.
Alternatively for single angles where the connection is not known or Table 25 is not
appropriate, by setting the LEG parameter to 10, slenderness is calculated for the two
principal axes y-y and z-z only. The LVV parameter is not used.
For double angles, the LVV parameter is available to comply with note 5 in table 25. In
addition, if using double angles from user tables, (Refer to Section 1.7.3 of the Technical
Reference Manual) an eleventh value, rvv, should be supplied at the end of the ten existing
values corresponding to the radius of gyration of the single angle making up the pair.
2. BEAM
Ensure that this parameter is set to either 1 or 2 while performing code checking for
members susceptible to Lateral - Torsional Buckling.
Table 7B.3-Values for the CMM Parameter
CMM Value Loading and Support Conditions

7B.7 Code Checking
CMM Value Loading and Support Conditions
3. Checking beam deflection
With the TRACK parameter set to 4, the members included in a CHECK CODE command will
be checked for the local axis deflection rather than for the stress capacity using the current
LOAD LIST.
If both stress capacity and deflection checks are required, then 2 parameter blocks with code
checks are required, one with a TRACK 4 command and one with a TRACK 0, 1, or 2, thus:
LOAD LIST 1 TO 10
PARAMETER 1
CODE EN 1993
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE MEMBER 1
***************************
LOAD LIST 100 TO 110
PARAMETER 2
TRACK 4 ALL
DFF 300 MEMB 1
DJ1 1 MEMB 1
DJ2 4 MEMB 1
CODE MEMB 1
Note: While both sets of code checks will be reported in the output file, only the last code
check results are reported in the GUI.
7B.7 Code Checking
members are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992. Code checking is
done using the forces and moments at specific sections of the members.
passed or failed the checks; the critical condition ; the value of the ratio of the critical condition
condition occurs).
defined sections as described in Section 1.7.3 of the Technical Reference Manual, with two
exceptions; GENERAL and ISECTION. The EC3 DD design module does not consider these sections
or PRISMATIC sections in its design process.
Checking command.

constrained by the parameters DMAX and DMIN, which limits the maximum and minimum depth
of the members.
defined in section 5B.7(A) Code Checking.
or as the limitations specified in section 5.B.7(A).
MEMBER
TABLE
selected.
RESULTS
CRITICAL COND
refers to the clause in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code which governs the design.
RATIO
LOADING
provides the load case number, which governed the design.

FX, MY, and MZ

LOCATION
forces govern.
Note: For a TRACK 2 output, the module will also report all the relevant clause checks that have
been performed and will also indicate the critical ratio and the load case that caused the critical
ratio as well as the corresponding forces that were used for the respective checks. A TRACK 2
output will also include the various design data used for the calculations such as the section
modulii, section class, section capacity etc.

7C.1 General Description
7C. European Codes - Steel Design to Eurocode 3 [EN

1993-1-1:2005]
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the European code EC3 BS EN 1993-1-
1:2005 Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures Part 1.1 General rules and rules for buildings.
Note: The implementation of EN1993-1-1:2005 includes the amendments as per CEN corrigenda of
February 2006 and April 2009.
Design of members per EC3 BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 requires the STAAD Euro Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.


2. Providing appropriate ‘Parameter’ values if different from the default values.
3. Specify whether to perform code-checking and/or member selection.
requirements. The ‘Parameters’ referred to above provide the user with the ability to allocate
specific design properties to individual members or member groups considered in the design
operation.
7C.1.1 Eurocode 3 - EN 1993-1-1:2005 (EN 1993)

The EN 1993 version of Eurocode 3, Design of steel structures, Part 1.1 General rules and rules for
buildings (EN 1993) provides design rules applicable to structural steel used in buildings and civil
engineering works. It is based on the ultimate limit states philosophy that is common to modern
standards. The objective of this method of design is to ensure that possibility of failure is reduced
to a negligible level. This is achieved through application of safety factors to both the applied loads
and the material properties.
The code also provides guidelines on the global methods of analysis to be used for calculating
internal member forces and moments. STAAD uses the elastic method of analysis which may be
used in all cases. Also there are three types of framing referred to in EC3. These are “Simple”,
“Continuous”, and “Semi-continuous” which reflect the ability of the joints to developing moments
under a specific loading condition. In STAAD only “Simple” and “Continuous” joint types can be
assumed when carrying out global analysis.

7C.1.2 National Annex Documents

Various authorities of the CEN member countries have prepared National Annex Documents to be
used with EC3. These documents provide alternative factors for loads and may also provide
The current version of EC3 (EN 1993)implemented in STAAD adheres to the factors and rules
provided in EN 1993-1-1:2005. The current version of STAAD.Pro includes the following National
Annexes viz.
a. British National Annex [NA to BS EN 1993-1-1:2005]
b. The Dutch National Annex [NEN-EN 1993-1-1/NB] and
c. Norwegian National Annex [NS-EN 1993-1-1:2005/NA2008]
d. French National Annex [Annexe Nationale a la NF EN 1993-1-1:2005]

e. Finnish National Annex [SFS EN 1993-1-1:2005]
f. Polish National Annex [PN EN 1993-1-1:2005]
g. Singaporean National Annex [SS EN 1993-1-1:2005]
h. Belgian National Annex [NBN EN 1993-1-1:2005]
The choice of a particular National Annex is based on the value of a new NA parameter that is set by
the user when specifying the EN 1993 version of Eurocode 3. See "European Codes - National
Annexes to Eurocode 3 [EN 1993-1-1:2005]" on page 283 for a description of the NA parameter.
7C.1.3 Axes convention in STAAD and EC3

By default, STAAD defines the major axis of the cross-section as Z-Z and the minor axis as Y-Y. A
special case where Z-Z is the minor axis and Y-Y is the major axis is available if the SET Z UP
command is used and is discussed in Section 5.5 of the Technical Reference Manual. The
longitudinal axis of the member is defined as X and joins the start joint of the member to the end
with the same positive direction.
right hand rule. See figure below.
Bear this difference in mind when examining the code-check output from STAAD.

7C.2 Analysis Methodology
Figure 7C.1 - Axis convention in STAAD and EC3
See "Example of a TRACK 2 output" on page 280 for an example of how this appears when Y is up
(default).
necessary loading situations.
7C.3 Material Properties and Load Factors

The characteristic yield strength of steel used in EC3 (EN 1993) design is based on table 3.1 of the
code. Design resistances are obtained by dividing the characteristic value of a particular resistance
by the global partial safety factor for the resistance, γ . The magnitude of γ is based on Cl. 6.1 of
m m
EN 1993-1-1:2005 and can change depending on the selected National Annex.
Material coefficients for steel in STAAD take the following default values unless replaced by user’s
numerical values provided in the input file.
Modulus of Elasticity, E = 205000 N/mm 2
Shear Modulus, G = E/2(1+ ν)
Poisson’s Ratio, ν = 0.3
Unit weight, Γ = 76.8 KN/m 3
The magnitude of design loads is dependent on γ , the partial safety factor for the action under
f
consideration. You are allowed total control in providing applicable values for the factors and their
use in various load combinations.
7C.4 Section Classification

The occurrence of local buckling of the compression elements of a cross-section prevents the
development of full section capacity. It is therefore imperative to establish this possibility prior to
determining the section capacities. Cross sections are classified in accordance with their

7C.5 Member Design
geometrical properties and the stress pattern on the compression elements. For each load case
considered in the design process, the program determines the section class and calculates the
capacities accordingly. It is worth noting that the section class reported in the design output
corresponds to the most critical loadcase among those being considered for design.
The EC3 (EN 1993) design module in STAAD can design members with all section profiles that are
of Class 1, 2, or 3 as defined in section 5.5 of the code. However, the design of members that have a
Class 4 section profile are limited to:
l wide flange
l tee
l single channel
l single angle
l rectangular hollow sections
l circular hollow sections
Also built-up user sections that are class 4 sections are not dealt with in the current version of EC3
design in STAAD.Pro, unless they are defined as any of the section types given above.
The design of laced and battened members is not considered in the current version of EC3 (EN
1993) design module in STAAD.Pro. The current version also does not support the design of tapered
section profiles or I-Sections with top and/or bottom plates.
7C.5 Member Design

EN 1993-1-1:2005, together with any specified National Annex, is used for code check or selection of
all cross sections and shapes listed in Section 7C.4. However, where EN 1993 or the National Annex
has not specified a method or values for a specific clause or parameter, STAAD.Pro uses Non-
Contradictory Complimentary Information (NCCI) documents as explained in the following
corresponding sections.
The design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the principles of elastic analysis and
ultimate limit state design. Two major failure modes are recognized:
l failure by overstressing
l failure by stability considerations
The following sections describe the salient features of the design approach. Members are
proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the characteristic stresses or capacities.
Member selection is done on the basis of selecting the most economic section on the basis of the
least weight criteria. It is generally assumed that you (the engineer) will take care of the detailing
requirements, such as the provision of stiffeners, and check the local effects like flange buckling,
web crippling, etc.
Note: The design of class 4 (slender) sections is limited to WIDE FLANGE, TEE, SINGLE
CHANNEL, SINGLE ANGLE, and RECTANGULAR & CIRCULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS. The
effective section properties are evaluated as described in Cl. 6.2.2.5 of the code.

7C.5 Member Design
You are allowed complete control over the design process through the use of the parameters listed
in Table 7C.4. Default values of parameters will yield reasonable results in most circumstances.
However, you should control the design and verify results through the use of the design
parameters.
7C.5.1 Members Subject to Axial Loads

The cross section capacity of tension only members is checked for ultimate limit state as given in
Cl. 6.2.3 of the code.
Compression members will be checked for axial capacity of the cross section in addition to lateral
buckling/stability. The cross section capacity will be checked as given in section 6.2.4 of the code.
Lateral stability of a pure compression member will be checked as per the method given in Cl. 6.3 of
the code. The compression member stability will be verified as:
N Ed
≤ 1.0
N b ,Rd
Where N is the design buckling resistance given by:

b,Rd
χAf y
Nb, Rd =
γ M1 for Class 1, 2, or 3 cross-sections
χA eff f y
Nb, Rd =
γ M1 for Class 4 cross-sections
Where:
χ is the reduction factor as given in section 6.3.12 of the code. The buckling curves used to evaluate
the reduction factor are selected from Table 6.2 of the code based on the cross section type and the
steel grade.
Note: Only the five grades of steel given in table 6.2 will be used when selecting the buckling
curve. The steel grade used for this selection is based on the SGR design input parameter (See
"Design Parameters" on page 265). Even if you have specified a custom yield strength (using the
PY parameter), the choice of a buckling curve will be based on the value of SGR parameter.
Compression members that are susceptible to torsional or torsional flexural buckling are checked
for these modes of failure as well. The non-dimensional slenderness ¯λ for these members is
T
evaluated per Cl. 6.3.1.4 of the EN 1993 code. The maximum slenderness among the flexural
buckling slenderness, torsional slenderness, and torsional-flexural slenderness is used to evaluate
the reduction factor, χ, for such members. The elastic torsional buckling load, N , and the elastic
cr,T
torsional-flexural buckling load, N , are evaluated based on the method given in the NCCI
cr,TF
“SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional buckling modes” (unless
otherwise specified by a particular National Annex). The effective length for the members can be
controlled using the KZ, KY, LZ and LY parameters. If these parameters are specified, the effective
length will be calculated as KZ*LZ for length about the Z-Z axis and KY*LY for length about the Y-
Y axis. By default, the effective length will be taken as the member length.

7C.5 Member Design
EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not specifically deal with single angle, double angles, double channels, or Tee
sections and does not provide a method to evaluate the slenderness of such members. In these
cases, the EC3 (EN 1993) design module of STAAD.Pro uses the methods specified in BS 5950-1:2000
to calculate the slenderness of these members. Cl. 4.7.10 and Table 25 of BS 5950-1:2000 are used in
the current version of the Eurocode 3 design module.
Figure 7C.2 - Axis orientation for single angles
ST angle and USER

RA angle
table angles
7C.5.2 Members Subject to Bending Moments

The cross section capacity of a member subject to bending is checked as per Cl .6.2.5 of the code.
The condition to be satisfied is:
M Ed
≤ 1.0
M c ,Rd
Where M is the is the design resistance given by:

c,Rd

7C.5 Member Design
W plf y
M c, Rd = M pl, Rd =
γ M0 for class 1 and 2 cross-sections
W el ,min f y
M c, Rd = M el, Rd =
γ M0 for class 3 cross-sections
W eff ,min f y
M c, Rd =
γ M0 for class 4 cross-sections
Cross sectional bending capacity checks will be done for both major and minor axis bending
moments.
Members subject to major axis bending will also be checked for Lateral Torsional Buckling
resistance as per Section 6.3.2 of the code. The design buckling resistance moment M will be
b,Rd
calculated as:
fy
M b, Rd = χLT Wy
γ M1
Where:
χ is the reduction factor for lateral torsional buckling. This reduction factor is
LT
evaluated per Cl. 6.3.2.2 or Cl 6.3.2.3 of the EN 1993 code depending on the section
type. For I sections, the program will by default use Cl. 6.3.2.3 to evalute χ and for
LT
all other sections the program will resort to Cl 6.3.2.2. However, if a particular
National Annex has been specified, the program will check if the National Annex
expands on Cl.6.3.2.3 (Table 6.5) to include sections other than I sections. If so, the
program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 for the cross-section(s) included in Cl. 6.2.2.3 (or Table
6.5). For all other cases the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2.
Note: You have the option to choose the clause to be used to calculate χ through
LT
the MTH design parameter. Setting MTH to 0 (default value) will cause the program
to choose Cl.6.3.2.3 for I Sections and Cl 6.2.3.2 for all other section types. As
mentioned above, if the National Annex expands on Cl. 6.3.2.3 to include sections
other than I Sections, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 by default.
When using Cl. 6.3.2.3 to calculate χ , the program will consider the correction
LT
factor kc (Table 6.6 of EN 1993-1-1:2006) based on the value of the KC parameter in the
design input. By default the value of KC will be taken as 1.0. If you want the program
to calculate kc, you must explicitly set the value of the KC parameter to zero.
Note: If the National Annex specifies a different method to calculate kc (e.g. the
British, Singapore & Polish NAs), the program will use that method by default even
if the KC parameter has not been explicitly set to zero. If the NA method does not
deal with a specific condition while working out kc, the program will then fall back
to table 6.6 of the code, thus ensuring that kc is considered for the particular NA.
The non-dimensional slenderness λ (used to evaluate χ ) for both the above cases is evaluated
LT LT
as:

7C.5 Member Design
W yf y
λLT =
M cr
Where:
M is the elastic critical moment for lateral torsional buckling. EN 1993-1-1 does not
cr
however specify a method to evaluate M . Hence, the program will make use of the
cr
method specified in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1 to evaluate M by default.
cr
Note: The method specified in Annex F will be used only when the raw EN 1993-1-
1:2005 code is used without any National Annex. If a National Annex has been
specified, the calculation of M (and λ ) will be done based on the specific
cr LT
National Annex. (See "European Codes - National Annexes to Eurocode 3 [EN 1993-
1-1:2005]" on page 283 for specific details). If the National Annex does not specify a
particular method or specify a reference document, the program will use the NCCI
document SN-003a-EN-EU for doubly symmetric sections and SN030a-EN-EU for
mono-symmetric sections that are symmetric about their weak axis. For all other
sections types the program will use Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1 to calculate M . In
cr
cases where Annex F does not provide an adequate method to evaluate Mcr, such as
for Channel sections, the program will resort to the method as per Cl.4.3.6 of BS
5950-1:2000 to calculate the lateral torsional buckling resistance moment (Mb,Rd)
for the member.
7C.5.3 Members Subject to Shear

The cross section capacity of a member subject to shear is checked as per Cl. 6.2.6 of the code. The
condition to be satisfied is:
VEd
≤ 1.0
Vc ,Rd
Where:
V is the is the shear design resistance given by:

c,Rd
(
Av f y / 3 )
Vc, Rd = V pl, Rd =
γ M0
A is the shear area and is worked out for the various section types as given in Cl.
v
6.2.6(3) of the code.
Shear Buckling
For sections that are susceptible to shear buckling, the program will perform the shear buckling
checks as given in Section 5 of EN 1993-1-5. The shear buckling checks will be done only for I –
Sections and Channel sections. Shear stresses induced from torsional loads are taken into account
while performing torsion checks.

7C.5 Member Design
Note: Web shear buckling is checked in STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 3) (release 20.07.08) and
later.
The susceptibility of a section to shear buckling will be based on the criteria given in Cl 5.1(2) of EN
1993-1-5 as is as given as follows:
a. For unstiffened webs, if hw/t > 72ε/η, the section must be checked for shear buckling.
The design resistance is calculated as:

ηf yw wt
Vb, Rd = Vbw , Rd ≤
3 γ M1
χ wf yw h wt
Vbw , Rd =
3 γ M1
Where:
h = distance between flanges of an I Section (i.e., depth - 2x flange thickness).

w
t = thickness of the web
ε = √(235/fy ), where fy is the yield stress
η = 1.2 for steel grades up to and including S 460 and = 1.0 for other steel
grades
k as defined in sections below

τ
χ is the web contribution factor obtained from Table 5.1 of the EC3 code and
w
is evaluated per the following table:
Table 7C.1-Evaluate of χ
w
Slenderness Rigid End Non-rigid End
Parameter Post Post
λw < 0.83/η η η
0.83/η ≤ λw < 1.08 0.83/λw 0.83/λw
λw > 1.08 1.37/(0.7 + λw) 0.83/λw
hw
λw =
86.4 ⋅ t ϵ
b. For stiffened webs, if hw/t > 31·E√kτ/η, the section must be checked for shear buckling.
The design resistances considers tension field action of the web and flanges acting as struts
in a truss model. This is calculated as:
ηf yw wt
Vb, Rd = Vbw , Rd + Vbf , Rd ≤
3 γ M1
Where:

7C.5 Member Design
V is the flange resistance per Cl.5.4 for a flange not completely utilized by
bf,Rd
bending moment.
h f t f2f yf   M Ed 2
Vbf , Rd = 1 −  
cγ M1
  M f ,Rd  
b is the width of the flange which provides the least axial resistance, not to be
f
taken greater than 15εtf on each side of the web.
t is the thickness of the flange which provides the least axial resistance.
f
Mf,Rd = Mf,k /γM0 , the moment of resistance of the cross section consisting of
the effective area of the flanges only. For a typical I Section or PFD, this is
evaluated as b·tf·hw. When an axial load, N , is present, the value of M is
Ed f,Rd
reduced by multiplying by the following factor:
N Ed
1−
 A + A f
  
  f 1 f 2  yf 
 γ M0 
 
 
A and A are the areas of the top and bottom flanges, respectively.
f1 f2
 2
1.6b f t f f yf 
c = a 0.25 + 
 th w2f yw
 
a = transverse stiffener spacing. The equation of c is likewise used to solve for a

sufficient stiffener spacing in the case of demand from loads exceeding the
calculated capacity for a specified stiffener spacing.
The following equation must be satisfied for the web shear buckling check to pass:
VEd
η3 = ≤ 1.0
Vb ,Rd
Where:
V is the design shear force.

Ed
Note: The shear forces due to any applied torsion will not be accounted for if the TOR parameter
has been specifically set to a value of 0 (i.e., ignore torsion option).
If the stiffener spacing has not been provided (using the STIFF parameter), then the program
assumes that the member end forms a non-rigid post (case c) and proceeds to evaluate the
minimum stiffener spacing required.
7C.5.4 Members Subject to Torsion
Note: This feature requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 2) build 2007.07 or later.

7C.5 Member Design
General
Eurocode 3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005) gives very limited guidance for the analysis and design of torsion
members. While both elastic and plastic analyses are permitted generally, the design analysis
methods for torsion discussed within EC3 are primarily based on elastic methods. Also, only the
first yield design resistance is specifically discussed for torsion members. Furthermore, there is no
guidance on section classification nor on how to allow for the effects of local buckling on the
design resistance for combined torsional effects. EC3 also does not specifically deal with members
subject to combined bending and torsion and loosely states that the yield criteria (Eqn 6.1 in the
code) can be used for elastic verification.
The method used by STAAD.Pro is therefore based on the SCI publication “P057: Design of
members subject to combined bending and torsion”. Though this publication is based on the
British standard BS 5950-1, the principles from this document are applied in the context of
Eurocode 3.
Note: At the time this feature has been implemented in STAAD.Pro, SCI are in the process of
updating document P057 to be in accordance with Eurocode 3. Hence this method might be
subject to modifications subject to the publication of a newer version of P057. The NCCI
document “SN007b-EN-EU: Torsion” will also be referenced where appropriate.
Code Basis
Torsion design in EC3 is given in Cl. 6.2.7 of EN 1993-1-1:2005. Therefore, this clause is used
primarily for this implementation.
EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not deal with members subject to the combined effects of torsion and lateral
torsional buckling. However, EN 1993-1-6 considers such a condition in Appendix A. Therefore,
STAAD.pro uses Appendix A of EN 1993-1-6 to check for members subject to combined torsion and
LTB.
The following clauses from EC3 are then considered:
l Cl. 6.2.7(1)
l Cl. 6.2.7(9)
l Cl. 6.2.7(5)
l EC-3 -6 App A
Note: STAAD.Pro does, however, use this clause (6.2.7) to report the output for all torsion checks.
Also any distortional deformations and any amplification in the torsional or shear stresses due to
distortions will be neglected by the program.

7C.5 Member Design
l Clause 6.2.7(1)
States that for members subject to torsion, the design torsional moment T at each cross
Ed
section should satisfy:
TEd / RRd ≤ 1.0
Where:
T is the design torsional resistance of the cross section.

Rd
This is the primary condition that will need to be satisfied for members subject to torsion.
The method for working out the torsional resistance T , for the various cases is dealt in the
Rd
following sections.
l Cl. 6.2.7(9)
States that:
For combined shear force and torsional moment, the plastic shear resistance
accounting for torsional effects should be reduced from V to V and
pl,Rd pl,T,Rd
the design shear force should satisfy:
VEd / Vpl,T,Rd ≤ 1.0
The code also gives means to evaluate V in equations 6.26 to 6.28. These equations,
pl,T,Rd
however, only deal with I/H sections, Channel sections, and structural hollow sections (RHS,
SHS, CHS). Therefore, the application of Cl. 6.2.7(9) is only performed for these section
profiles.
l Cl 6.2.7(5)
States that the yield criteria given in Cl. 6.2.1(5) of EN 1993-1-1:2005 may be used for elastic
verification. STAAD.Pro evaluates the stresses due to the various actions on the cross section
and applies this yield criterion.
The program allows for two types of checks for members subject to torsion for EC3 design:
I. Basic Stress Check: This method is intended to be a simplified stress check for torsional
effects. This method will produce the output corresponding to Cl. 6.2.7(5) of EN 1993-1-1.
II. Detailed Checks: This method will perform a full torsional analysis of the member. All four
of the clause checks mentioned earlier will be performed.
The details of these checks are as described below.
You have the option to choose the method to be used for a specific member or group of members.
This will be facilitated by setting the value of the TORSION. The TORSION parameter set to zero by
default, which results in torsion checks only being performed if the member is subject to torsional
moments (i.e., for this default setting, the program will ignore torsion checks if there is no
torsional moment in the member). Setting the value of the TORSION parameter to three (3) will
cause the program to ignore all torsional moments. The detailed output (i.e., TRACK 2) will
indicate that torsion has been ignored for that particular member. The details of setting the values
to one (1) or two (2) and the corresponding checks performed are as described below. See "Design
Parameters" on page 265 for additional details.

7C.5 Member Design
Note: If the TORSION parameter is set to 1 or 2, the program will perform the appropriate checks
even if the member is not subject to torsional moments. In such cases, the program will perform
the checks with a value of zero for the torsional moment.
Basic stress check
This method is used when the TORSION parameter is specified as one (1).
This method is intended to be a simplified stress check for torsional effects per Cl. 6.2.7(5). Any
warping stresses that may develop due to the end conditions will be ignored for this option. The
program will consider the forces (including torsion) at various sections along the length of the
member and for each section, will calculate the resultant stress (Von Mieses) at various points on
the cross section. The location and number of points checked for a cross section will depend on the
cross section type and will be as described below.
The stress check will be performed using equation 6.1 of EN 1993-1-1:2005 as given below:
 σx ,Ed   σ z,Ed   σx ,Ed  σ z,Ed   τ Ed 

2 2 2
  
 f / γ   f / γ   f / γ  f / γ   f / γ  ≤ 1
+ − + 3
 y M0   y M 0   y M0  y M 0   y M 0 
Where:
σ is the longitudinal stress

x,Ed
σ is the transverse stress and
z,Ed
τ is the resultant shear stress.
Ed
Note: Since transverse stresses are very small under normal loading conditions (excluding
hydrostatic forces), the term will be negligible and hence is taken as zero.
σx,Ed = σx + σbz + σby = Fx /Ax + Mz/Zz + My /Zy
τEd = T/J · t + Vy ·Q/(Iz·t) + Vz·Q/(Iy *t)
Where:
T is the torsion at the particular section along the length of the member
J is the torsion constant
t is the thickness of the web/flange
V is the shear force
Q is the statical moment about the relevant axis
I is the second moment of area about the relevant axis
The stress check as per equation 6.1 is performed at various stress points of a cross section as shown
in figures below:

7C.5 Member Design
Shape Section Sketch
Doubly
symmetric
wide flange
profile
Pipe profiles
α = tan-
1
(Mz/My )
Tube profiles

7C.5 Member Design
Shape Section Sketch
Channel
profiles
The resultant ratio will be reported under Cl. 6.2.7(5) in the detailed design output.
Detailed stress check
This method is used when the TORSION parameter is specified as two (2).
This method performs a detailed torsional analysis of a member depending on the torsion loading
conditions and the support conditions at the member ends. This method is based on the SCI
publication P057 and includes any warping stresses (direct warping stresses and warping shear
stresses) depending on the end conditions of the member. This implementation considers seven
different cases of loading and end conditions as given in publication P057 – Section 6. The
loading/end conditions for a member are specified by the use of the CMT design parameter (See
"Design Parameters" on page 265 for parameter values and descriptions).
All the equations used to evaluate the torsional moments and associated stresses are as given in
Appendix B of P057. The resultant stresses are evaluated at various sections along the length of the
member and the following checks will be performed:
Clause 6.2.7(1) – Torsional resistance of the section.
In general, the torsion at any section T is resolved into two components, viz.
Ed
The pure torsional (St. Venant’s) moment (T ) and
t,Ed
The warping torsional moment(T )
w,Ed

7C.5 Member Design
Therefore,
TEd = Tt,Ed + Tw,Ed = GJφ’ = EHφ’’’
[Ref SCI pub. P057]
Where:
φ’ and φ’’’ are the first and third derivates of twist (φ ), respectively, and depend on
the end conditions and loading. These are evaluated from the equations in Annex B
of P057 and are based the specified CMT parameter.
Note: Although the equation given the NCCI document SN007b-EN-EU can be used to evaluate
T , the NCCI does not give the eqn. to evaluate φ’’’. Therefore, Annex B of P057 is used.
wrd
The torsional resistance of the section is also considered as the sum of the pure torsion resistance
and the warping torsion resistance. The pure torsion resistance (T ) and the warping torsional
t,Rd
resistance (T ) are evaluated as:
w,Rd
For closed sections:
Tt,Rd = 2 · Ac · t · τmax
Where:
A is the area enclosed by the mean perimeter

c
t is the max thickness
τ is the max. allowable shear stress = (fy/√3)/ Γm0

max
For open sections (I & channel):
Tt,Rd = τmax · J / t
Where:
J is the torsion const
t is the max thickness.
Tw,Rd = (fy / Γm0 )· t · b2 / 6
Where:
b is the width of the section
t is the thickness of the flange for I- sections; minimum of flange or web thickness
channel sections
The check according to Cl 6.2.7(1) will then be performed to ensure that the following conditions
are satisfied:
Tt,Ed / Tt,Rd ≤ 1
Tw,Ed / Tw,Rd ≤ 1
TEd / TRd ≤ 1

7C.5 Member Design
Clause 6.2.7(9) – Plastic shear resistance due to torsion
STAAD.Pro checks for shear resistance of a section based on Cl. 6.2.6 for EC3 and the plastic shear
resistance (in the absence of torsion) is evaluated as:
(
Av fy / 3 )
V pl, Rd =
γ M0
Where:
A is as pre Cl.6.2.6 (3) for the various sections

v
When torsion is present, along with the shear force, the design shear resistance will be reduced to
V , where V is evaluated as follows:
pl,T,Rd pl,T,Rd
i. For I or H Sections:
τ ,Ed
V pl, T , Rd = 1 − V pl, Rd
(
1.25 f y / )
3 / γ M0
ii. For Channel Sections:
 τ ,Ed τ w ,Ed 
V pl, T , Rd =  1 − − V pl, Rd
 1.25(f y / 3 ) / γ M0 (f y / 3 ) / γ M0 
 
iii. For Structural Hollow Sections:
 τ ,Ed 
V pl, T , Rd = 1 − V
 (f y / 3 ) / γ M0  pl, Rd
Where
τ is the shear stress due to direct (St. Venant’s) torsion and

t,Ed
τ is the shear stress due to warping torsion.
w,Ed
The various shear stresses due to torsion τ and τ are evaluated as follows:
t,Ed w,Ed
i. For Closed sections:
The shear stresses due to warping can be ignored as they will be insignificant and hence:
τt,Ed = TEd /(2·Ac·t)
[Ref NCCI Sn007b-EN-EU]
Where:
T is the applied torsion,

Ed
A is the area delimited by the mean perimeter and
c
t is the thickness of the cross section

7C.5 Member Design
τ = 0, since warping is ignored

w,Ed
ii. For Open sections [I, H, Channel] sections:
For I and H sections, the web will not be subject to warping stresses and therefore warping
shear can be ignored (τ =0).
w,Ed
The stress due to pure torsion is evaluated as:
τt,Ed = G·t·φ’
[Ref SCI pub. P057]
Where:
G is the shear modulus
φ’ is a function depending on the end condition and loading(T). This will be

taken from section 6 and Annex B of P057.
Note: Although the maximum stress is at the thickest section of the profile, the program
uses the web thickness for this clause (since the shear capacity is based on the web area)
unless the load is parallel to the flanges, in which case the flange thickness is used.
For channel sections that are free to warp at the supports and, thus, are not subject to
warping stresses:
The warping shear stress is evaluated as:
τw,Ed = E·Sw·φ’’’ / t
[Ref SCI pub. P057]
Where:
E is the elastic modulus,
S is the warping statistical moment and

w
φ’ is a function depending on the end condition and loading(T). This will be
taken from section 6 and Annex B of P057.
t is the thickness of the element.
Clause 6.2.7(5) – Check for elastic verification of yield
Eurocode 3 gives yield criterion as per eqn. 6.1 and STAAD.Pro uses the yield criterion given in EC-
3. When a member is subject to combined bending and torsion, some degree of interaction occurs
between the two effects. The angle of twist caused by torsion is amplified by the bending moments
and will induce additional warping moments and torsional shears. Account must also be taken of
the additional minor axis moments produced by the major axis moments acting through the
torsional deformations, including the amplifications mentioned earlier.
For members subject to bending and torsion, the stresses are evaluated as follows:

7C.5 Member Design
Direct bending stress (major axis): σbz = Mz / Zz
Direct bending stress (minor axis): σby = My / Zy
Direct stress due to warping: σw = E·W ns· φ’’
Direct stress due to twist (min. axis): σbyt = Myt / Zy
Direct stress due to axial load (if any): σc = P/ A
Where:
M is the major axis moment & My is the minor axis moment.

z
φ’’ is the differential function based on twist (ref P057 Annex B. & Table 6)
W is the normalized warping function.

ns
Myt = φ·Mz (see Appendix B of P057 to evaluate φ)
Shear stresses due to torsion and/or warping is evaluated as described above for Clause 6.2.7(9).
Check for yield (capacity checks) is then done according to Eqn 6.1 of EN 1993-1-1:2005, as described
for the Basic Stress Check (TORSION = 1):
 σx ,Ed   σ z,Ed   σx ,Ed  σ z,Ed   τ Ed 

2 2 2
 f / γ  +  f / γ  −  f / γ  f / γ  + 3 f / γ  ≤ 1
 y M0   y M 0   y M0  y M 0   y M 0 
Clause EC-3:6 App A – Check for combined Torsion and Lateral Torsional buckling
The interaction check due to the combined effects of bending (including lateral torsional buckling)
and torsion will be checked using Annex A of EN 1993-6: 2007. Note that this interaction equation
does not include the effects of any axial load.
Caution: At present, SCI advises that no significant work has been published for this case and
work is still ongoing. So at present is advisable not to allow for torsion in a member with large
axial load.
Members subject to combined bending and torsion will be checked to satisfy:

M y ,ED C MZM z,Ed k wk zwk αT w ,Ed
+ + ≤1
χ LT M y ,RK / γ M1 M z,RK / γ M 1 T w ,Rk / γ M1
Where:
C is the equivalent uniform moment factor for bending about the z-z axis,
mz
according to EN 1993-1-1 Table B.3.
0.2T w ,Ed
k w = 0.7 −
T w ,Rk / γ M 1
M z,Ed
k zw = 1 −
M z,Rk / γ M 1

7C.5 Member Design
1
kα =
1 − M y ,Ed / M y ,cr
M and M are the design values of the maximum moment about the y-y and z-
y,Ed z,Ed
z axis, respectively.
M and M are the characteristic values of the resistance moment of the cross-
y,Rk z,Rk
section about it y-y and z-z axis, respectively, from EN 1993-1-1, Table 6.7.
M is the elastic critical lateral-torsional buckling moment about the y-y axis.
y,cr
T is the design value of the warping torsional moment.
w,Ed
T is the characteristic value of the warping torsional resistance moment.
w,Rk
χ is the reduction factor for lateral torsional buckling according to 6.3.2 of EN 1993-
LT
1-1.
Note: For all of the above checks the effective length of the member to be used for torsion can be
set by using the EFT design parameter.
7C.5.5 Members Subject to Combined Forces
Members subject to Bending and Axial Force
When a member is subject to a combined axial load and a bending moment, the program evaluates
a reduced moment capacity based on Cl. 6.2.9 of the code. For Class 1, 2, and 3 sections, the
program evaluates the reduced moment from the equations given in Cl. 6.2.9.1 of the code. For class
4 sections, the interaction equation given by equation 6.44 are checked.
In the case of members subject to axial load and biaxial bending, the program will consider the
interaction equation 6.41 of the code.
Note: By default, the program will use the values of the constants ‘α’ and ‘β’ as given in the code
for the different sections types. However, you can override these values using the ALPHA and BETA
design parameters (See "Design Parameters" on page 265).
Note: The program uses the parameter ELB (See "Design Parameters" on page 265) to override the
Cl.6.2.9 checks for combined axial load and bending case. When specfied as 1, the program uses
the more general equation 6.2 of EN 1993-1-1, instead.
Members subject to Bending, Shear, and Axial Force
When a member is subject to a combined axial load, shear force, and a bending moment, the
program evaluates the reduced yield strength as given in Cl 6.2.10 (3) of the code. The reduction in
the yield strength is done only when the applied shear force exceeds 50% of the design shear
resistance V . This reduced yield strength is then used to evaluate the reduced moment capacity
pl,Rd
of the section.

7C.5 Member Design
Members subject to Bending and Axial Compression
The bending resistance of members could be reduced by the presence of a co-existent axial load.
This is then checked against the lateral-torsional buckling resistance of the section. The EN 1993
design module in STAAD takes such a scenario into account and performs the necessary checks as
per Cl. 6.3.3 of the code.
Generally, EC3 requires checking cross-section resistance for local capacity and also checking the
overall buckling capacity of the member. In the case of members subject to axial tension and
bending, there is provision to take the stabilizing effect of the tension load into consideration. This
is achieved by modifying the extreme compression fibre stress and calculating an effective applied
moment for the section. The checks are done as per Cl. 6.2.9 of the code. In case of a combined
axial compressive load and bending moment, the member is checked per the rules in section 6.3.3
of the code. The program checks to ensure that both the interaction equations 6.61 and 6.62 of the
code are satisfied. The interaction factors kzz, kyy, kzy & kyz will be evaluated using Annex B of EN
1993-1-1 by default. Hence for the EN 1993-1-1 code in STAAD.Pro (without National Annexes), uses
Annex B. The choice between using Annex A and Annex B will be based on the choice specified by
a particular National Annex, if used. If the National Annex itself gives a choice between Annex A
and Annex B, the program uses Annex B to evaluate the interaction factors.
Note: EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not specifically deal with single angle, double angles, double channels
or Tee sections and does give a method to evaluate the slenderness of such members. In these
cases, the Eurocode 3 (EN 1993-1-1) design module of STAAD.Pro uses the methods specified in
BS 5950-1:2000 to calculate the slenderness of these members. Cl. 4.7.10 of BS 5950-1:2000 is used
in the current version of the EC3 design module. See "Single Angel Sections" for ST and RA
angle specifications.
Note: Laced or battened compression members are not dealt within the current version of EC3
(EN 1993) design module in STAAD.Pro.
7C.5.6 Design of Slender pipe sections to EN 1993-1-6

The design of Slender CHS sections is performed per EN 1993-1-6:2007 (hereafter, EC3-6). EC3-6
does not specify additional or modified safety factors. Therefore, the program uses the default safety
factors from EN 1993-1-1.
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters.
EC3-6 deals with four types of ultimate limits states: plastic limit state, cyclic capacity limit state,
buckling limit state, and fatigue. The following are considered by STAAD.Pro:
l LS1 – Plastic limit state: Deals with the condition when the capacity of the structure is
exhausted by yielding of the material.
l LS3 – Buckling Limit state: Deals with the condition in which the structure (or shell)
develops large displacements normal to the shell surface, caused by loss of stability under
compressive and/or shear membrane stresses.

7C.5 Member Design
The limit state verification is made based on the “Stress design” method described in EC3-6. The
stress design approach takes into account three categories of stresses:
l Primary stresses: Stresses that are generated for the member to be in equilibrium with the
direct imposed loads.
l Secondary stresses: Those that are generated for internal compatibility or for compatibility at
supports due to imposed loads or displacements (e.g., temperature, settlement etc.)
l Local stresses: Local stresses generated due to cyclic loading (or fatigue).
Only the primary stresses are considered the program. The primary stresses considered are those
generated due to axial loads, bending, shear and /or a combination of these conditions.
Note: In the context of slender pipe section design for the Eurocode 3 module, the secondary and
local stresses can be neglected since the loads and corresponding stresses dealt with in the design
engine are largely direct and shear stresses.
The local axis coordinate system for a CHS is defined as:
circumferential
around the circumference of the circular cross
section (θ)
meridional
along the length of the member (x)
normal
perpendicular to the tangential plane formed by the
circumferential and meridional directions (n)
and the corresponding membrane stresses will follow the convention given below:
Figure 7C.3 - Nomenclature for membrane and transverse stresses in Slender CHS sections
Membrane stresses Transverse stresses
Stress Design
Stress checks are made based on the “Stress design” method as per Section 8.5 of the code. This
section deals with the buckling strength of the member (LS3). The principle is to evaluate the

7C.5 Member Design
membrane stresses due to the applied loads and then compare that to the buckling strength, which
is evaluated giving due consideration for local buckling effects.
The membrane stresses are evaluated as given in Annex A of the code. The pipe section is
considered as an unstiffened cylindrical shell.
i. Meridional Stresses:
1. Axial load
Fx = 2·π·r·Px
σx = -Fx /(2·π·r·t)
2. Axial stress from bending
M = π·r2 ·Px,max
σx = ±M/(π2 ·r·t)
ii. Shear Stress:
1. Transverse force, V
V = π·r·Pθ,max
τmax = ±V/(π·r·t)
2. Shear from torsional moment, M
Mt = 2π·r2 ·Pθ
τ = Mt/(2π2 ·r2 ·t)
Where:
r is the radius of the middle surface of the shell wall.
t is the wall thickness of the cylinder
Calculation of Axial Buckling Stress
The buckling strength of A slender pipe section is evaluated using the method given in section
8.5.2 ofEC3-6. The design buckling stresses (buckling resistance) are calculated separately for axial,
circumferential, and shear. The circumferential stresses are ignored in STAAD.Pro.
The naming convention and the coordinate axis used will be as given in the following diagram:

7C.5 Member Design
Figure 7C.4 - Naming convention and coordinate system used for the buckling stress of a slender CSH section
The axial buckling resistance is given by:
σx,Rd = σx,Rk /γM1
Note: Γ will have the same default value of 1.0 as in EN 1993-1-1.

M1
σ is the characteristic buckling strength given by:

x,Rk
σx,Rk = Χx · fyk
Where:
χ is the meridional buckling reduction factor. χ is evaluated per Section 8.5.2(4) of

x x
EC3-6 and is determined as a function of the relative shell slenderness given by:
f yk
λx =
σx ,cr
Where:
σ is the elastic buckling critical stress.

x,cr
Once the relative slenderness is evaluated, the reduction factor is calculated as follows:
χ = 1 when λ ≤ λ
0
η
 λ −λ0 
χ = 1 − β 
 λ P − λ 0  when λ < λ < λ
0 P
χ= α/λ2 when λ ≤ λ
P
Where:
λ is the plastic limit for slenderness given by:

p
α
λP =
1−β
The meridional buckling parameters the factors α and β are evaluated per section D.1.2.2 of EC3-6.

7C.5 Member Design
Note: A ‘Normal’ fabrication quality will be assumed when evaluating the fabrication quality
parameter as given in table D.2 of the code, unless the fabrication quality is set using the FAB
design parameter. See "Design Parameters" on page 265
The elastic critical buckling stress, σ and the factors α and β are evaluated per Annex D of EC3-6.
x,cr
The details are as given below:
The CHS section is classified based on the following criteria:
CHS Length Classification Criteria
Short ω ≤ 1.7
Medium 1.7 < ω ≤ 0.5· r/t
Long ω > 0.5· r/t
Where:
l
ω=
rt
The elastic critical buckling critical stress is evaluated as:
σx,Rcr = 0.605·E·Cx ·(t/r)
Where:
C is a factor dependant upon the CHS length classification as described in section

x
D.1.2.1 of EC-3-6.
Note: For a long cylinder, there are two separate methods that can be used to
evaluate the C factor: Eqns D.9/10 and Eqn D.12. Initially the program evaluates C
x x
based on the maximum from equations D.9 and D.10. However, for long cylinders
that satisfy the conditions in equation D.11, the program will also work out Cx
based on equation D.12 and then choose the minimum obtained from D.12 and
D.9/10.
Calculation of Shear Buckling Stress
The shear buckling resistance is given by:
τxθ,Rd = τxθ,Rk /γM1
Note: γ will have the same default value of 1.0 as in EN 1993-1-1.

M1
τ is the characteristic buckling shear strength given by:

xθ,Rk
τxθ,Rk = Χθ· fyk
Where:

7C.5 Member Design
χ is the shear buckling reduction factor. χ will be worked out as given in section
θ θ
8.5.2(4) of En 1993-1-6 and is determined as a function of the relative shell slenderness
given by:
f yk
λθ =
τ xθ ,cr
Where:
τ is the elastic buckling critical stress.

xθ,Rk
The reduction factor, χ , is then evaluated as described for the axial buckling stress, based on the
θ
same λ , α, and β parameters given in Annex D of EC3-6.
p
The CHS section is classified based on the following criteria:
CHS Length Classification Criteria
Short ω ≤ 10
Medium 10 < ω ≤ 8.7· r/t
Long ω > 8.7· r/t
Where:
l
ω=
rt
The elastic critical buckling critical stress is evaluated as:
τxθ, Rcr = 0.75ECτ

1  
ω r
Where:
C is a factor dependant upon whether the CHS length classification as described in

τ
section D.1.4.1 of EC-3-6.
Note: A ‘Normal’ fabrication quality will be assumed when working out the
fabrication quality parameter as given in table D.6 of the code, unless the
fabrication quality is set using the FAB design parameter.
Buckling Strength Verification
The buckling strength verification will be performed so as to satisfy the following conditions:
For axial stresses:
σx,Ed ≤ σx,Rd
For shear stresses:

τxθ,Ed ≤ τxθ,Rd
For a combined case of axial and shear stresses acting together, an interaction check will be done
according to equation 8.19 of the code as below:
kx kτ
 σx ,Ed  + 
τ xθ ,Ed 
 ≤1
 σx ,Rd   τ xθ ,Rd 
Where:
k and k are the interaction factors as given in section D.1.6 of EN 1993-1-6:

x τ
kx = 1.25 + 0.75 · χx
kτ = 1.75 + 0.25 · χτ

Depending on the model being designed, you may have to change some or all of the parameter
default values. Some parameters are unit dependent and when altered, the n setting must be
Table 7C.4 lists all the relevant EC3 parameters together with description and default values.
Table 7C.2-Steel Design Parameters EC3 EN

Name Value
CODE - Must be specified as EN 1993-1-1:2005 to

invoke design per Eurocode 3:2005 (EN
1993).

Reference Manual.
ALH 0.5 The ratio of the distance of the point

torque (from the start of the member) to
the length of the member. The default
value of 0.5 represents torque acting at the
mid-span of a symmetrically loaded
member. Values can range from 0 to 1.


Name Value
ALPHA 1.0 Used to input a user defined value for the

α factor in equation 6.41 for combined
bending and axial force checks.

sections to checked along the length of a
beam:
1. Check at location of maximum Mz

along beam
2. Check sections with end forces and

forces at location of BEAM 1.0
check.
3. Check at every 1/13th point along

the beam and report the maximum
BETA 1.0 Used to input a user defined value for the

β factor in equation 6.41 for combined
bending and axial force checks.
C1 1.132 Corresponds to the C1 factor to be used to

calculate Elastic critical moment M as
cr
per Clause 6.3.2.2
C2 0.459 Corresponds to the C2 factor to be used to

cr
per Clause 6.3.2.2
C3 0 Corresponds to the C3 factor to be used to

cr
per Clause 6.3.2.2


Name Value
CAN 0 Member will be considered as a cantilever

type member for deflection checks.
0 indicates that member will

not be treated as a cantilever
member
1 indicates that the member

will be treated as a cantilever
member
CMM 1.0 Indicates type of loading and support

conditions on member. Used to calculate
the C1, C2, and C3 factors to be used in
the M calculations.
cr
Can take a value from 1 to 8.
Refer to Table 7C.5 for more information

on its use.
CMN 1.0 Indicates the level of End-Restraint.
1.0 = No fixity
0.5 = Full fixity
0.7 = One end free and other

end fixed
CMT 1 Used to indicate the loading and support

condition for torsion (ref. SCI publication
P-057).
Can take a value of 1-7. The values

correspond to the various cases defined in
section 6 and App. B of SCI-P-057.
Refer to Table 7C.6 for more information


Name Value
DFF 0 "Deflection Length" / Max.. allowable local

(Mandatory deflection
for
See Note 1d below.
deflection
check,
TRACK 4.0)
DJ1 Start Joint Joint No. denoting starting point for

of member calculation of "Deflection Length" . See
Note 1 below.

member calculation of "Deflection Length". See
Note 1 below.
DMAX 100.0 cm Maximum allowable depth for the

member.
DMIN 0 Minimum required depth for the member.
EFT Member Effective length for torsion. A value of 0

Length defaults to the member length.
ELB 0 Used to specify the method for combined

axial load + bending checks
0. Uses Cl. 6.2.9 of EN 1993-1-1:2005
1. Uses Cl. 6.2.1(7) - Eqn. 6.2 of EN

1993-1-1:2005


Name Value
ESTIFF 0 (For use with the Dutch NA only) Method

for checking columns forming part of
(non)/buttressed framework:
0. Checks per Cl 12.3.1.2.3 of NEN 6770:

Section 1
1. Checks per Cl 12.3.1.2.3 of NEN 6770:

Section 2
See "Clause 12.3.1.2.3 (NEN 6770):

Rotation/bending capacity" on page 296
for additional description on this
parameter.
FAB 3 Used to specify the fabrication class to be

used to check for slender (Class 4)
CHS/pipe sections (EN 1993-1-6:2007)
1. Class A – Excellent
2. Class B – High
3. Class C – Normal
FU 0 Ultimate tensile strength of steel.
GM0 1.0 Corresponds to the γ factor in EN 1993-

m0
1-1:2005

m1
1-1:2005

m2
1-1:2005


Name Value
GST 0 Used to specify the section type to be used

for designing a “General Section” from the
user table. The member will be considered
as the specified type with the user defined
properties. The available options and
corresponding values are as below:
0. I-Section
1. Single Channel
2. Rectangular Hollow Section
3. Circular Hollow Section
4. Angle Section
5. Tee Section
Note: This parameter will be ignored if

it has been assigned to any section other
than a General Section.
KC 1.0 Corresponds to the correction factor as per

Table 6.6 of EN 1993-1-1:2005. Program will
calculate kc automatically if this
parameter is set to 0.
Note: For the British, Singapore, &

Polish NAs, kc will be calculated as
given in the NA by default.
KY 1.0 K factor in local y axis. Used to calculate

the effective length for slenderness and
buckling calculations.
KZ 1.0 K factor in local z axis. Used to calculate

the effective length for slenderness and
buckling calculations.


Name Value
LEG 0 Slenderness values for angles as

determined from BS 5950-2000 Table 25.
See "Design Parameters" on page 70
LVV Max. value of Leg length for Lvv (length about v-v- axis
Lyy of single angle section), as per Lyy. Used
for slenderness calculations.
LY Member Compression length in local y axis,

Length Slenderness ratio = (KY)*(LY)/(Ryy)
LZ Member Compression length in local z axis,

Length Slenderness ratio = (KZ)*(LZ)/(Rzz)
MTH 0 Used to select the clause to be used to

calculate the LTB reduction factor, χ .
LT
The available options and corresponding
values are as below:
0. Use default method based on

section type (default)
1. Use Cl.6.3.2.2
2. Use Cl.6.3.2.3
By default, the program will use Cl 6.3.2.3

for rolled & built-up I-sections and Cl.
6.3.2.2 for all other sections. If, however,
the specified National Annex expands on
Cl. 6.3.2.3 to include other section types
(e.g., the UK NA), the program will use Cl.
6.3.2.3 by default for that particular section
type.
See "European Codes - National Annexes

to Eurocode 3 [EN 1993-1-1:2005]" on page
283 for additional details on
NA documents.


Name Value
MU 0 To be used with CMM values of 7 and 8. See

Table 7C.4.
Note: Currently valid only with the

French & Belgian NAs.
NA 0 Choice of National Annex to be used for

EC3 design. See "European Codes -
National Annexes to Eurocode 3 [EN 1993-
1-1:2005]" on page 283 for values allowed
for this parameter.
(See "National Annex Documents" on page

240 for more information)

calculation.
PLG 0 To be used to determine whether to

include the additional interaction checks
as per CL. NA.20(2) and NA.20(3) of the
Polish National Annex.
Note: This parameter will be applicable

only to the Polish NA
PY Yield The yield strength default value is set

Strength based on the default value of the SGR
parameter.
SBLT 0.0 Indicates if the section is rolled or built-

up.
0.0 = Rolled
1.0 = Built-up


Name Value
SGR 0 Steel grade as in table 3.1 of EN 1993-1-

1:2005
0.0 - indicates S 235 grade

steel

steel

steel

steel

steel
Note: As EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not

provide a buckling curve in table 6.2 for
grade S 450 steel (in Table 3.1 of EN
1993-1-1:2005), the program will use the
same buckling curves as for grade S 460
when calculating the buckling
resistance as per clause 6.3.
STIFF Member Distance between transverse stiffener

Length or plates, used to prevent web shear buckling.
depth of If not specified or if a value of 0 is
beam, provided, the program will assume the
whichever is web is unstiffened.
lesser
TOM 0 Total torsion for design used for torsion

checks. Can be used to override the total
torsional moment to be used for member
design.


Name Value
TORSION 0 Method to be used for a specific member

or group of members:
0. Perform basic torsion checks if

member is subject to torsion.
1. Perform basic stress check (Ignore

warping effects).
2. Perform detailed checks (including

warping effects).
3. Ignore all torsion checks
Note: For options 1 or 2, the program

will perform the torsion related checked
even if torsional moment is absent and
will use a value of zero for the torsional
moment.
TRACK 0 Specify level of detail in output.
0. Summary of results only.
1. Summary with member capacities.
2. Detailed results.
4. Deflection check results only.
UNF 1 Unsupported length as a fraction of the

actual member length.
UNL Member Unrestrained length of member used in

Length calculating the lateral-torsional resistance
moment of the member.
ZG +Section Distance of transverse load from shear

Depth/2 center. Used to calculate M .
cr
Note: For Tee sections, ZG will have a

default value of (+Flange thickness/2)
Notes:

1. CAN, DJ1, and DJ2 – Deflection
a. When performing the deflection check, you can choose between two methods. The
first method, defined by a value 0 for the CAN parameter, is based on the local
displacement. Local displacement is described in Section 5.44 of the Technical
Reference Manual.
If the CAN parameter is set to 1, the check will be based on cantilever style deflection.
Let (DX1, DY1, DZ1) represent the nodal displacements (in global axes) at the node
defined by DJ1 (or in the absence of DJ1, the start node of the member). Similarly,
(DX2, DY2, DZ2) represent the deflection values at DJ2 or the end node of the
member.
Compute Length = distance between DJ1 & DJ2 or, between start node and end node,
as the case may be.
b. If CAN = 0, deflection length is defined as the length that is used for calculation of
local deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the
“Deflection Length” will be equal to the length of the member. However, in some
situations, the “Deflection Length” may be different. A straight line joining DJ1 and
DJ2 is used as the reference line from which local deflections are measured.

PARAMETERS
DFF 300. ALL
DJ1 1 ALL
DJ2 4 ALL
c. If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member length
d. It is important to note that unless a DFF value is specified, STAAD will not perform a
DFF (see Table 2B.1).

e. The above parameters may be used in conjunction with other available parameters for
steel design.
2. CMM Parameter
The values of CMM for various loading and support conditions are as given below:
Table 7C.3-Values for the CMM Parameter
CMM Loading and Support Conditions
Value
varying end moments and uniform loading
varying end moments and central point load
3. Checking beam deflection

With the TRACK parameter set to 4, the members included in a BEAM CHECK command will
be checked for the local axis deflection rather than for the stress capacity using the current
LOAD LIST.
If both stress capacity and deflection checks are required, then 2 parameter blocks with code
checks are required, one with a TRACK 4 command and one with a TRACK 0, 1 or 2, thus:
LOAD LIST 1 TO 10
PARAMETER 1
CODE EN 1993
TRACK 2 ALL
CODE CHECK MEMBER 1
***************************
LOAD LIST 100 TO 110
PARAMETER 2
TRACK 4 ALL
DFF 300 MEMB 1
DJ1 1 MEMB 1
DJ2 4 MEMB 1
CHECK CODE MEMB 1
Note: While both sets of code checks will be reported in the output file, only the last code
check results are reported in the STAAD.Pro graphical interface.
4. CMT Parameter
The values of CMM for various loading and support conditions are as given below:
Table 7C.4-Loading and Support Conditions represented by CMT Parameter

Values
CMT Description Diagram
Value
1 (Default) : Concentrated Torque at

Ends. Ends Torsion fixed and
Warping fixed
2 Concentrated Torque along length of

member. Ends Torsion fixed and
Warping free
3 Concentrated Torque along length of

member. Ends Torsion fixed and
Warping fixed
4 Uniform Torque in member. Ends

Torsion fixed and Warping free

7C.7 Code Checking
CMT Description Diagram

Value
5 Uniform Torque in member. Ends

Torsion fixed and Warping fixed
6 Concentrated Torque in cantilever.

End Torsion fixed and Warping fixed
7 Uniform Torque in cantilever. End

Torsion fixed and Warping fixed
Note: For CMT = 2 and CMT = 3, you have the option of specifying the distance at which
the concentrated torque acts, measured from the start of the member. This can be done by
using the ALH design parameter. The ALH parameter indicates the ratio of the distance of
the point torque (from the start of the member) to the length of the member. This
parameter will have a default value of 0.5 (i.e., the torque acts at the center of the span)
and will accept values ranging from 0 to 1.
Note: The GB1 parameter that is being used for compression checks in builds preceding this
release (STAAD.Pro 2007 build 06) has been removed as this parameter is no longer required in
EN 1993-1-1:2005. Hence any legacy files that use GB1 parameter will indicate an error message and
you will be required to substitute GB1 with GM1, in accordance with EN 1993-1-1:2005.
7C.7 Code Checking
members are adequate. The adequacy is checked as per EN 1993-1-1:2005 and a corresponding
National Annex (if specified). Code checking is done using the forces and moments at specific
sections of the members.
passed or failed the checks; the critical condition; the value of the ratio of the critical condition
condition occurs).
defined sections as described in Section 1.7.3 of the Technical Reference Manual, with the exception

7C.8 Member Selection
of ISECTION. ISECTION has been currently excluded since the option of Tapered section design is
currently not supported in the EC3 module. The EC3 (EN 1993) design module does not consider
these sections or PRISMATIC sections in its design process.
Note: Checks for slender sections to EN 1993-1-1 are limited to I-SECTIONS, TEE, SINGLE
CHANNEL, SINGLE ANGLE and CIRCULAR & RECTANGULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS.
Code checking for GENERAL sections can be also done using the EN1993 module. The program will
design GENERAL sections as I sections by default. However, you are given the option to choose a
‘section type’ to be considered while designing the member. Refer to the description of the GST
design parameter in Section 7C.6 for details.

constrained by the parameters DMAX and DMIN, which limits the maximum and minimum depth of
the members.
defined in Section 7C.7.
or as the limitations specified in Section 7C.7.
7C.9 Tabulated Results of Steel Design
MEMBER
TABLE
selected.
RESULTS

CRITICAL COND
refers to the clause in EN 1993-1-1:2005 code which governs the design.
RATIO
LOADING
provides the load case number, which governed the design.
FX, MY, and MZ
LOCATION
forces govern.
Note: For a TRACK 2 output, the module will also report all the relevant clause checks that have
been performed and will also indicate the critical ratio and the load case that caused the critical
ratio as well as the corresponding forces that were used for the respective checks. A TRACK 2
output will also include the various design data used for the calculations such as the section
modulii, section class, section capacity etc.
If an NA parameter (other than 0) has been specified and if the particular National Annex requires
additional checks outside those specified in EN 1993-1-1:2005 (e.g., The Dutch National Annex), the
respective NA clauses and any associated code clauses will be listed along with the critical ratios
and the forces that were used for these clause checks.
7C.9.1 Example of a TRACK 2 output

Documentation notes appear in red.
Note: The results and output follow the axis convention as described in Section 7C.1.3
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 Code title & version

********************************************
NATIONAL ANNEX - NA to BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 National Annex used, if any
PROGRAM CODE REVISION V1.9 BS_EC3_2005/1 Design engine version
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST HD320X127 (EUROPEAN SECTIONS) Member number, section profile & table
PASS EC-6.3.3-662 0. Design status, critical code clause, & critical ratio
045 1

25.00 C 5.00 -10.00 Section forces & critical section location

0.00
=======================================================================
MATERIAL DATA
Grade of steel = USER
Modulus of elasticity = 205 kN/mm2
Design Strength (py) = 275 N/mm2
Gross Area = 161.30 Net Area = 161.30
"z-axis" here refers to bending about Z-Z (when Y is Up), where as EC3 uses the Y-Y axis convention.
z-axis y-axis
Shear Area : 81.998 51.728
Radius of gyration : 13.823 7.568
DESIGN DATA (units - kN,m) EUROCODE NO.3 /2005
Section Class : CLASS 1 Section class as per Table 5.2
Squash Load : 4435.75 Max. cross section capacity (A · f /GM0
y
Axial force/Squash load : 0.006
GM0 : 1.00 GM1 : 1.00 GM2 : 1.10 Partial safety factors used
z-axis y-axis
Slenderness ratio (KL/r) : 36.2 66.1
Compression Capacity : 4078.2 3045.5
Tension Capacity : 4435.8 4435.8
Moment Capacity : 591.0 258.3
Reduced Moment Capacity : 591.0 258.3
Shear Capacity : 1301.9 821.3
BUCKLING CALCULATIONS (units - kN,m)
Lateral Torsional Buckling Moment MB = 591.0
co-efficient Factor C1 used in M calculations and End restraint factor (corresponds to the CMN design parameters
cr
s C1 & K : C1 =2.578 K =1.0, Effective Length= 5.000
Elastic Critical Moment for LTB, Mcr = 1541.5
Critical Load For Torsional Buckling, NcrT = 13898.0
Critical Load For Torsional-Flexural Buckling, NcrTF = 13898.0
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (units- kN,m):
CLAUSE RATIO LOAD FX VY Max. ratio, loadcase, & section forces for each clause check
VZ MZ MY
EC-6.3.1.1 0.008 1 25.0 0.0 0.0 -10.0 5.0
EC-6.2.9.1 0.020 1 25.0 0.0 0.0 -10.0 5.0
EC-6.3.3-661 0.035 1 25.0 0.0 0.0 -10.0 5.0
EC-6.3.3-662 0.045 1 25.0 0.0 0.0 -10.0 5.0
EC-6.3.2 LTB 0.017 1 25.0 0.0 0.0 -10.0 5.0
_________________________
************** END OF TABULATED RESULT OF DESIGN **************

7D.1 General Format
7D. European Codes - National Annexes to Eurocode 3 [EN

1993-1-1:2005]
A number of countries that have signed up to the replace their current steel design standards with
the Eurocode, EN 1993-1-1:2005, known commonly as Eurocode 3, have published their National
Annex documents. These documents make small changes to the base document and STAAD.Pro
has been updated to incorporate some of these National Annex documents.
The parameter NA sets the default material gamma factors and any additional changes outlined in
the country specific National Annex such as specific equations or methods. These are described for
each National Annex document in the following sections.
The output file printout has been updated to indicate which National Annex (if any) has been used
in a code check / select process (For all TRACK settings).
Design of members per EC3 National Annexes requires the STAAD Euro Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.
7D.1 General Format

The format of the EN 1993-1-1:2005 National Annex is as follows:
CODE EN 1993
NA f1
{Code parameters: See "Design Parameters" on page 265 }
Where: f1 represents the number designation for a specific country's National Annex:
Table 7D.1-Table 5B1.2(B) - Numerical Code for Eurocode National Annex
NA Value Country
0 None — Uses the base EN 1993-1-1:2005 code, with no

national annex changes or additions. The default values
specified in En 1993-1-1:2005 will be used for the partial
safety factors and various parameter values where applicable
(default).
1 United Kingdom (British NA) — Uses the BS EN 1993-1-

1:2005 version of Eurocode 3 along with the UK National
Annex.

7D.2 Specifying the design engine to use a national annex
NA Value Country
2 Netherlands (Dutch NA) — Uses the NEN EN 1993-1-1:2005

version of the code.
The Dutch National Annex [NEN-EN 1993-1-1/NB] has been

added in this module. Please note that the Dutch National
requires additional checks as per NEN 6770 and NEN 6771
which will also be performed during design checks with
this parameter value
3 Norway (Norwegian NA) — Uses the NS-EN 1993-1-1:2005

version of the code. The Norwegian National Annexe [ NS-
EN 1993-1-1:2005/Na 2008] has been added to this
implementation.
4 France (French NA) — Uses the Annexe Nationale a la NF

EN 1993-1-1:2005 version of the code along with the French
National Annex..
5 Finland (Finnish NA) - Uses the SFS EN 1993-1-1:2005

version of Eurocode 3 along with the Finnish National
Annex.
6 Poland (Polish NA) - Uses the PN EN 1993-1-1:2005 version

of Eurocode 3 along with the Polish National Annex.
7 Singapore (Singaporean NA) - Uses the SS EN 1993-1-

1:2005 version of Eurocode 3 along with the Singaporean
National Annex.
8 Belgium (Belgian NA) - Uses the NBN EN 1993-1-1:2005

version of Eurocode 3 along with the Belgian National
Annex.
9 Malaysian (Malaysian NA) - Uses the MS EN 1993-1-1:2005

version of Eurocode 3 along with the Malaysian National
Annex.
10 German (German NA) - Uses the DIN EN 1993-1-1:2005

version of Eurocode 3 along with the German National
Annex.
11 Swedish (Swedish NA) - Uses the BFS EN 1993-1-1:2005

version of Eurocode 3 along with the Swedish National
Annex.

Use the following procedure to include additional check specified by a National Annex:

1. In the Modeling mode, select the Design | Steel tab.
The Steel Design - Whole Structure dialog box opens.

2. In the Current Code drop-down menu, select EN 1993-1-1:2005.
3. Click Define Parameters….
The Design Parameters dialog box opens.

4. Select the NA parameter in the list box.
5. Select the option corresponding to the National Annex document you want to use .
6. Click Add.
This will insert the following commands into the STAAD input file:
CODE EN 1993-1-1:2005
NA n
Refer to EC3 steel design for additional information on steel design per EC3.
A design performed to the new Eurocode 3 National Annex is displayed in the output file (*.ANL)
with the following header, in addition to the base EC3 output.

7D.1 Dutch National Annex to EC3
Adds values from the Dutch National Annex—titled NEN-EN 1993-1-1/NB—for use with Eurocode
3, or EN 1993-1-1:2005. The NA document makes small changes to the base document.
The clauses/sections in EN 1993-1-1:2005 (hereafter referred to as EC-3) that require additional

clauses from the Dutch National Annex (hereafter referred to as D-NA) are described in the
following sections.
Refer to the basic code (EC3) for a description of these clauses. The sections below refer to the
corresponding clauses in the D-NA.
Note: Clause 6.3.2.4 deals with a simplified assessment method for beams. STAAD.Pro only uses
the more accurate method (6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 in EC-3) and therefore this section is ignored.
7D.1.1 Axis Convention

The local axis convention in the Dutch codes is: Y – major axis & Z – minor axis (as opposed to the
convention followed in STAAD.Pro).
Figure 7D.1 - Local axis convention used in the Dutch NA to EC-3
7D.1.2 Clause 6.1 – General

The partial safety factors will use the following values:
l Resistance of cross-sections, γ = 1.0

M0
l Resistance of members to instability, γ = 1.0
M1

l Resistance of cross sections to tension, γ = 1.25

M2
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the D-NA (NA 3 is
specified)..
Note: You can change these values through the GM0, GM1, & GM2 design parameters. See "Design
Parameters" on page 265
7D.1.3 Clause 6.2.8 – Bending and shear

The D-NA requires the implementation of causes 11.3.1.1 and 11.3.1.3 of NEN 6770.
Clause 11.3.1.1 (NEN 6770): Class 1 and Class 2 I-section profiles
Class 1 and class 2 I section profiles must satisfy the interaction formulae given in tables 10 & 11 of
NEN 6770.
Table 10 Provides interaction checks for bending about the major axis (All necessary terms and
formulae are described below):
1. If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.5·Vz;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 0.5 · a1 · Npl;d , check equation 11.3.1

2. If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.5·Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 · a1 · Npl;d , check equation 11.3.2
3. If Vz;s;d > 0.5·Vz;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 0.5 · a2 · Nv;u;d , check equation 11.3-3
4. If Vz;s;d > 0.5·Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 · a2 · Nv;u;d , check equation 11.3-4
Where:
V = Actual Shear force in the section along Z- axis

z;s;d
V = Shear capacity of section along Z - axis
z;pl;d
=A ·f / √3
w y;d
f = yield stress
y;d

Figure 7D.2 - Definition of A

w
Aw = A - 2 (bf - tw - 2r) tf
N = Axial force in the section

s;d
N = Axial capacity of section = A · f
pl;d y;d
M = Bending moment about major axis
y;s;d
M = Plastic moment capacity of section = f ·W
y;pl;d y;d y;pl
W = Plastic section modulus
y;pl
a = min( A-2bfx tf)/A , 0.5)- used in tables 10 & 11
1
a = see eqn 11.3-10- used in tables 10 & 11
2
M = see eqn 11.3.12
v;y;ud
N = see eqn 11.3-13
;v;u;d
Table 11: Provides interaction formulae for bending about the minor axis
1. If Vy;s;d ≤ 0.25 · Vy;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 1.0 · a1 · Npl;d check equation 11.3-5
2. If Vy;s;d ≤ 0.25 · Vy;pl;d and Ns;d > 1.0 · a1 · Npl;d check equation 11.3-6
3. IfVy;s;d > 0.25 · Vy;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 1.0 · a1 · Nv;u;d check equation 11.3-7
4. If Vy;s;d > 0.25 · Vy;pl;d and Ns;d > 1.0 · a1 · Nv;u;d check equation 11.3-8
Where:
V = Actual Shear force in the section along Y-axis

y;s;d
V = Shear capacity of section along Y-axis
y;pl;d
f y ;d
V y ; pl ; d = 2bt f
3

Mv;z;u;d = q · Mz;pld = q · fy;d · W pl;z;d
W = plastic section modulus about minor axis) & q as per eqn 11.3-14
pl;z;d
Nv;u;d = Npl;d – 2·(1 - q)·bf · tf · fy;d
Clause 11.3.1.3 ( NEN 6770) : Class 1 and Class 2 Square and rectangular
hollow sections
This clause requires class 1 and class 2 square and rectangular tube profiles to satisfy the interaction
equations in Table 13.
1. If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.25 · Vz;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 0.5 · a3 · Npl;d check equation 11.3.22
2. If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.25 · Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 · a3 · Npl;d check equation 11.3.23
3. If Vz;s;d > 0.25 · Vz;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 0.5 · a4 · Nv;u;d check equation 11.3-24
4. If Vz;s;d > 0.25 · Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 · a4 · Nv;u;d check equation 11.3-25
Where
V = Actual Shear force in the section along Z-axis

z;s;d
V = Shear capacity of section along Z-axis
z;pl;d
b = breadth of section
h = height of section
A = area of section
h f y ;d
V z ; pl ; d = V z ; cl ; d = A
b+h 3
a = min{ (A - 2 · b · t)/A or 0.5}

3
a = from equation 11.3.27
4
7D.1.4 Clause 6.2.10 – Bending shear and axial force

Requires the implementation of clauses 11.3.1.1 to 11.3.1.3 and 11.3.2.1 to 11.3.2.3 of NEN 6770 and clause
11.3 of NEN 6771
Clause 11.3.1.1 (NEN 6770) and Clause 11.3.1.3 ( NEN 6770)
See "Clause 6.2.8 – Bending and shear" on page 287

Clause 11.3.1.2 (NEN 6770): Class 1 and class 2 circular hollow (CHS) profiles
Class 1 and class 2 sections with circular hollow profiles should satisfy the interaction equations
given in table 12.
l Check #1 – If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.25 Vz;pl;d check equation 11.3.17

l Check #2 – If Vz;s;d > 0.25 Vz;pl;d check equation 11.3.18.
See "Clause 6.2.8 – Bending and shear" on page 287 of this document for equations to derive Vz;s;d
Vz;pl;d = Shear capacity of CHS sections

A f y ;d
V pl ; d = 2
π 3
See equations 11.3-19 and 11.3-20 to evaluate Mv;y;u;d and N;v;u;d.
To check for these conditions about the y axis, substitute the index ‘z’ in the above equations with
‘y’ (should be the same of CHS sections).
Clause 11.3.2 ( NEN 6770)
Section 11.3.2 in general deals with Biaxial bending with axial force and shear. The general condition
to be satisfied in this case is given by equation 11.3-31 of NEN 6770
a1 a2
 M y ;s ;d 
+ β1
M z;s ;d 
β 0   ≤1
 M N ;V ;y ;u ;d   M N ;V ;z;u ;d 
Clause 11.3.2.1 : Class 1 and class2 I-sections with biaxial bending + shear +
axial force
The formula to evaluate M;N;v;y;u;d and M;N;v;z;u;d are to be taken from tables 14 and 15 of NEN
6770 respectively.
Checks for table 14:
1. Check #1 – If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.5 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 0.5 x a1 x Npl;d use equation 11.3.32
2. Check #2 – If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.5 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 x a1 x Npl;d use equation 11.3.33
3. Check #3 – If Vz;s;d > 0.5 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 0.5 x a2 x Nv;u;d use equation 11.3-34
4. Check #4 – If Vz;s;d > 0.5 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 x a2 x Nv;u;d use equation 11.3-35
See "Clause 6.2.8 – Bending and shear" on page 287 for equations to evaluate Vz;s;d, My;pl;d, Npl;d,
Mv;y;ud, N;v;u;d, a1 ,a2 and Vz;pl;d.
Checks for table 15:

1. Check #1 – If Vy;s;d ≤ 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 1.0 x a1 x Npl;d use equation 11.3.36
2. Check #2 – If Vy;s;d ≤ 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d > 1.0 x a1 x Npl;d use equation 11.3.37
3. Check #3 – If Vy;s;d > 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 1.0 x a1 x Nv;u;d check equation 11.3-38
4. Check #4 – If Vy;s;d > 0.25 Vy;pl;d and Ns;d > 1.0 x a1 x Nv;u;d check equation 11.3-39
See "Clause 6.2.8 – Bending and shear" on page 287 for equations to evaluate Vy;s;d, Mz;pl;d, Npl;d,
Mv;z;ud, N;v;u;d, a1 ,a2 and Vy;pl;d.
See table 16 for α1, α1, β0 and β1 use in tables 14 and 15.
Clause 11.3.2.2 : Class 1 and Class 2 Circular hollow tubes
The formula to evaluate M;N;v;y;u;d and M;N;v;z;u;d (to be used in equation 11-3-31, see description
of clause 11.3.2 above) are to be taken from table 17 of NEN 6770.
1. Check #1 – If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.25 Vz;pl;d use equation 11.3.44

2. Check #2 – If Vz;s;d > 0.25 Vz;pl;d use equation 11.3.45.
See "Clause 6.2.8 – Bending and shear" on page 287 for equations to evaluate Vz;pl;d, My;pl;d, and
Npl;d use in equations 11.3.44 & 11.3.45.
For values to be used for α1, α2, β1 and β2 in this case refer to table 18 of NEN 6770.
Clause 11.3.2.3 : Class 1 and class2 Rectangular and square hollow tubes
The formula to evaluate M;N;v;y;u;d and M;N;v;z;u;d (to be used in equation 11-3-31, see description
of clause 11.3.2 above) are to be taken from table 19 of NEN 6770.
1. Check #1 – If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 0.5 x a3 x Npl;d use equation 11.3-48
2. Check #2 – If Vz;s;d ≤ 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 x a3 x Npl;d use equation 11.3.49
3. Check #3 – If Vz;s;d > 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d ≤ 0.5 x a4 x Nv;u;d use equation 11.3-50
4. Check #4 – If Vz;s;d > 0.25 Vz;pl;d and Ns;d > 0.5 x a4 x Nv;u;d check equation 11.3-51
See "Clause 6.2.8 – Bending and shear" on page 287 for equations to evaluate Vz;pl;d, My;pl;d, Npl;d,
Mv;y;ud, N;v;u;d, a3, a4 and Vz;pl;d to be used in the above equations. For values to be used for α1,
α2, β1 and β2 in this case refer to table 20 of NEN 6770.
To check for these conditions about the y axis, substitute the index ‘z’ in the above equations with
‘y’.
Clause 11.3 ( NEN 6771)
In general, this section deals with Biaxial bending with axial force and shear for class 3 and class 4
sections.

Check for class 3 sections: For class 3 sections use the method in section 11.3 NEN 6770. For class 3
sections the methods and equations discussed above can be used with the ‘plastic section modulus’
being substituted with the ‘elastic modulus’.
Check for class 4 sections: Class 4 sections can be treated as class 3 sections if the effective section
properties are used as given in clause 10.2.4.2.3 of NEN 6771. Working out the effective section
properties for slender sections has already been done in STAAD.Pro.
For I- section profiles and tubular sections, the following cases are checked:
1. If M;y;s;d / MN;y;f;u;d ≤ 1 check equation 11.2-7 ( given below)
Vz;s;d /Vz;u;d ≤ 1
Where
V is the shear for in the Z direction

z;s;d
V is the shear capacity in the Z direction for ultimate limit state.
z;u;d
For an I section,
2 f y ;d
V z ; u ; d = A w; et
3 3
Where
Aw,ef = effective web area as given in section 10.2.4.2.3.
MN;y;f;u;d is the moment capacity about the Y axis for the effective section. =
( fy·W,eff)
2. If M;y;s;d / MN;y;f;u;d > 1 and M;y;s;d / M;y;f;u;d ≤1 check equation 11.2-13 (given below):
M y ;s ;d
≤1
  2
  2Vz;s ;d  
M N ;y ;f ;u ;d + M N ;y ;u ;d − M N ;y ;f ;u ;d 1 −  − 1 
   Vz;u ;d  
 
7D.1.5 Clause 6.3 – Buckling resistance of members

The D-NA introduces a new clause 6.3.0, which in turns requires the checks as per clauses 12.1.2.2,
12.13.2 and 12.1.4.2 of NEN 6771 to be applied.
Clause 12.1.2.2 (NEN 6771)
This clause in NEN 6771 determines the relative torsional slenderness and is given as:
N c ;u ;d
λ θ, re =
FE ;θ
Where:
Nc;u;d = A·fy;d

A = area of section
f = the yield stress

y;d
F is the Euler-torsion formula
E;θ
This value of slenderness is to be used to calculate the modification factors used in section 6.3 of
EC-3.
Clause 12.1.3.2 (NEN 6771)
This clause works out the relative torsional-flexural buckling slenderness for compression members.
The relative torsional-flexural buckling slenderness is given as:
N c ;u ;d
λ tk , re =
FE ;tk
Where
Nc;u;d = A·fy;d
A = area of section
f = yield stress
y;d
F is the Euler torsional buckling strength
E;tk
Clause 12.1.4.2 (NEN 6771)
Buckling lengths of rotationally restrained bars with intermediate spring supports.
Note: STAAD.Pro does not allow for these end conditions, specifically. The effective length factors
may be used to accommodate this requirement.
7D.1.6 Clause 6.3.1.3 – Slenderness for flexural buckling

The Dutch NA requires the implementation of clause 12.1.1.3 and 12.1.5.3.2 of NEN 6770 and clause
12.1.1.3 of NEN 6771.
Clause 12.1.1.3 (NEN 6770)
This clause gives the equations to evaluate the effective lengths for various support conditions.
STAAD.Pro uses the effective length factor ‘K’ which allows the user to set/modify the effective
lengths for a member.

Clause 12.1.5.3.2 (NEN 6770)
This clause gives methods to evaluate the buckling length of lattice sections. We do not deal with
latticed section in the current version of STAAD.Pro. In any case the buckling length can be
adjusted using the ‘K’ factor.
Clause 12.1.1.3 (NEN 6771)
This clause again deals with working out the effective lengths of prismatic and non-prismatic rods.
Again, the ‘K’ factor in the current implementation of STAAD.Pro is adequate to cater for adjusting
the effective lengths as necessary.
7D.1.7 Clause 6.3.1.4 – Slenderness for torsional and torsional-flexural

buckling
The D-NA requires the implementation of clauses 12.1.2 and 12.1.3 of NEN 6770
Clause 12.1.2 (NEN 6770): Torsional stability
IPE, HEA, HEB & HEM sections and pipe sections do not need to be checked for torsional
instability.
If torsional checks need to be performed, they should be done according to 12.1.2 of NEN 6771.
Clause 12.1.2 (NEN 6771)
This clause gives the condition to check for torsion instability. The condition being:
N c ;s ;d
≤1
ω θ N c ;u ;d
Where:
N = the applied axial load

c;s;d
N = the axial capacity = A · f .
C;u;d y
σ θ ;d
ωθ =
fu ;d
Clause 12.1.3 (NEN 6770): Torsional flexural stability
Doubly symmetric sections need not be checked for torsional flexural instability. However, for I
sections that have rigid supports that is not along the axis of the section and any other sections will
need to be checked as per clause 12.1.3 of NEN 6771.

Clause 12.1.3 (NEN 6771)
This clause gives the condition to check for torsional flexural instability. The condition being:
N c ;s ;d
≤1
ωt ;k N c ;u ;d
Where:
N and N as in clause 12.1.2 above.

c;s;d c;u;d
7D.1.8 Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 – Lateral torsional buckling curves
Clause 6.3.2.2 – Lateral torsional buckling curves - general
The D-NA states that the values for the imperfection factor, αLT, to be used in equation 6.56 of EC-
3 are to be obtained from sTable 6.3 of EC-3. These are the values used by STAAD.Pro.
Clause 6.3.2.3 – Lateral torsional buckling curves for rolled sections or

equivalent welded sections
The D-NA states that:
1. The values for the:

l Imperfection factor αLT0 = 0.4 (used in equation 6.57 of EC-3)
l Β = 0.75 (used in equation 6.57 of EC-3)
These are the default values used by the program.
2. The buckling curves shall be selected as per Table 6.5.
3. The reduction factor, f, is given by
F = 1 – 0.5(1 - kc)[1 - 2x (λLT -0.8)2 ].
kc is a correction factor for moment distribution determined from Table 6.6. This value can
be specified or calculated by the program using the KC parameter. See "Design Parameters"
on page 265
The current implementation of STAAD.Pro conservatively uses a value of f = 1.0.
7D.1.9 Clause 6.33 – Uniform members in bending and axial

compression
The D-NA recommends the use of the method in Annex B of EC-3 to determine the values of kyy,
kyz, kzy and kzz to be used in 6.3.3 ( EC-3) checks. STAAD.Pro uses the method in Annex B.

Clause 12.3.1.2.3 (NEN 6770): Rotation/bending capacity
The Dutch NA also requires additional checks as per clause 12.3.1.2.3 of NEN 6770.
The checks given in this clause deals with additional checks for columns that form part of a
buttressed or non-butressed framework. The program uses the ESTIFF parameter with two
different values to identify the framework type:
Table 7D.1-Framework parameter ESTIFF values for the
Dutch NA
ESTIFF
Description
value
(default) Column part of a buttressed

framework. Selecting this value will internally
0
perform the checks as per section 1 of clause
12.3.1.2.3
Column is not part of a buttressed framework.

1 Selecting this value will internally perform the
checks as per section 2 of clause 12.3.1.2.3
These checks are described below:
1. For columns in buttressed frameworks the buckling length is to be taken based on either
l the system length or
l the distance between adjacent lateral supports
The following conditions should also be satisfied:
If Nc;s;d/ Npl;d < 0.15, no additional checks are required
If Nc;s;d/ Npl;d ≥ 0.15 and the steel grade is S235 or S 275 then
N c ;s ;d λy
+ ≤1
N p ;d 120
Where:
N is the axial load in the section

c;s;d
N = Axial capacity of section = A·f
pl;d y;d
λ = Slenderness of the section about the major axis ( Y-axis)
y
If Nc;s;d/ Npl;d ≥ 0.15 and the steel grade is S355 then
N c ;s ;d λy
+ ≤1
N p ;d 100
Where:

N = the axial load in the section

c;s;d
pl;d y;d
y
2. For columns that are not part of buttressed frameworks the following additional checks
need to be done:
If Nc;s;d/ Npl;d < 0.15, no additional checks are required
If Nc;s;d/ Npl;d ≥ 0.15 and the steel grade is S235 or S 275 then
N c ;s ;d λy
+ ≤1
N p ;d 100
Where:
N = the axial load in the section and

c;s;d
pl;d y;d
y
If Nc;s;d/ Npl;d ≥ 0.15 and the steel grade is S355 then
N c ;s ;d λy
+ ≤1
N p ;d 80

7D.1 Norwegian National Annex to EC3
Adds values from the Norwegian National Annex—titled NA to BS EN 1993-1-1:2005—for use with
Eurocode 3, or EN 1993-1-1:2005. The NA document makes small changes to the base document.

clauses from the Norwegian National Annex are:
7D.1.1 Clause 6.1(1) – General: Partial Safety Factors for buildings

EN 1993-1-1:2005 specifies the use of the partial safety factors to be used in for design as given in Cl.
6.1 of the code. These factors are γ , γ , and γ . EN 1993 provides default values for these factors.
M0 M1 M2
However, any National Annex is allowed to override these default values.
l Resistance of cross-sections - γ = 1.05

M0
l Resistance of members to instability - γ = 1.05
M1
l Resistance of cross sections to tension - γ = 1.25
M2
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the Norwegian-NA (NA
3 is specified).
Note: If any of these parameters are specified as 0, STAAD.Pro will ignore the user specified value
(i.e., 0) and use the default values as given above.
corresponding clauses in the Norwegian -NA.

7D.1 UK National Annex to EC3
Adds values from the UK National Annex - titled NA to BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 - for use with
Eurocode 3, or EN 1993-1-1:2005. The NA document makes small changes to the base document.
Note: Refer to the basic code (EC3) for a description of these clauses. The sections below refer to
the corresponding clauses in the UK-NA.
The following clauses are not implemented in STAAD.Pro:
Clause 6.3.2.4(1) B – Slenderness for flexural buckling

The UK NA specifies the value of λc0 for I, H channel or box section to be used in
equation 6.59 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 as 0.4. However, STAAD.Pro does not use this clause
for design per EC-3. Therefore, this clause is ignored for the UK National Annex.
Clause 6.3.2.4(2)B – Modification factor ‘kfl’
The value of the modification factor kfl to be used in equation 6.60 of BS EN 1993-1-1.
However, STAAD.Pro does not use this clause for design per EC-3. Therefore, this clause
is ignored for the UK National Annex.
The clauses/sections in EN 1993-1-1:2005 that have been dealt with in the UK National Annex
(hereafter referred to as the UK-NA) are:

M0 M1 M2
The partial safety factors will use the following values for the UK National Annex:

M0
M1
M2
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the UK-NA (NA 1 is
specified).
Caution: The GB1 parameter that is being used for compression checks in builds preceding this

EN 1993-1-1:2005. Hence, any legacy files that use GB1 parameter will indicate an error message
and the user will need to substitute GB1 with GM1 in line with EN 1993-1-1:2005.
7D.1.2 Clause 6.3.2.2 –Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors

for LTB checks
The UK-NA recommends the use of Table 6.3 and 6.4 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate the
imperfection factors for Lateral Torsional Buckling (LTB) checks.
The calculation of the LTB reduction factor χ , requires the calculation of the ‘Elastic Critical
LT
Buckling Moment’, Mcr. The UK National Annex does not specify a particular method to calculate
M . Hence the calculation of M has been based on the following NCCI documents:
cr cr
SN003a-EN-EU – Elastic critical moment for Lateral torsional Buckling:
This document provides a method to calculate ‘Mcr’ specifically for doubly symmetric sections only.
Hence only doubly symmetric sections will be considered for this method in the proposed
implementation.
The equation to evaluate M is given in the NCCI as:

cr
π 2EI s  2I (kL ) 2GI t 

M cr = C1
(kL )
2


( )
k
kw Is
w
+ 2
π EI s
+ (C 2z s )2 − C 2z s

C and C are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions of the
1 2
member. The NCCI provides values for C and C for the different cases as given in the tables below:
1 2

This NCCI considers three separate loading conditions:
l Members with end moments

l Members with transverse loading
l Members with end moments and transverse loading.

The implementation of EC3 in STAAD.Pro accounts for the loading condition and the bending
moment diagram through the CMM parameter. The first two loading conditions mentioned above
and its variants can be dealt with by using the existing values of the CMM parameter (i.e., 1 to 6).
Hence the appropriate values from this NCCI will be used for ‘C1’ and ‘C2’ coefficients depending
on the value of CMM specified. The default value of CMM is 1, which considers the member as a pin
ended member with UDL along its span. The user will also have the option to specify specific values
for C and C using the C1 and C2 parameters in the design input mode. See "Design Parameters"
1 2
on page 265
However, for cases with end moments and transverse loading, the NCCI provides graphs to evaluate
the C1 and C2 coefficients. It does not however, provide a set of equations for these graphs. However
the “end moments and transverse loading” condition cannot be currently specified in the design
input. Hence this implementation will introduce two new values for the CMM parameter viz.
CMM 7:Member with varying end moments and uniform loading.
CMM 8: Member with varying end moments and central point load.
For these two conditions, the UK National Annex (nor the NCCI) does not provide equations to
evaluate C1 and C2. Hence in STAAD.Pro the user will have to use the new ‘C1’ & ‘C2’ parameters to
input the required values for C1 & C2 to be used in calculating Mcr. For values of 7 or 8 for the
CMM parameter, the program will issue a warning if C1 and C2 have not been specified.
Note: If the NA parameter has not been specified, the program obtains the values of C1 and C2
from Annex F of DD ENV version of 1993-1-1:1992.
SN030a-EN-EU – Mono-symmetrical uniform members under bending and

axial compression:
This document provides a method to evaluate the elastic critical moment (Mcr) for uniform mono
symmetric sections that are symmetric about the weak axis. Hence for this implementation the
elastic critical moment for ‘Tee-Sections’ will be worked out using the method in this NCCI.
Note: Though this method could also be applicable to mono-symmetric built-up sections,
STAAD.Pro currently does not have a means to specify/identify a mono-symmetric built-up section.
Hence this implementation will use this method only for Tee-Sections. In any case, the actual LTB
capacity will still be worked out as per BS 5950-1 as in the current EC3 implementation.
The equation to evaluate M for mono symmetric sections is given as :

cr
π 2EI s  2I (k xL ) 2GI T  
M cr = C1
(k xL )
2


( )
kx
kw
w
Is
+ 2
π EI x
2
+ (C 2z e − C3z 1) − C 2z e − C3z 1 




The factors C , C , and C are dependent on the end conditions and loading criteria. This
1 2 3
implementation will consider C , C , and C as given in the tables below:
1 2 3

The CMM parameter (see section (i) above) specified during design input will determine the values
of C1, C2 and C3. The default value of CMM is 1, which considers the member as a pin ended
member with UDL along its span. This NCCI does not however consider the “end moments and
transverse loading” condition. The user however can use the new C1, C2 and C3 parameters to input
the required values for C1, C2 and C3 to be used in calculating Mcr. As described in section (i)
above, the user must use C1, C2 and C3 parameters along with CMM values of 7 and 8.
Both the NCCI documents mentioned above assume that the member under consideration is free
to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for the member ( k = kw = 1.0). The
current implementation of EC3 in STAAD takes into account of the end conditions using the CMN
parameter. A value of K = kw =1 is indicated by a value of CMN = 1.0 in the design input. Hence
the above methods will be used only for members which are free to rotate on plan and which have
no warping restraints, i.e., CMN = 1.0. For members with partial or end fixities (ie, CMN = 0.5 or
CMN = 0.7), the proposed implementation will fall back on to the method and coefficients in DD
ENV 1993-1-1:1992 – Annex F.
For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents) the proposed
implementation will use the method as per the DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 code.
The term ‘zg’ in the equation to calculate Mcr refers to the distance between the point of
application of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of the cross section. The
value of ‘zg’ is considered positive if the load acts towards the shear center and is negative if it acts
away from the shear center. By default, the program will assume that the load acts towards the

shear center at a distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear center. The user will be
allowed to modify this value by using the new ‘ZG’ parameter. Specifying a value of ZG = 0 in the
design input would indicate that the load acts exactly at the shear center of the section so that the
term ‘zg’ in the equation will have a value of zero.
7D.1.3 Clause 6.3.2.3(1) – LTB for rolled sections or equivalent welded

section
The UK-NA specifies different values for the λ and β factors to be used in equation 6.57 of BS
LT,0
EN 1993-1-1 for rolled and equivalent welded sections. The current implementation in STAAD.pro
does not differentiate between rolled and welded sections and uses the default values in BS EN
1993-1-1 for λLT,0 and β. The values specified in the UK-NA are:
l For rolled sections and hot-rolled & cold formed hollow sections:
λLT,0 = 0.4
β = 0.75
l For welded sections:
λLT,0 = 0.2
β = 1.00
The current implementation of STAAD.Pro uses the buckling curves based on Table 6.5 of BS EN
1993-1-1:2005. The UK-NA specifies different limits and buckling curves to be used in this clause as
given below:
Table 7D.1-Buckling curves to use with BS EN 1993-1-1:2005
Cross Section Limits Buckling
Curve
Rolled doubly symmetric I and H sections and h/b ≤ 2 b

hot-finished hollow sections
2.0 < h/b ≤ 3.1 c
h/b > 3.1 d
Angles (for moments in the major principle plane) d
All other hot-rolled sections d
Welded, doubly symmetric sections and cold- h/b ≤ 2 c

formed hollow sections
2.0 < h/b ≤ 3.1 d
This table again does not specify which buckling curve is to be used in case of welded doubly
symmetric sections with h/b ≥ 3.1 and welded non-doubly symmetric sections. Hence for these
cases the new implementation will still use the method specified in the base code as per clause
6.3.2.2(2).

7D.1.4 Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 — Calculation of LTB Reduction

factor, χ as per UK NA
LT
Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005), both give equations to evaluate the LTB reduction
factor χ to be used in eqn. 6.55 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.2 uses tables 6.3 and 6.4 to choose the buckling curve and the imperfection factors to be
used for calculating χ . Table 6.4 specifies the choice of buckling curves for “Rolled I Sections”,
LT
“Welded I Sections” and “Any other sections”. Cl 6.3.2.3 on the other hand uses tables 6.5 and 6.3 to
choose the buckling curves and imperfection factors. Table 6.5 however only deals with “Rolled I
Sections” and “Welded I Sections”.
Cl. 6.3.2.2 states “Unless otherwise specified, see 6.3.2.3, for bending members of constant cross
section the value of χ should be determined from...”. Hence in the implementation of EC3 (and
LT
the UK Annex) in STAAD.Pro, by default the program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3 to evaluate
χ . For any case that is not dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will consider Cl. 6.3.2.2 to
LT
evaluate χ .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the UK National Annex states that Table 6.5 in BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 should be replaced
with the table given in the NA (See section 4.3 of this document). Hence for all cases dealt with by
the table in the UK NA, this implementation will choose the buckling curves from the UK National
Annex. For any case that is not dealt with by the table in the UK NA, the program will use the
method given in Cl. 6.3.2.2 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
Hence for the following cross sections the program will use the Table in the UK NA for choosing a
buckling curve for LTB checks (when the UK NA has been specified):
l Rolled doubly symmetric I & H Sections

l Rolled doubly symmetric hollow sections (SHS, RHS, CHS)
l Angle Sections
l Any other rolled section
l Welded doubly symmetric sections with h/b < 3.1
For the following cross sections, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to evaluate
χLT
l Welded I & H Sections with h/b ≥ 3.1.
For any other type of cross section that is not dealt with by the National Annex or Cl.6.3.2.3, the
program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate χLT .
In any case the Elastic critical moment “Mcr” (used to evaluate the non dimensional slenderness)
will be worked out as given in section 4.2 of this document. Since the UK National Annex uses the
NCCIs mentioned in the sections above, this implementation will only consider end restraint
conditions corresponding to the CMN parameter=1.0 (See section 4.2 above). For all other cases of
the CMN parameter values, this implementation will use the method specified in Annex F of DD
ENV 1993-1-1:1992.

Note: If a National Annex has not been specified (i.e., NA parameter in the design input = 0), the
program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 only in the case of Rolled or welded I & H Sections. For all other
cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005. Also, I sections with plates will be
treated as built-up sections only if the section has been explicitly specified as a built-up section
(i.e., SBLT parameter = 1.0 in design input).
7D.1.5 Clause 6.3.2.3(2) – Modification factor, f, for LTB checks

The UK NA specifies the use of eqn. 6.58 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to evaluate the modification factor
‘f’ for the LTB reduction factor χ . To evaluate the modification factor BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 uses a
LT
correction factor ‘kc’ given by Table 6.6 in the code.
The UK-NA however, specifies that the correction factor ‘kc’ is to be obtained as below:
Kc = 1 / √C1, where C1 is to be obtained from the NCCI documents given in section 4.2 of this
document. The NCCI document SN003a-EN-EU specifies the values of C1 to be used in table 3.1 as
shown below. This proposed implementation will allow for the reduction factor based on the UK-
NA.

These values are for an end restraint factor of k=1 (ie CMN=1.0). Hence for all other values of CMN
(ie 0.7 or 0.5) this implementation will use the values of C1 from DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 Annex F.
The program will use a default value of 1.0 for ‘kc’. However the user can also input a custom value
of ‘kc’ by setting the design parameter ‘KC’ to the desired value. The user can also get the program
to calculate the value of ‘kc’ automatically by setting the value of the ‘KC’ parameter in the design
input to 0. This will cause the program to evaluate a value of C1 corresponding to the end
conditions and the Bending moment of the member and in turn calculate ‘kc’ as given in the NA.
To evaluate C1, the program will use the NCCI documents mentioned in section 4.2 of this
document.
7D.1.6 Clause 6.3.3(5) – Interaction factors kyy, kyz, kzy, and kzz
The UK-NA recommends that the method in Annex A or Annex B of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 can be
used to calculate the interaction factors for Cl. 6.3.3 checks in the case of doubly symmetric
sections. The proposed implementation will hence use equations in Annex B of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005
to calculate these interaction factors for doubly symmetric sections. The current implementation of
EC3 BS in STAAD.pro uses the method in Annex B.
However for non-doubly symmetric sections, the UK NA gives the option of using Annex B with
some modifications as given in the NA. (Cl. NA-3.2 of the UK NA). The UK NA requires additional
checks to be done to check for the maximum allowable values of λ and X to be used in equations
6.61 and 6.62 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
As per the UK NA, for non-doubly symmetric sections, the slenderness about the weak axis (λy in
STAAD) and the corresponding reduction factor χy should be taken as the values from the highest
values of slenderness (λ) among the flexural buckling slenderness (λy), torsional slenderness (λ )
T
and torsional-flexural slenderness (λ ) as given in Clauses 6.3.1.3 and 6.3.1.4 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
TF

Hence for non-doubly symmetric sections the program will calculate the critical non-dimensional
slenderness as:
λ = the maximum of either λ from Cl. 6.3.1.3 or λ from Cl. 6.3.1.4

y T
Af y
λT =
N cr
Where:
N = min (N ,N ).
cr CrT crTF
The UK NA or EC3 does not however specify a method to evaluate NCrT or NcrTF. Hence this
implementation will use the method specified in the NCCI document “SN001a-EN-EU: Critical
axial load for torsional and flexural torsional buckling modes” to calculate these. See section 4.9
below for details.
Note: The UK National Annex or EC3 does not deal with angle sections in specific and hence this
implementation will use the method used in the current EC3 implementation to deal with
slenderness of angle sections. In the current implementation this is done as per cl 4.7.10 of BS
5950. This proposed implementation will still use the same method for single and double angle
sections to evaluate the slenderness.
Clause NA 3.2 of the UK NA also requires that “Where the section is not an I Section or a hollow
section and is a class1 or class 2 section, it will be treated as a class 3 section for the purposes of this
clause”. Hence for all Class 1 or Class 2 cross sections that are NOT I, H, SHS, RHS or CHS sections,
the elastic properties will be used for the purposes of 6.3.3 checks.
7D.1.7 Clause 6.3.1.4 - Slenderness for torsional and torsional-flexural

buckling
Equations 6.52 and 6.53 of BS EN 1993-1-1:2005 are to be used to calculate the non-dimensional
slenderness λ , to be used for torsional and torsional-flexural buckling checks. BS EN 1993-1-1:2005
T
does not provide equations to calculate the elastic critical loads N and N (refer 6.3.14 of BS
cr,T,F cr,T
EN 1993-1-1:2005).
The NCCI document “SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional
buckling modes” provides methods to calculate the N and N factors and therefore these
cr,TF cr,T
methods are used to evaluate the elastic critical loads for the UK NA.
The critical axial load for Torsional buckling is evaluated as:
1  π EI w 
2
2 
Ncr, T = GI t +
io  I T2 
Where:
io2 = iy2 + iz2 + yo2 + z o2

7D.2 French National Annex to EC3
i and i are the radius of gyration about the Y-Y (weak axis) and Z-Z (strong axis)
y z
respectively.
The critical axial load for Torsional-Flexural buckling is evaluated as:
i o2  2 i y2 + i z2 
Ncr, TF = N cr, y + N cr, T − (Ncr, y + Ncr, T ) − 4Ncr, yN cr, T 
( )
2 i y2 + i z2  io
2

 
For details on these equations, refer to the NCCI document SN001a-EN-EU.

Adds values from the French National Annex - titled Annexe Nationale a la NF EN 1993-1-1:2005 -
for use with Eurocode 3, or EN 1993-1-1:2005. The NA document makes small changes to the base
document.

STAAD.Pro does not use this clause for design per EC-3. Therefore, this clause is ignored
for the French National Annex.
for the French National Annex.
the corresponding clauses in the French-NA.
The clauses/sections in EN 1993-1-1:2005 (hereafter referred to as EC-3) that have been dealt with in
the French National Annex (hereafter referred to as FR-NA) and that are relevant to the proposed
implementation are:
7D.2.1 Clause 3.2.1(1) - Material Properties

The material strengths (i.e., - steel grade strengths) to be used with NF EN 1993-1-1 are given in
Table 3.1 of the code. The French National Annex however, specifies a separate table (Table 3.1 NF)
for the yield and tensile strengths of steel grades. This new table replaces Table 3.1 in NF EN 1993-1-
1:2005. Table 3.1 NF excludes steel grades from standards EN 10210-1 and EN 10219-1 that are given in
EC-3.
STAAD.Pro uses the steel grades and values from the table given in the National Annex (i.e., - Table
3.1 NF). Table 3.1 NF is similar to table 3.1 in EC3, apart from the f values for S 355 and S355 W
u
grade steel.

Table 7D.2-Material strengths specified for use with the NF-NA

Nominal thickness, t, of the element (mm)
40 mm < t <= 80
Standard and grade of t 40 mm
mm
steel
f f f f
y u y u
(N/mm2) (N/mm2) (N/mm2) (N/mm2)
S 235 235 360 215 360
S 275 275 430 255 410

EN 10025-2
S 355 355 490 335 470
S 450 440 550 410 550
S 275 N/NL 275 390 255 370
S 355 N/NL 355 490 335 470

EN 10025-3
S 420 N/NL 420 520 390 520
S 460 N/NL 460 540 430 540
S 275 M/ML 275 370 255 360
S 355 M/ML 355 470 335 450

EN 10025-4
S 420 M/ML 420 520 390 500
S 460 M/ML 460 540 430 530
S 235 W 235 360 215 340

EN 10025-5
S 355 W 355 490 335 490
S 460
EN 10025-6 460 570 440 550
Q/QL/QL 1
If you specify a steel grade that is not given in the Annex Table 3.1 (NF) but is present in Table 3.1 of
EN 1993-1-1:2005, the program uses the values from Table 3.1 of EN 1993-1-1:2005. The appropriate
yield strength (f ) used is shown in the design output file.
y
7D.2.2 Clause 6.1(1) – General

M0 M1 M2
The partial safety factors will use the following values for the French National Annex:


M0
M1
M2
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the NF-NA (NA 4 is
specified).

for LTB checks
The French NA recommends the use of Table 6.3 and 6.4 of NF EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate the
The calculation of the LTB reduction factor χ , requires the calculation of the “Elastic Critical
LT
Buckling Moment”, M . The French NA gives a method to evaluate M in its “Annex MCR”. This
cr cr
implementation will make use of this method to evaluate Mcr. Annex MCR however deals with the
calculation of Mcr for doubly symmetric sections. Hence this implementation will use this method
only for doubly symmetric sections. For mono symmetric sections that are symmetric about the
minor axis (i.e Tee sections) this implementation will use the method from the NCCI document
SN030a-EN-EU as given in the section below. For any other type of section that is not dealt with by
the Annex, this implementation will use the method and tables given in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-
1-1:1992.
Annex MCR
This document provides a method to calculate M specifically for doubly symmetric sections only.
cr
Hence only doubly symmetric sections will be considered for this method in this implementation.
The equation to evaluate M is given as:

cr
π EI s 
2 2I (kL ) 2GI t 
M cr = C1 2
(kL ) 


( )
k
kw Is
w
+ 2
π EI s
+ (C 2z s )2 − C 2z s


C and C are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions. The NCCI
1 2
provides values for C and C for the different cases as given in Table1 and Table 2 of the Annex.
1 2
Table 1 deals with the condition of a simply supported member with end moments and the value of
C is determined by the end moment ratio (Refer to the NA for details). Clause 3.2 of the National
1
Annex however gives a formula to evaluate C as:
1
1
C1 =
0.325 + 0.423ψ + 0.252ψ 2
This formula however does not match the values given in Table 1 of the NA. Hence this
implementation will use the values of C1 from Table 1 if the end moment ration (ψ) is exactly equal
to the values of ψ in the table. For all other cases this implementation will calculate the value of C1
from equation (6) in the Annex.
The value of C2 will be determined from Table 2 of the Annex based on the loading and end
conditions (i.e the CMM parameter in STAAD).
The user will also have the option to specify specific values for C and C using the C1 and C2
1 2
parameters in the design input mode. See "Design Parameters" on page 265
The French NA considers three separate loading conditions:

The first two cases and its variants can be defined using with the existing CMM parameter values in
STAAD.Pro. However the third condition cannot be currently specified in the design input. Hence
this implementation will introduce two new values for CMM viz.
CMM 7:Member with varying end moments and uniform loading.
CMM 8: Member with varying end moments and central point load.
The load to moment ratio (μ) will then be used in the calculations will then be used to calculate
C1 and C2 as given in section 3.5 of Annex MCR (See Annex MCR in the NA for details).
This implementation will also introduce a new parameter ‘MU’ to be specified when using CMM =
7 or 8. The load to moment ratio (μ) to be used in the calculations is to be input using the new
‘MU’ parameter. This implementation will require that for the French National Annex if CMM = 7
or 8 has been specified, the user should also either specify a value for ‘MU’ or input the values for C1
and C2 using the ‘C1’ and/or ‘C2’ parameters directly.
Note: The new parameter MU will currently be applicable only in the context of the French NA.


axial compression:
symmetric sections that are symmetric about the weak axis. Hence for this implementation the
elastic critical moment for ‘Tee-Sections’ will be worked out using the method in this NCCI.
STAAD.Pro currently does not have a means to specify/identify a mono-symmetric built-up
section. Hence this implementation will use this method only for Tee-Sections.
The equation to evaluate M for mono symmetric sections is given as:

cr
π 2EI s  2I (k xL ) 2GI T  
M cr = C1
(k xL )
2


( )
kx
kw
w
Is
+ 2
π EI x
2
+ (C 2z e − C3z 1) − C 2z e − C3z 1 




1 2 3
1 2 3
The CMM parameter specified during design input will determine the values of C1, C2 and C3. The
default value of CMM is 0, which considers the member as a pin ended member with UDL along

its span. This NCCI does not however consider the “end moments and transverse loading”
condition. The user however can use the new ‘C1’, ‘C2’ and ‘C3’ parameters to input the required
values for C1, C2 and C3 to be used in calculating Mcr.
Note: If ‘MU’ as well as C1, C2 and C3 have been specified, the program will ignore MU and use
the user input values of C1, C2 and C3. The current implementation of EC3 in STAAD.Pro obtains
these values from Annex F of DD ENV version of 1993-1-1:1992.
Also, the NCCI document and Annex MCR of the FR-NA assume that the member under
consideration is free to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for the member( k =
kw=1 .i.e., CMN parameter =1.0). Hence the above methods will be used only for members which are
free to rotate on plan and which have no warping restraints. For members with partial or end
fixities (ie, CMN = 0.5 or CMN = 0.7), this implementation will fall back on to the method and
coefficients in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
For all cases that are not dealt with by the National Annex (or the NCCI documents) this
value of ‘zg’ is considered positive, if the load acts towards the shear center and is negative if it acts
shear center at a distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear center. The use will be
allowed to modify this value by using the ZG parameter. Specifying a value of ZG = 0 in the design
input would indicate that the load acts exactly at the shear center of the section so that the term
‘zg’ in the equation will have a value of zero.
Note: There is a separate method specified in the NCCI document “SN006a-EN-EU” to calculate
Mcr for cantilever beams. Again this document does not give any specific formulae to evaluate
the coefficients. Hence, this has not been implemented in STAAD.Pro.

section
The FR-NA provides equations to evaluate the λ and α factors given in clause 6.3.2.3
LT,0 LT
For rolled doubly symmetric sections use:
b
λLT , 0 = 0.2 + 0.1
h
b 2
αLT = 0.4 − 0.2 λLT ≥ 0
h
Note: Since EN 1993-1-1:2005 limits the value of λ to 0.4, STAAD.Pro limits λ to a

LT,0 LT,0
maximum value of 0.4.
For welded doubly symmetric sections use:

b
λLT , 0 = 0.3
h
b 2
αLT = 0.5 − 0.25 λLT ≥ 0
h
For other sections:
λLT,0 = 0.2
αLT = 0.76
And for all sections, β = 1.0
These equations and factors are then applied to equation 6.57 of NF EN 1993-1-1 to evaluate the
Lateral Torsional Buckling reduction factor χ .
LT

The French NA specifies that the modification factor is to be obtained as per the default method
given in EC-3. Hence this implementation will use the existing functionality to evaluate the
correction factor kc to be used in the modification factor f.
The program uses a default value of 1.0 for kc. However the user can also input a custom value of kc
by setting the design parameter KC to the desired value. You may instruct the program to calculate
the value of kc automatically by setting the value of the KC parameter in the design input to 0. This
will cause the program to evaluate kc from Table 6.6 of NF EN 1993-1-1:2005. This will correspond to
the end conditions and the bending moment of the member (i.e., the value of CMM parameter
specified).
For CMM = 7, the program will choose the value of kc to be either 0.90 or 0.91 based on the end
moment ratio.
For CMM = 8, the program will choose the value of kc to be either 0.77 or 0.82 based on the end
moment ratio.
An additional check will also be performed as given below:

1
χLT , mod ≤ 2
λ LT
The French Annex specifies that the modification factor is applicable only to members that are free
to rotate on plan (i.e., CMN 1.0). Hence for all other values of CMN, this implementation will ignore
‘f’ and hence will use χ = χ .
LT,mod LT
The French NA recommends the use of equations in Annex A of NF EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate
these interaction factors. STAAD.pro uses the method in Annex B for design per EC3 (without
National Annex). Therefore, the method in Annex A has been added into the program.

Note: The NA mentions that this method can be extended to singly symmetric I-Sections
(symmetric about the minor axis) if the elastic properties are used instead of the plastic
properties. However, since STAAD does not have a provision to specify such sections, this case will
not be considered for this implementation.
The NA also mentions that torsional flexural buckling needs to be taken into account in case of
mono symmetric sections. This is taken into account based on the method given in the NCCI
document “SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional buckling modes”.
See "Clause 6.3.1.4 - Slenderness for torsional and torsional-flexural buckling" on page 316
The NA also recommends a lower limit as given below for the term C in Table A.2 of Annex A:
mi,0
N Ed
Cmi, 0 ≥ 1 −
N cr ,i

buckling
Equations 6.52 and 6.53 of NF EN 1993-1-1:2005 are to be used to calculate the non-dimensional
slenderness λ , to be used for torsional and torsional-flexural buckling checks. NF EN 1993-1-1:2005
T
does not provide equations to calculate the elastic critical loads N and N (refer 6.3.14 of NF
cr,T,F cr,T
EN 1993-1-1:2005).
cr,TF cr,T
methods are used to evaluate the elastic critical loads for the French NA.
1  π EI w 
2
2 
Ncr, T = GI t +
io  I T2 
Where:
io2 = iy2 + iz2 + yo2 + z o2
y z
respectively.
i o2  2 i y2 + i z2 
(
2 i y2 + i z2 )  io
2

 

7D.3 Finnish National Annex to EC3

Adds values from the Finnish National Annex - titled National Annex to Standard SFS-EN 1993-1-1 -
document.

for the Finnish National Annex.
for the Finnish National Annex.
the corresponding clauses in the Finnish-NA.
the Finnish National Annex (hereafter referred to as SFS-NA) and that are relevant to the proposed
implementation are:

The material strengths (i.e., steel grade strengths) to be used with SFS-EN 1993-1-1 are given in
Table 3.1 of the code. These steel grade values are specified using the SGR parameter (See "Design
Parameters" on page 265).
The Finnish National Annex states in Cl. 3.1(2) that, apart from the steel grades specified in Table 3.1
of SFS EN 1993-1-1, the following steel grades can also be used:
l Steel grades S315MC, S355MC, S420MC and S460MC according to SFS-EN 10149-2
l Steel grades S260NC, S315NC, S355NC and S420NC according to SFS-EN 10149-3
These grades of steel can be specified by using the PY (Yield Strength) and FU (Ultimate Strength)
parameters in STAAD.Pro. Set these parameters to the respective values as given in SFS-EN 10149-
2/3 for the steel grades specified above. The choice of the buckling curve to be used is based on the
value of the SGR parameter specified. The output will include the appropriate yield strength used
for design.

M0 M1 M2
The partial safety factors will use the following values for the Finnish National Annex:


M0
M1
M2
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the SFS-NA (NA 5 is
specified).

for LTB checks
The Finnish NA recommends the use of Table 6.3 and 6.4 of SFS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate the
LT
Buckling Moment’, M . The Finnish National Annex does not specify a particular method to
cr
calculate M . Hence the calculation of M has been based on the following NCCI documents:
cr cr
1. SN003a-EN-EU – Elastic critical moment for Lateral torsional Buckling:
This document provides a method to calculate M specifically for doubly symmetric sections
cr
only. Hence only doubly symmetric sections will be considered for this method. The
equation to evaluate M is given in the NCCI as:
cr
π 2EI s  2I (kL ) 2GI t 

M cr = C1 2
(kL ) 


( )
k
kw Is
w
+ 2
π EI s
+ (C 2z s )2 − C 2z s

1 2
member. The NCCI provides values for C and C for the different cases as given in the tables
1 2
below:

Table 7D.3-Values of C for end

1
moment loading (for k=1)
ψ C
1
+1,00 1,00
+0,75 1,14
+0,50 1,31
+0,25 1,52
0,00 1,77
-0,25 2,05
-0,50 2,33
-0,75 2,57

STAAD.Pro accounts for the loading condition and the bending moment diagram through
the CMM parameter.
2. SN030a-EN-EU – Mono-symmetrical uniform members under bending

and axial compression:
This document provides a method to evaluate the elastic critical moment (M ) for uniform
cr
mono symmetric sections that are symmetric about the weak axis. Hence, the elastic critical
moment for ‘Tee-Sections’ will be worked out using the method in this NCCI.
STAAD.Pro currently does not have a means to specify/identify a mono-symmetric built-
up section. Hence this implementation will use this method only for Tee-Sections.

cr
2  2I (k xL ) 2GI T  
M cr = C1
π EI s
2
(k xL ) 


( )
kx
kw
w
Is
+ 2
π EI x
2
+ (C 2z e − C3z 1) − C 2z e − C3z 1 




1 2 3
1 2 3

The CMM parameter specified during design input will determine the values of C , C , and C .
1 2 3
The default value of CMM is 0, which considers the member as a pin ended member with
UDL along its span. This NCCI does not however consider the “end moments and transverse
loading” condition. You can use the C1, C2, and C3 parameters to input the required values
for C , C , and C to be used in calculating M .
1 2 3 cr
Note: If MU as well as C1, C2, and C3 have been specified, the program will ignore MU and
use the user input values of C1, C2, and C3. STAAD.Pro obtains these values from Annex F
of DD ENV version of 1993-1-1:1992.
to rotate on plan and that there are no warping restraints for the member ( k = kw = 1.0).
STAAD.Pro takes into account of the end conditions using the CMN parameter for EC3. A value of K
= kw =1 is indicated by a value of CMN = 1.0 in the design input. Hence the above methods will be
used only for members which are free to rotate on plan and which have no warping restraints (i.e.,
CMN = 1.0). For members with partial or end fixities (i.e., CMN = 0.5 or CMN = 0.7), this
implementation will fall back on to the method and coefficients in DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 – Annex
F.


section
The Finnish-NA provides the values for the terms λ and β factors given in clause 6.3.2.3(1) as
LT,0
follows:
For rolled doubly symmetric sections and hollow sections, use:
λ =0.4 and β = 0.75

LT,0
For welded doubly symmetric sections and hollow sections use:
λ = 0.2 and β = 1.0

LT,0
The Finnish NA specifies the following limits for choosing the buckling curves:
Table 7D.4-Selection of lateral torsional buckling curve for cross sections using
equation (6.57)
Cross-section Limit Bucklin
s g Curve
(constant cross-section)
Rolled double symmetric I- and H- sections and hot h/b ≤ b

finished hollow sections. 2
c
2<
h/b
<3.1
Welded double symmetric I- section and H- sections and h/b ≤ c

cold-formed hollow sections 2
d
2<
h/b <
3.1

The NA says that for all other cases the rules given in Cl 6.3.2.2 should be used. Hence even for
rolled or welded doubly symmetric sections with h/b ratio ≥ 3.1, this implementation will resort to
checks as per clause 6.3.2.2.
These equations and factors are then applied to equation 6.57 of SFS-EN 1993-1-1 to evaluate the
LT

factor, χ as per Finnish NA
LT
factor χ to be used in eqn. 6.55 of SFS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
LT
LT
LT
the Finnish Annex) in STAAD.Pro: by default the program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3 to
evaluate χ . For any case that is not dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will consider Cl. 6.3.2.2
LT
to evaluate χ .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the Finnish National Annex gives equations to evaluate the imperfection factors to be
used for various section types (See "Clause 6.3.2.2 –Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors
for LTB checks" on page 318 ). Hence for all cases dealt with by the equations in the Finnish NA,
this implementation will use Cl 6.3.2.3 to evaluate χ .
LT
program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate χ .
LT
In any case, the elastic critical moment, Mcr, (used to evaluate the non dimensional slenderness)
will be evaluated as previously given. Since this implementation uses the NCCIs mentioned in the
sections above, only end restraint conditions corresponding to the CMN parameter=1.0 (See "Clause
6.3.2.2 –Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for LTB checks" on page 318 ) will be
considered. For all other cases of the CMN parameter values, this implementation will use the
method specified in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.

7D.4 Polish National Annex to EC3

STAAD.Pro uses the value of the modification factor f = 1.0 as given in the Finnish NA.
The Finnish NA recommends the use of equations in Annex A or Annex B of SFS-EN 1993-1-1 to
calculate these interaction factors. STAAD.Pro uses the method in Annex B by default. This
implementation of the Finnish NA will also use Annex B for Cl.6.3.3 checks.

buckling
Equations 6.52 and 6.53 of SFS EN 1993-1-1:2005 are to be used to calculate the non-dimensional
slenderness λ , to be used for torsional and torsional-flexural buckling checks. SFS EN 1993-1-1:2005
T
does not provide equations to calculate the elastic critical loads N and N (refer 6.3.14 of SFS
cr,T,F cr,T
EN 1993-1-1:2005).
cr,TF cr,T
methods are used to evaluate the elastic critical loads for the Finnish NA.
1  π EI w 
2
Ncr, T = GI t + 
i o2  I T2 
Where:
io2 = iy2 + iz2 + yo2 + z o2
y z
respectively.
i o2  2 i y2 + i z2 
(
2 i y2 + i z2 )  io
2

 

Adds values from the Polish National Annex - titled National Annex to Standard PN-EN 1993-1-1 -
document.


for the Polish National Annex.
for the Polish National Annex.
the corresponding clauses in the Polish-NA.
the Polish National Annex (hereafter referred to as PN-NA) and that are relevant to the proposed
implementation are:

The material strengths (i.e., steel grade strengths) to be used with PN-EN 1993-1-1 are given in Table
3.1 of the code. The Polish National Annex states in Cl. 3.1(2) that the steel grades to be used will be
based on Table 3.1 of PN EN 1993-1-1. These steel grade values are specified using the SGR parameter
(See "Design Parameters" on page 265).

M0 M1 M2
The partial safety factors will use the following values for the Polish National Annex:

M0
M1
l Resistance of cross sections to tension, γ = minimum of 1.1 or 0.9 x f /f
M2 u y
Where:
f is the ultimate steel strength

u
f is the yield strength of steel
y
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the PN-NA (NA 6 is
specified).


for LTB checks
The Polish NA recommends the use of Table 6.3 and 6.4 of PN EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate the
LT
Buckling Moment’, M . The Polish National Annex does not specify a particular method to
cr
calculate M . Hence the calculation of M has been based on the following NCCI documents:
cr cr
1. SN003a-EN-EU – Elastic critical moment for Lateral torsional Buckling:
This document provides a method to calculate M specifically for doubly symmetric sections
cr
only. Hence only doubly symmetric sections will be considered for this method. The
equation to evaluate M is given in the NCCI as:
cr
π 2EI s  2I (kL ) 2GI t 

M cr = C1
(kL )
2


( )
k
kw Is
w
+ 2
π EI s
+ (C 2z s )2 − C 2z s

1 2
member. The NCCI provides values for C and C for the different cases as given in the tables
1 2
below:

1
ψ C
1
+1,00 1,00
+0,75 1,14
+0,50 1,31

ψ C
1
+0,25 1,52
0,00 1,77
-0,25 2,05
-0,50 2,33
-0,75 2,57

STAAD.Pro accounts for the loading condition and the bending moment diagram through
the CMM parameter.
2. SN030a-EN-EU – Mono-symmetrical uniform members under bending

and axial compression:
This document provides a method to evaluate the elastic critical moment (M ) for uniform
cr
mono symmetric sections that are symmetric about the weak axis. Hence, the elastic critical
moment for ‘Tee-Sections’ will be worked out using the method in this NCCI.
STAAD.Pro currently does not have a means to specify/identify a mono-symmetric built-
up section. Hence this implementation will use this method only for Tee-Sections.

cr
π 2EI s  2I (k xL ) 2GI T  
M cr = C1
(k xL )
2


( )
kx
kw
w
Is
+ 2
π EI x
2
+ (C 2z e − C3z 1) − C 2z e − C3z 1 




1 2 3
1 2 3

The CMM parameter specified during design input will determine the values of C , C , and C .
1 2 3
The default value of CMM is 0, which considers the member as a pin ended member with
UDL along its span. This NCCI does not however consider the “end moments and transverse
loading” condition. You can use the C1, C2, and C3 parameters to input the required values
for C , C , and C to be used in calculating M .
1 2 3 cr
Note: If MU as well as C1, C2, and C3 have been specified, the program will ignore MU and
use the user input values of C1, C2, and C3. STAAD.Pro obtains these values from Annex F
of DD ENV version of 1993-1-1:1992.
F.


section
The Polish-NA provides the values for the terms λ and β factors given in clause 6.3.2.3(1) as
LT,0
follows:
For all sections, use:
λ =0.4 and β = 0.75

LT,0
The Polish NA specifies the use of uses table 6.5 to work out the buckling curves for use in Cl.
6.3.2.3. Hence table 6.5 in PN-EN 1993-1-1 will be used for this.
These equations and factors are then applied to equation 6.57 of PN-EN 1993-1-1 to evaluate the
LT

factor, χ as per Finnish NA
LT
factor χ to be used in eqn. 6.55 of PN EN 1993-1-1:2005.
LT
LT
LT
the Finnish Annex) in STAAD.Pro: by default the program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3 to
LT
to evaluate χ .
LT

Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the Finnish National Annex gives equations to evaluate the imperfection factors to be
used for various section types (See "Clause 6.3.2.2 –Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors
for LTB checks" on page 318 ). Hence for all cases dealt with by the equations in the Finnish NA,
this implementation will use Cl 6.3.2.3 to evaluate χ .
LT
LT
In any case, the elastic critical moment, M , (used to evaluate the non dimensional slenderness)
cr

STAAD.Pro uses the value of the modification factor f as per eqn 6.58 of PN-EN 1993-1-1. The
correction factor ‘kc’ will be evaluated as:
kc = √(CmLT)
Where:
C is the equivalent uniform moment factor from table B.3 of PN-EN 1993-1-1.
mLT
C is evaluated based on the end conditions of the member and the shape of the
mLT
bending moment diagram. However, if the KC parameter has been used, then the
program will use the specified value.
The Polish NA recommends the equations in Annex B of PN-EN 1993-1-1 to calculate these
interaction factors. The current implementation of EC3 BS in STAAD.pro uses the method in
Annex B by default. The proposed implementation of the Polish NA will also use Annex B for
Cl.6.3.3 checks.
The Polish NA also gives two additional simplified checks. This implementation will provide for
these additional checks as well. However as they are intended as optional checks, by default, the
program will not perform these checks. However, the user can invoke these checks by using the PLG
parameter. See "Design Parameters" on page 265

If the value of the PLG parameter is set to 1, the following two checks will be performed as per Cl.
NA.20.(2) and NA.20(3) respectively:
l Cl. NA.20.(2): The following condition will be checked
n/ χ and + C m /χ + C mz m with ≤ 1- Δ (I = y or z)
my y LT 0
Where:
n = N /N
Ed Rd
m = max M (+ Δ M )/M ; m = max M (+ Δ M )/M
y y,Ed y, Ed y, Rd z ,Z Ed , Ed Z Rd,
χ and –buckling factor,
χ - LTB factor
LT
C - moment factor from table B 3 of PN EN 1993-1-1,
m
Δ -correction factor (estimation of maximum reduction) and will be worked
0
out as:
Δ = 0,1 + 0,2 (w – 1), przy czym w = W /W , or

0 i i pl,i el,i
Δ = 0,1 – in case of class 3 and 4 sections.
0
l Cl. NA.20.(3): This condition will only be checked for circular hollow sections.
n/χ + [(k m )2 + (C m )2] 1/2 ≤ 1 (i,j =y,z)

i ii i mj j
Where:
k - the interaction factor from table B.1 of PN-EN 1993-1-1
and n, m, Cmj are as above.
If the PLG parameter has been set to 1, the maximum among the following ratios will be taken as
being critical for Cl 6.3.3:
6.3.3: Eqn6.61
6.3.3: Eqn6.62
NA.20(2) and
NA.20(3)
If however PLG has been set to 0 (or not specified at all), the program will ignore the last two
checks in the list above.

buckling
Equations 6.52 and 6.53 of PN EN 1993-1-1:2005 are to be used to calculate the non-dimensional
slenderness λ , to be used for torsional and torsional-flexural buckling checks. PN EN 1993-1-1:2005
T

7D.5 Singaporean National Annex to EC3
does not provide equations to calculate the elastic critical loads N and N (refer 6.3.14 of PN
cr,T,F cr,T
EN 1993-1-1:2005).
cr,TF cr,T
methods are used to evaluate the elastic critical loads for the Polish NA.
1  π EI w 
2
Ncr, T = GI t + 
i o2  I T2 
Where:
io2 = iy2 + iz2 + yo2 + z o2
y z
respectively.
i o2  2 i y2 + i z2 
(
2 i y2 + i z2 )  io
2

 

Adds values from the Singaporean National Annex - titled National Annex to Standard SS-EN 1993-
1-1 - for use with Eurocode 3, or EN 1993-1-1:2005. The NA document makes small changes to the
base document.
the corresponding clauses in the Singaporean-NA.

The SINGAPORE NA specifies the value of λc0 for I, H channel or box section to be used
in equation 6.59 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005 as 0.4. However, STAAD.Pro does not use this
clause for design per EC-3. Therefore, this clause is ignored for the Singaporean National
Annex.
The value of the modification factor kfl to be used in equation 6.60 of SS EN 1993-1-1.
However, STAAD.Pro does not use this clause for design per EC-3. Therefore, this clause
is ignored for the Singaporean National Annex.

the Singaporean National Annex (hereafter referred to as SS-NA) and that are relevant to the
proposed implementation are:
7D.5.1 Clause 6.1 – General


M0
M1
M2
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the SS-NA (NA 7 is
specified)..
Note: If any of these parameters have been specified by the user as ‘0’, STAAD.Pro will ignore the
specified value and use the default values as given above.

for LTB checks
The Singaporean NA recommends the use of Table 6.3 and 6.4 of NF EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate
the imperfection factors for Lateral Torsional Buckling (LTB) checks.
The calculation of the LTB reduction factor X , requires the calculation of the ‘Elastic Critical
LT
Buckling Moment’, Mcr. The Singaporean National Annex does not specify a particular method to
calculate Mcr. Hence the calculation of Mcr has been based on the following NCCI documents:
SN003a-EN-EU – Elastic critical moment for Lateral torsional Buckling
This document provides a method to calculate ‘Mcr’ specifically for doubly symmetric sections only.
Hence only doubly symmetric sections will be considered for this method. The equation to evaluate
Mcr is given in the NCCI as:
2  2I (kL ) 2GI t 
M cr = C1
π EI
2
(kL ) 

( )
k
kw I
w
+ 2
π EI
2 
+ (C2Zg ) − C 2Zg 


C1 and C2 are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions of the
member. The NCCI provides values for C1 and C2 for the different cases as given in the tables
below:


1
ψ C
1
+1,00 1,00
+0,75 1,14
+0,50 1,31
+0,25 1,52
0,00 1,77
-0,25 2,05
-0,50 2,33
-0,75 2,57

STAAD.Pro accounts for the loading condition and the bending moment diagram through the CMM
parameter.

axial compression:
symmetric sections that are symmetric about the weak axis. Hence, the elastic critical moment for
‘Tee-Sections’ will be evaluated using the method in this NCCI.

cr
π 2EI z  2I (k xL ) 2GI T 

M cr = C1
(k xL )

2

( )
kx
kw
w
I
+ 2
π EI z
2
+ (C2zg − C3z 1) − C2zg − C3z 1 



The factors C1, C2 and C3 are dependent on the end conditions and loading criteria. This
implementation will consider C1, C2 and C3 as given in the tables below:
The CMM parameter specified during design input will determine the values of C1, C2 and C3. The
default value of CMM is 0, which considers the member as a pin ended member with UDL along
its span. This NCCI does not however consider the “end moments and transverse loading”
condition. The user however can use the new ‘C1’, ‘C2’ and ‘C3’ parameters to input the required
values for C1, C2 and C3 to be used in calculating Mcr.
the user input values of C1, C2 and C3. STAAD.Pro obtains these values from Annex F of DD ENV
version of 1993-1-1:1992.
F.


section
The Singaporean NA specifies different values for the λ and β factors to be used in equation 6.57
LT,0
of SS EN 1993-1-1 for rolled and equivalent welded sections. STAAD.Pro does not differentiate
between rolled and welded sections and uses the default values in SS EN 1993-1-1 for λ and β.
LT,0
The values specified in the Singapore NA are:
l For rolled sections and hot-rolled & cold formed hollow sections:
λLT,0 = 0.4
β = 0.75
l For welded sections:
λLT,0 = 0.2
β = 1.00
STAAD.Pro uses the buckling curves based on Table 6.5 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005. The Singaporean-NA
provides the values for the terms λ and β factors given in clause 6.3.2.3(1) as follows:
LT0
Table 7D.7-Buckling curves to use with SS-EN 1993-1-1:2005
Curve
Rolled doubly symmetric I and H sections and h/b ≤ 2 b

hot-finished hollow sections
2.0 < h/b ≤ 3.1 c
h/b > 3.1 d
Angles (for moments in the major principle plane) d


Curve
All other hot-rolled sections d
Welded, doubly symmetric sections and cold- h/b ≤ 2 c

formed hollow sections
2.0 < h/b ≤ 3.1 d
Note: This table does not specify which buckling curve is to be used in case of welded doubly
symmetric sections with h/b ≥ 3.1 and welded non-doubly symmetric sections. Hence for these
cases the new implementation will still use the method specified in the base code as per clause
6.3.2.2(2).

factor, χ as per Singaporean NA
LT
Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005) both give equations to evaluate the LTB reduction
factor χ to be used in eqn. 6.55 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
LT
LT
LT
the Singaporean Annex) in STAAD.Pro: by default the program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3 to
LT
to evaluate χ .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the Singaporean National Annex states that Table 6.5 in SS EN 1993-1-1:2005 should be
replaced with the table given in the NA (See section 4.3 of this document). Hence for all cases dealt
with by the table in the Singaporean NA, this implementation will choose the buckling curves from
the Singaporean National Annex. For any case that is not dealt with by the table in the Singaporean
NA, the program will use the method given in Cl. 6.3.2.2 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
For the following cross sections, the program will use the Table in the Singaporean NA for choosing
a buckling curve for LTB checks (when the SS EN has been specified):

l Angle Sections

For the following cross sections, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to evaluate
χ
LT
LT
In any case, the elastic critical moment, M , (used to evaluate the non dimensional slenderness)
cr
will be evaluated as given above. Since this implementation uses the NCCIs mentioned in the
sections above, only end restraint conditions corresponding to the CMN parameter=1.0 (See section
above) will be considered. For all other cases of the CMN parameter values, this implementation
will use the method specified in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.

The Singaporean NA specifies the use of Equation 6.58 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to evaluate the
modification factor ‘f’ for the LTB reduction factor χ . To evaluate the modification factor SS EN
LT
1993-1-1:2005 uses a correction factor ‘kc’ given by Table 6.6 in the code.
The Singaporean-NA however, specifies that the correction factor ‘kc’ is to be obtained as below:
Kc = 1 / √C1
Where:
C is to be obtained from the NCCI documents as previously described (See "Clause

1
6.3.2.2 –Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for LTB checks" on page 332).
The NCCI document SN003a-EN-EU specifies the values of C1 to be used in table 3.1
as shown below. The current implementation does not account for the K factor and
c
conservatively uses a reduction factor equal to 1. The program allows for the reduction
factor based on the Singaporean-NA.
These values are for an end restraint factor of k = 1 (i.e., design parameter CMN = 1.0). Hence for all
other values of CMN (i.e., 0.7 or 0.5) this implementation will use the values of C from DD ENV
1
1993-1-1:1992 Annex F.
The program will use a default value of 1.0 for K . However, you can also input a custom value of K
c c
by setting the design parameter KC to the desired value. If the KC parameter in the design input is
set to 0, then the program will automatically calculate its value. This will cause the program to
evaluate a value of C corresponding to the end conditions and the Bending moment of the
1
member and in turn calculate K as given in the NA. To evaluate C , the program will use the NCCI
c 1
documents as previously described.

The Singaporean NA recommends the methods in either Annex A or Annex B of SS-EN 1993-1-1 to
calculate these interaction factors. The current implementation of EC3 BS in STAAD.pro uses the
method in Annex B by default. The proposed implementation of the Singaporean NA will also use
Annex B for Cl.6.3.3 checks.
However for non-doubly symmetric sections, the Singaporean NA gives the option of using Annex
B with some modifications as given in the NA. (Cl. NA-3.2 of the Singaporean NA). The
Singaporean NA requires additional checks to be done to check for the maximum allowable values
of λ and X to be used in equations 6.61 and 6.62 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
As per the Singaporean NA, for non-doubly symmetric sections, the slenderness about the weak axis
(λy in STAAD) and the corresponding reduction factor χy should be taken as the values from the
highest values of slenderness (λ) among the flexural buckling slenderness (λy), torsional slenderness
(λT) and torsional-flexural slenderness (λTF) as given in Clauses 6.3.1.3 and 6.3.1.4 of SS EN 1993-1-
1:2005. Hence for non-doubly symmetric sections the program will calculate the critical non-
dimensional slenderness as:
λ = the maximum of either λ from Cl 6.3.1.3 or λ from Cl 6.3.1.4

y T
Where:
A ⋅f y
λT =
N cr
Ncr = min (NCrT, NcrTF).
The Singaporean NA or EC3 does not, however, specify a method to evaluate N or N .

CrT crTF
Therefore, the program uses the method specified in the NCCI document “SN001a-EN-EU: Critical
axial load for torsional and flexural torsional buckling modes” to calculate these. See "Clause 6.3.1.4
- Slenderness for torsional and torsional-flexural buckling" on page 339.
Note: The Singaporean National Annex or EC3 does not deal with angle sections in specific and
hence this implementation will use the method used in the current EC3 implementation to deal
with slenderness of angle sections. In the current implementation this is done as per cl 4.7.10 of
BS 5950. This proposed implementation will still use the same method for single and double
angle sections to evaluate the slenderness.
Clause NA 3.2 of the Singaporean NA also requires that “Where the section is not an I Section or a
hollow section and is a class1 or class 2 section, it will be treated as a class 3 section for the purposes
of this clause”. Hence, for all Class 1 or Class 2 cross sections that are not I, H, SHS, RHS or CHS
sections, the elastic properties will be used for the purposes of 6.3.3 checks.

7D.6 Belgian National Annex to EC3

buckling
Equations 6.52 and 6.53 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005 are to be used to calculate the non-dimensional
slenderness parameter, λ , to be used for torsional and torsional-flexural buckling checks. The SS
T
EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not provide equations to calculate the elastic critical loads N and N
cr,T,F cr,T
(refer 6.3.14 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005). Therefore, the NCCI document “SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial
load for torsional and flexural torsional buckling modes” provides methods to calculate the N
cr,T,F
and N factors and hence will to be included in this implementation of the Singaporean NA.
cr,T
1  π EI w 
2
Ncr, T = GI t + 
i o2  I T2 
Where:
io2 = iy2 + iz2 + yo2 + z o2
y z
respectively.
i o2  2 i y2 + i z2 
(
2 i y2 + i z2 )  io
2

 
The program will only consider Channel Sections and Tee- sections while working out the critical
torsional and Flexural Torsional buckling loads as per Cl 6.3.1.4.

Adds values from the Belgian National Annex—titled National Annex to Standard NBN-EN 1993-1-
1—for use with Eurocode 3, or EN 1993-1-1:2005. The NA document makes small changes to the base
document.

for the Belgian National Annex.
for the Belgian National Annex.

the corresponding clauses in the NBN-NA.
the Belgian National Annex (hereafter referred to as NBN-NA) and that are relevant to the proposed
implementation are:

M0 M1 M2
The partial safety factors will use the following values for the Belgian National Annex:

M0
M1
M2
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the PN-NA (NA 8 is
specified).

for LTB checks
The NBN-NA recommends the use of Table 6.3 and 6.4 of EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate the
The calculation of the LTB reduction factor χ , requires the calculation of the Elastic Critical
LT
Buckling Moment, M . The NBN-NA gives a method to calculate M in Annex D, which is used by
cr cr
STAAD.Pro. Annex D, however, only deals with the calculation of M for doubly symmetric
cr
sections and mono symmetric sections that are symmetric about the minor axis (i.e, Tee sections).
For any other type of section that is not dealt with by Annex D, STAAD.Pro uses the method and
tables given in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992:
Doubly symmetric sections
Annex D of NBN-NA provides equation used to calculate M specifically for doubly symmetric
cr
sections:

2  2I (kL ) 2GI t 
M cr = C1
π EI
(kL )


2

( )
k
kw I
w
+ 2
π EI
2 
+ (C2Zg ) − C 2Zg 


C & C are factors that depend on the end conditions and the loading conditions. The Annex
1 2
provides values for C & C for the different cases as given in Table1 and Table 2 of the Annex. Table
1 2
1 deals with the condition of a simply supported member with end moments and the value of C is
1
determined by the end moment ratio (Refer to the NA for details). Clause 3.2 of the National
Annex however gives a formula to calculate C as:
1
C1 = 1.77 - 1.04ψ + 0.27ψ2 ≤ 2.60
The value of C2 is determined based on the Table 2 of the Annex, based on the loading and end
conditions as specified using the CMM parameter.
This NBN-NA considers three separate loading conditions:

parameter.
Mono-symmetric sections with symmetry about their weak axis
Annex D of NBN-NA also provides a method to evaluate the elastic critical moment, M , for
cr
uniform mono symmetric sections that are symmetric about the weak axis. Hence for this
implementation the elastic critical moment for Tee-Sections is evaluated using the method in this
Annex.

cr
2  2I (k xL ) 2GI T 
M cr = C1
π EI z 
2
(k xL ) 

( )
kx
kw
w
I
+ 2
π EI z
2
+ (C2zg − C3z 1) − C2zg − C3z 1 


1 2 3
implementation will consider C1, C2 and C3 as given in the tables below:

Table 7D.8-Critical moment coefficients for singly symmetric sections with end moments
End Moments and Support Bending moment k Value of coefficients
z
Conditions diagram
C C
1 3
ψ ≤0 ψ >0
f f
ψ = +1 1.0 1.00 1.000
0.5 1.05 1.019
ψ = +3/4 1.0 1.14 1.000
0.5 1.19 1.017
ψ = +1/2 1.0 1.31 1.000
0.5 1.37 1.000
ψ = +1/4 1.0 1.52 1.000
0.5 1.60 1.000
ψ=0 1.0 1.77 1.000
0.5 1.86 1.000
ψ = -1/4 1.0 2.06 1.000 0.850
0.5 2.15 1.000 0.650
ψ = -1/2 1.0 2.35 1.000 1.3 - 1.2ψ

f
0.5 2.42 0.950 0.77 - ψ

f
ψ = -3/4 1.0 2.60 1.000 0.55 - ψ

f
0.5 2.45 0.850 0.35 - ψ

f
ψ = -1 1.0 2.60 -ψ -ψ
f f
0.5 2.45 0.125 - -0.125 -

0.7ψ 0.7ψ
f f
Note: According to Section 3(1): C2 zg = 0

Table 7D.9-Value of coefficients

Load and support conditions Bending moment diagram k Value of coefficients
z
C C C
1 2 3
1.0 1.12 0.45 0.525
0.5 0.97 0.36 0.478
1.0 1.35 0.59 0.411
0.5 1.05 0.48 0.338
1.0 1.04 0.42 0.562
0.5 0.95 0.31 0.539
The CMM parameter specified during design input will determine the values of C1, C2, and C3. The
default value of CMM is 0, which considers the member as a pin ended member with uniformly
distributed load (UDL) along its span. This NCCI does not however consider the “end moments
and transverse loading” condition. The user however can use the new ‘C1’, ‘C2’ and ‘C3’ parameters
to input the required values for C1, C2 and C3 to be used in calculating Mcr.
version of 1993-1-1:1992.
F.
Note: The program does not consider the case of cantilevers.


section
The NBN-NA recommends the use of the values specified in EN 1993-1-1 for the LTB factors λ
LT0
and β. However it gives two different sets of values for λ & β based on two different conditions
LT0
as give below:
1. If M is determined by considering the properties of the gross cross section and the lateral
cr
restraints, the following values are used:
λ =0.2 and β = 1.0

LT0
2. If M is determined by ignoring the lateral restraints, the following values are used:
cr
λ =0.4 and β = 0.75
LT0
The program evaluates which factors to use based on the CMN parameter. If CMN = 1.0 (default),
then the program assumes the restraints are ignored and the second set of values is used for λ
LT0
and β. If CMN = 0.5, then the first set of λ and β values is used.
LT0
These factors are then applied to equation 6.57 of NBN-EN to evaluate the Lateral Torsional
Buckling reduction factor χ .
LT

factor, χ as per Belgium NA
LT
Clauses 6.3.2.2 and 6.3.2.3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005) both give equations to evaluate the LTB reduction
factor χ to be used in eqn. 6.55 of NBN-EN 1993-1-1:2005.
LT
LT
LT
the Belgian Annex) in STAAD.Pro: by default the program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3 to evaluate
χ . For any case that is not dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will consider Cl. 6.3.2.2 to
LT
evaluate χ .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the Belgian National Annex gives equations to evaluate the imperfection factors to be
used for various section types. (See "Clause 6.3.2.3(1) – LTB for rolled sections or equivalent welded
section" on page 344 ). Hence for all cases dealt with by the equations in the NBN-NA, this
implementation will use Cl 6.3.2.3 to evaluate χ .
LT
LT

In any case, the elastic critical moment,Mcr, (used to evaluate the non dimensional slenderness)
will be evaluated as given above. Since this implementation uses the NCCIs mentioned in the
6.3.2.3(1) – LTB for rolled sections or equivalent welded section" on page 344 ) will be considered.
For all other cases of the CMN parameter values, this implementation will use the method specified
in Annex F of DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992.
You can override the default behavior and specify the clause that is to be used for LTB checks. This
can be specified using the MTH design parameter (See "Design Parameters" on page 265).
cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of NBN-EN 1993-1-1:2005. Also, I sections with plates will be

The Belgian NA specifies that the modification factor is to be obtained as per the default method
given in EC-3. Hence the proposed implementation will use the existing functionality to work out
the correction factor ‘kc’ to be used in the modification factor f.
The program uses a default value of 1.0 for ‘kc’. However the user can also input a custom value of
‘kc’ by setting the design parameter ‘KC’ to the desired value. The user can also get the program to
calculate the value of ‘kc’ automatically by setting the value of the ‘KC’ parameter in the design
input to 0. This will cause the program to work out ‘kc’ from table 6.6 of NBN EN 1993-1-1:2005.
This will correspond to the end conditions and the bending moment of the member (i.e the value
of CMM parameter specified).
l For CMM = 7 the program will choose the value of ‘kc’ to be either 0.90 or 0.91 based on the
end moment ratio.
l For CMM = 8 the program will choose the value of ‘kc’ to be either 0.77 or 0.82 based on the
end moment ratio.
An additional check will also be performed as given below:

1
χLT , mod ≤ 2
λ LT
The NBN-NA recommends the equations in Annex A of NBN-EN 1993-1-1 to calculate these
interaction factors.
The NA also mentions that torsional flexural buckling needs to be taken into account in case of
mono symmetric sections. Torsional flexural buckling will need to be taken into account based on
the method given in the NCCI document “SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and
flexural torsional buckling modes”. See section below for details.

7D.7 Malaysian National Annex to EC3
The NA also recommends a lower limit as given below for the term C in table A.2 of Annex A:
mi,0
N Ed
Cmi, 0 ≥ 1 −
N cr ,i

buckling
Equations 6.52 and 6.53 of NBN-EN 1993-1-1:2005 are to be used to calculate the non-dimensional
slenderness parameter, λ , to be used for torsional and torsional-flexural buckling checks. The
T
NBN-EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not provide equations to calculate the elastic critical loads N and
cr,T,F
N (refer 6.3.14 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005). Therefore, the NCCI document “SN001a-EN-EU: Critical
cr,T
axial load for torsional and flexural torsional buckling modes” provides methods to calculate the
N and N factors and hence will to be included in this implementation of the Belgian NA.
cr,T,F cr,T
1  π EI w 
2
Ncr, T = GI t + 
i o2  I T2 
Where:
io2 = iy2 + iz2 + yo2 + z o2
y z
respectively.
i o2  2 i y2 + i z2 
(
2 i y2 + i z2 )  io
2

 
The program will only consider Channel Sections and Tee- sections while working out the critical

Adds values from the Malaysian National Annex—titled National Annex to Standard MS-EN 1993-1-
1—for use with Eurocode 3, or EN 1993-1-1:2005. The NA document makes small changes to the base
document.

for the Malaysian National Annex.


for the Malaysian National Annex.
the corresponding clauses in the MS-NA.
the Malaysian National Annex (hereafter referred to as MS-NA) and that are relevant to the
proposed implementation are:

M0 M1 M2
The partial safety factors will use the following values for the Malaysian National Annex:

M0
M1
M2
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the MS-NA (NA 9 is
specified).

for LTB checks
The MS-NA recommends the use of Table 6.3 and 6.4 of MS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate the
LT
Buckling Moment, M . The MS-NA does not specify a particular method to calculate Mcr. Hence
cr
the calculation of Mcr has been based on the following NCCI documents:

SN003a-EN-EU NCCI: Elastic critical moment for lateral torsional buckling provides equation used
to calculate M specifically for doubly symmetric sections:
cr
2  2I (kL ) 2GI t 
M cr = C1
π EI 
2
(kL ) 

( )
k
kw IS
w
+ 2
π EI S
2 
+ (C2Zg ) − C 2Zg 


1 2
member. The NCCI provides values for C and C for the different cases as given in Table 3.1 and
1 2
Table 3.2.
The NCCI considers three separate loading conditions:

parameter. The values of C and C may also be directly specified using the C1 and C2 parameters,
1 2
respectively (required for CMM = 7 or CMM = 8).
Annex D of MS-NA also provides a method to evaluate the elastic critical moment, M , for uniform
cr
mono symmetric sections that are symmetric about the weak axis. Hence for this implementation
the elastic critical moment for Tee-Sections is evaluated using the method in this Annex.

cr
2  2I (k xL ) 2GI T 
M cr = C1
π EI z 
2
(k xL ) 

( ) kx
kw I
w
+ 2
π EI z
2
+ (C2zg − C3z 1) − C2zg − C3z 1 


The factors C , C , and C are dependent on the end conditions and loading criteria. The program
1 2 3
considers C , C , and C as given in the tables 4.1 and 4.2 of the NCCI, based on the CMM parameter.
1 2 3
The default value of CMM = 0, which considers the member as a pin ended member with uniformly
and transverse loading” condition. You use the C1, C2 and C3 parameters to input the required
values for C , C , and C , respectively, to be used in calculating M .
1 2 3 cr

version of 1993-1-1:1992.
Note: When CMM = 7 or CMM = 8, the values for C1, C2 and C3 parameters must be manually
specified.
F.
The term zg in the equation to calculate M refers to the distance between the point of application
cr
of load on the cross section in relation to the shear center of the cross section. The value of z is
g
considered positive, if the load acts towards the shear center and is negative if it acts away from the
shear center. By default, the program will assume that the load acts towards the shear center at a
distance equal to (Depth of section/2) from the shear center. The use will be allowed to modify this
value by using the ZG parameter. Specifying a value of ZG = 0 in the design input would indicate
that the load acts exactly at the shear center of the section so that the term z in the equation will
g
have a value of zero.

section
The MS-NA specifies different values for the λ and β factors to be used in equation 6.57 of MS
LT,0
EN 1993-1-1 for rolled and equivalent welded sections. STAAD.Pro does not differentiate between
rolled and welded sections and uses the default values in MS EN 1993-1-1 for λ and β. The values
LT,0
specified in the MS-NA are:
1. For rolled sections and hot-rolled & cold formed hollow sections:
λ = 0.4 and β = 0.75

LT,0
2. For welded sections:
λ = 0.2 and β = 1.00

LT,0
STAAD.Pro uses the buckling curves based on Table 6.5 of MS EN 1993-1-1:2005, based on different
limits. This table again does not specify which buckling curve is to be used in case of welded

doubly symmetric sections with h/b ≥ 3.1 and welded non-doubly symmetric sections. Hence for
these cases the new implementation will still use the method specified in the base code as per
clause 6.3.2.2(2).

factor, χ as per Malaysian NA
LT
factor χ to be used in eqn. 6.55 of MS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
LT
LT
LT
the MS NA) in STAAD.Pro, by default the program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3 to evaluate χ .
LT
For any case that is not dealt with by Cl. 6.3.2.3, the program will consider Cl. 6.3.2.2 to evaluate
χ .
LT
Cl. 6.3.2.3 in the MS NA states that Table 6.5 in MS EN 1993-1-1:2005 should be replaced with the
table given in the NA (See "Clause 6.3.2.3(1) – LTB for rolled sections or equivalent welded section"
on page 349). Hence for all cases dealt with by the table in the MS NA, this implementation will
choose the buckling curves from the MS NA. For any case that is not dealt with by the table in the
MS NA, the program will use the method given in Cl. 6.3.2.2 of MS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
Hence for the following cross sections the program will use the Table in the MS NA for choosing a
buckling curve for LTB checks (when the MS NA has been specified):

l Angle Sections
For the following cross sections, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.3 of MS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to evaluate
χ
LT
LT
In any case the Elastic critical moment “Mcr” (used to evaluate the non dimensional slenderness)
will be evaluated as described in "Clause 6.3.2.2 –Elastic critical moment and imperfection
factors for LTB checks". Since the MS NA uses the NCCI documents mentioned in the sections

above, this implementation will only consider end restraint conditions corresponding to the CMN
parameter=1.0. For all other cases of the CMN parameter values, this implementation will use the
cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of MS EN 1993-1-1:2005. Also, I sections with plates will be

The MS NA specifies the use of eqn. 6.58 of MS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to evaluate the modification factor,
f, for the LTB reduction factor χ . To evaluate the modification factor MS EN 1993-1-1:2005 uses a
LT
correction factor, kc, given by Table 6.6 in the code.
The program does not calculate the kc factor and conservatively uses a reduction factor equal to 1.
The proposed implementation will allow for the reduction factor based on the MS NA.
These values are for an end restraint factor of k = 1 (i.e., CMN = 1.0). Hence for all other values of CMN
(i.e., 0.7 or 0.5), the program uses the values of C1 from DD ENV 1993-1-1:1992 Annex F.
You can also manually specify a value for kc by setting the design parameter, KC, to the desired
value. The user can also get the program to calculate the value of kc automatically by setting the
value of the KC parameter in the design input to 0. This will cause the program to evaluate a value
of C corresponding to the end conditions and the Bending moment of the member and in turn
1
calculate k as given in the NA. To evaluate C , the program will use the NCCI documents (See
c 1
"Clause 6.3.2.2 –Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for LTB checks" on page 347).
Note that for the MS NA, the program will attempt to evaluate k by default using the equation in
c
NA,
kc = 1 / C1
where C1 will be the value used for the M calculations.

cr
If k evaluates to be greater than 1.0, the program will then evaluate kc as per Table 6.6 of EN 1993-
c
1-1:2005.
The MS NA recommends that the method in Annex A or Annex B of MS EN 1993-1-1:2005 can be
used to calculate the interaction factors for Cl. 6.3.3 checks in the case of doubly symmetric
sections. STAAD.Pro uses the equations in Annex B of MS EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate these
interaction factors for doubly symmetric sections..
However, for non-doubly symmetric sections, the MS NA gives the option of using Annex B with
some modifications as given in the NA. (Cl. NA-3.2 of the MS NA). The MS NA requires additional

checks to be done to check for the maximum allowable values of λ and X to be used in equations
6.61 and 6.62 of MS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
As per the MS NA, for non-doubly symmetric sections, the slenderness about the weak axis (λ in
y
STAAD.Pro) and the corresponding reduction factor χ should be taken as the values from the
y
highest values of slenderness (λ) among the flexural buckling slenderness (λ ), torsional slenderness
y
(λ ) and torsional-flexural slenderness (λ ) as given in Clauses 6.3.1.3 and 6.3.1.4 of MS EN 1993-1-
T TF
1:2005. Hence for non-doubly symmetric sections the program will calculate the critical non-
dimensional slenderness as:
 λ per Cl. 6.3.1.3

λ y = max
 λT per Cl. 6.3.1.4
where
A ⋅fy
λT =
N cr
Ncr = min(N crT , N crTF )
The MS NA or EC3 does not, however, specify a method to evaluate N or N . Hence, the
crT crTF
program uses the method specified in the NCCI document SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for
torsional and flexural torsional buckling modes to calculate these. See "Clause 6.3.1.4 - Slenderness
for torsional and torsional-flexural buckling" on page 352 for details.
Note: The MS NA or EC3 does not deal with angle sections specifically and therefore STAAD.Pro
uses the method described in the EC3 implementation to deal with slenderness of angle sections.
This is done as per cl 4.7.10 of BS 5950.
Clause NA 3.2 of the MS NA also requires that “Where the section is not an I Section or a hollow
section and is a class1 or class 2 section, it will be treated as a class 3 section for the purposes of this
clause”. Hence for all Class 1 or Class 2 cross sections that are not I, H, SHS, RHS or CHS sections,
the elastic properties will be used for the purposes of 6.3.3 checks.

buckling
Equations 6.52 and 6.53 of MS-EN 1993-1-1:2005 are to be used to calculate the non-dimensional
slenderness parameter, λ , to be used for torsional and torsional-flexural buckling checks. The MS-
T
EN 1993-1-1:2005 does not provide equations to calculate the elastic critical loads N and N
cr,T,F cr,T
(refer 6.3.14 of SS EN 1993-1-1:2005). Therefore, the NCCI document SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial
load for torsional and flexural torsional buckling modes provides methods to calculate the N
cr,T,F
and N factors and hence will to be included in this implementation of the MS NA.
cr,T
1  π EI w 
2
2 
Ncr, T = GI t +
io  I T2 

7D.8 German National Annex to EC3
Where:
io2 = iy2 + iz2 + yo2 + z o2
y z
respectively.
i o2  2 i y2 + i z2 
2 (
i y2 + i z2)  io
2

 
The program will only consider Channel Sections and Tee- sections when evaluating the critical

Adds values from the German National Annex—titled DIN EN 1993-1-1:2005—for use with Eurocode

clauses from the German National Annex (hereafter referred to as DE-NA) are described in the
following sections.
corresponding clauses in the DE-NA.

for the German National Annex.
for the German National Annex.

6.1 of the code. These factors are Γ , Γ , and Γ . EN 1993 provides default values for these
M0 M1 M2
factors. However, any National Annex is allowed to override these default values.
The partial safety factors will use the following values for the German National Annex:
l Resistance of cross-sections, Γ = 1.0

M0
l Resistance of members to instability, Γ = 1.0
M1

l Resistance of cross sections to tension, Γ = 1.25

M2
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the DE-NA (NA 10 is
specified).

for LTB checks
The DE-NA recommends the use of Table 6.3 and 6.4 of DIN EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate the
LT
Buckling Moment, M . The DE-NA does not specify a particular method to calculate Mcr. Hence
cr
cr
2  2I (kL ) 2GI t 
M cr = C1
π EI
(kL )


2

( )
k
kw IS
w
+ 2
π EI S
2 
+ (C2Zg ) − C 2Zg 


1 2
1 2
Table 3.2.

1 2

Annex D of DE-NA also provides a method to evaluate the elastic critical moment, M , for uniform
cr
mono-symmetric sections that are symmetric about the weak axis. STAAD.Pro uses this method for
the evaluating the elastic critical moment for Tee sections.

cr
π 2EI z  2I (k xL ) 2GI T 

M cr = C1
(k xL )

2

( ) kx
kw
w
I
+ 2
π EI z
2
+ (C2zg − C3z 1) − C2zg − C3z 1 


1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3 cr
version of 1993-1-1:1992.
specified.
F.
cr
g
g


section
The DE-NA specifies that the default values in Table 6.5 for the λ and β factors given in clause
LT,0
6.3.2.3(1) as follows:
λ =0.4 and β = 0.75

LT,0

factor, χ as per German NA
LT
factor χ to be used in eqn. 6.55 of DIN EN 1993-1-1:2005.
LT
LT
LT
the German Annex) in STAAD.Pro: by default the program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3 to
LT
to evaluate χ .
LT
Note: The MTH design parameter can be used to control the choice of the clause used to calculate
χ .
LT
cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of DIN EN 1993-1-1:2005. Also, I sections with plates will be


The DE-NA specifies the use of Equation 6.58 of DIN EN 1993-1-1:2005 to evaluate the modification
factor ‘f’ for the LTB reduction factor χ . To evaluate the modification factor SS EN 1993-1-1:2005
LT
uses a correction factor ‘kc’ given by Table 6.6 in the code.
The DE-NA however, specifies that the correction factor ‘kc’ is to be obtained as below:
K c = 1 / C1
Where:
C is to be obtained from the NCCI documents as previously described (See "Clause

1
6.3.2.2 –Elastic critical moment and imperfection factors for LTB checks" on page 354).
The NCCI document SN003a-EN-EU specifies the values of C1 to be used in table 3.1
as shown below. The current implementation does not account for the K factor and
c
conservatively uses a reduction factor equal to 1. The program allows for the reduction
factor based on the DE-NA.
These values are for an end restraint factor of k = 1 (i.e., design parameter CMN = 1.0). Hence for all
other values of CMN (i.e., 0.7 or 0.5) this implementation will use the values of C from DD ENV
1
1993-1-1:1992 Annex F.
The program will use a default value of 1.0 for K . However, you can also input a custom value of K
c c
by setting the design parameter KC to the desired value. If the KC parameter in the design input is
set to 0, then the program will automatically calculate its value. This will cause the program to
evaluate a value of C corresponding to the end conditions and the Bending moment of the
1
member and in turn calculate K as given in the NA. To evaluate C , the program will use the NCCI
c 1
documents as previously described.
The DE-NA recommends the use of equations in Annex A or Annex B of DIN-EN 1993-1-1 to
calculate these interaction factors. STAAD.Pro uses the method in Annex B by default. Thus the
program uses Annex B for Cl.6.3.3 checks.
The DE-NA or EC3 do not deal with angle sections in specific and thus the program uses the
method per cl 4.7.10 of BS 5950 for single and double angle sections to evaluate the slenderness.

buckling
Equations 6.52 and 6.53 of DIN EN 1993-1-1:2005 are to be used to calculate the non-dimensional
slenderness λ , to be used for torsional and torsional-flexural buckling checks. DIN EN 1993-1-
T
1:2005 does not provide equations to calculate the elastic critical loads N and N (refer 6.3.14
cr,T,F cr,T
of DIN EN 1993-1-1:2005).

7D.9 Swedish National Annex to EC3
The NCCI document SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional
buckling modes provides methods to calculate the N and N factors and therefore these
cr,TF cr,T
methods are used to evaluate the elastic critical loads for the DE-NA.
1  π EI w 
2
2 
Ncr, T = GI t +
io  I T2 
Where:
io2 = iy2 + iz2 + yo2 + z o2
y z
respectively.
i o2  2 i y2 + i z2 
2 (
i y2 + i z2)  io
2

 

Adds values from the Swedish National Annex—titled BFS EN 1993-1-1:2005—for use with Eurocode

clauses from the Swedish National Annex (hereafter referred to as SW-NA) are described in the
following sections.
corresponding clauses in the SW-NA.
7D.9.1 Clause 3.2.(2) - Steel Grades

The Swedish NA allows the use of custom steel grades as given in Table E-1 of the National Annex.
These grades of steel can be specified by using the PY (Yield Strength) and FU (Ultimate Strength)
parameters in STAAD.Pro.
7D.9.2 Clause 6.1(1) – General: Partial Safety Factors for Buildings

6.1 of the code. These factors are Γ , Γ , and Γ . EN 1993 provides default values for these
M0 M1 M2
factors. However, any National Annex is allowed to override these default values.
The partial safety factors will use the following values for the Swedish National Annex:

l Resistance of cross-sections, Γ = 1.0

M0
l Resistance of members to instability, Γ = 1.0
M1
l Resistance of cross sections to tension, Γ = 0.9 x fu /fy , but not less than 1.1
M2
Where:
f is the ultimate steel strength

u
f is the yield strength of steel
y
The design function in STAAD.Pro sets these values as the default values for the SW-NA (NA 10 is
specified).
Note: You can change these values through the GM0 and GM1 design parameters. See "Design
Parameters" on page 265 The value of GM2 (Γ ) is calculated based on the steel grade values
M2
specified. See "Clause 3.2.(2) - Steel Grades" on page 358

for LTB checks
The SW-NA recommends the use of Table 6.3 and 6.4 of DIN EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate the
LT
Buckling Moment, M . The SW-NA does not specify a particular method to calculate Mcr. Hence
cr
cr
2  2I (kL ) 2GI t 
M cr = C1
π EI 
2
(kL ) 

( )
k
kw IS
w
+ 2
π EI S
2 
+ (C2Zg ) − C 2Zg 


1 2
1 2
Table 3.2.


1 2
Annex D of SW-NA also provides a method to evaluate the elastic critical moment, M , for
cr
uniform mono-symmetric sections that are symmetric about the weak axis. STAAD.Pro uses this
method for the evaluating the elastic critical moment for Tee sections.

cr
π 2EI z  2I (k xL ) 2GI T 

M cr = C1 2
(k xL ) 

( ) kx
kw
w
I
+ 2
π EI z
2
+ (C2zg − C3z 1) − C2zg − C3z 1 


1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3 cr
version of 1993-1-1:1992.
specified.
F.
cr
g

g

section
The SW-NA specifies that the following values for the λ and β factors:
LT,0
λ =0.4 and β = 0.75

LT,0

factor, χ as per Swedish NA
LT
factor χ to be used in eqn. 6.55 of BFS EN 1993-1-1:2005.
LT
LT
LT
the Swedish Annex) in STAAD.Pro: by default the program will consider clause Cl. 6.3.2.3 to
LT
to evaluate χ .
LT
Note: The MTH design parameter can be used to control the choice of the clause used to calculate
χ .
LT
cases, the program will use Cl. 6.3.2.2 of BFS EN 1993-1-1:2005. Also, I sections with plates will be

The SW-NA recommends the use of equations in Annex A of EN 1993-1-1:2005 to calculate these
interaction factors, which are used by STAAD.Pro when the Swedish NA is selected.
The SW-NA or EC3 do not deal with angle sections in specific and thus the program uses the
method per cl 4.7.10 of BS 5950 for single and double angle sections to evaluate the slenderness.

buckling
Equations 6.52 and 6.53 of BFS EN 1993-1-1:2005 are to be used to calculate the non-dimensional
slenderness λ , to be used for torsional and torsional-flexural buckling checks. BFS EN 1993-1-1:2005
T
does not provide equations to calculate the elastic critical loads N and N (refer 6.3.14 of BFS
cr,T,F cr,T
EN 1993-1-1:2005).
The NCCI document SN001a-EN-EU: Critical axial load for torsional and flexural torsional
buckling modes provides methods to calculate the N and N factors and therefore these
cr,TF cr,T
methods are used to evaluate the elastic critical loads for the SW-NA.
1  π EI w 
2
2 
Ncr, T = GI t +
io  I T2 
Where:
io2 = iy2 + iz2 + yo2 + z o2
y z
respectively.
i o2  2 i y2 + i z2 
2 (
i y2 + i z2)  io
2

 

7E.1 General Comments
7E. Timber Design Per EC 5: Part 1-1

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing timber design based on the European code EC5 Part 1-1
Eurocode 5: Design of timber structures - Part 1.1: General-Common rules and rules for buildings.
Design of members per EC5 Part 1-1 requires the STAAD Euro Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.

Principles of Limit States Design of Timber Structures are used as specified in the code.
Design per EC5 is limited to the prismatic, rectangular shapes only. There is no Eurocode-specific
timber section database / library consisting of pre-defined shapes for analysis or for design. The
feature of member selection is thus not applicable to this code.
The design philosophy of this specification is based on the concept of limit state design. Structures
are designed and proportioned taking into consideration the limit states at which they would
become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit-state are recognized - ultimate
stability, while that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load and resistance factors are used so
that a uniform reliability is achieved for all timber structures under various loading conditions and
at the same time the chances of limits being surpassed are acceptably remote.
The following sections describe the salient features of the STAAD implementation of EC 5. A
7E.1.1 Axes convention in STAAD and EC5

STAAD defines the major axis of the cross-section as zz and the minor axis as yy. The longitudinal
axis of the member is defined as x and joins the start joint of the member to the end with the same
positive direction.
right hand rule.

Figure 7E.1 - Axis conventions per STAAD and Eurocode 5
STAAD EC5
7E.1.2 Determination of Factors

A. Kmod – Modification factor taking into account of Load-duration (LDC) and Moisture-
content (Service Class - SCL). Reference Table 3.1 of EC-5-2004.
For “Solid Timber”, the values are incorporated in the program.
B. γ – Partial factor for Material Property values. Reference Table 2.3 of EC-5-2004.
m
For “Solid Timber”, the value of γ = 1.3 is incorporated in the program.
m
C. Kh – Size Factor.
For members, subjected to tension, whose maximum c/s dimension is less than the reference
width in tension the characteristic strength in tension (ft0k) is to be increased by the factor
Kh.
For members, subjected to bending, whose depth is less than reference depth in bending,
the characteristic strength in bending (fmk) is to be increased by the factor Kh.
As per clause 3.2(3) of EC 5- 2004, for rectangular solid timber with a characteristic timber
density ρ ≤ 700 kg/m 3 the reference depth in bending or the reference width (maximum
k
cross-sectional dimension) is 150 mm.
The value of Kh = Minimum of {(150/h) 0.2 and 1.3) for such solid timber is incorporated in
the software. Please refer clause numbers 3.3 and 3.4 for the value of Kh for Glued laminated
timber and Laminated veneer lumber respectively.
D. KC90 – Factor taking into account the load configuration, possibility of splitting and degree
of compressive deformation.
For members, subjected to compression, perpendicular to the direction of grain alignment,

this factor should be taken into account. Default value of 1 is used in STAAD.Pro. User may
override the value. Please refer clause 6.1.5 of EC-5-2004 in this regard.
E. Km – Factor considering re-distribution of bending stress in cross section.

7E.2 Analysis Methodology
For members, subjected to bending, this factor is taken into account for stress checking. For
rectangular section the value of Km is 0.7, and this value is incorporated in STAAD.Pro. User
may override the value. Please refer clause 6.1.6 of EC-5-2004 in this regard.
F. Kshape – Factor depending on shape of cross section.
For members, subjected to torsional force, design torsional stress should be less than equal
design shear strength multiplied by the factor Kshape. This factor is determined by
STAAD.Pro internally using the guidelines of clause 6.1.8 of EC-5-2004.

Table 7E.1-EC5 Nomenclature
Symbol Description
S Design tensile stress parallel (at zero degree) to grain alignment.

t0d
S Design tensile stress perpendicular (at 90 degrees) to grain
t90d
alignment.
S Design compressive stress parallel to grain alignment.
c0d
S Design compressive stress perpendicular to grain alignment.
c90d
S Design bending stress about zz axis.
mzd
S Design bending stress about yy axis.
myd
S Design shear stress.
vd
S Design torsional stress.
tor_d
F Design tensile strength - parallel to the grain alignment.
t0d
F Design tensile strength - perpendicular to the grain alignment.
t90d
F Design compressive strength - parallel to the grain alignment.
c0d
F Design compressive strength - perpendicular to the grain
c90d
alignment.
F Design bending strength - about zz-axis.
mzd
F Design bending strength - about yy-axis.
myd
F Design shear strength about yy axis.
vd
RATIO Permissible ratio of stresses as input using the RATIO parameter.
The default value is 1.

l ,l Slenderness ratios corresponding to bending about zz axis.
z rel,z
l ,l Slenderness ratios corresponding to bending about yy axis.
y rel,y
E Fifth percentile value of modulus of elasticity parallel to grain.
0,05
G Fifth percentile value of shear modulus parallel to grain.
0,05
I Second moment of area about the strong z-axis.
z

Symbol Description
I Second moment of area about the weak y-axis.

y
I Torsional moment of inertia.
tor
f Characteristic bending strength.
mk
b, h Width and depth of beam.
Equations for Characteristic Values of Timber Species as per Annex-A of EN 338:2003
The following equations were used to determine the characteristic values:
For a particular Timber Strength Class (TSC), the following characteristic strength values are
required to compute the other related characteristic values.
i. Bending Strength – f
m,k
ii. Mean Modulus of Elasticity in bending – E
0, mean
iii. Density - ρ
k
SI Property Symbol Wood Type

No.
Softwood Hardwood
(C) (D)
1. Tensile Strength parallel to f 0.6 * f
t,0,k m,k
grain
2. Tensile Strength perpendicular f Minimum of {0.6 and
t,90,k
to grain (0.0015*r )}
k
3. Compressive Strength parallel to f 5 * (f ) 0.45
c,0,k m,k
grain
4. Compressive Strength f 0.007*r 0.0015*r
c,90,k k k
perpendicular to grain
5. Shear Strength f Minimum of {3.8 and
v,k
(0.2*f 0.8)}
m,k
6. Modulus of Elasticity parallel to E 0.67* 0.84* E
0,05 0,mean
grain E
0,mean
7. Mean Modulus of Elasticity E E /30 E /15
90,mean 0,mean 0,mean
perpendicular to grain
8. Mean Shear Modulus G E /16
mean 0,mean
9. Shear Modulus G E /16

0,05 0,05
The values of the characteristic strengths computed using the above equations, may differ with the
tabulated values in Table-1 of EN 338:2003. However, in all such cases, the values obtained from the
provided equations are treated as actual and is used by the program, as the values of Table-1 are
based on these equations.

7E.2.1 Design values of Characteristic Strength

As per clause 2.4.1, Design values of a strength property shall be calculated as:
Xd = K mod·(Xk /γm)
Where:
X is design value of strength property

d
X characteristic value of strength property
k
γm is partial factor for material properties.
The member resistance in timber structure is calculated in STAAD according to the procedures
outlined in EC5. This depends on several factors such as cross sectional properties, different load
and material factors, timber strength class, load duration class, service class and so on. The
methodology adopted in STAAD for calculating the member resistance is explained here.
7E.2.2 Check for Tension stresses

If the direction of applied axial tension is parallel to the direction of timber grain alignment, the
following formula should be checked per Equation 6.1 of EC-5 2004:
St0d /Ft0d ≤ RATIO
If the direction of applied axial tension is perpendicular to the direction of timber grain alignment,
the following formula should be checked:
St90d /Ft90d ≤ RATIO
7E.2.3 Check for Compression stresses

If the direction of applied axial compression is parallel to the direction of timber grain alignment,
the following formula should be checked per Equation 6.2 of EC-5 2004:
Sc0d /Fc0d ≤ RATIO
If the direction of applied axial compression is perpendicular to the direction of timber grain
alignment, the following formula should be checked per Equation 6.3 of EC-5 2004:
St0d /(Ft0d ·Kc90) ≤ RATIO
7E.2.4 Check for Bending stresses

If members are under bending stresses, the following conditions should be satisfied per Equations
6.11 and 6.12 of EC-5 2004.
Note: In STAAD z-z axis is the strong axis.
(Smzd /Fmzd ) + Km·(Smyd /Fmyd ) ≤ RATIO

Km·(Smzd /Fmzd ) + (Smyd /Fmyd ) ≤ RATIO
7E.2.5 Check for Shear stresses

Horizontal stresses are calculated and checked against allowable values per Equation 6.13 of EC-5
2004:
Svd /Fvd ≤ RATIO
7E.2.6 Check for Torsional stresses

Members subjected to torsional stress should satisfy Equation 6.14 of EC-5 2004:
Stor_d /(Kshape·Ftor_d ) ≤ RATIO
7E.2.7 Check for combined Bending and Axial tension

Members subjected to combined action of bending and axial tension stress should satisfy Equations
6.17 and 6.18 of EC-5 2004:
(St0d /Ft0d ) + (Smzd /Fmzd ) + Km·(Smyd /Fmyd ) ≤ RATIO
(St0d /Ft0d ) + Km·(Smzd /Fmzd ) + (Smyd /Fmyd ) ≤ RATIO
7E.2.8 Check for combined Bending and axial Compression

If members are subjected to bending and axial compression stress, Equations 6.19 and 6.20 of EC-5
2004 should be satisfied:
(Sc0d /Fc0d )2 + (Smzd /Fmzd ) + Km·(Smyd /Fmyd ) ≤ RATIO
(Sc0d /Fc0d )2 + Km·(Smzd /Fmzd ) + (Smyd /Fmyd ) ≤ RATIO
7E.2.9 Stability check

A. Column Stability check
The relative slenderness ratios should be calculated per Equations 6.21 and 6.22 of EC-5 2004.
λrel,z = λz/π·(Sc0k /E0,05 )1/2

λrel,y = λy /π·(Sc0k /E0,05 )1/2
If both λ and λ are less than or equal to 0.3 the following conditions should be
rel,z rel,y
satisfied:
(Sc0d /Fc0d )2 + (Smzd /Fmzd ) + Km·(Smyd /Fmyd ) ≤ RATIO
(Sc0d /Fc0d )2 + Km·(Smzd /Fmzd ) + (Smyd /Fmyd ) ≤ RATIO
In other cases, the conditions in Equations 6.23 and 6.24 of EC-5 2004 should be satisfied.
Sc0d /(Kcz·Fc0d ) + (Smzd /Fmzd ) + Km·(Smyd /Fmyd ) ≤ RATIO
Sc0d /(Kcy·Fc0d ) + Km·(Smzd /Fmzd ) + (Smyd /Fmyd ) ≤ RATIO
Where (Equations 6.25 through 6.28 of EC-5 2004):
Kcz = 1/{Kz + [(Kz)2 - (λrel,z)2 ]1/2 }
Kcy = 1/{Ky + [(Kzy )2 - (λrel,y )2 ]1/2 }
Kz = 0.5·[1 + βc·(λrel,z - 0.3) + (λrel,z)2 ]
Ky = 0.5·[1 + βc·(λrel,y - 0.3) + (λrel,y )2 ]
The value of β incorporated in the software is the one for solid timber (i.e., 0.2).
c
B. Beam Stability check
If members are subjected to only a moment about the strong axis z, the stresses should
satisfy Equation 6.33 of EC-5 2004:
Smzd /(Kcrit·Fmzd ) ≤ RATIO
Where a combination of moment about the strong z-axis and compressive force exists, the
stresses should satisfy Equation 6.35 of EC-5 2004 (ref. to Equations 6.32 and 6.34 of the
same):
[Smzd /(Kcrit·Fmzd )]2 + Sc0d /(Kcz·Fc0d ) ≤ RATIO
Where:
Kcrit = 1.0 when λrel,m ≤ 0.75
Kcrit = 1.56 - 0.75·λrel,m when 0.75 < λrel,m ≤ 1.4
Kcrit = 1/( λrel,m)2 when 1.4 < λrel,m
λrel,m = (fmk /Sm,crit)1/2
For hardwood, use Equation 6.30 of EC-5 2004:
Sm,crit = π·(E0,05 ·Iy ·G0,05 ·Itor)1/2 /(lef·W z)
For softwood, use Equation 6.31 of EC-5 2004:

Sm,crit = 0.78·b2 ·E0,05 /(h·lef)

Depending on the model being designed, the user may have to change some or all of the parameter
default values. Some parameters are unit dependent and when altered, the new setting must be
Table 7E.2-Timber Design EC 5: Part 1-1 Parameters
CODE - Must be specified as TIMBER EC5

Reference Manual.
ALPHA 0.0 Angle of inclination of load to the

grain alignment. (Ref. Cl.6.1.1,
Cl.6.1.2, Cl.6.1.3, Cl.6.1.4)
0.0 = Load parallel to grain

90.0 = Load Perpendicular to
grain
DFF None “Deflection Length” / Max.
Allowable Net Final Local
Deflection.
In this case, deflection check will

be performed, if both the
parameters SERV and DFF are
present with specific values. For
appropriate range of values, please
refer Cl.7.2 (Table 7.2)
DJ1 Start node number for a physical
member under consideration for
Deflection Check.

DJ2 End node number for a physical

member under consideration for
Deflection Check.
KC90 1.0 Factor taking into account the
load configuration, possibility of
splitting and degree of
compressive deformation. (Ref.
Cl.6.1.5-(2))
l Range: 1.0 ≤ KC90 ≤ 4.0
l Other than the default

value, user may specify any
value within the range,
depending on load-
position, load-dispersion,
contact length at support
locations etc.
KLEF 1.0 Effective Length Factor to check
Lateral Torsional Buckling (Ref.
(Member Length)
Table 6.1). Factor multiplied by the
span of the beam and depends on
the support conditions and load
configurations. The user will put
the appropriate value from the
Table 6.1.
Required only for MTYP value of 1

(Beam).
KY 1.0 Effective Length Factor for Local-y-
axis. (Ref. Cl.6.3.2), for the
(Member Length)
computation of the relative
slenderness ratios.
KZ 1.0 Effective Length Factor for Local-z-
axis. (Ref. Cl.6.3.2), for the
(Member Length)
computation of the relative
slenderness ratios.

LDC 1 Load Duration Class (Ref.

Cl.2.3.1.2), required to get the K-
MOD value from Table – 3.1.
1.0 = Permanent action

2.0 = Long term action
3.0 = Medium term action
4.0 = Short term action
5.0 = Instantaneous action
MTYP 0 Member Type: Beam/Column. (Ref.
Cl.6.3.2, Cl.6.3.3)
0.0 = Not defined; both clauses

are checked (Default)
1.0 = Beam Member
2.0 = Column Member
This information is required to

find which stability check will be
performed as per the Cl 6.3
according to the Member Type.
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of actual to
allowable value.
SCL 3 Service Class (Ref. Cl.2.3.1.3)
1.0 = Class 1, Moisture content

≤ 12%
≤ 20%
> 20%
TRACK 0 Degree/Level of Details of design
output results.
1.0 = Print the design output at

the minimal detail level
2.0 = Print the design output
at the intermediate detail level
3.0 = Print the design output
that the maximum detail level

7E.4 Verification Problems
TSC 6 (C24) Timber Strength Class (Ref.

Reference EN338 – 2003)
l Softwood: 1 = C14, 2 = C16, 3

= C18, 4 = C20, 5 = C22, 6 =
C24, 7 = C27, 8 = C30, 9 =
C35, 10 = C40, 11 = C45, 12 =
C50.
l Hardwood: 13 = D30, 14 =
D35, 15 = D40, 16 = D50, 17 =
D60, 18 = D70.
This TSC definition will calculate

the corresponding characteristic
strength values using the
equations as given in BS-EN-338,
Annex - A.
7E.4.1 Verification Problem No. 1 - Timber Column

A Timber Column of length 1.0 meter, having c/s dimension of 73 mm X 198 mm, is subjected to
an axial compressive force of 50.0 kN. Design the member for the ultimate limit state.
Material properties:
Timber class: C24
Service classes: Class 2, moisture content ≤ 20%
Load duration classes: Medium-term
Cross section properties:
Length of the member is 1 m.
Rectangular cross section, b = 73 mm, h = 198 mm,
Effective cross sectional area A = 14,454 mm²,
Radius of gyration of cross section about y-axis r = 21 mm,

y
Radius of gyration of cross section about z-axis r = 57 mm,
z
Section modulus of cross section about z-axis: W = 4.770x105 mm³
z

Section modulus of cross section about y-axis: W = 1.759x105 mm³

y
Solution
Characteristic material properties for timber:
Modification factor Kmod = 0.80 …from table 3.1
Material factors γm = 1.30 … from table 2.3
fc0k = 21.00 N/mm²
Fc0d = (Kmod·fc0k )/γm = (0.80·21.00)/1.30 = 12.92 N/mm² [Cl 2.4.1(1)P]
Cross section loads:
Fx = 50.000 kN
Compression parallel to the grain:
Sc0d = (1000xFx )/A = (1000x50.000)/14454 = 3.46N/mm² < 12.92N/mm² (Fc0d )
The ratio of actual compressive stress to allowable compressive strength:
Sc0d /Fc0d = 3.46 / 12.92 = 0.268 < 1.0 [Cl. 6.1.4.(1)P]
Check for Slenderness:
Slenderness ratios:
λz = (1000/57) = 17.54
λy = (1000/21) = 47.62
E0,mean = 1.1031 kN/m2
As timber grade is C24 (i.e., Soft Wood)
E0,05 = 0.67·E0,mean = 0.739 kN/m2
[Annex A,EN 338:2003]
λrel,z = λz/π·(fc0k /E0,05 )1/2 = 17.54/π(21.00/0.739)1/2 = 0.298
λrel,y = λy /π·(fc0k /E0,05 )1/2 = 47.62/π(21.00/0.739)1/2 = 0.809
Since, λ is greater than 0.3, following conditions should be satisfied:

rel,y
Where:
Kz = 0.5·[1 + βc·(λrel,z - 0.3) + (λrel,z)2 ] = 0.50·[1 + 0.2(0.298 - 0.3) + (0.298)2 ] = 0.541
Ky = 0.5·[1 + βc·(λrel,y - 0.3) + (λrel,y )2 ] = 0.50·[1 + 0.2(0.809 - 0.3) + (0.809)2 ] = 0.878

Kcz = 1/{Kz + [(Kz)2 - (λrel,z)2 ]1/2 } = 1/{0.541 + [(0.541)2 - (0.298)2 ]1/2 }= 1.008
Kcy = 1/{Ky + [(Kzy )2 - (λrel,y )2 ]1/2 } = 1/{0.878 + [(0.878)2 - (0.809)2 ]1/2 } = 0.820
For Rectangular cross section Km = 0.70. The member is subjected to Compression only, so actual
bending stress is zero.
Sc0d /(Kcz·Fc0d ) + (Smzd /Fmzd ) + Km·(Smyd /Fmyd ) = 3.46/(1.008·12.92) + 0.0 + 0.0 = 0.268 + 0.0
+ 0.0 = 0.266
Sc0d /(Kcy·Fc0d ) + Km·(Smzd /Fmzd ) + (Smyd /Fmyd ) = 3.46 /(0.820·12.92) + 0.0 + 0.0 = 0.326
+ + 0.0 + 0.0 = 0.326
Hence the critical ratio is 0.326 < 1.0 and the section is safe.
Comparison
Table 7E.3-EC 5: Part 1-1 Verification Problem 1

Critical Ratio (Cl. 0.326 0.327 none

6.3.2)
Input File
The following file is included AS C:\SProV8i\STAAD\Examp\Eur\EC5 ver 1.std.

STAAD SPACE
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 1.0 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
ISOTROPIC WOOD
E 1.10316e+007
POISSON 0.15
DENSITY 0.00231749
ALPHA 5.5e-006
END DEFINE MATERIAL
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL WOOD MEMB 1
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 PRIS YD 0.198 ZD 0.073
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE NONE TITLE LOAD CASE 1
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -50
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER
CODE TIMBER EC5
ALPHA 0 ALL
LDC 3 ALL
SCL 2 ALL
TSC 6 ALL

TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output
The member checking part of the output file:

STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (EC5 )
***********************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 PRIS ZD = 0.073 YD = 0.198
PASS CL.6.3.2 0.327 1
50.00 C 0.00 0.00 0.0000
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| AX = 0.01 IY = 0.00 IZ = 0.00 |
| LEZ = 1.00 LEY = 1.00 |
| |
| ALLOWABLE STRESSES: (NEW MMS) |
| FBY = 14.769 FBZ = 14.769 |
| FC = 12.859 |
| ACTUAL STRESSES : (NEW MMS) |
| fby = 0.000 fbz = 0.000 |
| fc = 3.459 |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
7E.4.2 Verification Problem No. 2

A Timber Column of length 1.0 meter, having c/s dimension of 73 mm X 198 mm, is subjected to
an axial compressive force of 5.0 kN and moments of 2.0 kN.m and 1.0 kN.m about its major and
minor axes respectively. Design the member for the ultimate limit state.
Timber Strength Class: C24
Service classes: Class 2, moisture content <=20%
Load duration: Medium-term
Cross section properties:
Length of the member is 1 m.
Rectangular cross section, b = 73 mm, h = 198 mm,
Effective cross sectional area A = 14454 mm²,
Radius of gyration of cross section about y-axis r = 21 mm,

y
Radius of gyration of cross section about z-axis r = 57 mm,
z
Section modulus of cross section about z-axis: W = 4.770x105 mm³
z
Section modulus of cross section about y-axis: W = 1.759x105 mm³
y

Solution
Characteristic material properties for timber:
Modification factor Kmod = 0.80 …from table 3.1
Material factors γm = 1.30 … from table 2.3
fc0k = 21.00 N/mm²
E0,05 = 7370 N/mm2
Fc0d = (Kmod·fc0k )/γm = (0.80·21.00)/1.30 = 12.92 N/mm² [Cl 2.4.1(1)P]
fmyk = 24.00 N/mm²
Fmyd = Kmod·fmyk /γm = (0.80x24.00)/1.30 = 14.77N/mm²
fmzk = 24.00 N/mm²
Fmzd = Kmod·fmzk /γm = (0.80x24.00)/1.30 = 14.77N/mm²
Cross section loads:
Fx = 5.000 kN
Mz = 2.000 kN·m
My = 1.000 kN·m
Check for Slenderness:
Slenderness ratios:
λz = (1000/57) = 17.54
λy = (1000/21) = 47.62
λrel,z = λz/π·(fc0k /E0,05 )1/2 = 17.54/π(21.00/7370)1/2 = 0.298
λrel,y = λy /π·(fc0k /E0,05 )1/2 = 47.62/π(21.00/7370)1/2 = 0.809
Since, λ is greater than 0.3, following conditions should be satisfied [Cl 6.3.2.3]:
rel,y
Where:
Kz = 0.5·[1 + βc·(λrel,z - 0.3) + (λrel,z)2 ] = 0.50·[1 + 0.2(0.298 - 0.3) + (0.298)2 ] = 0.541
Ky = 0.5·[1 + βc·(λrel,y - 0.3) + (λrel,y )2 ] = 0.50·[1 + 0.2(0.809 - 0.3) + (0.809)2 ] = 0.878
Kcz = 1/{Kz + [(Kz)2 - (λrel,z)2 ]1/2 } = 1/{0.541 + [(0.541)2 - (0.298)2 ]1/2 }= 1.008
Kcy = 1/{Ky + [(Kzy )2 - (λrel,y )2 ]1/2 } = 1/{0.878 + [(0.878)2 - (0.809)2 ]1/2 } = 0.820
For Rectangular cross section Km = 0.70.

Sc0d = (1000·Fx /A) = (1000·5.000)/14454 = 0.35 N/mm²
Smzd = (106 ·Mz)/W z = (106 ·2.000)/(4.770x105 ) = 4.19 N/mm²
Smyd = (106 ·My )/W y = (106 ·1.000)/(1.759x105 ) = 5.69 N/mm²
Combined stress ratio:
Sc0d /(Kcz·Fc0d ) + (Smzd /Fmzd ) + Km·(Smyd /Fmyd ) = 0.35/(1.008·12.92) + 4.19/14.77 + 0.70

(5.69/14.77) = 0.027 + 0.283 + 0.269 = 0.266
Sc0d /(Kcy·Fc0d ) + Km·(Smzd /Fmzd ) + (Smyd /Fmyd ) = 0.35 /(0.820·12.92) + 0.70(4.19/14.77)

+ 5.69/14.77 = 0.033 + 0.385 + 0.198 = 0.616
Hence the critical ratio is 0.616 < 1.0 and the section is safe.
Comparison
Table 7E.4-EC 5: Part 1-1 Verification Problem 2

Critical Ratio (Cl. 0.616 0.616 none

6.3.2)
Input File
The following file is included AS C:\SProV8i\STAAD\Examp\Eur\EC5 ver 2.std.

STAAD SPACE
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 0 1 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
ISOTROPIC WOOD
E 1.10316e+007
POISSON 0.15
DENSITY 0.00231749
ALPHA 5.5e-006
END DEFINE MATERIAL
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL WOOD MEMB 1
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 PRIS YD 0.198 ZD 0.073
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
JOINT LOAD
2 FY -5.0 MX 1.0 MZ 2.0
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER
CODE TIMBER EC5
ALPHA 0 ALL
LDC 3 ALL
SCL 2 ALL

TSC 6 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output
The member checking part of the output file:

STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (EC5 )
***********************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 PRIS ZD = 0.073 YD = 0.198
PASS CL.6.3.2 0.616 1
5.00 C 1.00 -2.00 0.0000
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| AX = 0.01 IY = 0.00 IZ = 0.00 |
| LEZ = 1.00 LEY = 1.00 |
| |
| ALLOWABLE STRESSES: (NEW MMS) |
| FBY = 14.769 FBZ = 14.769 |
| FC = 12.859 |
| ACTUAL STRESSES : (NEW MMS) |
| fby = 5.686 fbz = 4.193 |
| fc = 0.346 |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|

8
Finnish Codes

8 Finnish Codes

8A. Finnish Codes - Concrete Design per B4
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the Finnish code B4 Suomen
rakentamismääräyskokoelma, B4 Betonirakenteet (National Building Code of Finland, B4 Concrete
structures).
Design of members per B4 requires the STAAD N. Eurozone Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.


to the B4 code. These parameters not only act as a method to input required data for code
calculations but give the Engineer control over the actual design process. Default values of
commonly used parameters for conventional design practice have been chosen as the basis. The
following table contains a complete list of available parameters with their default values.
Table 8A.1-Finnish Concrete Design per B4 Parameters

Name Value
CODE - Must be specified as FINNISH.

ACTAGE 70 Actual age of concrete, in years.
BRACE 0.0 Bracing parameter for design:
0. Beam or column braced in both directions

1. One-way plate or column braced in only
the local Z direction.
direction.

current units.
DRYCIR 100 Drying exposure, in percent.

current units.

numbers.

column design.


Name Value

column design.
ENVIR 2 Environment class
1. LA — Least aggressive
2. NA — Aggressive
3. MA — Very aggressive
FC 35 N/mm 2 Compressive strength of concrete.
FYMAIN 500 N/mm 2 Yield strength of main reinforcing steel.
LAGE 7 days Age when loaded, in days.
MAX 32 Maximum size permitted for main reinforcement

MAIN bar.
MINMAIN 10 Minimum size permitted for main reinforcement

bar.
MOY moy factor
MOZ moz factor
NMAG nmag factor
REIANG 0 Reinforcement angle, in degrees.
RELHUM 40 Relative humidity, in percent.
RFACE 1 Column bar arrangement
1. Four longitudinal bars.

2. Two faced distribution about minor axis.
3. Two faced distribution about major axis.
4. Faced symmetric distribution
SFACE 0 Distance from the start node of the beam to face

of support for shear design.

numbers.
STIRANG 90 Stirrup angle, in degrees.
STIRDIA 10 mm Stirrup diameter


Name Value
TORANG 45 Torsion angle, in degrees.
TRACK 10 Track parameter to control output detail
10. Beam — Ultimate limit state and Service

limit state design & Slab — Two-way plate
design
limit state design with tension stiffening.
12. Beam — Ultimate limit state design only
20. Slab — Plane stress design.
30. Slab — Simplified membrane design.
8A. Finnish Codes - Steel Design per B7

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Finnish code B7 Suomen
rakentamismääräyskokoelma, B4 Betonirakenteet, Liite 3: Kansallinen liite standardiin SFS-EN 206-
1 (The National Building Code of Finland - B Strength of Structures, B7 Steel Structures Guidelines).
Design of members per B7 requires the STAAD N. Eurozone Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.

Table 8A.2-Design Parameters for Finnish B7 Steel design code
Name Value
CODE none Must be specified as B7.
BEAM 0.0 Parameter BEAM 1.0 ALL tells the program to

calculate von Mises at 13 sections along each member,
and up to 8 points at each section. (Depending on
what kind of shape is used.)
Note: Must be set to 1.0


Name Value
BY 1.0 Buckling length coefficient, β for weak axis buckling

(y-y) (NOTE: BY > 0.0)
BZ 1.0 Buckling length coefficient, β, for strong axis

buckling (z-z) (NOTE: BZ > 0.0)
CB 1.0 Lateral buckling coefficient, Y. Used to calculate the

ideal buckling moments, M
vi
CMZ 1.5 n for built up section in connection with lateral

buckling
CY Default Buckling curve coefficient, a about local z-axis (strong

see NS axis). Represent the a, a0, b, c, d curve.
CZ
3472
DMAX 100.0 Maximum allowable depth of steel section.

[cm]
DMIN 0.0 Minimum allowable depth of steel section.

[cm]
FYLD 235 Yield strength of steel, fy [N/mm2 ]
MF 1.0 Ratio of material factor / resistance factor
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of the actual to allowable stresses.
SSY 0.0 0.0 = No sidesway. β calculated. > 0.0 = Sidesway in

local y-axis weak axis β =SSY
M
SSZ 0.0 0.0 = No sidesway. β calculated. > 0.0 = Sidesway in

local y-axis weak axis β
M
TRACK 0.0 Specifies the level of detail in the output.
0.0 = Suppress critical member stresses
1.0 = Print all critical member stresses,

i.e., design values
2.0 = Print von Mises stresses
3.0 = Member results, printed by

member number
9.0 = Print detailed report each

member.


Name Value
UNL Member Effective length for lateral buckling calculations

length (specify buckling length). Distance between fork
supports or between effective side supports for the
beam
The parameter CMY will, when given with negative value, define an inside pressure in pipe members.
The pressure corresponds to given water depth in meters.
The parameter CB defines the φ value with respect to calculation of the ideal lateral buckling
moment for single symmetric wide flange profiles, ref. NS app. 5.2.2.

9
French Codes

9 French Codes

9A. French Codes - Concrete Design per B.A.E.L

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the French code BAEL 1991 E Béton
Armé aux États Limites: Regles techniques de conception et de calcul des ouvrages et constructions
en beton arme, suivant la methode des etats limites (Reinforced Concrete Limit States: Technical
rules for design and costing and reinforced concrete, according to the method of limit states).
Given the width and depth (or diameter for circular columns) of a section, STAAD will calculate
the required reinforcing to resist the various input loads.
Design of members per BAEL 1991 E requires the STAAD Eurozone Design Codes SELECT Code
Pack.

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform design per B.A.E.L.
engineer control over the actual design process. Default values, of commonly used numbers in
conventional design practice, have been used for simplicity. Table 7A.1 contains a complete list of
available parameters and their default values.
Table 9A.1-French Concrete Design B.A.E.L. Parameters

Name Value
CODE BAEL Must be specified as BAEL.
CLEAR * 20 Clearance of reinforcing bar. Value is automatically set

mm to 20 mm for C35 and higher.
DEPTH YD Depth of concrete member. This value defaults to YD

as provided under MEMBER PROPERTIES.
EFACE *0.0 Face of Support Location at end of beam.
Note: Both SFACE and EFACE are input as positive

numbers.
FC * 30 N/ Concrete Yield Stress.

mm 2


Name Value
FYMAIN * 300 Yield Stress for main reinforcing steel.

N/mm 2
FYSEC * 300 Yield Stress for secondary reinforcing steel.

N/mm 2
MAX 50 mm Maximum main reinforcement bar size. (8mm -

MAIN 60mm).
MINMAIN 8 mm Minimum main reinforcement bar size. (8mm -

60mm).
MINSEC 8 mm Minimum secondary reinforcement bar size. (8mm -

60mm).
MMAG 1.0 A factor by which the design moments will be

magnified.
SFACE *0.0 Face of support location at start of beam. Only

considers shear - use MEMBER OFFSET for bending.
NSE 10 Number of equally-spaced sections to be considered in

CTION finding critical moments for beam design.
TRACK 0.0 Critical Moment will not be printed out with beam
design report. A value of 1.0 will mean a print out.
WIDTH ZD Width of the concrete member. This value defaults to

ZD as provided under MEMBER PROPERTIES.
* These values must be provided in the units currently being used for input.

STAAD provides the user two methods of accounting for the slenderness effect in the analysis and
design of concrete members. The first method is a procedure which takes into account second
order effects. Here, STAAD accounts for the secondary moments, due to axial loads and deflections,
when the PDELTA ANALYSIS command is used. STAAD, after solving for the joint displacements
of the structure, calculates the additional moments induced in the structure. Therefore, by using
PDELTA ANALYSIS, member forces are calculated which will require no user modification before
beginning member design.
The second method by which STAAD allows the user to account for the slenderness effect is
through user supplied moment magnification factors. Here the user approximates the additional
moment by supplying a factor by which moments will be multiplied before beginning member
design.


input:
UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTIES
1 3 to 7 9 PRISM YD 450 ZD 300.
11 13 PR YD 300.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450 mm depth and 300 mm width)
and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided, will be assumed to be
circular with a 300 mm diameter. Note that area (AX) is not provided for these members. If shear
areas (AY & AZ) are to be considered in analysis, the user may provide them along with YD and ZD.
Also note that moments of inertia may be provided, but if not provided, the program will calculate
values from YD and ZD.
9A.4 Beam Design

Beam design includes both flexure and shear. For both types of beam action, all active beam
loadings are scanned to create moment and shear envelopes, and locate critical sections. The total
number of sections considered is twelve, unless that number is redefined with the NSECTION
parameter. From the critical moment values, the required positive and negative bar pattern is
developed, with cut-off lengths calculated to include required development length.
Shear design includes critical shear values plus torsional moments. From these values, stirrup sizes
are calculated with proper spacing. The stirrups are assumed to be U-shaped for beams with no
torsion, and closed hoops for beams subject to torsion.
Example of Input Data for Beam Design:

UNIT NEWTON MMS
CODE BAEL
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FYSEC 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
CLEAR 25 MEM 2 TO 6
SFACE 100 MEMB 7 TO 9
EFACE 100 MEMB 7 TO 9
DESIGN BEAM 2 TO 9
END CONCRETE DESIGN
9A.5 Column Design

Columns are designed for axial force and biaxial moments at the ends. All active loadings are tested
critical load. Column design is done for square, rectangular, and circular sections. For rectangular

and square sections, the reinforcement is always assumed to be equally distributed on each side.
That means the total number of bars will always be a multiple of four (4). This may cause slightly
conservative results in some cases.
Example of Input Data for Column Design:

UNIT NEWTON MMS
CODE BAEL
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
MMAG 1.5 MEMB 4 5
END CONCRETE DESIGN

Slab and walls are designed per BAEL 1983 specifications. To design a slab or wall, it must be
modeled using finite elements. The command specifications are in accordance with Chapter II,
section 6.40.
element force output (see Section 3.8 of the Technical Reference Manual). The reinforcement
required to resist Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the reinforcement
required to resist My moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement. The parameters FYMAIN, FC,
and CLEAR listed in Table 7A.1 are relevant to slab design. Other parameters mentioned in Table
7A.1 are not applicable to slab design.
Example of Input Data for Slab/Wall Design:

UNIT NEWTON MMS
CODE BAEL
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 25 ALL
CLEAR 40 ALL

END CONCRETE DESIGN

9B. French Codes - Steel Design per the French Code

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the French code CM66, 1977 edition
Centre Technique Industriel de la Construction Metallique (Industrial Technical Center of Metal
Construction) publication entitled Design Rules for Structural Steelwork .
Design of members per CM66 requires the STAAD NEurozone Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.

Structures are designed and proportioned according to the limit states of which they would
become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit-states are recognized: ultimate
stability; that in serviceability is deflection. Appropriate load and resistance factors are used so that
uniform reliability is achieved for all steel structures under various loading conditions and at the
same time the chances of limits being surpassed are acceptably remote.
section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria, as augmented by the designer in
specification of allowable member depths, desired section type, or other related parameters. The
code checking portion of the program verifies that code requirements for each selected section are
met and also identifies the governing criteria.
The next few sections describe the salient features of STAAD implementation of "Design Rules for
Structural Steelwork." A detailed description of the design process, along with its underlying
concepts and assumptions, is available in the specification document.
9B.2 Basis of Methodology

The "Design Rules for Structural Steelwork (Revision 80)" permits the usage of elastic analysis.
Thus, in STAAD, linear elastic analysis method is used to obtain the forces and moments in the
members. However, strength and stability considerations are based on the principles of plastic
behavior. Axial compression buckling and lateral torsional buckling are taken into consideration for
calculation of axial compression resistance and flexural resistance of members. Slenderness
calculations are made and overall geometric stability is checked for all members.

The member strengths are calculated in STAAD according to the procedures outlined in section 4
of this specification. Note that the program automatically considers co-existence of axial force, shear
and bending in calculating section capacities.

9B.4 Combined Axial Force and Bending
For axial tension capacity, procedures of section 4.2 are followed. For axial compression capacity,
formulas of section 5.3 are used.
Moment capacities about both axes are calculated using the procedures of sections 4.5 and 4.6.
Lateral torsional buckling is considered in calculating ultimate twisting moment per section 5.22 of
the specification. The parameter UNL (see Table 7B.1) must be used to specify the unsupported
length of the compression flange for a laterally unsupported member. Note that this length is also
referred to as twisting length.
9B.4 Combined Axial Force and Bending

The procedures of sections 4.55 and 5.32 are implemented for interaction of axial forces and
bending. Appropriate interaction equations are used and the governing criterion is determined.

The design parameters outlined in Table 7B.1 may be used to control the design procedure. These
parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer to the program, thus allowing the
The default parameter values have been selected as frequently used numbers for conventional
design. Depending on the particular design requirements, some or all of these parameter values
may be changed to exactly model the physical structure.
Table 9B.1-French Steel Design Parameters

Name
CODE FRENCH Design Code to follow.

Reference Manual.
BEAM 0.0 0.0 = design only for end moments and

those at locations specified by SECTION
command.
1.0 = calculate moments at tenth points

long the beam, and use maximum Mz for
design.


Name
C1 1.0 Parameter used in clause 5.21 in the

calculation of M(D), the critical twisting
moment and as shown in CM 66
Addendum 80, table 5, usual range from
0.71 to 4.10
C2 1.0 Parameter used in clause 5.21 in the

calculation of M(D), the critical twisting
moment and as shown in CM 66
Addendum 80, table 5, usual range from
0.0 to 1.56
DFF None "Deflection Length" divided by the

(Mandatory Maximum allowable local deflection
for
deflection
check)

of member calculation of "Deflection Length" (See
Note 1)

member calculation of "Deflection Length" (See
Note 1)
DMAX 100.0 cm. Maximum allowable depth (used in

member selection).
DMIN 0.0 cm. Minimum allowable depth (used in

member selection).
FYLD 250.0 MPa Yield strength of steel.
KY 1.0 K value for axial compression buckling

about local Y-axis. Usually, this is the
minor axis.
KZ 1.0 K value for axial compression buckling

about local Z-axis. Usually, this is the
major axis.
LY Member Length to calculate slenderness ratio about

Length Y-axis for axial compression.
LZ Member Length to calculate slenderness ratio about

Length Z-axis for axial compression.

9B.6 Code Checking and Member Selection

Name
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of actual load effect and

design strength.
SAME* 0.0 Controls the sections to try during a

SELECT process.
0.0 = Try every section of

the same type as original
1.0 = Try only those sections

with a similar name as
original, e.g., if the original is
an HEA 100, then only HEA
sections will be selected,
even if there are HEM’s in
the same table.
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Suppress printing of all design

strengths.
1.0 = Print all design strengths.
UNF 1.0 Same as above provided as a fraction of

member length.
UNL Member Unsupported length of compression flange

Length for calculating moment resistance.
*For angles, if the original section is an equal angle, then the selected section will be an equal angle
and vice versa for unequal angles.

Both code checking and member selection options are available in the STAAD.Pro implementation
of CM 66 (Revn. 80).
Checking command.


Results of code checking and member selection are presented in the output file in a tabular format.
Note: COND CRITIQUE refers to the section of the CM 66 (Revn. 80) specification which governed
the design.
If the TRACK parameter is set to 1.0, calculated member capacities will be printed. The following is
a detailed description of printed items:
PC
Member Compression Capacity
TR
Member Tension Capacity
MUZ
Member Moment Capacity (about z-axis)
MUY
Member Moment Capacity (about y-axis)
VPZ
Member Shear Capacity (z-axis)
VPY
Member Shear Capacity (y-axis)
STAAD contains a broad set of facilities for designing structural members as individual
accordance with the requirements of the design problem. The operations to perform a design are:
l Specify the members and the load cases to be considered in the design.
l Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection.
requirements.
Currently STAAD supports steel design of wide flange, S, M, HP shapes, angle, double angle,
channel, double channel, beams with cover plate, composite beams and code checking of prismatic
properties.
Sample Input data for Steel Design:

UNIT METER
PARAMETER
CODE FRENCH
NSF 0.85 ALL

9B.8 Built-in French Steel Section Library
UNL 10.0 MEMBER 7

KY 1.2 MEMBER 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
TRACK 1.0 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL

deformation is always considered for these members.
An example of the member property specification in an input file is provided at the end of this
section.
A complete listing of the sections available in the built-in steel section library may be obtained by
9B.8.1 IPE Shapes

These shapes are designated in the following way.
10 15 TA ST IPE140
20 TO 30 TA ST IPEA120
33 36 TO 46 BY 2 TA ST IPER180
9B.8.2 HE shapes
HE shapes are specified as follows.
3 5 TA ST HEA120A
7 10 TA ST HEM140
13 14 TA ST HEB100
9B.8.3 IPN Shapes

The designation for the IPN shapes is similar to that for the IPE shapes.
25 TO 35 TA ST IPN200
23 56 TA ST IPN380
9B.8.4 T Shapes
Tee sections are not input by their actual designations, but instead by referring to the I beam
shapes from which they are cut. For example,
1 5 TA T IPE140
2 8 TA T HEM120

9B.8.5 U Channels
Shown below is the syntax for assigning 4 different names of channel sections.
1 TO 5 TA ST UAP100
6 TO 10 TA ST UPN220
11 TO 15 TA ST UPN240A
16 TO 20 TA ST UAP250A
9B.8.6 Double U Channels

Back to back double channels, with or without a spacing between them, are available. The letter D
in front of the section name will specify a double channel.
11 TA D UAP150
17 TA D UAP250A SP 0.5
In the above set of commands, member 11 is a back-to-back double channel UAP150 with no spacing
in between. Member 17 is a double channel UAP250A with a spacing of 0.5 length units between
the channels.
9B.8.7 Angles
Two types of specification may be used to describe an angle. The standard angle section is specified
as follows:
16 20 TA ST L30X30X2.7
The above section signifies an angle with legs of length 30mm and a leg thickness of 2.7mm. This
specification may be used when the local Z axis corresponds to the z-z axis specified in Chapter 2. If
the local Y axis corresponds to the z-z axis, type specification "RA" (reverse angle) should be used
instead of ST.
17 21 TA RA L25X25X4
22 24 TA RA L100X100X6.5
Note that if the leg thickness is a round number such as 4.0, only the number 4 appears in the
section name, the decimal part is not part of the section name.

Short leg back-to-back or long leg back-to-back double angles can be specified by means of input of
the words SD or LD, respectively, in front of the angle size. In case of an equal angle, either SD or
LD will serve the purpose.
33 35 TA SD L30X20X4 SP 0.6
37 39 TA LD L80X40X6
43 TO 47 TA LD L80X80X6.5 SP 0.75


Section names of tubes, just like angles, consist of the depth, width and wall thickness as shown
below.
64 78 TA ST TUB50252.7
66 73 TA ST TUB2001008.0
Members 64 and 78 are tubes with a depth of 50mm, width of 25mm and a wall thickness of
2.7mm. Members 66 and 73 are tubes with a depth of 200mm, width of 100mm and a wall thickness
of 8.0mm. Unlike angles, the ".0" in the thickness is part of the section name.
Tubes can also be input by their dimensions instead of by their table designations. For example,
is a tube that has a depth of 8 length units, width of 6 length units, and a wall thickness of 0.5
length units. Only code checking, no member selection, will be performed for TUBE sections
specified in this way.

To designate circular hollow sections, use PIP followed by numerical value of the diameter and
thickness of the section in mm omitting the decimal portion of the value provided for the
diameter. The following example illustrates the designation.
8 TO 28 TA ST PIP422.6
3 64 78 TA ST PIP21912.5
Members 8 to 28 are pipes 42.4mm in dia, having a wall thickness of 2.6mm. Members 3, 64 and 78
are pipes 219.1mm in dia, having a wall thickness of 12.5mm.
specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 length units and inside dia. of 20 length units. Only code
checking, no member selection will be performed if this type of specification is used.
9B.8.11 Example
SAMPLE FILE CONTAINING FRENCH SHAPES
STAAD SPACE
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORD
1 0 0 0 15 140 0 0
MEMB INCI
1 1 2 14
UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTIES FRENCH
* IPE SHAPES
1 TA ST IPEA120
* IPN SHAPES
2 TA ST IPN380
*HE SHAPES

3 TA ST HEA200
* T SHAPES
4 TA T HEM120
* U CHANNELS
5 TA ST UAP100
* DOUBLE U CHANNELS
6 TA D UAP150 SP 0.5
* ANGLES
7 TA ST L30X30X2.7
* REVERSE ANGLES
8 TA RA L25X25X4
* DOUBLE ANGLES - SHORT LEGS BACK
* TO BACK
9 TA SD L30X20X4 SP 0.25
* DOUBLE ANGLES - LONG LEGS BACK
* TO BACK
10 TA LD L80X40X6 SP 0.75
* TUBES (RECTANGULAR OR SQUARE
* HOLLOW SECTIONS)
11 TA ST TUB50252.7
* TUBES (RECTANGULAR OR SQUARE
* HOLLOW SECTIONS)
13 TA ST PIP422.6
PRINT MEMB PROP
FINI

10
German Codes

10 German Codes

10A. German Codes - Concrete Design Per DIN 1045

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the German code DIN 1045-1:2001-07
Plain, reinforced and prestressed concrete structures. Part 1: Design and construction. Design for a
member involves calculation of the amount of reinforcement required for the member. Calculations
are based on the user specified properties and the member forces obtained from the analysis. In
addition, the details regarding placement of the reinforcement on the cross section are also
reported in the output. Slab design is also available and this follows the requirements of Baumann,
Munich, which is the basis for Eurocode 2.
Design of members per DIN 1045 requires the STAAD Eurozone Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.

l For Beams — Prismatic (Rectangular & Square)

l For Columns — Prismatic (Rectangular, Square, and Circular)

UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 250.
11 13 PR YD 350.
circular with 350 mm diameter. It is absolutely imperative that the user not provide the cross
section area (AX) as an input.

Slenderness effects are extremely important in designing compression members. There are two
options by which the slenderness effect can be accommodated.
The first method is equivalent to the procedure presented in DIN 1045 17.4.3/17.4.4 which is used as
the basis for commonly used design charts considering e/d and sk/d for conditions where the
slenderness moment exceeds 70. This method has been adopted in the column design in STAAD
per the DIN code.
The second option is to compute the secondary moments through an analysis. Secondary moments
are caused by the interaction of the axial loads and the relative end displacements of a member.
The axial loads and joint displacements are first determined from an elastic stiffness analysis and

10A.4 Beam Design
the secondary moments are then evaluated. To perform this type of analysis, use the command
PDELTA ANALYSIS instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS in the input file. The user must note that to take
advantage of this analysis, all the combinations of loading must be provided as primary load cases
and not as load combinations. This is due to the fact that load combinations are just algebraic
combinations of forces and moments, whereas a primary load case is revised during the P-delta
analysis based on the deflections. Also, note that the proper factored loads (like 1.5 for dead load
etc.) should be provided by the user. STAAD does not factor the loads automatically. The column is
designed for the total moment which is the sum of the primary and secondary forces. The
secondary moments can be compared to those calculated using the charts of DIN 1045.
10A.4 Beam Design

prescanned to identify the critical load cases at different sections of the beams. The total number of
sections considered is 13 (e.g., 0., .1, .2, .25, .3, .4, .5, .6, .7, .75, .8, .9 and 1). All of these sections are
scanned to determine the design force envelopes.

mentioned sections. Each of these sections is designed to resist these critical sagging and hogging
moments. Currently, design of singly reinforced sections only is permitted. If the section
dimensions are inadequate as a singly reinforced section, such a message will be printed in the
output. Flexural design of beams is performed in two passes. In the first pass, effective depths of the
sections are determined with the assumption of single layer of assumed reinforcement and
reinforcement requirements are calculated. After the preliminary design, reinforcing bars are chosen
from the internal database in single or multiple layers. The entire flexural design is performed again
in a second pass taking into account the changed effective depths of sections calculated on the
basis of reinforcement provided after the preliminary design. Final provisions of flexural
reinforcements are made then. Efforts have been made to meet the guideline for the curtailment of
reinforcements as per the DIN code. Although exact curtailment lengths are not mentioned
explicitly in the design output (finally which will be more or less guided by the detailer taking into
account of other practical considerations), the user has the choice of printing reinforcements
provided by STAAD at 13 equally spaced sections from which the final detailed drawing can be
prepared.
10A.4.2 Design for Shear and Torsion

Shear design in STAAD conforms to the specifications of section 17.5 of DIN 1045. Shear
reinforcement is calculated to resist both shear forces and torsional moments. Shear and torsional
design is performed at the start and end sections of the member at a distance "d" away from the
node of the member where "d" is the effective depth calculated from flexural design. The maximum
shear forces from amongst the active load cases and the associated torsional moments are used in
the design. The capacity of the concrete in shear and torsion is determined at the location of

10A.5 Column Design
design and the balance, if any, is carried by reinforcement. It is assumed that no bent-up bars are
available from the flexural reinforcement to carry and "balance" shear. Two-legged stirrups are
provided to take care of the balance shear forces acting on these sections. Stirrups are assumed to be
U-shaped for beams with no torsion, and closed hoops for beams subject to torsion.
10A.4.3 Example of Input Data for Beam Design

UNIT NEWTON MMS
CODE GERMAN
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FYSEC 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
CLEAR 25 MEM 2 TO 6
DESIGN BEAM 2 TO 9
END CONCRETE DESIGN
10A.5 Column Design

tested to calculate reinforcement. The loading which yields maximum reinforcement is called the
critical load. The requirements of DIN 1045-figure 13, for calculating the equilibrium equations for
rectangular and circular sections from first principles, is implemented in the design. The user has
control of the effective length (sk) in each direction by using the ELZ and ELY parameters as
described on Table 8A.1. This means that the slenderness will be evaluated along with e/d to meet
the requirements of DIN 1045 section 17.4.3 and 17.4.4.
Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular sections. Square and rectangular
columns are designed with reinforcement distributed on all four sides equally. That means the
total number of bars will always be a multiple of four (4). This may cause slightly conservative
results in some cases. The TRACK parameter may be used to obtain the design details in various
levels of detail.
Example of Input Data for Column Design

UNIT NEWTON MMS
CODE GERMAN
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 35 ALL
END CONCRETE DESIGN
10A.6 Slab Design

To design a slab, it must first be modeled using finite elements and analyzed. The command
specifications are in accordance with Section 5.52 of the Technical Reference Manual. Slabs are

designed to specifications as described by BAUMANN of MUNICH which is the basis for Eurocode
2.
element force output (see Chapter 2 of the Technical Reference Manual). The reinforcement
required to resist the Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the reinforcement
required to resist the My moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement. The following parameters
are those applicable to slab design:
FYMAIN
Yield stress for all reinforcing steel
FC
Concrete grade
CLEAR
Distance from the outer surface of the element to the edge of the bar. This is considered
the same on both top and bottom surfaces of the element.
SRA
Parameter which denotes the angle of direction of the required transverse reinforcement
relative to the direction of the longitudinal reinforcement for the calculation of
BAUMANN design forces.
The other parameters shown in Table 10A.1 are not applicable to slab design.
10A.6.1 BAUMANN equations

If the default value of zero is used, the design will be based on Mx and My forces which are
obtained from the STAAD analysis. The SRA parameter (Set Reinforcement Angle) can be
manipulated to introduce resolved BAUMANN forces into the design replacing the pure Mx and
My moments. These new design moments allow the Mxy moment to be considered when
designing the section, resolved as an axial force. Orthogonal or skew reinforcement may be
considered. If SRA is set to -500, an orthogonal layout will be assumed. If however a skew is to be
considered, an angle is given in degrees measured from the local element X axis anticlockwise
(positive). The resulting Mx* and My* moments are calculated and shown in the design format.
The design of the slab considers a fixed bar size of 10 mm in the longitudinal direction and 8 mm
in the transverse. The longitudinal bar is the layer closest to the slab exterior face.

Table 8A.1 of this manual contains a complete list of the available parameters and their default

Table 10A.1-German Concrete Design Parameters

Name
CODE - Must be specified as DIN1045.

Reference Manual.
CLEAR 25 mm Clear cover for reinforcement measured

from concrete surface to closest bar
perimeter.
DEPTH YD Depth of concrete member. The default

value is provided as YD in MEMBER
PROPERTIES.
EFACE 0.0 Face of support location at end of beam,

measured from the end joint.
Note: Both SFACE & EFACE must be

positive numbers.


FC 25 N/mm 2 Concrete Yield Stress / cube strength
FYMAIN 420 N/mm 2 Yield Stress for main reinforcement (For

slabs, it is 500 N/mm 2 for both directions)
FYSEC 420 N/mm 2 Yield Stress for secondary reinforcement a.

Applicable to shear and torsion
reinforcement in beams
MAXMAIN 50 mm Maximum required reinforcement bar size.

Acceptable bars are per MINMAIN above.
MINMAIN 16 mm Minimum main reinforcement bar size

Acceptable bar sizes: 6 8 10 12 14 16 20 25 32
40 50


Name
MINSEC 8 mm Minimum secondary reinforcement bar

size. Applicable to shear and torsion
reinforcement in beams.
MMAG 1.0 Factor by which column design moments

are magnified for column design

considered in finding critical moment for
beam design. The upper limit is 20.
SFACE 0.0 Face of support location at start of beam,

measured from the start joint. (Only
applicable for shear - use MEMBER
OFFSET for bending)
SRA 0.0 0.0 = Orthogonal reinforcement layout

without considering torsional moment
Mxy -slabs only
-500 = Orthogonal reinforcement layout

considering Mxy
A = Skew angle considered in BAUMANN

equations. A is the angle in degrees.
TRACK 0.0 Level of detail in output
0. Critical Moment will not be printed

with beam design report.
1. For beam gives min/max steel %
detailed table of output with
additional moments calculated.
2. For beams gives area of steel
required at intermediate sections.
(see NSECTION)
WIDTH ZD Width of concrete member. This value

default is as provided as ZD in MEMBER
PROPERTIES.

10B.1 General
10B. German Codes - Steel Design Per the DIN Code

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the German code DIN 18800, Parts 1
& 2: Stahlbauten - Teil 1: Bemessung und Konstruktion (Steel structures - Part 1: Design and
construction) and Stahlbauten - Teil 2: Stabilitätsfälle - Knicken von Stäben und Stabwerken (Steel
structures - Part 2: Analysis of safety against buckling of linear members and frames)
Design of members per DIN 18800 requires the STAAD Eurozone Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.
10B.1 General
This section presents some general statements regarding the implementation of the DIN code. The
design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the principles of elastic analysis and
allowable stress design. Facilities are available for member selection as well as code checking. Two
major failure modes are recognized: failure by overstressing and failure by stability considerations.
The following sections describe the salient features of the design approach.
Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceedance of the allowable stresses or
capacities and the most economical section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria. The
code checking part of the program also checks the slenderness requirements and the stability
criteria. It is recommended that you use the following steps in performing the steel design:
1. Specify the geometry and loads and perform the analysis.

2. Specify the design parameter values if different from the default values.
3. Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection.
10B.2 AnalysisMethodology
complete flexibility in providing loading specifications and in using appropriate load factors to
create necessary loading situations. Depending upon the analysis requirements, regular stiffness

For specification of member properties of standard German steel sections, the steel section library
available in STAAD may be used. The next section describes the syntax of commands used to assign
properties from the built-in steel table. Member properties may also be specified using the User
Table facility. For more information on these facilities, refer to Section 1.7 the STAAD Technical
Reference Manual.

10B.4 Built-in German Steel Section Library

member property specification. These properties are stored in a database file. If called for, these
deformation is always considered for these members during the analysis. An example of member
A complete listing of the sections available in the built-in steel section library may be obtained
10B.4.1 IPE Shapes

These shapes are designated in the following way:
20 TO 30 TA ST IPEA120
33 36 TO 46 BY 2 TA ST IPER140
10B.4.2 HE Shapes
The designation for HE shapes is similar to that for IPE shapes.
25 TO 35 TA ST HEB300
23 56 TA ST HEA160
10B.4.3 I Shapes
I shapes are identified by the depth of the section. The following example illustrates the
designation.
14 15 TA ST I200 (indicates an I-section with 200mm depth)
10B.4.4 T Shapes
Tee sections are not input by their actual designations, but instead by referring to the I beam
shapes from which they are cut. For example,
1 5 TA T HEA220
2 8 TA T IPE120
10B.4.5 U Channels
The example below provides the command for identifying two channel sections. The former
(U70X40) has a depth of 70mm and a flange width of 40mm. The latter (U260) has a depth of
260mm.
11 TA D U70X40

27 TA D U260

Back-to-back double channels, with or without spacing between them, are available. The letter “D”
in front of the section name will specify a double channel, e.g., D U180. The spacing between the
double channels is provided following the expression “SP”.
11 TA D U180
27 TA D U280 SP 0.5 (Indicates 2 channels back-to-back spaced at 0.5 length units)
10B.4.7 Angles
Two types of specifications may be used to describe an angle. The standard angle section is specified
as follows:
16 20 TA ST L20X20X2.5
The above section signifies an angle with legs of length 20mm and a leg thickness of 2.5mm. The
above specification may be used when the local z-axis corresponds to the Z-Z axis specified in
Chapter 2. If the local y-axis corresponds to the Z-Z axis, type specification "RA" (reverse angle) may
be used.
17 21 TA RA L40X20X5

Short leg back-to-back or long leg back-to-back double angles can be specified by using the word
SD or LD, respectively, in front of the angle size. In case of an equal angle, either SD or LD will
serve the purpose. Spacing between the angles is provided by using the word SP and the spacing
value following the section name.
14 TO 20 TA SD L40X20X4 SP 0.5
21 TO 27 TA LD L40X20X4 SP 0.5

To designate circular hollow sections, use PIP followed by numerical value of the diameter and
thickness of the section in mm omitting the decimal section of the value provided for diameter.
The following example will illustrate the designation.
8 TO 28 TA ST PIP602.9 (60.3mm dia, 2.9mm wall thickness)
3 64 67 TA ST PIP40612.5 (406.4mm dia, 12.5mm wall thickness)
specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 and inside dia. of 20 in current length units. Only code
checking and no member selection will be performed if this type of specification is used.


Tube names are input by their dimensions. For example,
15 TO 25 TA ST TUB100603.6
is the specification for a tube having sides of 100mm x 60mm and the wall thickness of 3.6mm.
Tubes, like pipes can also be input by their dimensions (Height, Width and Thickness) instead of
by their table designations.
is a tube that has a height of 8, a width of 6, and a wall thickness of 0.5 in current length units.
Only code checking and no member selection will be performed for TUBE sections specified this
way.
10B.4.11 Example
SAMPLE INPUT FILE CONTAINING GERMAN SHAPES
STAAD SPACE
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0 15 140 0 0
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2 14
UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTIES GERMAN
* IPE SHAPES
1 TA ST IPEA120
* HE SHAPES
2 TA ST HEB300
* I SHAPES
3 TA ST I200
* T SHAPES
4 TA T HEA220
* U CHANNELS
5 TA ST U70X40
* DOUBLE U CHANNELS
6 TA D U260
* ANGLES
7 TA ST L20X20X2.5
* REVERSE ANGLES
8 TA RA L40X20X5
* DOUBLE ANGLES - LONG LEGS BACK TO BACK
9 TA LD L40X20X4 SP 0.5
* DOUBLE ANGLES - SHORT LEGS BACK TO BACK
10 TA SD L40X20X4 SP 0.5
* PIPES
11 TA ST PIP602.9
* PIPES
* TUBES
13 TA ST TUB100603.6
* TUBES
14 TA ST TUBE DT 8.0 WT 6.0 WT 0.5
*
FINISH


The allowable stresses used in the implementation are based on DIN 18800 (Part 1) - Section 7. The
procedures of DIN 18800 Part 2 are used for stability analysis. The basic measure of member
capacities are the allowable stresses on the member under various conditions of applied loading
such as allowable tensile stress, allowable compressive stress etc. These depend on several factors
such as cross sectional properties, slenderness factors, unsupported width to thickness ratios and so
on. Explained here is the procedure adopted in STAAD for calculating such capacities.
10B.5.1 Checks for Axial Tension

In members with axial tension, the tensile load must not exceed the tension capacity of the
member. The tension capacity of the member is calculated on the basis of the member area. STAAD
calculates the tension capacity of a given member based on a user supplied net section factor (NSF -
a default value of 1.0 is present but may be altered by changing the input value, see Table 8B.1) and
proceeds with member selection or code checking.
10B.5.2 Checks for Axial Compression

The compression capacity for members in compression is determined according to the procedure of
DIN 18800- Part 2. Compressive resistance is a function of the slenderness of the cross-section (Kl/r
ratio) and the user may control the slenderness value by modifying parameters such as KY, LY, KZ
and LZ.
10B.5.3 Checks for Bending and Shear

The bending compressive and tensile capacities are dependent on such factors as length of
outstanding legs, thickness of flanges, unsupported length of the compression flange (UNL, defaults
to member length) etc. Shear capacities are a function of web depth, web thickness etc. Users may
use a value of 1.0 or 2.0 for the TRACK parameter to obtain a listing of the bending and shear
capacities.
10B.6 Combined Loading

For members experiencing combined loading (axial force, bending, and shear), applicable
interaction formulas are checked at different locations of the member for all modeled loading
situations. Members subjected to axial force and bending are checked using the criteria of DIN
18800 (Part 1) - Section 6.1.6. In addition, for members with axial loads and bending, the criteria of
DIN 18800(Part 2) - Sections 3.4 and 3.5 are used.


You are allowed complete control over the design process through the use of parameters described
in the following table. These parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer to the
program. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used
numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements of the
situation, some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the
physical structure.
Table 10B.1-German Steel Design Parameters

Name
CODE - Must be specified as DIN18800.

Reference Manual.
BEAM 0.0 Number of sections to be checked per

member:
0. Design only for end sections.

1. Check at location of maximum MZ
along member.
2. Check ends plus location of beam
1.0 check.
3. Check at every 1/13th of the member
length and report the maximum.
CB 0 Beam coefficient n, defined in Table 9: If

Cb = 0, program will use n = 2.5 for rolled
sections and 2.0 for welded sections.


Name
CMM 1.0 Moment factor, Zeta, defined in Table 10:
1. fixed ended member with constant

moment, Zeta = 1.0
2. pin ended member with UDL, Zeta
= 1.12
3. pin ended member with central
point load, Zeta = 1.35
4. fixed ended member, Zeta
calculated from end moments.
DMAX 1.0 m Maximum allowable depth during member

selection
DMIN 0.0 m Minimum required depth during member

selection
KY 1.0 K value in local y-axis. Usually, this is the

minor axis.
KZ 1.0 K value in local z-axis. Usually, this is the

major axis.
LY Member Length in local y-axis to calculate

Length slenderness ratio.
LZ Member Length in local z-axis to calculate

PY 240 N/sq.mm Strength of steel.
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of actual to allowable

stresses
SAME 0.0 Control of sections to try during a SELECT

process:
0. Try every section of the same type as

the original.
1. Try only those with a similar name.

10B.8 Code Checking

Name
SBLT 0 Specify section as either rolled or built-up:
0. Rolled
1. Built-up
SGR 0.0 Grade of steel:
0. St 37-2
1. St 52-3
2. St E 355
TRACK 0.0 Level of detail in output file:
0. Output summary of results

1. Output summary of results plus
member capacities
2. Output detailed results
UNF 1.0 Same as above provided as a factor of

UNL Member Unrestrained member length in lateral

Length torsional buckling checks.
10B.8 Code Checking

are adequate to carry the forces transmitted to it by the loads on the structure. The adequacy is
checked per the DIN requirements.
Code checking is done using forces and moments at specified sections of the members. If the BEAM
parameter for a member is set to 1, moments are calculated at every twelfth point along the beam,
and the maximum moment about the major axis is used. When no sections are specified and the
BEAM parameter is set to zero (default), design will be based on member start and end forces. The
code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition,
governing load case, location (distance from start joint) and magnitudes of the governing forces
and moments are also printed.
Checking command.


PASSes the code checking procedure based on the forces and moments of the most recent analysis.
The section selected will be of the same type as that specified initially. For example, a member
specified initially as a channel will have a channel selected for it. Selection of members whose
properties are originally provided from a user table will be limited to sections in the user table.
Member selection cannot be performed on TUBES, PIPES, or members listed as PRISMATIC.
Sample Input data for Steel Design

UNIT METER
PARAMETER
CODE GERMAN
NSF 0.85 ALL
UNL 10.0 MEMBER 7
KY 1.2 MEMBER 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
TRACK 1.0 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL

11
Indian Codes

11 Indian Codes

11A. Indian Codes - Concrete Design per IS 456

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the Indian code IS 456 2000 Code of
Practice for Plain and Reinforced Concrete.
Design of members per IS 456 requires the STAAD India Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.

l For Beams — Prismatic (Rectangular & Square), T-Beams, and L-shapes


UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 250.
11 13 PR YD 350.
14 TO 16 PRIS YD 400. ZD 750. YB 300. ZB 200.
will be done accordingly. In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450 mm
depth and 250mm width) and the second set of members, with only depth and no width provided,
will be assumed to be circular with 350 mm diameter. The third set numbers in the above example
represents a T-shape with 750 mm flange width, 200 width, 400 mm overall depth and 100 mm
flange depth (See section 6.20.2). The program will determine whether the section is rectangular,
flanged or circular and the beam or column design.

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform design as per IS:456
(2000). Default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for
conventional design requirements. These values may be changed to suit the particular design being
performed. Table 9A.1 of this manual contains a complete list of the available parameters and their
default values. It is necessary to declare length and force units as Millimeter and Newton before
performing the concrete design.

Table 11A.1-Indian Concrete Design IS456 Parameters

Name
CODE - Must be specified as INDIAN.

Reference Manual.
BRACING 0.0 Beam Design:
A value of 1.0 means the

effect of axial force will be
taken into account for beam
design.
Column Design:
correspond to the terms

"Braced" and "Unbraced"
described in Notes 1, 2, and 3
of Clause 39.7.1 of IS456:2000.
0. The column is braced about both

axes.
1. The column is unbraced about
major axis.
2. The column is unbraced about
minor axis.
3. The column is unbraced about both
axis.
CLEAR 25 mm For beam members.
40 mm For column members
DEPTH YD Total depth to be used for design. This

value defaults to YD as provided under
MEMBER PROPERTIES.
EFACE 0.0 Face of support location at end of beam.

The parameter can also be used to check
against shear at any point from the end of
the member.
Note: Both SFACE and EFACE are input as

positive numbers.


Name
ELZ 1.0 Ratio of effective length to actual length of

column about major axis. See Note b
below.
ELY 1.0 Ratio of effective length to actual length of

column about minor axis. See Note b
below.
ENSH 0.0 Perform shear check against enhanced

shear strength as per Cl. 40.5 of IS456:2000.
l ENSH = 1.0 means ordinary shear

check to be performed ( no
enhancement of shear strength at
sections close to support)
l For ENSH = a positive value(say x ),
shear strength will be enhanced up
to a distance x from the start of the
member. This is used only when a
span of a beam is subdivided into
two or more parts. (Refer note )
l For ENSH = a negative value(say –y),
shear strength will be enhanced up
to a distance y from the end of the
member. This is used only when a
span of a beam is subdivided into
two or more parts.(Refer note)
If default value (0.0) is used the program

will calculate Length to Overall Depth
ratio. If this ratio is greater than 2.5, shear
strength will be enhanced at sections (<2d)
close to support otherwise ordinary shear
check will be performed.
FC 30 N/mm 2 Concrete Yield Stress.
FYMAIN 415 N/mm 2 Yield Stress for main reinforcing steel.
MINMAIN 10 mm Minimum main reinforcement bar size.
MAXMAIN 60 mm Maximum main reinforcement bar size.


Name

size.
MAXSEC 12 mm Maximum secondary reinforcement bar

size.
MFACE 0 Design beam for flexure at any point along

the length of the beam as specified by
SFACE and EFACE parameters.
0. (Off) Do not design at sections

1. (On) Design at specified sections
from start and end of the members
assigned.
Note: If SFACE and EFACE sections are not

previously defined, then the output will
present a warning and no flexure design
will be performed (i.e., the
MFACE parameter is ignored).
RATIO 4.0 Maximum percentage of longitudinal

reinforcement in columns.
REINF 0.0 Tied column. A value of 1.0 will mean

spiral reinforcement.
RENSH 0.0 Distance of the start or end point of the

member from its nearest support. This
parameter is used only when a span of a
beam is subdivided into two or more parts.
(Refer note)
RFACE 4.0 2. Two faced distribution about major

axis.
3. Two faced distribution about minor
axis.
4. Longitudinal reinforcement in
column is arranged equally along 4
faces.


Name
SFACE 0.0 Face of support location at start of beam. It

is used to check against shear at the face of
the support in beam design. The parameter
can also be used to check against shear at
any point from the start of the member.
SPSMAIN 25 mm Minimum clear distance between main

reinforcing bars in beam and column. For
column center to center distance between
main bars cannot exceed 300 mm.
TORSION 0.0 0. torsion to be considered in beam

design.
1. torsion to be neglected in beam
design.
TRACK 0.0 Beam Design:
0. output consists of reinforcement

details at START, MIDDLE, and
END.
1. critical moments are printed in
addition to TRACK 0.0 output.
2. required steel for intermediate
sections defined by NSECTION are
printed in addition to TRACK 1.0
output.
Column Design:
0. reinforcement details are printed.

1. column interaction analysis results
are printed in addition to TRACK
0.0 output.
2. a schematic interaction diagram and
intermediate interaction values are
printed in addition to TRACK 1.0
output.
ULY 1.0 Ratio of unsupported length to actual

length of column about minor axis. See
Note c below.


Name
ULZ 1.0 Ratio of unsupported length to actual

length of column about major axis. See
Note c below.
WIDTH ZD Width to be used for design. This value

PROPERTIES.
11A.3.1 Notes
a. You may specify reinforcing bar combinations through the BAR COMBINATION command.
Refer to Section 9A.8 for details.
b. ELY and ELZ parameters are used to calculate effective length of column to find whether it is
a short or long column. Please refer CL 25.1.2 of IS456:2000.
In CL 25.1.2 of IS456:2000, you will find two term, l and l , which STAAD calculates as:
ex ey
l l = ELZ multiplied by the member length (distance between the two nodes of the
ex
member)
l l = ELY multiplied by the member length (distance between the two nodes of the
ey
member)
For the term "D" in CL 25.1.2 of IS456:2000, STAAD uses the YD dimension of the column.
For the term "b" in CL 25.1.2 of IS456:2000, STAAD uses the ZD dimension of the column.
c. ULY and ULZ parameters are used to calculate unsupported length of column to find
minimum eccentricity. Please refer CL 25.4 of IS456:2000.
In CL 25.4 of IS456:2000, you will find an expression "unsupported length of column". This
term is calculated as
l ULZ multiplied by the member length for the Z axis
l ULY multiplied by the member length for the Y axis
d. The value of the ENSH parameter (other than 0.0 and 1.0) is used only when the span of a
beam is subdivided into two or more parts. When this condition occurs, the RENSH
parameter is also to be used.

The span of the beam is subdivided four parts, each of length L meter. The shear strength
will be enhanced up to X meter from both supports. The input should be the following:
Steps:
1. ENSH L MEMB 1 => Shear strength will be enhanced throughout the length of the
member 1, positive sign indicates length measured from start of the member
2. ENSH (X-L) MEMB 2 => Shear strength will be enhanced up to a length (X-L) of the
member 2, length measured from the start of the member
3. ENSH –L MEMB 4 => Shear strength will be enhanced throughout the length of the
member 4, negative sign indicates length measured from end of the member
4. ENSH –(X-L) MEMB 3 => Shear strength will be enhanced up to a length (X-L) of the
member 3, length measured from the end of the member
5. RENSH L MEMB 2 3 => Nearest support lies at a distance L from both the members 2
and 3.
6. DESIGN BEAM 1 TO 4=> This will enhance the shear strength up to length X from
both ends of the beam consisting of members 1 to 4 and gives spacing accordingly.
At section = y1 from start of member 1 av = y1
At section = y2 from the start of member 2 av = y2+L
At section = y3 from the end of member 3 av = y3+L
At section = y4 from end of member 4 av = y4
where τc, enhanced = 2dτc/av
At section 0.0, av becomes zero. Thus enhanced shear strength will become infinity. However
for any section shear stress cannot exceed τc, max. Hence enhanced shear strength is limited
to a maximum value of τc, max.

Slenderness effects are extremely important in designing compression members. The IS:456 code
specifies two options by which the slenderness effect can be accommodated (Clause 39.7). One
option is to perform an exact analysis which will take into account the influence of axial loads and
variable moment of inertia on member stiffness and fixed end moments, the effect of deflections on

11A.5 Beam Design
moment and forces and the effect of the duration of loads. Another option is to approximately
magnify design moments.
STAAD has been written to allow the use of the first option. To perform this type of analysis, use
the command PDELTA ANALYSIS instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS. The P-Delta analysis will
accommodate all requirements of the second- order analysis described by IS:456, except for the
effects of the duration of the loads. It is felt that this effect may be safely ignored because experts
believe that the effects of the duration of loads are negligible in a normal structural configuration.
Although ignoring load duration effects is somewhat of an approximation, it must be realized that
the approximate evaluation of slenderness effects is also an approximate method. In this method,
additional moments are calculated based on empirical formula and assumptions on sidesway
(Clause 39.7.1 and 39.7.1.1,IS: 456 - 2000). The rules of Clause 39.7.1 have been implemented in
STAAD.Pro. They will be checked if the ELY and ELZ parameters are specified.
Considering all these information, a P-Delta analysis, as performed by STAAD may be used for the
design of concrete members.
Note: To take advantage of this analysis, all the combinations of loading must be provided as
primary load cases and not as load combinations. This is due to the fact that load combinations
are just algebraic combinations of forces and moments (i.e., analysis results), whereas a primary
load case is revised during the P-delta analysis based on the deflections. Loads can be combined
prior to analysis using the REPEAT LOAD command.
Note: You must specify the appropriate load factors (e.g., 1.5 for dead load, etc.) as STAAD does
not factor the loads automatically.
11A.5 Beam Design

Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. If required the effect the axial force may be taken
into consideration. For all these forces, all active beam loadings are prescanned to identify the
critical load cases at different sections of the beams. The total number of sections considered is 13
(e.g., 0., .1, .2, .25, .3, .4, .5, .6, .7, .75, .8, .9, and 1). All of these sections are scanned to determine the
design force envelopes.

mentioned sections. Each of these sections is designed to resist both of these critical sagging and
hogging moments. Where ever the rectangular section is inadequate as singly reinforced section,
doubly reinforced section is tried. However, presently the flanged section is designed only as singly
reinforced section under sagging moment. It may also be noted all flanged sections are
automatically designed as rectangular section under hogging moment as the flange of the beam is
ineffective under hogging moment. Flexural design of beams is performed in two passes. In the first
pass, effective depths of the sections are determined with the assumption of single layer of assumed

11A.5 Beam Design
reinforcement and reinforcement requirements are calculated. After the preliminary design,
reinforcing bars are chosen from the internal database in single or multiple layers. The entire
flexure design is performed again in a second pass taking into account of the changed effective
depths of sections calculated on the basis of reinforcement provide after the preliminary design.
Final provisions of flexural reinforcements are made then. Efforts have been made to meet the
guideline for the curtailment of reinforcements as per IS:456-2000 (Clause 26.2.3). Although exact
curtailment lengths are not mentioned explicitly in the design output (finally which will be more
or less guided by the detailer taking into account of other practical consideration), user has the
choice of printing reinforcements provided by STAAD at 11 equally spaced sections from which the
final detail drawing can be prepared.
Once you have specified SFACE and EFACE parameters to indicate sections, the MFACE parameter can
be used to design for flexure at any point along the length of the beam, in addition to the equally
spaced sections normally used.

Shear reinforcement is calculated to resist both shear forces and torsional moments. Shear design
are performed at 11 equally spaced sections (0.0 to 1.0) for the maximum shear forces amongst the
active load cases and the associated torsional moments. Shear capacity calculation at different
sections without the shear reinforcement is based on the actual tensile reinforcement provided by
STAAD program. Two-legged stirrups are provided to take care of the balance shear forces acting on
these sections.
As per Clause 40.5 of IS:456-2000 shear strength of sections (< 2d where d is the effective depth)
close to support has been enhanced, subjected to a maximum value of τ .
cmax
11A.5.3 Beam Design Output

The default design output of the beam contains flexural and shear reinforcement provided at 5
equally spaced (0, .25, .5, .75 and 1.) sections along the length of the beam. User has option to get a
more detail output. All beam design outputs are given in IS units. An example of rectangular beam
design output with TRACK 2.0 output is presented below:
B E A M N O. 1 D E S I G N R E S U L T S
M20 Fe415 (Main) Fe250 (Sec.)
LENGTH: 6400.0 mm SIZE: 300.0 mm X 400.0 mm COVER: 25.0 mm
DESIGN LOAD SUMMARY (KN MET)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
SECTION |FLEXURE (Maxm. Sagging/Hogging moments)| SHEAR
(in mm) | P MZ MX Load Case | VY MX Load Case
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | 60.61 0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
533.3 | 0.00 29.63 0.00 1 | 50.51 0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
1066.7 | 0.00 53.88 0.00 1 | 40.41 0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
1600.0 | 0.00 72.73 0.00 1 | 30.31 0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
2133.3 | 0.00 86.20 0.00 1 | 20.20 0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
2666.7 | 0.00 94.28 0.00 1 | 10.10 0.00 1

11A.6 Column Design
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |

3200.0 | 0.00 96.98 0.00 1 | 0.00 0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
3733.3 | 0.00 94.28 0.00 1 | -10.10 0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
4266.7 | 0.00 86.20 0.00 1 | -20.20 0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
4800.0 | 0.00 72.73 0.00 1 | -30.31 0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
5333.3 | 0.00 53.88 0.00 1 | -40.41 0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
5866.7 | 0.00 29.63 0.00 1 | -50.51 0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
6400.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | -60.61 0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY OF REINF. AREA (Sq.mm)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
SECTION | TOP | BOTTOM | STIRRUPS
(in mm) | Reqd./Provided reinf. | Reqd./Provided reinf. | (2 legged)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 0.00/ 981.75( 2-25í )| 8í @ 180 mm
533.3 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 237.32/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í @ 180 mm
1066.7 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 450.84/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í @ 180 mm
1600.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 632.82/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í @ 180 mm
2133.3 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 773.83/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í @ 180 mm
2666.7 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 863.91/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í @ 180 mm
3200.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 894.99/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í @ 180 mm
3733.3 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 863.91/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í @ 180 mm
4266.7 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 773.83/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í @ 180 mm
4800.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 632.82/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í @ 180 mm
5333.3 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 450.84/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í @ 180 mm
5866.7 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 237.32/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í @ 180 mm
6400.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 0.00/ 981.75( 2-25í )| 8í @ 180 mm
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
11A.6 Column Design

tested to calculate reinforcement. The loading which yield maximum reinforcement is called the
critical load. Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular sections. By default, square
and rectangular columns and designed with reinforcement distributed on each side equally for the
sections under biaxial moments and with reinforcement distributed equally in two faces for
sections under uniaxial moment. User may change the default arrangement of the reinforcement
with the help of the parameter RFACE (see Table 8A.1). Depending upon the member lengths,
section dimensions and effective length coefficients specified by the user STAAD automatically
determine the criterion (short or long) of the column design. All major criteria for selecting
longitudinal and transverse reinforcement as stipulated by IS:456 have been taken care of in the
column design of STAAD. Default clear spacing between main reinforcing bars is taken to be 25
mm while arrangement of longitudinal bars.
11A.6.1 Column Design Output

Default column design output (TRACK 0.0) contains the reinforcement provided by STAAD and
the capacity of the section. With the option TRACK 1.0, the output contains intermediate results

11A.7 Bar Combination
such as the design forces, effective length coefficients, additional moments etc. All design output is
given in SI units. An example of a TRACK 2.0 output follows:
LENGTH: 3000.0 mm CROSS SECTION: 400.0 mm X 600.0 mm COVER: 40.0 mm
** GUIDING LOAD CASE: 1 END JOINT: 1 SHORT COLUMN
DESIGN FORCES (KNS-MET)

-----------------------
DESIGN AXIAL FORCE (Pu) : 2000.00
About Z About Y
INITIAL MOMENTS : 160.00 120.00
MOMENTS DUE TO MINIMUM ECC. : 52.00 40.00
SLENDERNESS RATIOS : - -
MOMENTS DUE TO SLENDERNESS EFFECT : - -
MOMENT REDUCTION FACTORS : - -
ADDITION MOMENTS (Maz and May) : - -
TOTAL DESIGN MOMENTS : 160.00 120.00
REQD. STEEL AREA : 3587.44 Sq.mm.

REQD. CONCRETE AREA: 236412.56 Sq.mm.
MAIN REINFORCEMENT : Provide 32 - 12 dia. (1.51%, 3619.11 Sq.mm.)
(Equally distributed)
TIE REINFORCEMENT : Provide 8 mm dia. rectangular ties @ 190 mm c/c
SECTION CAPACITY BASED ON REINFORCEMENT REQUIRED (KNS-MET)

----------------------------------------------------------
Puz : 3244.31 Muz1 : 269.59 Muy1 : 168.42
INTERACTION RATIO: 0.98 (as per Cl. 39.6, IS456:2000)
SECTION CAPACITY BASED ON REINFORCEMENT PROVIDED (KNS-MET)

----------------------------------------------------------
WORST LOAD CASE: 1
END JOINT: 1 Puz : 3253.88 Muz : 271.48 Muy : 170.09 IR: 0.96
============================================================================
11A.7 Bar Combination

Initially the program selects only one bar to calculate the number of bars required and area of steel
provided at each section along the length of the beam. You may use the
BAR COMBINATION command to specify two bar diameters to calculate a combination of each bar to
be provided at each section. The syntax for bar combination is given below.
START BAR COMBINATION
MD1 <bar diameter> MEMB <member list>
END BAR COMBINATION

11A.8 Wall Design in accordance with IS 456-2000
Note: The bar sizes should be specified in the order of increasing size (i.e., MD2 bar diameter
should be greater than MD1 bar diameter).
The beam length is divided into three parts, two at its ends and one at span. Ld gives the
development length to be provided at the two ends of each section.
The typical output for bar combination is shown below:

OUTPUT FOR BAR COMBINATION
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| M A I N R E I N F O R C E M E N T |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
SECTION | 0.0- 1600.0 | 1600.0- 4800.0 | 4800.0- 6400.0 |
| mm | mm | mm |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOP | 2-16í | 2-16í | 2-16í |
| in 1 layer(s) | in 1 layer(s) | in 1 layer(s) |
Ast Reqd| 0.00 | 0.00 | 0.00 |
Prov| 402.29 | 402.29 | 402.29 |
Ld (mm) | 752.2 | 1175.3 | 752.2 |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
BOTTOM | 4-16í | 2-16í + 2-25í | 4-16í |
Ast Reqd| 632.82 | 894.99 | 632.82 |
Prov| 804.57 | 1384.43 | 804.57 |
Ld (mm) | 752.2 | 1175.3 | 752.2 |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
============================================================================

The design of walls in accordance with IS 456-2000 is available in STAAD.Pro.
The design is performed for in-plane shear, in-plane & out-of-plane bending, and out-of-plane
shear. The wall has to be modeled using STAAD’s Surface elements (Refer to Section 5.13.3 of the
Technical Reference Manual). The use of the Surface element enables the designer to treat the
entire wall as one entity. It greatly simplifies the modeling of the wall and adds clarity to the
analysis and design output. The results are presented in the context of the entire wall rather than
individual finite elements thereby allowing users to quickly locate required information.
The program reports shear wall design results for each load case/combination for the specified
number of sections given in the SURFACE DIVISION command (default value is 10) command. The
shear wall is designed at these horizontal sections. The output includes the required horizontal and
vertical distributed reinforcing, the concentrated (in-plane bending) edge reinforcing and the link
required for out-of-plane shear.
Refer to Section 5.55 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional details on shear wall design.
11A.8.1 Design Parameters

CODE INDIAN
shearwall-parameters

DESIGN SHEARWALL LIST shearwall-list
END
The following table explains the parameters used in the shear wall design.
Table 11A.2-Shear Wall Design Parameters

Name
CLEAR 25 mm Clear concrete cover, in current

units.
EMAX 36 Maximum size of vertical

reinforcing bars located in edge
zones (range 6mm – 36mm). If
input is 6 (integer number) the
program will assume 6 mm
diameter bar.
EMIN 8 Minimum size of vertical

reinforcing bars located in edge
zones (range 6mm – 36mm). If
input is 6 (integer number) the
program will assume 6 mm
diameter bar.
FYMAIN 415 Mpa Yield strength of steel, in

current units.
FC 30 Mpa Compressive strength of

concrete, in current units.
HMIN 8 Minimum size of horizontal

reinforcing bars (range 6 mm –
36 mm). If input is 6 (integer
number) the program will
HMAX 36 Maximum size of horizontal

reinforcing bars (range 6 mm –
36 mm). If input is 6 (integer
KSLENDER 1.0 Slenderness factor for finding

effective height.


Name
LMAX 16 Maximum size of links (range

6mm – 16mm). If input is 6
(integer number) the program
will assume 6 mm diameter
bar.
LMIN 6 Minimum size of links (range

6mm – 16mm). If input is 6
(integer number) the program
will assume 6 mm diameter
bar.
TWOLAYERED 0 Reinforcement placement

mode:
0. single layer, each

direction
1. two layers, each
direction
VMAX 36 Maximum size of vertical

reinforcing bars (range 6mm –
36mm). If input is 6 (integer
VMIN 8 Minimum size of vertical

reinforcing bars (range 6mm –
36mm). If input is 6 (integer
1. Command SET DIVISION 12 indicates that the surface boundary node-to-node segments
will be subdivided into 12 fragments prior to finite element mesh generation.
2. Four surfaces are defined by the SURFACE INCIDENCES command.
3. The SUPPORTS command includes the new support generation routine. For instance, the line
2 to 5 gen pin assigns pinned supports to all nodes between nodes 2 and 5. As the node-
to-node distances were previously subdivided by the SET DIVISION 12 command, there will
be an additional 11 nodes between nodes 2 and 5. As a result, all 13 nodes will be assigned
pinned supports. Please note that the additional 11 nodes are not individually accessible to
the user. They are created by the program to enable the finite element mesh generation and
to allow application of boundary constraints.
4. Surface thickness and material constants are specified by the SURFACE PROPERTY and

SURFACE CONSTANTS, respectively.
5. The shear wall design commands are listed between lines START SHEARWALL DES and END.
The CODE command selects the design code that will be the basis for the design. For Indian
code the parameter is INDIAN. The DESIGN SHEARWALL LIST command is followed by a list
of previously defined Surface elements intended as shear walls and/or shear wall
components.
11A.8.2 Technical Overview

The program implements provisions of section 32 of IS 456-2000 and relevant provisions as
referenced therein, for all active load cases. The following steps are performed for each of the
horizontal sections of the wall.
Checking of slenderness limit
The slenderness checking is done as per clause no. 32.2.3. The default effective height is the height
of the wall. User can change the effective height. The limit for slenderness is taken as 30.
Design for in-plane bending and vertical load
(denoted by Mz & Fy in the shear wall force output)
Walls when subjected to combined in-plane horizontal and vertical forces produce in-plane
bending in conjunction with vertical load. According to clause no. 32.3.1, in-plane bending may be
neglected in case a horizontal cross section of the wall is always under compression due combined
effect of horizontal and vertical loads. Otherwise, the section is checked for combined vertical load
and in-plane moment as column with axial load and uni-axial bending. For this purpose, the depth
is taken as 0.8 x horizontal length of wall and breadth is the thickness of the wall. The
reinforcement is concentrated at both ends (edges) of the wall. The edge reinforcement is assumed
to be distributed over a length of 0.2 times horizontal length on each side. Minimum
reinforcements are according to clause no. 32.5.(a). Maximum 4% reinforcement is allowed.
Design for in-plane shear
(denoted by Fxy in the shear wall force output)
By default, the program does not design only at the critical section but at all the horizontal
sections. By suitable use of the surface division command, design at critical section as per clause no.
32.4.1 can be performed.
The design for in-plane shear is done as per clause no. 32.4. The nominal shear stress is calculated as
per clause no. 32.4.2 and it is checked with the maximum allowable shear stress as per clause no.
32.4.2.1. The design shear strength of concrete is calculated as per clause no. 32.4.3. Design of shear
reinforcement is done as per clause no. 32.4.4. Minimum reinforcements are as per clause no. 32.5.

Design for vertical load and out-of-plane vertical bending
(denoted by Fy and My respectively in the shear wall force output)
Apart from the in-plane bending and horizontal shear force, the wall is also subjected to out-of-
plane bending in the vertical and horizontal directions. The part of the wall which is not having
edge reinforcements (i.e., a zone of depth 0.6 x Length of the wall), is designed again as column
under axial load (i.e., vertical load) and out-of-plane vertical bending. The minimum
reinforcements and maximum allowable spacings of reinforcements are as per clause no. 32.5
Design for out-of-plane horizontal bending
(denoted by Mx in the shear wall force output)
The horizontal reinforcement which is already provided for in-plane shear is checked against out-
of-plane horizontal bending. The wall is assumed as a slab for this purpose.
Design for out-of-plane shears
(denoted by Qx and Qy in the shear wall force output)
The out-of-plane shear arises from out-of-plane loading. The nominal shear stresses are calculated
as per clause no. 40.1. Maximum allowable shear stresses are as per table 20. For shear force in the
vertical direction, shear strength of concrete section is calculated as per section 4.1 of SP 16 : 1980
considering vertical reinforcement as tension reinforcement. Similarly, for shear force in the
horizontal direction, shear strength of concrete section is calculated considering horizontal
reinforcement as tension reinforcement. Shear reinforcements in the form of links are computed as
per the provisions of clause no. 40.4.
11A.8.3 Example
The following example illustrates the input for the definition of shear wall and design of the wall.
…
SET DIVISION 12
SURFACE INCIDENCES
2 5 37 34 SUR 1
19 16 65 68 SUR 2
11 15 186 165 SUR 3
10 6 138 159 SUR 4
…
SURFACE PROPERTY
1 TO 4 THI 18
SUPPORTS
1 7 14 20 PINNED
2 to 5 gen pin
6 to 10 gen pin
11 to 15 gen pin
19 to 16 gen pin
…
SURFACE CONSTANTS
E 2.17185e+007

POISSON 0.17
DENSITY 23.5616
ALPHA 1e-005
…
START SHEARWALL DES
CODE INDIAN
UNIT NEW MMS
FC 25
FYMAIN 415
TWO 1
VMIN 12
HMIN 12
EMIN 12
DESIGN SHEA LIST 1 TO 4
END
11A.8.4 Shear Wall Design With Opening

The Surface element has been enhanced to allow design of shear walls with rectangular openings.
The automatic meshing algorithm has been improved to allow variable divisions along wall and
opening(s) edges. Design and output are available for user selected locations.
Shear walls modeled in STAAD.Pro may include an unlimited number of openings. Due to the
presence of openings, the wall may be comprise of different wall panels of varying types.
1. Shear wall set-up
Definition of a shear wall starts with a specification of the surface element perimeter nodes,
meshing divisions along node-to-node segments, opening(s) corner coordinates, and
meshing divisions of four edges of the opening(s).
SURFACE INCIDENCE n1, ..., ni SURFACE s DIVISION sd1, ..., sdj -
RECOPENING x1 y1 z1 x2 y2 z2 x3 y3 z3 x4 y4 z4 DIVISION od1, ..., odk
Where:
n1, … , ni — node numbers on the perimeter of the shear wall,
s — surface ordinal number,
sd1, … , sdj — number of divisions for each of the node-to-node distance on

the surface perimeter,
x1 y1 z1 (…) — coordinates of the corners of the opening,
od1, … , odk — divisions along edges of the opening.
Note: If the sd1, … , sdj or the od1, … , odk list does not include all node-to-node
segments, or if any of the numbers listed equals zero, then the corresponding division
number is set to the default value (=10, or as previously input by the SET DIVISION
command).
Default locations for stress/force output, design, and design output are set as follows:
SURFACE DIVISION X xd

SURFACE DIVISION Y yd
Where:
xd — number of divisions along X axis,
yd — number of divisions along Y axis.
Note: xd and yd represent default numbers of divisions for each edge of the surface where
output is requested. The output is provided for sections located between division
segments. For example, if the number of divisions = 2, then the output will be produced
for only one section (at the center of the edge).
2. Stress/force output printing
Values of internal forces may be printed out for any user-defined section of the wall. The
general format of the command is as follows:
PRINT SURFACE FORCE (ALONG ξ) (AT a) (BETWEEN d1, d2) LIST s1, … ,si
Where:
ξ — local axis of the surface element (X or Y),
a — distance along the ξ axis from start of the member to the full cross-
section of the wall,
d1, d2 — coordinates in the direction orthogonal to ξ , delineating a fragment

of the full cross-section for which the output is desired. **
s1, … ,si — list of surfaces for output generation
** The range currently is taken in terms of local axis. If the local axis is directed away from
the surface, the negative range is to be entered.
Note: If command ALONG is omitted, direction Y (default) is assumed. If command AT is

omitted, output is provided for all sections along the specified (or default) edge. Number
of sections will be determined from the SURFACE DIVISION X or SURFACE DIVISION Y
input values. If the BETWEEN command is omitted, the output is generated based on full
cross-section width.
3. Definition of wall panels
Input syntax for panel definition is as follows:
START PANEL DEFINITION
SURFACE i PANEL j WALL x1 y1 z1 x2 y2 z2 x3 y3 z3 x4 y4 z4
END PANEL DEFINITION
Where:
i = ordinal surface number,

j = ordinal panel number,
x1 y1 z1 (…) = coordinates of the corners of the panel,
4. Shear wall design
The program implements different provisions of design of walls as per code IS 456. General
syntax of the design command is as follows:
(…)
DESIGN SHEARWALL (AT f2) LIST s
ENDSHEARWALL DESIGN
Note: If the command AT is omitted, the design proceeds for all cross sections of the wall
or panels, as applicable, defined by the SURFACE DIVISION X or SURFACE DIVISION Y
input values.
a. No panel definition.
Design is performed for the specified horizontal full cross-section, located at a

distance c from the origin of the local coordinates system. If opening is found then
reinforcement is provided along sides of openings. The area of horizontal and vertical
bars provided along edges of openings is equal to that of the respective interrupted
bars.
b. Panels have been defined.
Only wall panel design is supported in Indian code.

11B. Indian Codes - Concrete Design per IS 13920

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the Indian code IS 13920 Code of
Practice for Ductile Detailing of Reinforced Concrete Structures Subjected to Seismic Forces.
Designs per IS 13920 satisfy all provisions of IS 456 - 2000 and IS 13920 for beams and columns (See
"Indian Codes - Concrete Design per IS 456" on page 429).
Design of members per IS 1320 requires the STAAD India Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.

Earthquake motion often induces force large enough to cause inelastic deformations in the
structure. If the structure is brittle, sudden failure could occur. But if the structure is made to
behave ductile, it will be able to sustain the earthquake effects better with some deflection larger
than the yield deflection by absorption of energy. Therefore ductility is also required as an essential
element for safety from sudden collapse during severe shocks.
11B.2 Section Types for Concrete Design

l For Beams: Prismatic (Rectangular & Square) and T-shape

l For Columns : Prismatic (Rectangular, Square, and Circular)

The program contains a number of parameters that are needed to perform design as per IS 13920. It
accepts all parameters that are needed to perform design as per IS:456. Over and above it has some
other parameters that are required only when designed is performed as per IS:13920. Default
Table 8A1.1 of this manual contains a complete list of the available parameters and their default

Table 11B.1-Indian Concrete Design IS 13920 Parameters

Name
CODE - Must be specified as IS13920

Reference Manual.
BRACING 0.0 Beam Design
1.0 = the effect of axial force will be

taken into account for beam design.
Column Design: Correspond to the terms

"Braced" and "Unbraced" described in
Notes 1, 2, and 3 of Clause 39.7.1 of
IS456:2000.
1.0 = the column is unbraced about

major axis.
minor axis.
both axis.
DEPTH YD Total depth to be used for design. This

value defaults to YD (depth of section in Y
direction) as provided under MEMBER
PROPERTIES.
CLEAR 25 mm For beam members.
40 mm For column members
Note: This is the clear cover to the

outermost main reinforcing bar. It is not
the clear cover for the stirrups or the tie
bars.


Name
COMBINE 0.0 Default value means there will be no

member combination.
1.0 = no printout of sectional

force and critical load for
combined member in the
output.
2.0 = printout of sectional

force for combined member
in the output.
3.0 = printout of both

sectional force and critical
load for combined member
in the output. ***

The parameter can also be used to check
against shear at any point from the end of
the member.

positive numbers.*
ELZ 1.0 Ratio of effective length to actual length of

column about major axis.
ELY 1.0 Ratio of effective length to actual length of

column about minor axis.


Name
ENSH 0.0 Perform shear check against enhanced

shear strength as per Cl. 40.5 of IS456:2000.
1.0 = ordinary shear check to

be performed ( no
enhancement of shear
strength at sections close to
support)
a positive value(say x ) =
shear strength will be
enhanced up to a distance x
from the start of the
member. This is used only
when a span of a beam is
subdivided into two or more
parts. (Refer note after Table
8A.1 )
a negative value(say –y) =

shear strength will be
enhanced up to a distance y
from the end of the member.
This is used only when a
span of a beam is subdivided
into two or more parts.(Refer
note after Table 8A.1)
0.0 = the program will

calculate Length to Overall
Depth ratio. If this ratio is
greater than 2.5, shear
strength will be enhanced at
sections (<2d) close to
support otherwise ordinary
shear check will be
performed.


Name
EUDL None Equivalent u.d.l on span of the beam. This

load value must be the unfactored load on
span. During design the load value is
multiplied by a factor 1.2. If no u.d.l is
defined factored shear force due to gravity
load on span will be taken as zero. No
elastic or plastic moment will be
calculated. Shear design will be performed
based on analysis result.(Refer note)
FYMAIN 415 N/mm 2 Yield Stress for main reinforcing steel.
FC 30 N/mm 2 Concrete Yield Stress.
GLD None Gravity load number to be considered for

calculating equivalent u.d.l on span of the
beam, in case no EUDL is mentioned in
the input. This loadcase can be any static
loadcase containing MEMBER LOAD on
the beam which includes UNI, CON, LIN
and TRAP member loading. CMOM
member loading is considered only when
it is specified in local direction. FLOOR
LOAD is also considered.
The load can be primary or combination

load. For combination load only load
numbers included in load combination is
considered. The load factors are ignored.
Internally the unfactored load is
multiplied by a factor 1.2 during design.
If both EUDL and GLD parameters are

mentioned in the input mentioned EUDL
will be considered in design
Note: No dynamic (Response spectrum,

1893, Time History) and moving load
cases are considered.
CMOM member loading in global direction is

not considered.
UMOM member loading is not considered.


Name
HLINK Spacing of Longer dimension of the rectangular

longitudinal confining hoop measured to its outer face.
bars measured It shall not exceed 300 mm as per Cl. 7.4.8.
to the outer If the HLINK value as provided in the input
face file does not satisfy the clause the value
will be internally assumed as the default
one. This parameter is valid for rectangular
column.
IPLM 0.0 Default value calculates elastic/plastic

hogging and sagging moments of
resistance of beam at its ends.
1.0 = calculation of
elastic/plastic hogging and
sagging moments of
resistance of beam to be
ignored at start node of
beam. This implies no
support exists at start node.
-1.0 = calculation of
sagging moments of
considered at start node of
beam. . This implies support
exists at start node.
sagging moments of
ignored at end node of beam.
This implies no support exists
at end node.
sagging moments of
considered at end node of
beam. . This implies support
exists at end node. **


Name
IMB 0.0 Default value calculates elastic/plastic

hogging and sagging moments of
resistance of beam at its ends.
sagging moments of
ignored at both ends of
beam. This implies no
support exist at either end of
the member.
sagging moments of
considered at both ends of
beam. This implies support
exist at both ends of the
member.**
MAXMAIN 60 mm Maximum main reinforcement bar size.

size.
MAXSEC 12 mm Maximum secondary reinforcement bar

size.
PLASTIC 0.0 Default value calculates elastic hogging

and sagging moments of resistance of
beam at its ends.
1.0 = plastic hogging and

sagging moments of
calculated at its ends.
RATIO 4.0 Maximum percentage of longitudinal

reinforcement in columns.
REINF 0.0 0.0 = Tied column (default)
1.0 = spiral reinforcement


Name
RENSH 0.0 Distance of the start or end point of the

member from its nearest support. This
parameter is used only when a span of a
beam is subdivided into two or more parts.
Refer note after Table 9A.1
RFACE 4.0 4.0 = longitudinal reinforcement in

column is arranged equally along four
faces.
2.0 invokes two faced distribution about

major axis.
3.0 invokes two faced distribution about

minor axis.
SFACE 0.0 Face of support location at start of beam. It

is used to check against shear at the face of
the support in beam design. The parameter
can also be used to check against shear at
any point from the start of the member.*

positive numbers.*
SPSMAIN 25 mm Minimum clear distance between main

reinforcing bars in beam and column. For
column center to center distance between
main bars cannot exceed 300 mm.
TORISION 0.0 0.0 = torsion to be considered in beam

design.
1.0 = torsion to be neglected in beam

design.


Name
0.0 = output consists of

reinforcement details at
START, MIDDLE and END.
1.0 = critical moments are

printed in addition to
TRACK 0.0 output.
2.0 = required steel for

intermediate sections defined
by NSECTION are printed in
addition to TRACK 1.0
output.
Column Design:
0.0 = reinforcement details

are printed.
1.0 = column interaction

analysis results are printed in
addition to TRACK 0.0
output.
2.0 = a schematic interaction

diagram and intermediate
interaction values are printed
in addition to TRACK 1.0
output.
ULY 1.0 Ratio of unsupported length to actual

length of column about minor axis.
ULZ 1.0 Ratio of unsupported length to actual

length of column about major axis.
WIDTH ZD Width to be used for design. This value

PROPERTIES.
Bar combination has been introduced for detailing. Please refer section 11B.6 for details.
* EFACE and SFACE command is not valid for member combination.
** IPLM and IMB commands are not valid for member combination. These commands are ignored
for members forming physical member.
*** The purpose of COMBINE command is the following:

1. If a beam spanning between two supports is subdivided into many sub-beams this parameter
will combine them into one member. It can also be used to combine members to form one
continuous beam spanning over more than two supports.
2. When two or more members are combined during design plastic or elastic moments will be
calculated at the column supports. At all the intermediate nodes (if any) this calculation
will be ignored.
Note: Please note that the program only recognizes column at right angle to the beam.
Inclined column support is ignored.
3. It will calculate sectional forces at 13 sections along the length of the combined member.
4. It will calculate critical loads (similar to that of Design Load Summary) for all active load
cases during design.
Beams will be combined only when DESIGN BEAM command is issued.
The following lines should be satisfied during combination of members:
1. Members to be combined should have same sectional properties if any single span between
two column supports of a continuous beam is subdivided into several members.
2. Members to be combined should have same constants (E, Poi ratio, alpha, density, and beta
angle)
3. Members to be combined should lie in one straight line.
4. Members to be combined should be continuous.
5. Vertical members (i.e., columns) cannot be combined.
6. Same member cannot be used more than once to form two different combined members.
7. The maximum number of members that can be combined into one member is 299.
Note: Sectional forces and critical load for combined member output will only be available when
all the members combined are successfully designed in both flexure and shear.
ENSH and RENSH parameters will have to be provided (as and when necessary) even if physical
member has been formed.
11B.3.1 Example
The following lines show a standard example for design to be performed in IS 13920.
STAAD SPACE
UNIT METER MTON
JOINT COORDINATES
…
MEMBER INCIDENCES
…
MEMBER PROPERTY INDIAN
…

11B.4 Beam Design
CONSTANTS
…
SUPPORTS
…
DEFINE 1893 LOAD
ZONE 0.05 I 1 K 1 B 1
SELFWEIGHT
JOINT WEIGHT
…
LOAD 1 SEISMIC LOAD IN X DIR
1893 LOAD X 1
LOAD 2 SEISMIC LOAD IN Z DIR
1893 LOAD Z 1
LOAD 3 DL
MEMBER LOAD
…… UNI GY -5
LOAD 4 LL
MEMBER LOAD
……. UNI GY -3
LOAD COMB 5 1.5(DL+LL)
3 1.5 4 1.5
LOAD COMB 6 1.2(DL+LL+SLX)
1 1.2 3 1.2 4 1.2
LOAD COMB 7 1.2(DL+LL-SLX)
1 1.2 3 1.2 4 -1.2
LOAD COMB 8 1.2(DL+LL+SLZ)
2 1.2 3 1.2 4 1.2
LOAD COMB 9 1.2(DL+LL-SLZ)
2 1.2 3 1.2 4 -1.2
PDELTA ANALYSIS
LOAD LIST 5 TO 9
CODE IS13920
UNIT MMS NEWTON
FYMAIN 415 ALL
FC 20 ALL
MINMAIN 12 ALL
MAXMAIN 25 ALL
TRACK 2.0 ALL
*** Unfactored gravity load on members 110 to 112 is 8 t/m (DL+LL) i.e., 78.46 New/mm
EUDL 78.46 MEMB 110 TO 112
** Members to be combined into one physical member
COMBINE 3.0 MEMB 110 TO 112
*** Plastic moment considered
PLASTIC 1.0 MEMB 110 TO 112
DESIGN BEAM 110 TO 112
DESIGN COLUMN …
END CONCRETE DESIGN
FINISH
11B.4 Beam Design

Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. If required the effect of the axial force may be
taken into consideration. For all these forces, all active beam loadings are prescanned to identify the
critical load cases at different sections of the beams. The total number of sections considered is 13.
All of these sections are scanned to determine the design force envelopes.
For design to be performed as per IS:13920 the width of the member shall not be less than 200 mm
(Clause 6.1.3). Also the member shall preferably have a width-to depth ratio of more than 0.3
(Clause 6.1.2).

11B.4 Beam Design
The factored axial stress on the member should not exceed 0.1fck (Clause 6.1.1) for all active load
cases. If it exceeds allowable axial stress no design will be performed.
11B.4.1 Design for Flexure

Design procedure is same as that for IS 456. However while designing following criteria are satisfied
as per IS-13920:
1. The minimum grade of concrete shall preferably be M20. (Clause 5.2)
2. Steel reinforcements of grade Fe415 or less only shall be used. (Clause 5.3)
3. The minimum tension steel ratio on any face, at any section, is given by (Clause 6.2.1b)
ρmin = 0.24√fck/fy
The maximum steel ratio on any face, at any section, is given by (Clause 6.2.2)
ρmax = 0.025
4. The positive steel ratio at a joint face must be at least equal to half the negative steel at that
face. (Clause 6.2.3)
5. The steel provided at each of the top and bottom face, at any section, shall at least be equal
to one-fourth of the maximum negative moment steel provided at the face of either joint.
(Clause 6.2.4)
11B.4.2 Design for Shear

The shear force to be resisted by vertical hoops is guided by the Clause 6.3.3 of IS 13920:1993
revision. Elastic sagging and hogging moments of resistance of the beam section at ends are
considered while calculating shear force. Plastic sagging and hogging moments of resistance can
also be considered for shear design if PLASTIC parameter is mentioned in the input file. (Refer
Table 8A1.1)
Shear reinforcement is calculated to resist both shear forces and torsional moments. Procedure is
same as that of IS 456.
The following criteria are satisfied while performing design for shear as per Cl. 6.3.5 of IS-13920:
The spacing of vertical hoops over a length of 2d at either end of the beam shall not exceed
a. d/4
b. 8 times the diameter of the longitudinal bars
In no case this spacing is less than 100 mm.
The spacing calculated from above, if less than that calculated from IS 456 consideration is
provided.

11B.4 Beam Design
11B.4.3 Beam Design Output

The default design output of the beam contains flexural and shear reinforcement provided at 5
equally spaced sections along the length of the beam. User has option to get a more detail output.
All beam design outputs are given in IS units. An example of rectangular beam design output with
the TRACK 2.0 is presented below:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
(in mm) | P MZ MX Load Case | VY MX Load Case
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | 60.61 0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
533.3 | 0.00 29.63 0.00 1 | 50.51 0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
1066.7 | 0.00 53.88 0.00 1 | 40.41 0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
1600.0 | 0.00 72.73 0.00 1 | 30.31 0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
2133.3 | 0.00 86.20 0.00 1 | 20.20 0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
2666.7 | 0.00 94.28 0.00 1 | 10.10 0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
3200.0 | 0.00 96.98 0.00 1 | 0.00 0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
3733.3 | 0.00 94.28 0.00 1 | -10.10 0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
4266.7 | 0.00 86.20 0.00 1 | -20.20 0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
4800.0 | 0.00 72.73 0.00 1 | -30.31 0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
5333.3 | 0.00 53.88 0.00 1 | -40.41 0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
5866.7 | 0.00 29.63 0.00 1 | -50.51 0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
6400.0 | 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 | -60.61 0.00 1
| 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 |
*** DESIGN SHEAR FORCE AT SECTION 0.0 IS 60.61 KN.
- CLAUSE 6.3.3 OF IS-13920
*** DESIGN SHEAR FORCE AT SECTION 6400.0 IS 60.61 KN.
- CLAUSE 6.3.3 OF IS-13920
NOTE :
MOMENT OF RESISTANCE IS CALCULATED BASED ON THE AREA OF STEEL PROVIDED.
IF AREA OF STEEL PROVIDED IS MUCH HIGHER COMPARED TO AREA OF STEEL
REQUIRED MOMENT OF RESISTANCE WILL INCREASE WHICH MAY INCREASE DESIGN
SHEAR FORCE.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
STAAD SPACE -- PAGE NO. 7
0.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 0.00/ 981.75( 2-25í )| 8í @ 100 mm
533.3 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 281.26/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í @ 180 mm
1066.7 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 450.84/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í @ 180 mm
1600.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 632.82/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í @ 180 mm
2133.3 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 773.83/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í @ 180 mm
2666.7 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 863.91/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í @ 180 mm
3200.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 894.99/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í @ 180 mm
3733.3 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 863.91/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í @ 180 mm
4266.7 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 773.83/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í @ 180 mm
4800.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 632.82/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í @ 180 mm

11B.5 Column Design
5333.3 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 450.84/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í @ 180 mm

5866.7 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 281.26/1472.62( 3-25í )| 8í @ 180 mm
6400.0 | 0.00/ 402.12( 2-16í )| 0.00/ 981.75( 2-25í )| 8í @ 100 mm
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
11B.5 Column Design

Columns are designed for axial forces and biaxial moments per IS 456:2000. Columns are also
designed for shear forces as per Clause 7.3.4. All major criteria for selecting longitudinal and
transverse reinforcement as stipulated by IS:456 have been taken care of in the column design of
STAAD. However following clauses have been satisfied to incorporate provisions of IS 13920:
l The minimum grade of concrete shall preferably be M20. (Clause 5.2)
l Steel reinforcements of grade Fe415 or less only shall be used. (Clause 5.3)
l The minimum dimension of column member shall not be less than 200 mm. For columns
having unsupported length exceeding 4m, the shortest dimension of column shall not be
less than 300 mm. (Clause 7.1.2)
l The ratio of the shortest cross-sectional dimension to the perpendicular dimension shall
preferably be not less than 0.4. (Clause 7.1.3)
l The spacing of hoops shall not exceed half the least lateral dimension of the column, except
where special confining reinforcement is provided. (Clause 7.3.3)
l Special confining reinforcement shall be provided over a length l from each joint face,
o
towards mid span, and on either side of any section, where flexural yielding may occur. The
length l shall not be less than a) larger lateral dimension of the member at the section
o
where yielding occurs, b) 1/6 of clear span of the member, and c) 450 mm. (Clause 7.4.1)
l The spacing of hoops used as special confining reinforcement shall not exceed ¼ of
minimum member dimension but need not be less than 75 mm nor more than 100 mm.
(Clause 7.4.6)
l The area of cross-section of hoops provided are checked against the provisions for minimum
area of cross-section of the bar forming rectangular, circular or spiral hoops, to be used as
special confining reinforcement. (Clause 7.4.7 and 7.4.8)
11B.5.1 Column Design Output

Default column design output (TRACK 0.0) contains the reinforcement provided by STAAD and
the capacity of the section. With the option TRACK 1.0, the output contains intermediate results
such as the design forces, effective length coefficients, additional moments etc. All design output is
given in SI units. An example of a column design output (with option TRACK 1.0) is given below.
============================================================================
M20
Fe415 (Main)
Fe415 (Sec.)

11B.6 Bar Combination
LENGTH: 3000.0 mm CROSS SECTION:

350.0 mm X 400.0 mm COVER: 40.0 mm
** GUIDING LOAD CASE: 5 END JOINT:
2 SHORT COLUMN
-----------------------
DESIGN AXIAL FORCE (Pu)
: 226.7
About Z
About Y
INITIAL MOMENTS
: 0.64
146.28
MOMENTS DUE TO MINIMUM ECC.
: 4.53 4.53
SLENDERNESS RATIOS
: -
-
MOMENTS DUE TO SLENDERNESS EFFECT :
-
-
MOMENT REDUCTION FACTORS
: -
-
ADDITION MOMENTS (Maz and May)
: -
-
TOTAL DESIGN MOMENTS
: 4.53
146.28
** GUIDING LOAD CASE: 5
Along Z Along Y
DESIGN SHEAR FORCES
: 43.31
76.08
MAIN REINFORCEMENT : Provide 12 - 20 dia.
(2.69%, 3769.91 Sq.mm.)
(Equally distributed)
CONFINING REINFORCEMENT : Provide 10 mm dia.
rectangular ties @ 85 mm c/c
over a length 500.0 mm from each joint face towards
midspan as per Cl. 7.4.6 of IS-13920.
TIE REINFORCEMENT
: Provide 10 mm dia. rectangular ties @ 175 mm c/c
SECTION CAPACITY (KNS-MET)
--------------------------
Puz : 2261.52 Muz1 :
178.71 Muy1 : 150.75
INTERACTION RATIO: 1.00 (as per Cl. 39.6, IS456:2000)
============================================================================
********************END OF COLUMN DESIGN RESULTS********************
11B.6 Bar Combination

Initially the program selects only one bar to calculate the number of bars required and area of steel
provided at each section along the length of the beam. You may use the

11B.7 Verification Example
BAR COMBINATION command to specify two bar diameters to calculate a combination of each bar to
be provided at each section. The syntax for bar combination is given below.
START BAR COMBINATION
ENDBAR COMBINATION
Note: The bar sizes should be specified in the order of increasing size (i.e., MD2 bar diameter
should be greater than MD1 bar diameter).
The beam length is divided into three parts, two at its ends and one at span. Ld gives the
development length to be provided at the two ends of each section.
The typical output for bar combination is shown below:

OUTPUT FOR BAR COMBINATION
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
| M A I N R E I N F O R C E M E N T |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
SECTION | 0.0- 1600.0 | 1600.0- 4800.0 | 4800.0- 6400.0 |
| mm | mm | mm |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOP | 2-16í | 2-16í | 2-16í |
Ast Reqd| 0.00 | 0.00 | 0.00 |
Prov| 402.29 | 402.29 | 402.29 |
Ld (mm) | 752.2 | 1175.3 | 752.2 |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
BOTTOM | 4-16í | 2-16í + 2-25í | 4-16í |
Ast Reqd| 632.82 | 894.99 | 632.82 |
Prov| 804.57 | 1384.43 | 804.57 |
Ld (mm) | 752.2 | 1175.3 | 752.2 |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
============================================================================

Sample example showing calculation of design shear force as per Clause 6.3.3
Figure 11B.1 - Example problem

11B.7.1 For Beam No. 1 and 2

Section width, b = 250 mm and depth, D = 500 mm
Characteristic strength of steel, fy = 415 N/mm 2
Characteristic strength of concrete, fck = 20 N/mm 2
Clear cover to the main reinforcing bar = 25 mm
Bar diameter = 12 mm
Effective depth, d = 469 mm
Eudl, w = 6.5 N/mm 2
Length, L = 4,000 mm
A = 339.29 mm 2
st_Top_A
A = 226.19 mm 2
st_Bot_A
A = 226.19 mm 2
st_Top_B
A = 339.29 mm 2
st_Bot_B
Steps
Calculation of Simple Shear

Simple shear from gravity Va = Vb = 1.2 * w * L / 2 = 15600N
load on span =
Calculation of Moment Of Resistances Based On Area Of Steel Provided
Sagging Moment Of 0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_A * d * = 36768130.05 N
Resistance of End A Mu,
( 1 - Ast_Bot_A * fy / b * d * fck)
as =
Hogging Moment Of 0.87 * fy * Ast_Top_A * d * = 54003057.45 N
Resistance of End A
( 1 - Ast_Top_A * fy / b * d * fck)
Micah =
Sagging Moment Of 0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_B * d * = 54003057.45 N
Resistance of End A Mu,
( 1 - Ast_Bot_B * fy / b * d * fck)
bs =
Hogging Moment Of 0.87 * fy * Ast_Top_B * d * ( 1 - Ast_Top_B* = 36768130.05 N
Resistance of End A Mob fy / b * d * fck)
=
Calculation of shear force due to the formation of a plastic hinge at both ends of the beam plus the
factored gravity load on the span.

Figure 11B.2 - Sway to right
FIG1: SWAY TO RIGHT
Vur,a = Va - 1.4 [ ( Mu,as + Mu,bh ) / L ] = -10137.69104 N

Vur,b = Va + 1.4 [ ( Mu,as + Mu,bh ) / L ] = 41337.69104 N
Figure 11B.3 - Sway to left
Vul,a = Va + 1.4 [ ( Mu,ah + Mu,bs ) / L ] = 53402.14022 N
Vul,b = Va - 1.4 [ ( Mu,ah + Mu,bs ) / L ] = - 22202.14022 N
Design Shear Force
Shear Force From Analysis At End A , Va,anl = 11.56 N

Design Shear Force At End A, Vu,a = Max ( Va,anl, Vur,a, Vul,a) = 53402.14022 N
Shear Force From Analysis At End B , Vb,anl = -6.44 N
Design Shear Force At End B, Vu,b = Max ( Vb,anl, Vur,b, Vul,b) = 41337.69104 N
11B.7.2 For Beam No. 3

Section width, b 300 mm
Section depth, D 450 mm
Characteristic Strength of Steel fy 415 N/sq. mm
Characteristic Strength of Concrete fck 20 N/sq. mm
Clear cover to the main reinforcing bar 25 mm
Bar Diameter 12 mm

Effective Depth, d = 450 mm - 25 mm - 12 mm/2 =
419 mm
Eudl w 6.5 N/sq. mm
Length L 3000 mm
Ast_Top_A 226.19 sq. mm
Ast_Bot_A 339.29 sq. mm
Ast_Top_B 452.39 sq. mm
Ast_Bot_B 226.19 sq. mm
Calculation of Simple Shear

Simple shear from Va = Vb = 1.2 * w * L / 2 = 11700N
gravity load on span =
Calculation of Moment Of Resistances Based On Area Of Steel Provided
Sagging Moment Of 0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_A * d * = 48452983 N
Resistance of End A
( 1 - Ast_Bot_A * fy / b * d * fck)
Mu,as =
Hogging Moment Of 0.87 * fy * Ast_Top_A * d * = 32940364.5 N
Resistance of End A
( 1 - Ast_Top_A * fy / b * d * fck)
Mu,ah =
Sagging Moment Of 0.87 * fy * Ast_Bot_B * d * = 32940364.5 N
Resistance of End A
( 1 - Ast_Bot_B * fy / b * d * fck)
Mu,bs =

Hogging Moment Of 0.87 * fy * Ast_Top_B * d * ( 1 - Ast_Top_B* fy / b * = 63326721.3 N

Resistance of End A d * fck)
Mu,bh =
Calculation of shear force due to the formation of a plastic hinge at both ends of the beam plus the
factored gravity load on the span.
Figure 11B.4 - Sway to right
Vur,a = Va - 1.4 [ ( Mu,as + Mu,bh ) / L ] = -40463.862 N

Vur,b = Va + 1.4 [ ( Mu,as + Mu,bh ) / L ] = 63863.862 N
Sway to left
Vul,a = Va + 1.4 [ ( Mu,ah + Mu,bs ) / L ] = 42444.3402 N
Vul,b = Va - 1.4 [ ( Mu,ah + Mu,bs ) / L ] = -15144.34 N
Design Shear Force
Shear Force From Analysis At End A , Va,anl = -10.31 N

Design Shear Force At End A, Vu,a = Max ( Va,anl, 42444.3402 N
Vur,a, Vul,a) =
Shear Force From Analysis At End B , Vb,anl = -23.81 N
Design Shear Force At End B, Vu,b = Max ( Vb,anl, 63863.862 N
Vur,b, Vul,b) =

11C.1 Design Operations
11C. Indian Codes - Steel Design per IS 800 - 1984

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Indian code IS 800 - 1984 General
construction in steel - Code of practice.
Design of members per IS 800 requires the STAAD Indian Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.
Note: Steel design per the limit state method in IS 800 is also available in the Steel Design mode
in the Graphical User Interface.
Note: The IS 800 - 1984 is not appropriate for the design of hollow pipe or tube sections. The
design of such members should be done using IS 800 - 2007 WSD or LFD codes.
11C.1 Design Operations

STAAD contains a broad set of facilities for designing structural members as individual
accordance with the requirements of the design problem. The operations to perform a design are:
l Specify the members and the load cases to be considered in the design.
l Specify whether to perform member selection by optimization.
requirements. The entire ISI steel section table is supported. Section 11C.13 describes the
specification of steel sections.

This section presents some general statements regarding the implementation of Indian Standard
code of practice (IS:800-1984) for structural steel design in STAAD. The design philosophy and
procedural logistics for member selection and code checking are based upon the principles of
allowable stress design.
Two major failure modes are recognized:
i. failure by overstressing
ii. failure by stability considerations.
The flowing sections describe the salient features of the allowable stresses being calculated and the
stability criteria being used. Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding
the allowable stresses and the most economic section is selected on the basis of least weight

11C.3 Allowable Stresses
criteria. The code checking part of the program checks stability and strength requirements and
reports the critical loading condition and the governing code criteria.
It is generally assumed that the engineer will take care of the detailing requirements like provision
of stiffeners and check the local effects such as flange buckling and web crippling.

The member design and code checking in STAAD are based upon the allowable stress design
method as per IS:800 (1984). It is a method for proportioning structural members using design
loads and forces, allowable stresses, and design limitations for the appropriate material under
service conditions. It would not be possible to describe every aspect of IS:800 in this manual. This
section, however, will discuss the salient features of the allowable stresses specified by IS:800 and
implemented in STAAD. Appropriate sections of IS:800 will be referenced during the discussion of
various types of allowable stresses.
11C.3.1 Axial Stress
Tensile Stress
The allowable tensile stress, as calculated in STAAD as per IS:800 is described below.
The permissible stress in axial tension, σ in MPa on the net effective area of the sections shall not
at
exceed
σat = 0.6·fy
Where:
f = minimum yield stress of steel in Mpa

y
Compressive Stress
Allowable compressive stress on the gross section of axially loaded compression members shall not
exceed 0.6·f nor the permissible stress σ calculated based on the following equation (per Clause:
y ac
5.1.1):
σac = 0.6{( fcc · fy )/[( fcc)n + (fy )n ]1/n }
Where:
σ = Permissible stress in axial compression, in Mpa

ac
f = Yield stress of steel, in Mpa
y
f = Elastic critical stress in compression = π 2 E/λ2
cc
E = Modulus of elasticity of steel, 2 X 105 Mpa

λ=l/r = Slenderness ratio of the member, ratio of the effective length to appropriate
radius of gyration
n = A factor assumed as 1.4.
11C.3.2 Bending Stress

The allowable bending stress in a member subjected to bending is calculated based on the
following formula: (Clause: 6.2.1)
σbt or σbc = 0.66 fy
Where:
σ = Bending stress in tension

bt
σ = Bending stress in compression
bc
f = Yield stress of steel, in MPa
y
For an I-beam or channel with equal flanges bent about the axis of maximum strength (z-z axis),
the maximum bending compressive stress on the extreme fibre calculated on the effective section
shall not exceed the values of maximum permissible bending compressive stress. The maximum
permissible bending compressive stress shall be obtained by the following formula: (Clause: 6.2.2)
fcb f y
σ bc = 0.66 1/n
(f ) n + f n
 cb y  ( )
Clause 6.2.3
Where:
f = Yield stress of steel, in Mpa

y
n = A factor assumed as 1.4.
f = Elastic critical stress in bending, calculated by the following formula:

cb
(
fcb = k 1 X + k 2Y ) c2
c1
Where:
1 π2
X = Y 1+
20 r yD
in MPa
26.5(10) 5
Y= 2
(1 / r y)
k = a coefficient to allow for reduction in thickness or breadth of flanges
1
between points of effective lateral restraint and depends on ψ, the ratio of the total
area of both flanges at the point of least bending moment to the corresponding area

at the point of greatest bending moment between such points of restraint.
k = a coefficient to allow for the inequality of flanges, and depends on ω, the
2
ratio of the moment of inertia of the compression flange alone to that of the sum of
the moment of the flanges each calculated about its own axis parallel to the y-yaxis of
the girder, at the point of maximum bending moment.
1 = effective length of compression flange
r = radius of gyration of the section about its axis of minimum

y
strength (y-y axis)
T = mean thickness of the compression flange, is equal to the area of horizontal
portion of flange divided by width.
D = overall depth of beam
c ,c = respectively the lesser and greater distances from the section neutral axis to
1 2
the extreme fibres.
11C.3.3 Shear Stress

Allowable shear stress calculations are based on Section 6.4 of IS:800. For shear on the web, the
gross section taken into consideration consist of the product of the total depth and the web
thickness. For shear parallel to the flanges, the gross section is taken as 2/3 times the total flange
area.
11C.3.4 Combined Stress

Members subjected to both axial and bending stresses are proportioned accordingly to section 7 of
IS:800. All members subject to bending and axial compression are required to satisfy the equation
of Section 7.1.1.(a) for intermediate points, and equation of Section 7.1.1.(b) for support points.
For combined axial tension and bending the equation of Section 7.1.2. is required to be satisfied.
Cm coefficients are calculated according to the specifications of Section 7.1.3. information regarding
occurrence of sidesway can be provided through the use of parameters SSY and SSZ. In the absence
of any user provided information, sidesway will be assumed.

In STAAD implementation of IS:800, the user is allowed complete control of the design process
through the use of design parameters. Available design parameters to be used in conjunction with
IS:800 are listed in Table 7B.1 of this section along with their default values and applicable
restrictions. Users should note that when the TRACK parameter is set to 1.0 and use in conjunction
with this code, allowable bending stresses in compression (FCY & FCZ), tension (FTY & FTZ), and
allowable shear stress (FV) will be printed out in Member Selection and Code Check output in
Mpa. When TRACK is set to 2.0, detailed design output will be provided.

Table 11C.1-Indian Steel Design IS 800:1984 Parameters

CODE - Must be specified as INDIAN

BEAM 1.0 0.0 = design only for end

moments and those at locations
specified by the SECTION
command.
1.0 = calculate section forces at

twelfth points along the beam,
design at each intermediate
location and report the critical
location where ratio is
maximum.
CMY 0.85 for sidesway Cm value in local y & z axes

and
CMZ
calculated for no
sidesway
DFF None "Deflection Length" / Maxm.

(Mandatory for allowable local deflection
deflection check)
DJ1 Start Joint Joint No. denoting starting

of member point for calculation of
"Deflection Length" (See Note 1)
DJ2 End Joint of Joint No. denoting end point

member for calculation of "Deflection
Length" (See Note 1)
DMAX 100.0 cm. Maximum allowable depth.
DMIN 0.0 cm. Minimum allowable depth.
FYLD 250 MPA Yield strength of steel.
(36.25 KSI)

KY 1.0 K value in local y-axis. Usually,

this is minor axis.
KZ 1.0 K value in local z-axis. Usually,

this is major axis.
LY Member Length Length in local y-axis to

calculate slenderness ratio.
LZ Member Length Same as above except in local z-

axis (major).
MAIN 180 (Comp. Memb.) Allowable Kl/r for slenderness

calculations for compression
members.

members.
PROFILE - Used to search for the lightest

section for the profile(s)
specified for member selection.
See Section 5.48.1 of the
Technical Reference Manual for
details.
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of the actual

to allowable stresses.
SSY 0.0 0.0 = Sidesway in local y-axis.
1.0 = No sidesway
SSZ 0.0 Same as above except in local z-

axis.
TMAIN 400 (Tension Allowable Kl/r for slenderness

Memb) calculations for tension
members.

TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Suppress critical

member stresses
1.0 = Print all critical member

stresses
2.0 = Print expanded output.

If there is deflection check it
will also print the governing
load case number for deflection
check whenever critical
condition for design is not
DEFLECTION.
(see Fig.8B.1)
UNF 1.0 Same as above provided as a

fraction of actual member
length.
UNL Member Length Unsupported length for

calculating allowable bending
stress.
11C.4.1 Notes
a. "Deflection Length" is defined as the length that is used for calculation of local deflections
within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the "Deflection Length" will be equal
to the length of the member. However, in some situations, the "Deflection Length" may be
different. A straight line joining DJ1 and DJ2 is used as the reference line from which local
deflections are measured.
For example, refer to the figure below where a beam has been modeled using four joints and
three members. The “Deflection Length” for all three members will be equal to the total
length of the beam in this case. The parameters DJ1 and DJ2 should be used to model this
situation. Thus, for all three members here, DJ1 should be 1 and DJ2 should be 4.

PARAMETERS
DFF 300. ALL
DJ1 1 ALL
DJ2 4 ALL

11C.5 Stability Requirements
b. If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member length and
local deflections will be measured from original member line.
c. The above parameters may be used in conjunction with other available parameters for steel
design.
11C.5 Stability Requirements

Slenderness ratios are calculated for all members and checked against the appropriate maximum
values. Section 3.7 of IS:800 summarizes the maximum slenderness ratios for different types of
members. In STAAD implementation of IS:800, appropriate maximum slenderness ratio can be
provided for each member. If no maximum slenderness ratio is provided, compression members
will be checked against a maximum value of 180 and tension members will be checked against a
maximum value of 400.
11C.6 Truss Members

As mentioned earlier, a truss member is capable of carrying only axial forces. So in design no time is
wasted in calculating bending or shear stresses, thus reducing design time considerably. Therefore,
if there is any truss member in an analysis (like bracing or strut, etc.), it is wise to declare it as a
truss member rather than as a regular frame member with both ends pinned.
11C.7 Deflection Check

This facility allows the user to consider deflection as a criteria in the CODE CHECK and MEMBER
SELECTION processes. The deflection check may be controlled using three parameters which are
described in Table 11C.1. Note that deflection is used in addition to other strength and stability
related criteria. The local deflection calculation is based on the latest analysis results.
11C.8 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to verify whether the specified section is capable of satisfying
applicable design code requirements. The code checking is based on the IS:800 (1984) requirements.
Forces and moments at specified sections of the members are utilized for the code checking
calculations. Sections may be specified using the BEAM parameter or the SECTION command. If no
sections are specified, the code checking is based on forces and moments at the member ends.
The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical
condition (applicable IS:800 clause no.), governing load case, location (distance from the start) and
magnitudes of the governing forces and moments are also printed out.
Checking command.


performed, the program can select the most economical section, that is, the lightest section, which
satisfies the applicable code requirements. The section selected will be of the same type (I-Section,
Channel etc.) as originally specified by the user. Member selection may be performed with all types
of steel sections listed in Section 11C.12 and user provided tables. Selection of members, whose
properties are originally provided from user specified table, will be limited to sections in the user
provided table. Member selection can not be performed on members whose cross sectional
properties are specified as PRISMATIC.
The process of MEMBER SELECTION may be controlled using the parameters listed in Table 11C.1.
It may be noted that the parameters DMAX and DMIN may be used to specify member depth
constraints for selection. If PROFILE parameter is provided, the search for the lightest section is
restricted to that profile. Up to three (3) profiles may be provided for any member with a section
being selected from each one.
11C.10 Member Selection By Optimization

Steel section selection of the entire structure may be optimized. The optimization method utilizes
a state-of-the -art numerical technique which requires automatic multiple analysis. The user may
start without a specifically designated section. However, the section profile type (BEAM, COLUMN,
CHANNEL, ANGLE etc.) must be specified using the ASSIGN command (see Chapter 6). The
optimization is based on member stiffness contributions and corresponding force distributions. An
optimum member size is determined through successive analysis/design iterations. This method
requires substantial computer time and hence should be used with caution.
Refer to Section 5.48.4 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional details.

For code checking or member selection, the program produces the result in a tabulated fashion.
MEMBER
the member number for which the design is performed
TABLE
the INDIAN steel section name which has been checked against the steel code or has
been selected.

RESULT
prints whether the member has PASSED or FAILed. If the RESULT is FAIL, there will be
an asterisk (*) mark in front of the member number.
CRITICAL COND
the section of the IS:800 code which governs the design.
RATIO
LOADING
provides the load case number which governs the design.
FX, MY, and MZ
provide the axial force, moment in local y-axis and moment in local z-axis respectively.
Although STAAD does consider all the member forces and moments (except torsion) to
perform design, only FX,MY and MZ are printed since they are the ones which are of
interest, in most cases.
LOCATION
forces govern.
Note: If the parameter TRACK is set to 1.0, the program will block out part of the table and will
print allowable bending stresses in compression (FCY & FCZ) and tension (FTY & FTZ), allowable
axial stress in compression (FA), and allowable shear stress (FV). When the parameter TRACK is
set to 2.0 for all members parameter code values are as shown in the following example.
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( IS-800) v1.0

********************************************
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Y PROPERTIES |
|************* | IN CM UNIT |
| * |=============================| ===|=== ------------ |
|MEMBER 7 * | INDIAN SECTIONS | | AX = 85.0 |
| * | ST ISWB400 | | --Z AY = 34.4 |
|DESIGN CODE * | | | AZ = 34.7 |
| IS-800 * =============================== ===|=== SY = 138.8 |
| * SZ = 1171.3 |
| * |<---LENGTH (ME= 3.00 --->| RY = 4.0 |
|************* RZ = 16.6 |
| |
| 112.1( KN-METR) |
|PARAMETER |L1 STRESSES |
|IN NEWT MM | IN NEWT MM|
|--------------- + -------------|
| KL/R-Y= 74.2 | FA = 150.0 |
| KL/R-Z= 18.1 + fa = 1.0 |
| UNL = 3000.0 | FCZ = 139.9 |
| C = 400.0 + FTZ = 165.0 |
| CMY = 0.60 | FCY = 165.0 |
| CMZ = 0.40 + FTY = 165.0 |
| FYLD = 249.9 | L3 fbz = 95.7 |
| NSF = 0.9 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---| fby = 0.0 |
| DFF = 0.0 90.5 FV = 100.0 |

11C.12 Indian Steel Table
| dff = 0.0 ABSOLUTE MZ ENVELOPE fv = 17.1 |

| (WITH LOAD NO.) |
| |
| MAX FORCE/ MOMENT SUMMARY ( KN-METR) |
| ------------------------- |
| |
| AXIAL SHEAR-Y SHEAR-Z MOMENT-Y MOMENT-Z |
| |
| VALUE -23.9 60.6 0.0 0.0 112.1 |
| LOCATION 0.0 3.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 |
| LOADING 3 1 0 0 1 |
| |
|**************************************************************************|
|* *|
|* DESIGN SUMMARY ( KN-METR) *|
|* -------------- *|
|* *|
|* RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/ *|
| FX MY MZ LOCATION |
| ====================================================== |
| PASS 7.1.2 BEND C 0.684 1 |
| 7.39 T 0.0 -112.1 0.00 |
|* *|
|**************************************************************************|

This is an important feature of the program since the program will read section properties of a steel
member directly from the latest ISI steel tables (as published in ISI-800). These properties are
stored in memory corresponding to the section designation (e.g., ISMB250, etc.). If called for, the
properties are also used for member design. Since the shear areas are built in to these tables, shear
deformation is always considered for these members.
Almost all ISI steel tables are available for input. A complete listing of the sections available in the
built-in steel section library may be obtained using the tools of the graphical user interface.
Following are the descriptions of all the types of sections available:
11C.12.1 Rolled Steel Beams (ISJB, ISLB, ISMB and ISHB)

All rolled steel beam sections are available the way they are designated in the ISI handbook (e.g.,
ISJB225, ISWB400, etc.)
20 TO 30 TA ST ISLB325
Note: In case of two identical beams, the heavier beam is designated with an ‘A” on the end (e.g.,
ISHB400 A, etc.).
1 TO 5 TA ST ISHB400A
11C.12.2 Rolled Steel Channels (ISJC, ISLC and ISMC)

All these shapes are available as listed in ISI section handbook. Designation of the channels are per
the scheme used by ISI.
10 TO 20 BY 2 TA ST ISMC125

12 TA ST ISLC300
11C.12.3 Double Channels

Back to back double channels, with or without spacing between them, are available. The letter D in
front of the section name will specify a double channel (e.g., D ISJC125, D ISMC75, etc.).
21 22 24 TA D ISLC225
11C.12.4 Rolled Steel Angles

Both rolled steel equal angles and unequal angles are available for use in the STAAD
implementation of ISI steel tables. The following example with explanations will be helpful in
understanding the input procedure:
At present there is no standard way to define the local y and z axes for an angle section. The
standard section has local axis system. The standard angle is specified as:
51 52 53 TA ST ISA60X60X6
This specification has the local z-axis (i.e., the minor axis corresponding to the V-V axis specified in
the steel tables. Many engineers are familiar with a convention used by some other programs in
which the local y-axis is the minor axis. STAAD provides for this convention by accepting the
command:
54 55 56 TA RA ISA50X30X6
Tip: RA denotes reverse angle
11C.12.5 Double Angles

Short leg back-to-back or long leg back-to-back double angles can be specified by inputting the
word SD or LD, respectively, in front of the angle size. In case of an equal angle either LD or SD
will serve the purpose. For example,
14 TO 20 TA LD ISA50X30X5 SP 1.5
23 27 TA SD ISA75X50X6
11C.12.6 Rolled Tees (ISHT, ISST, ISLT and ISJT)

All the rolled tee sections are available for input as they are specified in the ISI handbook. The
following example illustrates the designated method.
1 2 5 8 TA ST ISNT100

67 68 TA ST ISST250
11C.12.7 Pipes (Circular Hollow Sections)

To designate circular hollow sections from ISI tables, use PIP followed by the numerical value of
diameter and thickness of the section in mm omitting the decimal section of the value provided
for diameter. The following example will illustrate the designation.
10 15 TA ST PIP 213.2
specifies a 213 mm dia. pipe with 3.2 mm wall thickness
Circular pipe sections can also be specified by providing the outside and inside diameters of the
1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE OD 25.0ID 20.0
specifies a pipe with outside dia. of 25 and inside dia. of 20 in current length units
Only code checking and no member selection will be performed if this type of specification is used.
11C.12.8 Tubes (Rectangular or Square Hollow Sections)

Designation of tubes from the ISI steel table is illustrated below.
For example,
15 TO 25 TA ST TUB 160808
Tubes, like pipes, can also be input by their dimensions (Height, Width and Thickness) and not by
any table designations.
is a tube that has a height of 8, a width of 6, and a wall thickness of 0.5.
Note: Only code checking and no member selection is performed for TUBE sections specified this
way.
11C.12.9 Plate And Angle Girders (With Flange Plates)

All plate and angle grinders (with flange plates) are available as listed in ISI section handbook. The
following example with explanations will be helpful in understanding the input procedure.

A. Plate and angle girder symbol.

B. Web plate width in mm.
C. Web plate thickness in mm.
D. Flange angle, A X B X t, all in mm.

Table 11C.2-Flange angle key
Symbol Angle
A 150X150X18
B 200X100X15
C 200X150X18
E 200X200X18
E. Flange plate width in mm.

F. Flange plate thickness in mm.
11C.12.10 Single Joist with Channels and Plates on the Flanges to be

Used as Girders
All single joist with channel and plates on the flanges to be used as girders are available as listed in
ISI section handbook. The following example with explanations will be helpful in understanding
the input procedure.
A. Joist Designation
IW450 = ISWB450

11C.13 Column With Lacings And Battens
B. Top flange channel designation:
350 = ISMC350
C. Constant (always X).
D. Top flange plate thickness in mm.
Note: D = 0 for no plate.
E. Bottom flange plate thickness in mm.
Note: The heavier ISWB600 has been omitted, since the lighter ISWB600 is more efficient.

For columns with large loads it is desirable to build rolled sections at a distance and inter-connect
them. The joining of element sections is done by two ways:
a. Lacing
b. Batten
Double channel sections (back-to-back and face-to-face) can be joined either by lacing or by batten
plates having riveted or welded connection.
Table 11C.3 gives the parameters that are required for Lacing or batten design. These parameters will
have to be provided in unit NEW MMS along with parameters defined in Table 11C.1.

Table 11C.3-Parameters used in Indian Lacing or Batten steel member design.

Name
CTYPE 1 Type of joining
1. implies single lacing with riveted

connection
2. implies double lacing with riveted
connection
3. implies single lacing with welded
connection
4. implies double lacing with welded
connection
5. implies batten with riveted
connection
6. implies batten with welded
connection
COG 0.0 mm Center of gravity of the channel. This

parameter is used when member
properties are defined through user
provided table using GENERAL option.
DBL 20 mm Nominal diameter of rivet
DCFR 0.0 Used when member properties are defined

through user provided table using
GENERAL option.
0. double channel back-to-back.

1. double channel face-to-face.
EDIST 32 mm Edge Distance.

(Rivetted
Connection)
25 mm
(Welded
Connection)
FVB 100 N/mm 2 Allowable shear stress in rivet
FYB 300 N/mm 2 Allowable bearing stress in rivet


Name
SPA 0.0 mm Spacing between double channels. This

parameter is used when member
properties are defined through user
provided table using GENERAL option.
THETA 50 degree Angle of inclination of lacing bars. It

should lie between 40 degree and 70
degree.
WMIN 6 mm Minimum thickness of weld
WSTR 108 N/mm 2 Allowable welding stress

11D. Indian Codes - Steel Design per IS 802

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Indian code IS 802 1995 Use of
Structural Steel in Overhead Transmission Line Towers - Code of Practice.

This section presents some general statements regarding the implementation of Indian Standard
code of practice (IS:802-1995 – Part 1) for structural steel design for overhead transmission line
towers in STAAD. The design philosophy and procedural logistics for member selection and code
checking are based upon the principles of allowable stress design. Two major failure modes are
recognized: failure by overstressing, and failure by stability considerations. The flowing sections
describe the salient features of the allowable stresses being calculated and the stability criteria being
used. Members are proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the allowable stresses
and the most economic section is selected on the basis of least weight criteria. The code checking
part of the program checks stability and strength requirements and reports the critical loading
condition and the governing code criteria.
11D.2 Allowable Stresses

The member design and code checking in STAAD are based upon the allowable stress design
method as per IS:802 (1995). It is a method for proportioning structural members using design
loads and forces, allowable stresses, and design limitations for the appropriate material under
service conditions.
This section discusses the salient features of the allowable stresses specified by IS:802 and
implemented in STAAD.
11D.2.1 Axial Stress
Tensile Stress
The allowable tensile stress, as calculated in STAAD as per IS:802 is described below.
The estimated tensile stresses on the net effective sectional area in various members, multiplied by
the appropriate factor of safety shall not exceed minimum guaranteed yield stress of the material.
Thus, the permissible stress in axial tension, σ in MPa on the net effective area of the sections
at
shall not exceed
σat = Fy
Where:

11D.3 Stability Requirements
F = minimum yield stress of steel in Mpa

y
Compressive Stress
The estimated compressive stresses in various members multiplied by the appropriate factor of
safety shall not exceed the value given by the formulae described below.
I. Condition: when (b/t) ≤ [ (b/t)lim = 210/√Fy ]:
i. When KL/r ≤ Cc, the allowable compressive stress is (in N/mm 2)
Fa = Fy {1 - 0.5[(KL/r)/Cc]2 }
ii. When KL/r > Cc, the allowable compressive stress is (in N/mm 2)
Fa = π2 E/(KL/r)2
II. Condition: when (b/t)lim < (b/t) ≤ 378/√Fy :
The equations in condition 1 shall be used, substituting for F the value F given by:
y cr
Fcr = Fy [1.677 - 0.677·(b/t)/(b/t)lim]
III. Condition: when (b/t) > 378/√Fy
The equations in condition 1 shall be used, substituting for F the value F given by:
y cr
Fcr = 65,550/(b/t)
Where:
F = allowable unit stress in compression, Mpa

a
F = minimum guaranteed yield stress of the material, Mpa
y
K = restraint factor,
L = unbraced length of the compression member in cm, and
R = appropriate radius of gyration in cm.
E = modulus of elasticity of steel in N/mm 2
KL/r = largest effective slenderness ratio of any unbraced segment of the member,
b = distance from edge of the fillet to the extreme fibre in mm, and
t = thickness of flange in mm.
Note: The maximum permissible value of b/t for any type of steel shall not exceed 25.

Slenderness ratios are calculated for all members and checked against the appropriate maximum
values. Following are the default values used in STAAD:

11D.3.1 Compression Member

Table 11D.1-Slenderness ratio limits of compression
members
Type of Member Slenderness
Limit
Leg Members, ground wire peak member 120

and lower members of cross arms in
compression
Other members carrying computed stress 200
Redundant members and those carrying 250

nominal stresses
Slenderness ratios of compression members are determined as follows:

Table 11D.2-Compression slenderness ratio calculation depending on ELA
parameter
ELA Type of Member Calculation
Value of KL/r
1 Leg sections or joint members bolted at connections in L/r

both faces
2 Members with concentric loading at both ends of the L/r

unsupported panel with values of L/r up to and
including 120
3 Member with concentric loading at one end and 30 + 0.75L/r

normal eccentricities at the other end of the
unsupported panel for value of L/r up to and including
120
4 Members with normal framing eccentricities at both 60 + 0.5L/r

ends of the unsupported panel for values of L/r up to
and including 120
5 Member unrestrained against rotation at both ends of L/r

the unsupported panel for value of L/r from 120 to 200
6 Members partially restrained against rotation at one 28.6 +

end of the unsupported panel for values of L/r over 120 0.762L/r
and up to and including 225
7 Members partially restrained against rotation at both 46.2 +

ends of the unsupported panel for values of L/r over 120 0.615L/r
and up to and including 250

11D.4 Minimum Thickness Requirement
If the value for ELA is given in the input for any particular member is such that condition for L/r
ratio to fall within the specified range is not satisfied, STAAD goes on by the usual way of finding
slenderness ratio using KL/r formula.
11D.3.2 Tension Members

Slenderness ratio KL/r of a member carrying axial tension only, shall not exceed 400.
11D.4 Minimum Thickness Requirement

As per Clause7.1 of IS: 802-1995 minimum thickness of different tower members shall be as follows:
Members Minimum Thickness (mm)
Galvanized Painted
Leg Members, ground wire peak member and lower 5 6

members of cross arms in compression
Other members 4 5
11D.5 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to verify whether the specified section is capable of satisfying
applicable design code requirements. The code checking is based on the IS:802 (1995) requirements.
Axial forces at two ends of the members are utilized for the code checking calculations.
The code checking output labels the members as passed or failed. In addition, the critical
condition, governing load case, location (distance from the start) and magnitudes of the governing
forces are also printed out.
Checking command.
11D.5.1 Design Steps

The following are the steps used by the program in member design:
1. Thickness of the member (maximum of web and flange thicknesses) is checked against
minimum allowable thickness, depending upon whether the member is painted or
galvanized.
2. If the minimum thickness criterion is fulfilled, the program determines whether the
member is under compression or tension for the load case under consideration. Depending

upon whether the member is under tension or compression the slenderness ratio of the
member is calculated. This calculated ratio is checked against allowable slenderness ratio.
3. If the slenderness criterion is fulfilled check against allowable stress is performed. Allowable
axial and tensile stresses are calculated. If the member is under tension and there is no user
defined net section factor (NSF), the net section factor is calculated by the program itself
(See "Calculation of Net Section Factor" on page 495). Actual axial stress in the member is
calculated. The ratio for actual stress to allowable stress, if less than 1.0 or user defined value,
the member has passed the check.
4. Number of bolts required for the critical load case is calculated.

performed, the program can select the most economical section, that is, the lightest section, which
satisfies the applicable code requirements. The section selected will be of the same type (either
angle or channel) as originally specified by the user. Member selection may be performed with all
angle or channel sections and user provided tables. Selection of members, whose properties are
originally provided from user specified table, will be limited to sections in the user provided table.
The process of MEMBER SELECTION may be controlled using the parameters listed in Table 9C.3.
It may be noted that the parameters DMAX and DMIN may be used to specify member depth
constraints for selection. If PROFILE parameter is provided, the search for the lightest section is
restricted to that profile. Up to three (3) profiles may be provided for any member with a section
being selected from each one.
11D.7 Member Selection by Optimization

Steel section selection of the entire structure may be optimized. The optimization method utilizes
a state-of-the -art numerical technique which requires automatic multiple analysis. The
optimization is based on member stiffness contributions and corresponding force distributions.
An optimum member size is determined through successive analysis/design iterations. This

method requires substantial computer time and hence should be used with caution.
Refer to Section 5.48.4 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional details.
11D.8 Tabulated Results of Steel Design

An example of a TRACK 2.0 output for a compression member is shown here:
********************************************
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Y PROPERTIES |

|************* | IN CM UNIT |
| * |=============================| ==| |== ------------ |
|MEMBER 8 * | INDIAN SECTIONS | | | AX = 17.0 |
| * | ST ISA125x95x8 | | | --Z AY = 6.7 |
|DESIGN CODE * | | | | AZ = 5.1 |
| IS-802 * =============================== ==| |== SY = 38.8 |
| * SZ = 16.6 |
| * |<---LENGTH (ME= 1.80 --->| RY = 4.4 |
|************* RZ = 2.0 |
| |
| |
|PARAMETER BOLTING STRESSES |
|IN NEWT MM IN NEWT MM|
|--------------- ------------- -------------|
| L/R-Y = 40.5 BOLT DIA = 12 MM FA = 188.4 |
| L/R-Z = 87.9 BOLT CAP = 24.66 KN fa = 80.7 |
| KL/R = 87.9 # BOLT = 6 FYB = 436.0 |
| FYLD = 250.0 FVB = 218.0 |
| GALVA = 0.0 |
| C = 1.0 |
| LEG = 1.0 |
| ELA = 1.0 |
| NSF = 1.0 |
| |
|**************************************************************************|
|* *|
|* -------------- *|
|* *|
| ====================================================== |
| PASS COMPRESSION 0.428 1 |
| 137.13 C 0.0 0.0 0.00 |
|* *|
|**************************************************************************|
| |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|

Table 11D.3-Indian Steel Design IS 802 Parameters

Name
CNSF 0.0 This parameter indicates whether user has

defined the net section factor or the
program will calculate it.
0. Use specified NSF value

1. Net section factor will be calculated.


Name
DANGLE 0.0 This parameter indicates how the pair of

angles are connected to each other. This is
required to find whether the angle is in
single or double shear and the net section
factor.
0. Double angle placed back-to-back

and connected to each side of a
gusset plate
1. Pair of angle placed back-to-back
connected by only one leg of each
angle to the same side of a gusset
plate
DBL 12 mm Diameter of bolt for calculation of number

of bolts and net section factor.
DMAX 100.0 cm. Maximum allowable depth.
DMIN 0.0 cm. Minimum allowable depth.
ELA 1.0 This parameter indicates what type of end

conditions is to be used. Refer Section
11D.3.
FVB 218 MPA Allowable shear stress in bolt
FYB 436 MPA Allowable bearing stress in bolt
FYLD 250 MPA Yield Strength of steel
GUSSET 5 mm Thickness of gusset plate.
Minimum of the thicknesses of the gusset

plate and the leg is used for calculation of
the capacity of bolt in bearing
KY 1.0 K value in local y-axis. Usually, this is

minor axis.
KZ 1.0 K value in local z-axis. Usually, this is

major axis.


Name
LEG 1.0 This parameter is meant for plain angles.
0. The angle is connected by shorter

leg
1. The angle is connected by longer
leg
LY Member Unbraced length in local z-axis to calculate

LZ Member Unbraced length in local z-axis to calculate

MAIN 1.0 Type of member to find allowable Kl/r for

slenderness calculations for members.
1. Leg, Ground wire peak and lower

members of cross arms in
compression (KL/r = 120)
2. Members carrying computed stress
(KL/r = 200)
3. Redundant members and members
carrying nominal stresses (KL/r =
250)
4. Tension members (KL/r = 400)
10. Do not perform KL/r check
Any value greater than 10.0 indicates user

defined allowable KL/r ratio. For this case
KY and KZ values are must to find actual
KL/r ratio of the member.
NHL 0.0 mm Deduction for holes.
Default value is one bolt width plus 1.5

mm. If the area of holes cut by any
straight, diagonal or zigzag line across the
member is different from the default value,
this parameter is to be defined.

11D.10 Calculation of Net Section Factor

Name
TRACK 0.0 Level of output detail:
0. Suppress critical member stresses

1. Print all critical member stresses
2. Print expanded output.
9. Print design calculations along with

expanded output (not available in
GUI input).
11D.10 Calculation of Net Section Factor

The procedure for calculating the net section factor for an angle section is as follows:
l For a channel section, net section factor is taken to be 1.0.
l For an angle section, it is the ratio of the net effective area, A , to the gross area, where:
net
a. Single angle connected by only one leg
Anet = A1 + A2 · K1
Where:
A = net cross-sectional area of the connected leg

1
A = gross cross-sectional area of the unconnected leg
2
K1 = 3·A1 /(3·A1 + A2 )
The area of a leg of an angle = Thickness of angle x (length of leg – 0.5x thickness of
leg)
b. Pair of angles placed back-to-back connected by only one leg of each angle to the
same side of a gusset plate
Anet = A1 + A2 · K1
Where:
A = net cross-sectional area of the connected leg

1
A = gross cross-sectional area of the unconnected leg
2
K1 = 5·A1 /(5·A1 + A2 )
The area of a leg of an angle = Thickness of angle x (length of leg – 0.5x thickness of
leg)

11D.11 Example Problem No. 28
c. Double angles placed back-to-back and connected to each side of a gusset plate
A = gross area minus the deduction for holes

net

A transmission line tower is subjected to different loading conditions. Design some members as per
IS-802 and show detailed calculation steps for the critical loading condition.
11D.11.1 Given
End Condition = Members with normal framing eccentricities at both ends of the unsupported
panel for values of L/r up to and including 120
Diameter of the bolt = 16 mm
Thickness of the gusset plate = 8 mm
Net Section Factor is to be calculated.

11D.11.2 STAAD Input File

This input file is included with the program as C:\SProV8i\STAAD\Examp\Ind\Examp28.std.
STAAD TRUSS
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 3 0 3; 2 1.2 27 1.2; 3 2.8 3 2.8; 4 2.6 6 2.6; 5 2.4 9 2.4;
6 2.2 12 2.2; 7 2 15 2; 8 1.8 18 1.8; 9 1.6 21 1.6; 10 1.4 24 1.4;
11 -3 0 3; 12 -1.2 27 1.2; 13 -2.8 3 2.8; 14 -2.6 6 2.6; 15 -2.4 9 2.4;
16 -2.2 12 2.2; 17 -2 15 2; 18 -1.8 18 1.8; 19 -1.6 21 1.6; 20 -1.4 24 1.4;
21 3 0 -3; 22 1.2 27 -1.2; 23 2.8 3 -2.8; 24 2.6 6 -2.6; 25 2.4 9 -2.4;
26 2.2 12 -2.2; 27 2 15 -2; 28 1.8 18 -1.8; 29 1.6 21 -1.6; 30 1.4 24 -1.4;
31 -3 0 -3; 32 -1.2 27 -1.2; 33 -2.8 3 -2.8; 34 -2.6 6 -2.6; 35 -2.4 9 -2.4;
36 -2.2 12 -2.2; 37 -2 15 -2; 38 -1.8 18 -1.8; 39 -1.6 21 -1.6;
40 -1.4 24 -1.4; 41 1.2 30 1.2; 42 -1.2 30 1.2; 43 1.2 30 -1.2;
44 -1.2 30 -1.2; 45 4.2 27 1.2; 46 7.2 27 1.2; 47 4.2 30 1.2; 48 4.2 27 -1.2;
49 7.2 27 -1.2; 50 4.2 30 -1.2; 51 -4.2 27 1.2; 52 -7.2 27 1.2;
53 -4.2 30 1.2; 54 -4.2 27 -1.2; 55 -7.2 27 -1.2; 56 -4.2 30 -1.2;
57 1.2 33 1.2; 58 -1.2 33 1.2; 59 1.2 33 -1.2; 60 -1.2 33 -1.2; 61 0 35 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 3; 2 3 4; 3 4 5; 4 5 6; 5 6 7; 6 7 8; 7 8 9; 8 9 10; 9 10 2; 10 11 13;
11 13 14; 12 14 15; 13 15 16; 14 16 17; 15 17 18; 16 18 19; 17 19 20; 18 20 12;
19 13 3; 20 14 4; 21 15 5; 22 16 6; 23 17 7; 24 18 8; 25 19 9; 26 20 10;
27 12 2; 28 11 3; 29 1 13; 30 13 4; 31 3 14; 32 14 5; 33 15 4; 34 15 6;
35 16 5; 36 16 7; 37 17 6; 38 17 8; 39 18 7; 40 18 9; 41 19 8; 42 19 10;
43 20 9; 44 20 2; 45 12 10; 46 21 23; 47 23 24; 48 24 25; 49 25 26; 50 26 27;
51 27 28; 52 28 29; 53 29 30; 54 30 22; 55 3 23; 56 4 24; 57 5 25; 58 6 26;
59 7 27; 60 8 28; 61 9 29; 62 10 30; 63 2 22; 64 1 23; 65 21 3; 66 3 24;
67 23 4; 68 4 25; 69 5 24; 70 5 26; 71 6 25; 72 6 27; 73 7 26; 74 7 28;
75 8 27; 76 8 29; 77 9 28; 78 9 30; 79 10 29; 80 10 22; 81 2 30; 82 31 33;
83 33 34; 84 34 35; 85 35 36; 86 36 37; 87 37 38; 88 38 39; 89 39 40; 90 40 32;
91 23 33; 92 24 34; 93 25 35; 94 26 36; 95 27 37; 96 28 38; 97 29 39; 98 30 40;
99 22 32; 100 21 33; 101 31 23; 102 23 34; 103 33 24; 104 24 35; 105 25 34;
106 25 36; 107 26 35; 108 26 37; 109 27 36; 110 27 38; 111 28 37; 112 28 39;
113 29 38; 114 29 40; 115 30 39; 116 30 32; 117 22 40; 118 33 13; 119 34 14;
120 35 15; 121 36 16; 122 37 17; 123 38 18; 124 39 19; 125 40 20; 126 32 12;
127 31 13; 128 11 33; 129 33 14; 130 13 34; 131 34 15; 132 35 14; 133 35 16;
134 36 15; 135 36 17; 136 37 16; 137 37 18; 138 38 17; 139 38 19; 140 39 18;
141 39 20; 142 40 19; 143 40 12; 144 32 20; 145 32 44; 146 12 42; 147 2 41;
148 22 43; 149 42 41; 150 41 43; 151 43 44; 152 44 42; 153 12 41; 154 42 2;
155 22 41; 156 43 2; 157 43 32; 158 44 22; 159 12 44; 160 32 42; 161 41 47;
162 47 45; 163 45 2; 164 47 46; 165 46 45; 166 41 45; 167 43 50; 168 50 48;
169 48 22; 170 50 49; 171 49 48; 172 43 48; 173 47 50; 174 46 49; 175 45 48;
176 41 50; 177 50 46; 178 43 47; 179 47 49; 180 22 50; 181 2 47; 182 22 45;
183 2 48; 184 47 48; 185 50 45; 186 45 49; 187 48 46; 188 42 53; 189 53 51;
190 51 12; 191 53 52; 192 52 51; 193 42 51; 194 44 56; 195 56 54; 196 54 32;
197 56 55; 198 55 54; 199 44 54; 200 53 56; 201 52 55; 202 51 54; 203 42 56;
204 56 52; 205 44 53; 206 53 55; 207 32 56; 208 12 53; 209 32 51; 210 12 54;
211 53 54; 212 56 51; 213 51 55; 214 54 52; 215 44 60; 216 42 58; 217 41 57;
218 43 59; 219 60 59; 220 59 57; 221 57 58; 222 58 60; 223 44 58; 224 42 60;
225 42 57; 226 41 58; 227 44 59; 228 43 60; 229 43 57; 230 41 59; 231 60 57;
232 59 58; 235 33 3; 236 13 23; 237 34 4; 238 14 24; 239 35 5; 240 15 25;
241 36 6; 242 16 26; 243 37 7; 244 17 27; 245 38 8; 246 18 28; 247 39 9;
248 19 29; 249 40 10; 250 20 30; 251 32 2; 252 22 12; 253 44 41; 254 43 42;
255 60 61; 256 58 61; 257 57 61; 258 59 61;
1 TO 18 46 TO 54 82 TO 90 145 TO 148 215 TO 218 TA LD ISA200X150X18 SP 0.01
19 TO 26 28 TO 45 55 TO 62 64 TO 81 91 TO 98 100 TO 125 127 TO 144 155 156 -
159 160 223 224 229 230 235 TO 250 TA ST ISA150X150X10
27 63 99 126 149 TO 154 157 158 161 TO 214 219 TO 222 225 TO 228 231 232 251 -
252 TO 258 TA ST ISA80X50X6

CONSTANTS
E 2.05e+008 ALL
POISSON 0.3 ALL
DENSITY 76.8195 ALL
ALPHA 6.5e-006 ALL
SUPPORTS
1 11 21 31 FIXED
UNIT METER KG
LOAD 1 VERT
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
JOINT LOAD
61 FX 732
46 49 52 55 FX 153
61 FX 1280 FY -1016 FZ 160
46 49 52 55 FX 9006 FY -7844 FZ 1968
2 12 22 32 FX 4503 FY -3937 FZ 1968
LOAD 2 GWBC
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
JOINT LOAD
61 FX 549
46 49 52 55 FX 1148
61 FX 515 FY -762 FZ 2342
46 49 52 55 FX 6755 FY -5906
2 12 22 32 FX 3378 FY -2953
LOAD 3 LEFT PCBC
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
JOINT LOAD
61 FX 549
46 49 52 55 FX 1148
61 FX 960 FY -762
46 49 FX 6755 FY -5906
52 55 FX 4211 FY -4551 FZ 13293
2 12 22 32 FX 3378 FY -2953
LOAD 4 RIGHT PCBC
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
JOINT LOAD
61 FX 549
46 49 52 55 FX 1148
61 FX 960 FY -762
52 55 FX 6755 FY -5906
46 49 FX 4211 FY -4551 FZ 13293
2 12 22 32 FX 3378 FY -2953
PERFORM ANALYSIS
UNIT NEW MMS
PARAMETER
CODE IS802
LY 2800 MEMB 28
LZ 2800 MEMB 28
MAIN 1.0 MEMB 1
ELA 4 MEMB 1
CNSF 1.0 MEMB 28
DBL 16 ALL
GUSSET 8 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE MEMB 1 28
FINISH
11D.11.3 Output
A portion of the output for the TRACK 2 member code check follows:
********************************************
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|

| Y PROPERTIES |
|************* | IN CM UNIT |
| * |=============================| ==||== ------------ |
|MEMBER 1 * | INDIAN SECTIONS | || AX = 120.0 |
| * | LD ISA200X150X18 | || --Z AY = 48.0 |
|DESIGN CODE * | | || AZ = 36.0 |
| IS-802 * |-----------------------------| || SY = 297.3 |
| * SZ = 350.6 |
| * |<---LENGTH (ME= 3.01 --->| RY = 6.2 |
|************* RZ = 6.3 |
| |
| |
|--------------- ------------- -------------|
| L/R-Y = 48.6 BOLT DIA = 16 MM FA = 195.1 |
| L/R-Z = 47.7 BOLT CAP = 55.81 KN fa = 145.2 |
| KL/R = 84.3 # BOLT = 32 FYB = 436.0 |
| FYLD = 250.0 FVB = 218.0 |
| GALVA = 0.0 |
| C = 1.0 |
| LEG = 1.0 |
| ELA = 4.0 |
| NSF = 1.0 |
| |
|**************************************************************************|
|* *|
|* -------------- *|
|* *|
| ====================================================== |
| PASS COMPRESSION 0.744 1 |
| 1742.26 C 0.0 0.0 0.00 |
|* *|
|**************************************************************************|
| |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
STAAD TRUSS -- PAGE NO. 5
********************************************
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Y PROPERTIES |
|************* | IN CM UNIT |
| * |=============================| ==| |== ------------ |
|MEMBER 28 * | INDIAN SECTIONS | | | AX = 29.2 |
| * | ST ISA150X150X10 | | | --Z AY = 10.0 |
|DESIGN CODE * | | | | AZ = 10.0 |
| IS-802 * =============================== ==| |== SY = 95.7 |
| * SZ = 44.8 |
| * |<---LENGTH (ME= 6.53 --->| RY = 5.9 |
|************* RZ = 3.0 |
| |
| |
|--------------- ------------- -------------|
| L/R-Y = 47.5 BOLT DIA = 16 MM FA = 249.9 |
| L/R-Z = 94.0 BOLT CAP = 43.83 KN fa = 48.5 |
| KL/R = 94.0 # BOLT = 3 FYB = 436.0 |
| FYLD = 250.0 FVB = 218.0 |
| GALVA = 0.0 |
| C = 1.0 |
| LEG = 1.0 |

| ELA = 1.0 |
| NSF = 0.8 |
| |
|**************************************************************************|
|* *|
|* -------------- *|
|* *|
| ====================================================== |
| PASS TENSION 0.194 3 |
| 112.86 T 0.0 0.0 6.53 |
|* *|
|**************************************************************************|
| |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
************** END OF TABULATED RESULT OF DESIGN **************

11E. Indian Codes - Design per Indian Cold Formed Steel

Code
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Indian code IS 801 1975 Code of
practice for use of cold formed light gauge steel structural members in general building
construction, including revisions dated May, 1988. The program allows design of single (non-
composite) members in tension, compression, bending, shear, as well as their combinations. Cold
work of forming strengthening effects has been included as an option.

designations from the Gross Section Property Tables from IS:811-1987 (Specification for cold formed
light gauge structural steel sections).
l Channel with Lips
l Angle without Lips
l Z with Lips
l Hat
Shape selection may be done using the member property pages of the graphical user interface (GUI)
or by specifying the section designation symbol in the input file.

The program calculates effective section properties in accordance with Clause 5.2.1.1. Cross-sectional
properties and overall slenderness of members are checked for compliance with
l Clause 6.6.3, Maximum Effective Slenderness Ratio for members in Compression
l Clause 5.2.3, Maximum Flat Width Ratios for Elements in Compression
l Clause 5.2.4, Maximum Section Depths.
The program will check member strength in accordance with Clause 6 of the Standard as follows:

11E.2.1 Members in tension

Resistance is calculated in accordance with Clauses 6.1
11E.2.2 Members in bending and shear

l Clause 6.4.1 Shear stress in webs,

l Clause 6.4.2 Bending stress in webs
l Clause 6.4.3 Combined Bending and Shear in Webs.
11E.2.3 Members in compression

l Clause 6.2 Compression on flat unstiffened element,

l Clause 6.6.1.1 Shapes not subject to torsional-flexural buckling,
l Clause 6.6.1.2 Singly-symmetric sections and nonsymmetrical shapes of open cross section or
intermittently fastened singly-symmetrical components of built-up shapes having Q = 1.0
which may be subject to torsional-flexural buckling,
l Clause 6.6.1.3 Singly-symmetric sections and nonsymmetrical shapes or intermittently
fastened singly-symmetrical components of built-up shapes having Q < 1.0 which may be
subject to torsional-flexural buckling,
l Clause 6.8 Cylindrical Tubular Sections.
11E.2.4 Members in compression and bending

l All clauses for members in compression

l Clause 6.3 Laterally Unsupported Members,
l Clause 6.7.1 Doubly-symmetric shapes or Shapes not subjected to torsional or torsional-
flexural buckling
l Clause 6.7.2. Singly-symmetric shapes or Intermittently fastened singly-symmetric
components of built-up shapes having Q=1.0 which may be subjected to torsional-flexural
buckling
l Clause 6.7.3. Singly-symmetric shapes or Intermittently fastened singly-symmetric
components of built-up shapes having Q<1.0 which may be subjected to torsional-flexural
buckling.

11E.3 Code Checking and Member Selection
11E.3 Code Checking and Member Selection

11E.3.1 Code Checking

IS:801-1975. Code checking is carried out for locations specified by the user via the SECTION
command or the BEAM parameter. The results are presented in a form of a PASS/FAIL identifier and
a RATIO of load effect to resistance for each member checked. The user may choose the degree of
detail in the output data by setting the TRACK parameter.
Checking command.
11E.3.2 Member Selection

The user may request that the program search the cold formed steel shapes database (IS standard
etc.) and, if a suitable replacement is found, presents design results for that section. If no section

Input for the coefficients of uniform bending must be specified.
The following table contains the input parameters for specifying values of design variables and
selection of design options.

Table 11E.1-Indian cold formed steel design parameters

Name
CODE - Must be specified as IS801

Reference Manual.
1.0 When this parameter is set to
BEAM 0. the 13 location check is not

conducted, and instead, checking is
done only at the locations specified
by the SECTION command (See
STAAD manual for details. For
TRUSS members only start and end
locations are designed.
1. the adequacy of the member is
determined by checking a total of 13
equally spaced locations along the
length of the member.
CMY 0.85 Coefficient of equivalent uniform bending

Ω . See IS:801-1975, 6.7. Used for Combined
y
CMZ 1.0 Coefficient of equivalent uniform bending

Ω . See IS:801-1975, 6.7. Used for Combined
z
CWY 0.85 Specifies whether the cold work of forming

strengthening effect should be included in
resistance computation. See IS:801-1975,
6.1.1
0. effect should not be included

1. effect should be included


Name
FLX 1 Specifies whether torsional-flexural

buckling restraint is provided or is not
necessary for the member. See IS:801-1975,
6.6.1
0. Section not subject to torsional

flexural buckling
1. Section subject to torsional flexural
buckling
FU 450 MPa Ultimate tensile strength of steel in

current units.
(4588.72
kg/cm 2)
FYLD 353.04 MPa Yield strength of steel in current units.
(3600.0
kg/cm 2)
KX 1.0 Effective length factor for torsional

completely prevented from buckling) to
any user specified large value. It is used to
compression.
KY 1.0 Effective length factor for overall buckling

about the local Y-axis. It is a fraction and
is unit-less. Values can range from 0.01 (for
a column completely prevented from
compression.


Name
KZ 1.0 Effective length factor for overall buckling

in the local Z-axis. It is a fraction and is
unit-less. Values can range from 0.01 (for a
member completely prevented from
compression.
LX Member Unbraced length for twisting. It is input in

length the current units of length. Values can
range from 0.01 (for a member completely
compression.
LY Member Effective length for overall buckling in the

length local Y-axis. It is input in the current units
of length. Values can range from 0.01 (for a
compression.
LZ Member Effective length for overall buckling in the

length local Z-axis. It is input in the current units
of length. Values can range from 0.01 (for a
compression.
MAIN 0 0 – Check slenderness ratio
0 – Do not check slenderness ratio
DMAX 2540.0 Maximum allowable depth, in the current

units.
cm.


Name
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of actual to allowable

stresses
STIFF Member Spacing of shear stiffeners for stiffened flat

Length webs, in current units.

values are:
0. Prints only the member number,

section name, ratio, and PASS/FAIL
status.
1. Prints the design summary in
addition to that printed by TRACK
0
2. Prints member and material
properties in addition to that
printed by TRACK 1.
TSA 1 Specifies whether webs of flexural members

are adequately stiffened to satisfy the
requirements of IS:801-1975, 5.2.4.
0. Do not comply with 5.2.4

1. Comply with 5.2.4

11F.1 General Comments
11F. Indian Codes - Steel Design per IS 800 - 2007

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Indian code IS 800 - 2007 General
construction in steel - Code of practice.
11F.1 General Comments

For steel design, STAAD compares the actual design forces with the capacities as defined by the
Indian Standard Code. The IS 800: 2007 Code is used as the basis of this design.
A brief description of some of the major capacities is described herein.
The following commands should be used to initiate design per Limit State Method of this code:
PARAMETER n
CODE IS800 LSD
The following commands should be used to initiate design per Working Stress Method of this
code:
PARAMETER n
CODE IS800 WSD
Note: STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 3) (release 20.07.08) or higher are required for design per
WSD.
Where:
n = optional integer (i.e., - 1, 2) which signifies the numerical order of parameter

command block (if multiple blocks are specified).
11F.2 Design Process

The design process follows the following design checks.
1. Slenderness
2. Section Classification
3. Tension
4. Compression
5. Shear
6. Bending
7. Combined Interaction Check

All of the design check criteria are described in the following sections.
When a design is performed, the output file reports the maximum utilization ratio from all the
above mentioned checks.
11F.2.1 Slenderness
As per Section 3.8 Table 3, the slenderness ratio (KL/r) of compression members shall not exceed
180, and the slenderness ratio (L/r) of tension members shall not exceed 400.
You can edit the default values through MAIN and TMAIN parameters, as defined in Table 11F.1.
11F.2.2 Section Classification

The IS 800: 2007 specification allows inelastic deformation of section elements. Thus local buckling
becomes an important criterion.
Steel sections are classified as Plastic, Compact, Semi-Compact, or Slender element sections
depending upon their local buckling characteristics.
This classification is a function of the geometric properties of the section as well as nature of the
load applied to the member. The design procedures are different depending on the section class.
STAAD is capable of determining the section classification for the standard shapes and design the
section for the critical load case accordingly. The Section Classification is done as per section 3.7 of
IS 800:2007 and Table B2, for Outstanding and Internal Elements of a section.
For the criteria for being included in those classes, refer to section 3.7.2-(a) – (d) of the code.
Slender Sections
STAAD.Pro is capable of designing I-Sections with slender webs for IS 800:2007.
Note: This feature requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 3) (release 20.07.08) or higher.
The IS:800-2007 code does not provide any clear guidelines about what method should be adopted
for the design of slender section. The "Flange Only" methodology is used where it is assumed that
flexure is taken by the flanges alone and the web will resist shear with adequate shear buckling
resistance. This method requires that the flanges be non-slender elements (i.e., on the web is a
slender element) to qualify for a valid section for design. If any of the flange elements become
slender, the design will not be performed and a warning message is displayed in the output.
11F.2.3 Tension
Limit State Method
The criteria governing the capacity of Tension members are based on:

l Design Strength due to Yielding in Gross Section
l Design Strength due to Rupture of Critical Section
l Design Strength due to Block Shear
STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a given member based on these three limit states.
The limit state of yielding in the gross section is intended to prevent excessive elongation of the
member, and the corresponding check is done as per section 6.2 of the code.
The Design strength, involving rupture at the section with the net effective area, is evaluated as per
section 6.3 of the code. Here, the number of bolts in the connection may be specified through the
use of the design parameter ALPHA.
The Design strength, involving block shear at an end connection, is evaluated as per section 6.4 of
the code. This criteria is made optional by the parameter DBS. If the value of DBS is specified as 1,
additional design parameters AVG, AVN, ATG, and ATN must be supplied to the program for that
member.
The Net Section Area may be specified through the use of the parameter NSF.
Working Stress Method
The criteria governing the allowable stress from tension in members are based on Section 11.2.1 of
the code:
l Yielding of Gross Section - to prevent excessive elongation of the member due to material
yielding.
l Rupture of Net Section - to prevent rupture of the net effective section area. The number of
bolts in the connection may be specified through the use of the design parameter ALPHA.
The code parameter, γ , is taken as 1.25 per Table 5, Clause 5.4.1 of the code.
M1
l Block Shear — to prevent block shearing at the end connection. This check is made option
through use of the DBS parameter. Additional design parameters AVG, AVN, ATG, and ATN
must be supplied to the program for any member which is to be checked for block shear.
The code parameters,, γ and γ , are taken as 1.10 and 1.25, respectively, per Table 5, Clause
M0 M1
5.4.1 of the code.
Note: Block shear is not checked by default.
These criteria are dependant on the steel material yield stress parameter, FYLD, and ultimate
tensile strength parameter, FU.
11F.2.4 Compression
The design capacity of the section against Compressive Force, the guiding phenomenon is the
flexural buckling.

Limit State Method
The buckling strength of the member is affected by residual stress, initial bow and accidental
eccentricities of load.
To account for all these factors, the strength of the members subjected to axial compression is
defined by buckling class a, b, c or d as per clause 7.1.2.2 and Table 7 of IS 800:2007.
Imperfection factor, obtained from buckling class, and Euler’s Buckling Stress ultimately govern
compressive force capacity of the section as per clause 7.1.2 of IS 800:2007.
The actual compressive stress is given by:
fc = FX/Ae
Where:
A = The effective section area as per Clause 7.3.2 of the code. This is equal to the gross
e
cross sectional area, AX, for any non-slender (plastic, compact, or semi-compact)
section class. In the case of slender sections, this is limited to value of Ae as
described below.
The permissive compressive stress is calculated by first determining the Buckling Class of the
section per Table 10 of the code and α & α based on Table 7.
YY ZZ
Fac = 0.6·Fcd
Where:
F = the minimum of the values of Fcd calculated for the local Y and Z axis.
cd
Fcd = (FYLD/γmo )/ [φ + (φ2 + λ2 ]
λ = the non-dimensional slenderness factor is evaluated for each local Y and Z axis.
λ = (FYLD/Fcc)1/2
φ = 0.5[ 1 + a(λ - 0.2) + λ2 ]
F = the Euler Buckling Stress.

cc
Fcc = π2 ·E/(Kl/r)2
K = the effective length factor for bending about either the local Y or Z axis, as
provided in the KY and KZ parameters, respectively.
r = radius of gyration about the local Y or Z axis for the section.
FYLD = The yield strength of steel specified in the FYLD parameter.

Slender Sections
For member with slender section under axial compression, design compressive strength should be
calculated on area ignoring depth thickness ratio of web in excess of the class 3 (semi-compact)
limit.
Refer to clause 7.3.2 and Table 2 of IS 800:2007, (corresponding to “Internal Element of Compression
Flange”)
Ae= Ag - (d/tw - 42ε) · tw2
Where:
A = Effective area of section.

e
A = Gross area of section.
g
d = Depth of web.
t = thickness of web.
w
11F.2.5 Shear
The design capacities of the section against Shear Force in major- and minor-axis directions are
evaluated as per section 8.4 of the code, taking care of the following phenomena:
l Nominal Plastic Shear Resistance
l Resistance to Shear Buckling
Shear area of the sections are calculated as per sec. 8.4.1.1.
Nominal plastic shear resistance is calculated as per sec. 8.4.1.
Among shear buckling design methods, Simple post-critical method is adopted as per sec. 8.4.2.2(a).
Working Stress Design
The actual shear stress is determined about the major and minor axes, respectively:
τbY = FY / AY
τbZ = FZ / AZ
The permissible shear stress is determined as:
a. When subjected to pure shear:
τab = 0.40 · FYLD
b. When subjected to shear buckling:
τab = 0.70 · Vn · Av

Where:
V = Nominal Shear Strength as per Clause 8.4.2.2.(a)

n
Vn = Vcr = τb · Av
A = AY or AZ, whichever is appropriate, with reference to Clause 8.4.1.1.

v
Shear buckling must be checked when (d/ tw) > 67 · ϵw for webs without
stiffener or (d/tw) > 67 · ϵw · √(Kv /5.35) for webs with stiffeners.
d = Clear Depth of Web between Flanges.
t = Thickness of Web.
w
FYLD = Yield Strength of Web.
ϵ = √ ( 250 / FYLD )
w
K = Shear Buckling Coefficient:
v
= 5.35, when transverse stiffeners are provided only at supports.
= 4.0 + 5.35 / (c/d)2 for (c/d) < 1.0
= 5.35 + 4.0 / (c/d)2 for (c/d) ≥ 1.0
c = Spacing of Transverse Stiffeners
μ = Poisson’s Ratio
τ = Shear Stress corresponding to Web-buckling:

b
= FYLD / √3, when, λw ≤ 0.8
= ( 1 – 0.8 · (λw - 0.8) ) · (FYLD / √3) when, 0.8 < λw < 1.2
= FYLD / (√3 · λw2 ) when, λw ≥ 1.2
τ = The Elastic Critical Shear Stress of the Web

cr,e
τcr,e = (Kv · π2 · E) / (12 · (1 – μ2 ) · (d/tw)2 )
λ = Non-dimensional Web Slenderness Ratio for Shear Buckling Stress.

w
λw = [FYLD / (√3 · τcr,e)]1/2
Slender Sections
Slender sections should be verified against shear buckling resistance if d/tw > 67 · ε for web without
stiffeners or if it exceeds 67 · ε · √(Kv ⁄5.35) for a web with stiffeners.
Design methods for resistance to shear buckling are described in clause 8.4.2.2 of IS:800-2007 code.
Vn = Vcr
Where:

V = shear force corresponding to web buckling

cr
= Av · τb
τ = shear stress corresponding to web buckling, determined as follows:

b
i. When λw ≤ 0.8
τb = fyw⁄√3
ii. When 0.8 < λw < 1.2
τb = [1 - 0.8(λw - 0.8) ](fyw⁄√3)
iii. When λw ≥ 1.2
τb = fyw⁄((√3 λw2 ) )
λw = non-dimensional web slenderness ratio or shear buckling stress, given by:
λw= [ fyw⁄(√3 τcr,e )]1/2
τ = elastic critical shear stress of the web

cr,e
= (kv ·π2 ·E)/[12·(1 - μ2 ) (d⁄tw)2 ]
μ = Poisson’s ratio and
K =
v
l 5.35 when transverse stiffeners are provided only at supports
l 4.0 + 5.35/(c/d)2 for c/d < 1.0
l 5.35 + 4.0/(c/d)2 for c/d ≥ 1.0
c = spacing of transverse stiffeners
d = depth of the web
11F.2.6 Bending
The design bending moment capacity of a section is primarily dependent on whether the member
is laterally supported or unsupported.
You can control the lateral support condition of the member by the use of LAT parameter.
If the member is laterally supported, then the design strength is calculated as per the provisions of
the section 8.2.1 of IS 800:2007, based on the following factors:
l Whether section with webs susceptible to shear buckling before yielding
l Shear Force to Design Shear Strength Ratio
l Section Classification
If the member is laterally unsupported, then the design strength is calculated as per the provisions
of the section 8.2.2 of IS 800:2007, based on the following factors:

l Lateral Torsional Buckling
l Section Classification
Working Stress Design
Actual bending stress values are given by, about major (Z) and minor (Y) axes, respectively:
fbcz = Mz/Zecz
fbtz = Mz/Zetz
fbcy = My /Zecy
fbty = My /Zety
The permissible bending stress is given as follows:
a. For laterally supported beams:
Fabc = Fabt = 0.66·FYLD for Plastic or Compact sections
Fabc = Fabt = 0.60·FYLD for Semi-compact sections
b. For laterally unsupported beams:
i. About the major axis:
fabcz = 0.60·Md /Zecz
fabtz = 0.60·Md /Zetz
Where:
M = Design Bending Strength as per Clause 8.2.2

d
Md = βb · Zpz · fbd
fbd = χLT · FYLD / γmo
Z = Elastic Section Modulus of the Section.

ez
Z = Plastic Section Modulus of the Section.
pz
α = 0.21 for Rolled Steel Section and 0.49 for Welded Steel Section
LT
β = 1.0 for Plastic and Compact Section or Zez/Zpz for Semi-Compact
b
Section.
λ = Non-dimensional slenderness ratio

LT
λLT = (βb · Zpz · FYLD / Mcr)1/2 ≤ (1.2 · Zez · FYLD / Mcr )1/2
ϕLT = 0.5 · ( 1 + αLT · ( λLT – 0.2 ) + λLT2 )
χ = The Bending Stress Reduction Factor to account for Lateral

LT

Torsional Buckling.
1
χLTZ =
2 2
ϕ LTZ + ϕ LTZ − λ LTZ
Z = Elastic Section Modulus of the section about Major Axis for the
ecz
compression side.
Z = Elastic Section Modulus of the section about Major Axis for the
etz
tension side.
π 2EI y  π 2EI w 
M cr = 2
GI t + 2

L LT L LT
 
Iy = Moment of inertia about the minor axis.
L = Effective length for lateral torsional buckling as determined using

LT
either the KX or LX parameters.
It = Torsional constant of the section.
It = Warping constant of the section.
G = Shear modulus of the material.
ii. About the minor axis, the permissible bending stress is calculated as for a laterally
supported section.
Slender Sections
For member with slender section subjected to bending, moment is taken by flanges alone. Design
bending strength should be calculated with effective elastic modulus disregarding the contribution
of web of the section.
Zez = 2·[Bf · tf3 /12 + (Bf · tf) · (D/2 - tf/2)2 )] ⁄ (0.5 · D)
Zey = 2·(Bf · tf3 /12) ⁄ (0.5 · Bf)
Where:
Z = Elastic Section modulus about major principal axis.

ez
Z = Elastic Section modulus about minor principal axis.
ey
B = Width of flange.
f
T = thickness of flange.
f
D = Overall depth of section.
The Moment Capacity will be Md = Ze· fy /γm0 for “Laterally Supported” condition.
The Moment Capacity will be Md = Ze· fbd /γm0 for “Laterally Un-Supported” condition.

Where, f is defined in clause 8.2.2 of IS:800-2007 (described in previous Working Stress Design
bd
section).
Note: Slender section can only attain elastic moment capacity and cannot reach to plastic
moment capacity.
11F.2.7 Combined Interaction Check

Members subjected to various forces – axial, shear, moment, torsion - are checked against combined
interaction check.
Limit State Method
This interaction check is done taking care of two aspects:
l Section Strength
l Overall Member Strength
Section Strength interaction ratio is calculated as per sec. 9.3.1 of the code.
Overall Member Strength interaction ratio is calculated as per sec. 9.3.2, taking care of the design
parameters PSI, CMX, CMY and CMZ.
The following interactions are considered:
a. Combined Bending and Shear — No reduction in allowable stresses for the interaction of
bending and shear is considered.
b. Combined Axial Compression and Bending — The following formulas are intended to
require member stability:
fc/facy + 0.6·Ky (Cmy fbcy /fabcy ) + KLTfbcz/fabcz ≤ 1.0
fc/facz + 0.6·Ky (Cmy fbcy /fabcy ) + Kzfbcz/fabcz ≤ 1.0
fc/(0.6fy ) + fbcy /fabcy + fbcz/fabcz ≤ 1.0
Where:
f = Actual axial compressive stress.

c
f , f = Allowable compressive stress, governed by buckling, about the local
acy acz
Y and Z axis, respectively.
f , f = Actual bending compressive stress about minor and major axes,

bcy bcz
respectively.

11F.3 Member Property Specification
f ,f = Allowable bending compressive stress about minor and major axes,

abcy abcz
respectively.
Ky = 1 + (λy - 0.2)·ny ≤ 1 + 0.8·ny
Kz = 1 + (λz - 0.2)·nz ≤ 1 + 0.8·nz
KLT = 1 - 0.1·λLT·ny /(CmLT - 0.25) ≥ 0.1·ny /(CmLT - 0.25)
c. Combined Axial Tension and Bending — The following formulas are intended to require
member stability:
ft/fat + fbty /fabty + fbtz/fabtz ≤ 1.0
Where:
f = Actual axial tensile stress.

t
f = Allowable axial tensile stress.
at
f , f = Actual bending tensile stress about minor and major axes,
bty btz
respectively.
f ,f = Allowable bending tensile stress about minor and major axes,

abty abtz
respectively.
11F.3 Member Property Specification

For specification of member properties, the specified steel section available in Steel Section Library
of STAAD may be used (namely: I-shaped section, Channel, Tee, HSS Tube, HSS Pipe, Angle,
Double Angle, or Double Channel section).
Note: As of STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 2), the sections in this steel library are based on the IS
808 - 1989 specification. Prior versions of the software used the 1964 edition of that specification.
Member properties may also be specified using the User Table facility except for the General and
Prismatic member types.
For more information on these facilities, refer to Section 1.7 the STAAD Technical Reference
Manual.
11F.3.1 Star Angle Arrangements

STAAD.Pro can design "star angle" sections (double angles, toe to toe) per IS 800:2007. Members
using this section must be axial only (i.e., use TRUSS specification). It is assumed that the star angle
arrangement is a welded shape. Plated shapes are not accounted for in the program
Note: This feature requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 4) or higher.
The internal cross section properties are calculated for the principal axes and are checked for
Tension and Compression limit states as described in this section.

11F.4 Design Parameters

The program contains a large number of parameter names which are required to perform design
and code checks. These parameter names, with their default values, are listed in the following
table.
Table 11F.1-Indian Steel Design IS 800:2007 Parameters
Name
CODE - Must be specified as IS800 LSD

Reference Manual.
ALPHA 0.8 A Factor, based on the end-connection

type, controlling the Rupture Strength of
the Net Section, as per Section 6.3.3:
0.6 = For one or two bolts

0.7 = For three bolts
0.8 = For four or more bolts
ATG None Minimum Gross Area in Tension from the

(Mandatory bolt hole to the toe of the angle, end bolt
for Block line, perpendicular to the line of the force.
Shear check)
This parameter is applicable only when
DBS = 1.0 (as per Section 6.4.1).
ATN None Minimum Net Area in Tension from the

(Mandatory bolt hole to the toe of the angle, end bolt
for Block line, perpendicular to the line of the force.
Shear check)
AVG None Minimum Gross Area in shear along bolt

(Mandatory line parallel to external force.
for Block
Shear check)
AVN None Minimum Net Area in shear along bolt

(Mandatory line parallel to external force.
for Block
Shear check)


Name
BEAM 1.0 0.0 = design at ends and those locations

specified by the SECTION command.
1.0 = design at ends and at every 1/12th

point along member length (default).
0 = Minimum detail
1 = Intermediate detail level
2 = Maximum detail
CAN 0.0 Beam Type, as per section 8.2.1.2:
0 = non-cantilever beams for bending

check and deflection check
1 = cantilever beam
CMX 0.9 Equivalent uniform moment factor for

Lateral Torsional Buckling(as per Table 18,
section 9.3.2.2)
CMY 0.9 Cm value in local Y & Z axes, as per

Section 9.3.2.2.
CMZ
DBS 0.0 Check for Design against Block Shear:
0 = Design against Block Shear will not

be performed
1 = Design against Block Shear will be
performed
If DBS = 1.0, Non-Zero Positive values of

AVG, AVN, ATG, and ATN must be supplied to
calculate Block Shear Strength, Tdb.
DFF None "Deflection Length" / Maximum allowable

(Mandatory local deflection.
for deflection
check)
DJ1 Start Joint of Joint No. denoting starting point for


DMAX 1000 in. Maximum allowable depth.
DMIN 0.0 in. Minimum allowable depth.


Name
FU 420 MPA Ultimate Tensile Strength of Steel in

current units.
FYLD 250 MPA Yield Strength of Steel in current units.
KX 1.0 Effective Length Factor for Lateral

Torsional Buckling (as per Table-15, Section
8.3.1)
KY 1.0 K value in local Y-axis. Usually, the Minor

Axis.
KZ 1.0 K value in local Z-axis. Usually, the Major

Axis.
LAT 0.0 Specifies lateral support of beam, as per

Section 8.2.1 and 8.2.2, respectively:
0 = Beam is laterally unsupported

1 = Beam is laterally supported
LST 0 Defines the number of longitudinal

stiffeners used:
0 = No longitudinal stiffener
1 = Longitudinal stiffener is provided at
0.2D of web from the compression
flange
2 = Longitudinal stiffeners are provided
at 0.2D and 0.5D of the web from the
compression flange
LX Member Effective Length for Lateral Torsional

Length Buckling (as per Table-15, Section 8.3.1)
LY Member Length to calculate Slenderness Ratio for

Length buckling about local Y axis.
LZ Member Same as above except in Z-axis (Major).

Length
MAIN 180 Allowable Slenderness Limit for

Compression Member (as per Section 3.8)
NSF 1.0 Net Section Factor for Tension Member.
TMAIN 400 Allowable Slenderness Limit for Tension

Member (as per Section 3.8)

11F.5 Code Checking and Member Selection

Name
PROFILE None Used to search for the lightest section for

the profile(s) specified for member
selection. See Section 5.48.1 of the
Technical Reference Manual for details.
PSI 1.0 Ratio of the Moments at the ends of the

laterally unsupported length of the beam,
as per Section 9.3.2.1:
0.8 = where Factored Applied Moment

and Tension can vary independently
1.0 = For any other case
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of the actual to allowable

stresses.
STP 1 Specifies the section type per Table 2 and

Table 10:
1 = Hot rolled section

2 = Welded section
TRACK 0 Controls the levels of detail to which

results are reported.
0 = Minimum detail
2 = Maximum detail
TSP 0 Spacing of transverse stiffeners.
TST 0 Used to control transverse stiffeners in

design:
0 = No Transverse Stiffener is provided

1 = Transverse Stiffener is provided
11F.5 Code Checking and Member Selection

Both Code Checking and Member Selection options are available for the IS 800: 2007 code.
Checking command.

11F.6 Verification Example
11F.5.1 Example 1
Commands for code checking
UNIT NEWTON METER
PARAMETER 1
CODE IS800 LSD
ALPHA 0.7 ALL
DBS 1 ALL
CAN 1 MEMB 2
PSI 0.8 MEMB 2
TMAIN 350 MEMB 2
TRACK 2 MEMB 2
CHECK CODE MEMB 2
11F.5.2 Example 2
Commands for member selection
UNIT NEWTON METER
PARAMETER 1
CODE IS800 LSD
MAIN 160 MEMB 7
KY 0.8 MEMB 7
KZ 0.9 MEMB 7
FYLD 350 ALL
SELECT ALL

Calculate compressive strength, bending strength, and shear strength of laterally supported plate
girder 800-6-200-10 given F = 250 MPa and F = 420 MPa. Check per the IS800: 2007 Limit State
y u
Design methodology.
11F.6.1 Solution
E = 2.05(10)5 MPa
Note: This is the default value of the modulus of elasticity for steel used by STAAD.Pro. IS
800:2007 specifies that a modulus of 2.0(10)5 MPa should be used.
μ = 0.3
G = E/2.0(1 + μ) = 78,846 MPa
Cross sectional properties:
Ag = 800·6 + 2·(200·10) = 8,800 mm2

Izz = 912.1(10)6 mm4
Iyy =13.35(10)6 mm4
Ryy = √(Iyy ⁄Area) = 38.95 mm
Rzz = √(Izz⁄Area) = 321.95 mm
Force:
F = 19.644 kN (Compression)
x
F = 1.2 kN
y
F = 2.0 kN
z
M = 0.0 kN·m
x
M = 10.0 kN·m
y
M = 51.659 kN·m
z
Section Classification
Flange:
b = (bf - tw)/2 = (200 - 6)/2 = 97 mm
ε f = √(250/fy ) = √(250/250) = 1.0
b/tf = 97/10 = 9.7 > 9.4·ε, < 13.6·ε
Thus, the flange is considered semi-compact.
Web:
r2 = (Fx /Area)/fy = (19,644 / 8,800)/250 = 0.0089

126ϵ 126(1.0)
= = 123.8
1 + 2r 2 1 + 2(0.0089)
> 42·ε = 42(1.0) = 42
d/tw = 800/6 = 133.33 > 123.8
Thus, the web is considered slender.
The overall section is classified as slender.
Calculation of compressive strength
Net area of section:
Ae= Ag - (d/tw - 42.0·ε) · tw2 = 8,800 - [133.33 - 42.0(1.0)]·(6)2 = 5,512. mm2
Slenderness ratio:
(ky L/Ry ) = 0.33·(5,000) / 38.95 = 42.36

(kzL/Rz) = 1.0·(5,000) / 321.95 = 15.53
Euler buckling stress (per Cl.7.1.2.1 of IS 800:2007):

2 5
π 2E π 2.05(10)
Fcc = = = 1, 127 MPa
(KL / R ) 2 (42.36) 2
Non-dimensional effective slenderness ratio:

Fy 250
= = = 0.471
Fcc 1, 127
Imperfection factor, α, is equal to 0.49 and buckling class is c as T < 40.0 mm and buckling is
f
about YY axis (per Table 7 and Table 10 in IS 800:2007).
Partial factor of safety γmo = 1.10
Per Cl.7.1.2.1 of IS 800:2007:
ϕ = 0.5[1 + α(λ - 0.2) + λ2 ] = 0.5[1 + 0.49(0.471 - 0.2) + (0.471)2 ] = 0.677
Stress reduction factor, χ

1
χ= ≤ 1.0
ϕ+ ϕ 2− λ 2
1
χ= = 0.86 < 1.0
0.677 + 0.677 2 − 0.4712
fcd = χ·(fy /γmo ) = 0.86·(250 / 1.1) = 195.5 MPa
Design compressive strength (per Cl.7.1.2 of IS 800:2007):
Pd = Ae·fcd = 5,512.·(195.5) = 1,077 kN
Calculation of bending strength
The web is slender and hence it is disregarded in bending strength calculation.
 200(10) 3   10 2
I z = 2

12
+ 200 × 10
 
( 800
2
+
2 )  = 656.1(10)
6
mm4
Zez = Iz/(820/2) =656.1(10)6 /410 = 1.60(10)6 mm3
Iy =2(10)(200)3 ⁄12 = 13.33(10)6 mm4
Zey = Iy ⁄(0.5×Bf) = 13.33(10)6 /(0.5×200) = 133,333 mm3
Ixx = 2(Bf · Tf3 /3.0) = 2.0[(200)(10)3 /3.0] = 133.333(10)3 mm4
For laterally supported beam:
Mdz = Zez · Fy /γmo = 1.60(10)6 (250)/1.10 = 364 kN·m
Mdy = Zey · Fy /γmo =133,333(250)/1.1 = 30.3 kN·m
For laterally unsupported beam:

Warping constant:
Iw = (d + Tf)2 · Bf3 · Tf/24.0 = (800 + 10)2 · 2003 · 10/24.0 = 2.187(10)12 mm6
Elastic lateral torsional buckling moment (per Cl.8.2.2.1 of IS 800:2007):
LLT = 5,000 mm
π 2EI y  π 2EI w 
M cr = 2
GI xx + 2

L LT L LT
 
π 22.05(10) 513.33(10)6    π 22.05(10) 52.187(10) 12 
= 2 78, 846133, 333 + 2  = 449.8 kN ⋅ m
5, 000    5, 000 
λLTZ =
Z ezF y
=
1.60(10) 250 ( )
6
= 0.943
M cr 6
449.8(10)
α = 0.49 for welded steel section per Cl.8.2.2 of IS 800:2007

LT
ϕLTZ = 0.5×[1 + αLT (λLTZ - 0.2) + λLTZ2 ] = 1.13
1 1
χLTZ = = = 0.574
2 2 2 2
ϕ LTZ + ϕ LTZ − λ LTZ 1.13 + 1.13 − 0.943
fbdz = (χLTZ· Fy ) ⁄ γmo = 0.574(250)/1.1 = 130.4 MPa
Mdz = Zez· fbdz = 1.6(10)6 (130.4) = 208.6 kN·m
MdY = (Zey · Fy ) / γmo = 133,333(250)/1.1 = 30.30 kN·m
Calculation of shear strength
c = spacing of stiffener = 1000 mm
d = depth of web = 800 mm
c/d = 1000/800 = 1.25 > 1.0
Hence, per Cl.8.4.2.2.(a):
kv = 5.35 + 4.0/(c/d)2 = 7.91
d/Tw = 800/6 = 133.33
67 k v / 5.35 = 81.47
Since, d/Tw > 67√(kv ⁄5.35), shear strength is governed by shear buckling.
Elastic critical stress of the web

2 2 5
k vπ E 7.91 ⋅π 2.05(10)
tcr, e = 2
= 2
= 82.44
12 1 − µ 2 d / T  12 1 − 0.3 2 133.33
 ( ) w   ( )
Non-dimensional web slenderness ratio for shear buckling stress:

f yw 410
λw = = = 1.323 > 1.2
3 t cr ,e 3 ⋅ 82.44
Hence
f yw 250
τb = 2
= = 82.46
3λ w 3 (1.323) 2
Shear force corresponding to shear buckling = A · τ

v b
A WY ⋅ τ b 800(6)(82.46)
VcrY = = = 359.5 kN
γ m0 1.1
A WZ ⋅ τ b 200(10)(82.46)
VcrY = = = 300.0 kN
γ m0 1.1
11F.6.2 Comparison
Table 11F.2-IS 800:2007 Verification Problem 1
Item Reference STAAD.Pro Difference
Compressive 1,077 1.076(10)3 Negligible

Strength, P (kN)
d
Major Axis 208.6 208.681 Negligible

Bending
Strength, M
dz
(kN·m)
(Laterally
unsupported)
Minor Axis 30.30 30.303 Negligible

Bending
Strength, M
dy
(kN·m)
(Laterally
unsupported)
Major Axis Shear 359.5 359.732 Negligible

Strength, V
crY
(kN)
MInor Axis Shear 300.0 299.776 Negligible

Strength, V
crZ
(kN)

11F.6.3 STAAD Input File

STAAD SPACE
START JOB INFORMATION
ENGINEER DATE 22-Oct-08
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 0 5 0; 3 5 5 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2; 2 2 3;
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2.05e+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2e-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
START USER TABLE
TABLE 1
UNIT METER KN
WIDE FLANGE
SLEND
0.0088 0.82 0.006 0.2 0.01 0.000912133 1.33477e-005 1.90933e-007 0.00492 0.004
END
MEMBER PROPERTY AMERICAN
1 UPTABLE 1 SLEND
2 TABLE ST ISMB500
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
LOAD 1 LOADTYPE None TITLE LOAD CASE 1
JOINT LOAD
3 FY -2
MEMBER LOAD
2 UNI GY -2
JOINT LOAD
2 FX 1.2
2 FZ -2
SELFWEIGHT Y -1 ALL
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PRINT SUPPORT REACTION
PRINT MEMBER FORCES
PARAMETER 1
CODE IS800 LSD
CAN 0 MEMB 1
ky 0.33 all
stp 2 all
TST 1 MEMB 1
TSP 1 MEMB 1
***Laterally Unsupported****
*LAT 1 all
TRACK 2 MEMB 1
CHECK CODE MEMB 1
PARAMETER 2
CODE IS800 LSD
CAN 0 MEMB 1
ky 0.33 all

stp 2 all
TST 1 MEMB 1
TSP 1 MEMB 1
***Laterally supported****
LAT 1 all
TRACK 2 MEMB 1
CHECK CODE MEMB 1
FINISH
11F.6.4 Output
TRACK 2.0 output for the Laterally unsupported check
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - IS-800 2007 (V2.0)
************************************************
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Member Number: 1 |
| Member Section: ST SLEND (UPT) |
| Status: PASS Ratio: 0.401 Critical Load Case: 1 Location: 0.00 |
| Critical Condition: Sec. 9.3.1.1 |
| Critical Design Forces: (Unit: KN METE) |
| FX: 19.644E+00 C FY: -1.200E+00 FZ: -2.000E+00 |
| MX: 0.000E+00 MY: -10.000E+00 MZ: 51.659E+00 |
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Section Properties: (Unit: CM ) |
| AXX: 88.000E+00 IZZ: 91.213E+03 RZZ: 32.195E+00|
| AYY: 48.000E+00 IYY: 1.335E+03 RYY: 3.895E+00|
| AZZ: 40.000E+00 IXX: 19.093E+00 CW: 2.187E+06|
| ZEZ: 2.225E+03 ZPZ: 2.580E+03 |
| ZEY: 133.477E+00 ZPY: 207.200E+00 |
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Slenderness Check: (Unit: METE) |
| Actual Length: 5.000E+00 |
| Parameters: LZ: 5.000E+00 LY: 5.000E+00 |
| KZ: 1.000 KY: 0.330 |
| Actual Ratio: 42.37 Allowable Ratio: 180.00 LOAD: 1 FX: 19.644E+00 C |
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Section Class: Slender; Flange Class: Semi-Compact; Web Class: Slender |
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
************************************************
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Tension: (Unit:KN METE) |
| Parameters: FYLD: 250.000E+03 FU: 420.000E+03 |
| NSF: 1.000 ALPHA: 0.800 DBS: 0 |
| Capacity: 2.000E+03 As per sec. No.:Cl. 6.2 |
| Actual Design Force: 0.000E+00 LC: 0 |
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Compression: (Unit:KN METE) |
| Buckling Class: Major: b Minor: c As per Sec. No.:Cl. 7.1.2.2 |
| Capacity: 1.076E+03 As per sec. No.:Cl. 7.1.2 |
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Shear: (Unit:KN ) |
| Major Axis: Actual Design Force: -1.200E+00 LC: 1 Loc: 0.000E+00|
| Minor Axis: Actual Design Force: -2.000E+00 LC: 1 Loc: 0.000E+00|

|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Bending: (Unit:KN METE) |
| Parameters: Laterally Unsupported KX: 1.00 LX: 5.000E+00 General |
| Major Axis: Actual Design Force: 51.659E+00 LC: 1 Loc: 0.000E+00|
| Capacity: 30.303E+00 As per sec. No.:Cl. 8.2.1.1 |
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Combined Interaction: |
| Parameters: PSI: 1.00 CMX: 0.900 CMY: 0.900 CMZ: 0.900 |
| Interaction Ratio: 0.401 As per sec. No.:Sec. 9.3.1.1 |
| LC: 1 Loc: 0.000E+00 |
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Checks Ratio Load Case No. Location from Start |
| |
| Tension 0.000 0 0.000E+00 |
| Compression 0.018 1 0.000E+00 |
| Shear Major 0.003 1 0.000E+00 |
| Shear Minor 0.007 1 0.000E+00 |
| Bend Major 0.248 1 0.000E+00 |
| Bend Minor 0.340 1 0.000E+00 |
| Sec. 9.3.1.1 0.401 1 0.000E+00 |
| Sec. 9.3.2.2 (Z) 0.210 1 5.000E+00 |
| Sec. 9.3.2.2 (Y) 0.233 1 5.000E+00 |
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
TRACK 2.0 output for the laterally supported check

************************************************
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Status: PASS Ratio: 0.360 Critical Load Case: 1 Location: 0.00 |
| Critical Condition: Sec. 9.3.1.1 |
| Critical Design Forces: (Unit: KN METE) |
| FX: 19.644E+00 C FY: -1.200E+00 FZ: -2.000E+00 |
| MX: 0.000E+00 MY: -10.000E+00 MZ: 51.659E+00 |
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Section Properties: (Unit: CM ) |
| AXX: 88.000E+00 IZZ: 91.213E+03 RZZ: 32.195E+00|
| AYY: 48.000E+00 IYY: 1.335E+03 RYY: 3.895E+00|
| AZZ: 40.000E+00 IXX: 19.093E+00 CW: 2.187E+06|
| ZEZ: 2.225E+03 ZPZ: 2.580E+03 |
| ZEY: 133.477E+00 ZPY: 207.200E+00 |
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Slenderness Check: (Unit: METE) |
| Actual Length: 5.000E+00 |
| Parameters: LZ: 5.000E+00 LY: 5.000E+00 |
| KZ: 1.000 KY: 0.330 |
| Actual Ratio: 42.37 Allowable Ratio: 180.00 LOAD: 1 FX: 19.644E+00 C |
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Section Class: Slender; Flange Class: Semi-Compact; Web Class: Slender |
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
************************************************
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Tension: (Unit:KN METE) |
| Parameters: FYLD: 250.000E+03 FU: 420.000E+03 |
| NSF: 1.000 ALPHA: 0.800 DBS: 0 |
| Capacity: 2.000E+03 As per sec. No.:Cl. 6.2 |

|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Compression: (Unit:KN METE) |
| Buckling Class: Major: b Minor: c As per Sec. No.:Cl. 7.1.2.2 |
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Shear: (Unit:KN ) |
| Major Axis: Actual Design Force: -1.200E+00 LC: 1 Loc: 0.000E+00|
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Bending: (Unit:KN METE) |
| Parameters: Laterally Supported KX: 1.00 LX: 5.000E+00 General |
| Major Axis: Actual Design Force: 51.659E+00 LC: 1 Loc: 0.000E+00|
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Combined Interaction: |
| Parameters: PSI: 1.00 CMX: 0.900 CMY: 0.900 CMZ: 0.900 |
| Interaction Ratio: 0.360 As per sec. No.:Sec. 9.3.1.1 |
| LC: 1 Loc: 0.000E+00 |
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Checks Ratio Load Case No. Location from Start |
| |
| Tension 0.000 0 0.000E+00 |
| Compression 0.018 1 0.000E+00 |
| Shear Major 0.003 1 0.000E+00 |
| Shear Minor 0.007 1 0.000E+00 |
| Bend Major 0.142 1 0.000E+00 |
| Bend Minor 0.340 1 0.000E+00 |
| Sec. 9.3.1.1 0.360 1 0.000E+00 |
| Sec. 9.3.2.2 (Z) 0.126 1 5.000E+00 |
| Sec. 9.3.2.2 (Y) 0.141 1 5.000E+00 |
|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------|

12
Japanese Codes

12 Japanese Codes

12A. Japanese Codes - Concrete Design Per 1991 AIJ

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the Japan code AIJ 2002 Architectural
Institute of Japan Standards for Structural Calculation of Steel Reinforced Concrete Structures.
Design for a member involves calculation of the amount of reinforcement required for the member.
Calculations are based on the user specified properties and the member forces obtained from the
analysis. In addition, the details regarding placement of the reinforcement on the cross section are
also reported in the output.
Design of members per AIJ requires the STAAD Japan Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.

The following types of cross sections for concrete members can be designed:
l For Beams — Prismatic (Rectangular and Square)

input under the MEMBER PROPERTY command. These are the D (YD) and b (ZD) dimensions for
rectangular or square cross sections and the D (YD) for circular cross sections.
The following is an example the required input:

UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTY
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 250.
11 13 PR YD 350.
circular with a 350 mm diameter.
Caution: It is absolutely imperative that you do not provide the cross section area (AX) as an
input.

Slenderness effects are extremely important in designing compression members. Slenderness effects
result in additional forces being exerted on the column over and above those obtained from the
elastic analysis. There are two options by which the slenderness effects can be accommodated.
The first option is to compute the secondary moments through an exact analysis. Secondary
moments are caused by the interaction of the axial loads and the relative end displacements of a

12A.4 Beam Design
member. The axial loads and joint displacements are first determined from an elastic stiffness
analysis and the secondary moments are then evaluated.
The second option is to approximately magnify the moments from the elastic analysis and design
the column for the magnified moment. It is assumed that the magnified moment is equivalent to
the total moment comprised of the sum of primary and secondary moments.
STAAD provides facilities to design according to both of the above methods. To utilize the first
method, the command PDELTA ANALYSIS must be used instead of PERFORM ANALYSIS in the input
file. The user must note that to take advantage of this analysis, all the combinations of loading
must be provided as primary load cases and not as load combinations. This is due to the fact that
load combinations are just algebraic combinations of forces and moments, whereas a primary load
case is revised during the P-delta analysis based on the deflections. Also, note that the proper
factored loads (like 1.5 for dead load etc.) should be provided by the user. STAAD does not factor
the loads automatically. The second method mentioned above is utilized by providing the
magnification factor as a concrete design parameter (See the parameter MMAG in Table 10A.1). The
column is designed for the axial load and total of primary and secondary biaxial moments if the
first method is used and for the axial load and magnified biaxial moments if the second method is
used.
12A.4 Beam Design

Beams are designed for flexure, shear and torsion. The program considers 12 equally spaced divisions
of the beam member. However this number can be redefined by NSECTION parameter. All these
sections are designed for flexure, shear and torsion for all load cases. The results include design
results for most critical load case.
Example
UNIT KG CM
CODE JAPAN
FYMAIN SRR295 ALL
FYSEC SRR295 ALL
FC 350 ALL
CLEAR 2.5 MEM 2 TO 6
DESIGN BEAM 2 TO 9
END CONCRETE DESIGN

Reinforcement for positive and negative moments are calculated on the basis of section properties
provided by the user. Program first try to design the section for g = 0 and pt = balanced
reinforcement ratio. If allowable moment is lower than the actual moment program increases g
value for same pt and checks the satisfactory conditions. If conditions are not satisfied this
procedure continues until g reaches to 1.0 and then pt value is increased keeping g = 1.0. This
procedure continues until pt reaches to its maximum value( 2 % ). But if the allowable moment for

12A.5 Column Design
pt = maximum value and g = 1.0 is lower than the actual moment the program gives message that
the section fails.
This program automatically calculates the Bar size and no. of bars needed to design the section. It
arranges the bar in layers as per the requirements and recalculate the effective depth and redesign
the sections for this effective depth.
Notes:
a. Beams are designed for MZ only. The moment MY is not considered in flexure design
b. MMAG parameter can be used to increase design moment
c. 1.4 cm. is added to the clear cover to take stirrup size into consideration for flexure design.
d. STAAD beam design procedure is based on the local practice and considering the fact that
Japan is a high seismic zone area.

The Design Shear value, Q , is evaluated for the beam. The update effective depth is used to then
D
calculate the allowable shear stress. The allowable shear stress of concrete, f , is automatically
s
calculated from design load type (permanent or temporary) and given density of concrete. The
program then calculates the required bar size, aw, and spacing of stirrups. The reinforcement ratio
for the stirrup, p , is calculated for design Bar size and stirrup pitch and all the necessary checking
w
is done.
For seismic loading it is needed to increase shear force ≥ 1.5 times the actual value and this can be
done utilizing the Design Shear Modification factor, k (SMAG parameter) without changing the
Design Moment.
Notes:
a. Stirrups are always assumed to be 2-legged
b. Governing density to determine Light weight or Normal Weight Concrete is 2.3 kg/sq. cm
12A.4.3 Design for Torsion

Torsion design for beam is optional. If the TORSION parameter value is 1.0, the program will design
the assigned beam(s) for torsion. The program first checks whether extra reinforcement is needed
for torsion or not. If additional reinforcement is needed, this additional pt is added to flexure pt
and additional Pw is added to shear design Pw.
12A.5 Column Design

Columns are designed for axial force, MZ moment, MY moment, and shear force. Both the ends of
the members are designed for all the load cases and the loading which produces largest amount of
reinforcement is called as critical load. If Track 0 or Track 1 is used, design results will be printed
for critical load only. But if Track 2 is used, you can get detailed design results of that member. The

12A.5 Column Design
value of Pt needed for minimum axial force, maximum axial force, maximum MZ, maximum MY
among all the load cases for both the ends will be printed. If the MMAG parameter is used, the
column moments will be multiplied by that value. If the SMAG parameter is used, column shear
force will be multiplied by that value.
Column design is done for Rectangular, Square and Circular sections. For rectangular and square
sections Pt value is calculated separately for MZ and MY, while for circular sections Pg value is
calculated for MZ and MY separately.
Column design for biaxial moments is optional. If the BIAXIAL parameter value is 1.0, the program
will design the column for biaxial moments. Otherwise column design is always uniaxial.
Steps involved:
1. Depending on the axial force zone is determined for Pt = 0.0 .
2. If the column is in "zone A", design is performed by increasing Pt and checking allowable
load for that known Pt and known actual eccentricity of the column.
3. If the column is in "zone B" or in "zone C", xn is calculated for given P and Pt and checking
is done for allowable moment, if allowable moment is less than the actual moment, program
increases Pt and this procedure continues until the column design conditions are satisfied
or the column fails as the required Pt is higher than Pt maximum value.
4. If the column is in tension, design is done by considering allowable tensile stress of steel
only.
5. If biaxial design is requested program solve the following interaction equation
6. where, a = 1.0+1.66666666 ´ (ratio-0.2), ratio = P/Pcap & 1.0 £ a £ 2.0, Mycap, Mzcap & Pcap
represents section capacity
7. If the interaction equation is not satisfied program increases Pt and calculates Pcap, Mycap
and Mzcap and solve the interaction equation again and this process continues until the
eqn. is satisfied or the column fails as Pt exceeds its maximum limit.
8. If biaxial design is not requested program assumes that interaction equation is satisfied (if
uniaxial design is performed successfully).
9. If the interaction equation is satisfied program determines bar size and calculates no. of bars
and details output is written.
12A.5.1 Example
UNIT KGS CMS
CODE JAPAN
FYMAIN SRR295 ALL
FC 210 ALL
CLEAR 2.5 MEMB 2 TO 6
END CONCRETE DESIGN


To design a slab or a wall, it must first be modeled using finite elements and analyzed. The
command specifications are in accordance with Chapter 2 and Chapter 6 of the Technical Reference
Manual.
element force output (see Chapter 2 of the Technical Reference Manual). The reinforcement
required to resist the Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the reinforcement
required to resist the My moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement.
The longitudinal bar is the layer closest to the exterior face of the slab or wall. The following
parameters are those applicable to slab and wall design:
1. FYMAIN — Yield stress for reinforcing steel - transverse and longitudinal.
2. FC— Concrete grade
3. CLEAR — Distance from the outer surface of the element to the edge of the bar. This is
considered the same on both top and bottom surfaces of the element.
4. MINMAIN — Minimum required size of longitudinal/transverse reinforcing bar
The other parameters shown in Table 12A.1 are not applicable to slab or wall design.

Table 10A.1 contains a complete list of the available parameters and their default values. It is
necessary to declare length and force units as centimeters and Kilograms before performing the
concrete design.
Table 12A.1-Japanese Concrete Design Parameters

Name
CODE - Must be specified as JAPAN.



Name
BIAXIAL 0.0 Value to define biaxial or uniaxial design

type for Column
0. uniaxial design only

1. design for biaxial moments
CLEAR 3.0 cm (beam) Clear cover for Beam or clear side cover for
column.
4.0 cm
(Column)
DEPTH YD Depth of concrete member. This value

defaults to YD as provided under
MEMBER PROPERTIES.

(Note: Both SFACE & EFACE are input as
positive numbers).
FC 210 Kg/cm2 Compressive Strength of Concrete.
FYMAIN SR235 Steel grade. Acceptable values for steel

grade and their associated yield stress
values are shown in the following table.
Program automatically calculates yield
stress value depending on design load type
(permanent or temporary).
FYSEC SR235 Same as FYMAIN except this is for

secondary steel.
LONG 0.0 Value to define design load type
0. Permanent Loading
1. Temporary Loading
MAXMAIN 41.0 cm Maximum main reinforcement bar size
MAXSEC 41.0 cm Maximum secondary reinforcement bar

size.

size.
MMAG 1.0 Design moment magnification factor


Name

considered in finding critical moments for
beam design.
REINF 0.0 Tied Column. A value of 1.0 will mean

spiral.
SFACE 0.0 Face of support location at start of beam.
SMAG 1.0 Design shear magnification factor
TORSION 0.0 Value to request for torsion design for

beam
0. torsion design not needed

1. torsion design needed
0. Critical section design results.

1. Five section design results & design
forces.
2. 12 section design results & design
forces.
Column Design:
1. Detail design results for critical

load case only.
2. Design results for minimum P,
maximum P, maximum MZ and
maximum MY among all load cases
for both ends.
WIDTH ZD Width of concrete member. This value

defaults to ZD as provided under
MEMBER PROPERTIES.

Table 12A.2-Table of permissible Steel Grades and associated Yield Stresses for
FYMAIN and FYSEC parameters
Steel Long Term Loading Short Term Loading
Grade
Tension Shear Tension Shear
& Compressio Reinforceme & Compressi Reinforcemen
n nt on t
SR235 1600 1600 2400 2400

SRR235
SDR235
SR295 1600 2000 3000 3000

SRR295
SD295A 2000 2000 3000 3000

SD295B
SDR295
SDR345 2200 (2000) 2000 3500 3500

SD345
SD390 2200 (2000) 2000 4000 4000

12B.1 General
12B. Japanese Codes - Steel Design Per 2005 AIJ

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Japanese code AIJ 2005 Specifications
for structural steel design.
Design of members per AIJ 2005 requires the STAAD Japan Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.
12B.1 General
This section presents some general statements regarding the implementation of the “Architectural
Institute of Japan” (AIJ) specifications for structural steel design (2005 edition) in STAAD. The
design philosophy and procedural logistics are based on the principles of elastic analysis and
criteria. Users are recommended to adopt the following steps in performing the steel design:
l Specify the geometry and loads and perform the analysis.
l Specify the design parameter values if different from the default values.
The method for calculating allowable bending stress was updated for the AIJ 2005 from the AIJ
2002 code. All other allowable limit states, analysis and design methods, etc., remain unchanged.
Refer to the AIJ 2002 documentation for additional details.

Member design and code checking per AIJ 2005 are based upon the allowable stress design method.
It is a method for proportioning structural members using design loads and forces, allowable
stresses, and design limitations for the appropriate material under service conditions. The basic
measure of member capacities are the allowable stresses on the member under various conditions of
applied loading such as allowable tensile stress, allowable compressive stress etc. These depend on
several factors such as cross sectional properties, slenderness factors, unsupported width to
thickness ratios and so on. Explained here is the procedure adopted in STAAD for calculating such
capacities.
12B.2.1 Design Capabilities

All types of available shapes like H-Shape, I-Shape, L-Shapes, CHANNEL, PIPE, TUBE, Prismatic
section etc. can be used as member property and STAAD will automatically adopt the design

procedure for that particular shape if Steel Design is requested. STEEL TABLE available within
STAAD or UPTABLE facility can be used for member property.
12B.2.2 Methodology
For steel design, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the allowable stresses as required by AIJ
specifications. The design procedure consist of following three steps.
1. Calculation of sectional properties
The program extracts sectional properties like sectional area ( A ), Moment of Inertia about Y
axis and Z axis, I , I , from built-iu steel tables and calculates the elastic moduli and radii
yy zz
of gyration, Z , Z , i , i , using the appropriate formulas. For the calculation of i, the program
z y y z
calculates the moment of inertia, I, and sectional area, A , using the following formula:
i
i = √(Ii/Ai)
Note: The above mentioned procedure for calculation of i is applicable for I shape, H shape
and Channel sections.
2. Calculation of actual and allowable stresses
Program calculates actual and allowable stresses by following methods:
i. Axial Stress:
Actual tensile stresses ( F ) = Force / ( A x NSF ),

T
NSF = Net Section Factor for tension input as a design parameter
Actual compressive stress ( F ) = Force / A

C
Allowable tensile stress ( f )
t
= FYLD / 1.5 (For Permanent Case)
= FYLD ( For Temporary Case )
Where:
FYLD = Yield stress input as a design parameter
Allowable compressive stress
 λ 2
( )
 1 − 0.4 Λ F

  when λ≤ Λ
fc =  ν
 0.227F
when λ> Λ
 λ
2
 ( ) Λ
= fc x 1.5 (for Temporary case)

Where:
2
π E
Λ=
0.6F
2
ν=
3
2
+
2 λ
3 Λ ()
λ = maximum slenderness, LE/I, considering both principal axis
E = Young's Modulus
ii. Bending Stress:
Actual bending stress for My for compression:
( Fbcy ) = My / Zcy
Actual bending stress for Mz for compression
( Fbcz) = Mz / Zcz
Actual bending stress for My for tension
( Fbty ) = My / Zty
Actual bending stress for Mz for tension
( Fbtz ) = Mz / Ztz
Where:
Z , Z are elastic section modulus about the Y and Z axis for the end
cy cz
in compression
Z , Z are elastic section modulus about the Y and Z axis for the end
ty tz
in tension
Allowable bending stress for M

y
(fbcy ) = ft

z
When λb ≤ p λb , fb = F/ν
When p λb < λb ≤ eλb ,

 λb − p λ 
b
F 1 − 0.4 
λ − λ 
 e b p b
fb =
ν
When eλb < λb ,

1 F
fb =
λ b2 2.17
Where:

λb = My / Me
e λb = 1 / 0.6
2
3 2 λ 
ν= +  b
2 3e λb
π 4EI yEI w π 2EI yGJ

Me = C 4
+ 2
Ib Ib
p λb = 0.6 + 0.3 ( ) or taken as the value of PLB if not 0

M2
M1
M1 and M2 are the member end moments
For Temporary case, f = 1.5 x (f for Permanent case)

bcz bcz
Where:
C = 1.75 - 1.05 (M2 / M1) + 0.3 (M2 / M1)2
Allowable bending stress for M , f =f

y bty t
z btz bcz
Note: The parameter CB can be used to specify a value for C directly.
iii. Shear Stress
Actual shear stresses are calculated by the following formula:
Qy = Fy / Aww
Where:
A = web shear area = depth times web thickness

ww
Qz = Fz / Aff
Where:
A = flange shear area = 2/3 times total flange area

ff
Allowable shear stress:
Permanent Loads: fs = [FYLD/√(3)]/ 1.5
Temporary Loads: fs = FYLD / √(3)
3. Checking design requirements:
User provided RATIO value (default 1.0) is used for checking design requirements:

The following conditions are checked to meet the AIJ specifications. For all the conditions
calculated value should not be more than the value of RATIO. If for any condition value
exceeds RATIO, program gives the message that the section fails.
Conditions:
i. Axial tensile stress ratio = FT / ft
ii. Axial compressive stress ratio = FC / fc
iii. Combined compression & bending ratio = FC / fc+Fbcz/fbcz+Fbcy /fbcy
iv. Combined compression & bending ratio = (Fbtz+Fbty -FC) / ft
v. Combined tension & bending ratio = (FT+Fbtz+Fbty ) / ft
vi. Combined tension & bending ratio = Fbcz/fbcz+Fbcy /fbcy - FT/ft
vii. Shear stress ratio for qy = qy / fs
viii. Shear stress ratio for qz = qz / fs
ix. von Mises stress ratio (if the von Mises stresses were set to be checked) = fm/(k⋅ft)
Note: All other member capacities (axial tension, axial compression, and shear) are calculated as
for AIJ 2002. See "Member Capacities" on page 562

You are allowed complete control over the design process through the use of parameters mentioned
in Table 12B.1 of this chapter. These parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer to
the program. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used
numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements of the
situation, some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the
physical structure.
Table 12B.1-Japanese Steel Design Parameters

Name
CODE - Must be specified as JAPANESE 2005 to

invoke the AIJ 2005.

Reference Manual.


Name
BEAM 0.0 0.0 = design only for end moments or

those at locations specified by the SECTION
command.
1.0 = calculate moments at twelfth points

along the beam, and use the maximum Mz
location for design.
CAN 0 Specifies the method used for deflection

checks
0. deflection check based on the

principle that maximum deflection
occurs within the span between DJ1
and DJ2.
is of the cantilever type (see note a)
CB 0 C value from the AIJ code. See "Member

Capacities" on page 543 - Bending Stress
for how C is calculated and applied.
Use 0.0 to direct the program to calculated

Cb.
Any other value be used in lieu of the

program calculated value.
DFF None "Deflection Length" / Maxm. allowable

(Mandatory local deflection
for
deflection
check)

Note b)

Note b)
DMAX 100 cm Maximum allowable depth for member.
DMIN 0.0 cm Minimum allowable depth for member.


Name
FYLD 235 MPA Yield strength of steel in Megapascal.

minor axis.

major axis.

LZ Member Same as above except in z-axis

Length
MAIN 0.0 0.0 = check for slenderness
1.0 = suppress slenderness check
MISES 0 Option to include check for von Mises

stresses
0 = Do not include check.
1 = Perform Von Mises stress check.
PLB 0 Plastic critical slenderness ratio.
If this is 0 (the default value), it will be

calculated according to AIJ 2005 eqn. 5.12
or 5.14. Any other entered value will be
used as the value of p-lambda-b.

stresses.
SSY 0.0 0.0 = Sidesway in local y-axis.
1.0 = No sidesway
SSZ 0.0 Same as above except in local z-axis.

Member
1.0 = suppress slenderness check .
Any value greater than 1 = Allowable KL/r

in tension.


Name
TMP 0 0 = Permanent Loading
1 = Temporary Loading
0. = Suppress critical member stresses

1. = Print all critical member stresses
2. = Print expanded output
3. = Print maximum details.
Note: Only produces results when

BEAM 0 is used.
4. = Perform and print deflection

check.

UNL Member Unsupported length for calculating

Length allowable bending stress.
12B.3.1 Notes
a. When performing the deflection check, you can choose between two methods. The first
method, defined by a value 0 for the CAN parameter, is based on the local displacement. See
Section 5.44 of the Technical Reference Manual for details on local displacement.
If the CAN parameter is set to 1, the check will be based on cantilever style deflection. Let
(DX1, DY1,DZ1) represent the nodal displacements (in global axes) at the node defined by
DJ1 (or in the absence of DJ1, the start node of the member). Similarly, (DX2, DY2, DZ2)
represent the deflection values at DJ2 or the end node of the member.
Compute Delta = (DX2 − DX1)2 + (DY2 − DY1)2 + (DZ2 − DZ1)2
Compute Length = distance between DJ1 and DJ2 or, between start node and end node, as
the case may be.
b. If CAN = 0, the "Deflection Length" is defined as the length that is used for calculation of
local deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the "Deflection

12B.4 Von Mises Stresses Check
Length" will be equal to the length of the member. However, in some situations, the
"Deflection Length" may be different. A straight line joining DJ1 and DJ2 is used as the
reference line from which local deflections are measured.

PARAMETERS
DFF 300. ALL
DJ1 1 ALL
DJ2 4 ALL
c. If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member length and
local deflections will be measured from original member line.
d. The above parameters may be used in conjunction with other available parameters for steel
design.
12B.4 Von Mises Stresses Check

The von Mises stress equation shown below, which is modified for beam elements based on the
corresponding equation in AIJ steel design code (both 2002 and 2005 editions of AIJ), indicates that
the left-hand side in the equation should be less than unity. These checks are performed at
locations indicated by the BEAM parameter. The default is set that this check is not performed. The
MISES parameter must be set to 1 to initiate the checks.
Note: As with other design checks, the unity check value can be modified by use of the RATIO
parameter.
The von Misers stresses are evaluated and checked as follows:

2 2
σx + 3τ xy
< 1.0
f
Where:
Longitudinal stress in beam element:

Fx My Mz
σx = + +
Ax Zy Zz

F = Axial force
x
M = Bending moment about y-axis
y
M = Bending moment about z-axis
z
A = Cross-sectional area,
x
Z = Section modulus about y-axis
y
Z = Section modulus about z-axis
z
Mx Fy 2 Fz 2
τxy = + +
Zx Ay Az
M = Torsional moment
x
F = shear stress in y direction
y
F = shear stress in z direction
z
Z = Torsional section modulus
x
D = Depth of the member
x
I = Torsional constant
x
A = Effective shear area in the y direction
y
A = Effective shear area in the z direction
z
f = Allowable tensile stress
t
In the STRESSES output category, stress value of (numerator of the von Mises stress equation) is
output as the value of fm. Along with slenderness ratios, stresses, and deflections, von Mises stress
equation is checked. When its left-hand side yields the maximum ratio value, it is printed as
RATIO and “VON MISES” is printed as CRITICAL COND.

In the next few pages are included verification examples for reference purposes.

A slender, cantilever beam subjected to a load at the end. Static analysis, 3D beam element.
Problem
A cantilever beam of length 0.3 meters is subjected to a permanent joint load of 3 kN in the Y
direction and 2 kN in the Z direction as well as a 0.008 kN·m torque applied at the end. Axial

tension of 10 kN is also applied to the member. An H100x50x5 section is used from the Japanese
steel tables.
Given
Section properties
D = 100 mm, B = 50 mm, t = 7 mm, t = 5 mm

f w
I = 15,000 mm 4
x
A = 1185 mm 2, A = 500 mm 2, A = 467 mm 2
x y z
Z = I /t = 15,000/7 = 2,143 mm 3, Z = 5,920 mm 3, Z = 37,400 mm 3
x x max y z
The maximum of the left hand side of the von Mises stress equation apparently occurs at the fixed
end of the beam. Section forces at the fixed end are ass follow:
-10.0 kN (Tension)
0.6 kN·m (Bending-Y)
0.9 kN·m (Bending-Z)
-3.0 kN (Shear-Y)
-2.0 kN (Shear-Z)
-0.008 kN·m (Torsion
Material
FYLD = 300 MPa
E = 2.05E+05 MPa
G = E/2.6 MPa
Solution
From these section forces, σ and τ at the section of the fixed end are calculated as follows:
x xy
Fx My Mz
σx = + + −10, 000 600, 000 −900, 000
Ax Zy Zz = + +
1, 185 5, 920 37, 400 = 8.44 + 101.35 + 24.06 = 133.85
N/mm2
Fy 2 Fz 2
Mx −8, 000 −3, 000 2 −2, 000 2
τxy = + + = + +
Zx Ay Az 2, 143 500 467 = 3.73 + 6 2 + 4.28 2 = 11.10 N/mm2
From σ and τ , f is calculated:

x xy m
fm = σx2 + 3τxy2 = (133.85)2 + 3(11.10)2 = 135.22 N / mm2

Since ft = FYLD/1.5 = 300.0 MPa/15 = 200.0 N/mm2 and k = 1 for permanent loading,
Ratio = 135.22/(200.0 · 1) = 0.676 < 1, So OK.
Comparison
Table 12B.2-Comparison of results for a AIJ 2005 verification problem

Hand STAAD.Pro Comments
Calculation Result
von Mises Stress, f 135.22 135.2 None

m
(N/mm 2)
STAAD Input File

STAAD SPACE VERIFICATION EXAMPLE NO.1
ENGINEER DATE 18-AUG-10
END JOB INFORMATION
* VERIFICATION FOR VON MISES STRESSES IN AIJ 2005
UNIT MMS KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 300 0 0
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2
UNIT METER KN
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2.05E+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2E-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
MEMBER PROPERTY JAPANESE
1 TABLE ST H100X50X5
UNIT MMS KN
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
UNIT METER KN
LOAD 1 LC1
JOINT LOAD
2 FX 10 FY 3 FZ 2 MX 0.008
PERFORM ANALYSIS
LOAD LIST 1
PRINT MEMBER FORCES LIST 1
PARAMETER 1
CODE JAPANESE 2005
TMP 0 ALL
UNL 0.002 ALL
MISES 1 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
FYLD 300000 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH

Output
The TRACK 2.0 output portion is as follows:

STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( AIJ 2005) v1.0
********************************************
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Y PROPERTIES |
|************* | IN CM UNIT |
| * |=============================| ===|=== ------------ |
|MEMBER 1 * | JAPANESE SECTIONS | | AX = 11.85 |
| * | ST H100X50X5 | | --Z AY = 5.00 |
|DESIGN CODE * | | | AZ = 4.67 |
| AIJ-2005 * =============================== ===|=== ZY = 5.92 |
| * ZZ = 37.40 |
| * |<---LENGTH (ME= 0.30 --->| iY = 1.12 |
|************* iZ = 3.97 |
| ZX = 2.14 |
| 0.90(KN-MET) |
|PARAMETER |L1 STRESSES |
|IN N MM | L1 L1 IN N MM|
|--------------- + L1 L1 -------------|
| KL/R-Y= 26.8 | L1 FA = 189.5 |
| KL/R-Z= 7.6 + L1 fa = 8.4 |
| UNL = 2.5 | L1 L1 FCZ = 200.0 |
| CB = 1.75 + FTZ = 200.0 |
| CMY = 0.85 | L1 L1 FCY = 200.0 |
| CMZ = 0.85 + L1 L1 FTY = 200.0 |
| FYLD = 300.0 | L0 fbz = 24.1 |
| NSF = 1.00 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---| fby = 101.4 |
| DFF = 0.0 -0.05 FV = 115.5 |
| dff = 0.0 ABSOLUTE MZ ENVELOPE fv = 6.0 |
| (WITH LOAD NO.) FT = 200.0 |
| fm = 135.2 |
| MAX FORCE/ MOMENT SUMMARY (KN-MET) Sx = 133.9 |
| ------------------------- Tou = 11.1 |
| |
| |
| VALUE -10.00 3.00 2.00 0.60 0.90 |
| LOCATION 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 |
| LOADING 1 1 1 1 1 |
| |
|**************************************************************************|
|* *|
|* DESIGN SUMMARY (KN-MET) *|
|* -------------- *|
|* *|
| ====================================================== |
| PASS VON MISES 0.676 1 |
| 10.00 T 0.60 -0.90 0.000 |
|* *|
|**************************************************************************|
| |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|

12C.1 General
12C. Japanese Codes - Steel Design Per 2002 AIJ

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Japanese code AIJ 2002 Specifications
for structural steel design.
Design of members per AIJ 2002 requires the STAAD Japan Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.
12C.1 General
criteria. Users are recommended to adopt the following steps in performing the steel design:
l Specify the geometry and loads and perform the analysis.
l Specify the design parameter values if different from the default values.

complete flexibility in providing loading specifications and in using appropriate load factors to
create necessary loading situations. Depending upon the analysis requirements, regular stiffness
12C.3 Member Property Specifications
For specification of member properties of standard Japanese steel shapes, the steel section library
available in STAAD may be used. The next section describes the syntax of commands used to assign
properties from the built-in steel table. Members properties may also be specified using the User
Table facility. For more information on these facilities, refer to Section 1.7 the STAAD Technical
Reference Manual.

12C.4 Built-in Japanese Steel Section Library

member property specification. These properties are stored in a database file. If called for, these
deformation is always considered for these members during the analysis. An example of member
A complete listing of the sections available in the built-in steel section library may be obtained
12C.4.1 I shapes
I shapes are specified in the following way:
Note: While specifying the web thickness, the portion after the decimal point should be
excluded.
1 TO 9 TA ST I300X150X11
12 TO 15 TA ST I350X150X9
12C.4.2 H shapes
H shapes are specified as follows:
excluded.
1 TO 8 TA ST H200X100X4
13 TO 17 TA ST H350X350X12

12C.4.3 T shapes
T shapes are specified as follows:
excluded.
20 TO 25 TA ST T250X19
12C.4.4 Channels
Channel sections are specified as follows.
25 TO 34 TA ST C125X65X6
46 TO 49 TA ST C200X90X8
12C.4.5 Double Channels

Back to back double channels, with or without a spacing in between them, are available. The letter
D in front of the section name is used to specify a double channel. Front-to-front double channels
are similarly added by adding FR in front of the section name.
17 TO 27 TA D C300X90X10
45 TO 76 TA D C250X90X11 SP 2.0
28 to 30 ta fr c200x90x8 sp 2.5
In the above commands, members 17 to 27 are a back-to-back double channels C300X90X10 with no
spacing in between. Members 45 to 76 are a double channels C250X90X11 with a spacing of 2 length
units. Members 28 to 30 are front-to-front double channels C200X90X8 with a spacing of 2.5 length
units.

12C.4.6 Angles
Two types of specification may be used to describe an angle. The standard angle specification is as
follows.
The letter L (signifying that the section is an angle) is followed by the length of the legs and then
the thickness of the leg, all in millimeters. The word ST signifies that the section is a standard
angle meaning that the major principal axis coincides with the local YY axis specified in Chapter 1
of Section 1.5.2 of the Technical Reference Manual.
1 4 TA ST L150X90X9
If the minor principal axis coincides with the local YY axis specified in Chapter 2 of the User's
Manual, the word RA (Reverse Angle) should be used instead of ST as shown below.
7 TO 23 TA RA L90X75X9
12C.4.7 Double angles

Short leg back-to-back and long leg back-to-back double angles may be specified by using the
words SD or LD in front of the angle size. In the case of an equal angle, either SD or LD will serve the
purpose. The spacing between the angles may be specified by using the word SP after the angle size
followed by the value of the spacing.
8 TO 25 TA SD L100X65X7 SP 2.0
36 TO 45 TA LD L300X90X11 SP 3.0
The first example indicates a short legs back-to-back double angle comprised of 100X65X7 angles
separated by 2 length units. The latter is a long legs back-to-back double angle comprised of
300X90X11 angles separated by 3 length units.
12C.4.8 Tubes
Tube names are input by their dimensions. For example,
is a tube that has a height of 8 length units, width of 6 length units and a wall thickness of 0.5
length units. Only code checking, no member selection can be performed on TUBE sections.

12C.4.9 Pipes (General Pipe sections)

Circular hollow sections defined by JIS G3444:2005 Design Standard for Steel Structures - Based on
Allowable Stress Concept as general pipe sections are specified as shown in the following example.
1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE PIP267.4x7.0
specifies a pipe with outside diameter of 267.0 mm and a thickness of 7.0 mm. Only code checking,
no member selection, can be performed on PIPE sections.
12C.4.10 Circular Hollow sections

Circular hollow sections defined by JIS G3475:2005 Design Standard for Steel Structures - Based on
Allowable Stress Concept as Architectural pipe sections are specified as shown in the following
example.
1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE CHS660.4x16
specifies a pipe with outside diameter of 660.4 mm and a thickness of 16.0 mm. Only code
checking, no member selection, can be performed on CHS sections.
12C.4.11 Rectangular Hollow sections

Rectangular hollow sections defined by JIS G3466:2005 Design Standard for Steel Structures - Based
on Allowable Stress Concept are specified as shown in the following example.
1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE RHS200x100x12
specifies a tube with a depth of 200 mm, a width of 100 mm, and a thickness of 12 mm. Only code
checking, no member selection, can be performed on CHS sections.
12C.4.12 Square Hollow sections

Square hollow sections defined by JIS G3466:2005 Design Standard for Steel Structures - Based on
Allowable Stress Concept are specified as shown in the following example.
1 TO 9 TA ST PIPE SHS200xs00x12
specifies a square tube with a width of 200 mm and a thickness of 12 mm. Only code checking, no
member selection, can be performed on CHS sections.
Sample Input file containing Japanese shapes

STAAD SPACE
UNIT KIP FEET
JOINT COORD
1 0 0 0 12 11 0 0
MEMB INCIDENCE
1 1 2 11
UNIT INCH
MEMBER PROPERTY JAPANESE
* H-SHAPE

12C.5 Member Capacities
1 TA ST H200X100X4
* I SHAPE
2 TA ST I250X125X10
* T SHAPE
3 TA ST T200X19
* CHANNEL
4 TA ST C125X65X6
* DOUBLE CHANNEL
5 TA D C200X90X8
* REGULAR ANGLE
6 TA ST L100X75X7
* REVERSE ANGLE
7 TA RA L90X75X9
* DOUBLE ANGLE - LONG LEG BACK TO BACK
8 TA LD L125X75X7 SP 2.0
* DOUBLE ANGLE - SHORT LEG BACK TO BACK
9 TA SD L300X90X11 SP 1.5
* TUBE
* PIPE
FINISH

Member design and code checking per AIJ 2002 are based upon the allowable stress design method.
It is a method for proportioning structural members using design loads and forces, allowable
stresses, and design limitations for the appropriate material under service conditions. The basic
measure of member capacities are the allowable stresses on the member under various conditions of
applied loading such as allowable tensile stress, allowable compressive stress etc. These depend on
several factors such as cross sectional properties, slenderness factors, unsupported width to
thickness ratios and so on. Explained here is the procedure adopted in STAAD for calculating such
capacities.
12C.5.1 Design Capabilities

All types of available shapes like H-Shape, I-Shape, L-Shapes, CHANNEL, PIPE, TUBE, Prismatic
section etc. can be used as member property and STAAD will automatically adopt the design
procedure for that particular shape if Steel Design is requested. STEEL TABLE available within
STAAD or UPTABLE facility can be used for member property.
12C.5.2 Methodology
For steel design, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the allowable stresses as required by AIJ
specifications. The design procedure consist of following three steps.
1. Calculation of sectional properties
The program extract sectional properties like sectional area ( A ), Moment of Inertia about Y
axis and Z axis ( Iyy, Izz) from in-built Japanese Steel Table and calculates Zz, Zy, iy, iz using
appropriate formula. For calculation of i ( radius of gyration needed for bending ), program

calculates moment of inertia ( Ii )and sectional area ( Ai ) for 1/6th section and then uses
following formula:
i = Ii / A i
Note: The above mentioned procedure for calculation of i is applicable for I shape, H shape
and Channel sections.
2. Calculation of actual and allowable stresses
Allowable stresses for structural steel under permanent loading shall be determined on the
basis of the values of F given in the following table.
Table 12C.1-Table: Values of F (N/mm 2)
Steel for Steel for General Steel for Welded Structures
Construction Structures
Structures
Thickn SN400 SN490 SS400 SS4 SS5 SM40 SM490 SM5 SM5
ess 90 40 0 20 70
SNR40 SNR49 STK400 SM490
0 0 SMA4 Y
STKR400
00
STKN4 STKN4 SMA4
SSC400
00 90 90
SWH400
STKR4
90
STK49
0
t≤ 40 235 325 235 275 375 235 325 355 400
40< t ≤ 215 295 215 255 - 215 295* 335 400

100
* F = 325 N/mm 2 when t > 75mm
Note: In checking members for temporary loading be the combination of stresses described
in Chap.3, allowable stresses specified in this chapter may be increases by 50%
Program calculates actual and allowable stresses by following methods:
i. Axial Stress:
Actual tensile stresses ( F ) = Force / ( A x NSF ),

T
NSF = Net Section Factor for tension
Actual compressive stress ( F ) = Force / A

C

Allowable tensile stress ( f )

t
= F / 1.5 (For Permanent Case)
= F ( For Temporary Case )
Allowable compressive stress
 λ 2
 1 − 0.4 Λ F

( )
  when λ≤ Λ
fc =  ν
 0.227F
when λ> Λ
 λ 2
 Λ ( )
= fc x 1.5 (for Temporary case)
where:
2
π E
Λ=
0.6F
2
ν=
3
2
+
2 λ
3 Λ ()
ii. Bending Stress:
Actual bending stress for My for compression
( Fbcy ) = My / Zcy
Actual bending stress for Mz for compression
( Fbcz) = Mz / Zcz
Actual bending stress for My for tension
( Fbty ) = My / Zty
Actual bending stress for Mz for tension
( Fbtz ) = Mz / Ztz
Where:
Z ,Z are section modulus for compression

cy cz
Z , Z are section modulus for tension
ty tz
y
(fbcy ) = ft
Allowable bending stress for Mz
(fbcz) = { 1 - .4 x (lb / i)2 / (C λ2 )} ft max

= 900/ (lb x h / Af )
For Temporary case, f = 1.5 x (f for Permanent case)

bcz bcz
Where:
C = 1.75 - 1.05 (M2 / M1) + 0.3 (M2 / M1)2

y bty t
z btz bcz
Note: The parameter CB can be used to specify a value for C directly.
iii. Shear Stress
Actual shear stresses are calculated by the following formula:
qy = Qy / Aww
Where:
A = web shear area = product of depth and web thickness

ww
qz = Qz / Aff
Where:
A = flange shear area = 2/3 times total flange area

ff
Allowable shear stress, f = F / 1.5, F = F / √(3)
s s s
User provided RATIO value (default 1.0) is used for checking design requirements
The following conditions are checked to meet the AIJ specifications. For all the conditions
calculated value should not be more than the value of RATIO. If for any condition value
exceeds RATIO , program gives the message that the section fails.
User provided RATIO value (default 1.0) is used for checking design requirements
The following conditions are checked to meet the AIJ specifications. For all the
conditions calculated value should not be more than the value of RATIO. If for any
condition value exceeds RATIO, program gives the message that the section fails.
Conditions:
i. Axial tensile stress ratio = FT / ft
ii. Axial compressive stress ratio = FC / fc
iii. Combined compression & bending ratio = FC / fc+Fbcz/fbcz+Fbcy /fbcy
iv. Combined compression & bending ratio = (Fbtz+Fbty -FC) / ft

v. Combined tension & bending ratio = (FT+Fbtz+Fbty ) / ft

vi. Combined tension & bending ratio = Fbcz/fbcz+Fbcy /fbcy - FT/ft
vii. Shear stress ratio for qy = qy / fs
viii. Shear stress ratio for qz = qz / fs
ix. von Mises stress ratio (if the von Mises stresses were set to be checked) = f /
m
(k⋅f )
t
12C.5.3 Output Format ( TRACK 3 )

One new output format has been introduced which provides details step by step information of
Steel Design for guiding load case only. If Section command is used before Parameter command
this output will provide details information for all the sections specified by Section Command.
Note: This output format is available only when the BEAM parameter value is 0 and the TRACK
parameter value is 3. If section command is not used design information will be printed for two
ends only. If Member Truss option is used no Shear Design information will be printed.
Example:
SECTION 0.0 0.25 0.5 0.75 1.0 ALL
PARAMETER
CODE JAPANESE 2002
BEAM 0.0 ALL
TMP 0.0 MEMB 1 to 4
TMP 1.0 MEMB 5 to 8
TRACK 3 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
12C.5.4 Allowable stress for Axial Tension

Allowable axial stress in tension is calculated per section 5.1 (1) of the AIJ code. In members with
axial tension, the tensile load must not exceed the tension capacity of the member. The tension
capacity of the member is calculated on the basis of the member area. STAAD calculates the tension
capacity of a given member based on a user supplied net section factor (NSF-a default value of 1.0 is
present but may be altered by changing the input value, see Table 8B.1) and proceeds with member
selection or code checking.
12C.5.5 Allowable stress for Axial Compression

The allowable stress for members in compression is determined according to the procedure of
section 5.1 (3). Compressive resistance is a function of the slenderness of the cross-section (Kl/r
ratio) and the user may control the slenderness value by modifying parameters such as KY, LY, KZ
and LZ. In the absence of user provided values for effective length, the actual member length will
be used. The slenderness ratios are checked against the permissible values specified in Chapter 11 of
the AIJ code.

12C.6 Combined Loading
12C.5.6 Allowable stress for Bending

The permissible bending compressive and tensile stresses are dependent on such factors as length of
outstanding legs, thickness of flanges, unsupported length of the compression flange (UNL, defaults
to member length) etc. The allowable stresses in bending (compressive and tensile) are calculated
as per the criteria of Clause 5.1 (4) of the code.
12C.5.7 Allowable stress for Shear

Shear capacities are a function of web depth, web thickness etc. The allowable stresses in shear are
computed according to Clause 5.1 (2) of the code.
12C.6 Combined Loading

For members experiencing combined loading (axial force, bending and shear), applicable interaction
formulas are checked at different locations of the member for all modeled loading situations.
Members subjected to axial tension and bending are checked using the criteria of clause 6.2. For
members with axial compression and bending, the criteria of clause 6.1 is used.

The user is allowed complete control over the design process through the use of parameters
mentioned in Table 12C.2 of this chapter. These parameters communicate design decisions from the
engineer to the program. The default parameter values have been selected such that they are
frequently used numbers for conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements
of the situation, some or all of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the
physical structure.
Table 12C.2-Japanese Steel Design Parameters

Name
CODE - Must be specified as JAPANESE 2002 to

invoke the AIJ 2002.



Name
BEAM 0.0 Locations of design:
0. Design only for end moments or

those at locations specified by the
SECTION command.
1. Calculate moments at twelfth
points along the beam, and use the
maximum Mz location for design.
CAN 0 Specifies the method used for deflection

checks

occurs within the span between DJ1
and DJ2.
is of the cantilever type (see note a)
CB 0 C value from the AIJ code. See "Member

Capacities" on page 562 Bending Stress for
how C is calculated and applied.
Use 0.0 to direct the program to

calculated Cb.
Any other value be used in lieu of the

program calculated value.

deflection
check)

Note b)

Note b)
DMAX 100 cm Maximum allowable depth for member.
DMIN 0.0 cm Minimum allowable depth for member.


Name

minor axis.

major axis.

LZ Member Same as above except in z-axis

Length
FYLD 235 MPA Yield strength of steel in Megapascal.
MAIN 0.0 Check for slenderness:
0. Perform check for slenderness

1. Suppress slenderness check
MISES 0 Option to include check for von Mises

stresses
0. Do not include check.

1. Perform Von Mises stress check.

stresses.
SSY 0.0 Sidesway:
0. Sidesway in local y-axis.

1. No sidesway
SSZ 0.0 Same as above except in local z-axis.

Member
1.0 = suppress slenderness check .
Any value greater than 1 = Allowable KL/r

in tension.
TMP 0 Loading condition:
0. Permanent Loading
1. Temporary Loading


Name
0. = Suppress critical member stresses

1. = Print all critical member stresses
2. = Print expanded output
3. = Print maximum details.
Note: Only produces results when

BEAM 0 is used.
4. = Perform and print deflection

check.
UNL Member Unsupported length for calculating

Length allowable bending stress.

12C.7.1 Notes
a. When performing the deflection check, you can choose between two methods. The first
method, defined by a value 0 for the CAN parameter, is based on the local displacement. See
Section 5.44 of the Technical Reference Manual for details on local displacement.
If the CAN parameter is set to 1, the check will be based on cantilever style deflection. Let
(DX1, DY1,DZ1) represent the nodal displacements (in global axes) at the node defined by
DJ1 (or in the absence of DJ1, the start node of the member). Similarly, (DX2, DY2, DZ2)
represent the deflection values at DJ2 or the end node of the member.
Compute Delta = (DX2 − DX1)2 + (DY2 − DY1)2 + (DZ2 − DZ1)2
Compute Length = distance between DJ1 and DJ2 or, between start node and end node, as
the case may be.
b. If CAN = 0, the "Deflection Length" is defined as the length that is used for calculation of
local deflections within a member. It may be noted that for most cases the "Deflection
Length" will be equal to the length of the member. However, in some situations, the
"Deflection Length" may be different. A straight line joining DJ1 and DJ2 is used as the
reference line from which local deflections are measured.

12C.8 Code Checking

PARAMETERS
DFF 300. ALL
DJ1 1 ALL
DJ2 4 ALL
c. If DJ1 and DJ2 are not used, "Deflection Length" will default to the member length and local
deflections will be measured from original member line.
d. The above parameters may be used in conjunction with other available parameters for steel
design.
12C.8 Code Checking

are adequate to carry the forces transmitted to it by the loads on the structure. The adequacy is
checked per the AIJ requirements.
Code checking is done using forces and moments at specified sections of the members. If the BEAM
parameter for a member is set to 1, moments are calculated at every twelfth point along the beam,
and the maximum moment about the major axis is used. When no sections are specified and the
BEAM parameter is set to zero (default), design will be based on the forces at the start and end joints
of the member. The code checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition,
the critical condition, governing load case, location (distance from start joint) and magnitudes of
the governing forces and moments are also printed.
Checking command.

PASSes the code checking procedure based on the forces and moments obtained from the most
recent analysis. The section selected will be of the same type as that specified initially. For example,
a member specified initially as a channel will have a channel selected for it. Selection of members
whose properties are originally provided from a user table will be limited to sections in the user
table.

12C.10 Von Mises Stresses Check
Note: Member selection cannot be performed on TUBES, PIPES, or members listed as

PRISMATIC.
Sample Input data for Steel Design

UNIT METER
PARAMETER
CODE JAPANESE 2002
NSF 0.85 ALL
UNL 10.0 MEMBER 7
KY 1.2 MEMBER 3 4
RATIO 0.9 ALL
TRACK 1.0 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
SELECT ALL

The von Mises stress equation shown below, which is modified for beam elements based on the
corresponding equation in AIJ steel design code (both 2002 and 2005 editions of AIJ), indicates that
the left-hand side in the equation should be less than unity. These checks are performed at
locations indicated by the BEAM parameter. The default is set that this check is not performed. The
MISES parameter must be set to 1 to initiate the checks.
Note: As with other design checks, the unity check value can be modified by use of the RATIO
parameter.
The von Misers stresses are evaluated and checked as follows:

2 2
σx + 3τ xy
< 1.0
f
Where:
Longitudinal stress in beam element:

Fx My Mz
σx = + +
Ax Zy Zz
F = Axial force
x
M = Bending moment about y-axis
y
M = Bending moment about z-axis
z

A = Cross-sectional area,
x
Z = Section modulus about y-axis
y
Z = Section modulus about z-axis
z
Mx Fy 2 Fz 2
τxy = + +
Zx Ay Az
M = Torsional moment
x
F = shear stress in y direction
y
F = shear stress in z direction
z
Z = Torsional section modulus
x
D = Depth of the member
x
I = Torsional constant
x
A = Effective shear area in the y direction
y
A = Effective shear area in the z direction
z
f = Allowable tensile stress
t
In the STRESSES output category, stress value of (numerator of the von Mises stress equation) is
output as the value of fm. Along with slenderness ratios, stresses, and deflections, von Mises stress
equation is checked. When its left-hand side yields the maximum ratio value, it is printed as
RATIO and “VON MISES” is printed as CRITICAL COND.

13
Mexican Codes

13 Mexican Codes

13A. Mexican Codes - Concrete Design Per MEX NTC 1987

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the Mexican code NTC 1987 Normas
Técnicas Complementarias para Diseño y construcción de Estructuras de Concreto (Complementary
Technical Norms for Design and Construction of Concrete Structures).
Design of members per NTC 1987 requires the STAAD Latin American Design Codes SELECT Code
Pack.

STAAD has the capabilities for performing concrete design. It will calculate the reinforcement
needed for the specified concrete section. All the concrete design calculations are based on the
current: Complementary Technical Standards for the Design and Construction of Concrete
Structures – Nov. 1987. (Normas Técnicas Complementarias para Diseño y construcción de
Estructuras de Concreto) of the Mexican Construction Code for the Federal District –Aug. 1993
(Reglamento de Construcciones para el Distrito Federal).

The following types of cross sections can be defined for concrete design.
l Columns — Prismatic (Rectangular, Square, and Circular)

l Beams — Prismatic (Rectangular & Square), Trapezoidal, and T-shapes
l Walls — Finite element with a specified thickness
Figure 13A.1 - Concrete shape nomenclature for beams and columns

UNIT CM
MEMBER PROPERTY
13 TO 79 PRISM YD 40. ZD 20. IZ 53333 IY 13333
11 13 PR YD 20.
14 TO 16 PRIS YD 24. ZD 48. YB 18. ZB 12.

17 TO 19 PR YD 24. ZD 18. ZB 12.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (40 cm depth and 20 cm width) and
with 20 cm diameter. Note that no area (AX) is provided for these members. For concrete design,
this property must not be provided. If shear areas and moments of inertias are not provided, the
program calculates these values from YD and ZD. Notice that in the above example the IZ and IY
values provided are actually 50% of the values calculated using YD and ZD. This is a conventional
practice which takes into consideration revised section parameters due to cracking of section.
Note that the third and the fourth set of members in the above example represent a T-shape and a
TRAPEZOIDAL shape respectively. Depending on the properties (YD, ZD, YB, ZB, etc.) provided, the
program will determine whether the section is rectangular, trapezoidal or T-shaped and the BEAM
design will be done accordingly.

The program contains a number of parameters which are needed to perform design by the Mexican
code. Default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for
conventional design requirements. These values may be changed to suit the particular design being
performed. Table 3.1 is a complete list of the available parameters and their default values.
The manual describes the commands required to provide these parameters in the input file. For
example, the values of SFACE and EFACE (parameters that are used in shear design), the distances of
the face of supports from the end nodes of a beam, are assigned values of zero by default but may be
changed depending on the actual situation. Similarly, beams and columns are designed for
moments directly obtained from the analyses without any magnification. The factors MMY and MMZ
may be used for magnification of column moments. For beams, the user may generate load cases
which contain loads magnified by the appropriate load factors.
Table 13A.1-Mexican Concrete Design Parameters

Parameter Default Value Parameters
Name
CODE - Must be specified as MEXICAN.

Manual.
BTP 2 Bar type to use:
0. IMPERIAL (No 3 to 18)

1. METRIC (4.2 to 60mm)
2. MEXICAN (No 2 to 18)


Name
CCL 1 Concrete class according to 1.4.1d) to define

Modulus of Elasticity
1. Class 1 Concrete
2. Class 2 Concrete
CFB FALSE Cold formed Bar classification to define

development multipliers according to table
3.1 NTC
l FALSE - Not cold formed bar

l TRUE - Cold formed bar
CLB 3 cm Clear cover for bottom reinforcement
CLS 3 cm Clear cover for side reinforcement
CLT 3 cm Clear cover for top reinforcement
DAG 2 cm Maximum diameter of aggregate, in current

units.
DCP TRUE Beam Loads and reactions in direct

compression Cl-2.1.5.a.I 2nd paragraph
l FALSE - Loads applied indirectly

l TRUE - Direct compression
DEPTH YD Depth of concrete member, in current units.

This value defaults to YD as provided under
MEMBER PROPERTIES.
DIM TRUE l FALSE: Not precautions taken -

Section reduction to section 1.5 NTC
Concrete
l TRUE: Precautions are taken to assure
dimensions
DSD TRUE Ductile frames in accordance with Section 5

of the code. Some design conditions are
considered (not including, for the time
being, geometric or confinement ones)
l FALSE - Non-Ductile frames

l TRUE - Ductile Frames


Name
EFACE 0 Face to support location of end of beam. If

specified, for shear force at start is computed
at a distance of EFACE+d from the start
joint of the member. Positive number.
EXP FALSE Exposition to soil or weather to define cover

and min Steel reinforcement
l FALSE - Not exposed to soil or

weather
l TRUE - Exposed to soil or weather
FC 200 Kg/cm 2 Compressive Strength of Concrete
FYMAIN 4,200 Kg/cm 2 Yield Stress for main reinforcing steel
FYSEC 4,200 Kg/cm 2 Yield Stress for secondary (stirrup)

reinforcing steel
LSS 0 Part of the longitudinal steel considered to

reduce shear. 0 (zero) is conservative. Value
between 1 and 0.
LTC FALSE Light Concrete to define development

multipliers according to table 3.1 NTC
l FALSE - Regular concrete

l TRUE - Lightweight concrete
MAXMAIN 12 Maximum main reinforcement bar size

(Number 2 -18)
MINMAIN 2.5 Minimum main reinforcement bar size

(Number 2 -18)
MINSEC 2.5 Minimum secondary reinforcement bar size

(Number 2 -18)
MMY 1.0 Moment magnification factor for columns,

about My.
MMZ 1.0 Moment magnification factor for columns,

about Mz.
MOE 198,000 Concrete modulus of elasticiy.

Kg/cm 2


Name

considered in finding critical moments for
beam design
PHI 90 degrees Stirrups angle with the axis of the element
PSS TRUE Slab beared perimeter. To calculate min steel

required according to 2.1.2
REINF 0 Tied Column. A value of 1 will mean spiral.
SFACE 0 Face to support location of start of beam. If

specified, for shear force at start is computed
at a distance of SFACE+d from the start
joint of the member. Positive number
TEQ FALSE Beam needed for torsional equilibrium

Cl.2.1.6a) 2nd paragraph
l FALSE - No
l TRUE - Yes
TRACK 0 Beam Design

out with beam design report.
1. Will mean a print out.
2. Will print out required steel areas for
all intermediate sections specified by
NSECTION.
Column Design
0. Will print out detailed design results.

1. Will mean a print out column
interation analysis results in addition
to TRACK 0 output.
2. will print out a schematic interaction
diagram and intermediate interaction
values in addition to all of the above.
WIDTH ZD Width of concrete member, in current units.

This value defaults to ZD as provided under
MEMBER PROPERTIES
* These values must be provided in the current unit system being used.

13A.5 Beam Design
Note: When using metric bars for design, provide values for these parameters in actual ‘mm‘
units instead of the bar number. The following metric bar sizes are available: 4.2mm, 6 mm, 8
mm, 10 mm, 12 mm, 16 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 32 mm, 40 mm, 50 mm and 60 mm.
13A.5 Beam Design

prescanned to locate the possible critical sections. The total number of sections considered is 12
(twelve) unless this number is redefined with an NSECTION parameter. All of these equally spaced
sections are scanned to determine moment and shear envelopes.

Reinforcement for positive and negative moments are calculated on the basis of the section
properties provided by the user. If the section dimensions are inadequate to carry the applied load,
that is if the required reinforcement is greater than the maximum allowable for the cross section,
the program reports that beam fails in maximum reinforcement. Rectangular sections are also
designed with compression reinforcement.
Effective depth is chosen as Total depth - (Clear cover + diameter of stirrup + half the dia. of main
reinforcement), and a trial value is obtained by adopting proper bar sizes for the stirrups and main
reinforcements. The relevant clauses in Sections 1.5, 1.6, 2.1.1-2-5, 3.10 and 5.2.2 of NTC Concrete are
utilized to obtain the actual amount of steel required as well as the maximum allowable and
minimum required steel. These values are reported as ROW, ROWMX and ROWMN in the output
and can be printed using the parameter TRACK 1.0 (see Table 13A.1). In addition, the maximum,
minimum and actual bar spacing are also printed.
It is important to note that beams are designed for flexural moment MZ only. The moment MY is
not considered in the flexural design.

Shear reinforcement is calculated to resist both shear forces and torsional moments. Shear forces
are calculated at a distance (d+SFACE) and (d+EFACE) away from the end nodes of the beam.
SFACE and EFACE have default values of zero unless provided under parameters (see Table 13A.1).
Note that the value of the effective depth "d" used for this purpose is the update value and
accounts for the actual c.g. of the main reinforcement calculated under flexural design. Clauses
2.1.5-6 and 5.2.4 of NTC Concrete are used to calculate the reinforcement for shear forces and
torsional moments. Based on the total stirrup reinforcement required, the size of bars, the spacing,
the number of bars and the distance over which they are provided are calculated. Stirrups due to
geometric conditions are assumed to be 2-legged, due to design conditions could be 2 or 4-legged.

13A.5 Beam Design
13A.5.3 Design for Anchorage

In the output for flexural design, the anchorage details are also provided. At any particular level,
the START and END coordinates of the layout of the main reinforcement is described along with
the information whether anchorage in the form of a hook or continuation is required or not at
these START and END points. Note that the coordinates of these START and END points are
obtained after taking into account the anchorage requirements. Anchorage length is calculated on
the basis of the Clauses described in Section 3.1 of NTC concrete. In case the program selects 2
different diameters for the main or compression reinforcement, only the anchorage for the largest
diameter is analyzed.
13A.5.4 Output
Level
Serial number of bar level which may contain one or more bar group
Height
Height of bar level from the bottom of the beam
Bar Info
Reinforcement bar information specifying number of bars and bar size
From
Distance from the start of the beam to the start of the reinforcement bar
To
Distance from the start of the beam to the end of the reinforcement bar
Anchor (STA/END)
States whether anchorage, either hook or continuation, is needed at the start (STA) or at
the end (END).
Row
Actually required flexural reinforcement (As/bd) where b = width of cross section (ZD for
a rectangular or square section) and d = effective depth of cross section (YD minus the
distance from extreme tension fiber to the centroid of main reinforcement).
ROWMN
Minimum required flexural reinforcement (Amin/bd)
ROWMX
Maximum required flexural reinforcement (Amax/bd)
Spacing
Distance between centers of adjacent bars of main reinforcement
Vu

13A.6 Column Design
Factored shear force at section

Vc
Nominal shear strength provided by concrete
Vs
Nominal shear strength provided by shear reinforcement
Tu
Factored torsional moment at section
Tc
Nominal torsional moment strength provided by concrete
Ts
Nominal torsional moment strength provided by torsion reinforcement
Example Output for Beam Design

=====================================================================
BEAM NO. 2 DESIGN RESULTS - FLEXURE
PER CODE NTC FOR THE DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES,DDF
LEN - 6000.00(mm) FY - 412. FC - 20. SIZE - 253.75 X 253.75(mm)
LEVEL HEIGHT BAR INFO FROM TO ANCHOR
(mm) (mm) (mm) STA END
_____________________________________________________________________
1 42. 5 - 2.MM 2468. 6000. NO YES
2 212. 5 - 2.MM 0. 2782. YES NO
B E A M N O. 2 D E S I G N R E S U L T S - SHEAR
AT START SUPPORT - Vu= 5.63 KN Vc= 0.00 KN Vs= 0.00 KN
Tu= 0.09 Kn Me Tc= 0.00 Kn Me Ts= 0.00 Kn Me LOAD 1
STIRRUPS ARE NOT REQUIRED.
AT END SUPPORT - Vu= 5.63 KN Vc= 0.00 KN Vs= 0.00 KN
Tu= 0.09 Kn Me Tc= 0.00 Kn Me Ts= 0.00 Kn Me LOAD 1
STIRRUPS ARE NOT REQUIRED.
13A.6 Column Design

Columns design in STAAD per the Mexican code is performed for axial force and uniaxial as well as
biaxial moments. All active loadings are checked to compute reinforcement. The loading which
produces the largest amount of reinforcement is called the critical load. Column design is done for
square, rectangular and circular sections. For rectangular and circular sections, reinforcement is
always assumed to be equally distributed on all faces. This means that the total number of bars for
these sections will always be a multiple of four (4). If the MMAGx & -MMAGy parameters are
specified, the column moments are multiplied by the corresponding MMAG value to arrive at the
ultimate moments on the column. Minimum eccentricity conditions to be satisfied according to
section 2.1.3.a are checked.
Method used: Bresler Load Contour Method
Known Values: Pu, Muy, Muz, B, D, Clear cover, Fc, Fy
Ultimate Strain for concrete : 0.003

13A.7 Column Interaction
Steps involved:
1. Assume some reinforcement. Minimum reinforcement (1% for ductile design or according to
section 4.2.2 ) is a good amount to start with.
2. Find an approximate arrangement of bars for the assumed reinforcement.
3. Calculate PNMAX = Po, where Po is the maximum axial load capacity of the section. Ensure
that the actual nominal load on the column does not exceed PNMAX. If PNMAX is less
than the axial force Pu/FR, (FR is the strength reduction factor) increase the reinforcement
and repeat steps 2 and 3. If the reinforcement exceeds 6% (or 4% for ductile design), the
column cannot be designed with its current dimensions.
4. For the assumed reinforcement, bar arrangement and axial load, find the uniaxial moment
capacities of the column for the Y and the Z axes, independently. These values are referred to
as MYCAP and MZCAP respectively.
5. Solve the Interaction Bresler equation:
(Mny /Mycap )α + (Mnz/Mzcap )α
Where α = 1.24. If the column is subjected to uniaxial moment: α = 1
6. If the Interaction equation is satisfied, find an arrangement with available bar sizes, find the
uniaxial capacities and solve the interaction equation again. If the equation is satisfied now,
the reinforcement details are written to the output file.
7. If the interaction equation is not satisfied, the assumed reinforcement is increased (ensuring
that it is under 6% or 4% respectively) and steps 2 to 6 are repeated.
By the moment to check shear and torsion for columns the sections have to be checked as beams
and the most strict of both shear and torsion reinforcement adopted.
13A.7 Column Interaction

The column interaction values may be obtained by using the design parameter TRACK 1.0 or
TRACK 2.0 for the column member. If a value of 2.0 is used for the TRACK parameter, 12 different
Pn-Mn pairs, each representing a different point on the Pn-Mn curve are printed. Each of these
points represents one of the several Pn-Mn combinations that this column is capable of carrying
about the given axis, for the actual reinforcement that the column has been designed for. In the
case of circular columns, the values are for any of the radial axes. The values printed for the TRACK
1.0 output are:
l P0 = Maximum allowable pure axial load on the column (moment zero).
l Pnmax = Maximum allowable axial load on the column.
l P_bal = Axial load capacity of balanced strain condition.
l M_bal = Uniaxial moment capacity of balanced strain condition.
l E_bal = M_bal / P_bal = Eccentricity of balanced strain condition.
l M0 = Moment capacity at zero axial load.

13A.8 Column Design Output
l P_tens = Maximum permissible tensile load on the column.

l Des. Pn = Pu/FR where FR is the Strength Reduction Factor and Pu is the axial load for the
critical load case.
l Des.Mnx = Mux*MMAGx/FR where FR is the Strength Reduction Factor and Mu is the
bending moment for the appropriate axis for the critical load case.
l Mu = Ö (Mux.Mmagx)²+ (Muy.Mmagy)²
l e/h = (Mn/Pn)/h where h is the length of the column
13A.8 Column Design Output

The next table illustrates different levels of the column design output.
The output is generated without any TRACK specification:

====================================================================
COLUMN NO. 1 DESIGN PER MEX NTC-87 - AXIAL + BENDING
FY - 411.9 FC - 19.6 MPa SQRE SIZE 25.4 x 25.4 (mm) TIED
AREA OF STEEL REQUIRED = 626.700
BAR CONFIGURATION REINF PCT. LOAD LOCATION PHI
----------------------------------------------------------
4 - NUMBER 5 1.230 1 END 0.700
(PROVIDE EQUAL NUMBER OF BARS ON EACH FACE)
TRACK=1 generates the following additional output:
COLUMN INTERACTION: MOMENT ABOUT Z/Y -AXIS (Kg-cm )

--------------------------------------------------------
P0 Pn max
P-bal. M-bal.
e-bal.(cm)
2095196.38
2095196.38 727411.12 29235398.00
40.2
M0 P-tens.
Des.Pn 'Des.Mn e/h
20606994.00
-550620.00 0.00
20000000.00 NaN
--------------------------------------------------------
TRACK=2 generates the following output in addition to all the above:
Pn Mn
Pn Mn
|
1934027.38 5373253.50 967013.69 27278232.00
P0 |*
1772858.50 11408365.00 805844.75 28658428.00
| * 1611689.50 16296947.00 644675.81 29473708.00

13A.9 Slab Design
Pn,max|__* 1450520.62 20083028.00 483506.84 28901764.00
| * 1289351.62 23117562.00 322337.91 27205616.00
Pn | *
1128182.62 25462606.00 161168.95 24433192.00
NOMINAL| *
AXIAL| *
COMPRESSION|
*
Pb|-------*Mb
| *
___________|____*_______
| * M0 Mn,
| * BENDING
P-tens|* MOMENT
13A.9 Slab Design

Slabs are designed per Mexican NTC specifications. To design a slab, it must be modeled using
finite elements.
Element design will be performed only for the moments MX and MY at the center of the element.
Design will not be performed for FX, FY, FXY, MXY. Also, design is not performed at any other
point on the surface of the element. Shear is checked with Q.
A typical example of element design output is shown below. The reinforcement required to resist
Mx moment is denoted as longitudinal reinforcement and the reinforcement required to resist My
moment is denoted as transverse reinforcement. The parameters FYMAIN, FC, CLB, CLS, CLT, DIM, and
EXP listed in Table 11A.1 are relevant to slab design. Other parameters mentioned are not used in
slab design.

13A.9 Slab Design
13A.9.1 Example Output for Element Design

ELEMENT DESIGN SUMMARY
----------------------
ELEMENT LONG. REINF MOM-X /LOAD TRANS. REINF MOM-Y /LOAD
(SQ.MM/MM) (KN-MM/MM) (SQ.MM/MM) (KN-MM/MM)
47 TOP : Longitudinal direction - Only minimum steel required.
47 TOP : Transverse direction - Only minimum steel required.
47 TOP : 0.205 0.00 / 0 0.205 0.00 / 0
BOTT: 0.254 10.44 / 1 0.362 13.35 / 1
47 SHEAR CAPACITY 57.06 KN ***PASS*** FOR LOAD CASE 3
***** INDICATES REINFORCEMENT EXCEEDS MAXIMUM
***************************END OF ELEMENT DESIGN***************************

13B.1 General
13B. Mexican Codes - Steel Design Per NTC 1987

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Mexican code NTC 1987 (Normas
Técnicas Complementarias para Diseño y construcción de Estructuras Metálicas) (Complementary
Technical Standards for the Design and Construction of Steel Structures – Dec. 1987) or the
Reglamento de Construcciones para el Distrito Federal (Mexican Construction Code for the Federal
District –Aug. 1993).
Design of members per NTC 1987 requires the STAAD Latin American Design Codes SELECT Code
Pack.
13B.1 General
The design philosophy considered is that of the Load Cases and Resistance Method or Limit States
Design usually known as Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD).
would become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit-state are recognized--
In the STAAD implementation of the Mexican Standards for steel structures, members are
proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the limit states of strength, and stability.
It allows to check deformation to verify serviceability.
Accordingly, the most economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria as
augmented by the designer in specification of allowable member depths, desired section type, or
other such parameters. The code checking portion of the program checks that main code
requirements for each selected section are met and identifies the governing criteria.
The following sections describe the salient features of the Mexican specifications as implemented in
STAAD steel design. A brief description of the fundamental concepts is presented here.
13B.2 Limit States Design Fundamentals

The primary objective of the Limit States Design Specification is to provide a uniform reliability for
all steel structures under various loading conditions.
The Limit States Design Method uses separate factors for each load and resistance. Because the
different factors reflect the degree of uncertainty of different loads and combinations of loads and
of the accuracy of predicted strength, a more uniform reliability is possible.
The method may be summarized by the inequality
Yi Qi ≤ Rn FR

13B.3 Member End Forces and Moments
On the left side of the inequality, the required strength is the summation of the various load
effects, Q , multiplied by their respective load factors, Y . The design strength, on the right side, is
i i
the nominal strength or resistance, R , multiplied by a resistance factor, FR.
n
In the STAAD implementation of the Mexican Standards, it is assumed that the user will use
appropriate load factors and create the load combinations necessary for analysis. The design portion
of the program will take into consideration the load effects (forces and moments) obtained from
analysis. In calculation of resistances of various elements (beams, columns etc.), resistance (nominal
strength) and applicable resistance factor will be automatically considered.
13B.3 Member End Forces and Moments

Member end forces and moments in the member result from loads applied to the structure. These
forces are in the local member coordinate system. the following figures show the member end
actions with their directions. Refer to Section 1.19 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional
details.

The Limit States Design specification allows inelastic deformation of section elements. Thus local
buckling becomes an important criterion. Steel sections are classified as compact (type 2),
noncompact (type 3), or slender element (type 4), sections depending upon their local buckling
characteristics, besides sections type 1 are able for plastic design. This classification is a function of
the geometric properties of the section. The design procedures are different depending on the
section class. STAAD is capable of determining the section classification for the standard shapes
and design accordingly.
13B.5 Member in Axial Tension

The criteria governing the capacity of tension members is based on two limit states. The limit state
of yielding in the gross section is intended to prevent excessive elongation of the member. The
second limit state involves fracture at the section with the minimum effective net area. The net
section area may be specified by the user through the use of the parameter NSF (see Table
13B.1), that always refers to the gross section. STAAD calculates the tension capacity of a given
member based on these two limit states and proceeds with member selection or code check
accordingly.
In addition to the tension resistance criterion, the user defines if tension members are required to
satisfy slenderness limitations which are a function of the nature of use of the member (main load
resisting component, bracing member, etc.). In both the member selection and code checking
process, STAAD immediately does a slenderness check on appropriate members before continuing
with other procedures for determining the adequacy of a given member.

13B.6 Axial Compression
13B.6 Axial Compression

The column strength equations take into account inelastic deformation and other recent research
in column behavior. Two equations governing column strength are available, one for inelastic
buckling and the other for elastic or Euler buckling. Both equations include the effects of residual
stresses and initial out-of-straightness. Compression strength for a particular member is calculated
by STAAD according to the procedure outlined in Section 3.2 of the NTC. For slender elements, the
procedure described in Section 2.3.6.NTC is also used.
The procedures of Section 3.2 of the Commentaries, design helps and examples of the
Complementary Technical Standards for the Design and Construction of Steel Structures (de los
Comentarios, ayudas de diseño y ejemplos de las Normas Técnicas Complementarias para el Diseño
y Construcción de Estructuras Metálicas, DDF (Comentarios - Julio 1993) were implemented for the
determination of design strength for these limit states.
Effective length for calculation of compression resistance may be provided through the use of the
parameters KY, KZ and/or LY, LZ. If not provided, the entire member length will be taken into
consideration.
In addition to the compression resistance criterion, compression members are required to satisfy
slenderness limitations which are a function of the nature of use of the member (main load
resisting component, bracing member, etc.). In both the member selection and code checking
process, STAAD immediately does a slenderness check on appropriate members before continuing
with other procedures for determining the adequacy of a given member.
13B.7 Flexural Design Strength

In the Limit States Design Method, the flexural design strength of a member is determined mainly
by the limit state of lateral torsional buckling. Inelastic bending is allowed and the basic measure
of flexural capacity is the plastic moment capacity of the section.
The flexural resistance is a function of plastic moment capacity, actual laterally unbraced length,
limiting laterally unbraced length, buckling moment and the bending coefficient. The limiting
laterally unbraced length Lu and flexural resistance Mr are functions of the section geometry and
are calculated as per the procedure of Section 3.3.2 of the NTC.
The purpose of bending coefficient Cb is to account for the influence of the moment gradient on
lateral-torsional buckling. This coefficient can be specified by the user through the use of parameter
CB or CBy (see Table 11B.1) or may be calculated by the program (according to LRDF USA
specification) if CB is specified as 0.0. In the absence of the parameter CB, a default value of 1.0 will
be used.
To specify laterally unsupported length, either of the parameters UNL and UNF (see Table 10B.1) can
be used.
It is taken into account the reduction of flexural resistance due to slender web according to section
4.5.8 of the NTC
For the sections where the web and flange are slender the LRDF USA specification was used.

13B.8 Design for Shear
Stress areas due to bending about y axis (MY)
Note: The local X axis goes into the page; the Global Y axis is vertical upwards; the shaded area
indicates area under compression; the area not shaded indicates area under tension.
Stress areas due to bending about Z axis (MZ)
13B.8 Design for Shear

The procedure of Sect. 3.3.3 of the NTC is used in STAAD to design for shear forces in members.
Besides combined bending and shear is checked according to section 3.3.4 of the NTC, considering
also the limits for stiffeners of the web according to sections 4.5.6/7 of the NTC. Shear in wide
flanges and channel sections is resisted by the area of the web/s..
13B.9 Combined Compression Axial Force and Bending

The interaction of flexure and axial forces in singly and doubly symmetric shapes is governed by
formulas of the Section 3.4 of the NTC. These interaction formulas cover the general case of biaxial
bending combined with axial force. They are also valid for uniaxial bending and axial force.

13B.10 Combined Tension Axial Force and Bending
It is considered that the frames are part of structures that have shear walls or rigid elements so that
the lateral displacements of a floor could be disregarded. The program has included formulas to
include structures with lateral displacements in the future considering for B2 the columns
individually and not the complete floor analysis.
It is taken into account if the elements have transverse loads and if the ends are angularly
restrained.
13B.10 Combined Tension Axial Force and Bending

Based on Section 3.5 4 of the NTC.

Design per Mexican Standards is requested by using the CODE. Other applicable parameters are
summarized in Table 11B.1 below. These parameters communicate design decisions from the
engineer to the program and thus allow the engineer to control the design process to suit an
application's specific needs.
The parameters DMAX and DMIN may only be used for member selection only.
Once a parameter is specified, its value stays at that specified number till it is specified again. This
is the way STAAD works for all codes.
Table 13B.1-Design Parameters According to Mexican NTC Standards - Steel
Name
CODE - Must be specified as MEXICAN.

Reference Manual.
BEAM 0 0: Design at ends and those locations

specified by SECTION command.
1: Design at ends and at every y

cada 1/12th point along member
length


Name
CB 1 Coefficient C defined per section

3.3.2.2. If Cb is set to 0.0 it will be
calculated by the program according
to LRFD USA (CbMex=1/CbUSA).
Any other value will be directly used
in the design.
CMB 1 Cfactor for combined forces when

there are transverse loads in the
members. Section 3.4.3.3.ii of NTC
CMB 1.0 = Members

ends are restricted
angularly.
CMB 0.85 = Members

ends are not restricted
angularly.
DFF None "Deflection Length" / Maxm.

deflection check,
See Note 1 below.
TRACK 4.0)

of member calculation of "Deflection Length ."
See Note 1 below.

member calculation of "Deflection Length."
See Note 1 below.
DMAX 114 cm Maximum allowable depth
DMIN 0.0 cm Minimum allowable depth
DSD T Perform the ductile seismic design

in accordance with Section 11 (True
or False).
Main design conditions are

considered (not including, at the
moment, geometric ones)
FU 4,230 Kg/cm 2 Ultimate tensile strength of steel
FYLD 2,530 kg/cm 2 Minimum Yield strength of steel


Name
IMM 0 Main or secondary member for the

purpose of checking slenderness
0. Main member
1. Secondary and wind trusses
INO 0 Curve Definition according to

NTC.3.2.2.1a, defined for I shapes or
tubes
0. n=1.4, laminated I shapes,

tubes or built up with 3 or 4
welded plates obtained from
wider plates cuts with oxygen.
1. n=1, I shapes, tubes or built up
with 3 or 4 welded plates
IRR 0 Variable defined for the whole

structure indicating if it is regular or
irregular according to section 3.4 of
the NTC.
0. Columns that are part of

regular structures
1. Columns that are part of
irregular structures
KX 1.0 Effective length factor for flexural-

torsional buckling
KY 1.0 Effective length factor for local Y

axis- Usually minor axis
KZ 1.0 Effective length factor for local Z

axis- Usually major axis
LDR T Defines if the structure has

elements to bear the wind load
(shear walls, wind trusses, or bracing
rigid elements ) that restrict lateral
displacements and allow to disregard
slenderness effects. (True or False)
LX Member length Length for determining flexural-

torsional buckling


Name
LY Member length Length to calculate slenderness ratio

for buckling about local Y axis.
LZ Member length Length to calculate slenderness ratio

for buckling about local Z axis.
NSF 1 Net section factor for tension

members
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of actual load effect

and design strength
STIFF Longer of Member Spacing of stiffeners for beams for

length or depth shear design
TRACK 0 Controls the level of detail in output
0. = Suppress all design

strengths
1. = Print all design strengths
2. = Print expanded design
output
UNB Member length Unsupported length (L) of the

bottom* flange for calculating
flexural strength . Will be used only
if compression is in the bottom
flange.
See Note 2 below.
UNT Member length Unsupported length (L) of the top*

flange for calculating flexural
strength . Will be used only if
compression is in the top flange.
See Note 2 below.
1. For deflection check, parameters DFF, DJ1, and DJ2 from Table 2B.1 may be used. All
requirements remain the same.
2. Top and Bottom represent the positive and negative side of the local Y axis (local Z axis
if SET Z UP is used).


Both code checking and member selection options are available in STAAD Mexican Standards
implementation.
Checking command.

Results of code checking and member selection are presented in a tabular format.
CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the Mexican NTC which governed the design.
If the TRACK is set to 1.0, member design strengths will be printed out.

14
Norwegian Codes

14 Norwegian Codes

14A.1 - General Notes
14A. Norwegian Codes - Steel Design per NS 3472 / NPD

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Norwegian code NS 3472 Steel
structures. Design rules (3rd Edition) and NPD 1993 Veiledning om utforming, beregning og
dimensjonering av stalkonstruksjoner. Sist enderet 1. (Guidance on the design, calculation and
dimensioning of figures constructions. Revision 1).
Design of members per NS 3472 / NPD requires the STAAD N. Eurozone Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.
14A.1 - General Notes

This user manual presents a description of the design basis, parameters and theory applied to
STAAD.Pro for performing code checks according to NS 3472 ref. [1] and NPD ref. [5]. The code
checks include:
l stability check (buckling)

l lateral buckling check
l yield check (von Mises)
l stability check including local plate buckling of un-stiffened pipe walls according to NPD
The code check is available for the following cross-section types:
l wide flange profiles (HEA, HEB, IPE etc.)

l pipe (OD xx ID xx)
l tube (RHS, HUP)
l channel
l angle type (only RA)
l rectangular massive box (prismatic)
l user table (wide flange, I-sections, tapered I, tube, channel and RA angle)
The code check is not available for the following cross-section types:
l Double angles
l Tapered tubes
l Prismatic sections with too few section parameters defined
l Other sections that are not in the ‘available’ list above
Please note the following:
l NS 3472 and NPD code checking covered in this document are available through two
separate STAAD.Pro Code check packages.

14A.2 - Basis for Code Checking
l This document is not a lecture in use of NS 3472 or NPD. This document explains how, and
which parts of, the Norwegian steel codes that have been implemented in STAAD.Pro.
l When L-sections are used, the Code Check requires RA angle definition.
l Weld design is not included in the Norwegian code checks.
l The prismatic section defined in the code check (rectangular massive box) is not identical to
the general prismatic profile defined in the STAAD.Pro analysis package.
EDR does not accept any liability for loss or damage from or in consequence for use of the program.
14A.1.1 Nomenclature
NS - refers to NS 3472 ref. [1]
NS2 - refers to NS 3472 ref. [6]
NPD - refers to NPD94 ref. [5]
14A.1.2 References
1. NS 3472 3.utg. 2001
Prosjektering av stålkonstruksjoner
Beregning og dimensjonering
2. STAAD.Pro Technical Reference Manual, Release 2002
3. NS 3472 1.utg. 1973
4. Roark &Young`s 5th edition
5. NPD utg. 1994
Veiledning om utforming, beregning og dimensjonering av stålkonstruksjoner. Sist
endret 1. oktober 1993.
6. NS 3472 2.utg.1984

This section presents general information regarding the implementation of the Norwegian codes of
practice for structural steel design. This manual describes the procedures and theory used for both

NS and NPD.
In general NS is used for all cross sections and shapes listed in section 1 of this manual. An
exception is the treatment and check of pipe members in framed structures. NS does not give
specific details about the treatment of pipes. Section 3.4 explains how this is adopted when NS is
selected for code checking.
The NPD however have a more thorough check of pipe members, and consider the effect of local
buckling of the pipe wall in conjunction with the stability check. In addition, the NPD code gives
joint capacity formulae for brace to chord connections for pipe members.
ultimate limit state design. Two major failure modes are recognized:
l failure by overstressing
l failure by stability considerations
The following sections describe the salient features of the design approach. Members are
proportioned to resist the design loads without exceeding the characteristic stresses or capacities
and the most economic section is selected on the basis of the least weight criteria. It is generally
assumed that the user will take care of the detailing requirements like the provision of stiffeners
and check the local effects like flange buckling, web crippling, etc.
The user is allowed complete control over the design process through the use of the parameters
listed in Table 2.1. Default values of parameters will yield reasonable results in most circumstances.
However, the user should control the design and verify results through the use of the design
parameters.
14A.2.1 Calculation of Forces and Bending Moments

the primary loading conditions and combinations provided by the user. The user is allowed
necessary load combinations.
14A.2.2 Members with Axial Forces

For tension only members, axial tension capacity is checked for the ultimate limit stress. For
compression members, axial compression capacity is checked in addition to lateral buckling and
ultimate limit stress. The largest slenderness ratio (λ) shall not be greater than 250 according to NS
11.7 Stability is checked as per the procedure of NS 12.3. The buckling curves of NS fig. 3 have been
incorporated into the STAAD.Pro code check. The coefficient α (as per NS Table 10) can be specified
in both directions through the use of parameters CY and CZ. In the absence of parameters CY and
/or CZ, default a- value will be according to NS table 11.

14A.2.3 Members with Axial Force and Bending Moments

For compression members with bending, interaction formulae of NS table 12.3.4.2 are checked for
appropriate loading situation. All compression capacities are calculated per the procedure of NS 12.3.
The equivalent moment factor β is calculated using the procedure of NS table 12. Two different
approaches are used depending upon whether the members can sway or not. Conditions for
sidesway and transverse loading can be specified through the use of parameters SSY and SSZ. For
members that cannot sway, without transverse loading, coefficients b are calculated and proper
dimensioning moments are used in the interaction formulae.
14A.2.4 Lateral Buckling

Lateral torsional buckling is checked as per the procedure of NS 12.3.4. The procedure for
calculation of ideal buckling moment for sections with two axis of symmetry has been
implemented. The coefficient can be provided by the user through the use of parameter CB. In the
absence of CB, a value of 1.0 will be used. Torsional properties for cross sections (torsional constant
and warping constant) are calculated using formulae from NS 3472. This results in slightly
conservative estimates of torsional parameters. The program will automatically select the maximum
moment in cases where Mvd is less than Mzd.
14A.2.5 Von Mises Yield Criterion

Combined effect of axial, bending, horizontal/vertical shear and torsional shear stress is calculated
at 13 sections on a member and up to 9 critical points at a section. The worst stress value is checked
against yield stress divided by appropriate material factor. The von Mises calculates as:
2 2 fy
σj = (σx + σ by + σbz ) + 3(τ x + τ y + τ z ) ≤
γm
14A.2.6 Material factor and nominal stresses

The design resistances are obtained by dividing the characteristic material strength by the material
factor.
NS 3472
The material factor default value is 1.10. Other values may be input with the MF parameter. The
nominal stresses should satisfy
fy
σj ≤ = fd
γm

NPD
The general requirement is according to NPD 3.1.1. For stability the NPD 3.1.1 and 3.1.3 requires that
the structural coefficient is considered.
fk
S d ≤ fkd =
γ m ⋅ γ mk (S d )
Where:
S = reference stress or load effect resultant

d
f = characteristic capacity
k
f = design capacity
kd
γ = material coefficient
m
γ = structural coefficient
mk
γ is default set to 1.10.
m
γ shall be equal to 1.0 for frames. For pipe members γ is a function of the reduced slenderness.
mk mk
In the STAAD.Pro implemented NPD code this is calculated automatically.
14A.2.7 Code checking according to NPD

The following parts of Chapter 3 in the NPD guidelines have been implemented.
a. Control of nominal stresses. (NPD 3.1.2).

b. Buckling of pipe members in braced frames, including interaction with local shell buckling
(NPD 3.2.2, 3.2.3).
c. Buckling of un-stiffened closed cylindrical shells, including interaction with overall column
buckling (NPD 3.4.4, 3.4.6, 3.4.7 and 3.4.9).
d. Joint capacity check for gap as well as for overlap joints (NPD 3.5.2).
Check b) provides the unity check based on the beam-column buckling interaction formulae in
NPD 3.2.2. The interaction between global and local buckling due to axial load and hydrostatic
pressure is accounted for through computation of an axial characteristic capacity to replace the
yield stress inn the beam-column buckling formulae.
Note: Check b) handles members subjected to axial loads, bending moments and hydrostatic
pressure. In other words, check b) assumes that stresses resulting from shear and torsion are of
minor importance, e.g., in jacket braces.
Check c) provides the unity check based on the stability requirement for un-stiffened cylindrical
shells subjected to axial compression or tension, bending, circumferential compression or tension,
torsion or shear. The unity check refers to the interaction formulae in NPD 3.4.4.1. The stability
requirement is given in NPD 3.4.7.

14A.2.8 Aluminum Check

STAAD.Pro performs a stability check on aluminum alloys according to buckling curve in ECCS
(European recommendation for aluminum ally structures 1978). It is possible to select heat-treated
or non heat-treated alloy from the parameter list in the STAAD.Pro input file.
For heat-treated use CY = CZ = 0.1590, and for non heat-treated use CY = CZ = 0.2420.
Tracks 1.0 and 9.0 print buckling curve H for heat-treated, and buckling curve N for non neat-
treated. The yield check is the same as for steel.

Table 14A.1-Design Parameters for Norwegian Steel design code
Parameter Default Description Reference
Name Value
CODE none Must be secified as either NS3472 for NS

or NPD for NPD (NOR may also be used
for both).

Reference Manual.
BEAM 0.0 Parameter BEAM 1.0 ALL tells the Sec. NS

program to calculate von Mises at 13 12.2.2
sections along each member, and up to
8 points at each section. (Depending on
what kind of shape is used.)
Note: Must be set to 1.0
BY 1.0 Buckling length coefficient, β for weak Fig. NS 3

axis buckling (y-y) (NOTE: BY > 0.0) Sec. NS
12.3
BZ 1.0 Buckling length coefficient, β, for strong Fig. NS 3

axis buckling (z-z) (NOTE: BZ > 0.0) Sec. NS
12.3
CB 1.0 Lateral buckling coefficient, Y. Used to Sec. NS2

calculate the ideal buckling moments, A5.5.2 Fig.
M NS2
vi
A5.5.2a)-e)


Name Value
CMY 1.0 Water depth in meters for hydrostatic Valid for

pressure calculation for pipe members the NPD
code only
CMZ 0.49 α for sections in connection with Sec. NS

LT
lateral buckling 12.3.4 Fig.
NS 6.
CY Default Buckling curve coefficient, a about local Fig. NS 3

see NS z-axis (strong axis). Represent the a, a0, Sec. NS
CZ
3472 b, c, d curve. 12.2 NS
Table 11
DMAX 100.0 Maximum allowable depth of steel

[cm] section.
DMIN 0.0 [cm] Minimum allowable depth of steel

section.
FYLD 235 Yield strength of steel, fy (St37) [N/mm2 Tab. NS 3

]
MF 1.1 Material factor / Resistance factor, γ Sec. NS

m
(NS3472) 10.4.2 Sec.
1.15 NPD 3.1
(NPD)
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of the actual to Sec. NS

allowable stresses. 12.3.4.2
SSY 0.0 0.0 = No sidesway. β calculated. > 0.0 = Sec. NS

Sidesway in local y-axis weak axis 12.3.4 Tab.
β =SSY NS 12 Sec.
M
NPD
3.2.1.4
SSZ 0.0 0.0 = No sidesway. β calculated. > 0.0 = Sec. NS

Sidesway in local y-axis weak axis β 12.3.4 Tab.
M
NS 12 Sec
NPD
3.2.1.4


Name Value
TRACK 0.0 Controls the level of detail in the

output:
0.0 = Suppress critical

member stresses.
1.0 = Print all critical

member stresses, i.e.,
DESIGN VALUES
2.0 = Print von Mises

stresses.
9.0 = Large output, 1 page

for each member.
See "- Tabulated Results" on page 640

for complete list of available TRACKs
and print examples.
UNL Member Effective length for lateral buckling Sec. NS

length calculations (specify buckling length). 12.3
Distance between fork supports or
between effective side supports for the
beam
The parameter CMY will, when given with negative value, define an inside pressure in pipe members.
The pressure corresponds to given water depth in meters.
The parameter CB defines the φ value with respect to calculation of the ideal lateral buckling
moment for single symmetric wide flange profiles, ref. NS app. 5.2.2.
14A.3.1 Example
Note: This is a partial example containing only the information pertaining to the Norwegian
steel design code; used at the end of the input file.
* Code check according to NS3472

PARAMETERS
CODE NS3472
BEAM 1.0 ALL
FYLD 340 ALL
MF 1.10 ALL
CY 0.49 MEMB 1
CZ 0.49 MEMB 1
BY 0.9 MEMB 1
BZ 0.7 MEMB 1
SSY 1.1 MEMB 1
SSZ 1.3 MEMB 1

14A.4 Stability Check According to NS 3472
CB 0.9 MEMB 1
RATIO 1.0 ALL
TRACK 9.0 ALL
UNIT KNS METER
LOAD LIST 1
CHECK CODE MEMB 1
FINISH

The stability check is based on the assumption that both ends of the member are structural nodes.
Buckling lengths and results for member with joints between the structural nodes have to be
evaluated in each separate case.
Effects from local buckling or external hydrostatic pressure on pipes and tubes are not included.
The general stability criteria is: (ref. NS 12.3)
14A.4.1 Buckling
nmax + kz × mz + ky × my ≤ 1
14A.4.2 Lateral Buckling

n mz
+ kLT + k ymy ≤ 1
χy χ LT
Where:
i = z,y
nmax = n/χmin
n = Nf/Nd
χmin = min(χz,χy )
χi = Nkd,i/Nd
n
ki = 1−µi ≤ 1.5
χ iγ m
μi = λi(2·βMi - 4) ≤ 0.9
β ref. NS Tab. 12
Mi
n
kLT = 1 − µ LT ≤ 1.0
χ yγ m
μLT = 0.15(λy ·βM - 1) ≤ 0.9
λi = λi/λ1
λi = Lki/ii

E
λi = π
fy
1
χi =
2
ϕ+ ϕ 2− λ
φ = 0.5[1 + α(λ - 0.2) + λ2 ]
α ref. NS Tab 10 & 11

1
χLT =
2 2
ϕ LT + ϕ LT − λ LT
ϕLT = 0.51 + α λLT − 0.4 + λLT 

( )
2
 
α ref. NS sec. 12.3.4.1

W zfz
λLT =
M cr
Mcr = ψ·Mvio
ψ ref. NS2 A5.5.2 Sect. a - d
π π 2 EC w
M vio = EI zGIT 1 +
L L 2 GI T
14A.4.3 Determination of β and β

z y
The equivalent moment factor β (for z and y) is calculated dependant on moment distributions as
shown in the following table:
Table 14A.2-β for different moment distributions
Moment diagram β (β )
M LT
β = 1.8 - 0.7ψ
Mψ
β = 1.3
M0
β = 1.4
M0

Moment diagram β (β )
M LT
βM = βM , ψ +
M0
∆M (βM,0 − βM , ψ )
M0 = |Mmax | due to transverse load only
ΔM = |Mmax | if the moment has the same

sign
ΔM = |Mmax | + |Mmin | if the moment

changes sign
The user can override the calculated factor with the following parameters:
βy =SSY
βz=SSZ
14A.4.4 Lateral buckling

The Ideal lateral buckling moment is calculated according to NS2 A5.5.2
E π 2 2.6C w
M vi = ψM vio = ψL95 I Ix 1 +
L L2 Ix
concern double symmetric cross sections where y is given in NS fig. A5.5.2, (input parameter CB), L
= member length for lateral buckling (input parameter UNL), Cw and Ix , see section 5.
For single symmetric cross sections, the ideal lateral buckling moment is
π 2EI y 2  5a 
M vix = ϕ
L
2 ( 5a
π
2
+
rx
3
− ys ) +C 2
− 2 +
π

rx
3
− ys 


Where:
C w + 0.039L 2I T
C2 =
Iy
α = distance from profile CoG to point where the load is acting, assumed to be on top
flange.
The φ parameter (ref NS fig. A5.5.2.g) is controlled by the input parameter CB.

Figure 14A.1 - ψ-coefficients for a simple span beam

Figure 14A.2 - ψ-coefficients for a partially restrained beam

Figure 14A.3 - ψ-coefficients for a fully restrained beam

Figure 14A.4 - ψ-coefficients for the cantilevered beam with single loads and distributed loads. Dashed curves apply
load on the surface.
14A.4.5 Stability check of pipe members

The stability criteria applied for members with pipe cross section is:
2
  
2

 + 
My
+ 
N Mz
IR = ≤ 1.0
M   M 1 − N  
N kd
 d (1 − N
N Ezd )   d  N Eyd  
 
Where:
N  N N 
= max , 
N kd  kzd kyd 
N N
M and M are given in NS 5.4.2.

z z
For the print output option TRACK 9.0 K ≡ 1.0 and M ≡ M
E vd d
14A.4.6 Angle profiles type RA (reverse angle)

The axial contribution to the total interaction ratio is checked according to the modified EECS-
method, see NS A5.4.
The stability criterion is:

N My Mz
IR = + + ≤ 1.0
 N 
N kd
M yd 1 −
 N Eyd 
(
M zd 1 −
N
N Ezd )
Where:
N  N N 
= max , 
N kd  kzd kyd 
N N
N and N are found from NS 3472 fig. 5.4.la C-curve for y- and z-axis, respectively.
kyd kzd
For λ ≤ √(2)
λeff = 0.60 + 0.57λ
For λ > √(2)
λeff = λ
Where:
λk fy
λ =
π E
λk = lk /i
i = I/ A
Possible lateral buckling effects and torsional buckling (NS A5.4.5) is not included in the code
check. This has to be evaluated by the user separately.
14A.4.7 Stability check of members with tapered section

Stability of members with tapered cross section is calculated as described in section 3.1. The cross
section properties used in the formulae are calculated based on the average profile height. (i.e., I , I
z y
values are taken from the middle of the member.)
14A.4.8 Lateral buckling for tension members

When compressive stress caused by large bending moment about strong axis is greater than tension
stress from axial tension force, lateral buckling is considered as defined below.
σa = N/A (+ tension, - compression)
σbz = ± Mz/W z
Mwarp = | σa + σb | W z for σa + σb < 0 (compression)
IR = Mwarp /Mvd + My,max /Myd ≤ 1.0

14A.5 - Stability Check According to NPD
14A.5.1 Buckling of pipe members

Tubular beam-columns subjected to compression and lateral loading or end moments shall be
designed in accordance with NPD 3.2.2
2 fy
σcγmk + Bσ b* + (B zσ bz )2 + (B yσ by ) ≤
γm
Where:
σ = N/A = axial compressive stress

c
ν = structural coefficient
mk
B = bending amplification factor = 1/ (1 - μ), B is taken as the larger of B and B
z y
B = bending amplification factor about the Z-axis
z
B = bending amplification factor about the Y-axis
y
µ = σc / fE
π 2E 2
fE = i
l k2
i = I/ A
 fy  fk 
σ b* = σc − 11 − 
 fk  γ mfE 
l = kl
k
k = effective length factor
f = characteristic buckling capacity according to NS fig. 5.4.1a, curve A.

k
14A.5.2 Interaction with local buckling, NPD 3.2.3

If the below conditions are not satisfied, the yield strength will be replaced with characteristic
buckling stress given in NPD 3.4.
a. members subjected to axial compression and external pressure

d E
≤ 0.5
t fy
b. members subjected to axial compression only

d E
≤ 0.1
t fy

14A.5.3 Calculation of buckling resistance of cylinders

The characteristic buckling resistance is defined in accordance with NPD 3.4.4
fy
fk =
4
1+λ
Where:
2 f y  σ ao σb0 σp 0 τ 
λ =
σ j  fea feτ 
+ + +
feb fep
( )
σ j = (σa + σ b )2 − σa + σ b σ p + σ p2 + 3τ 2
σ ≥ 0 when
a
σa0 = 0
σ < 0 when
a
σa0 = -σa
σ ≥ 0 when
b
σb0 = 0
σ < 0 when
b
σb0 = -σb
σ ≥ 0 when
p
σp0 = 0
σ < 0 when
p
σp0 = σp
σ = design axial stress in the shell due to axial forces (tension positive)
a
σ = design bending stress in the shell due to global bending moment (tension
b
positive)
σ = σ = design circumferential stress in the shell due to external pressure (tension

p Θ
positive)
τ = design shear stress in the shell due to torsional moments and shear force.
S
f , f , f and f are the elastic buckling resistances of curved panels or circular
ea eb ep eι
cylindrical shells subjected to axial compression forces, global bending moments,
lateral pressure, and torsional moments and/or shear forces respectively.

14A.5.4 Elastic buckling resistance for un-stiffened, closed cylinders

The elastic buckling resistance for un-stiffened closed cylinders according to NPD 3.4.6 is:
π 2E t 2
fe = k
( )
()
12 1 − ν
2 l
where k is a buckling coefficient dependent on loading condition, aspect ratio, curvature, boundary
conditions, and geometrical imperfections. The buckling coefficient is:
pξ 2
k = ψ 1+ ( )ψ
The values of ψ, ζ, and p are given in Table 4.1 for the most important loading cases.
Table 14A.3-Table 4.1 Buckling coefficients for un-stiffened cylindrical shells
ψ ζ p
Axial or Bending stress 1 0.702 Z r −0.5

(
0.5 1 +
150t
)
Torsion and shear force 5.34 0.856 Z0.75 0.6
Lateral pressure 4 1.04 Z0.5
Hyrdostatic pressure 2 1.04 Z0.5
The curvature parameter is defined by
12
Z= 1 − ν2
rt
For long shells the elastic buckling resistance against shear stresses is independent of shell length.
For cases with:
1 r
> 3.85
r t
the elastic buckling resistance may be taken as:
t 2
fep = 0.25E ()r
14A.5.5 Stability requirements

The stability requirement for curved panels and un-stiffened cylindrical shells subjected to axial
compression or tension, bending, circumferential compression or tension, torsion or shear is given
by NPD 3.4.7:
σj < fkd
where the design buckling resistance is

14A.6 Yield Check
fk
fkd =
γ mγ mk
14A.5.6 Column buckling, NPD 3.4.9

For long cylindrical shells it is possible that interaction between shell buckling and overall column
buckling may occur because second-order effects of axial compression alter the stress distribution as
compared to that calculated from linear theory. It is necessary to take this effect into account in
the shell buckling analysis when the reduced slenderness of the cylinder as a column exceeds 0,2
according to NPD 3.4.4.1.
σ shall be increased by an additional compressive stress which may be taken as:

b
 fy  fk   
∆σ = Bσa − 11 − + B − 1σ b
 f k  fe   
Where:
1
B=
1−µ
λ = f y / fe
2
π E
fe = 2
λ
λ = slenderness of the cylinder as a column.
B, σ , σ , and μ are calculated in accordance with NPD 3.2.2.

a b
14A.6 Yield Check

The yield check is performed at member ends and at 11 equally spaced intermediate sections along
the member length.
At each section the following forces are applied:
F max. axial force along member

x
F actual shear in local y-direction at section
y
F actual shear in local z-direction at section
z
M max. torsional moment along member
x
M actual bending about local y-axis at section
y
M actual bending about local z-axis at section
z
For all profiles other than angle sections absolute values of the stresses are used. For
double symmetric profiles there will always be one stress point.
The stresses are calculated in several stress points at each member section. At each stress

14A.6 Yield Check
point the von Mises stress is checked as follows:

2 fy
σ j = σ 2o + σ p2 − σ o ⋅ σ p + 3(τx + τ y + τ z ) ≤
γm
Where:
σtot = | σx + σby + σbz |
σ stress from hydrostatic pressure.

p
14A.6.1 Double symmetric wide flange profile

The von Mises stress is checked at four stress points as shown in figure below.
Figure 14A.5 - Stress points checked for a wide flange section
Section Properties
A , I , I , and I are taken from STAAD.Pro database

x x y z
A = h × s Applied in STAAD.Pro print option PRINT MEMBER STRESSES
y
Az = (2/3)· b · t · 2
τy = Fy /Ay
τz = Fz/Az
A and A are not used in the code check

y z
2 3
(h − t ) b t
Cw =
24 ref. NS app. C3
Ty = dA × z

14A.6 Yield Check
Tz = dA × y
Stress calculation
General stresses are calculated as:

Fx My Mz
σ = σx + σ by + σ bz = + z+ y
Ax Iy Iz
Mx V yT z VzT y
τ = τx + τ y + τ z = c+ +
Ix Iz Iy
Where the component stresses are calculated as shown in the following table:
Table 14A.4-Stress calculations at selected stress points for a wide flange section
Point No σ σ σ τ τ τ
x by bz x y z
My b
1 Iy 2 0 0
Mz b Mx
t
Iz 2 Ix
F y bth
2 Fz tb 2
2 0 I z 2t I y 8t
Fx
Ax
Mz F y bth
2
3 0 h1 0
Iz Iz s
Mx
s
Ix
4 0 0
(
F y bth 2 + 0.5h 1 s
2
) 0
Iz s
In general wide flange profiles are not suitable for large torsional moments. The reported torsional
stresses are indicative only. For members with major torsional stresses a separate evaluation has to
be carried out. Actual torsional stress distribution is largely dependent on surface curvature at
stress point and warping resistance.
14A.6.2 Single symmetric wide flange profile and tapered section

The von Mises stress is checked at nine stress points as shown in figure below.

14A.6 Yield Check
Figure 14A.6 - Stress points checked for a singly symmetric wide flange section
Section properties
A , I , I , and I are taken from STAAD.Pro database, except for tapered sections
x x y z
where these values are calculated for each section checked. (i.e., Iz, Iy values are taken
from the middle of the member.)
A z = 2 / 3(b ⋅ t + b 1 ⋅ t 1 )
3 3 2
b t ⋅ b 1 t 1(h − t / 2 − t 1 / 2)
Cw =
( 3 3
12 b t + b 1 t 1 ) ref. NS app. C3
See "Double symmetric wide flange profile" on page 621 for equations used in section property
calculations.
Stress calculation
See "Double symmetric wide flange profile" on page 621 for equations used in general stress
calculations.
Where the component stresses are calculated as shown in the following table:

14A.6 Yield Check
Table 14A.5-Stress calculations at selected stress points for a singly symmetric

wide flange section
Point
σ σ σ τ τ τ
No x by bz x y z
My b
1 − 0 0
Iy 2
Mz Mx F y bt (h + t / 2)
1 Fz tb 2
2 0 h2 t
Iz Ix Iz 2t I y 8t
My b
3 Iy 2 0 0
Mz F y bt (h + t / 2)
1
4 0 h1 0
Iz Iz s
5
Fx
0 0
Mx
s ( ) 2
F y bt h 1 + t / 2 + 0.5h 1 s
0
Ax Ix
Iz s
Mz F y b t (h + t / 2)
1 1 3 1
6 0 − h3 0
Iz Iz s
My b
1
7 − 0 0
Iy 2
Mz Mx F y b t (h + t / 2)
1 1 3 1 Fz t 1b 2
8 0 − h4 t
Iz Ix Iz 2t 1 I y 8t 1
My b
1
9 Iy 2 0 0
In general wide flange profiles are not suitable for large torsional moments. The reported torsional
stresses are indicative only. For members with major torsional stresses a separate evaluation has to
be carried out. Actual torsional stress distribution is largely dependent on surface curvature at
stress point and warping resistance.
14A.6.3 Pipe profile

The von Mises stress is checked in 3 stress points as shown in figure below.

14A.6 Yield Check
Figure 14A.7 - Stress points for a pipe section
Section properties
d = D - 2t
r = 0.5 ( D-t )
a = tan-1 M /M
z y
Ax = π/4 (D2 - d 2)
A = A = 0.5A
y z x
I = 2I =π/32 (D4 - d 4)
x z
I = I = π/64 (D4 - d 4)
y z
Note: In the STAAD.Pro analysis package slightly different values are used for A ,
y
A and I , however this has insignificant influence on the force distribution.
z x

14A.6 Yield Check
A = A = 0.6A
Y z x
I = 2πR3t
x
Stress calculation at selected stress points
14A.6.4 Tube profile

Tube sections are rectangular or quadratic hollow uniform profiles. Critical stress is checked at 5
locations as shown in figure below.

14A.6 Yield Check
Section Properties

14A.6 Yield Check
The general stress formulation is given in sec. 5.2.
14A.6.5 Channel profile

For channel profiles the von Mises stress is checked at 6 locations as shown in the figure below.

14A.6 Yield Check

14A.6 Yield Check
Cross section properties
Stress calculations at selected stress points

14A.6 Yield Check
The general stress formulation is given in sec. 5.2.f
14A.6.6 Angle profile type RA (reverse angle)

For angle profiles the von Mises check is checked at 8 stress points as shown in figure below.
Axes y and z are principal axes.
Axes u and w are local axes.

14A.6 Yield Check
Cross section properties
Section forces
The section forces from the STAAD.Pro analysis are about the principle axis y and z.
The second moment of area (Ty L TZ):
T =AZ
y
T =AY
z

14A.6 Yield Check
An additional torsional moment is calculated based on:
M = F Z4
T y
M = F Y4
T z
This torsion moment is included in M if F and F exist.
x y Z
Beta-rotation of equal & unequal legged angles
Note: The order of the joint numbers in the member incidence command specifies the direction
of the local x-axis.

14A.6 Yield Check

14A.6 Yield Check
14A.6.7 Rectangular massive box (prismatic)

Code check of the general purpose prismatic cross section defined in the STAAD.Pro analysis
package is not available. The prismatic section is assumed to be a rectangular massive box and the
von Mises stress is checked at 3 locations as shown in figure below.
Note: Note that ‘b’ may not be much greater than ‘h’. If that is the case, define the member with
h > b and Beta angle 90° instead.
Section Properties

14A.7 Tubular Joint Check, NPD 3.5
General Stress Calculation
ref. [4] tab. 20, case 4 at midpoint the largest side i.e., point 2

For pipe members, punching shear capacity is checked in accordance with the NPD sections 3.5.1 to
3.5.2, except 3.5.2.4. The chord is defined as the member with the greater diameter in the joint. If
the diameters are the same the program selects the member with the greater thickness of the two.
The chord members must be collinear by 5 degrees.
The punching shear run sequence is performed in two steps. The program will first identify all
tubular joints and classify them as T type joints (TRACK99). The joints to be checked will be listed
in a file specified in the CODE NPD parameter list, below called GEOM1. This file is used as input
in the second run. The file is an editable ACSII file saved under the file name given in the CODE
NPD parameter. The TRACK parameter is then set to 98 which directs the program to read from
the file GEOM1 file and use it as input to the second run, i.e., the joint capacity checking. The
program will check the capacity for both chord members entering the joint. The local y and z

moments will be transformed into the plane defined by the joint itself and the far end joints of the
brace and chord, defined as in- and out-of plane moments.
The ASCII file should be edited to reflect the correct classification of the joints, gap, can or stub
dimensions, yield stress and other geometric options if required. The program will not change the
brace or chord definition if this is changed or modified in the input file GEOM1. See Appendix A
page xx for GEOM1 example file.
Joint classification parameters in the file GEOM1 are:
KO K joint overlapped
KG K joint with gap
TY T or Y joint
X X joint
Input example for the classification run.

*CLASSIFICATION OF JOINTS, TRACK 99
UNITS MM NEWTON
PARAMETER
CODE NPD GEOM1
FYLD 350 ALL
TRACK 99 ALL
BEAM 1.0 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
14A.7.1 Static strength of tubular joints

The basic consideration is the chord strength. The required chord wall thickness shall be
determined when the other dimensions are given.
The following symbols are used:
T = Cord wall thickness
t = Brace wall thickness
R = Outer radius of chord
r = Outer radius of brace
Θ = Angel between chord and considered brace
D = Outer diameter of chord
d = Outer diameter of brace
a = Gap (clear distance) between considered brace and nearest load-carrying brace
measured along chord outer surface
ß = r/R

g = R/T
g = a/D
f = Yield stress
y
Q = Factor
f
Q = See table 6.1
g
Q = See table 6.1
u
Q d = See table 6.1
ß
N = Design axial force in brace
M = Design in-plane bending moment in brace

IP
M = Design out-of plane bending moment in brace
OP
N = Characteristic axial load capacity of brace (as governed by the chord strength)
k
M = Characteristic out-of-plane bending moment capacity of brace (as governed
OPk
by the chord strength)
σ = Design axial stress in chord

ax
σ = Design in-plane bending stress in chord
IP
σ = Design out-of-plane bending stress in chord
OP
This section gives design formulae for simple tubular joints without overlap and without gussets,
diaphragms or stiffeners. Tubular joints in a space frame structure shall satisfy:
N ≤ Nk / γm
Where:
2
fyT
N k = Q uQ f
sin Θ
Q is given in Table 6.1 and Q is a factor to account for the nominal longitudinal stress in the
u f
chord.
Qf = 1.0 - 0.03γA2
2 2 2
σ ax + σIP + σ OP
A2 =
0.64f y2

Table 14A.6-Values for Q

u
Type of joint and Type of load in brace member
geometry
Axial In-plane Out-of-plane
bending bending
T and Y 2.5 + 19β 5.0√(γ)β 3.2/(1-0.81β)
X (2.7 + 13β)
Q
β
K 0.90(2+21β)
Q
β
For β > 0.6, Qβ = 0.3/[β(1 - 0.833β)]
For β ≤ 0.6, Qβ = 1.0
For γ ≤ 20, Qg = 1.8 - 0.la/T
For γ > 20, Qg = 1.8 - 4g
but in no case shall Q be taken as less than 1.0.

g
When β ≥ 0.9, Q is set to 1.0. This is also applicable for moment loading. For cases with tension in
f
the chord, Qf is set to 1.0. This is also applicable for moment loading.
The brace end moments shall be accounted for in the following cases:
a. Out-of-plane bending moment when β > 0.85

b. When the brace acts as a cantilever
c. When the rotational stiffness of the connection is considered in the determination of
effective buckling length, and / or the structural coefficient γ = 1.00 for the beam-column
mk
design of the brace or chord. See Section 3.1.3.
The characteristic capacity of the brace subjected to in-plane bending moment shall be determined
by:
2
df y T
MIPk = Q uQ f
sin Θ
Where Q is given in Table 6.1 and

u
Qf = 1.0 - 0.045γA2
The characteristic capacity of the brace subjected to out-of-plane bending moment shall be
determined by:
2
df y T
MOPk = Q uQ f
sin Θ
Where Q is given in Table 6.1 and

u
Qf = 1.0 - 0.021γA2

14A.8 - Tabulated Results
For combined axial and bending loads in the brace, the following interaction equation should be
satisfied:
2
N
Nk
+ ( )+
M IP
M IPk
M OP
M OPk
≤
1
γm
For overlapping tubular joints without gussets, diaphragms, or stiffeners, the total load component
normal to the chord, NN, shall not exceed
Nk l1 2f y t wl 2
NN = sin Θ +
γm l 3 γm
where (see NPD fig. 3.10)
l = circumference for that portion of the brace in contact with the chord (actual
l
length)
l = circumference of brace contact with chord, neglecting presence of overlap
N = characteristic axial load capacity of brace

k
t = the lesser of the throat thickness of the overlapping weld or the thickness t of
w
the thinner brace
l = length as shown in NPD fig. 3.10

2
The above formula for the capacity of overlapping joints is valid only for K joints, where
compression in a brace is essentially balanced by tension in brace(s) in the same side of the joint.

This section presents a table with the various TRACKs available with respect to print out from the
code check. Example prints and explanation to the information / heading given on the print out is
given in Appendix A.
Table 14A.7-Available TRACK parameter values
TRACK Description
no.
0 Brief print of member utilizations (2 lines for each member) sorted

with highest utilized members first
1 Based on TRACK 3 with additional information regarding stability

factors and capacities
2 Simple print of stresses, including von Mises stress
3 Brief print of member utilizations (two lines for each member)
9 Comprehensive print with detailed information about member and

member utilization(one page for each member)

TRACK Description
no.
99 Used in connection with tubular joint check according to NPD.

This TRACK identifies tubular joints to be checked and classifies all
members entering the joint as T connection
98 Used in connection with tubular joint check according to NPD.

This TRACK performs the joint capacity check
49 Prints member end forces for members entering each joint (at the
end of the member connected to the joint)
31 Prints maximum and minimum member end forces (axial force

defines max and min) at member end 1
32 Prints maximum and minimum member end forces (axial force

defines max and min) at member end 2
14A.8.1 Output for member design
Output example for TRACK 0.0
Symbol Description Unit
MEMB Member number kN
kN-
FX Axial force in the member (T = tension, C = compression)
m
kN-
MYs Start moment about the y-axis
m
kN-
MYm Mid moment about the y-axis
m
kN-
MYe End moment about the y-axis
m
kN-
MYb Buckling moment about the y-axis
m
RATIO Interaction ratio
LOAD The critical load case number
TABLE Section type (HE, IPE, TUBE, etc.)

kN-
MZs Start moment about z-axis
m
kN-
MZm Mid moment about the z-axis
m
kN-
MZe End moment about the z-axis
m
kN-
MZb Buckling moment about z-axis
m
COND Critical condition
Distance from the start of the member to the critical

DIST m
section
Note: Myb and Mzb are the design moments used for max unity ratio.
NS3472 (VERSION 06002)

UNITS ARE KN AND METE
MEMB FX MYs MYm MYe MYb RATIO LOAD
TABLE MZs MZm MZe MZb COND DIST
===============================================================================
1 12.80 C 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 5.08 1
FAIL PIPS40 (AISC SECTIONS)
31.9 -15.9 -36.2 36.2 STAB 10.00
4 24.20 C 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.30 1
-0.2 -1.4 -2.9 2.9 STAB 14.14
3 26.31 C 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.78 1
PIPS40 (AISC SECTIONS)
5.1 1.3 2.5 5.1 STAB 0.00
2 4.02 C 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.58 1
PIPD60 (AISC SECTIONS)
36.4 -38.1 -6.8 38.9 STAB 5.83
5 5.02 T 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.34 1
3.6 -1.8 1.7 2.8 VMIS 0.00
CURVE St Buckling curve about the strong axis
CURVE Wk Buckling curve about the weak axis
Beta Z Buckling length factor about z-axis
Beta Y Buckling length factor about y-axis

N/mm
FYLD Allowable yield strength 2
Betamz Equivalent moment factor β about z-axis

m
Betamy Equivalent moment factor β about y-axis

m
Fak Z Factor k according to 12.3.4.2 about the z-axis
Fak Y Factor k according to 12.3.4.2 about the y-axis
MYD Moment capacity about the y axis kN-m
MZD Moment capacity about the z axis kN-m
MVD Lateral buckling moment kN-m
Interaction ratio for buckling without lateral

IR1
buckling (Cl. 12.3.4.2)
Interaction ratio for buckling with lateral buckling

IR2
(Cl. 12.3.4.2)
VON MISES Interaction ratio for von Mises

NS3472 (VERSION 06002)
UNITS ARE KN AND METE
MEMB FX MYs MYm MYe MYb RATIO LOAD
TABLE MZs MZm MZe MZb COND DIST
===============================================================================
1 12.80 C 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 5.08 1
31.9 -15.9 -36.2 36.2 STAB 10.00
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| CURVE St A Wk A Beta Z 1.00 Beta Y 1.00 FYLD= 235. N/MM2 |
| Betamz=1.295 Betamy=1.000 FakZ=1.500 FakY=1.500 |
| MYD =.112E+2 KNM MZD =.112E+2 KNM MVD =.112E+2 KNM |
| IR1 = 5.076 IR2 = 5.076 VON MISES = 3.251 |
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
2 4.02 C 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.58 1
PIPD60 (AISC SECTIONS)
36.4 -38.1 -6.8 38.9 STAB 5.83
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| IR1 = 0.575 IR2 = 0.575 VON MISES = 0.557 |
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
3 26.31 C 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.78 1
5.1 1.3 2.5 5.1 STAB 0.00
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| IR1 = 0.784 IR2 = 0.784 VON MISES = 0.510 |
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
4 24.20 C 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.30 1

-0.2 -1.4 -2.9 2.9 STAB 14.14

|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| IR1 = 1.304 IR2 = 1.304 VON MISES = 0.310 |
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|


Output example for TRACK 3
Member in tension:

Member in compression:


Member in compression (pipe - NPD):


14A.8.2 Tracks for joint capacity code checking


14A.8.3 Special prints (not code check)


14B. Norwegian Codes - Steel Design per NORSOK N-004

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Norwegian code NORSOK N-004 Rev
2, October 2004. Code checks for tubular (pipe) members is performed per the code.
Please note the following:
l The code check is available for the pipe cross sections only.
l The design of conical transitions and joints with joint cans is not performed.
Design of members per NTC 1987 requires the STAAD N. Eurozone Design Codes SELECT Code
Pack.

The implementation of the NORSOK N-004 code in STAAD.Pro considers sections 4, 5, 6 & 7 in of
that document. The details of the various clauses implemented from these sections is presented
here for member checking and design.
14B.1.1 General Provisions

The general safety check is per Section 4. Checks are made to ensure that the design action effect
(S ) is less than or equal to the design resistance (R ):
d d
Sd ≤ Rd
The design resistance is evaluated for each condition and this check is applied as described in the
following sections.
14B.1.2 Steel selection and non destructive testing

Section 5 deals with the choice of “design class” for structural joints and components. The choice of
design class will determine the choice of steel grade & quality and also the determination of
inspection category for fatigue. The choice of design class (as per Table 5-1 of the code) is left to you
and does not have any direct impact on how STAAD.Pro performs design checks.
14B.1.3 Ultimate Limit States

Clause 6.1 primarily deals with the section of material factors to be used in the various conditions
or checks. The material factors chosen are dependent on the ‘section class’ of a cross section. N-004
does not explicitly specify how to classify various cross sections. Therefore, the section classification
is made as given in Section 5.5 of EN 1993-1-1:2005, except when specified explicitly along with
member checks (See Member Subject to Axial Compression).
Also, N-004 does not specify steel grades to be used. Therefore, this STAAD.Pro uses the steel grades
per EN 1993-1-1:2005 for designs per N-004.

Note: Ring stiffener design to CL. 6.3.6.2 is not included for this implementation.
14B.1.4 Tubular Members

Clause 6.3.1 deals with the general considerations while using tubular members.
Caution: Only tubular sections can be used with the N-004 code in STAAD.Pro. A warning is
presented for any other section type.
The dimensions of the tubular sections are limited as follows:
l The thickness t ≥ 6 mm.

l The thickness t <150 mm.
l The slenderness ratio of the cross section D/t < 120.
Where D is the diameter and t is the wall thickness of the section.

l The yield strength for tubular member ≤ 500 N/mm 2.
If any of these conditions are not met for a member selected for design, a warning will be issued by
the engine and the design of that member is aborted.
Note: N-004 uses ‘Y’ to define the action effects that is in plane and ‘Z’ to define out of plane
effects. This is the opposite to what STAAD uses, where ‘Z’ defines the in plane effects and ‘Y’ the
out of plane effects. This document will follow the STAAD.Pro convention for the Z and Y axes.
The N-004 code also segregates members into those that are subject to hydrostatic pressure and
those that are not subject to hydrostatic pressure. The program allows you to specify whether a
member is subject to hydrostatic pressure or not and, if so, to specify the hydrostatic pressure for
the element. By default the program will assume that all members are not subject to any
hydrostatic pressure. The design parameter HYD is used to specify the maximum water level with
respect to the origin.
If the HYD parameter is specified, the program will take that to be the water level and will evaluate
the pressure distribution on each element assuming a linear increase in pressure with depth (The
density of water is assumed to be 9.8 KN/m 3). Also, if the HYD parameter is specified, the program
will assume that the hydrostatic loads have not been included in the analysis. For members that are
subject to a combination of loads (i.e., bending plus compression) along with a hydrostatic
pressure, the design will be done according to Clause 6.3.9 of the code. In the absence of any
hydrostatic pressure on the member the design will be performed in accordance with Clause 6.3.8
of the code.

.1 Ultimate Limit State
Axial Tension
Clause 6.3.2 states that tubular members subject to axial tension shall satisfy the following
condition:
N ≤N = A⋅f /γ
Sd t,Rd y m
Where:
N = Design axial force (tension positive)

Sd
f = Characteristic yield strength
y
A = Cross section area
γ = Default material factor = 1.15

m
Axial Compression
Clause 6.3.3 states that tubular members subject to axial compression shall satisfy the following
condition:
N ≤N = A⋅f /γ
Sd c,Rd c m
Where:
N = Design axial force (compression positive)

Sd
f = Characteristic axial compressive strength
c
γ = Refer to clause 6.3.7
m
The design axial compressive strength for a member that is not subject to any hydrostatic pressure
will be taken as the smaller of in plane or out of plane buckling strengths determined by the
equations given below:
f = [1.0 - 028⋅λ2]f when λ ≤ 1.34

c y
f = 0.9/λ2⋅f when λ > 1.34
c y
λ = √(f /f ) = k⋅l/(π⋅i)√(f /E)
cl E cl
Where:
f = Characteristic local buckling strength

cl
λ = Column slenderness parameter
f = Smaller Euler buckling strength in y or z direction.

E
E = Young's modulus of elasticity = 2.1x105 MPa

k = Effective length factor, refer to Clause 6.3.8.2
l = Longer unbraced length in y or z direction
i = Radius of gyration.
The characteristic local buckling strength is determined from:
f = f when f /f ≤ 0.170 (Plastic yielding)

cl y y cle
f = [1.047 - 0.274⋅f /f ]⋅f when 0.170 < f /f ≤ 1.911 (Elastic/Plastic)
cl y cle y y cle
f =f when f /f > 1.911 (Elastic buckling)
cl cle y cle
Where:
f = 2C E⋅t/D (Characteristic elastic local buckling strength)

cle e
C = 0.3 (Critical elastic buckling coefficient)
e
D = Outside diameter
t = wall thickness
For a member that is subject to pure compression, if f /f > 0.170, the section will be classed as a
y cle
CLASS 4 (slender section). In such cases, the value of the material factor (γ ) used in the above
m
checks is increased according to equation 6.22 (Cl. 6.3.7) of the code.
Bending
Clause 6.3.4 states that tubular members subject to pure bending alone shall satisfy:
M ≤M = f ⋅W/γ
Sd Rd m m
Where:
M = Design bending moment

Sd
f = Characteristic bending strength
m
W = Elastic section modulus

m
The bending strength f is calculated as:
m
f = Z/W⋅f when f D/(E⋅t) ≤ 0.0517
m y y
f = [1.13 - 2.58⋅f D/(E⋅t)]⋅Z/W⋅f when 0.0517 < f D/(E⋅t) ≤ 0.1034
m y y y
f = [0.94 - 0.76⋅f D/(E⋅t)]⋅Z/W⋅f when 0.1034 < f D/(E⋅t) ≤ 120⋅f /E
m y y y y
Shear
Clause 6.3.5 states that tubular members subject to shear shall satisfy:

V ≤V = A⋅f /(2√3⋅γ )
Sd Rd y m)
Where:
V = Design shear force

Sd
f = Yield strength
y
A = Cross section area
γ = Default material factor = 1.15

m
When torsional shear stresses are present, the following condition shall also be satisfied:
M ≤M = 2⋅I f /(D√3⋅γ )
T,Sd T,Rd py m)
Where:
M = Design bending moment

T,Sd
I = Polar moment of inertia
p
Hydrostatic Pressure
Clause 6.3.6 states that tubular members subject to an external pressure shall primarily be checked
for hoop buckling. The condition to be satisfied is:
σ ≤f = f /γ
p,Sd h,Rd h m)
Where:
σ = p ⋅D/(2⋅t)
p,Sd Sd
p = Design hydrostatic pressure
Sd
f = Characteristic hoop buckling strength
h
m)
The characteristic hoop buckling strength f , will be calculated as follows:
h
f = f when f > 2.44⋅f
h y he y
f = 0.7⋅f (f /f )0.4 when 2.44⋅f ≥ f > 0.55⋅f
h y he y y he y
f =f when f ≤ 0.55⋅f
h he he y
The elastic hoop buckling strength f will be worked out as follows:
he
f = 2C E⋅t/D
he h
Where:
C = 0.44⋅t/D when μ ≥1.6⋅D/t

h
C = 0.44⋅t/D + 0.21⋅(D/t)3/μ4 when 0.825⋅D/t ≤ μ <1.6⋅D/t
h

C = 0.737/(μ - 0.579) when 1.5 ≤ μ < 0.825⋅D/t

h
C = 0.8 when μ <1.5
h
μ = Geometric Parameter = L/D√(2⋅D/t)
L = Length of tubular member between stiffening rings, diaphragms, or end

connections.
Combined Axial Tension and Bending (without Hydrostatic Pressure)
Clause 6.3.8.1 states that tubular members subject to axial tension and bending shall be designed to
satisfy the following condition:
Where:
M is the design bending moment about the y axis (out-of plane axis)
y,Sd
M is the design bending moment about the z axis (in plane axis)
z,Sd
N is the design axial force
Sd
M is the moment resistance (as determined by Clause 6.3.4)
Rd
N is the tension capacity of the section (as determined by Clause 6.3.2)
t,Rd
Combined Axial Compression and Bending (without Hydrostatic Pressure)
Clause 6.3.8.2 states that tubular members subject to axial tension and bending shall be designed to
satisfy the following conditions:
and
Where:
N is the design axial compression

Sd

C and C are the reduction factors corresponding to the Y and Z axes respectively.
my mz
You may specify a value for these using the CMY and CMZ design parameters,
respectively (default is 0.85 for both).
N and N are the Euler buckling loads about y & z axes and are given by:
ey ez
k is the effective length factor and is given in table 6-2 of the code.
N is the design axial local buckling resistance given by:

cl, Rd
f is the characteristic local buckling strength (as determined by Clause 6.3.3)

cl
The reduction factors used in this clause depend on the ‘structural element type’ and will be as
given in Table 6-2 of N-004. This requires the member to be classified under any one of the section
types given in the table.
Combined Bending and Shear (without Hydrostatic Pressure)
Clauses 6.3.8.3 & 6.3.8.4 state that tubular members subject to beam shear force (excluding shear
due to torsion) and bending moments shall satisfy:
M /M ≤ √(1.4 - V /V ) when V /V ≥ 0.4

Sd Rd Sd Rd Sd Rd
M /M ≤ 1.0 when V /V < 0.4
Sd Rd Sd Rd
If the member is subject to shear forces due to torsion along with bending moments, the condition
to be satisfied is:
M /M ≤ √(1.4 - V /V ) when V /V ≥ 0.4

Sd Red,Rd Sd Rd Sd Rd
M /M ≤ 1.0 when V /V < 0.4
Sd Red,Rd Sd Rd
Where:
M = W⋅f /γ
Red,Rd m,Red m
f = f √[1 - 3(τ /f )2]
m,Red m T,Sd d
τ = M /(2π⋅R2⋅t)
T,Sd T,Sd
f = f /γ
d y m

R = Radius of the tubular member

m
Combined Loads with Hydrostatic Pressure
Clause 6.3.9 of NS-004 describes two methods to check for members subject to combined forces in
the presence of hydrostatic pressure: depending on whether the hydrostatic forces were included as
nodal forces in the analysis or not. If the hydrostatic forces have not been included in the analysis
as nodal forces, Method A given in the code is used. If, however, the hydrostatic forces have been
included in the analysis, then Method B in the code is used. Prior to proceeding with the checks
described in the sections below, the section is verified for hoop stress limit per clause 6.3.6 (see
Hydrostatic Pressure above).
The choice of method for checking members subject to combined forces and hydrostatic pressure
used by STAAD.Pro will depend on the HYD parameter specified as a design parameter. If the HYD
parameter has been specified, then the program will assume that the hydrostatic forces have not
been included in the analysis and will perform the necessary checks as per Method A in code. If, on
the other hand, the HYD parameter has not been specified, the program will use the section forces
and use Method B in the code.
Combined Axial Tension, Bending, and Hydrostatic Pressure
Checks per Clause 6.3.9.1:
A. When HYD is specified:
The following condition is to be satisfied:
a. For the net axial tension condition (σ ≥σ )

a,Sd q,Sd
Where:
σ is the design axial stress, excluding any axial compression from

a,Sd
hydrostatic pressure.
σ is the design axial compressive stress due to hydrostatic pressure.

q,Sd
(i.e., the axial load arising from the hydrostatic pressure being applied as
nodal loads).
σ is the out of plane bending stress

my,Sd
σ is the in plane bending stress
mz,Sd
f = f /γ [√(1 + 0.09⋅B2 - B2η) - 0.3B]
th,RD y m
f = f /γ [√(1 + 0.09⋅B2 - B2η) - 0.3B]
mh,RD m m

B=σ /f
psd h,Rd
η = 5 - 4⋅f /f
h y
b. For the net axial compression condition (σ <σ )
a,Sd q,Sd
Where:
f = f /γ
cl,Rd cl m
f is the characteristic local buckling strength (as determined by Clause
cl
6.3.3)
Additionally, when:
σ > 0.5⋅f /γ
c,Sd he m
and
f > 0.5⋅f
cle he
the following condition shall be satisfied in addition to the above check(s):
Where:
σ is the maximum compressive stress at that section.

c,Sd
B. When HYD has not been specified:
Where:
σ is the axial stress in the member

ac,Sd
Combined Axial Compression, Bending, and Hydrostatic Pressure
Checks per Clause 6.3.9.2:
A. Method used when HYD has been specified:

and
Where:
σ is the design axial stress that excludes the stress from hydrostatic pressure
a,Sd
Additionally, when:
σ > 0.5⋅f /γ
c,Sd he m
and
f > 0.5⋅f
cle he
B. Method used when HYD has not been specified:

a. For the net axial tension condition (σ ≥σ )

ac,Sd q,Sd
and
(Refer to the previous section for an explanation of these terms).
b. For the net axial compression condition (σ <σ )

ac,Sd q,Sd
(Refer to the previous section for an explanation of these terms).
Additionally, when:
σ > 0.5⋅f /γ
c,Sd he m
and
f /γ > 0.5⋅f /γ
cle m he m
Where:
σ is the maximum compressive stress at that section.

c,Sd

Norwegian Codes - Steel Design per NORSOK N-004

Table 14B.1-Design Parameters for NORSOK N-004 design code
Name Value
CODE none Must be specified as NORSOK.
Note: Do not use the shortened NOR, as this

initiates an NS3472 design.
FYLD 235 [MPa] Yield strength of steel, f (St37)

y
Note: Note, if the SGR value is specified, then

the associated value of f for that steel grade will
y
be used for a member in lieu of the FYLD value.
KY 1.0 Effective length factor, k, in local Y-axis, usually

minor axis.
KZ 1.0 Effective length factor, k, in local Z-axis, usually

major axis.
LX Effective length for lateral torsional buckling.
LY Member Length in local Y axis for slenderness value KL/r

Length
LZ Member Length in local Z axis for slenderness value KL/r

Length
CMY 0.85 Reduction factor C corresponding to the Y axis.

m
CMZ 0.85 Reduction factor C corresponding to the Z axis.

m
LSR Length of Tubular between Stiffening Rings. This

value is required to calculate Design Hoop Stress
due to Hydrostatic Pressure to check Hoop
Buckling as per clause 6.3.6.1.


Name Value
HYD 0.0 The Y-coordinate, current units, of the maximum

water level with respect to the origin.
Note: If SET Z UP command has been specified,

then yi will be the Z co-ordinate of the max
water level.
For HYD > 0, the value of max. hydrostatic pressure

calculated is reported for each member in a TRACK
2.0 output.
PSD 0.0 Water pressure at each section in absence of HYD.
SGR 0.0 Steel Grade per EC3 (EN 1993-1-1:2005):
0.0 = S 235 grade steel
DMAX 100.0 [cm] Maximum allowable depth of steel section.
DMIN 0.0 [cm] Minimum allowable depth of steel section.
DFF None "Deflection length"/maximum allowable local

(Mandatory deflection.
for
deflection
check)
MAIN 0.0 Option to design for slenderness.
0.0 = Check for slenderness
1.0 = Do not check for slenderness
Any value greater than 1.0 is used as

the limit for slenderness in
compression.
TMAIN 180.0 Slenderness limit in tension. Slenderness limit is

checked based the MAIN parameter.
FU 420 [MPa] Ultimate Tensile Strength of Steel


Name Value
TRACK 0.0 Output detail:
0.0 = Only a summary of the design

checks performed is printed.
2.0 = All the details of the member

checks and the various clause checks
performed are printed.

stresses.
BEAM 0.0 Beam segment locations for design:
0.0 = design only for end moments

and those at locations specified by
SECTION command.
1.0 = Perform design for moments

at twelfth points along the beam.
DJ1 Start Joint Joint No. denoting start point for calculation of
of member “deflection length”
DJ2 End Joint Joint No. denoting end point for calculation of
of member “deflection length”
Table 14B.2-Design Parameters for NORSOK N-004 design code
Name Value
GM0 1.15 Resistance of Class 1, 2, or 3 cross sections (γ )

M0
GM1 1.15 Resistance of Class 4 cross sections or to buckling of

a member (γ )
M1
GM2 1.3 Resistance of net section at bolt holes (γ )

M2
GMW 1.3 Resistance of fillet and partial penetration welds

(γ )
MW
GMB 1.3 Resistance of bolted connections (γ )

MB
CMN 1.0 Effective length factor (k) for Euler buckling load
calculations.


Name Value
CMM Used to classify the structural element type.
C1 (see note Coefficient used for axial stress term in calculating

a) the joint resistance.
C2 (see note Coefficient used for the bending stress term in

a) calculating the joint resistance.
14B.2.1 Notes
a. C1 and C2 Parameters
The default values of these coefficients are taken from Table 6-4 of N-004 and depend on the
joint and load type:
Table 14B.3-Default values for C1 and C2 parameters
Joint Type C1 C2
T or Y joints under brace axial load 25 11
X joints under brace axial load 20 22
K joints under balanced axial load 20 22
All joints under brace moment loading 25 30
Note: These values can be changed by setting the K, X, and Y values in the external
geometry file.
14B.2.2 Example
Note: This is a partial example containing only the information pertaining to the NORSOK N-
004 steel design code; used at the end of the input file.
* Check tubular members according NORSOK N-004

CODE NORSOK
HYD 3.0 MEMB 1 TO 3
PSD 10 MEMB 7 10
SGR 2 MEMB 1 TO 3 7 10
TRACK 2 MEMB 1 TO 3 7 10
CHECK CODE MEMB 1 TO 3 7 10

14B.3 Code Checking
14B.3 Code Checking

members are adequate as per N-004. Code checking is done using the forces and moments at
specific sections of the members. If no sections are specified, the program uses the start and end
forces for code checking.
passed or failed the checks, the critical condition of NORSOK code, the value of the ratio of the
critical condition (overstressed for value more than 1.0 or any other specified RATIO value), the
governing load case, and the location (distance from the start of the number of forces in the
member) where the critical condition occurs.

performed, the program can select the most economical section (i.e., the lightest section which
fulfills the code requirements for the specified member). The section selected will be of the same
constrained by the parameters DMAX and DMIN which limit the maximum and minimum depth of
the members.
Selection of members whose properties are originally input from a user created table will be limited
to sections in the user table.
14B.5 Tubular Joint Checking

The design of tubular joints for this implementation shall be based on section 6.4 of N-004 and
will be applicable to joints formed from a connection of two or more members.
Figure 14B.1 - Typical Tubular Joint (Fig 6-1 in N004)

14B.5 Tubular Joint Checking
Prior to completing a joint design, the joint should be classified into one of the three categories
given by the code. Joint classification is the process whereby a BRACE member connecting into a
CHORD member is classified into one of these categories based on the axial force components in
the brace. The classification normally considers all the members at a joint that lie in a plane. N-004
defines three joint classification categories: K, X, or Y (or a combination of these).
Joint Description
Classification
K The axial force in the brace should be

balanced by forces in the other braces in
the same plane and on the same side of
the joint. The code allows a 10%
tolerance in the balancing force.
X The axial force in the brace is reacted as

a beam shear in the chord.
Y The axial force in the brace is carried

through the chord to braces in the
opposite side.
Note: Typical examples of these joint types are given in Figure 6-3 of the N-004 code. It is worth
noting that the joint class for each brace will be different for each load case.
Note: STAAD.Pro does not perform an automatic classification of the joints. This is left up to the
engineer. All joints will initially be classified as Y in the generation of the external geometry
file. Joints should be re-classified as necessary before performing the final joint capacity checks.
The checks for joint capacity are given in Cl. 6.4.3.2 to 6.4.3.6 and STAAD.Pro performs the checks
as per these clauses. However, the program does not deal with conical joint transitions and joints
with joint cans. The code also specifies checks and limits for the gaps and eccentricity of joints.
This implementation will not perform such geometry checks.
The details of the checks done and the methodology will be discussed in the following sections.
14B.5.1 Identification and Classification of CHORD and BRACE

Members
This is a two step process where the program automatically identifies the CHORD and BRACE
members at a joint and perform a default joint check. The input variables used for the initial joint
checks will be generated in an external text file. You can then use this text file to edit or modify
the input variables and perform a final check as necessary.
The following syntax is used to initiate the joint checking in the engine.
LOAD LIST load_list

14B.6 Tubular Joint Resistance
PARAMETER 1
CHECK JOINT { node_list | ALL }
Where:
load_list = a list of load case numbers to be check against
node_list = the NODE numbers to be checked. Specifying the ALL keyword option
will cause the program to perform the joint check at all the nodes.
For each node specified in the CHECK JOINT command, the program automatically separates out all
the members at the node into one CHORD member and one or more BRACE members. The
section with the biggest diameter is assumed to be the CHORD and all the other members are
assumed as BRACE members. If two or more possible CHORD members have the same diameter,
the member with the maximum thickness is considered as the CHORD. The angle between the
two members should be within the range of 30° and 90° (inclusive).
Once all the CHORD and BRACE members are identified, the program considers every CHORD to
BRACE connection as a separate JOINT. The program the automatically creates the joints and
initially considers all the joints as joint class Y. The program then performs all the necessary joint
checks as detailed in the following sections and produces the design output. The program will also
produce an output file called filename_ JOINTS.txt, where "filename" will be the name of the
.STD file. This format of this text file is explained in Section 14B.8.
You can then edit this text file to set up the necessary design parameters. Once the program finds
of the _JOINTS.txt file, it will read in the necessary parameters from this file and perform the
subsequent design checks.
Note: This file will be produced only once (i.e., when this file does not exist). If this file exists, it
is assumed that you have already done a joint design check and hence the program reads the
values from this file and uses these for joint checks.
14B.6.1 Basic Joint Resistances

The characteristic joint resistance between a chord and a brace is given by:
fyT 2
NRd = Q uQ f
γ M sin θ
f y T 2d
MRd = Q uQ f
γ Msin θ
Where:
N is the joint design axial resistance

Rd
M is the joint design bending moment resistance.
Rd

f is the yield strength

y
γ = Default material resistance =1.15
m
θ is the angle between the chord and the brace (max θ = 90 degrees)
Q = Strength factor which varies with the joint type and the action type in the
u
brace. Refer to Table 6-3 and Clause 6.4.3.3 of N-004 for these equations.
Q = 1.0 – λA2
f
 σ a ,Sd 
2  σ my
2
,Sd + σ mz,Sd 
2
A 2 = C1  + C2 
 fy   1.62f y2 
 
σ is the design axial stress in the chord

p,Sd
σ is the design in-plane bending stress in the chord
my,Sd
σ is the design out-of-plane bending stress in the chord
mz,Sd
C1 is the coefficient used for the axial stress term in calculating the joint resistance.
C2 is the coefficient used for the bending stress term in calculating the joint
resistance. The default values of C1 and C2 are as given in Table 6-4 of N-004. The
actual values used are dependent on the values of K, X, and Y specified for the joint
in the external geometry file.
See also Figures 6-3 to 6-6 of N-004 for definition of the various terms for various
joint classes.
14B.6.2 Strength Check for Joints

Each brace to chord joint to be checked will have to satisfy the following condition:
2
+ 
N Sd M z,Sd  M y ,Sd
 + ≤1
N Rd  z,Rd 
M M y ,Rd
Where:
N is the design axial force in the brace,

Sd
N is the joint design axial resistance
Rd
M is the in plane bending moment in the brace
z,Sd
M is the out of plane bending moment in the brace
y,Sd
M is the in plane bending moment resistance
z,Rd
M is the out of plane bending moment resistance
y,Rd

14B.7 External Geometry File
14B.7 External Geometry File

The data contained in the filename_JOINTS.NGo file should meet the following format. The
overall process of performing punching shear checks consists of two steps which are explained in
Section 14B.7.
14B.7.1 General Format

LOAD LIST load_list
JOINT NODE K X Y CHORD CLEN D T BRACE BLEN d t GAP
j# n# K% X% Y% C# CLEN D T B# BLEN d t gap
Where:
j# = the joint number
n# = the node number
K%, X%, and Y% = The fractional contributions of K-type, X type and Y-type,
respectively. Initially the joints will be classed as Y (i.e., K=0, X=0 and Y=1).
C# = the member numbers of the CHORD
CLEN = the length of chord member
D, T = Diameter and thickness of CHORD
B# = the member number of the brace
BLEN = the length of chord member
d, t = Diameter and thickness of BRACE
gap = Distance required to calculate gap factor for K bracing. Initially, the value of
GAP is assumed as 0.
14B.7.2 Example
LOAD LIST 1 2 4
JOINT NODE K X Y CHORD CLEN D T BRACE BLEN d t GAP
1 3 0 0 1 2 5.0 0.168 0.10 1 4.0 0.140 0.010 0
2 3 0 0 1 2 5.0 0.168 0.10 16 6.043 0.075 0.005 0
14B.8 Tabulated Results

Member

the member number for which the design is performed.

TABLE
the steel section name which has been checked against the N-004 code or has been
selected.
RESULTS
prints whether the member has PASSed or FAILed. If the RESULT is FAIL, there will be
CRITICAL COND
the section of the N-004 code which governs the design.
RATIO
LOADING
the load case number which governed the design.
FX, MY, and MZ
provide the axial force, moment in local Y-axis, and the moment in local Z-axis
respectively. Although STAAD does consider all the member forces and moments
(except torsion) to perform design, only FX, MY and MZ are printed since they are the
ones which are of interest, in most cases.
LOCATION
forces govern.
print the allowable bending stressed in compression (FCY & FCZ) and tension (FTY & FTZ),
allowable axial stress in compression (FA), and allowable shear stress (FV).
14B.8.1 Sample TRACK 2.0 Output

STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - NORSOK-N004 (V1.0)
************************************************

FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST PIP13910.0 (BRITISH SECTIONS)
PASS Eq. 6.44 0.170 1
0.01 C 1.01 6.39 0.00
=======================================================================
MATERIAL DATA
Grade of steel = S 355
Modulus of elasticity = 204999.98 N/mm2
Design Strength (py) =355.00 N/mm2


Gross Area of cross section = 40.70
z-axis y-axis
Radius of gyration : 4.602 4.602
DESIGN PARAMETER (units - m) N004/2004

Height of water lavel : 3.000
CMZ : 0.85 CMY : 0.85
KZ : 1.00 KY : 1.00
SECTION CLASSIFICATION : Class 1
CAPACITIES (units - kN,m)

Tension Capacity : 1256.4
Compression Capacity : 790.1
Bending Capacity : 52.0
Shear Capacity : 362.7
Shear Capacity due to torsional moment: 44.0
HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE CALCULATION (units - N,mm) - Cl.6.3.6

Max design hydrostatic pressure, (psd) : 0.000
Max design hoop stress, (sigma_psd)) : 0.000
CRITICAL LOAD FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (units - kN,m):

CLAUSE RATIO LOAD FX VY VZ MZ MY
Cl:6.3.2 0.000 1 0.0 - - - -
Cl:6.3.3 0.000 1 0.0 - - - -
Cl:6.3.4 0.102 1 - - - -5.3 0.0
Cl:6.3.5 0.031 1 - -11.2 0.5 - -
Cl:6.3.8.(1 & 2) 0.124 1 0.0 - - 6.4 1.0
Cl:6.3.8.(3 & 4) 0.102 1 - -0.5 0.5 -5.3 0.0
Cl:6.3.9 0.170 1 0.0 - - 6.4 1.0
=======================================================================

14C. Norwegian Codes - Concrete Design per NS 3473

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the Norwegian code NS 3473 2001
Concrete Structures - Design and detailing rules.
Design of members per NS 3473 requires the STAAD N. Eurozone Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.

Table 14C.1-Design Parameters for NS 3473 design code
Name Value
CODE none Must be specified as NS3473
ACTAGE 70 years Enter the actual age, in years.
BRACE 0 Column Brace Parameter
0. Beam/ Column braced in both directions.

1. One-way plate/ Column unbraced about the
local z axis only.
2. Column unbraced about the local y axis only.
3. Column unbraced in both directions.
CLEAR 25 mm Clear cover to outermost reinforcing bar.
DRYCIR 100% Drying exposure, in percent.
EFACE 0 Distance from the end node of the beam to face of

support for shear design.
ELY 1 Member length factor about the local y direction.
ELZ 1 Member length factor about the local z direction


Name Value
FC 35 Compressive strength of concrete.

N/mm 2
FYMAIN 500 Yield strength of main reinforcing steel.

N/mm 2
MAX 32 Maximum size permitted for main reinforcement bar.

MAIN
MINMAIN 10 Minimum size permitted for main reinforcement bar.
MOY moy factor
MOZ moz factor
NMAG nmag factor
RELHUM 70% Relative humidity, in percent.

SFACE 0 Distance from the start node of the beam to face of

support for shear design.


Name Value
10. Beam — Ultimate limit state and Service limit

state design & Slab — Two-way plate design
11. Beam — Ultimate limit state and Service limit
state design with tension stiffening.

15
Russian Codes

15 Russian Codes

15A.1 General
15A. Russian Codes - Concrete Design Per SNiP 2.03.01-84*

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the Russian code СНиП 2.03.01-84*:
СТРОИТЕЛЬНЫЕ НОРМЫ И ПРАВИЛА БЕТОННЫЕ И ЖЕЛЕЗОБЕТОННЫЕ КОНСТРУКЦИИ
(SNiP 2.03.01-84* Building Regulations: Concrete and Reinforced Concrete Construction).
Design of members per SNiP 2.03.01-84* requires the STAAD E. Eurozone Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.
15A.1 General
Russian Code SNiP 2.03.01–84* plain concrete and concrete structures is based on the method of
limit states. Code SNiP 2.03.01–84* defines two groups of limit states.
Analysis according to the first group of limit states is performed to avoid the following phenomena:
l brittle, plastic or other type of failure,
l loss by structure of stable form or position,
l fatigue failure,
l failure due to the action of load actions and unfavorable environmental effects.
Analysis according to the second group of limit states is performed to avoid the following
phenomena:
l excessive and long-term opening of cracks if they are allowed according to service
conditions,
l excessive displacements.
Analysis of structures for the first group of limit states is performed with the use of the maximum
(design) loads and actions. Analysis of structures for the second group of limit states is made in
accordance with the operational (normative) loads and actions. Ratio between design and
normative loads is called reliability coefficient for loads which is determined according to SNiP
2.01.07.-85 “Loads and actions”.
Reliability coefficient γn for destination according to SNiP 2.01.07.-85 shall be considered in

determination of loads and their combinations.
Program STAAD.Pro makes it possible to calculate reinforcement for concrete members according
to codes of many countries round the World and Russian Code SNiP 2.03.01-84* inclusive.
Algorithms for calculation of reinforcement of concrete linear (beams, columns) and 2D (two
dimensional) (slabs, walls, shells) members are incorporated in program STAAD.Pro. Not only Code
SNiP 2.03.01-84* but also the “Guide for design of plain concrete and reinforced concrete structures
from normal weight and lightweight concrete (to SNiP 2.03.01-84)” have been used in creation of
these algorithms.

15A.2 Design Parameters and Input Data
It is possible using program STAAD.Pro to calculate reinforcement for beams of rectangular or T

section and for columns of rectangular or circular section (Fig.1).
Figure 15A.1 - Notation of dimensions for rectangular, circular and T sections
Flange of T-shape beams may be situated at the top zone of the section if the angle BETA=0°, or at
the bottom zone of the section, if BETA=180°.

Entry of data of cross-sections of beams and columns is made by the use of MEMBER
PROPERTIES command, and thicknesses of 2D members are entered by ELEMENT PROPERTY
command.
Example:
UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTIES
* Columns of rectangular cross-section
1 TO 16 PRI YD 350. ZD 350.
* Columns of circular cross-section
17 TO 22 PRI YD 350.
* Beams of T cross-section
23 TO 40 PRI YD 450. ZD 550. YB 230. ZB 200.
UNIT METER
ELEMENT PROPERTY
41 TO 100 THICKNESS 0.14
101 TO 252 THICKNESS 0.16
* Flange of T beams is located at the bottom zone of cross-section
BETA 180. MEMB 23 TO 40
Commands for calculation of reinforcement are located in the input data file after the
command of analysis and as a rule, after output commands to print results of calculation.
Example:
* Command of analysis
PERFORM ANALYSIS
.
.* Output command to print results of calculation (according to user’s judgment)
.
* Command of loading and their combinations considered in design
LOAD LIST 1 5 TO 9
* Command to start reinforcement calculation procedure
CODE RUSSIAN
.* List of parameters being used in reinforcement calculation
.
.
BCL 20. MEMB 17 TO 22
CL1 0.04 MEMB 1 TO 40

DD2 10. MEMB 23 TO 40

CRA 0.036 MEMB 41 TO 252
.
.
.
* Command of beam reinforcement calculation
DESIGN BEAM 23 TO 40
* Command of column reinforcement calculation
* Command of calculation 2D elements (slabs, walls, shells)
* Command of interruption reinforcement calculation
END CONCRETE DESIGN
In tables 1, 2 and 3 information about parameters used for calculation of reinforcement for beams,
columns and 2D (two dimensional) members is presented. Values of parameters do not depend on
UNIT command. In the file of input data only such parameters have to be taken, the values of
which differ from determined in the program.
Table 15A.1-Names of parameters for Concrete design according to Russian Code

-СНиП 2.03.01-84* for beams.
No. Parameter Default Description
name Value
1 NLT 1 Number of long-term loading case


name Value
2 RCL 3 Class of longitudinal reinforcement:
l RCL = 1, if class of reinforcement is A-I;
l RCL = 2, if class of reinforcement is A-II;
l RCL = 3, if class of reinforcement is A-III;
l RCL = 33, if class of reinforcement is A-

IIIb;
l RCL = 4, if class of reinforcement is A-IV;
l RCL = 5, if class of reinforcement is A-V;
l RCL = 6, if class of reinforcement is A-VI;
l RCL = 7, if class of reinforcement is A-

VII;
l RCL = 77, if class of reinforcement is K-7;
l RCL = 8, if class of reinforcement is B-II;
l RCL = 9, if class of reinforcement is Bp-

II;
l RCL = 10, if class of reinforcement is Bp-I;
l RCL = 19, if class of reinforcement is K-19
2 RCL 3 Class of longitudinal reinforcement: Russian

Grade:
l 1 = A240;
l 2 = A300;
l 3 = A400;
l 4 = A500;
l 5 = B500;
l 6 = A500SP;
European Grade:
l 11 = S240;
l 12 = S400;
l 13 = S500;


name Value
3 USM 1. Total product of service conditions coefficients

for longitudinal reinforcement (g )
s
4 UB2 0.9 Specific service conditions coefficient for

concrete (g )
b2
5 DD1 16. Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars in

beam tension zone
6 DD2 16. Diameter of shear reinforcement bars for beam;
7 BCL 15. Compression class of concrete


name Value
7 BCL 15. Compression Class of concrete.
l 10 = B10;
l 15 = B15
l 20 = B20;
l 25 = B25;
l 30 = B30;
l 35 = B35;
l 40 = B40;
l 45 = B45;
l 50 = B50;
l 55 = B55;
l 60 = B60;
l 8.10 = C8/10
l 12.15 = C12/15;
l 16.20 = C16/20
l 25.30 = C25/30
l 30.37 = C30/37
l 35.45 = C35/45
l 40.50 = C50/50
l 45.55 = C45/55
l 50.60 = C50/60
l 60.75 = C60/75
l 70.85 = C70/85
l 80.95 = C80/95
l 90.105 = C90/105
8 UBM 1. Product of service conditions coefficients for

concrete, except UB2 (g )
b
9 TEM 0. Parameter of concrete hardening conditions:
l TEM=0, for natural hardening

conditions;
l TEM=1, for steam hardening conditions


name Value
10 CL1 0.05 Distance from top/bottom fiber of beam cross

section to the center of longitudinal
reinforcement bar;
11 CL2 0.05 Distance from left/right side of beam cross

section to the center of longitudinal
reinforcement bar
12 WST 0.4 Ultimate width of short-term crack
13 WLT 0.3 Ultimate width of long-term crack
14 SSE 0 Limit state parameter for beam design
l SSE=0, if calculation of reinforcement

amount must be carried out according
to the requirements of load carrying
capacity (the first limit state);
l SSE=1, if calculation of reinforcement

amount must be carried out according
to the cracking requirements (the second
limit state)


name Value
15 RSH 1 Class of shear reinforcement:
l RSH = 1, if class of reinforcement is A-I;
l RSH = 2, if class of reinforcement is A-II;
l RSH = 3, if class of reinforcement is A-

III;

IIIb;

IV;
l RSH = 5, if class of reinforcement is A-V;

VI;

VII;
l RSH = 77, if class of reinforcement is K-7;
l RSH = 8, if class of reinforcement is B-II;
l RSH = 9, if class of reinforcement is Bp-

II;
l RSH = 10, if class of reinforcement is Bp-

I;
l RSH = 19, if class of reinforcement is K-19


name Value
15 RSH 1 Class of shear reinforcement:
Russian Grade:
l 1 = A240;
l 2 = A300;
l 3 = A400;
l 4 = A500;
l 5 = B500;
l 6 = A500SP;
European grade:
l 11 = S240;
l 12 = S400;
l 13 = S500;
16 FWT ZD Design width of beam top flange. Use for beam

design only with default value provided as ZD
in member properties.
17 FWB ZB Design width of beam bottom flange. Use for

beam design only with default value provided
as ZB in member properties.
18 DEP YD Design depth of beam section. Use for beam

design only with default value provided as YD
in member properties.
19 SFA 0. Face of support location at the start of the

beam. Use for beam design only.
20 EFA 0. Face of support location at the end of the beam.

Use for beam design only.
21 NSE 13 Number of equally-spaced sections for beam

design. Use for beam design only. Upper limit is
equal to 20.

СНиП 2.03.01-84* for columns
Name Value


Name Value
Russian Grade:
l 1 = A240;
l 2 = A300;
l 3 = A400;
l 4 = A500;
l 5 = B500;
l 6 = A500SP;
European Grade:
l 11 = S240;
l 12 = S400;
l 13 = S500;

s

concrete (g )
b2
5 DD1 16. Minimum diameter of longitudinal

reinforcement bars for column
6 DD2 16. Maximum diameter of longitudinal

reinforcement bars for column


Name Value
7 BCL 15. Compression class of concrete:
l 10 = B10;
l 15 = B15
l 20 = B20;
l 25 = B25;
l 30 = B30;
l 35 = B35;
l 40 = B40;
l 45 = B45;
l 50 = B50;
l 55 = B55;
l 60 = B60;
l 8.10 = C8/10
l 12.15 = C12/15;
l 16.20 = C16/20
l 25.30 = C25/30
l 30.37 = C30/37
l 35.45 = C35/45
l 40.50 = C50/50
l 45.55 = C45/55
l 50.60 = C50/60
l 60.75 = C60/75
l 70.85 = C70/85
l 80.95 = C80/95
l 90.105 = C90/105

b

conditions;


Name Value
10 CL1 0.05 Distance from edge of column cross section to

the center of longitudinal reinforcement bar
11 ELY 1. Column's length coefficient to evaluate

slenderness effect in local Y axis
12 ELZ 1. Column's length coefficient to evaluate

slenderness effect in local Z axis
13 RSH 1. Class of shear reinforcement:
Russian Grade:
l 1 = A240;
l 2 = A300;
l 3 = A400;
l 4 = A500;
l 5 = B500;
l 6 = A500SP;
European grade:
l 11 = S240;
l 12 = S400;
l 13 = S500;

(SNiP 2.03.01-84*) for slabs and/or walls
Name Value


Name Value
Russian Grade:
l 1 = A240;
l 2 = A300;
l 3 = A400;
l 4 = A500;
l 5 = B500;
l 6 = A500SP;
European Grade:
l 11 = S240;
l 12 = S400;
l 13 = S500;

s

concrete (g )
b2
5 SDX 16. Diameter of reinforcing bars located in the first

local (X) direction of slab/wall
6 SDY 16. Diameter of reinforcing bars located in the

second local (Y) direction of slab/wall


Name Value
7 BCL 15. Compression class of concrete:
l 10 = B10;
l 15 = B15
l 20 = B20;
l 25 = B25;
l 30 = B30;
l 35 = B35;
l 40 = B40;
l 45 = B45;
l 50 = B50;
l 55 = B55;
l 60 = B60;
l 8.10 = C8/10
l 12.15 = C12/15;
l 16.20 = C16/20
l 25.30 = C25/30
l 30.37 = C30/37
l 35.45 = C35/45
l 40.50 = C50/50
l 45.55 = C45/55
l 50.60 = C50/60
l 60.75 = C60/75
l 70.85 = C70/85
l 80.95 = C80/95
l 90.105 = C90/105

b

conditions;


Name Value
10 CL 0.05 Distance from top/bottom face of slab/wall

element to the center of longitudinal
reinforcing bars located in first local (X)
direction. (Main thickness of top/bottom
concrete cover for slab/wall element)
11 CRA 0.05 Distance from top/bottom face of slab/wall

element to the center of transverse reinforcing
bars located in second local (Y) direction
(Secondary thickness of top/bottom concrete
cover for slab/wall)
12 WST 0.4 Ultimate width of short-term crack
13 WLT 0.3 Ultimate width of long-term crack
14 STA 0 Parameter of limit state for slab/wall design:
l STA=0, if calculation of nonsymmetrical

reinforcement must be carried out
according to the requirements of load
carrying capacity (the first limit state);
l STA=1, if calculation of symmetrical

reinforcement must be carried out
according to the requirements of load
carrying capacity (the first limit state);
l STA=2, if calculation of nonsymmetrical

reinforcement must be carried according
limit state);
l STA=3, if calculation of symmetrical

reinforcement must be carried according
limit state)
15 SELX 0. Design length of wall member to evaluate

slenderness effect in local X axis
16 SELY 0. Design length of wall member to evaluate

slenderness effect in local Y axis

15A.3 Beams

Name Value
17 MMA 0 Design parameter of slab/wall reinforcement:
l MMA=0, if reinforcement calculation

must be applied by stresses in local axis;
l MMA=1, if reinforcement calculation

must be applied by principal stresses
18 MMB 1 Design parameter of slab/wall reinforcement:
l MMB=0, if the effect of additional

eccentricity is not taken into account;
l MMB=1, if the effect of additional

eccentricity is taken into account
19 RSH 1. Class of shear reinforcement:
Russian Grade:
l 1 = A240;
l 2 = A300;
l 3 = A400;
l 4 = A500;
l 5 = B500;
l 6 = A500SP;
European grade:
l 11 = S240;
l 12 = S400;
l 13 = S500;
15A.3 Beams
Reinforcement for beams of rectangular and T cross-section can be calculated. In calculation of
longitudinal reinforcement bending moment about local axis and torsional moments are
considered, but influence of longitudinal forces and bending moments in relation to local axis
is ignored. In calculation of transverse reinforcement shear forces parallel to local axis and
torsional moments are taken into account.
Reinforcement for beams can be calculated either from conditions of strength or from conditions of
open crack width limitation (see parameter SSE).
Parameters SFA and ЕFA are considered only in calculation of transverse reinforcement.

15A.3 Beams
In general case calculation of reinforcement for beams is carried out two times – according to
strength conditions and according to conditions of open crack width limitation. In reinforcement
calculations from conditions of strength design values of load have to be taken and in calculations
from conditions of crack width limitation – characteristic (normative) load values are used. Both
calculations can be carried out in one session with the use multiple analysis possibility of the
program STAAD.Pro.
In most cases calculation of reinforcement is carried out with account only of a part of loadings. In
such cases command LOAD LIST is used, in which numbers of loads considered in calculation are
indicated. Number of permanent and long-term loads equal to parameter NLT must be included
into the list of considered loads.
It has to be noted, that values of parameters DD1 and DD2 have influence not only on the width of
opened crack but also in some cases, on design and normative reinforcement resistances.
Parameter BCL can be equal to any value of concrete compression strength class given in SNiP
2.03.01−84* and to any intermediate value as well.
It should be remembered, that accuracy of results of calculation of transverse reinforcement

increases with the value of parameter NSE.
Parameters SFA and ЕFA are considered only in calculations of transverse reinforcement. Beam 1 is
shown in Figure 2 with rigid intervals the lengths of which are: at the start of the beam 0.3m and
at the end – 0.2m. In modeling of the beam the following command can be used.
MEMBER OFFSET
1 START 0.3 0 0
1 END -0.2 0 0
Figure 12A.2 - Diagram of a beam with rigid intervals
When command MEMBER OFFSET is used forces corresponding to the beam the length of which
is equal to the distance between points a and b are calculated and then used in calculation of
reinforcement. In such case it is necessary to take into account default values of parameters SFA
and ЕFA equal to zero.
When command MEMBER OFFSET is not used forces corresponding to the beam the length of
which is equal to the distance between points 10 and 11 are calculated and then used in calculation
of reinforcement. In this case it is necessary to consider values of parameters SFA=0.3 and ЕFA=0,2
in reinforcement calculation.

15A.3 Beams
In both cases calculated quantity of transverse reinforcement will be the same. Calculated quantity
of longitudinal reinforcement in the second case will be greater.
For beam the following output is generated:

l beam number;
l method of calculation (according to conditions of strength or limitations of opened crack
width);
l length and cross-sectional dimensions;
l distance from resultant of forces acting in bottom/top reinforcement to bottom/top edge
of the section;
l distance from the side edge of cross-section of the beam web to the centroid of
longitudinal bars located at this edge;
l concrete class;
l class of longitudinal and transverse reinforcement;
l assumed in calculations bar diameters of longitudinal and transverse reinforcement;
l calculation results of longitudinal and transverse reinforcement (in two tables).
In nine columns of the first table the following results are presented:
Table 15A.4-Beam design output 1
Result Description
Section distance of the section from the “start” of the

beam, мм
As- cross-sectional area of longitudinal
reinforcement in the bottom zone of cross-
section of the beam, if angle BETA=0°, or in
the top zone, if BETA=180° , sq.cm
As+ cross-sectional area of longitudinal
reinforcement in the top zone of cross-section
of the beam , if angle BETA=0°, or in the top
zone, if BETA=180° , sq.cm
Moments (- values of bending moments, determining
/+) cross-sectional areas of longitudinal
reinforcement As- and As+ , kNm
Load. N. (- numbers of loading versions, determining
/+) cross-sectional areas of longitudinal
reinforcement
Acrc1 short-term opened crack width*, mm
Acrc2 long-term opened crack width*, mm

15A.3 Beams
* Opened crack width is presented only in the case when calculation is performed according to
conditions limiting opened crack width.
In ten columns of second table the following results are presented:

Table 15A.5-Beam design output 2
Result Description

beam, mm
Qsw intensity of transverse reinforcement, kN/m
Asw cross-sectional area of transverse bars, sq.cm,
if their step is 10, 15, 20, 25 or 30 cm
Q value of shear force parallel to the local axis,
kN
T value of torsional moment, kNm
Load N. number of loading version, determining
intensity of transverse reinforcement
An example of output of calculation results is presented below.
BEAM NO. 23 DESIGN RESULTS
(by limitation of crack width)
Length - 6000 mm.
Section: BF1= 550 mm, B= 200 mm, HF1=220 mm, H=450 mm.
Distance from top/bottom surface of beam to center of longitudinal
reinforcement - 40 mm.
Distance from side surface of beam to center of longitudinal
reinforcement - 30 mm.
Concrete class - В25.0 (Rb=13.05 MPa; Rbt=0.94 MPa; Gb2=0.9).
Class of longitudinal reinforcement - А-III (Rs=365.0 MPa; Rsc=365.0 MPa).
Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars D=16 mm.
Class of shear reinforcement - А-I (Rsw=175.0 MPa).
Diameter of shear reinforcement bars Dw=10 mm.
L O N G I T U D I N A L R E I N F O R C E M E N T
Section As-As+ Moments(-/+) Load.N.(-/+) Acrc1 Acrc2
mm sq.cm kNm mm mm

15A.3 Beams
---------------------------------------------------------------------
0. 10.92 0.41 -152. / 2. 6 / 4 0.237 0.121

500. 4.74 0.41 -60. / 0. 5 / 0 0.294 0.157
1000. 1.13 1.13 -5. / 17. 4 / 6 0.000 0.000
1500. 1.13 6.41 -8. / 75. 4 / 6 0.295 0.147
2000. 1.13 9.24 -11. / 115. 4 / 6 0.298 0.149
2500. 1.13 11.53 -14. / 139. 4 / 6 0.271 0.134
3000. 1.19 12.16 -18. / 144. 4 / 6 0.263 0.127
3500. 1.41 10.86 -21. / 132. 4 / 6 0.277 0.130
4000. 1.63 8.28 -24. / 103. 4 / 6 0.296 0.129
4500. 1.95 4.54 -27. / 56. 4 / 6 0.299 0.093
5000. 3.23 0.58 -39. / 9. 5 / 3 0.293 0.157
5500. 0.74 0.41 -124. / 0. 5 / 0 0.271 0.142
6000. 16.89 0.41 -226. / 0. 5 / 0 0.155 0.078
S H E A R R E I N F O R C E M E N T
Section Qsw Asw, cm^2, if Sw= Q T Load
mm kN/m 10cm 15cm 20cm 25cm 30cm kN kNm N.
0. 251.3 1.44 2.15 2.87 3.59 4.31 -203.9 0.0 6

500. 251.3 1.44 2.15 2.87 3.59 4.31 -168.9 0.0 6
1000. 174.5 1.00 1.50 1.99 2.49 2.99 -133.9 0.0 6
1500. 63.9 0.36 0.55 0.73 0.91 1.09 -98.9 0.0 6
2000. Minimum detailing requirements ! -63.9 0.0 6
2500. Minimum detailing requirements ! -28.9 0.0 6
3000. Minimum detailing requirements ! 12.7 0.0 5
4500. 95.0 0.55 0.82 1.09 1.37 1.64 117.7 0.0 5
5000. 242.5 1.39 2.08 2.77 3.46 4.16 152.7 0.0 5
5500. 302.5 1.73 2.59 3.46 4.32 5.19 187.7 0.0 5
6000. 302.5 1.73 2.59 3.46 4.32 5.19 216.1 0.0 5
Here Minimum detailing requirements! means that reinforcement is not required according to
calculation.

15A.4 Columns
15A.4 Columns
Reinforcement for columns of rectangular or circular cross-section can be calculated. Flexibility of
columns can be evaluated in two ways. In the case of usual analysis (command PERFORM
ANALYSIS) flexibility is assessed by parameters ELY and ELZ, values of which should conform with
recommendation of the Code SNiP 2.03.01-84*. If P-DELTA (analysis according to deformed
diagram) or NONLINEAR (nonlinear geometry) analysis is performed, values of parameters ELY and
ELZ should be close to zero, for example ELY = ELZ=0.01.
Longitudinal reinforcement for columns is calculated only from condition of strength.

Longitudinal forces and bending moments in relation to local axes and are taken into
account in longitudinal reinforcement calculations.
For rectangular columns the following output is generated:

l column number;
l column length and cross-sectional dimensions;
l distance of centroid of each longitudinal bar from the nearest edge of the cross-section;
l concrete class;
l longitudinal reinforcement class;
l range of longitudinal reinforcement bar diameters assumed in calculation;
l diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars obtained in calculation;
l total quantity of longitudinal bars;
l quantity of longitudinal bars at each cross-section edge, directed parallel to the local axis
;
l quantity of longitudinal bars at each cross-section edge, directed parallel to the local axis
.
In nine columns of the table under the heading LONGITUDINAL REINFORCEMENT the
following output is presented:
Table 15A.6-Column design output 1
Result

column, mm
Astot total cross-sectional area of longitudinal
reinforcement, sq.cm
Asy cross-sectional area of longitudinal
reinforcement bars at each edge of section,
directed parallel to the local axis , sq.cm

15A.4 Columns
Result
Asz cross-sectional area of longitudinal

reinforcement bars at each edge of section,
directed parallel to the local axis , sq.cm

Percent reinforcement percentage in the section
Nx, Mz, respective values of longitudinal force and
My bending moments in relation to the local axes
and , determining cross-sectional area
of longitudinal reinforcement
Load.N. number of loading version, determining cross-
sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement
An example of output of calculation results is presented below.
COLUMN NO. 97 DESIGN RESULTS
(rectangular section)
Length - 4000 mm.
Section: B= 350 mm, H=350 mm.
Distance from edge of column cross section to center of each longitudinal
reinforcement bar - 40 mm.
Concrete class - В25.0 (Rb=13.05 МPa; Gb2=0.9).
Class of longitudinal reinforcement - А-III (Rs=365.0 МPa; Rsc=365.0 МPa).
Diameter range of longitudinal reinforcement bars:
Dmin=16 mm . . . Dmax=32 mm
Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars from calculation d=20 mm.
Total number of reinforcement bars Ntot=6.
Number of longitudinal bars at each section edge parallel to the
local Y axis Nyy =2.
Number of longitudinal bars at each section edge parallel to the
local Z axis Nzz =3.
Section Astot Asy Asz Percent Nx Mz My Load
m sq.cm sq.cm sq.cm % kN kNm kNm N

0. 16.42 3.01 6.20 1.34 285.5 81.9 0.0 6
4000. 15.35 3.01 5.67 1.25 397.3 95.3 0.0 5

15A.4 Columns
Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars, total quantity of longitudinal bars as well as quantity
of longitudinal bars at each edge of the section obtained from calculation should be considered as
recommendation. In this case arrangement of reinforcement in the section depends on the
orientation of the local axes and is as follows:
Calculated values of reinforcement cross-sectional areas are presented in the table and they may
differ from recommended on the lower side.
When it is not possible according to detailing provisions to arrange in the column longitudinal
reinforcement determined from calculation additional message is derived.
For columns of circular section the following output is generated:

l column number;
l column length and diameter of cross-section;
l distance of centroid of each longitudinal bar to the edge of cross-section;
l longitudinal reinforcement class;
l assumed in calculation range of diameters of longitudinal reinforcement bars;
l diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars obtained from calculation;
l quantity of longitudinal bars.
In seven columns of the table under the heading LONGITUDINAL REINFORCEMENT the
following results are presented:
Section distance of the section from the “start” of the column, mm

Astot total cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement, sq.cm
Per percentage of longitudinal reinforcement
cent
Nx, respective values of longitudinal force and bending moments in relation to local
Mz, My axis and , determining cross-sectional area of longitudinal
reinforcement
Load. number of loading version, determining cross-sectional area of longitudinal
N. reinforcement
An example of output of calculation results for a column of circular section is presented below.
COLUMN NO. 80 DESIGN RESULTS

15A.5 Two DimensionalElement (slabs, walls, shells)
(circular section)
Length - 4000 mm.
Diameter: Dс= 350 mm.
Distance from edge of column cross section to center of each longitudinal
reinforcement bar - 50 mm.
Concrete class - В20.0 (Rb=10.35 МPa; Gb2=0.9).
Class of longitudinal reinforcement - А-III (Rs=365.0 МPa; Rsc=365.0 МPa).
Diameter range of longitudinal reinforcement bars:
Dmin=16 mm . . . Dmax=32 mm
Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars from calculation D=20 mm.
Total number of reinforcement bars Ntot =7.
Section Astot Percent Nx Mz My Load
m sq.cm % kN kNm kNm N

0. 17.96 1.87 195.1 59.8 0.0 5
4000. 21.86 2.27 195.1 80.2 0.0 5
Diameter of longitudinal reinforcement bars, total quantity of longitudinal bars as well as quantity
of longitudinal bars at each edge of the section should be considered as recommendation.
Arrangement of reinforcement in section in this case is shown below:
Calculated cross-sectional areas of reinforcement presented in the table may differ from
recommended on the lower side.
When according to detailing provisions it is not possible to arrange in the column longitudinal
reinforcement obtained from calculation additional message is derived.

In general case calculation of reinforcement for 2D members is carried out two times – according
to conditions of strength and conditions of limiting opened width of cracks. If reinforcement is
calculated according to conditions of strength, design values of loads have to be used, and for
conditions of limiting crack width – characteristic (normative) loads are employed. Both

calculations can be made in one session taking advantage of multiple analysis possibility of the
program STAAD.Pro.
Symmetric or nonsymmetrical reinforcement of 2D members is calculated according to conditions

of strength or according to conditions of limiting opened crack width (see for example STA).
In reinforcement calculation for 2D members it is necessary to pay attention to arrangement of

local axes of member and direction of reinforcement (see for example CL and CRA).
An example of output of calculation results is presented bellow.
SLAB/WALL DESIGN RESULTS
(by stresses in local axes for limitation of crack width)

Elemen Asx Mx Nx Load. Asy My Ny Loa
t N. d N.
sq.cm/ kNm/ kN/ sq.cm/ kNm/ kN/
m m m (X) m m m (Y)
60 TOP 0.00 - 4.9 0.00 1 0.00 - 4.5 0.00 1
BOT 3.53 - 9.9 0.00 3 3.46 - 8.9 0.00 3
61 TOP 0.00 - 5.3 0.00 1 0.00 - 4.7 0.00 1
BOT 3.87 - 10.7 0.00 3 3.65 - 9.4 0.00 3
62 TOP 0.00 - 5.6 0.00 1 0.00 - 4.8 0.00 1
BOT 4.10 - 11.2 0.00 3 3.77 - 9.6 0.00 3
Here:
Table 15A.7-Slab design output
Result Description
Element number of finite element, TOP - “top” zone of member, BOT -
“bottom” zone of member (“top” zone of member is determined
by positive direction of local axis -see Fig.2)
Asx intensity of reinforcing in the first direction (parallel to the local
axis ), sq.cm/m

Result Description
Mx
distributed bending moment in respect to the local axis ,
kNm/m
Nx
distributed longitudinal force directed parallel to the axis ,
kNm/m
Load N.(X) number of loading version, determining intensity of reinforcing
in the first direction
Asy intensity of reinforcing in the second direction (parallel to the
local axis ), sq.cm/m
My
distributed bending moment in respect to the local axis
kNm/m
Ny distributed longitudinal force directed parallel to the local axis
kN/m
Load N.(Y) number of loading version, determining intensity of reinforcing
in the second direction
Figure 2 - Local coordinate system of 2D member and notation of forces

15B.1 General
15B. Russian Codes - Steel Design Per SNiP 2.23-81*

(Edition 1999)
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Russian code СНиП II-23-81* Часть
II Нормы проектирования Стальные конструкции (SNiP 2.23-81* Part II Design Standards for
Steel Construction).
Design of members per SNiP 2.23-81* requires the STAAD E. Eurozone Design Codes SELECT Code
Pack.
15B.1 General
Design Code SNiP Steel Structures as majority of modern codes is based on the method of limit
states. The following groups of limit states are defined in the Code.
l The first group is concerned with losses of general shape and stability, failure, qualitative
changes in configuration of structure. Appearance of non-allowable residual deformations,
displacements, yielding of materials or opening of cracks.
l The second group is concerned with states of structures making worse normal their service
or reducing durability due to not allowable deflections, deviations, settlements, vibrations,
etc.
Analysis of structures for the first limit state is performed using the maximum (design) loads and
actions, which can cause failure of structures.
Analysis of structures for the second limit state is performed using service (normative) loads and
actions. Relation between design and normative loads is referred to as coefficient of load reliability,
which is defined in SNiP 2.01.07.- 85 “Loads and Actions”.
Coefficient of reliability for destination GAMA n according to SNiP 2.01.07.- 85 shall be taken in to
account determining loads or their combinations.
In this version of the program only members from rolled, tube and roll-formed assortment sections
and also from compound such as double angles of T-type sections, double channels are presented.
Design of other members of compound section will be presented in other versions of the program.
Economy of selected section is indicated by ratio (RATIO) σ/Ry yc presented in calculation results. A
section is economical when said ratio equals to 0,9 – 0,95.
15B.2 Built-in Russian Steel Section Library

Typical sections of members being checked and selected according to SNiP 2.01.07.- 81* are
presented in the following tables.

Table 15B.1-Typical Sections for Russian Steel Design

Section Section Type Designation form
I-beam (GOST 8239-89) ST I12
Regular I-beam (GOST 26020-

ST B1-10
83)
Broad-flanged I-beam (GOST

ST SH1-23
26020-83)
Column I-beam (GOST 26020-

ST K1-20
83)
Channel (GOST 8240-89) ST C14
Equal legs angle (GOST 8509- ST L100x100x7

89) RA L100x100x7
Unequal legs angle (GOST ST L125x80x10

8510-89) RA L125x80x10
ST PIP102x5.5
Pipes (welded and for gas or

piping)
ST PIPE OD 0.102 ID
0.055
ST TUB160x120x3
Roll-formed square and or

rectangular tubes
ST TUBE TH 0.003 WT
0.12 DT 0.16

Table 15B.2-Compound Sections for Russian Steel Design

Section Section Type Designation
form
Double channels D C14 SP 0.01
(SP – clear
distance
between
channel
walls)
Double equal legs angles LD

L100x100x7
SP 0.01
(SP – clear
distance
between
angle walls)
Double unequal legs angles with long legs LD

back to back L125x80x10
SP 0.01
(SP – clear
distance
between
angle walls)
Double unequal legs angles with short legs SD

back to back L125x80x10
SP 0.01
(SP – clear
distance
between
angle walls)
Tee with flange at the top T I12
Note: Flange of Tee beam is at the top T B1-10

part of cross-section if beta angle = 0°, or T SH1-23
at the bottom part if beta angle = 180°.
T K1-20
For entry of cross-sectional dimensions command MEMBER PROPERTIES RUSSIAN is used.
15B.2.1 Example
UNITS METER

MEMBER PROPERTY RUSSIAN

* I-beam
1 TO 6 TABLE ST B1-10
* Channel
7 TO 11 TABLE ST C14
* Unequal legs angle
12 TO 30 TABLE RA L125x80x10
* Round assortment pipe
31 TO 46 TABLE ST PIP102x5.5
* round pipe of cross-sectional dimensions defined by client
47 TO 60 TABLE ST PIPE OD 0.102 ID 0.055
* Square tube from assortment
61 TO 68 TABLE ST TUB120x120x3
* Rectangular tube of cross-sectional dimension defined by client
69 TO 95 TABLE ST TUBE TH 0.003 WT 0.12 DT 0.16
* Double channel (distance between walls 10 мм)
96 TO 103 TABLE D C14 SP 0.01
* Double unequal legs angles with short legs back-to-back (distance between walls 10 мм)
104 TO 105 TABLE SD L125x80x10 SP 0.01
* member of Tee section
106 TO 126 TABLE T SH1-23
* Flange of T-beams at the bottom of cross-section
BETA 180. MEMB 116 TO 126
* Orientation of the local angle axes in relation to the global axes of the structure
BETA RANGLE MEMB 12 TO 30
Commands of output data for check and selection of sections are located after commands of
analysis and, as a rule, after output command to print results of calculation.

Algorithms for selection and review of sections for steel members according to assortments and
databases of the main rolled steel producers from given countries and according to international
standards as well are included in STAAD.Pro program. In this program version only assortment
sections can be utilized.
15B.3.1 Example
* Command of analysis
PERFORM ANALYSIS
* Command of loadings and their combinations considered in design
LOAD LIST 1 5 TO 9
* Command to start design according to Russian Code
PARAMETER
CODE RUSSIAN
* List of parameters used in checking and selecting
BEAM 1. ALL
Obligatory parameter
LY 4. MEMB 1 TO 4
LZ 4. MEM 1 TO 4
MAIN 1. ALL
SGR 3. ALL
SBLT 0 ALL
* Parameter of output amount of information on calculation results
TRACK 2. ALL
.
* Command to start section check procedure
CHECK CODE ALL

* Command to start section selection procedure

SELECT ALL
.
* Command of output to print content of assortment tables
PRINT ENTIRE TABLE
* Command of output to print summary of steel according to sections
STEEL TAKE OFF
* Command of output to print summary of steel according to members and sections
STEEL MEMBER TAKE OFF
15B.3.2 Axial tension members

Stress in a section of axial tension member shall not exceed design strength R of selected steel
y
multiplied by coefficient of service conditions γ (KY and KZ), table 6 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*.
c
Slenderness of tension member (CMM) shall not exceed slenderness limit indicated in table 20 of
SNiP 2.01.07.- 81* (default value λu = 200, but another value can be defined). Net section factor
(ratio Anet/Agross (NSF)) is used for tension member to allow for reduction of design cross-section
area.
15B.3.3 Axial compression members

All axial compression members are calculated as long bars, i.e., with allowance for slenderness (λ =
l0 /imin ). The calculation is performed in accordance with the clause 5.3 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*,
buckling coefficient φ is determined by formula 8-10. Effective bar lengths (within and out of
plane) taking in to account role and location of the bar in the structure, as well as fixation of ends
(l0 = μl), are determined according to requirements of chapter 6 or addition 6 to SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*
and are set by specification of members. Slenderness of compression members (CMN) shall not
exceed limit values given in table 19 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*. Value of coefficient α being used in table
19 is taken within limits from 0,5 to 1,0. Limit slenderness value depends on stress acting in the
member, section area, buckling coefficient and design resistance of steel.
Since slenderness can be different in various planes the greatest slenderness is assumed in
calculations.
15B.3.4 Flexural members

Members subjected to the action of bending moments and shear forces are called flexural members.
Calculation of flexural members consists of verification of strength, stability and deflection.
Normal and tangential stresses are verified by strength calculation of members. Normal stresses are
calculated in the outermost section fibres. Tangential stresses are verified in the neutral axis zone of
the same section. If normal stresses do not exceed design steel strength and tangential stresses do
not exceed design value of steel shear strength Rsγs then according to clause 5.14 of SNiP 2.01.07.-
81* principal stresses are checked.
General stability of member subjected to bending in one plane are calculated in accordance with
clause 5.15 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*, and subjected to bending in two planes – in accordance with
“Guide to design of steel structures” (to SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*). Coefficient φb value is determined

according to appendix 7 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*. Additional data about load (concentrated or
distributed), numbers of bracing restrains of compression flanges, location of applied load are
required. For closed sections it is assumed that coefficient φb = 1.0.
Simply supported (non-continuous) beams can be calculated in elastic as well as in elastic-plastic

state according to requirements of clause 5.18 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81*. Calculation can be selected by
specification of structure in input data.
Stiffness of flexural members is verified comparing input value of deflection limit (through
parameter DFF) with maximum displacement of a section of flexural member allowing for load
reliability coefficient, which is specified, in input data. Limit values of deflection are determined in
accordance with SNiP 2.01.07.- 85 “Loads and Actions. Addition chapter 10. Deflections and
displacements”. Verification of deflection is performed only in the case of review (CHECK) problem.
15B.3.5 Eccentric compression/tension members

Eccentric compression or tension members are subjected to simultaneous action of axial force and
bending moment. Bending moment appears due to eccentric application of longitudinal force or
due to transverse force.
Stress in eccentric compression/tension members is obtained as a sum of stresses due to axial force
and bending.
Following the requirements of clause 5.25 of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81* resistance of eccentric
compression/tension member taking into consideration condition Ry < 530 MPa, τ < 0.5Rs and N/
(An Ry ) > 0.1 is calculated by formula 49, and in other cases-by formula 50. Calculations of stability
verification are performed according to requirements of clauses 5.27, 5.30, 5.32 or 5.34.
Calculation for strength of eccentric tension members is made according to formula 50 of SNiP
2.01.07.- 81*.
When reduced relative eccentricity mef> 20 eccentric compression members are calculated as
flexural members (N = 0), when mef< 20 strength by formula 49 is not verified (clause 5.24).

Information on parameters, data used for check and selection of sections in design of steel
structures according to Russian Code is presented in the following table.
In this version of calculation according to requirements of SNiP 2.01.07.- 81* there is common
database of equal legs angles and unequal legs angles, therefore solution of section selection
problem may give equal legs angle as well as unequal legs angle irrespective of set at the beginning.
The same is and with rectangular and square tubes.
Values of parameters do not depend on command UNIT. Only these values of parameters, which
differ from, defined in the program need to be included in the input data file.
Review of sections (command CHECK) can be performed according to the first and the second group
of limit states. Selection of section (command SELECT) can be performed only according to the first

group of limit states with subsequent recalculation and verification of selected section with
allowance for deflection.
Calculation for the first group of limit states involves selection of members according to strength
and stability. Parameters CMN and CMM give opportunity to set slenderness limit for compression and
tension members respectively for their stability calculation, or refuse consideration of slenderness by
setting default parameters. In this case selection of sections will be performed with consideration
only of strength check.
Check for deflection performed by setting parameter DFF (maximum allowable relative deflection
value) different from set in the program.
In the case of application of steel not defined by SNiP and/or GOST it is necessary to set their
design strength by parameters UNL and PY.
In determination of steel parameters SBLT and MAIN shall be approved (see Table 15B.4).
Table 15B.3-Parameters for Steel design according to Russian Code (SNiP II – 23

– 81*, edition 1999)
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
Member design parameter:
l BEAM = 0, Design members for forces at their

ends or at the sections defined by SECTION
command;
l BEAM = 1, Calculate the major axis moment

Mz at 13 points along the beam and design
BEAM 1 beam at the location of maximum Mz;
l BEAM = 2, Same as BEAM=1, but additional

checks are carried out at beam ends and at
critical inter mediate section;
l BEAM = 3, Calculate forces at 13 points and

perform design checks at all locations
including the ends
Place of loading on beam:
CB 1 l CB = 1, for loading on top flange;
l CB = 2, for loading on bottom flange

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
Slenderness limit value for tension members:
l СMM = 0, if slenderness is suppressed;
l СMM = 2, if ultimate slenderness value is "150";
l СMM = 2, if ultimate slenderness value is

"200";

"250";
СMM 0
"300";

"350";
l СMM = 6, if ultimate slenderness value is "400
Set slenderness limit value not equal to "0" for design

with evaluation of buckling effect
Slenderness limit value for compression members:
l СMN = 0, if slenderness is suppressed;
l СMN = 1, if slenderness limit value is "120";
l СMN = 2, if slenderness limit value is "210-

60a";

40a";
CMN 0 l СMN = 5, if slenderness limit value is "180-

60a";

60a";

60a";
Set slenderness limit value not equal to "0" for design

with evaluation of buckling effect

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
Allowable limit of relative local deflection (Member

length/Deflection Ratio):
DFF 0. Default value 0 is valid if design is applied without

deflection limitation.
Set for deflection check only
DMAX
1. Maximum allowable section depth
[m]
DMIN
0. Minimum allowable section depth
[m]
Specific service condition coefficient for buckling

GAMC1 1.0
design
Specific service condition coefficient for strength

GAMC2 1.0
design
Coefficient of effective length in respect to local axis Y

KY 1.0
(in plane XZ)
Coefficient of effective length in respect to local axis Z

KZ 1.0
(in plane XY)
Type and position of loading on beam:
l LEG = 1, for loading concentrated in the

middle span;
l LEG = 2, for loading concentrated in the

quarter of the span;
LEG 4 l LEG = 3, for loading concentrated at the end of
bracket;
l LEG = 4, for loading uniformly distributed on

beam;
l LEG = 5, for loading uniformly distributed on

bracket
Effective length in respect to local axis Y (in plane

LY Member XZ)
[m] length
Default is selected member's length

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
Effective length in respect to local axis Z (in plane

LZ Member XY)
[m] length
Default is selected member's length
Standard of steel grade (GOST):
l MAIN = 1, if Standard of steel grade is

GOST27772-88;

GOST10705-80;
MAIN 1 l MAIN = 3, if Standard of steel grade is
GOST10706-76;

GOST8731-87;
l MAIN = 5, if Standard of steel grade is TY14-3-

567-76
Net section factor for tension members or web section

NSF 1.0
area weakening factor for bending members
Design steel strength (yield strength):

PY
0 If parameters MAIN according to Standard of steel
[MPa] grade (GOST) and by SGR according to Steel grade
(STAL) are not defined
RATIO 1.0 Ratio between design and characteristic loads values
Number of lateral bracing restraints along the span:
l SBLT = 0, if beam not fixed;
SBLT 0 l SBLT = 1, one restraint in the middle of the

span;
l SBLT = 2, 3, etc. number of uniformly spaced

lateral supports along the span

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
SGR 1 Steel grade (STAL). Refer to Table 12B.4 below.
Indication of elastic or elastic-plastic calculation:
l TB = 0, for elastic calculation

TB 0 l TB = 1, for elastic-plastic calculation
Set for members under bending or non-axial

compression/tension only.
Output parameter:
l TRACK = 0, for suppressed output information;

TRACK 0
l TRACK = 1, for extended output information;
l TRACK = 2, for advanced output information
Design steel strength (ultimate strength):

UNL
0 If parameters MAIN according to Standard of steel
[MPa] grade (GOST) and by SGR according to Steel grade
(STAL) are not defined
Table 15B.4-Steel types for design of steel structures according to SNiP 2.01.07.-
81* (table 51 and 51a)
SGR Value Steel Parameter MAIN GOST For members*
1 C235 1 GOST 27772-88 GT, F

15B.5 Member Selection and Code Check
SGR Value Steel Parameter MAIN GOST For members*
2 C245 1 “ GT, F
3 C255 1 “ GT, F
4 C275 1 “ GT, F
5 C285 1 “ GT, F
6 C345 1 “ GT, F
7 C345K 1 “ GT, F
8 C375 1 “ GT, F
9 C390 1 “ F
10 C390K 1 “ F
11 C440 1 “ F
12 C590 1 “ F
13 C590К 1 “ F
14 BSt3kp 2 GOST 10705-80* Tube
2 GOST 10705-80*
15 BSt3ps Tube
3 GOST 10706-76*
2 GOST 10705-80*
16 BSt3sp Tube
3 GOST 10706-76*
17 20 4 GOST 8731-87 Tube
18 16G2АF 5 TY 14-3-567-76 Tube
*GT – members from sheet and roll-formed tubes
F – rolled section steel

Both code checking and member selection options are available in SNiP 2.23-81*.
Checking command.

Output of selection and check results are given in suppressed, extended and advanced forms. Form
of output results depends on value of parameter TRACK.
Results are presented in tables. Three versions of output results are possible: suppressed – results
according the critical strength condition (TRACK=0), extended - results according to all check
conditions (TRACK=1) and advanced – complete information on results of member design
(TRACK=2).
In tables of results common data for all TRACKs are indicated:
(TRACK=2).
In tables of results common data for all TRACKs are indicated:
number of member;
type and number of cross-section;
result obtained (ACCEPTED – requirements are met, FAILURE – are not met);
abbreviated name of normative document (code, standard) (SNiP);
number of check clause;
safety of strength (ratio between design and normative values);
number of the most unfavorable loading;
value of longitudinal force acting in the member with subscript indicating its direction (“C” –
compression, “P” – tension);
bending moments in relation to local member axes Z and Y;
distance to section, in which the most unfavorable combination of forces acts.
15B.5.1 Example of TRACK 0 output

In suppressed form (TRACK 0) results are presented according to the critical check for given member
with indication of SNiP clause number, according to which strength safety of the member is
minimum.
========================================================================
MEMBER CROSS RESULT/ CRITICAL COND/ RATIO/ LOADING/
SECTION NO. FX MZ MY LOCATION
========================================================================
1 I60 PASS SNiP- 5.18 0.68 1
0.000E+00 -4.650E+02 0.000E+00 3.000E+00

15B.5.2 Example of TRACK 1 output

In extended form (TRACK 1) results are presented on the basis of all required by SNiP checks for
given stress state.
========================================================================
========================================================================
1 I60 PASS SNiP- 5.18 0.68 1
0.000E+00 -4.650E+02 0.000E+00 3.000E+00
1 I60 PASS SNiP- DISPL 0.36 1
0.000E+00 -4.650E+02 0.000E+00 3.000E+00
15B.5.3 Example of a TRACK 2 output

In advanced form (TRACK=2) in addition to tabled results supplementary information is presented.
l Material characteristics:
l Steel;
l Design resistance;
l Elasticity modulus;
l Section characteristics:
l Length of member;
l Section area;
l Net area;
l Inertia moment (second moment of area) (I);
l Section modulus (W);
l First moment of area (S);
l Radius of gyration;
l Effective length;
l Slenderness;
l Results are presented in two columns, Z and Y respectively.
l Design forces:
l Longitudinal force;
l Moments;
l Shear force.
Signs “+” and “-“ indicate direction of acting longitudinal force, bending moments and shear forces
in accordance with sign rules assumed in program STAAD.
Check results in advanced form are presented with values of intermediate parameters by formulas
in analytical and numerical expression with indication of SNiP clause.

========================================================================
========================================================================
1 I60 PASS SNiP- 5.18 0.68 1
0.000E+00 -4.650E+02 0.000E+00 3.000E+00
1 I60 PASS SNiP- DISPL 0.36 1
0.000E+00 -4.650E+02 0.000E+00 3.000E+00
MATERIAL DATA
Steel =C245
Modulus of elasticity = 206.E+06 KPA
Design Strength (Ry) = 240.E+03 KPA
SECTION PROPERTIES (units - m)
Member Length = 6.00E+00
Gross Area = 1.38E-02
Net Area = 1.38E-02
z-axis y-axis
Moment of inertia (I) : 768.E-06 173.E-07
Section modulus (W) : 256.E-05 182.E-06
First moment of area (S) : 149.E-05 156.E-06
Radius of gyration (i) : 236.E-03 354.E-04
Effective Length : 600.E-02 600.E-02
Slenderness : 0.00E+00 0.00E+00
DESIGN DATA (units -kN,m)SNiP II-23-81*/1998
Axial force : 0.00E+00
z-axis y-axis
Moments : -465.E+00 0.00E+00
Shear force : 0.00E+00 500.E-02
CRITICAL CONDITIONS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK
F.(39) M/(C1*Wmin)=-465.0E+00/ 1.12E+00* 2.56E-03= 162.1E+03
F.(41) Q/(H*T)= 500.0E-02/ 6.00E-01* 1.20E-02= 694.E+00
RY*GAMAC= 240.0E+03
ACTUAL SECTION DISPLACEMENT = 1.094E-02 M
MAXIMUM MEMBER DEFLECTION = 1.094E-02 M Loading No. 1
ULTIMATE ALLOWABLE DEFLECTION VALUE = 3.000E-02 M
Conventional notations assumed in presentation of results: “+”, “-“, “/”, “*”,”**”, “SQRT”, their
respective meanings (i.e., addition, subtraction, division, multiplication, raising to the second
power (squared), and square root). Conventional notations of stresses, coefficients and
characteristics of steel resistance comply with accepted in the SNiP standard. Only Greek letters are
changed by their names (e.g., , γ -GAMAC; α-ALPHA; β-BETA, η-ETA, φ-PHI, etc.).
c

16
Singaporian Codes

16 Singaporian Codes

16A. Singaporean Codes - Concrete Design per CP65
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the Singaporean code CP65 Code of
Practice for Structural Use of Concrete.
Design of members per CP65 requires the STAAD Asia Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.


per the CP65 code. These parameters not only act as a method to input required data for code
24.1 contains a complete list of available parameters with their default values.
Table 16A.1-Singaporean Concrete Design CP65 Parameters

Name Value
CODE - Must be specified as CP65.

BRACE 0.0 Bracing parameter for column design:
0. Column braced in both directions

direction.
2. Column braced in only the local Z
direction.

current units.

PROPERTIES.

current units.

numbers.

column design.


Name Value

column design.
FC 4.0 ksi Concrete Yield Stress / cube strength, in current

units
FYMAIN 60 ksi Yield Stress for main reinforcement, in current

directions)
FYSEC 60 ksi Yield Stress for secondary reinforcement a, in

current units. Applicable to shear bars in beams.
MAX 50 mm Maximum required reinforcement bar size

MINMAIN 8 mm Minimum main reinforcement bar size Acceptable

bar sizes: 6 8 10 12 16 20 25 32 40 50
MINSEC 8 mm Minimum secondary bar size a. Applicable to


magnified

0. No serviceability check performed.

they were continuous.
they were simply supported.
they were cantilever beams.



Name Value
SRA 0.0 Skew angle considered in Wood & Armer

Two special values are also considered:
0.0 = Orthogonal reinforcement

layout without considering
torsional moment Mxy -slabs only

Wood & Armer moments for
design.
TRACK 0.0 Controls level of detail in output:
0. Critical Moment will not be printed with

beam design report. Column design gives
no detailed results.
1. For beam gives min/max steel % and
spacing. For columns gives a detailed table
of output with additional moments
calculated.
2. Beam design only. Details of reinforcement
at sections defined by the NSECTION
parameter.

PROPERTIES.

17
South African Codes

17 South African Codes

17A. South African Codes - Concrete Design per SABS-

0100-1
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the South African code SABS-0100-1
2000 Code of Practice for Structural Use of Concrete Part1: Design. Design can be performed for
beams (flexure, shear, and torsion) and columns (axial load + biaxial bending). Given the width and
depth (or diameter for circular columns) of a section, the program calculates the required
reinforcement.
Design of members per SABS-0100-1 requires the STAAD CAN/AUS/SA Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.

to SABS 0100-1. These parameters not only act as a method to input required data for code
calculations but give the engineer control over the actual design process. Default values of
Table 17A.1-South African Concrete Design SABS 0100-1 Parameters

Name
CODE - Must be specified as SABS0100.

Reference Manual.
BRACE 0.0 Column bracing:
0. Column braced in both directions.

1. Column braced about local Y
direction only
2. Column unbraced about local Z
direction only
3. Column unbraced in both Y and Z
directions
CLB 20mm Clear Cover for outermost bottom

reinforcement


Name
CLS 20mm Clear Cover for outermost side

reinforcement
CLT 20mm Clear Cover for outermost top

reinforcement
DEPTH YD Depth of concrete member, in current

units. This value default is as provided as
YD in MEMBER PROPERTIES.


FC 30N/mm 2 Concrete Yield Stress / cube strength, in

current units.
FYMAIN 450 N/mm 2 Yield Stress for main reinforcement, in

current units.
FYSEC 450N/mm 2 Yield Stress for secondary reinforcement a,

in current units. Applicable to shear bars
in beams
MAXMAIN 50mm Maximum required reinforcement bar size

Acceptable bars are per MINMAIN above.
MINMAIN 8mm Minimum main reinforcement bar size

Acceptable bar sizes: 6 8 10 12 16 20 25 28 32
36 40 50 60
MINSEC 8mm Minimum secondary bar size a. Applicable

to shear reinforcement in beams


Name
TRACK 0.0 Output detail

with beam design report. Column
design gives no detailed results.
1. For beam gives min/max steel %
detailed table of output with
additional moments calculated.
2. Output of TRACK 1.0 List of design
sag/hog moments and
corresponding required steel area at
each section of member
WIDTH ZD Width of concrete member, in current

units. This value default is as provided as
ZD in MEMBER PROPERTIES.

under the MEMBER PROPERTIES command.
The following example demonstrates the required input:

UNIT MM
MEMBER PROPERTIES
*RECTANGULAR COLUMN 300mm WIDE X 450mm DEEP
1 3 TO 7 9 PRISM YD 450. ZD 300.
*CIRCULAR COLUMN 300mm diameter
11 13 PR YD 300.
* T-SECTION - FLANGE 1000.X 200.(YD-YB)
* - STEM 250(THICK) X 350.(DEEP)
14 PRISM YD 550. ZD 1000. YB 350. ZB 250.
In the above input, the first set of members are rectangular (450mm depth x 300mm width)
circular with 300mm diameter. Note that area (AX) is not provided for these members. If shear
area areas (AY & AZ ) are to be considered in analysis, the user may provide them along with
YD and ZD. Also note that if moments of inertias are not provided, the program will calculate
them from YD and ZD. Finally a T section can be considered by using the third definition
above.

17A.3 Beam Design
17A.3 Beam Design

Beam design includes flexure, shear and torsion. For all types of beam action, all active beam
loadings are scanned to create moment and shear envelopes and locate the critical sections. The
total number of sections considered is thirteen. From the critical moment values, the required
positive and negative bar pattern is developed. Design for flexure is carried out as per clause no.
4.3.3.4.
Shear design as per SABS 0100 clause 4.3.4 has been followed and the procedure includes
computation of critical shear values. From these values, stirrup sizes are calculated with proper
spacing. If torsion is present, the program will also consider the provisions of SABS 0100 clause 4.3.5.
Torsional reinforcement is separately reported.
A TRACK 2 design output is presented below.

============================================================================
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
(in mm) | MZ Load Case MX Load Case | VY P Load Case
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.0 | 84.77 1 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1
| 0.00 0 |
500.0 | 70.70 1 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1
| 0.00 0 |
1000.0 | 56.64 1 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1
| 0.00 0 |
1500.0 | 42.57 1 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1
| 0.00 0 |
2000.0 | 28.50 1 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1
| 0.00 0 |
2500.0 | 14.43 1 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1
| 0.00 0 |
3000.0 | 0.37 1 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1
| 0.00 0 |
3500.0 | 0.00 0 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1
| -13.70 1 |
4000.0 | 0.00 0 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1
| -27.77 1 |
4500.0 | 0.00 0 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1
| -41.84 1 |
5000.0 | 0.00 0 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1
| -55.90 1 |
5500.0 | 0.00 0 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1
| -69.97 1 |
6000.0 | 0.00 0 -9.89 1 | -28.13 4.39 1
| -84.04 1 |
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
SUMMARY OF REINF. AREA FOR FLEXURE DESIGN (Sq.mm)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
SECTION | TOP | BOTTOM | STIRRUPS
(in mm) | Reqd./Provided reinf. | Reqd./Provided reinf. | (2 legged)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.0 | 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10í )| 680.71/ 706.86( 9-10í )| 8í @ 115 mm
500.0 | 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10í )| 567.75/ 603.18( 3-16í )| 8í @ 115 mm
1000.0 | 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10í )| 454.79/ 471.24( 6-10í )| 8í @ 115 mm
1500.0 | 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10í )| 353.21/ 392.70( 5-10í )| 8í @ 115 mm

17A.4 Column Design
2000.0 | 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10í )| 353.21/ 392.70( 5-10í )| 8í @ 115 mm

2500.0 | 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10í )| 353.21/ 392.70( 5-10í )| 8í @ 115 mm
3000.0 | 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10í )| 353.21/ 392.70( 5-10í )| 8í @ 115 mm
3500.0 | 353.21/ 392.70( 5-10í )| 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10í )| 8í @ 115 mm
4000.0 | 353.21/ 392.70( 5-10í )| 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10í )| 8í @ 115 mm
4500.0 | 353.21/ 392.70( 5-10í )| 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10í )| 8í @ 115 mm
5000.0 | 448.91/ 452.40( 4-12í )| 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10í )| 8í @ 115 mm
5500.0 | 561.87/ 565.50( 5-12í )| 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10í )| 8í @ 115 mm
6000.0 | 674.83/ 678.60( 6-12í )| 543.40/ 549.78( 7-10í )| 8í @ 115 mm
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
TORSION REINFORCEMENT : Not required
17A.4 Column Design

Columns are designed for axial force and biaxial bending at the ends. All active loadings are tested
critical load and is displayed. The requirements of SABS 0100-1 clause 4.7 are followed, with the
user having control on the effective length in each direction by using the ELZ and ELY parameters
as described in table 12A.1. Bracing conditions are controlled by using the BRACE parameter. The
program will then decide whether or not the column is short or slender and whether it requires
additional moment calculations. For biaxial bending, the recommendations of 4.7.4.4 of the code
are considered.
Column design is done for square, rectangular and circular sections. For rectangular and square
sections, the reinforcement is always assumed to be arranged symmetrically. This causes slightly
conservative results in certain cases.
Using parameter TRACK 1.0, the detailed output below is obtained. TRACK 0.0 would merely give
the bar configuration, required steel area and percentage, column size and critical load case.
============================================================================
LENGTH: 3000.0 mm CROSS SECTION: 715.0 mm X 380.0 mm COVER: 40.0 mm
** GUIDING LOAD CASE: 1 END JOINT: 2 SHORT COLUMN

-----------------------
DESIGN AXIAL FORCE (Pu) : -14.6
About Z About Y
INITIAL MOMENTS : 0.00 0.00
MOMENTS DUE TO MINIMUM ECC. : 0.28 0.29
SLENDERNESS RATIOS : 7.89 4.20

ADDITION MOMENTS (Maddz and Maddy) : 0.00 0.00
TOTAL DESIGN MOMENTS : 45.17 9.41

REQD. CONCRETE AREA: 1213.61 Sq.mm.
MAIN REINFORCEMENT : Provide 4 - 12 dia. (0.17%, 452.40 Sq.mm.)
(Equally Distributed)
TIE REINFORCEMENT : Provide 8 mm dia. rectangular ties @ 140 mm c/c

17A.4 Column Design
SECTION CAPACITY BASED ON REINFORCEMENT REQUIRED (KNS-MET)

----------------------------------------------------------
Puz : 25.50 Muz1 : 45.22 Muy1 : 51.48
============================================================================

17B.1 General
17B. South African Codes - Steel Design Per SAB Standard

SAB0162-1:1993
17B.1 General
would become unfit for their intended use. Two major categories of limit-state are recognized -
The next few sections describe the salient features of the STAAD implementation of SAB0162-1:
1993. A detailed description of the design process along with its underlying concepts and
assumptions is available in the specification document.

necessary loading situations. Depending upon the analysis requirements, regular stiffness analysis or
P-Delta analysis may be specified. Dynamic analysis may also be performed and the results
combined with static analysis results.
Refer to Section 5.37 of the Technical Reference Manual for additional information.

For specification of member properties, the steel section library available in STAAD may be used.
The next section describes the syntax of commands used to assign properties from the built-in steel
table. Member properties may also be specified using the User Table facility. For more information
on these facilities, refer to Section 1.7 the STAAD Technical Reference Manual.


A steel section library consisting of South African Standards shapes is available for member property
specification.
17B.4.1 I Shapes
The following example illustrates the specification of I- shapes.
1 TO 15 TABLE ST IPE-AA100
17B.4.2 H shapes
Designation of H shapes in STAAD is as follows.
For example,
18 TO 20 TABLE ST 152X37UC
17B.4.3 PG shapes
Designation of PG shapes in STAAD is as follows.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST 720X200PG
17B.4.4 Channel Sections (C & MC shapes)

C and MC shapes are designated as shown in the following example.
3 TABLE ST 127X64X15C

Back to back double channels, with or without spacing between them, are specified by preceding
the section designation by the letter D. For example, a back to back double channel section
PFC140X60 without spacing in between should be specified as:
100 TO 150 TABLE D PFC140X60
A back-to-back double channel section 140X60X16C with spacing 0.01 unit length in between
should be specified as:
100 TO 150 TABLE D 140X60X16C SP 0.01

Note: The specification SP after the section designation is used for providing the spacing. The
spacing should always be provided in the current length unit.
17B.4.6 Angles
To specify angles, the letter L succeeds the angle name. Thus, a 70X70 angle with a 25mm thickness
is designated as 70X70X8L. The following examples illustrate angle specifications.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST 70X70X8L
Note that the above specification is for “standard” angles. In this specification, the local z-axis (see
Fig. 2.6 in the Technical Reference Manual) corresponds to the Y’-Y’ axis shown in the CSA table.
Another common practice of specifying angles assumes the local y-axis to correspond to the Y’-Y’
axis. To specify angles in accordance with this convention, the reverse angle designation facility has
been provided. A reverse angle may be specified by substituting the word ST with the word RA.
Refer to the following example for details.
100 TO 150 TABLE RA 45X45X3L
The local axis systems for STANDARD and REVERSE angles are shown in Fig. 2.6 of the STAAD
Technical Reference manual.

To specify double angles, the specification ST should be substituted with LD (for long leg back-to-
back) or SD (short leg back-to-back). For equal angles, either SD or LD will serve the purpose.
Spacing between angles may be provided by using the word SP followed by the value of spacing (in
current length unit) after section designation.
100 TO 150 TABLE LD 50X50X3L
3 TABLE LD 40X40X5L SP 0.01
The second example above describes a double angle section consisting of 40X40X5 angles with a
spacing of 0.01 length units.
17B.4.8 Tees
Tee sections obtained by cutting W sections may be specified by using the T specification instead of
ST before the name of the W shape. For example:
100 TO 150 TABLE T IPE-AA180
will describe a T section cut from a IPE-AA180 section.
17B.4.9 Rectangular Hollow Sections

These sections may be specified in two possible ways. Those sections listed in the SAB tables may be
specified as follows.
100 TO 150 TABLE ST TUB60X30X2.5

In addition, any tube section may be specified by using the DT(for depth), WT(for width), and TH
(for thickness) specifications. For example:
100 TO 150 TABLE ST TUBE TH 3 WT 100 DT 50
will describe a tube with a depth of 50mm, width of 100mm. and a wall thickness of 3mm. Note
that the values of depth, width and thickness must be provided in current length unit.
17B.4.10 Circular Hollow Sections

Sections listed in the SAB tables may be provided as follows:
100 TO 150 TABLE ST PIP34X3.0CHS
In addition to sections listed in the SAB tables, circular hollow sections may be specified by using
the OD (outside diameter) and ID (inside diameter) specifications.
For example:
100 TO 150 TABLE ST PIPE OD 50 ID 48
will describe a pipe with an outside diameter of 50 length units and inside diameter of 48 length
units. Note that the values of outside and inside diameters must be provided in terms of current
length unit.
A sample input file to demonstrate usage of South African shapes:

STAAD PLANE
ENGINEER DATE 30-Mar-05
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 9 0 0; 3 0 6 0; 4 3 6 0; 5 6 6 0; 6 9 6 0; 7 0 10.5 0;
8 9 10.5 0; 9 2.25 10.5 0; 10 6.75 10.5 0; 11 4.5 10.5 0; 12 1.5 11.4 0;
13 7.5 11.4 0; 14 3 12.3 0; 15 6 12.3 0; 16 4.5 13.2 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 3; 2 3 7; 3 2 6; 4 6 8; 5 3 4; 6 4 5; 7 5 6; 8 7 12; 9 12 14;
10 14 16; 11 15 16; 12 13 15; 13 8 13; 14 9 12; 15 9 14; 16 11 14;
17 11 15; 18 10 15; 19 10 13; 20 7 9; 21 9 11; 22 10 11; 23 8 10;
MEMBER PROPERTY SAFRICAN
1 TABLE ST IPE-AA100
2 TABLE T IPE120
3 TABLE ST 152X23UC
4 TABLE T 152X23UC
5 TABLE ST 812X200PG
6 TABLE T 812X200PG
7 TABLE ST 178X54X15C
8 TABLE D 178X54X15C

9 TABLE D 178X54X15C SP 0.1

10 TABLE ST 25X25X5L
11 TABLE RA 25X25X5L
12 TABLE LD 25X25X5L
13 TABLE SD 25X25X5L
14 TABLE LD 25X25X5L SP 0.1
15 TABLE SD 25X25X5L SP 0.1
16 TABLE ST TUB40X2.5SHS
17 TABLE ST TUBE TH 0 WT 0 DT 50
18 TABLE ST TUBE TH 0.02 WT 100 DT 50
20 TABLE ST PIP48X2.0CHS
21 TABLE ST PIPE OD 0.5 ID 0.48
FINISH

The SAB specification allows inelastic deformation of section elements. Thus, local buckling
becomes an important criterion. Steel sections are classified as plastic (Class 1), compact (Class 2),
noncompact (Class 3), or slender element (Class 4) sections depending upon their local buckling
characteristics (See Clause 11.2 and Table 1 of SAB0162-1:1993). This classification is a function of the
geometric properties of the section. The design procedures are different depending on the section
class. STAAD determines the section classification for the standard shapes and user specified shapes.
Design is performed for sections that fall into the category of Class 1,2, or 3 sections only. Class 4
sections are not designed by STAAD.

The member resistances are calculated in STAAD according to the procedures outlined in section 13
of the specification. These depend on several factors such as members’ unsupported lengths, cross-
sectional properties, slenderness factors, unsupported width to thickness ratios and so on. Note that
the program automatically takes into consideration appropriate resistance factors to calculate
member resistances. Explained here is the procedure adopted in STAAD for calculating the member
resistances.
All the members are checked against allowable slenderness ratio as per Cl.10.2 of SAB0162-1: 1993.
17B.6.1 Axial
Parameters FYLD, FU, and NSF are applicable for these calculations.
17B.6.2 Axial Compression

resistance may be provided through the use of the parameters KX, KY, KZ, LX, LY, and LZ (see Table
13B.1). Some of the aspects of the axial compression capacity calculations are:

1. For frame members not subjected to any bending, and for truss members, the axial
compression capacity in general column flexural buckling is calculated from Cl.13.3.1 using
the slenderness ratios for the local Y-Y and Z-Z axis. The parameters KY, LY, KZ, and LZ are
applicable for this.
2. For single angles, asymmetric or cruciform sections are checked as to whether torsional-
flexural buckling is critical. But for KL/r ratio exceeding 50,as torsional flexural buckling is
not critical, the axial compression capacities are calculated by using Cl.13.3. The reason for
this is that the South African code doesn’t provide any clear guidelines for calculating this
value. The parameters KY, LY, KZ, and LZ are applicable for this.
3. The axial compression capacity is also calculated by taking flexural-torsional buckling into
account. Parameters KX and LX may be used to provide the effective length factor and
effective length value for flexural-torsional buckling. Flexural-torsional buckling capacity is
computed for single channels, single angles, Tees and Double angles.
4. While computing the general column flexural buckling capacity of sections with axial
compression + bending, the special provisions of 13.8.1(a), 13.8.1(b) and 13.8.1(c) are applied.
For example, Lambda = 0 for 13.8.1(a), K=1 for 13.8.1(b), etc.)
17B.6.3 Bending
factored moment resistance is specified in STAAD with the help of the parameter UNL. If UNL is
less than one tenth the member length (member length is the distance between the joints of the
member), the member is treated as being continuously laterally supported. In this case, the
moment resistance is computed from Clause 13.5 of the code. If UNL is greater than or equal to
one-tenth the member length, its value is used as the laterally unsupported length. The equations
of Clause 13.6 of the code are used to arrive at the moment of resistance of laterally unsupported
members. Some of the aspects of the bending capacity calculations are:
1. The weak axis bending capacity of all sections except single angles is calculated as:
For Class 1 & 2 sections
Phi*Py*Fy
For Class 3 sections
Phi*Sy*Fy
Where:
Phi = Resistance factor = 0.9
Py = Plastic section modulus about the local Y axis
Sy = Elastic section modulus about the local Y axis
Fy = Yield stress of steel
2. Single angles sections are not designed by STAAD, as the South African code doesn’t provide

any clear guidelines for calculating this value.
3. For calculating the bending capacity about the Z-Z axis of singly symmetric shapes such as
Tees and Double angles, SAB0162-1: 1993 stipulates in Clause 13.6(b), page 31, that a rational
method.
17B.6.4 Axial compression and bending

obtained through the use of interaction equations. In these equations, the additional bending
caused by the action of the axial load is accounted for by using amplification factors. Clause 13.8 of
the code provides the equations for this purpose. If the summation of the left hand side of these
equations exceeds 1.0 or the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 17B.1),
the member is considered to have FAILed under the loading condition.
17B.6.5 Axial tension and bending

Members subjected to axial tension and bending are also designed using interaction equations.
Clause 13.9 of the code is used to perform these checks. The actual RATIO is determined as the value
of the left hand side of the critical equation.
17B.6.6 Shear
The shear resistance of the cross section is determined using the equations of Clause 13.4 of the
code. Once this is obtained, the ratio of the shear force acting on the cross section to the shear
resistance of the section is calculated. If any of the ratios (for both local Y & Z axes) exceed 1.0 or
the allowable value provided using the RATIO parameter (see Table 17B.1), the section is considered
to have failed under shear. The code also requires that the slenderness ratio of the web be within a
certain limit (See Cl.13.4.1.3, page 29 of SABS 0162-1:1993). Checks for safety in shear are performed
only if this value is within the allowable limit. Users may by-pass this limitation by specifying a
value of 2.0 for the MAIN parameter.

The design parameters outlined in table below may be used to control the design procedure. These

Table 17B.1-South African Steel Design Parameters

Paramet Default Description
er Name Value
CODE - Must be specified SAB0162.

Manual.
BEAM 0 0 - Perform design at ends and those locations

specified in the section command.
1 - Perform design at ends and 1/12th section

locations along member length.
CB 1.0 Greater than 0.0 and less than 2.5,Value of

Omega_2 (C1.13.6) to be used for calculation
Equal to 0.0: Calculate Omega_2
CMY 1.0 1 - Do not calculate Omega-1 for local Y axis.
2 - Calculate Omega-1 for local Y axis
CMZ 1.0 1 - Do not calculate Omega-1 for local Z axis.
2 - Calculate Omega-1 for local Z axis
DFF 0 Default is 0 indicating that deflection check is

not performed
DJ1 0 Start node of physical member for determining

deflected pattern for deflection check and should
be set along with DFF parameter
DJ2 0 End node of physical member for determining

deflected pattern for deflection check and should
be set along with DFF parameter
DMAX 1000 Maximum allowable depth
DMIN 0 Minimum required depth
FYLD 300Mpa Yield strength of steel
FU 345Mpa Ultimate strength of steel
KT 1.0 K value for flexural torsional buckling
KY 1.0 K value in local Y-axis, usually minor axis
KZ 1.0 K value in local Z-axis, usually major axis

Paramet Default Description

er Name Value
LT Member Length for flexural torsional buckling

length
LY Member Length in local Y axis for slenderness value KL/r

length
LZ Member Length in local Z axis for slenderness value KL/r

length
MAIN 0 Flag for controlling slenderness check
0 - For Check for slenderness.
1 - For Do not check for slenderness
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of applied load to section

capacity
Used in altering the RHS of critical interaction

equations
SSY 0 Sidesway parameter
0 - Sideway about local Y-axis.
1 - No sideway about local Y-axis.
SSZ 0 Sidesway parameter
0 - Sideway about local Z-axis.
1 - No sideway about local Z-axis.
TRACK 0 Track parameter
0. Print the design output at the minimum

detail level.
1. Print the design output at the
intermediate detail level.
2. Print the design output at maximum
detail level
UNB Member Unsupported length in bending compression of

Length bottom flange for calculating moment resistance
UNT Member Unsupported length in bending compression of

Length top flange for calculating moment resistance

17B.8 Code Checking
17B.8 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to determine whether the current section properties of the
members are adequate to carry the forces obtained from the most recent analysis. The adequacy is
checked as per the SAB0162-1: 1993 requirements.
Code checking is done using forces and moments at specified sections of the members. If the
BEAM parameter for a member is set to 1 (which is also its default value), moments are calculated
at every twelfth point along the beam. When no section locations are specified and the BEAM
parameter is set to zero, design will be based on member start and end forces only. The code
checking output labels the members as PASSed or FAILed. In addition, the critical condition,
governing load case, location (distance from the start joint) and magnitudes of the governing
forces and moments are also printed. Using the TRACK parameter can control the extent of detail
of the output.
Checking command.
17B.8.1 Example
Sample input data for South African Code Design
PARAMETER
CODE SAB0162
MAIN 1 all
LY 4 MEMB 1
LZ 4 MEMB 1
UNL 4 MEMB 1
CB 0 MEMB 1 TO 23
CMZ MEMB 2 1 TO 23
CMY MEMB 2 1 TO 23
SSY 0 MEMB 1 TO 23
SSZ 0 MEMB 1 TO 23
FU 450000 MEMB 1 TO 23
BEAM 1 ALL
NSF 0.85 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
RATIO 1.0 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
FYLD 300000 1 TO 23
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH

The member selection process involves determination of the least weight member that PASSes the
code checking procedure based on the forces and moments of the most recent analysis. The section
selected will be of the same type as that specified initially.

For example, a member specified initially as a channel will have a channel selected for it. Selection
of members whose properties are originally provided from a user table will be limited to sections in
the user table. Member selection cannot be performed on members listed as PRISMATIC.

CRITICAL COND refers to the section of the SAB0162-1: 1993 specification, which governed the
design.
If the TRACK parameter is set to 1.0, the output will be displayed as follows:
**************************************
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING
(SOUTHAFRICAN STEEL/SAB-0162-01(1993))
**************************************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST 406X67UB (SOUTHAFRICAN SECTIONS)
PASS SAB-13.8 0.543 1
0.00 0.00 -191.90 4.08
|---------------------------------------------------------------------|
| FACTORED RESISTANCES FOR MEMBER- 1 UNIT - KN,M PHI = 0.90 |
| MRZ= 353.27 MRY= 63.99 |
| CR= 453.21 TR= 2308.50 VR= 642.00 |
|---------------------------------------------------------------------|
Factored member resistances will be printed out. Following is a description of some of the items
printed out.
Output Term Description
MRZ Factored moment of resistance in z direction

MRY Factored moment of resistance in y direction
CR Factored compressive resistance for column
TR Factored tensile capacity
VR Factored shear resistance
Further details can be obtained by setting TRACK to 2.0. A typical output of track 2.0 parameter is
as follows.
**************************************
**************************************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================


PASS SAB-13.8 0.543 1
0.00 0.00 -191.90 4.08
-----------------------------
IZ = 2.43E+04 SZ = 1.19E+03 PZ = 1.35E+03
IY = 1.36E+03 SY = 1.52E+02 PY = 2.37E+02
--------------------------------
FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0
---------------------------------
CRY = 4.532E+02 CRZ = 2.016E+03
CTORFLX = 4.532E+02
--------------------------
SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = -6.305E+01 Z AXIS = 0.000E+00
Following is a description of some of the items printed out.
Output Term Description
CRY Factored compressive resistance for column buckling about

the local y axis
CRZ Factored compressive resistance for column buckling about
the local z axis
CTORFLX Factored compressive resistance against torsional flexural
buckling
TENSILE Factored tensile capacity
CAPACITY
COMPRESSIVE Factored compressive capacity
CAPACITY
FACTORED MRY = Factored moment of resistance in y direction
MOMENT
MRZ = Factored moment of resistance in z direction
RESISTANCE
FACTORED VRY = Factored shear resistance in y direction
SHEAR
VRZ = Factored shear resistance in z direction
RESISTANCE

In the next few pages are included three verification examples for reference purposes.


Determine the capacity of a South African I-section column in axial compression per South African
steel design code (SAB:0162-1(1993)) . Column is braced at its ends for both axes.
Reference
Example 4.3.4.1, page 4.18, Structural Steel Design to SAB:0162-1(1993)(Limit state Design) by Greg
Parrott, 1st edition, Shades Technical publication
Given
FYLD = 300 Mpa
Length = 6000 mm
Comparison
Table 17B.2-SABS 0162-1:1993 Verification problem no.1 comparison

Axial Compressive Strength (kN) 1,516 1,516 none
Input File
STAAD PLANE
ENGINEER DATE
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 0 6 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
1 TABLE ST 356X67UB
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 1.99947e+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8191
ALPHA 6e-006
DAMP 0.03
TYPE STEEL
STRENGTH FY 248210 FU 399894 RY 1.5 RT 1.2
END DEFINE MATERIAL
UNIT MMS KN
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
UNIT METER KN
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED

17B.12 Verification Problem No. 2

JOINT LOAD
2 FY -1500
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER 1
CODE SABS0162
LZ 6 ALL
LY 3 ALL
FU 450000 ALL
BEAM 1 ALL
NSF 0.85 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
FYLD 300000 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output
**************************************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
PASS COMPRESSION 0.989 1
1500.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
-----------------------------
IZ = 1.95E+04 SZ = 1.07E+03 PZ = 1.21E+03
IY = 1.36E+03 SY = 1.57E+02 PY = 2.43E+02
--------------------------------
FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0
---------------------------------
CRY = 1.516E+03 CRZ = 2.038E+03
CTORFLX = 1.516E+03
--------------------------

Determine the capacity of a South African I-section beam in bending per South African steel design
code (SAB:0162-1(1993)). The beam has torsional and simple lateral rotational restraint at the
supports, and the applied point load provides effective lateral restraint at the point of application is
braced at its ends for both axes.

17B.12.1 Reference
Example 4.5, page 4.37, Structural Steel Design to SAB:0162-1(1993)(Limit state Design) by Greg
17B.12.2 Given
FYLD = 300 Mpa
17B.12.3 Comparison
Table 17B.3-SAB 0162 -1:1993 Verification Problem 2 comparison
Major Axis Bending Resistance (kN) 353.4 353.3 none
17B.12.4 Input File

STAAD PLANE
ENGINEER DATE
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 10 0 0; 3 7 0 0
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 3; 2 3 2
1 2 TABLE ST 406X67UB
ISOTROPIC MATERIAL1
E 2.00E+008
POISSON 3
DENSITY 977
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2.00E+008
POISSON 3
DENSITY 8195
ALPHA 2E-005
DAMP 03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
UNIT MMS KN
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL MEMB 1 2
UNIT METER KN
SUPPORTS
1 3 PINNED
MEMBER LOAD
1 CON GY -104 4
1 UNI GY -4
2 UNI GY -2
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER
CODE SABS0162

CB 0 ALL
UNL 4 MEMB 1
FU 450000 ALL
BEAM 1 ALL
NSF 85 ALL
FYLD 300000 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE MEMB 1
FINISH
17B.12.5 Output
**************************************
**************************************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
PASS SAB-13.8 0.543 1
0.00 0.00 -191.90 4.08
-----------------------------
IZ = 2.43E+04 SZ = 1.19E+03 PZ = 1.35E+03
IY = 1.36E+03 SY = 1.52E+02 PY = 2.37E+02
--------------------------------
FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0
---------------------------------
CRY = 4.532E+02 CRZ = 2.016E+03
CTORFLX = 4.532E+02
--------------------------
SHEAR FORCE (KNS) : Y AXIS = -6.305E+01 Z AXIS = 0.000E+00

Determine the elastic shear capacity per South African steel design code (SAB:0162-1(1993)) of a
South African I-section which is simply supported over the span of 8 m.
17B.13.1 Reference
Example 4.6.5, page 4.54, Structural Steel Design to SAB:0162-1(1993)(Limit state Design) by Greg

17B.13.2 Given
FYLD = 300 Mpa
17B.13.3 Comparison
Table 17B.4-SAB 0162-1:1993 Verification Problem 3 comparison
Shear Capacity (kN) 687.1 687.1 none
17B.13.4 Input File

STAAD PLANE
ENGINEER DATE
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 8 0 0
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2
1 TABLE ST 457X67UB
ISOTROPIC MATERIAL1
E 2E+008
POISSON 3
DENSITY 977
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2E+008
POISSON 3
DENSITY 8195
ALPHA 2E-005
DAMP 03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
UNIT MMS KN
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL MEMB 1
UNIT METER KN
SUPPORTS
1 2 PINNED
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -70
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER
CODE SABS0162
FU 450000 ALL
BEAM 1 ALL
FYLD 300000 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH

17B.13.5 Output
**************************************
**************************************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
* 1 ST 457X67UB (SOUTHAFRICAN SECTIONS)
FAIL SAB-13.8 4.134 1
0.00 0.00 -560.00 4.00
-----------------------------
IZ = 2.94E+04 SZ = 1.30E+03 PZ = 1.47E+03
IY = 1.45E+03 SY = 1.53E+02 PY = 2.37E+02
--------------------------------
FYLD = 300.0 FU = 345.0
---------------------------------
CRY = 3.738E+02 CRZ = 1.996E+03
CTORFLX = 3.738E+02
--------------------------

18
Spanish Codes

18 Spanish Codes

18A. Spanish Codes - Steel Design per NBE-MV103-1972

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Spanish code NBE-MV103-1972
Cálculo de estructuras de acero laminado en edificación (Calculation of rolled steel structures
construction).
Design of members per NBE-MV103-1972 requires the STAAD Eurozone Design Codes SELECT Code
Pack.

to the BSK 99 code. These parameters not only act as a method to input required data for code
Table 18A.1-Spanish Steel Design per NBE-MV103-1972 Parameters

Name
CODE - Must be specified as SPANISH.
Design Code to follow. See section 5.52.2

of the Technical Reference Manual.

sections to checked along the length of
a beam:

only or at locations specified by a
SECTION command.
1. Calculate moment at 1/10th
points along the beam and
maximum Mz for design
and forces at location of
BEAM 1.0 check.
C1 0 β value as specified in Sections 3.5.5.1

and 3.9.4.1.


Name
C2 0 β value as specified in Sections 3.5.5.1

0
and 3.9.4.1.
CB 1 Controls the check Mcrrs as per Section

5.5.3.
0. Perform this check

1. Do not perform this check.
DFF None "Deflection Length" / Maximum

allowable local deflection
DJ1 Start node Node no. denoting starting point for

of member calculation of "Deflection Length" .
DJ2 End node of member Node no. denoting end point for
calculation of "Deflection Length".
DMAX 25.4 meter Maximum allowable depth of steel

section.
DMIN 0 Minimum allowable depth of steel

section.
ETA 1 Critical Cl. 5.1.3
1. Continue with other code checks,

even if the section fails the check
per this clause
2. Consider the section failed and
cease code checks if the section
fails the check per this clause
FYLD 255 MPa Yield strength of steel.
KY 1.0 K factor in local y axis.
KZ 1.0 K factor in local z axis.
LVV Member Length Member length to be used in Cl. 3.5.5.1.
LY Member Length Compression length in local y axis,

Slenderness ratio = (KY)·(LY)/(r )
y
LZ Member Length Compression length in local z axis,

Slenderness ratio = (KZ)·(LZ)/(r )
z


Name
MAIN 1 Sets the slenderness limit for checks per

Section 3.5.6.
1. Main steel (200)

2. Secondary steel (250)

calculation.
TB 1 Net section factor for tension members,

as applied to Wn per Cl. 4.5.
TRACK 0 Used to control the level of detail in the

output.
0. = Minimum level of detail

1. = Intermediate level of detail
2. = Maximum level of detail
UNF 1 Unsupported length as a fraction of the

UNL Member Length Unsupported length for allowable

bending stress.
18A. Spanish Codes - Concrete Design per EHE

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the Spanish code EHE Española del
Hormigón Estructural (Spanish Structural Concrete).
Design of members per EHE requires the STAAD Eurozone Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.

engineer control over the actual design process. Default values, which are commonly used numbers
in conventional design practice, have been used for simplicity. Table 25A.1 contains a list of available
parameters and their default values.

Table 18A.2-Spanish Concrete Design per EHE Parameters

Name Value
CLB 1.5 in Clear cover to reinforcing bar at bottom of cross

section.
CLS 1.5 in Clear cover to reinforcing bar along the side of the
cross section.
CLT 1.5 in Clear cover to reinforcing bar at top of cross section.
DEPTH YD Depth of the concrete member. This value defaults

to YD as provided under MEMBER PROPERTIES.
EFACE 0.0 Face Distance of face of support from end node of beam.
of Used for shear and torsion calculation.
Support
numbers.
FC 4.0 ksi Specified compressive strength of concrete.
FYMAIN 60 ksi Yield Stress for main reinforcing steel.
FYSEC 60 ksi Yield Stress for secondary reinforcing steel.
MAX Number Maximum main reinforcement bar size.

MAIN 55 bar
MINMAIN Number Minimum main reinforcement bar size

10 bar
MINSEC Number Minimum secondary (stirrup) reinforcement bar

10 bar size.
MMAG 1.0 A factor by which the column design moments will

be magnified.
NSE 12 Number of equally-spaced sections to be considered

CTION in finding critical moments for beam design.
REINF 0.0 Used to specify type of column shear reinforcement:
0. Tied Column.
1. Spiral Column.


Name Value
SFACE 0.0 Distance of face of support from start node of beam.

Used for shear and torsion calculation.

numbers.
TRACK 0.0 Used to specify detail of output:
0. Only minimum details are printed for beam

or column designs.
1. Beam Design: Intermediate level of detail.
Column Design: TRACK 0 output plus

intermediate level of detail.
2. Beam Design: TRACK 1 detail plus steel

required at 1/12th secitons.
Column Design: detailed output.
WIDTH ZD Width of the concrete member. This value defaults

to ZD as provided under MEMBER PROPERTIES.

19
Swedish Codes

19 Swedish Codes

19A. Swedish Codes - Steel Design per BSK 99

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the Swedish code BSK 99 Swedish
Regulations for Steel Structures.
Design of members per BSK 99 requires the STAAD N. Eurozone Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.

to the BSK 99 code. These parameters not only act as a method to input required data for code
Table 19A.1-Swedish Steel Design per BSK 99 Parameters

Name Value
CODE - Must be specified as BSK99.

BEAM 1 (Required) Directs the program to divide the

beam element into 13 equal length sections for
section checks.
BY 1 Buckling length coefficient, β , for buckling

cd
about the weak axis (typically y-y axis).
BZ 1 Buckling length coefficient, β for buckling

cd
about the strong axis (typically z-z axis).
CB 1 The reduction factor, CB, for the critical lateral

buckling moment according to the theory of
elasticity.
CMY 1 Describes the boundary conditions for lateral

buckling.
CMZ 1 Depends on loading and boundary conditions for

bending and controls Mlcr and corresponding
moments.


Name Value
CY 0 Buckling curve coefficient, β , about local y-axis.

1
CZ 0 Buckling curve coefficient, β , about local z-axis.

1
DMAX 1 meter Maximum allowable depth of steel section.
DMIN 0 Minimum allowable depth of steel section.
FYLD 235 MPa Yield strength of steel.
MF 1.15 Material factor and security class factor, γ ·γ .

m n
SSY 0 Calculates the design moment about the y-axis.
SSZ 0 Calculates the design moment about the z-axis.
TRACK 0 Used to control the level of detail in the output.
0. = Suppress critical member

stresses (2 lines/member)
1. = Print all critical member stress

(i.e., design values) (6 lines/beam)
2. = Print von Mises stresses
3. = Member results, sorted by

member number (2 lines/member)
9. = Print detailed report for each

member
31. = Max./min. output for end no. 1
32. = Max./min. output for end no. 2
49. = Joint force output.
98. = Joint capacity.
99. = Joint capacity.
UNL Member Unrestraint length of member used in calculating

Length the lateral-torsional resistance moment of the
member.

19B. Swedish Codes - Concrete Design per BBK 94
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing concrete design based on the Swedish code BBK 94 Swedish
Handbook for Concrete Structures.
Design of members per BBK 94 requires the STAAD N. Eurozone Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.


to the BBK 94 code. These parameters not only act as a method to input required data for code
19B.1 contains a complete list of available parameters with their default values.
Table 19C.1-Swedish Concrete Design per BBK 94 Parameters

Name Value
CODE - Must be specified as SWEDISH.

ACTAGE 70 Actual age of concrete, in years.
BRACE 0.0 Bracing parameter for design:
0. Beam or column braced in both directions

1. One-way plate or column braced in only
the local Z direction.
direction.

current units.
DRYCIR 100 Drying exposure, in percent.

current units.

numbers.

column design.


Name Value

column design.
FC 35 N/mm 2 Compressive strength of concrete.
FYMAIN 500 N/mm 2 Yield strength of main reinforcing steel.
MAX 32 Maximum size permitted for main reinforcement

MAIN bar.
MINMAIN 10 Minimum size permitted for main reinforcement

bar.
MOY moy factor
MOZ moz factor
NMAG nmag factor
RELHUM 40 Relative humidity, in percent.

SFACE 0 Distance from the start node of the beam to face

of support for shear design.

numbers.


Name Value

limit state design & Slab — Two-way plate
design
limit state design with tension stiffening.

20
American Aluminum Code
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing aluminum member design based on the ASD 1994
Specifications for Aluminum Structures, Sixth Edition (October, 1994).
Design of members per ASD 1994 requires the STAAD US Specialized Design Codes SELECT Code
Pack.
20A.1 Member Properties

In order to do this design in STAAD, the members in the structure must have their properties
specified from Section VI of the above-mentioned manual. The section names are mentioned in
Tables 5 through 28 of that manual. All of those tables except Table 10 (Wing Channels) and Table
20 (Bulb Angles) are available in STAAD.
Described below is the command specification for various sections:
20A.1.1 Standard single section

memb-list TA ST section-name
Example
1 TO 5 TA ST CS12X11.8
9 TA ST I8.00X13.1
11 33 45 67 TA ST LS8.00X8.00X0.625
18 TA ST 1.50PipeX160
15 TA ST T(A-N)6.00X8.00X11.2
23 25 29 TA ST 20X12RectX.500Wall
20A.1.2 Double channel back-to-back

memb-list TA BACK section-name SPACING value
Example
3 TA BACK C(A-N)7X3.61 SPACING 1.5
5 TA BACK C15X17.33 SP 0.75

20 American Aluminum Code
20A.2 Double channel front-to-front
20A.2 Double channel front-to-front

memb-list TA FRONT section-name SPACING value
Example
2 TA FRONT CS12X10.3 SP 1.0
4 TA FR CS10X10.1 SP 0.5
20A.2.1 Double angle long leg back-to-back

memb-list TA LD section-name SPACING value
Example
14 TA LD LS4.00X3.00X0.375 SP 1.5
20A.2.2 Double angle short leg back-to-back

memb-list TA SD section-name SPACING value
Example
12 TA SD L3.5X3X0.5 SP 0.25
13 TA SD L8X6X0.75 SP 1.0
20A.3 Design Procedure

The design is done according to the rules specified in Sections 4.1, 4.2 and 4.4 on pages I-A-41 and
I-A-42 of the Aluminum code. The allowable stresses for the various sections are computed
according to the equations shown in Section 3.4.1 through 3.4.21 on pages I-A-27 through I-A-40.
The adequacy of the member is checked by calculating the value of the left-hand side of equations
4.1.1-1, 4.1.1-2, 4.1.1-3, 4.1.2-1, 4.4-1 and 4.4-2. This left-hand side value is termed as RATIO. If the
highest RATIO among these equations turns out to be less than or equal to 1.0, the member is
declared as having PASSed. If it exceeds 1.0, the member has FAILed the design requirements.
Note: The check for torsion per Clause 4.3 for open sections is currently not implemented in
STAAD.Pro.

The following are the parameters for specifying the values for variables associated with the design.

Table 20A.1-Aluminum Design Parameters

Name
CODE - Must be specified as ALUMINUM

Manual.
ALCLAD 0 Defines if material is Alclad.
0 - Material used in the

section is not an Alclad.
1 - Material used in the

section is an Alclad.
ALLOY 34 This variable can take on a value from 1

through 40. The default value represents
the alloy 6061-T6.
See Table 14A.2 below for a list of values for

this parameter and the alloy they represent.
Table 3.3-1 in Section I-B of the Aluminum
specifications provides information on the
properties of the various alloys.
BEAM 0.0 If this parameter is set to 1.0, the adequacy

of the member is determined by checking a
total of 13 equally spaced locations along
the length of the member. If the BEAM
value is 0.0, the 13 location check is not
conducted, and instead, checking is done
only at the locations specified by the
SECTION command (See STAAD manual
for details). If neither the BEAM parameter
nor any SECTION command is specified,
STAAD will terminate the run and ask the
user to provide one of those 2 commands.
This rule is not enforced for TRUSS
members.
DMAX 1000 in. Maximum depth permissible for the section



Name
DMIN 0.0 in Minimum depth required for the section

KT 1.0 Effective length factor for torsional

completely prevented from torsional
twisting for determining the allowable
stress in axial compression.
See Equation 3.4.7.2-6 on page I-A-28 of the

Aluminum specifications for details.
KY 1.0 Effective length factor for overall column

buckling in the local Y-axis. It is a fraction
determining the allowable stress in axial
compression.
KZ 1.0 Effective length factor for overall column

buckling in the local Z-axis. It is a fraction
compression.
LT Member length Unbraced length for twisting. It is input in

compression. See Equation 3.4.7.2-6 on page
I-A-28 of the Aluminum specifications for
details.


Name
LY Member length Effective length for overall column buckling

in the local Y-axis. It is input in the current
units of length. Values can range from 0.01
compression.
LZ Member length Effective length for overall column buckling

in the local Z-axis. It is input in the current
units of length. Values can range from 0.01
compression.
PRODUCT 1 This variable can take on a value from 1

through 4. They represent:
1 - All
2 - Extrusions
3 - Drawn Tube
4 - Pipe
The default value stands for All. The

PRODUCT parameter finds mention in
Table 3.3-1 in Section I-B of the Aluminum
specifications.


Name
SSY 0.0 Factor that indicates whether or not the

structure is subjected to sidesway along the
local Y axis of the member. The values are:
0 - Sidesway is present along

the local Y-axis of the
member
1 - There is no sidesway
along the local Y-axis of the
member.
The sidesway condition is used to

determine the value of Cm explained in
Section 4.1.1, page I-A-41 of the Aluminum
specifications.
SSZ 0.0 Factor that indicates whether or not the

structure is subjected to sidesway along the
local Z axis of the member. The values are:
0 - Sidesway is present along

the local Z-axis of the
member
1 - There is no sidesway
along the local Z-axis of the
member.
The sidesway condition is used to

determine the value of Cm explained in
Section 4.1.1, page I-A-41 of the Aluminum
specifications.
STIFF Member length Spacing in the longitudinal direction of

shear stiffeners for stiffened flat webs. It is
input in the current units of length. See
section 3.4.21 on page I-A-40 of the
Aluminum specifications for information
regarding this parameter.


Name
STR 1 In Table 3.4-1 in Section I-A of the

UCTURE Aluminum specifications, it is mentioned
that the value of coefficients nu, ny and na
are dependent upon whether the structure
being designed is a building or a bridge.
Users may convey this information to
STAAD using the parameter STRUCTURE.
The values that can be assigned to this
parameter are:
1 - Buildings and similar

type structures
2 - Bridges and similar type

structures

values are:
1 - Prints only the member

number, section name, ratio,
and PASS/FAIL status.
2 - Prints the design

summary in addition to that
printed by TRACK 1
3 - Prints the member

properties and alloy properties
in addition to that printed
byTRACK 2.
4 - Prints the values of

variables used in design in
addition to that printed by
TRACK 3.
UNL Member length Distance between points where the

compression flange is braced against
buckling or twisting. This value must be
provided in the current units. This value is
used to compute the allowable stress in
bending compression.


Name
WELD 0 In Table 3.4-2 in Section I-A of the

Aluminum specifications, it is mentioned
that the value of coefficients Kt and Kc are
dependent upon whether or not, the
location of the section where design is done
is within 1.0 inch of a weld. The WELD
parameter is used in STAAD for this
purpose. The values that can be assigned to
this parameter are:
0 - Region is farther than 1.0in

from a weld
1 - Region is within 1.0in from

a weld
20A.4.1 Aluminum Alloys available in STAAD

Table 20A.2-Alloy Parameters
Value Name
1 1100-H12
2 1100-H14
3 2014-T6
4 2014-T6510
5 2014-T6511
6 2014-T651
7 3003-H12
8 3003-H14
9 3003-H16
10 3003-H18
11 3004-H32
12 3004-H34
13 3004-H36

Value Name
14 3004-H38
15 5005-H12
16 5005-H14
17 5005-H32
18 5005-H34
19 5050-H32
20 5050-H34
21 5052-H32
22 5052-H34
23 5083-H111
24 5086-H111
25 5086-H116
26 5086-H32
27 5086-H34
28 5454-H111
29 5454-H112
30 5456-H111
31 5456-H112
32 6005-T5
33 6105-T5
34 6061-T6
35 6061-T6510
36 6061-T6511
37 6061-T651
38 6063-T5
39 6063-T6
40 6351-T5

20A.5 Code Checking
20A.5 Code Checking

The purpose of code checking is to determine whether the initially specified member properties are
adequate to carry the forces transmitted to the member due to the loads on the structure. Code
checking is done at the locations specified by either the SECTION command or the BEAM parameter
described above.
Checking command.
Example Problem 1 in the Getting Started and Tutorials Manual for STAAD provides an example on
the usage of the CHECK CODE command.
20A.5.1 Example
Sample input data for Aluminum Design
PARAMETER
CODE ALUMINUM
BEAM 1 ALL
KY 1.2 MEMB 3 4
ALLOY 35 ALL
PRODUCT 2 ALL
TRACK 3 ALL
SELECT ALL
ALCLAD 1 ALL
STRUCT 1 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
20A.6 Member Selection

The member selection process involves the determination of the least weight member that PASSes
the code checking procedure based on the forces and moments of the most recent analysis. The
section selected will be of the same type as that specified initially. For example, a member specified
initially as a channel will have a channel selected for it.
Example Problem 1 in the Getting Started and Tutorials Manual for STAAD provides an example on
the usage of the SELECT MEMBER command.

21
American Transmission Tower
Code

21 American Transmission Tower Code

21A.1 General Comments
21A. American Transmission Tower Code - Steel Design per

ASCE 10-97
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the American Transmission Tower code
ASCE 10-97 Design of Latticed Steel Transmission Structures.
Design of members per ASCE 10-97 requires the STAAD US Std Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.

The ASCE 10-97 code is meant to supercede the older edition of the code, available under the name
ASCE Publication 52. However, in the interests of backward compatibility, both codes are currently
accessible in STAAD.Pro.
Design is available for all standard sections listed in the AISC ASD 9th edition manual, namely,
Wide Flanges, S, M, HP, Tees, Channels, Single Angles, Double Angles, Tubes and Pipes. Design of
HSS sections (those listed in the 3rd edition AISC LRFD manual) and Composite beams (I shapes
with concrete slab on top) is not supported.
To use the ASCE 52 code, use the commands

PARAMETER
CODE ASCE 52
To use the ASCE 10-97 code, use the commands

PARAMETER
CODE ASCE
The detailing requirements, such as provisioning of stiffeners and checking the local effects like
flange buckling, web crippling, etc. must be performed manually. It is assumed that you are
familiar with the basic concepts of Steel Design facilities available in STAAD. Please refer to
Section 2 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual for detailed information on this topic.
21A.2 Allowable Stresses per ASCE 10-97

Member selection and code checking operations in the STAAD implementation of ASCE 10-97 are
done to resist loads at stresses approaching yielding, buckling, fracture and other limiting
conditions specified in the standard. Those stresses are referred to in the standard as Design
Stresses. The appropriate sections of the ASCE standard where the procedure for calculating the
design stresses is explained are as follows.
21A.2.1 Design Axial Tensile Stress

Design tensile stresses are calculated on the basis of the procedure described in section 3.10. The
NSF parameter (see the Parameters table shown later in this section) may be used if the section area
needs to be reduced to account for bolt holes.

21A.3 Critical Conditions used as criteria to determine Pass/Fail status
21A.2.2 Design Axial Compressive Stress

Design compressive stress calculation is based on the procedures of section 3.6 through 3.9. For
angle members under compression, the procedures of sections 3.7 and 3.8 have been implemented.
Capacity of the section is computed for column buckling and wherever applicable, torsional
buckling. The user may control the effective lengths for buckling using the LT, LY, LZ and/or KT,
KY, KZ parameters (see the Parameters table shown later in this section).
21A.2.3 Design Bending Compressive Stress

Calculations for design bending compressive stress about the major axis and minor axis are based
on the procedures of section 3.14. Procedures outlined in sections 3.14.1 through 3.14.6 have been
implemented.
21A.2.4 Design Bending Tensile Stress

Calculations for design bending tensile stress about the major and minor axis are based on the
procedures of section 3.14.2.
21A.2.5 Design Shear Stress

Calculation of the design shear stress is based on the procedure outlined in section 3.15 of the ASCE
10-97. The procedure of section 3.15.2 is followed for angles and the procedure of section 3.15.1 is
followed for all other sections.
21A.3 Critical Conditions used as criteria to determine Pass/Fail

status
These are Clause 3.4 for slenderness limits, Clause 3.12 for Axial Compression and Bending, Clause
3.13 for Axial Tension and Bending, Clause 3.9.2 for Maximum w/t ratios and Clause 3.15 for Shear.

Design parameters are summarized in the table shown later in this section. These parameters may
be used to control the design process to suit specific modeling needs. The default parameter values
have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for conventional design.

Table 21A.1-Steel Design Parameters for ASCE 10-97

Name
CODE - Must be specified as ASCE to design per ASCE

10-97.

Manual.
BEAM 1.0 0 = Perform design at beam ends and section

locations specified according to the
SECTION command
1 = Perform design at the ends and eleven

intermediate sections of the beam
CMY 0.85 for Cm value in local y and z axes as defined in

sidesway and equation 3.12-1 on p.10 of ASCE 10-97.
CMZ
calculated for
no sidesway
DMAX 45.0 in. Maximum allowable depth for member

selection
DBL 0.75 in. Diameter of bolt for calculation of number of

bolts required and the net section factor.
DMIN 0.0 in. Minimum allowable depth for member

selection
ELA 4 Indicates what type of end conditions are to

be used from among Equations 3.7-4 thru 3.7-
7 to determine the KL/R ratio.
1. EQN.3.7-4, Page 4
Note: Valid for leg members only.
2. EQN.3.7-5, Page 4
3. EQN.3.7-6, Page 4
4. EQN.3.7-7, Page 5


Name
ELB 1 Indicates what type of end conditions are to

be used from among Equations. 3.7-8 thru
3.7-10 and 3.7-12 thru 3.7-14 to determine the
KL/R ratio.
1. EQN.3.7-8, Page 5, EQN.3.7-12, Page 5

2. EQN.3.7-9, Page 5, EQN.3.7-13, Page 5
3. EQN.3.7-10, Page 5, EQN.3.7-14,Page 5
FVB 30 KSI Shear strength of bolt.
FYB 36 KSI Yield strength of bolt.
FYLD 36.0 KSI Yield Strength of steel
KT 1.0 Effective length coefficient for warping

restraint (clause 3.14.4, p. 11)
KY 1.0 Effective length factor (K) for compression

buckling about the Y-axis (minor axis)
KZ 1.0 Effective length factor (K) for compression

buckling about the Z-axis (major axis)
LEG 0.0 This parameter is meant for plain angles.
0. indicates that the angle is connected

by both legs and allowable stress in
axial tension is 1.0FYLD.
only by the shorter leg and allowable
tensile stress is computed per clause
3.10.2 as 0.9FYLD.
by the longer leg.
LT Member Effective length for warping.

Length
LY Member Length to calculate slenderness ratio for

Length buckling about the Y-axis (minor axis)
LZ Member Length to calculate slenderness ratio for

Length buckling about the Z-axis (major axis)


Name
MAIN 2 Parameter that indicates the member type for

the purpose of calculating the KL/R ratio
(SEE CLAUSE 3.4, PAGE 3, ASCE 10-97)
1. Leg member, KL/R ≤ 150

2. Compression member, KL/R ≤ 200
3. Tension member, KL/R ≤ 500
4. Hanger member, KL/R ≤ 375 (Clause
3C.4, page 31)
5. Redundant member, KL/R ≤ 250
10. Do not perform the KL/R Check
NHL 0 Number of bolt holes on the cross section

that should be used to determine the net
section factor for tension capacity.
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio that determines the cut off

point for pass/fail status. A value below this
quantity indicates PASS while a value greater
than this quantity indicates FAILURE.
SSY 0.0 0.0 = Sidesway in local y-axis
1.0 = No sidesway
SSZ 0.0 Same as above except in local z-axis
TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Suppresses printing of allowable

stresses
1.0 = Prints all allowable stresses
UNB Member Unsupported length of the bottom flange for

Length calculating flexural strength. Will be used
only if flexural compression is on the bottom
flange.
UNF 1.0 Same as UNL, but provided as a fraction of the

member length
UNL Member Unsupported length of member for

Length calculation of
allowable bending stress

21A.5 Code Checking and Member Selection

Name
UNT Member Unsupported length of the top flange for

Length calculating flexural strength. Will be used
only if flexural compression is on the top
flange.
Note: All values must be provided in the current unit system.

Both code checking and member selection options are available in the ASCE 10-97 implementation.
In general, it may be noted that the concepts followed in MEMBER SELECTION and CODE CHECKING
procedures are similar to that of the AISC based design.
Checking command.

21B. American Transmission Tower Code - Steel Design per

ASCE Manuals and Reports
STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the ASCE Manuals and Reports on
Engineering Practice No. 52 – Guide for Design of Steel Transmission Towers, Second Edition
Design of members per ASCE 10-97 requires the STAAD US Std Design Codes SELECT Code Pack.

The design philosophy and procedural logistics for member selection and code checking is based
upon the principles of allowable stress design. Two major failure modes are recognized: failure by
overstressing and failure by stability considerations.
The following sections describe the salient features regarding the process of calculation of the
relevant allowable stresses and the stability criteria being used. Members are proportioned to resist
the design loads without exceeding the allowable stresses and the most economical section is
selected based on the least weight criteria. The code checking part of the program also checks the
slenderness requirements, the minimum metal thickness requirements, and the width-thickness
requirements.
The detailing requirements, such as provisioning of stiffeners and checking the local effects like
flange buckling, web crippling, etc. must be performed manually. It is assumed that you are
familiar with the basic concepts of Steel Design facilities available in STAAD. Please refer to
Section 2 of the STAAD Technical Reference Manual for detailed information on this topic.
21B.2 Allowable Stresses per ASCE (Pub. 52)

The member design and code checking in the STAAD implementation of ASCE (Pub. 52) is based
upon the allowable stress design method. Appropriate sections of this publication are referenced
below.
21B.2.1 Allowable Axial Tensile Stress

Allowable tensile stresses are calculated on the basis of the procedure described in section 4.10. The
NSF parameter (See "Design Parameters" on page 796) may be used if the net section area needs to
be used.
21B.2.2 Allowable Axial Compressive Stress

Allowable compressive stress calculation is based on the procedures of section 4.6 through 4.9. For
angle members under compression, the procedures of sections 4.7 and 4.8 have been implemented.
Capacity of the section is computed for column buckling and wherever applicable, torsional

buckling. The user may control the effective lengths for buckling using the LX, LY, LZ and/or KX, KY,
KZ parameters (See "Design Parameters" on page 796).
21B.2.3 Allowable Bending Compressive Stress

Calculations for allowable bending compressive stress about the major axis and minor axis are based
on the procedures of section 4.14. Procedures outlined in sections 4.14.1 through 4.14.6 have been
implemented.
21B.2.4 Allowable Bending Tensile Stress

Calculations for allowable bending tensile stress about the major and minor axis are based on the
procedures of Section 4.14.2.
21B.2.5 Allowable Shear Stress

Calculation of the allowable shear stress is based on the procedure outlined in section 4.15 of the
ASCE Pub. 52. The procedure of section 4.15.2 is followed for angles and the procedure of section
4.15.1 is followed for all other sections.
21B.2.6 Critical Conditions used as criteria to determine Pass/Fail

status
These are Clause 4.4 for slenderness limits, Equation 4.12-1 for Axial Compression and Bending,
Equation 4.13-1 for Axial Tension and Bending, Clause 4.9.2 for Maximum w/t ratios and Clause 4.15
for Shear.

These parameters may be used to control the design process to suit specific modeling needs. The
default parameter values have been selected such that they are frequently used numbers for
conventional design.
Table 21B.1-Steel Design Parameters for ASCE (Pub. 52) Based Design
Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
Must be specified as ASCE 52.

CODE - Design Code to follow. See section 5.52.2 of the

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
Specifies locations along member length at which

member design is deisgned.
BEAM 0.0 2.0 = use the section locations specified

according to the SECTION command
3.0 = at the ends and eleven intermediate
sections of the beam
Diameter of bolt for calculation of number of bolts

DBL 0.75 in.
required and the net section factor.
DMAX 45.0 in. Maximum allowable depth for member selection
DMIN 0.0 in. Minimum allowable depth for member selection
Indicates what type of end conditions are to be used

from among Equations 4.7-4 thru 4.7-7 to
determine the KL/R ratio.
ELA 4 1 = EQN.4.7-4, Page 26 (Valid for leg members

only)
2 = EQN.4.7-5, Page 27
3 = EQN.4.7-6, Page 27
4 = EQN.4.7-7, Page 27
Indicates what type of end conditions are to be used

from among Equations. 4.7-8 thru 4.7-10 to
determine the KL/R ratio.
ELB 1
1 = EQN.4.7-8, Page 27, EQN.4.7-12, Page 28
2 = EQN.4.7-9, Page 27, EQN.4.7-13, Page 28
3 = EQN.4.7-10, Page 27, EQN.4.7-14,Page28
FVB 30 KSI Shear strength of bolt.
FYB 36 KSI Yield strength of bolt.
FYLD 36.0 KSI Yield Strength of steel
Effective length coefficient for warping restraint

KT 1.0
(clause 4.14.4, pg 36)
Effective length factor (K) for compression buckling

KY 1.0
about the Y-axis (minor axis)
Effective length factor (K) for compression buckling

KZ 1.0
about the Z-axis (major axis)

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
This parameter is meant for plain angles.
3.0 = the angle is connected by both legs and

allowable stress in axial tension is 1.0·FYLD
LEG 0.0 4.0 = the angle is connected only by the shorter
leg and allowable tensile stress is computed per
Cl. 4.10.2 as 0.9·FYLD
5.0 = the angle is connected by the longer leg
Member
LT Effective length for warping.
Length
Member Length to calculate slenderness ratio for buckling

LY
Length about the Y-axis (minor axis)
Member Length to calculate slenderness ratio for buckling

LZ
Length about the Z-axis (major axis)
Parameter that indicates the member type for the

purpose of calculating the KL/R ratio (See Cl. 4.4, p.
25)
1 = Leg member (KL/r ≤ 150)

MAIN 2 2 = Compression member (KL/r ≤ 200)
3 = Tension member (KL/r ≤ 500)
4 = Hanger member per Cl. 4C.4, p. 43 (KL/r ≤
375)
5 = Redundant member (KL/r ≤ 250)
10 = Do not perform the slenderness (KL/r) check
Number of bolt holes on the cross section that

NHL 0 should be used to determine the net section factor
for tension capacity.
Permissible ratio that determines the cut off point

for pass/fail status. A value below this
RATIO 1.0
quantity indicates PASS while a value greater than
this quantity indicates FAILURE.
Level of detail in output

TRACK 0.0 0.0 = Suppresses printing of allowable stresses
1.0 = Prints all allowable stresses
Same as UNL, but provided as a fraction of the

UNF 1.0
member length

Parameter Default
Description
Name Value
Member Unsupported length of member for calculation of

UNL
Length allowable bending stress

Both code checking and member selection options are available in the ASCE Pub. 52
implementation. In general, it may be noted that the concepts followed in MEMBER SELECTION and
CODE CHECKING procedures are similar to that of the AISC based design.
Checking command.

22
Steel Design per American
Petroleum Institute Code
The API Steel Design facility in STAAD is based on the API 2A-WSD standard, titled Recommended
Practice for Planning, Design and Constructing Fixed Offshore Platforms-Working Stress Design,
21st Edition (December 2000). Joint checks includes “Errata and Supplements” 1, 2 & 3 of the code.

STAAD contains a broad set of facilities for the design of structural members as individual
components of an analyzed structure. The member design facilities provide the user with the
ability to carry out a number of different design operations. These facilities may be used selectively
in accordance with the requirements of the design problem. The operations to perform a design
are:
l Specify the members and the load cases to be considered in the design;
l Specify whether to perform code checking or member selection;
l Specify design parameter values, if different from the default values; and
l Specify design parameters to carry out joint checks.
These operations may be repeated any number of times depending upon the design requirements.
The basic process is as follows:
1. Define the STAAD model geometry, loading, and analysis.
2. Run the analysis and API design which creates the Geometry file (file extension .PUN) and
give preliminary design results.
3. Check and modify the Geometry file as necessary.
4. Re-run the analysis to read the modified Geometry file for the final design results.

22 Steel Design per American Petroleum Institute Code
22A.2 Allowables per API Code
22A.1.1 Limitations
The parameter SELECT 1.0 should not be used while carrying out punching shear checks. It can
be used in initial runs for member selection.
No classification of the joint is performed using the loading. For the initial run of an API code
check, all joints will be assumed to be a T/Y joint. See "Joint Design" for details.
No hydrostatic checks are performed.
22A.1.2 Truss Members

A truss member is capable of carrying only axial force. So in design, no time is wasted calculating
the allowable bending or shear stresses, thus reducing design time considerably. Therefore, if there
is any truss member in an analysis (like bracing or strut, etc.), it is wise to declare it as a truss
member rather than as a regular frame member with both ends pinned.

For steel design, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the allowable stresses as defined by the
American Petroleum Institute (API-RP2A) Code. The 21st edition of API Code, as published in
2007, is used as the basis of this design (except for tension stress).
22A.2.1 Tension Stress

Allowable tension stresses, as calculated in STAAD, are based on the API Code, clause (3.2.1-1).
Allowable tension stress on the net section
Ft = 0.60·Fy
22A.2.2 Shear Stress
Beam Shear Stress
Allowable beam shear stress on the gross section must conform to Clause 3.2.4-2 of the API code:
Fv = 0.4·Fy
The maximum applied beam shear stress is per Eqn 3.2.4-1:
fv = V / 0.5 A
Torsional Shear Stress
Allowable torsional shear stress per Eqn. 3.2.4-4:

Fvt = 0.4·Fy
F is the maximum torsional shear stress per Clause 3.2.4-3 of the API code.
vt
22A.2.3 Stress Due to Compression

The allowable compressive stress on the gross section of axially loaded compression members is
calculated based on the formula 3.2.2-1 in the API Code when the largest effective slenderness ratio,
Kl/r is less than or equal to C . If Kl/r exceeds C , then the allowable compressive stress is increased
c c
as per formula (3.2.2-2) of the Code.
Where:
E
Cc = 2π 2
Fy
For D/t > 60, the lesser of F or F is substituted for F .

xe xc xy
Where:
F = the elastic local buckling stress calculated with C, the critical elastic buckling
xe
coefficient = 0.3 (3.2.2-3)
F = the inelastic local buckling stress. (3.2.2-4)

xc
22A.2.4 Combined Compression and Bending

Members subjected to both axial compression and bending stresses are proportioned to satisfy API
formula 3.3.1-1 and 3.3.1-2 when fa/Fa > 0.15, otherwise formula 3.3.1-3 applies. It should be noted
that during code checking or member selection, if fa/Fa > 1.0, the program does not compute the
second 3.3.1-1/2.
22A.2.5 Bending Stress

The allowable bending stress for tension and compression for a symmetrical member loaded in the
plane of its minor axis, as given in Clause 3.2.3 of the API code, is:
a. When D/t ≤ 1,500/Fy (Imperial Units),
Fb = 0.75Fy
b. When 1,500/Fy < D/t ≤ 3,000/Fy (Imperial Units),
Fb = [0.84 - 1.74 Fy D/(Et)]Fy
c. When 3,000/Fy < D/t ≤ 300 (Imperial Units),
Fb = [0.72 - 0.58 Fy D/(Et)]Fy
22A.2.6 Simple Joints: Capacity Checks

A typical joint and the terms involved with the joint checks are given below:

Figure 22A.1 - Simple joint diagram
Definitions
θ = Brace included rage
g = Gap between braces
t = Brace wall thickness at intersection
T = Chord wall thickness at intersection
d = Brace outside diameter
D = Chord outside diameter
β = d/D
γ = D/(2T)
τ = t/T
Joint Validity
The validity range of the joints that are identified will be checked as per Cl. 4.3.1 of the code. The
conditions to be checked for each joint are as given below:
0.2 ≤ β ≤ 1.0
10 ≤ γ ≤ 50
30° ≤ θ ≤ 90°
F = 90 ksi (500 MPa)

y

g/D > -0.6 (for K joints)
If any of these conditions are not satisfied for the joint under consideration, the programissues a
warning message corresponding to the invalid parameter(s). The program will, however, perform
the joint checks as the code allows for the design of such joints with modified values of yield
strength. You can use the FYLD parameter to reset the yield strength.
Joint Capacity
The capacity of the joint, both the axial capacity and the moment capacity is
The allowable capacity for brace axial load, P , is evaluated as:

a
2
F ycT
Pa = Q uQ f
FSJsinθ
The allowable capacity for brace bending moment, M , is evaluated as:

a
2
F ycT d
M a = Q uQ f
FSJsinθ
Where:
F = the yield stress of the chord member at the joint (or 0.8 of the tensile stress, if
y
less)
FSJ = the factor of safety parameter (1.6 by default)
Q and Q are the strength factor and the Chord factor that are to be determined
u f
based on the joint type. The strength factor, Q , is to be determined as given in
u
Section 4.3.3 of the code (ref. Table. 4.3-1 of the API code).
  FSJPc   FSJM c  2
Q f = 1 + C1  − C2 M  − C3A 
  y 
P  p  
2 2
 FSJPc   FSJM c 
A=   + 
 Py   M p 
P = axial load
c
2 2
M c = M ipb + M opb
C , C , and C are factors determined by the following table:

1 2 3
Joint Type C C C
1 2 3
K joints under brace axial loading 0.2 0.2 0.3
T/Y joints under brace axial loading 0.3 0 0.8

Joint Type C C C
1 2 3
X joints under brace β ≤ 0.9 0.2 0 0.5

axial loading β = 1.0 -0.2 0 0.4
All joints under brace moment loading 0.2 0 0.4
Note: For values of β between 0.9 and 1.0, coefficients are linearly interpolated between listed
values.
For joints that are a mixture of K, X, or Y joints, the capacity of the joint is evaluated as a weighted
average of the capacities of each joint.
In case the joint is subjected to combined axial load and bending moments (in-plane and/or out-
of-plane), the program performs the following interaction check as given by Cl 4.3.6 of the code:
2
P
Pa
+ ( )
M
M a ipb
+
M
Ma
opb
≤ 1.0

and code checks. These parameter names, with their default values, are listed in Table 22A.1. These
parameters communicate design decisions from the engineer to the program.
conventional design. Depending on the particular design requirements for an analysis, some or all
of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the physical structure. For
example, by default the KZ value (k value in local z-axis) of a member is set to 1.0, wile in the real
structure it may be 1.5. In that case, the KZ value in the program can be changed to 1.5, as shown in
the input instruction (Section 5). Similarly, the TRACK value of a member is set to 0.0, which means
no allowable stresses of the member will be printed.
Table 22A.1-American (API) Steel Design Parameters

Name
CODE - Must be specified as API

Reference Manual.


Name
BEAM 1.0 Beam parameter:
0.0 = design only for end

moments or those at
locations specified by
the SECTION
command.
1.0 = calculate moments

at twelfth points along
the beam, and use the
maximum Mz location
for design.
2.0 = Same for BEAM 1.0,

but additional check is
made at each end.
CB 1.0 Cb value as used in Section 1.5 of AISC
0.0 = Cb value to be calculated
Any other value will mean the value

to be used in design

and calculated
CMZ
for no sidesway
DMAX 100.0 in Maximum allowable depth
DMIN 0.0 Minimum allowable depth
FSJ 1.6 Factor of safety used for joint checks.
FYLD 36 ksi Yield strength of steel.
KY 1.0 K value in local y-axis. Typically the

minor axis.
KZ 1.0 K value in local z-axis. Typically the

major axis.
LY Member Length Length in local Y-axis to calculate

slenderness ratio.
LZ Member Length Length in local Z-axis to calculate

slenderness ratio.


Name
MAIN 0.0 Design for slenderness.
1.0 = Main member
2.0 = Secondary member

members.
RATIO 1.0 Permissible ratio of the actual to

allowable stresses
SSY 0.0 Design for sidesway.
0.0 = Sidesway in local

y-axis
1.0 = No sidesway
SSZ 0.0 Design for sidesway in local z-axis
TRACK 0.0 Controls the level of detail in the

output:
0.0 = Print design

output at the minimum
level of detail.
1.0 = Print all critical

member stresses
2.0 =
3.0 =
100.0 = Suppress all checks except

punching shear
UNF 1.0 Same as above provided as a fraction

of actual member length
UNL Member Length Unsupported length for calculating

allowable bending stress

22A.4 Code Checking

Name
WELD 1 Weld type, as explained in section 3.1.1

of the API code.
1.0 = Welding is one side

only except for wide
flange or tee sections,
where the web is always
assumed to be welded
on both sides.
2. 0 = Welding is both
sides. For closed sections
like pipe or tube, the
welding will be only on
one side.
WMIN 1.16 in. Minimum thickness
WSTR 0.4 X FLYD Allowable welding stress
Note: The parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used for member selection.
22A.4 Code Checking

members are adequate as per API. Code checking is done using the forces and moments at specific
sections of the members. If no sections are specified, the program uses the start and end forces for
code checking.
passed or failed the checks, the critical condition of API code (like any of the API specifications for
compression, tension, shear, etc.), the value of the ratio of the critical condition (overstressed for
value more than 1.0 or any other specified RATIO value), the governing load case, and the location
(distance from the start of the number of forces in the member) where the critical condition
occurs.
Code checking can be done with any type of steel section listed in Section 2.2 of the Technical
Reference manual.
Checking command.


The program is capable of performing design operations on specified members. Once an analysis
has been performed, the program can select the most economical section, i.e., the lightest section
which fulfills the code requirements for the specified member. The section selected will be of the
same type section as originally designated for the member being designed. Member selection can
also be constrained by the parameters DMAX and DMIN which limits the maximum and minimum
depth of the members.
l Member selection can be performed with all types of hollow steel sections.
l Selection of members whose properties are originally input from a user created table will be
l Member selection cannot be performed on members whose section properties are input as
prismatic.
22A.6 Chord Selection and Q Parameter

f
Q is a factor to account for the presence of nominal longitudinal stress in the chord. When
f
calculating Q for the joints, the moments used in the chord stress calculation will be from the
f
computer node results and not the representative moments underneath the brace. If the moment
varies significantly along the chord, it is more accurate to use the actual chord moment in the
middle of the brace foot print. The tests reported in Reference I [1] were performed with a constant
moment along the chord. Thus for a local joint check, the local chord moment (under the brace)
should be used.
STAAD calculates Q based on the moment at the chord member. The chord member can be
f
selected automatically by initial screening by the program (based on geometry and independent of
loading) or specified in the External file.
In the automatic selection of the chord two collinear members (5 degree tolerance) are used to
identify the chord. The chord is then selected from one of the two members based on the larger
diameter then thickness or then by the minimum framing angle; for T joints the first member
modeled will be selected as the chord.
You should confirm that the chord either be assigned by the program or the user is representative
of the local chord moment for the brace in question.
22A.6.1 Reference
1 Ref I: Boone, TJ. Yura, JA. and Hoadley, PW. Ultimate Strength if Tubular Joints – Chord Stress
Effects, OTC 4828, 1984

22A.7 Tabulated Results of Steel Design

Member
the member number for which the design is performed.
TABLE
AISC steel section name which has been checked against the steel code or has been
selected.
RESULTS
prints whether the member has PASSed or FAILed. If the RESULT is FAIL, there will be
CRITICAL COND
the section of the AISC code which governs the design.
RATIO
LOADING
provides the load case number which governed the design.
FX, MY, and MZ
provide the axial force, moment in local Y-axis, and the moment in local Z-axis
respectively. Although STAAD does consider all the member forces and moments
(except torsion) to perform design, only FX, MY and MZ are printed since they are the
ones which are of interest, in most cases.
LOCATION
forces govern.
print the allowable bending stressed in compression (FCY & FCZ) and tension (FTY & FTZ),
allowable axial stress in compression (FA), and allowable shear stress (FV).
22A.7.1 Example of Member Code Check output

For TRACK 0.0 output:
STAAD.Pro CODE CHECKING - (API )
***********************
PROGRAM CODE REVISION V21_API_2000/1


FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
PASS API 3.3.1-2 0.024 2
2.76 T 0.00 5.12 3.00
PASS API 3.3.1-3 0.078 2
98.14 C 0.00 5.12 0.00
For TRACK 1.0 or TRACK 2.0 output:

PASS API 3.3.1-3 0.130 2
67.16 C 0.00 0.29 4.24
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| MEMB= 14, UNIT NEW-MMS ,L= 4243. AX= 4670. SZ= 208157. SY= 208157.|
| KL/R-Y= 64.6 CB= 1.00 YLD= 248.21 ALLOWABLE STRESSES: FCZ= 186.2 |
| FTZ= 186.2 FCY= 186.2 FTY= 186.2 FA= 117.6 FT= 148.9 FV= 99.3 |
|-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
22A.7.2 Example of Joint Check output

STAAD.Pro - API JOINT CHECKS TO 21st edition.
---------------------------------------------------
NODE NO: 7 CHORD NO: 7 BRACE NO: 10 RATIO: 0.049 PASS

STAAD.Pro - API JOINT CHECKS TO 21st edition.
---------------------------------------------------
======================================================================
NODE NO : 7 CHORD NO: 7 BRACE NO: 13
======================================================================
DESIGN DATA : (Units : N , mm )
Chord Memb : D = 406.40 T = 10.01
Brace Memb : d = 193.70 t = 8.00
Angle (THETA) = 45.0 deg GAP = 50.80 Fyc = 248.2
BETA = 0.48 GAMMA = 20.30 TAU = 0.80
JOINT CLASS : X + Y Contributions: 0.% K, 50.% X, 50.% Y
FACTORS : Factors are not displayed for TRACK 1.0 output
--------------------------------------------------------
------------
Joint Load Strength Chord Load C1 C2 C3
Class Cond factor (Qu) factor (Qf)
--------------------------------------------------------------------
X AX 10.962 0.988 0.200 0.000 0.500
Y AX 14.299 0.983 0.300 0.000 0.800
X IPB 7.896 0.989 0.200 0.000 0.400
Y IPB 7.896 0.989 0.200 0.000 0.400
----------------------------------------------------------------------
CAPACITY CHECKS BRACE LOAD LC CAPACITY RATIO STATUS
(Cl. 4.3) (KN, m ) (KN, m )
----------------------------------------------------------------------
AXIAL : 66.995 2 273.398 0.245 PASS
IP BENDING : 0.080 2 33.228 0.002 PASS
INTERACTION : 2 0.245 PASS
----------------------------------------------------------------------
CRITICAL : 2 0.245 PASS

22A.8 Joint Design
----------------------------------------------------------------------
22A.8 Joint Design
22A.8.1 Joint Checking

The design of joints is based on Section 4 of the API code.
The program only checks simple joints and overlapping joints formed between circular hollow
section members. Any other type of joint within the structure or joint cans will not be considered
for API joint checks. Other types of joints (such as grouted joints, joints with ring stiffeners, etc.)
are not considered.
Material Strength
The API code states in Cl. 4.2.1 that the value of yield stress of the chord member to be used in the
calculation of the joint capacity should be limited to 0.8 times the tensile strength of the chord for
materials with a yield stress less than or equal to 500 MPa.
The yield stress to be used in the joint capacity checks value is specified in the joint data file
(filename.PUN). For every joint, the value specified in the FYLD column will be used as the yield
strength to be used for the joint capacity checks. When the file is created for the first time by the
program, a default value of 36 ksi is used for all joints. The value used for each joint check will also
be reported in the output file.
Note: All the fields in the joint data file (*.PUN file) are to be in imperial units.
Minimum Joint Capacity
Clause 4.2.3 of the code specifies a minimum capacity for any joint as follows:
The connections at the ends of a member should develop the strength required by the design loads,
but should not be less than 50% of the effective strength of the member. The effective strength is
defined as the buckling load for a compression member or the yield load for members in tension.
You, however, must ensure that this condition is satisfied even if the joint strength indicates a
PASS status.
The program checks to see if the capacity of a joint as calculated by the methods in the code
satisfies this requirement. If not the program issues a warning to that effect and marks the joint as
FAILED. The program calculates the axial and/or bending moment capacities of the joint and
reports the load/capacity ratio for each condition. The program also reports a ‘critical ratio’ along
with the condition that induces this ratio. Note that the maximum among the various individual
ratios will be reported as the ‘critical ratio’. The program also reports a PASS/FAIL status for the
joint.
See "Simple Joints: Capacity Checks" for details of capacity checks performed.

22A.8 Joint Design
Joint Classification
Clause of 4.2.4 of the API code essentially classifies a joint into one of the three basic types: K, X,
and Y. Joint classification is the process whereby the axial load in a given brace is subdivided into
its K, X, and Y components corresponding to the three joint types. A joint—as considered in the
code—is the connection between a "chord" and a "brace" that are in the same plane. The program
considers any two members to be in the same plane if they lie in planes that are within ±15 degrees
of each other. The classification of a joint can also be a mixture of any of the basic types mentioned
above. Once the classification of a joint has been identified, the capacity of that joint is then
evaluated per Section 4.3 of the code.
The program automatically identifies the joints in a structure and identifies the chord and the
brace members. The program applies the ±15° rule to determine the members in a plane and then
determines the joint as being the intersection point of these members. Since a joint is between a
chord and a brace member, the program considers two members at a time and then proceeds to
identify the chord and the brace member at that joint. The program assumes the member with the
larger diameter among the two members as the chord member and the other is considered as the
brace. If both members have the same diameter, the chord is assumed to be the member with the
thicker wall. If both the diameter and thickness of the members are identical, the program will
assume the most horizontal member to be the chord. To be automatically considered as a chord
member, the member has to be continuous across the joint. The user can always edit the joint data
file (*.PUN) to add or delete new BRACE-CHORD joints.
The chord and brace member numbers (from the STAAD input file) are saved under the CHORD and
BRACE columns in the filename.PUN file.
When the joint data file (.PUN) is created by the program, a default joint Class Y is assumed for the
initial joint checks. This is indicated by the K, X, and Y column values being set to 0, 0, and 1
respectively. Since the API code allows for a mixed joint classification, you must manually vary the
contribution factors for K, X, and Y joint classes for a given joint. For example, if a joint is to be
25% K, 25% X, and 50% Y, then you must assign K column value of 0.25, X column value of 0.25,
and a Y column value of 0.50 for that joint. The program will verify that the supplied contributions
sum to 1.0.
If the joint has a gap (i.e., a K-GAP joint), the gap distance (in inches) must be supplied in the
GAP column. The value to be provided will be the actual gap between the brace members at the
joint. An overlap can be specified by setting the gap to a negative value. The overlapping brace in
this case can then be indicated by specifying the member number at the OBRACE (Overlapping
brace) column in the data file.
Overlapping Joints
Clause 4.4 of the API discusses overlapping joints. Checks for overlapping joints will be performed
as described Section 22A.2.6. The difference will be in that the gap value, g, will be taken as
negative in evaluating the various factors.

22A.8 Joint Design
If the axial loads in the overlapping brace and the through brace have the same sign, the axial load
in the through brace will be increased to allow for the loads in the overlapping brace. This will be
achieved by allowing a portion of the overlapping brace load equal to the proportion of the
overlapping brace area to be added to the axial load in the through brace.
Note: The program issues a warning for any joint overlap is less than 0.25·β·D.
22A.8.2 Joint File Format

The data contained in the filename.PUN file should meet the following format. The overall process
of performing punching shear checks consists of two steps which are explained in Section 22A.2.6.
When the API design module is invoked, the program will initially check for the presence of a
filename.PUN file (where filename is the name of the .std file) in the same folder as the input file.
If the program does not find such a file, it assumes that the joint design is being run for the first
time and will create this file. If the program does find this file, it will assume that the joint design
has been run at least once and will attempt to read the input data from this file. Not that
modifying and saving the main structure (i.e., any changes to the main model using GUI or text
editor) will invalidate all design results and the program will automatically delete all design
related files including the *.PUN file. Hence if the user wises to keep an existing version of the
*.PUN file, he/she must make a separate copy of this file before making any changes to the model.
Note: Units used in this file must be kips and inches.
General Format
*BRACE CHORD K X Y D T d t GAP FYLD OBRACE TW SWAP
b# c# K% X% Y% Dc Tc db tb gap fy ob tw swap
Where:
b# = the brace member number
c# = the chord member number
K%, X%, and Y% = The fractional contributions of K-type, X type and Y-type,
respectively. Initially the joints will be classed as Y (i.e., K=0, X=0 and Y=1).
db, tb = Diameter and thickness of BRACE member
Dc, Tc = Diameter and thickness of CHORD member
gap = Distance required to calculate gap factor for K bracing. Initially, the value of
GAP is assumed as 0. An overlap can be specified by setting the gap to a negative
value.
fy = the yield stress to be used in the joint capacity checks

22A.8 Joint Design
ob = member number of the overlapping brace in an overlap joint (i.e., a gap value less
than zero)
tw = Used in overlap K-joint, taken as the lesser of the weld throat thickness or
thickness t of the thinner brace in inches
swap = If parameter SWAP 0 is used then major moment Mz is taken for In Plane
Bending (IPB). SWAP 1 uses the minor moment My as the IPB.
Example
*BRACE CHORD K X Y D T d t GAP FYLD OBRACE TW SWAP
10 7 0.000 0.000 1.000 16.000 0.394 16.000 0.394 0.00 36.0 0.0 0.00 0
13 7 0.000 0.000 1.000 16.000 0.394 7.626 0.315 0.00 36.0 0.0 0.00 0
14 11 0.000 0.000 1.000 16.000 0.394 7.626 0.315 0.00 36.0 0.0 0.00 0

23
ANSI/AISC N690 Design Codes

23 ANSI/AISC N690 Design Codes

23A. ANSI/AISC N690-1994 Code

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on ANSI/AISC N690-1994 and as amended
by Supplement No. 2 to the Specification of the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Steel Safety-
Related Structures for Nuclear Facilities (ANSI/AISC N690 1994(R2004)s2).
Design of members per ANSI/AISC N690-1994 requires the STAAD Nuclear Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.

For steel design, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the allowable stresses as defined by
ANSI/AISC N690-1994 and as amended by ANSI/AISC N690 1994(R2004)s2.
All the design steps are done as described in section 2.3 Allowable per AISC-ASD (Ninth Edition)
Code of Technical Reference manual except for allowable stress in compression for AUSTENlTlC
STAINLESS STEEL. Section Q1.5.9 is used to calculate allowable compressive stress for Austenitic
Stainless Steel. Correction made in Supplementary s1 published in April 15, 2002 has been applied.
Note: By default, N690 code uses Stainless Steel material in the design. Care should be taken to
assign the proper Stainless Steel material properties to the members for the analysis. There is a
parameter – STYPE – to change material type to either Stainless Steel (STYPE=1) or Carbon Steel
(STYPE=0).
23A.1.1 Design Process

Members subjected to both axial compression and bending stresses are proportioned to satisfy
equation Q1.6-1a:
SFC ⋅ fa SMY ⋅ C myfby SMZ ⋅ C mzfbz
+ + ≤ 1.0
Fa  f   f 
Fby 1 − a  Fbz1 − a 
 F ′ ey   F ′ ez 
and Q1.6-1b:
SFC ⋅ fa SMY ⋅ fby SMZ ⋅ fbz
+ + ≤ 1.0
0.6F y Fby Fbz
when, fa/Fa > 0.15, as per section Q1.6.1 of the code.
Otherwise, equation Q1.6-2 must be satisfied:

SFC ⋅ fa SMY ⋅fby SMZ ⋅ fbz
+ + ≤ 1.0
Fa Fby Fbz
It should be noted that during code checking or member selection, if f /F exceeds unity, the
a a
program does not compute the second and third part of the formula, because this would result in a

misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the coefficient Cm is taken as 0.85 for side-sway and [0.6 -
0.4·(M1/M2)], but not less than 0.4 for no side-sway.
Members subjected to both axial tension and bending stress are proportioned to satisfy equation
Q1.6-3:
SFT ⋅ fa SMY ⋅fby SMZ ⋅ fbz
+ + ≤ 1.0
0.6F y Fby Fbz
Where:
SFC, SFT, SMZ, and SMY are stress limit coefficient parameters used to control the
components of the interaction equations. Refer to Table 23A.1 for details.

table.
of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the physical structure
Table 23A.1-Design Parameters for ANSI/AISC N690-1994

Name Value
CODE - Must be specified as AISC N690

Manual.
BEAM 1 Beam parameter
0. Perform design at ends and those

locations in the SECTION command.
1. Perform design at ends and at 1/12th
section locations along the member
length.


Name Value
CAN 0 Used for Deflection Check only (i.e., when

DFF is specified).
0. Deflection check based on the principle

that maximum deflection occurs
within the span between DJ1 and DJ2.
1. Deflection check based on the principle
that maximum deflection is of the
cantilever type
CB 1.0 Bending coefficient dependent upon moment

gradient, as specified in Chapter F of
AISC ASD.
0.0 = CB is calculated itself
Any other user-defined value is accepted.
CMY 0.85 for Cm value in local y & z axes

sidesway
CMZ
and
calculated
for no
sidesway
COMPOSITE 0 Composite action with connectors (CMP)
0. No composite action
1. Composite action
2. Ignore positive moments during
design
CONDIA 0.625 in Diameter of shear connectors (DIA), in

current units.
CONHEIGHT 2.5 in Height of shear connectors after welding

(HGT), in current units.
CYCLES 500,000 Cycles of maximum stress to which the shear

connector is subject (CYC).

for
deflection
check)


Name Value

of member calculation of "Deflection Length"
DJ2 End Joint of Joint No. denoting end point for calculation
member of "Deflection Length"
DLR2 0.4 Ratio of moment due to dead load applied

after the concrete hardens to the total
moment (DR2).
DLRATIO 0.4 Ratio of moment due to dead load applied

before the concrete hardens to the total
moment (DR1).
DMAX 45 inch Maximum allowable depth
DMIN 0.0 inch Minimum allowable depth
EFFWIDTH 1/4 Member Effective width of concrete slab (WID).

Length
FYLD 36 KSI Yield strength of steel in current units.
FPC 3 KSI Compressive strength of concrete at 28 days,

in current units.
FSS 1 Full section shear for welding.
0. False
1. True
FU 60 KSI Ultimate tensile strength of steel, in current

units.
FYLD 46 KSI Yield strength of steel, in current units.
KX 1.0 Effective length factor for flexural torsional

buckling.
KY 1.0 Effective Length Factor for Compression in

local y-axis. Usually, this is minor axis.
KZ 1.0 Effective Length Factor for Compression in

local z-axis. Usually, this is major axis.
LX Member Length for flexural torsional buckling.

Length


Name Value
LY Member Length to calculate slenderness ratio (KL/r)

Length for buckling about local Y axis.
LZ Member Same as above except in z-axis (major).

Length
MAIN 0.0 Design for slenderness:
0. check for slenderness

1. suppress slenderness check
NSF 1.0 Net section Factor for tension members
OVR 1.0 Factor by which all allowable

stresses/capacities should be multiplied.
Default of 1.0 indicates that no overstressing is
allowed.
PLTHICK 0 Thickness of the cover plate welded to the

bottom flange of the composite beam (PLT),
in current units.
PLTWIDTH 0 Width of the cover plate welded to the

bottom flange of the composite beam (PLT),
in current units.
PROFILE None Used to search for the lightest section for the
profile(s) specified for member selection. See
Section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference
Manual for details.

stresses.
RIBHEIGHT 0 Height of ribs of form steel deck (RBH), in

current units.
RIBWIDTH 0 Width of ribs of form steel deck (RBW), in

current units.
SFC 1.0 Stress limit coefficient for compression (SLC)

as found in Table Q 1.5.7.1.
SFT 1.0 Stress limit coefficient for tension (SLC) as

found in Table Q 1.5.7.1.


Name Value
SHE 0 Shear stress calculation option
0. Computes the actual shear stress using

VQ/It
1. Computes the actual shear stress using
V(Ay or Az)
SHORING 0 Temporary shoring during construction
0. Without shoring
1. With shoring
SLABTHICK 4 in Thickness of concrete slab or thickness of

concrete slab above the form steel deck
(THK), in current units.
SMY 1.0 Stress limit coefficient for minor axis bending

(SLC) as found in Table Q 1.5.7.1.
SMZ 1.0 Stress limit coefficient for major axis bending

SSY 0 Design for sidesway in the local y axis.
0. Sidesway
1. No sidesway
SSZ 0 Design for sidesway in the local z axis.
0. Sidesway
1. No sidesway
STIFF Member Spacing of stiffeners for plate girder design, in

length or current units.
depth
whichever is
greater
STYPE 0.0 Type of steel material
0. Normal Steel
1. Austenitic Stainless Steel


Name Value
TAPER 1 Design for tapered member.
0. Design for tapered I-section based on

rules in Chapter F and Appendix B.
1. Design for tapered section based on
Appendix F.
TMAIN 240 for main Slenderness limit under tension

member
300 for
“Truss”
member
TORSION 0 Design for torsion.
0. Do not design for torsion.

1. Design for torsion.
TRACK 0.0 Controls the levels of detail to which results

are reported.
0. Minimum detail
1. Intermediate detail level
2. Maximum detail
UNB Member Unsupported length of the bottom* flange for

Length calculating allowable bending compressive
stress. Will be used only if flexural
compression on the bottom flange.
UNT Member Unsupported length of the top* flange for

compression on the top flange.
WELD 1 Design for weld.
0. Closed sections.
1. Open sections.
WMAX 1 in Maximum weld thickness, in current units.
WMIN 0.625 in Minimum weld thickness, in current units.
WSTR 0.4·Fyld Allowable welding stress, in current units.

23A.3 Examples
23A.2.1 Notes
1. All values are entered in the current units
2. parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used with the MEMBER SELECTION command
23A.3 Examples
These example problems are included for the verification of design results.
23A.3.1 Example 1
This example is included as C:\SProV8i\STAAD\Examp\N690\N690_case1.std
Solution
Allowable Compressive Stress:
Maximum Slenderness Ratio, (Kl/r)max = 171.31
Yield Stress of Steel, F = 36 ksi

y
Cc = [(2Ï€2 E)/Fy ]1/2 = 127.68
Allowable Compressive Stress for Austentic Stainless Steel, As,
(Kl/r)max > Cc
Fa = (12Ï€2 E)/[23(Kl/r)max ] = 5.21 ksi
Comparison
Table 23A.2-ANSI-AISC N690-1994 Code Verification

Problem 1
Value of Reference STAAD.Pro Difference
F (ks) 5.21 5.22 Negligible

a
Input File
STAAD SPACE
ENGINEER DATE 30-Nov-07
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 4 0 0;

23A.3 Examples
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2.05e+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2e-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
1 TABLE ST W6X12
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 PINNED
2 FIXED BUT FX MY MZ
MEMBER LOAD
1 CON GY -10 2
UNIT METER KIP
UNIT METER KN
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -1
LOAD COMB 3 COMBINATION LOAD CASE 3
1 1.0 2 9.5
PRINT ANALYSIS RESULTS
UNIT METER KIP
PARAMETER 1
CODE AISC N690
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output
The corresponding TRACK 2 output is shown below:

STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( ANSI N690-1994) v1.0
********************************************
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Y PROPERTIES |
|************* | IN INCH UNIT |
| * |=============================| ===|=== ------------ |
|MEMBER 1 * | AISC SECTIONS | | AX = 3.55 |
| * | ST W6X12 | | --Z AY = 1.25 |
|DESIGN CODE * | | | AZ = 1.50 |
|ANSI N690-94* =============================== ===|=== SY = 1.50 |
| * SZ = 7.33 |
| * |<---LENGTH (FT)= 13.12 --->| RY = 0.92 |
|************* RZ = 2.50 |
| |
| 7.4 (KIP-FEET) |
|PARAMETER | L1 STRESSES |
|IN KIP INCH | IN KIP INCH |
|--------------- + L1 L1 -------------|
| KL/R-Y= 171.31 | FA = 5.22 |
| KL/R-Z= 63.12 + L1 L1 fa = 0.60 |
| UNL = 157.48 | FCZ = 14.15 |
| CB = 1.00 + L1 L1 FTZ = 21.60 |

23A.3 Examples
| CMY = 0.85 | L1 L1 FCY = 27.00 |

| CMZ = 0.85 + FTY = 27.00 |
| FYLD = 36.00 |L0 L0 fbz = 12.07 |
| NSF = 1.00 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---| fby = 0.00 |
| DFF = 0.00 -0.4 Fey = 4.65 |
| dff= 0.00 ABSOLUTE MZ ENVELOPE Fez = 34.26 |
| (KL/R)max = 171.31 (WITH LOAD NO.) FV = 14.40 |
| fv = 0.90 |
| |
| MAX FORCE/ MOMENT SUMMARY (KIP-FEET) |
| ------------------------- |
| |
| |
| VALUE 2.1 1.1 0.0 0.0 7.4 |
| LOCATION 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 6.6 |
| LOADING 3 1 0 0 1 |
| |
|**************************************************************************|
|* *|
|* DESIGN SUMMARY (KIP-FEET) *|
|* -------------- *|
|* *|
| ====================================================== |
| PASS ANSI Q1.6-2 0.968 3 |
| 2.14 C 0.00 -7.38 6.56 |
|* *|
|**************************************************************************|
| |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
23A.3.2 Example 2
Solution

y
Cc = [(2Ï€2 E)/Fy ]1/2 = 127.68
(Kl/r)max < 120.0
Fa = (Fy /2.15) - {[(Fy /2.15) - 6.0]/120.0}x(Kl/r)max = 9.07 ksi

23A.3 Examples
Comparison

Problem 2
F (ks) 9.07 9.08 Negligible

a
Input File
STAAD SPACE
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
3 0 0 1; 4 2 0 1;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
2 3 4;
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2.05e+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2e-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
2 TABLE ST W6X12
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
3 PINNED
MEMBER LOAD
UNIT METER KIP
2 CON GY -2.24809 1
UNIT METER KN
JOINT LOAD
4 FX -1
1 1.0 2 9.5
UNIT METER KIP
PARAMETER 1
CODE AISC N690
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH

23A.3 Examples
Output

********************************************
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Y PROPERTIES |
|************* | IN INCH UNIT |
| * |=============================| ===|=== ------------ |
| * | ST W6X12 | | --Z AY = 1.25 |
|DESIGN CODE * | | | AZ = 1.50 |
|ANSI N690-94* =============================== ===|=== SY = 1.50 |
| * SZ = 7.33 |
| * |<---LENGTH (FT)= 6.56 --->| RY = 0.92 |
|************* RZ = 2.50 |
| |
| 3.7 (KIP-FEET) |
|IN KIP INCH | IN KIP INCH |
|--------------- + L1 L1 -------------|
| KL/R-Y= 85.65 | FA = 9.08 |
| KL/R-Z= 31.56 + L1 fa = 0.60 |
| UNL = 78.74 | L1 FCZ = 21.60 |
| CB = 1.00 + L1 L1 FTZ = 21.60 |
| CMY = 0.85 | L1 FCY = 27.00 |
| CMZ = 0.85 + L1 FTY = 27.00 |
| FYLD = 36.00 |L0 L0 fbz = 6.04 |
| NSF = 1.00 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---| fby = 0.00 |
| DFF = 0.00 -0.2 Fey = 18.60 |
| fv = 0.90 |
| |
| ------------------------- |
| |
| |
| VALUE 2.1 1.1 0.0 0.0 3.7 |
| LOCATION 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 3.3 |
| LOADING 3 1 0 0 1 |
| |
|**************************************************************************|
|* *|
|* -------------- *|
|* *|
| ====================================================== |
| PASS ANSI Q1.6-2 0.346 3 |
| 2.14 C 0.00 -3.69 3.28 |
|* *|
|**************************************************************************|
| |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|

23A.3 Examples
23A.3.3 Example 3
Solution

y
Cc = [(2Ï€2 E)/Fy ]1/2 = 127.68
120.0 < (Kl/r)max < Cc
Fa = Fy [0.4 - (1/600)x(Kl/r)max ] = 7.08 ksi
Comparison

Problem 3
F (ks) 7.08 7.08 None

a
Input File
STAAD SPACE
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT METER KN
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 2.85 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 2.05e+008
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2e-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
1 TABLE ST W6X12
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL

23A.3 Examples
SUPPORTS
1 PINNED
MEMBER LOAD
1 CON GY -10 2
UNIT METER KIP
UNIT METER KN
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -1
1 1.0 2 9.5
UNIT METER KIP
PARAMETER 1
CODE AISC N690
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output

********************************************
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Y PROPERTIES |
|************* | IN INCH UNIT |
| * |=============================| ===|=== ------------ |
| * | ST W6X12 | | --Z AY = 1.25 |
|DESIGN CODE * | | | AZ = 1.50 |
|ANSI N690-94* =============================== ===|=== SY = 1.50 |
| * SZ = 7.33 |
| * |<---LENGTH (FT)= 9.35 --->| RY = 0.92 |
|************* RZ = 2.50 |
| |
| 4.2 (KIP-FEET) |
|IN KIP INCH | L1 IN KIP INCH |
|--------------- + L1 -------------|
| KL/R-Y= 122.06 | L1 FA = 7.08 |
| KL/R-Z= 44.97 + L1 fa = 0.60 |
| UNL = 112.20 | FCZ = 19.86 |
| CB = 1.00 + L1 L1 FTZ = 21.60 |
| CMY = 0.85 | L1 FCY = 27.00 |
| CMZ = 0.85 + L1 FTY = 27.00 |
| FYLD = 36.00 |L0 L0 fbz = 6.84 |
| NSF = 1.00 +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---| fby = 0.00 |
| DFF = 0.00 -0.2 Fey = 9.16 |
| fv = 0.54 |
| |
| ------------------------- |
| |
| |

23A.3 Examples
| VALUE 2.1 1.6 0.0 0.0 4.2 |

| LOCATION 0.0 7.0 0.0 0.0 6.2 |
| LOADING 3 1 0 0 1 |
| |
|**************************************************************************|
|* *|
|* -------------- *|
|* *|
| ====================================================== |
| PASS ANSI Q1.6-2 0.429 3 |
| 2.14 C 0.00 -4.18 6.23 |
|* *|
|**************************************************************************|
| |
|--------------------------------------------------------------------------|

23B. ANSI/AISC N690-1984 Code

For code checking of steel members, STAAD compares the actual stresses with the allowable stresses
as defined by the "ANSI/AISC N690-1984: Nuclear Facilities - Steel Safety-Related Structures for
Design, Fabrication, and Erection."
A brief description of some of the major allowable stresses is described herein.
23B.2 Design Process

The following Checks are to be performed on a Steel Member as per this AISC N690 – 1984 Code.
When a design is performed, the output file the reports the maximum utilization from all of the
checks.
23B.2.1 Slenderness
The maximum allowable slenderness ratio in Compression (K·L/r_min), as per clause Q1.8.4 of the
code shall not exceed 200. And the maximum allowable slenderness ratio in Tension (L/r_min)
shall not exceed 240 for main members and 300 for bracing members and other secondary
members.
This can be controlled by using the existing MAIN and TMAIN parameters respectively.
The default value of MAIN is 200 and for TMAIN is 240.
23B.2.2 Check for Element Slenderness and Stress Reduction Factors

The permissible Width-to-Thickness Ratio of “Un-stiffened Elements under Compression” is
determined as per section Q1.9.1 and that of “Stiffened Elements under Compression” is determined
as per section Q1.9.2 of the code.
The permissible Width–Thickness Ratio of web is determined as per section Q1.10.2.
23B.2.3 Tension
Allowable tensile stress on the Net section is calculated as 0.60·Fy , but not more than 0.5·Fu on the
Effective Net area, as per section Q1.5.1.1.
The Net Area (An) shall be determined in accordance with Q1.14, and the NSF parameter can be
utilized for that.

The Effective Net Area (Ae) of axially loaded tension members, where the load is transmitted by
bolts through some but not all of the cross-sectional elements of the member, shall be computed
from the formula (ref. Q1.14),
Ae = Ct·An
Unless otherwise specified, the default value of the CT parameter is set as 0.75.
The value of CT parameter for other conditions is described at section Q1.14.
The provisions for Pin-connected and Threaded tensile member are not implemented in STAAD.
23B.2.4 Compression
The allowable compressive stress for columns which meet the provisions of section Q1.9, except
those fabricated from austenitic stainless steel shall be as required by Q1.5.1.3. The allowable
compressive stress for columns fabricated from austenitic stainless steel shall be in accordance to
section Q1.5.9.
A. Gross Sections of Columns, except those fabricated of austenitic stainless steel:
1. On gross section of axially loaded compression members, when (Kl/r) ≤ Cc,
Fa = [1 - (Kl/r)2 /(2·Cc2 )]Fy / {5/3 + [3(Kl/r)/(8·Cc)] - [(Kl/r)3 /(8·Cc3 )]}
Where:
Cc = [(2·π2 E)/Fy ]1/2
2. When (Kl/r) > Cc,
Fa = 12·π2 E/[23(kL/r)2 ]
B. Gross sections of columns fabricated from Austenitic Stainless steel:
1. When (Kl/r) ≤ 120,
Fa = Fy /2.15 - [(Fy /2.16 - 6)/120](kL/r)
2. When (Kl/r) > 120,
Fa = 12 - (KL/r)/20
If the provisions of the section Q1.9 are not satisfied,
A. For un-stiffened compression element, a reduction factor Q is introduced. Detailed values

s
of Qs for different shapes are given in Section QC2.
B. For stiffened compression element, a reduced effective width b is introduced.

e
1. For the flanges of square and rectangular sections of uniform thickness:
be = 253·t/√Fy {1 - (50.3/[(b/t)√Fy ]} ≤ b
2. For other uniformly compressed elements:

be = 253·t/√Fy {1 - (44.3/[(b/t)√Fy ]} ≤ b
Consequently, a reduction factor Q is introduced and is equal to the effective area

a
divided by the actual area. Combining both these factors, allowable stress for axially
loaded compression members containing stiffened or unstiffened elements shall not
exceed
Fa = QsQa[1 - (Kl/r)2 /(2·Cc2 )]Fy / {5/3 + [3(Kl/r)/(8·Cc)] - [(Kl/r)3 /(8·Cc3 )]}
Where:
C'c = [(2·π2 E)/(QsQaFy )]1/2
23B.2.5 Bending Stress

Allowable bending stress for tension and compression for a structural member, as given in section
Q1.5.1.4 is:
A. Along Major Axis:
1. Tension and compression on extreme fibers of compact hot rolled or built-up

members symmetrical about and loaded in the plane of their minor axes and meeting
the requirements of Subsection Q1.5.1.4.1.1 to 7, shall result in a maximum bending
stress:
Fb = 0.66·Fy
If meeting the requirements of this member of:

a. Width-thickness ratio of unstiffened projecting elements of the compression
flange shall not exceed 65/√Fy .
b. Width-thickness ratio of stiffened elements of the compression flange shall not
exceed 190/√Fy .
c. The depth-thickness ratio of the web shall not exceed
d/t = (640/√Fy )[1 – 3.74(fa/Fy )] when fa/Fy ≤0.16
d/t = 257/√Fy when fa/Fy > 0.16

d. The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange of members other
than box-shaped members shall not exceed the value of 76bf/√Fy nor 20000/
(d/Af)Fy .
2. For noncompact and slender elements, section Q1.5.1.4.2 is followed.
3. For box-type flexural members, maximum bending stress is:
Fb = 0.60·Fy
B. Along Minor Axis:

1. For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements of section

Q1.5.1.4.1, maximum tensile and compressive bending stress shall not exceed the
following value as per section Q1.5.1.4.3:
Fb = 0.75·Fy
2. For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements of section

Q1.5.1.4.1, except where bf/2tf > 65/√Fy but is less than 95/√Fy , maximum tensile and
compressive bending stress shall not exceed:
Fb = Fy [0.79 – 0.002(bf/2tf)√Fy ]
23B.2.6 Combined Interaction Check

equation Q1.6-1a:
SFC·fa/Fa + SMY·Cmy fby /[(1 - fa/F'ey )Fby ] + SMZ·Cmzfbz/[(1 - fa/F'ez)Fbz] ≤ 1.0
and Q1.6-1b
SFC·fa/(0.6·Fy ) + SMY·fby /Fby + SMZ·fbz/Fbz ≤ 1.0
when, fa/Fa > 0.15, as per section Q1.6.1 of the code.
Otherwise, equation Q1.6-2 must be satisfied:
SFC·fa/Fa + SMY·fby /Fby + SMZ·fbz/Fbz ≤ 1.0
a a
misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the coefficient Cm is taken as 0.85 for side-sway and [0.6 -
0.4·(M1/M2)], but not less than 0.4 for no side-sway.
Members subjected to both axial tension and bending stress are proportioned to satisfy equation Q
1.6-1b:
SFT·fa/(0.6·Fy ) + SMY·fby /Fby + SMZ·fbz/Fbz ≤ 1.0
Where SFC, SFT, SMZ, and SMY are stress limit coefficient parameters used to control the
components of the interaction equations. Refer to Table 17B.1 for details.
23B.2.7 Shear Stress

Allowable shear stress on the gross section [ref. section Q1.10.5.2] is calculated as
Fv = (Fy /2.89)Cv ≤ 0.4·Fy
Where:
Cv = (45,000·k)/[Fy (h/t)2 ], when h/t ≤ 0.8
Cv = [190/(h/t)]√(k/Fy ), when h/t > 0.8

23B.3 Member Property Specification
k = 4.00 + [5.34/(a/h)2 ], when a/h ≤ 1.0
k = 5.34 + [4.00/(a/h)2 ], when a/h > 1.0
For actual shear on the web, the gross section is taken as the product of the total depth and the
web thickness. For shear on the flanges, the gross section is taken as the total flange areas.

of STAAD may be used, namely: I-shaped section, Channel, Tee, HSS Tube, HSS Pipe, Angle,
Double Angle, and Double Channel sections.
Prismatic member.
Manual.

table.
of these parameter values may have to be changed to exactly model the physical structure
Table 23B.1-Design Parameters for ANSI/AISC N690-1984
Name Value
CODE - Must be specified as AISC N690 1984 to use the

ANSI/AISC N690-1984 code for checking
purposes.

Manual.


Name Value
CAN 0 Used for Deflection Check only.
0 = Deflection check based on the

deflection occurs within the span
between DJ1 and DJ2.

deflection is of the cantilever type

gradient

sidesway and
CMZ
calculated
for no
sidesway
CT 0.75 Reduction Coefficient in computing net

effective net area of an axially loaded tension
member.
DFF None "Deflection Length" / Maximum allowable local

(Mandatory deflection
for deflection
check)
DJ1 Start Joint Joint No. denoting starting point for calculation
of member of "Deflection Length"
DJ2 End Joint of Joint No. denoting end point for calculation of
member "Deflection Length"
FU 60 KSI Ultimate tensile strength of steel in current

units.
FYLD 36 KSI Yield strength of steel in current units.


Name Value
KY 1.0 Effective Length Factor for Compression in local

y-axis. Usually, this is minor axis.
KZ 1.0 Effective Length Factor for Compression in local

z-axis. Usually, this is major axis.


Length
MAIN 0.0 Design for slenderness.
0. Check for slenderness

1. Suppress slenderness check
NSF 1.0 Net section Factor for tension members
PROFILE None Used to search for the lightest section for the
profile(s) specified for member selection. See
Section 5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual
for details.

stresses.
SFC 1.0 Stress limit coefficient for compression (SLC) as

SFT 1.0 Stress limit coefficient for tension (SLC) as

SMY 1.0 Stress limit coefficient for minor axis bending

SMZ 1.0 Stress limit coefficient for major axis bending

STIFF Member Spacing of stiffeners for plate girder design

length or
depth
whichever is
greater
STYPE 0.0 0.0 = Normal Steel
1.0 = Austenitic Stainless Steel


Name Value

member
300 for
“Truss”
member
TRACK 0.0 Controls the levels of detail to which results are

reported.
0 = Minimum detail
2 = Maximum detail

stress. Will be used only if flexural compression
on the bottom flange.

on the top flange.
23B.4.1 Notes
1. All values are entered in the current units
2. parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used with the MEMBER SELECTION command

Both code checking and member selection options are available with the AISC N690 1984 code.
Checking command.
23B.6 Examples
These example problems are included for the verification of design results.

23B.6 Examples
23B.6.1 .Example 1 - Pipe Section

This example is included as C:\SProV8i\STAAD\Examp\nuclear code samples\N690_1984_Pipe_
Section.std
Problem
A 10 ft long simply supported beam subject to axial (+/- 10 kip) and bending loads (3 kip/ft) in both
the local y and z axis. The beam is a 5" diameter, Schedule 40 Pipe section made from Grade 36
steel.
Solution
Section Properties:
Ax = 4.30 in.2
Iy = Iz = 15.20 in.4
r = (15.20/4.30)1/2 = 1.88 in.
O.D. = 5.56 in., t = 0.26 in.
Sx = Sy = 15.20 in.4 ·2/5.56 in. = 5.468 in.3
Load Case 1: Tension-only
Allowable Tensile Stress:
Ft = min(0.6·Fy , 0.5·Fu ) = 0.6(36 ksi) = 21.60 ksi
Actual Tensile Stress:
ft = P/Ae
Where:
Ae = Ct·An = 0.75(4.30 in.2 ) = 3.23 in.2
ft = 10 kip/ 3.23 in.2 = 3.10 ksi
Stress Ratio = 3.10 ksi/21.60 ksi = 0.144 < 1.0, OK.
Load Case 2: Compression-only
Maximum Slenderness Ratio, (Kl/r)max = 1.0(10 ft)(12 ft/in.)/1.88in. = 63.83 < 200, OK.

y

23B.6 Examples
Cc = [(2Ï€2 E)/Fy ]1/2 = 127.68
(Kl/r)max < Cc
2 2
( Kl / r) (63.83)
âˆ’
1.0 â¢ 1.0 âˆ’
2
2C c2 2(127.68)
Fc = Fy 3
= 36ksi 3
= 17.06ksi
5 3( Kl / r) ( Kl / r) 5 3(63.83) (63.83)
+ âˆ’ + âˆ’
3 8C c 3 8(127.68) 3
8C c3 8(127.68)
Actual Compressive Stress:
fa = 10 kip/4.30 in.2 = 2.33 ksi
Stress Ratio = 2.33 ksi/17.06 ksi = 0.136 < 1.0, OK.
Load Case 3: Tension + Bending
Allowable Bending Stress:
Fby = Fbz = 0.66·Fy = 0.66(36 ksi) = 23.76 ksi
Actual Bending Stress (include member selfweight in Y dir.):
My = 0.315 kip/ft (10 ft)2 /8 (12 in./ft) = 47.2 in·kip
Mz = 0.3 kip/ft (10 ft)2 /8 (12 in./ft) = 45.0 in·kip
fby = 47.2 in·kip/5.468 in.3 = 8.63 ksi
fbz = 45.0 in·kip/5.468 in.3 = 8.23 ksi
Stress Ratio = 8.63 ksi/ 23.76 ksi = 0.363 < 1.0
Stress Ratio = 8.23 ksi/ 23.76 ksi = 0.346 < 1.0
Combined Stress Check:
fa/(0.6·Fy ) + fby /Fby + fbz/Fbz = 3.10 ksi/[0.6(36 ksi)] + 0.363 + 0.346 = 0.853
Load Case 4: Compression + Bending
Combined Stress Check:
fa/Fa = 0.136 < 0.15
fa/Fa + fby /Fby + fbz/Fbz = 0.136 + 0.363 + 0.346 = 0.845 < 1.0, OK

23B.6 Examples
Comparison
Table 23B.2-ANSI/AISC N690-1984 Code Verification Problem 1

Condition Reference STAAD.Pro Difference
0.144
Tension 0.108
(0.107, CT = 1.0)
Compression 0.136 0.136 None
0.853
Tension + Bending 0.815 2.51%
(0.817, CT = 1.0)
Compression + Bending 0.845 0.844 Negligible
Input File
STAAD SPACE
ENGINEER DATE 09-Dec-09
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT FEET KIP
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 10 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 4.176e+006
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 0.489024
ALPHA 1.2e-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
UNIT INCHES KIP
1 TABLE ST PIPS50
UNIT FEET KIP
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 PINNED
2 FIXED BUT FX
LOAD 1 TENSION ONLY
JOINT LOAD
2 FX 10
LOAD 2 COMPRESSION ONLY
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -10
LOAD 3 TENSION+BENDING
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -0.3
JOINT LOAD
2 FX 10

23B.6 Examples
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GZ 0.3
LOAD 4 COMPRESSION+BENDING
SELFWEIGHT Y -1
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -0.3
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -10
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GZ 0.3
PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT LOAD DATA
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES ALL
UNIT INCHES KIP
LOAD LIST 1
PARAMETER 1
CODE AISC N690 1984
CB 1 ALL
CMY 0 ALL
CMZ 0 ALL
* 36 & 58
FYLD 36 ALL
FU 58 ALL
KY 1 ALL
KZ 1 ALL
MAIN 200 ALL
NSF 1 ALL
RATIO 1 ALL
TMAIN 300 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
UNB 30 ALL
UNT 30 ALL
CT 0.75 all
CHECK CODE ALL
** Following to check if the net area is used in calculating tensile stress
PARAMETER 11
CODE AISC N690 1984
FU 40 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
LOAD LIST 2
PARAMETER 2
CODE AISC N690 1984
CB 1 ALL
CMY 0 ALL
CMZ 0 ALL
* 36 & 58
FYLD 36 ALL
FU 58 ALL
KY 1 ALL
KZ 1 ALL
MAIN 200 ALL
NSF 1 ALL
RATIO 1 ALL
TMAIN 300 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
UNB 30 ALL
UNT 30 ALL
CT 0.75 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
LOAD LIST 3
PARAMETER 3
CODE AISC N690 1984
CB 1 ALL
CMY 0 ALL
CMZ 0 ALL
* 36 & 58
FYLD 36 ALL

23B.6 Examples
FU 58 ALL
KY 1 ALL
KZ 1 ALL
MAIN 200 ALL
NSF 1 ALL
RATIO 1 ALL
TMAIN 300 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
UNB 30 ALL
UNT 30 ALL
CT 0.75 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
LOAD LIST 4
PARAMETER 4
CODE AISC N690 1984
CB 1 ALL
CMY 0 ALL
CMZ 0 ALL
* 36 & 58
FYLD 36 ALL
FU 58 ALL
KY 1 ALL
KZ 1 ALL
MAIN 200 ALL
NSF 1 ALL
RATIO 1 ALL
TMAIN 300 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
UNB 30 ALL
UNT 30 ALL
CT 0.75 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
LOAD LIST ALL
PARAMETER 5
CODE AISC N690 1984
CB 1 ALL
CMY 0 ALL
CMZ 0 ALL
* 36 & 58
FYLD 36 ALL
FU 58 ALL
KY 1 ALL
KZ 1 ALL
MAIN 200 ALL
NSF 1 ALL
RATIO 1 ALL
TMAIN 300 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
UNB 30 ALL
UNT 30 ALL
CT 0.75 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output
The TRACK 2 output for the final parameter set is shown here:
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( AISC N690 1984) v1.0
********************************************
ALL UNITS ARE - KIP INCH (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED)
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================

23B.6 Examples
1 ST PIPS50 (AISC SECTIONS)

PASS Q1.6-Eqn 2 0.844 4
10.00 C 44.84 47.02 120.00
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SLENDERNESS CHECK: ACTUAL RATIO: 63.83 ALLOWABLE RATIO: 200.00 |
| ALLOWABLE STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH) |
| AXIAL: 1.71E+01 FCZ: 2.38E+01 FCY: 2.38E+01 FTZ: 2.38E+01 FTY: 2.38E+01 |
| SHEAR: 1.44E+01 |
| ACTUAL STRESSES: (UNIT - KIP INCH) |
| AXIAL: 2.33E+00 FBZ: 8.60E+00 FBY: 8.20E+00 SHEAR: 9.12E-01 |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SECTION PROPERTIES: (UNIT - INCH) |
| AXX: 4.30 AYY: 2.27 AZZ: 2.27 RZZ: 1.88 RYY: 1.88 |
| SZZ: 5.46 SYY: 5.46 |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| PARAMETER: (UNIT - KIP INCH) |
| KL/R-Z: 63.83 KL/R-Y: 63.83 UNL: 30.0 CMZ: 0.60 CMY: 0.60 |
| CB: 1.00 FYLD: 36.00 FU: 58.00 NET SECTION FACTOR: 1.00 |
| CT: 0.75 STEEL TYPE: 0.0 |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| CRITICAL LOADS FOR EACH CLAUSE CHECK (UNITS KIP -INCH) |
| CLAUSE RATIO LOAD FX VY VZ MZ MY |
| TENSION 0.108 1 1.00E+01 - - - - |
| COMPRESSION 0.136 2 1.00E+01 - - - - |
| COMP&BEND 0.844 4 1.00E+01 - - 4.70E+01 4.48E+01 |
| TEN&BEND 0.815 3 1.00E+01 - - 4.70E+01 4.48E+01 |
| SHEAR-Y 0.063 3 - 1.96E+00 - - - |
| SHEAR-Z 0.060 3 - - 1.87E+00 - - |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
23B.6.2 Example 2 - W-Section

This example is included as C:\SProV8i\STAAD\Examp\nuclear code samples\N690_1984_W-
Section.std
Problem
A 12 ft long simply supported beam subject to uniform load (3 kip/ft). The beam is a W6x12 section
made from Grade 36 steel.
Solution
Section Properties:
A = 3.55 in.2
d = 6.03 in.
tw = 0.230 in.
Sz = 7.31 in.3
Allowable Bending Stress:
Fbz = 0.66·Fy = 0.66(36 ksi) = 23.76 ksi
Actual Bending Stress (include member selfweight in Y dir.):

23B.6 Examples
Mz = 0.312 kip/ft (12 ft)2 /8 (12 in./ft) = 67.4 in·kip
fbz = 67.4 in·kip/7.31 in.3 = 9.22 ksi
Stress Ratio = 9.22 ksi/ 23.76 ksi = 0.388 < 1.0, OK
Allowable Shear Stress:
Fv = 0.4·Fy = 0.4(36 ksi) = 14.40 ksi
Actual Shear Stress:
Vz = 0.5(12 ft)(0.312 kip/ft) = 1.872 kip
fvz = 1.872 kip/(6.03 in. x 0.230 in.) = 1.35 ksi
Stress Ratio = 1.35 ksi/ 14.40 ksi = 0.094 < 1.0, OK.
Comparison
Table 23B.3-ANSI/AISC N690-1984 Code Verification Problem 3

Condition Reference STAAD.Pro Difference
Bending 0.388 0.387 Negligible
Shear 0.094 0.094 None
Input File
STAAD SPACE
ENGINEER DATE 09-Dec-09
END JOB INFORMATION
INPUT WIDTH 79
UNIT FEET KIP
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 12 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 4.176e+006
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 0.489024
ALPHA 1.2e-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
1 TABLE ST W6X12
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 2 PINNED
SELFWEIGHT Y -1 ALL
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -0.3
PERFORM ANALYSIS PRINT LOAD DATA

23B.6 Examples
PRINT MEMBER PROPERTIES ALL

*UNIT KIP INCH
PARAMETER 1
CODE AISC N690 1984
CB 1 ALL
CMY 0 ALL
CMZ 0 ALL
* 36 & 58
FYLD 36 ALL
FU 58 ALL
KY 1 ALL
KZ 1 ALL
MAIN 200 ALL
NSF 1 ALL
RATIO 1 ALL
TMAIN 300 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
UNB 3 ALL
UNT 3 ALL
UNIT KIP INCH
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
Output
The TRACK 2 output for the final parameter set is shown here:
STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( AISC N690 1984) v1.0
********************************************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST W6X12 (AISC SECTIONS)
PASS Q1.6-Eqn 2 0.387 1
0.00 T 0.00 -67.40 72.00
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SHEAR: 1.44E+01 |
| AXIAL: 0.00E+00 FBZ: 9.20E+00 FBY: 0.00E+00 SHEAR: 0.00E+00 |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SZZ: 7.33 SYY: 1.50 |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| KL/R-Z: 57.71 KL/R-Y:156.64 UNL: 36.0 CMZ: 0.60 CMY: 0.60 |
| CT: 0.75 STEEL TYPE: 0.0 |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| TENSION 0.000 1 0.00E+00 - - - - |
| COMPRESSION 0.000 1 0.00E+00 - - - - |
| COMP&BEND 0.387 1 0.00E+00 - - 6.74E+01 0.00E+00 |
| TEN&BEND 0.000 1 0.00E+00 - - 6.74E+01 0.00E+00 |
| SHEAR-Y 0.094 1 - 1.87E+00 - - - |
| SHEAR-Z 0.000 1 - - 0.00E+00 - - |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|

24
American Society of Mechanical
Engineers – Nuclear Facility
(ASME NF) Codes

24 American Society of Mechanical Engineers – Nuclear Facility (ASME NF) Codes

24A.1 Design Process
24A. ASME NF 3000 - 1974 & 1977 Codes

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the American Society of Mechanical
Engineers Nuclear Facility Code, ASME NF 3000 - 1974 & 1977 .
Note: From design point of view, there are no major differences between NF-3000 1974 and NF-
3000 1977 version of codes.
Design of members per ASME NF 3000 - 1974 & 1977 requires the STAAD Nuclear Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.

The design process follows the following design checks
Each one of the checks are described in the following sections.
checks.
24A.1.1 Slenderness
As per clause XVII-2223 of NF-3000 1974, the slenderness ratio KL/r of compression members shall
not exceed 200, and the slenderness ratio L/r of tension members, preferably should not exceed 240
for main members and 300 for lateral bracing members and other secondary members. The default
limit for TRUSS members in Tension is set at 300.
24A.1.2 Tension
Allowable tensile stress on the Net section is calculated as (0.60*F ), but not more than (0.5*F ) on
y u
the Net area.
The Net Area (A ) shall be determined in accordance with the clause XVII-2283 of NF-3000 1974,
n
and the NSF parameter can be utilized for that.
24A.1.3 Compression
The allowable compressive stress for columns shall be as required by clause XVII-2213 of NF-3000
1974.

a. Gross Sections of Columns:
1. On gross section of axially loaded compression members, when (Kl/r) < Cc,
 ( KL / r) 
2
1 − 
 2C c 
2

Fa = Fy 3
3( KL / r) ( KL / r)
5/3+ −
8C c
8C c3
Where:
2π 2E
Cc =
Fy
12π 2E
Fa =
23(KL / r ) 2
3. When (Kl/r) > 120,

Fa[Eq.(a1)or Eq.(a 2)]
Fas = l
1.6 − ( )
200r
b. Member elements other than columns:

1. For Plate Girder Stiffeners, Fa = 0.60·Fy
2. For webs of rolled shapes, Fa = 0.75·Fy
The above clauses are applicable only when the width-thickness ratio of the element satisfies all the
sub-sections of clause XVII-2224 of NF-3000 1974.
If the above-mentioned clauses are not satisfied,
a. For un-stiffened compression element, a reduction factor, Q , is introduced. Detailed values

s
of Q for different shapes are given in the clause XVII-2225.2 of NF-3000 1974.
s
b. For stiffened compression element, a reduced effective width, b , is introduced.
e
253t   50.3 
be = 1 −   ≤ b
f   (b / t ) f 

253t   44.3 
be = 1 −   ≤ b
f   (b / t ) f 

Consequently, a reduction factor, Q , equal to the effective area divided by the actual area is
a
introduced.

Combining both these factors, allowable stress for axially loaded compression members
containing stiffened or un-stiffened elements shall not exceed
 ( KL / r) 
2
Q sQ a 1 − 
 2 
 2C ′ c 
Fa = Fy 3
3( KL / r) ( KL / r)
5/3+ −
8C ′ c 3
8C ′ c
Where:
2π 2E
C ′c =
Q sQ aF y
24A.1.4 Bending Stress

Allowable bending stress for tension and compression for a structural member, as given in XVII-
2214 of NF-3000 1974 is:
a. Along Major Axis:
a. For Compact Sections, tension and compression on extreme fibers of compact hot rolled or
built-up members symmetrical about and loaded in the plane of their minor axes and
meeting the requirements of Subsection NF shall result in a maximum bending stress:
F = 0.66*F
b y
a. Width-thickness ratio of un-stiffened projecting elements of the compression flange shall

not exceed 52.2/√F .
y
b. Width-thickness ratio of stiffened elements of the compression flange shall not exceed
190/√F .
y
d/t = (412/√F )[1 – 2.33(F /F )]

y a y
except that it need not be less than 257/√F .
y
d. The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange of members other than box-
shaped members shall not exceed the value of 76b /√F nor 20000/(d/A )F .
f y f y
b. For noncompact and slender elements, clause XVII-2214.2 and XVII-2214.5 of NF-3000 1974
are followed respectively.
c. For box-type flexural members, maximum bending stress is:
F = 0.60*F
b y
b. Along Minor Axis:
For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements of XVII-2214.1(a) and (b) of
NF-3000 1974, maximum tensile and compressive bending stress shall not exceed:

F = 0.75*F
b y
24A.1.5 Combined Interaction Check

fa C mzfbz C myfby
+ + ≤ 1.0
Fa (1 − fa / F ′ ex)Fbx (1 − fa / F ′ ey)Fby
and
fa fbz fby
+ + ≤ 1.0
0.60F y Fbz Fby
when fa/Fa > 0.15,
otherwise
fa fbz fby
+ + ≤ 1.0
Fa Fbz Fby
a a
misleadingly liberal ratio. The value of the coefficient Cm is taken as 0.85 for side-sway and 0.6 -
0.4·(M1/M2), but not less than 0.4 for no side-sway.
Members subjected to both axial tension and bending stress are proportioned to satisfy
fa fbz fby
+ + ≤ 1.0
0.60F y Fbz Fby
24A.1.6 Shear Stress

Allowable shear stress on the gross section [ref. XVII-2263.2 of NF-3000 1974] is calculated as
Fv = (Fy / 2.89)Cv ≤ 0.4Fy
Where:
45, 000k
Cv =
F y (h / t ) 2
, when Cv < 0.8
190 k
Cv =
h/t Fy
, when Cv > 0.8
k = 4.00 + 5.34 / (a / h )2 , when a/h < 1.0
k = 5.34 + 4.00 / (a / h )2 , when a/h > 1.0

24A.2 Member Property Specification
24A.2 Member Property Specification

of STAAD may be used namely – I-shaped section, Channel, Tee, HSS Tube, HSS Pipe, Angle,
Double Angle, Double Channel section.
Prismatic member.
Manual.

table.
example, by default the KZ value (k value in local z-axis) of a member is set to 1.0, while in the real
structure it may be 1.5. In that case, the KZ value in the program can be changed to 1.5, as shown
in the input instruction (Section 5). Similarly, the TRACK value of a member is set to 0.0, which
means no allowable stresses of the member will be printed. If the allowable stresses are to be
printed, the TRACK value must be set to 1.0.
Note: Unlike many other design codes available in STAAD.Pro (which use the BEAM parameter),
design per ASME NF 3000 codes in STAAD.Pro is always performed based on forces calculated at
13 sections, including ends.
Table 24A.1-ASME NF 3000 Design Parameters

Name
CODE - Must be specified as CODE NF3000 1974 or

CODE NF3000 1977



Name
0 = Deflection check based on the principle

that maximum deflection occurs within
the span between DJ1 and DJ2.
1 = Deflection check based on the principle

that maximum deflection is of the
cantilever type
CB 1.0 Bending coefficient dependent upon

moment gradient

sidesway and
CMZ
calculated for
no sidesway
CT 0.75 Reduction Coefficient in computing

effective net area of an axially loaded
tension member. [Refer NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)]

for deflection
check)


member calculation of "Deflection Length"
DMAX 45 inch Maximum allowable depth. Used only with

the MEMBER SELECTION command.
DMIN 0.0 inch Minimum allowable depth. Used only with

the MEMBER SELECTION command.
FYLD 36 KSI Yield strength of steel at temperature in

current units.
FU 60 KSI Ultimate tensile strength of steel in

current units.


Name
KBK 1.0 Stress Limit Factor applicable to the

Design Allowable Compressive Axial and
Bending stresses to determine the
Buckling Limit.
Note: Ignored unless SRL is set to D.
KS 1.0 Stress Limit Factor applicable to the

Design Allowable Tensile and Bending
Stresses.
KV 1.0 Stress Limit Factor applicable to the

Design Allowable Shear Stresses.

minor axis.

major axis.


Length
NSF 1.0 Net Section Factor for tension member.
PROFILE None Used in member selection. See Section

5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual
for details.

stresses.


Name
SRL A Service level, which defines the service

level factors to use for modifying stress
values for the service level conditions.
A. Normal Conditions
B. Upset
C. Emergency
D. Faulted - If any of KS, KV, or KBK
parameters are not set, a warning is
issued that these must be user-
defined.
See "Service Levels" on page 897 for

additional information.

length or
depth
whichever is
greater

member
300 for
â€œTrussâ€
member
TRACK 0.0 Controls the levels of detail to which

0. Minimum detail
2. Maximum detail
UNB Member Unsupported length of the bottom* flange

Length for calculating allowable bending
compressive stress. Will be used only if
flexural compression on the bottom flange.



Both code checking and member selection options are available with the ASME NF-3000 1974 and
ASME NF-3000 1977 codes.
Checking command.
24A.5 Example
A cantilever beam of length 30 inch is loaded at its free end with 5 kip compressive load and 5 kip
lateral load. The beam is assigned with W24X104 steel member and is designed in accordance with
ASME NF3000 1974.
The corresponding input of STAAD input editor file is shown as below:

STAAD SPACE
ENGINEER DATE 18-Jun-08
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT INCHES KIP
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 30 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 29000
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2e-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
1 TABLE ST W24X104
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
LOAD 1
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -5 FY -5
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PRINT JOINT DISPLACEMENTS
PRINT MEMBER FORCES
PARAMETER 1
CODE NF3000 1974
FYLD 36 ALL
FU 58 ALL
KY 0.9 ALL
KZ 0.9 ALL

24A.5 Example
NSF 0.85 ALL

CB 0 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH
The corresponding TRACK 2 output is as follows:

STAAD.PRO CODE CHECKING - ( ASME NF3000-74) v1.0
********************************************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST W24X104 (AISC SECTIONS)
PASS NF-74-EQN-21 0.032 1
5.00 C 0.00 150.00 0.00
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SHEAR: 1.44E+01 |
| AXIAL: 1.63E-01 FBZ: 5.82E-01 FBY: 0.00E+00 SHEAR: 4.16E-01 |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SZZ: 257.69 SYY: 40.63 |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| TENSION 0.009 1 5.00E+00 - - - - |
| COMPRESSION 0.008 1 5.00E+00 - - - - |
| COMP&BEND 0.032 1 5.00E+00 - - 1.50E+02 0.00E+00 |
| TEN&BEND 0.000 1 5.00E+00 - - 1.50E+02 0.00E+00 |
| SHEAR-Y 0.029 1 - 5.00E+00 - - - |
| SHEAR-Z 0.000 1 - - 0.00E+00 - - |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|

24B. ASME NF 3000 - 1989 Code

1. Slenderness
2. Tension
3. Compression
4. Bending Stress
6. Shear Stress
checks.
24B.1.1 .1 Slenderness
As per NF-3322.2(c), the slenderness ratio KL/r of compression members shall not exceed 200, and
the slenderness ratio L/r of tension members, preferably should not exceed 240 for main members
and 300 for lateral bracing members and other secondary members. The default limit for TRUSS
members in Tension is set at 300.
24B.1.2 .2 Tension
y u
the Effective Net area.
The Net Area (A ) shall be determined in accordance with NF-3322.8(c)(1) - (a), (b) and (c), and
n
the NSF parameter can be utilized for that.
The Effective Net Area (A ) of axially loaded tension members, where the load is transmitted by
e
from the formula (ref. NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)),
A =C *A
e t n
The value of CT parameter for other conditions is described at section NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)(1), (2) and
(3).

24B.1.3 .3 Compression
The allowable compressive stress for columns, except those fabricated from austenitic stainless steel
shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(1). The allowable compressive stress for columns fabricated from
austenitic stainless steel shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(2). The allowable compressive stress for
member elements other than columns constructed by any material, including austenitic stainless
steel, shall be as required by NF-3322.1(c)(3).
a. Gross Sections of Columns, except those fabricated of austenitic stainless steel:
 ( KL / r) 
2
1 âˆ’ 
 2C c 
2

Fa = Fy 3
3( KL / r) ( KL / r)
5/3+ âˆ’
8C c
8C c3
Where:
2
2Ï€ E
Cc =
Fy

2
12Ï€ E
Fa =
23(KL / r ) 2
3. When (Kl/r) > 120,

Eq. (a 2)
Fa Eq. (a1)â€‰or â¢
Fas = l
1.6 âˆ’ ( )
200r
b. Gross sections of columns fabricated from Austenitic Stainless steel:
1. When (Kl/r) ≤ 120,
(
Fa = Fy 0.47 âˆ’
KL / r
444 )
2. When (Kl/r) > 120,
(
Fa = Fy 0.40 âˆ’
KL / r
600 )
c. Member elements other than columns:
sub-sections of NF-3322.2(d).


s
of Q for different shapes are given in NF-3322.2(e)(2)(a) to NF-3322.2(e)(2)(d).
s
e
253t   50.3 
be = 1 âˆ’  â‰¤ b
f   (b / t ) f 
 
253t   44.3 
be = 1 âˆ’  â‰¤ b
f   (b / t ) f 
 
a
introduced.
 ( KL / r) 
2
Q sQ a 1 âˆ’ 
 2C â€² c 
2

Fa = Fy 3
3( KL / r) ( KL / r)
5/3+ âˆ’
8C â€²c 3
8C â€² c
Where:
2
2Ï€ E
C â€² c =
Q sQ aF y
24B.1.4 .4 Bending Stress

Allowable bending stress for tension and compression for a structural member, as given in NF-3322.1
(d) is:
1. For Compact Sections, tension and compression on extreme fibres of compact hot rolled or
F = 0.66*F
b y
a. Width-thickness ratio of unstiffened projecting elements of the compression flange shall not
exceed 65/âˆšF .
y
190/âˆšF .
y

d/t = (640/âˆšF )[1 â€“ 3.74(f /F )] when f /F <=0.16

y a y a y
d/t = 257/âˆšF when f /F > 0.16
y a y
shaped members shall not exceed the value of 76b /âˆšF nor 20000/(d/A )F .
f y f y
2. For noncompact and slender elements, NF-3322.1(d)(5) and NF-3322.1(d)(3) are followed
respectively.
F = 0.60*F
b y
1. For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements of NF-3322.1(d)(1)(a)

and (b), maximum tensile and compressive bending stress shall not exceed:
F = 0.75*F
b y
2. For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements of NF-3322.1(d)(1)(a),
except where b /2t exceeds 65/âˆšF but is less than 95/âˆšF , maximum tensile and
f f y y
F = F [1.075 â€“ 0.005(b /2t )âˆšF ]

b y f f y
24B.1.5 .5 Combined Interaction Check

fa C mzfbz C myfby
+ + ≤ 1.0
Fa (1 − fa / F ′ ex)Fbx ( )
1 − fa / F ′ ey Fby
and
fa fbz fby
+ + ≤ 1.0
0.60F y Fbz Fby
when fa/Fa > 0.15,
otherwise
fa fbz fby
+ + ≤ 1.0
Fa Fbz Fby
a a

fa fbz fby
+ + ≤ 1.0
0.60F y Fbz Fby
24B.1.6 .6 Shear Stress

Allowable shear stress on the gross section [ref. NF-3322.6(e)(2)] is calculated as
Fv = (Fy / 2.89)Cv ≤ 0.4Fy
Where:
45, 000k
Cv =
F y (h / t ) 2
, when Cv < 0.8
190 k
Cv =
h/t Fy
, when Cv > 0.8
k = 4.00 + 5.34 / (a / h )2 , when a/h < 1.0
k = 5.34 + 4.00 / (a / h )2 , when a/h > 1.0

Prismatic member.
Manual.

and code checks. These parameter names, with their default values, are listed in the following table.
the input instruction (Section 5). Similarly, the TRACK value of a member is set to 0.0, which

Table 24B.1-ASME NF 3000 Design Parameters

Name
CODE - Must be specified as NF3000 1989.

Reference Manual.

principle that maximum deflection occurs
within the span between DJ1 and DJ2.

principle that maximum deflection is of
the cantilever type
CB 1.0 Bending coefficient dependent upon

moment gradient
CT 0.75 Reduction Coefficient in computing

effective net area of an axially loaded
tension member. [Refer NF-3322.8(c)(1)
(d)]

and calculated for
CMZ
no sidesway

deflection check)


member calculation of "Deflection Length"


Name
DMAX 45 inch Maximum allowable depth, in current

units. Used only with the MEMBER
SELECTION command.
DMIN 0.0 inch Minimum allowable depth, in current

units. Used only with the MEMBER
SELECTION command.
FYLD 36 KSI Yield strength of steel at temperature in

current units.
FU 60 KSI Ultimate tensile strength of steel in

current units.
KBK 1.0 Stress Limit Factor applicable to the

Design Allowable Compressive Axial and
Bending stresses to determine the
Buckling Limit.
KS 1.0 Stress Limit Factor applicable to the

Design Allowable Tensile and Bending
Stresses.
KV 1.0 Stress Limit Factor applicable to the

Design Allowable Shear Stresses.

minor axis.

major axis.
LY Member Length Length to calculate slenderness ratio for

buckling about local Y axis.
LZ Member Length Same as above except in z-axis (major).


Name
PROFILE None Used in member selection. See Section

5.48.1 of the Technical Reference Manual
for details.

allowable stresses.
SRL A Service level, which defines the service

level factors to use for modifying stress
values for the service level conditions.
B. Upset
C. Emergency
issued that these must be user-
defined.
See "Service Levels" on page 897 for

additional information.
STIFF Member length or Spacing of stiffeners for plate girder

depth whichever is design
greater

member
300 for "Truss"

member
TRACK 0.0 Controls the levels of detail to which

0 = Minimum detail
2 = Maximum detail


Name
UNB Member Length Unsupported length of the bottom*

flange for calculating allowable bending
compressive stress. Will be used only if
flexural compression on the bottom
flange.
UNT Member Length Unsupported length of the top* flange for

calculating allowable bending compressive

Both code checking and member selection options are available with the ASME NF-3000 1989 code.
Checking command.
24B.5 Example
A cantilever beam of length 100 inch is loaded at its free end with 5 kip compressive load and a
uniformly distributed load of 1 kip/inch over the whole span. The beam is assigned with B571806
steel member and is designed in accordance with ASME NF3000 1989.

STAAD SPACE
END JOB INFORMATION
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 360 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 29000
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2e-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
1 TABLE ST B571806
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL

24B.5 Example
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
LOAD 1
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -5
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -1.0 0 100
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER 1
CODE NF3000 1989
STYPE 1 ALL
FYLD 36 ALL
KY 0.75 ALL
KZ 0.75 ALL
FU 58 ALL
NSF 0.9 ALL
CB 0 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH

********************************************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
1 ST B571806 (AISC SECTIONS)
PASS SHEAR Y 0.770 1
5.00 C 0.00 5000.00 0.00
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SHEAR: 5.18E+00 |
| AXIAL: 1.06E-01 FBZ: 5.86E+00 FBY: 0.00E+00 SHEAR: 3.99E+00 |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SZZ: 853.77 SYY: 67.54 |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| CT: 0.75 STEEL TYPE: 1.0 |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| TENSION 0.005 1 5.00E+00 - - - - |
| COMPRESSION 0.009 1 5.00E+00 - - - - |
| COMP&BEND 0.290 1 5.00E+00 - - 5.00E+03 0.00E+00 |
| TEN&BEND 0.000 1 5.00E+00 - - 5.00E+03 0.00E+00 |
| SHEAR-Y 0.770 1 - 1.00E+02 - - - |
| SHEAR-Z 0.000 1 - - 0.00E+00 - - |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|

24C.1 Design Process
24C. ASME NF 3000 - 1998 Code

1. Slenderness
2. Tension
3. Compression
4. Bending Stress
6. Shear Stress
checks.
24C.1.1 .1 Slenderness
24C.1.2 .2 Tension
y u
The Net Area (A ) shall be determined in accordance with NF-3322.8(c)(1) - (a), (b) and (c), and
n
the NSF parameter can be utilized for that.
e
A =C *A
e t n
(3).

24C.1.3 .3 Compression
a. Gross Sections of Columns, except those fabricated of austenitic stainless steel:
 ( KL / r) 
2
1 âˆ’ 
 2C c 
2

Fa = Fy 3
3( KL / r) ( KL / r)
5/3+ âˆ’
8C c
8C c3
Where:
2
2Ï€ E
Cc =
Fy

2
12Ï€ E
Fa =
23(KL / r ) 2
3. When (Kl/r) > 120,

Eq. (a 2)
Fa Eq. (a1)â€‰or â¢
Fas = l
1.6 âˆ’ ( )
200r
b. Gross sections of columns fabricated from Austenitic Stainless steel:
1. When (Kl/r) â‰¤ 120,
(
Fa = Fy 0.47 âˆ’
KL / r
444 )
2. When (Kl/r) > 120,
(
Fa = Fy 0.40 âˆ’
KL / r
600 )
c. Member elements other than columns:
sub-sections of NF-3322.2(d).


s
of Q for different shapes are given in NF-3322.2(e)(2)(a) to NF-3322.2(e)(2)(d).
s
In the case for angles or plates projecting from compression members and for projecting
elements of compression flanges of girder,
When
âˆ’ â€‰0.00309 b / t
95 / Fy / kc < b / t < 195 / Fy / kc Q s = 1.293 â¢
, ( ) Fy / kc
b / t > 195 / Fy / kc
When ,
26, 200kc
Qs =
F y (b / t ) 2
Where:
4.05
kc =
(h / t ) 0.46 when h/t > 70, otherwise, kc = 1.0.
e
253t   50.3 
be = 1 âˆ’  â‰¤ b
f   (b / t ) f 
 
253t   44.3 
be = 1 âˆ’  â‰¤ b
f   (b / t ) f 
 
a
introduced.
 ( KL / r) 
2
Q sQ a 1 âˆ’ 
 2C â€² c 
2

Fa = Fy 3
3( KL / r) ( KL / r)
5/3+ âˆ’
8C â€²c 3
8C â€² c
Where:
2
2Ï€ E
C â€² c =
Q sQ aF y
24C.1.4 .4 Bending Stress

(d) is:

1. For Compact Sections, tension and compression on extreme fibres of compact hot rolled or
F = 0.66*F
b y
a. Width-thickness ratio of unstiffened projecting elements of the compression flange shall not
exceed 65/âˆšF .
y
190/âˆšF .
y
d/t = (640/âˆšF )[1 â€“ 3.74(f /F )] when f /F <=0.16

y a y a y
d/t = 257/âˆšF when f /F > 0.16
y a y
shaped members shall not exceed the value of 76b /âˆšF nor 20000/(d/A )F .
f y f y
2. For noncompact and slender elements, NF-3322.1(d)(5) and NF-3322.1(d)(3) are followed
respectively.
F = 0.60*F
b y
1. For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements of NF-3322.1(d)(1)(a)

and (b), maximum tensile and compressive bending stress shall not exceed:
F = 0.75*F
b y
2. For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements of NF-3322.1(d)(1)(a),
except where b /2t exceeds 65/âˆšF but is less than 95/âˆšF , maximum tensile and
f f y y
F = F [1.075 â€“ 0.005(b /2t )âˆšF ]

b y f f y
24C.1.5 .5 Combined Interaction Check

fa C mzfbz C myfby
+ + ≤ 1.0
Fa (1 − fa / F ′ ex)Fbx ( )
and

24C.2 Member Property Specification
fa fbz fby
+ + ≤ 1.0
0.60F y Fbz Fby
when fa/Fa > 0.15,
otherwise
fa fbz fby
+ + ≤ 1.0
Fa Fbz Fby
a a
fa fbz fby
+ + ≤ 1.0
0.60F y Fbz Fby
24C.1.6 .6 Shear Stress

Fv = (Fy / 2.89)Cv ≤ 0.4Fy
Where:
45, 000k
Cv =
F y (h / t ) 2
, when Cv < 0.8
190 k
Cv =
h/t Fy
, when Cv > 0.8
k = 4.00 + 5.34 / (a / h )2 , when a/h < 1.0
k = 5.34 + 4.00 / (a / h )2 , when a/h > 1.0
24C.2 Member Property Specification

Prismatic member.
Manual.


the input instruction (Section 5). Similarly, the TRACK value of a member is set to 0.0, which
Table 24C.1-ASME NF 3000 1998 Design Parameters

Name
CODE - Must be specified as NF3000 1998.

Reference Manual.

deflection occurs within the span

deflection is of the cantilever type
CB 1.0 Bending coefficient dependent

upon moment gradient
Any other user-defined value is

accepted.


Name
CMY 0.85 for sidesway and Cm value in local y & z axes

calculated for no
CMZ
sidesway
CT 0.75 Reduction Coefficient in

computing effective net area of an
axially loaded tension member.
[Refer NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)]
DFF None "Deflection Length" / Maximum

deflection check)
DJ1 Start Joint Joint No. denoting starting point

of member for calculation of "Deflection
Length"
DJ2 End Joint of member Joint No. denoting end point for
calculation of "Deflection Length"
DMAX 45 inch Maximum allowable depth, in

current units. Used only with the
MEMBER SELECTION command.
DMIN 0.0 inch Minimum allowable depth, in

current units. Used only with the
MEMBER SELECTION command.
FYLD 36 KSI Yield strength of steel at

temperature in current units.
FU 60 KSI Ultimate tensile strength of steel

in current units.
KBK 1.0 Stress Limit Factor applicable to

the Design Allowable Compressive
Axial and Bending stresses to
determine the Buckling Limit.
Note: Ignored unless SRL is set

to D.


Name
KS 1.0 Stress Limit Factor applicable to

the Design Allowable Tensile and
Bending Stresses.

to D.
KV 1.0 Stress Limit Factor applicable to

the Design Allowable Shear
Stresses.

to D.
KY 1.0 K value in local y-axis. Usually,

this is minor axis.
KZ 1.0 K value in local z-axis. Usually,

this is major axis.
LY Member Length Length to calculate slenderness

ratio for buckling about local Y
axis.
LZ Member Length Same as above except in z-axis

(major).
NSF 1.0 Net Section Factor for tension

member.
PROFILE None Used in member selection. See

Section 5.48.1 of the Technical
Reference Manual for details.

allowable stresses.


Name
SRL A Service level, which defines the

service level factors to use for
modifying stress values for the
service level conditions.
B. Upset
C. Emergency
D. Faulted - If any of KS, KV, or
KBK parameters are not set,
a warning is issued that
these must be user-defined.
See "Service Levels" on page 897

for additional information.
STIFF Member length or Spacing of stiffeners for plate

depth whichever is girder design
greater
TMAIN 240 for main member Slenderness limit under tension
300 for “Truss”

member
TRACK 0.0 Controls the levels of detail to

which results are reported.
0 = Minimum detail
2 = Maximum detail
UNB Member Length Unsupported length of the

bottom* flange for calculating
allowable bending compressive
compression on the bottom flange.

24C.4 Code Checking and Member Selection

Name
UNT Member Length Unsupported length of the top*

flange for calculating allowable
bending compressive stress. Will
be used only if flexural
Notes
1. All values are entered in the current units.
2. The parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used with the MEMBER SELECTION command.
24C.4 Code Checking and Member Selection

Checking command.
24C.5 Example

STAAD SPACE
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT INCHES KIP
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 100 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 29000
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2e-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
1 TABLE ST B571806
CONSTANTS

24C.5 Example
MATERIAL STEEL ALL

SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
LOAD 1
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -5
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -1.0 0 100
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER 1
CODE NF3000 1998
STYPE 1 ALL
FYLD 36 ALL
KY 0.75 ALL
KZ 0.75 ALL
FU 58 ALL
NSF 0.9 ALL
CT 0.85 ALL
CB 0 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH

********************************************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
PASS SHEAR Y 0.635 1
5.00 C 0.00 5000.00 0.00
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SHEAR: 6.28E+00 |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SZZ: 853.77 SYY: 67.54 |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| CT: 0.85 STEEL TYPE: 1.0 |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| TENSION 0.005 1 5.00E+00 - - - - |
| COMPRESSION 0.009 1 5.00E+00 - - - - |
| COMP&BEND 0.272 1 5.00E+00 - - 5.00E+03 0.00E+00 |
| TEN&BEND 0.000 1 5.00E+00 - - 5.00E+03 0.00E+00 |
| SHEAR-Y 0.635 1 - 1.00E+02 - - - |
| SHEAR-Z 0.000 1 - - 0.00E+00 - - |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|

24D.1 Design Process
24D. ASME NF 3000 - 2001 & 2004 Codes

STAAD.Pro is capable of performing steel design based on the American Society of Mechanical
Engineers Nuclear Facility Code, ASME NF 3000 - 2004.
Note: Use of 2004 edition requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 2) NRC (build 20.07.07.30) or
higher. Use of 2001 edition requires STAAD.Pro V8i (SELECTseries 3) NRC (build 20.07.08.22) or
higher.
Design of members per ASME NF 3000 - 2001 & 2004 requires the STAAD Nuclear Design Codes
SELECT Code Pack.

1. Slenderness
2. Tension
3. Compression
4. Bending Stress
6. Shear Stress
Each one of the checks is described in the following sections.
checks.
24D.1.1 Slenderness
24D.1.2 Tension
Allowable tensile stress on the Net section is calculated as (0.60·F ), but not more than (0.5·F ) on
y u
The Net Area (A ) shall be determined in accordance with NF-3322.8(c)(1) - (a), (b) and (c), and the
n
NSF parameter can be utilized for that.

e
A e = Ct · A n
(3).
24D.1.3 Compression
A. Gross Sections of Columns, except those fabricated of austenitic stainless steel:
1. On gross section of axially loaded compression members, when (Kl/r) ≤ Cc,
Fa = [1 - (Kl/r)2 /(2·Cc2 )]Fy / {5/3 + [3(Kl/r)/(8·Cc)] - [(Kl/r)3 /(8·Cc3 )]}
(Eq. A1)
Where:
Cc = [(2·π2 E)/Fy ]1/2
Fa = 12·π2 E/[23(kL/r)2 ]
(Eq. A2)
3. When (Kl/r) > 120,
Fas = Fa[(Eq.A1) or (Eq. A2)]/{1.6 - [l/(200r)]}
B. Gross sections of columns fabricated from Austenitic Stainless steel:
1. When (Kl/r) ≤ 120,
Fa = Fy [0.47 - (Kl/r)/444]
2. When (Kl/r) > 120,
Fa = Fy [0.40 - (Kl/r)/600]
C. Member elements other than columns:

1. For Plate Girder Stiffeners,
Fa = 0.60·Fy
2. For webs of rolled shapes,
Fa = 0.75·Fy
The above clauses are applicable only when the width-thickness ratio of the element satisfies
all the sub-sections of NF-3322.2(d)..
a. For un-stiffened compression element,
A reduction factor Q is introduced. Detailed values of Q for different shapes are given in
s s
NF-3322.2(e)(2)(a) to NF-3322.2(e)(2)(d).
In the case for angles or plates projecting from compression members and for projecting
elements of compression flanges of girder,
When 95/(Fy /kc)1/2 < b/t < 195/(Fy /kc)1/2 , Qs = 1.293 - 0.00309·(b/t)·(Fy /kc)1/2
When b/t > 195/(Fy /kc)1/2 , Qs = 26,200·kc/[Fy (b/t)2 )]
Where:
kc = 4.05/[(h/t)0.46 ] if h/t > 70, otherwise kc = 1.0.
b. For stiffened compression element,
A reduced effective width b is introduced.

e
be = 253·t/√(f){1 - 50.3/[(b/t)√(f)]} ≤ b
be = 253·t/√(f){1 - 44.3/[(b/t)√(f)]} ≤ b
Consequently, a reduction factor Q is introduced and is equal to the effective area divided
a
by the actual area. Combining both these factors, allowable stress for axially loaded
compression members containing stiffened or unstiffened elements shall not exceed
Fa = QsQa[1 - (Kl/r)2 /(2·Cc2 )]Fy / {5/3 + [3(Kl/r)/(8·Cc)] - [(Kl/r)3 /(8·Cc3 )]}
Where:
C'c = [(2·π2 E)/(QsQaFy )]1/2
24D.1.4 Bending Stress

(d) is:

A. Along Major Axis:
1. For Compact Sections, tension and compression on extreme fibres of compact hot
rolled or built-up members symmetrical about and loaded in the plane of their minor
axes and meeting the requirements of Subsection NF shall result in a maximum
bending stress:
Fb = 0.66·Fy
a. Width-thickness ratio of unstiffened projecting elements of the compression

flange shall not exceed 65/√Fy .
b. Width-thickness ratio of stiffened elements of the compression flange shall not

exceed 190/√Fy .
d/t = (640/√Fy )[1 – 3.74(fa/Fy )] when fa/Fy ≤ 0.16
d/t = 257/√Fy when fa/Fy > 0.16
d. The laterally unsupported length of the compression flange of members other

than box-shaped members shall not exceed the value of 76bf/√Fy nor 20000/
(d/Af)Fy .
2. For noncompact and slender elements, NF-3322.1(d)(5) and NF-3322.1(d)(3) are

followed respectively.
Fb = 0.75·Fy
B. Along Minor Axis:
1. For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements of NF-3322.1

(d)(1)(a) and (b), maximum tensile and compressive bending stress shall not exceed:
Fb = 0.75·Fy
2. For doubly symmetrical members (I shaped) meeting the requirements of NF-3322.1

(d)(1)(a), except where bf/2tf > 65/√Fy but is less than 95/√Fy , maximum tensile and
Fb = Fy [1.075 – 0.005(bf/2tf)√Fy ]
24D.1.5 Combined Interaction Check

fa C mzfbz C myfby
+ + ≤ 1.0
Fa (1 − fa / F ′ ex)Fbx ( )
and

24D.2 Member Property Specification
fa fbz fby
+ + ≤ 1.0
0.60F y Fbz Fby
when fa/Fa > 0.15,
otherwise
fa fbz fby
+ + ≤ 1.0
Fa Fbz Fby
a a
fa fbz fby
+ + ≤ 1.0
0.60F y Fbz Fby
24D.1.6 Shear Stress

Fv = (Fy / 2.89)Cv ≤ 0.4Fy
Where:
45, 000k
Cv =
F y (h / t ) 2
, when Cv < 0.8
190 k
Cv =
h/t Fy
, when Cv > 0.8
k = 4.00 + 5.34 / (a / h )2 , when a/h < 1.0
k = 5.34 + 4.00 / (a / h )2 , when a/h > 1.0
24D.2 Member Property Specification

Prismatic member.
Manual.


the input instruction (Section 5). Similarly, the TRACK value of a member is set to 0.0, which means
no allowable stresses of the member will be printed. If the allowable stresses are to be printed, the
TRACK value must be set to 1.0.
Table 24D.1-ASME NF 3000 2001 & 2004 Design Parameters

Name Value
CODE - Must be specified as NF3000 2001 or NF3000

2004
Specified design code is followed for code

checking purpose.

Manual.
0 = Deflection check based on the principle that

maximum deflection occurs within the span
1 = Deflection check based on the principle that

maximum deflection is of the cantilever type

gradient


Name Value

sidesway and
CMZ
calculated
for no
sidesway
CT 0.75 Reduction Coefficient in computing effective

net area of an axially loaded tension member.
[Refer NF-3322.8(c)(1)(d)]
DFF None "Deflection Length" / Maximum allowable local

deflection
(Mandatory
for deflection
check)
DJ1 Start Joint of Joint No. denoting starting point for calculation
the member of "Deflection Length"
DJ2 End Joint of Joint No. denoting end point for calculation of
the member "Deflection Length"
FYLD 36 KSI Yield strength of steel at temperature in current

units.
FU 60 KSI Ultimate tensile strength of steel in current

units.
KBK 1.0 Stress Limit Factor applicable to the Design

Allowable Compressive Axial and Bending
stresses to determine the Buckling Limit.
KS 1.0 Stress Limit Factor applicable to the Design

Allowable Tensile and Bending Stresses.
KV 1.0 Stress Limit Factor applicable to the Design

Allowable Shear Stresses.


Name Value
KY 1.0 K value in local y-axis. Usually, this is minor

axis.
KZ 1.0 K value in local z-axis. Usually, this is major axis.


Length
PROFILE None Used in member selection. See Section 5.48.1 of

the Technical Reference Manual for details.

stresses.
SRL A Service level, which defines the service level

factors to use for modifying stress values for the
service level conditions.
B. Upset
C. Emergency
issued that these must be user-defined.
See "Service Levels" on page 897 for additional

information.

length or
depth
whichever is
greater

24D.4 Code Checking and Member Selection

Name Value

member
300 for
"Truss"
member
TRACK 0.0 Controls the levels of detail to which results are

reported.
0. Minimum detail
2. Maximum detail

on the bottom flange.

on the top flange.
Notes
1. All values are entered in the current units.
2. The parameters DMAX and DMIN are only used with the MEMBER SELECTION command.
24D.4 Code Checking and Member Selection

Checking command.
24D.5 Example of 2004 Code



STAAD SPACE
END JOB INFORMATION
UNIT INCHES KIP
JOINT COORDINATES
1 0 0 0; 2 100 0 0;
MEMBER INCIDENCES
1 1 2;
ISOTROPIC STEEL
E 29000
POISSON 0.3
DENSITY 76.8195
ALPHA 1.2e-005
DAMP 0.03
END DEFINE MATERIAL
1 TABLE ST B571806
CONSTANTS
MATERIAL STEEL ALL
SUPPORTS
1 FIXED
LOAD 1
JOINT LOAD
2 FX -5
MEMBER LOAD
1 UNI GY -1.0 0 100
PERFORM ANALYSIS
PARAMETER 1
CODE NF3000 2004
STYPE 1 ALL
FYLD 36 ALL
KY 0.75 ALL
KZ 0.75 ALL
FU 58 ALL
NSF 0.9 ALL
CT 0.85 ALL
CB 0 ALL
TRACK 2 ALL
CHECK CODE ALL
FINISH

********************************************
FX MY MZ LOCATION
=======================================================================
PASS NF-3322.1(b) 0.635 1
5.00 C 0.00 5000.00 0.00
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SHEAR: 6.28E+00 |

|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| SZZ: 853.77 SYY: 67.54 |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| CT: 0.85 STEEL TYPE: 1.0 |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| TENSION 0.005 1 5.00E+00 - - - - |
| COMPRESSION 0.009 1 5.00E+00 - - - - |
| COMP&BEND 0.272 1 5.00E+00 - - 5.00E+03 0.00E+00 |
| TEN&BEND 0.000 1 5.00E+00 - - 5.00E+03 0.00E+00 |
| SHEAR-Y 0.635 1 - 1.00E+02 - - - |
| SHEAR-Z 0.000 1 - - 0.00E+00 - - |
|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------|

24E.1 Service Levels
Service Level Conditions are basically the loading conditions for which the plant structure and its
components are to be designed. The same primary load can be multiplied by different factors to
signify the different service levels. Also the load combinations for various service levels are different
and pre-defined by the code.
24E.1 Service Levels

The following is a short overview of each of the service levels specified by the code:
Condition Description
A. Normal
Working
B. Upset This situation can be termed as a short term failure or a local

failure, and the repairing or modification of the structure can
be done without shutting the entire plant.
C. This situation can be termed as a major failure, and the

Emergency repairing of the structure can be done only after shutting down
the entire plant.
D. Faulted This situation can be termed as devastation, and the main

objective of this level is to have sufficient time for safe
relocation of human life and valuable properties, and to initiate
the controlled failure of the plant structure. The plant is already
at an unusable state and a rare chance to repair it back into the
operation.
These Service Levels are the attribute of the whole structure or the structural system. So, the
existence of different Service Levels to the different parts of the structure at the same point of time
is totally ruled out.
The Service Level Factors are basically few multiplying factor by which the Allowable Stress values
are to be multiplied based on the Service Level. The different actions (e.g. Tension, Compression,
Bending, Shear etc.) have different Service Level Factors.
However, this is to be noted, the stipulated multiplying factors for creating load combinations for
Service Level B, C, and D are to be user defined in this case. The facility of creating Auto Load
Combination for different Service Levels is out of the scope of this implementation. The user has to
take care of this.
24E.2 Stress Level Factors

For the Member Design, as per Clause NF-3321.1, the Allowable Stresses may be increased by the
Factors as per Table NF-3523(b)-1 and NF-3623(b)-1. Table NF-3523(b)-1 is applicable to Component
Support Structures and Table NF-3623(b)-1 is applicable to Piping Support Structures. However, as

24E.2 Stress Level Factors
the values are the same for the service level factors in each table, STAAD.Pro does not make any
differentiation between component and piping supports.
Note: Clause NF-3321.1 also indicates that the allowable stress shall be limited to two-thirds (2/3x)
the critical buckling stress. However, the critical buckling stress is not clearly defined so it is left
to the user to ensure that this code requirement is met.
The values used for the stress level factors in STAAD.Pro are as follows:
Service Level Ks Kv Kbk
A 1.0 1.0 1.0
B 1.33 1.33 1.33
C 1.50 1.50 1.50
D* KS KV KBK
* It is evident from the Table NF-3523(b)-1, that there are no predefined Stress Limit Factors for
Service Level D. So, for Service Level D, the Factors Ks, Kv and Kbk are to be user defined. Refer to
Appendix F in the code for guidance on values to specify in the design parameters.
where
Ks
Stress Limit Factor applicable to the Design Allowable Tensile and Bending Stresses.
Kv
Stress Limit Factor applicable to the Design Allowable Shear Stresses
Kbk
Stress Limit Factor applicable to the Design Allowable Compressive Axial and Bending
stresses to determine the Buckling Limit.
The program uses the service level factors—either those specified for levels A through C or the user
defined values in level D—as follows:
l The Allowable Axial Tensile Stress is to be multiplied by Ks

l The Allowable Axial Compressive Stress is to be multiplied by Kbk
l The Allowable Bending Stress is to be multiplied by Ks
l The Allowable Shear Stress is to be multiplied by Kv
l As per NF-3322.1.(e), for checking Combined Stresses as per equation 20, the value of F’ey and
F’ez – the Euler Stress divided by the factor of safety, may also be multiplied by the
appropriate Stress Limit Factor. This is also implemented. F’e is to be multiplied by Kbk

Technical Support
Technical Support
These resources are provided to help you answer support questions:
l Service Ticket Manager — http://www.bentley.com/serviceticketmanager — Create and

track a service ticket using Bentley Systems' online site for reporting problems or suggesting
new features. You do not need to be a Bentley SELECT member to use Service Ticket
Manager, however you do need to register as a user.
l Knowledge Base — http://appsnet.bentley.com/kbase/ — Search the Bentley Systems
knowledge base for solutions for common problems.
l FAQs and TechNotes —
http://communities.bentley.com/Products/Structural/Structural_Analysis___
Design/w/Structural_Analysis_and_Design__Wiki/structural-product-technotes-and-
faqs.aspx — Here you can find detailed resolutions and answers to the most common
questions posted to us by you.
l Ask Your Peers — http://communities.bentley.com/forums/5932/ShowForum.aspx —
Post questions in the Be Community forums to receive help and advice from fellow users.

Technical Support

Index B
BFS NE 1993-1-1 284

A British
AIJ 1991 See Concrete Design, AIJ 1991 Codes 45
AIJ 2002 See Steel Design, AIJ 2002 National Annex See National
Annex, British
AIJ 2005 See Steel Design, AIJ 2005
British Codes 63
AISC 75
BS 5950-5 See Steel Design, BS 5950-5
Alclad 779
BS EN 1993-1-1 283
Aluminum Design 777
BS4360 74
American Transmission Tower
Code 795 BS5400 See Steel Design, BS5400
Analysis BS5950 See Steel Design, BS5950
PDelta 12 BS8110 See Concrete Design, BS8110
ANSI/AISC N690 Codes 817
C
AS 1170 19
CAN/CSA-086-01 See Wood Design,
AS 3600 - 2001 See Concrete Design,
CAN/CSA-086-01
AS 3600
Canadian Codes 113
AS 4100 - 1998 See Steel Design, AS
4100 Canadian Wood Design Manual 172
ASCE 10-97 See Steel Design, ASCE 10- Cold Formed Steel

97
IS801 501
ASCE Manuals 795
Concrete Design
ASME NF Codes 851
AIJ 1991 535
Australian Codes 7
AS 3600 9
Axial Compression 790
B4 383
Axial Tension 790
BBK 94 771
Clause 3.13 790
BS8007 93
Axially Loaded Members 226, 243-244,
BS8110 47, 50
246
CP65 727
Design 226, 243-244, 246
CSA A23.3 115
Cyprus 197

Index: CSA – Modulus of Elasticity
DIN 1045 411 European Codes 215, 217, 241, 243-244,

246, 258
EHE 763
Extrusions 781
Eurocode EC2 217
IS13920 449 F
IS456 429 Finnish
NS 3473 677 National Annex See National
NTC 1987 577 Annex, Finnish
SABS-0100-1 735 French
CSA 116, 119 Codes 391
CSA A23.3 See Concrete Design, CSA Concrete Design 393

A23.3 National Annex See National
CSA CAN/CSA-S16-01 See Steel Annex, French
Design, CSA CAN/CSA-S16-01 Steel Design 399
D G
DD ENV 223 GB 1591 74
DD ENV 1993 223, 226
I
Design 226, 243-244, 246, 258
IS 800 2007 See Steel Design, IS 800
Axially Loaded Members 226, 243-
2007
244, 246
IS13920 See Concrete Design, IS13920
Design Rules 399
IS456 See Concrete Design, IS456
Structural Steelwork 399
IS801 See Steel Design, IS801
DIN NE 1993-1-1 284
Dutch
J
National Annex See National
Japanese
Annex, Dutch
Codes 533
E Concrete Design See Concrete
Design, AIJ 1991
EC5 363
Steel Design See Steel Design, AIJ
EN 1993 239
2005
Equivalent slenderness 69
Eurocode 223, 226, 241-244, 246, 258 M
Steel Design 226, 242-244, 246, 258 Modulus of Elasticity 24
902 — STAAD.Pro
moments
P
Wood & Armer 53
PN EN 1993-1-1 284
MS NE 1993-1-1 284
Polish
N National Annex See National

Annex, Polish
N690 Codes 817
National Annex 240, 272 S

Belgian 284 S136-94 See Steel Design, S136-94
British 283 SAB0162-1 1993 See Steel Design,
Dutch 284 SAB0162-1 1993
Finnish 284 SABS-0100-1 See Concrete Design,

SABS-0100-1
French 284
SFS EN 1993-1-1 284
German 284
SNiP 2.23-81 See Steel Design, SNiP
Malaysian 284 2.23-81
Norwegian 284 SS EN 1993-1-1 284
output 280 Star Angle 519
Polish 284 Steel Design 226, 242-244, 246, 258, 795
Singaporean 284 AIJ 2002 557
Swedish 284 AIJ 2005 543
National Application Documents 217, ANSI/AISC N690-1994 819
224
AS 4100 17
NBN EN 1993-1-1 284
ASCE 10-97 789
NEN-EN 1993 284
B7 387
NF EN 1993-1-1 284
BS 5950-5 97
Norwegian
BS5400 89
Annex, Norwegian BS5950 63
NS-EN 1993 284 BSK 99 769
NTC 1987 See Concrete Design, NTC CSA CAN/CSA-S16-01 121

1987 CSA CAN/CSA-S16-09 179
DIN 18800 417
DS412 205

Index: Steel Design per IS 800 – Young's Modulus
Eurocode 223, 226, 241-244, 246, 258

V
French Code 399
Verification Problem
IS 800 2007 509
AIJ 2005 552
IS 802 487
ASME NF 3000 1974 861
IS801 501
ASME NF 3000 1989 871
NBE-MV103-1972 761
ASME NF 3000 1998 882
NEN 6770 211
ASME NF 3000 2004 893
NORSOK N-004 655
British Cold Formed Steel 107
NS 3472 / NPD 601
CSA 138, 141, 143, 146
NTC 1987 589
CSA Wood 172
S136-94 155
EC5 373, 376
SAB0162-1 1993 741
SAB0162-1 753-754, 756
SNiP 2.23-81 709
Steel Design per IS 800 469 W

Steel Section Library Weld Type 75
British 64 Wood & Armer equations 53
Japanese 558 Wood and Armer Moments 49, 95,
201, 731
Structural Steelwork 399
Wood Design
Design Rules 399
CAN/CSA-086-01 163
Swedish Codes 767
Y
T
Young's Modulus See Modulus of
Timber Design
Elasticity
EC5 363
UK

Annex, British
904 — STAAD.Pro
Bentley Systems, Incorporated
685 Stockton Drive, Exton, PA 19341 USA
+1 (800) 236-8539
www.bentley.com

International Codes V8i PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

International Codes V8i PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

STAAD.

International Design Codes Manual

Restricted Rights Legends

End User License Agreements

International Design Codes Manual — i

Technical Reference Manual 3

International Design Codes 3

Batch Design versus Design Modes 5

1A.1 Section Types for Concrete Design 9

1A.2 Member Dimensions 9

1A.3 Design Parameters 9

1A.4 Slenderness Effects and Analysis Consideration 12

1A.5 Beam Design 13

1A.6 Column Design 14

1A.7 Slab or Wall Design 14

1B. Australian Codes - Steel Design per AS 4100 - 1998 17

1B.2 Analysis Methodology 19

1B.3 Member Property Specifications 20

1B.4 Built-in Steel Section Library 20

1B.5 Section Classification 23

1B.6 Material Properties 24

1B.7 Member Resistances 24

1B.8 Design Parameters 27

International Design Codes Manual — iii

1B.10 Member Selection 35

1B.11 Tabulated Results of Steel Design 36

1B.12 Physical Member Design 36

2A.1 Design Parameters 47

2A.2 Slenderness Effects and Analysis Considerations 50

2A.3 Member Dimensions 50

2A.4 Beam Design 50

2A.5 Column Design 52

2A.6 Slab Design 53

2A.7 Shear Wall Design 54

2B. British Codes - Steel Design per BS5950:2000 63

2B.2 Analysis Methodology 64

2B.3 Member Property Specifications 64

2B.4 Built-In Steel Section Library 64

2B.5 Member Capacities 67

2B.6 Design Parameters 70

2B.7 Design Operations 81

2B.8 Code Checking 81

2B.9 Member Selection 81

2B.10 Tabulated Results of Steel Design 82

2B.11 Plate Girders 84

2B.12 Composite Sections 85

2B.13 Design of Tapered Beams 85

2C. British Codes - Design per BS5400 89

2C.1 General Comments 89

2C.2 Shape Limitations 89

2C.4 Moment Capacity 89

2C.5 Shear Capacity 90

2C.6 Design Parameters 90

2C.7 Composite Sections 92

2D. British Codes - Design per BS8007 93

2D.1 Design Process 93

2D.2 Design Parameters 94

2D.3 Structural Model 95

2D.4 Wood & Armer Moments 95

2E.1 Cross-Sectional Properties 97

2E.2 Design Procedure 97

2E.3 Design Equations 98

2E.4 Design Parameters 102